Westfalia OSE HFO DO

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
Loose Separator
EDITION / AUSGABE - 11.04.2018
CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Santierul Naval Constanta

WS-ORDER NO. / WS-BESTELL 1452846667
NR.:
PROJECT / PROJEKT: H 589
MODEL / MODELL: 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18 for HFO-DO
REVISION / REVISION: 00
engineering for a better world www.gea.com

1452846667 / 00 / 11.04.2018
Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

diese Dokumentation betreffend. Sie können gesandt werden an
The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

improving the documentation. They can be sent to
© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@gea.com, www.gea.com

1452846667 / 00 / 11.04.2018
CONTENTS / INHALT
COVER SHEET
DECKBLATT
1 SAFETY
SICHERHEIT
1.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATIONS 7
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUER ANLAGEN
1.2 QUALIFICATION PERSONNEL 23
QUALIFIKATION PERSONAL.
1.3 SAFETY 31
SICHERHEIT
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SYSTEMBESCHREIBUNG
2.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 61
INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN
3 DOCUMENTS RELATING TO ORDERS
PROJEKTBEZOGENE DOKUMENTE
3.1 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS 163
GRAFIKSYMBOLE
3.2 ORDER INFORMATION SPARE PARTS FOR INSTALLATIONS 177
BESTELLINFO ERSATZTEILE F. ANLAGEN
3.3 EQUIPMENT LIST 183
GERAETELISTE
3.4 DATA SHEET 191
PROZESSDATENBLATT
3.5 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM 193
INSTALLATIONSSCHEMA
4 CONTROL UNIT
STEUER- UND REGELEINRICHTUNG
4.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 195
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
4.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 451
STROMLAUFPLAN
4.3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 571
STROMLAUFPLAN

1452846667 / 00 / 11.04.2018
5 CENTRIFUGE
ZENTRIFUGE
5.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL 693
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
5.2 SEPARATOR 909
SEPARATOR
5.3 PARTS CATALOGUE 915
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
5.4 SEPARATOR 975
SEPARATOR
5.5 PARTS CATALOGUE 981
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
6 PUMP
PUMPE
6.1 GEAR PUMP UNIT, COMPL.
ZAHNRADPUMPENAGGREGAT VOLLST.
KF4-112 1037
7 FILTER
FILTER
7.1 STRAINER, COMPL.
SCHMUTZFAENGER VOLLST.
BR 1107
BR 1117
8 HEAT EXCHANGER
WAERMETAUSCHER
8.1 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
PLATTENWAERMETAUSCHER
OC* 1123
9 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY

VENTILE, ARMATUREN, ZUBEHÖR
9.1 3/2-WAY PISTON-TYPE CONTR.VALVE CPL
3/2-WEGE-KOLBENSTEUERVENTIL VOLLST.
DN25/PN16 1139
9.2 3/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE

3/2-WEGE-MAGNETVENTIL

1452846667 / 00 / 11.04.2018
DIRECT-CONTROLLED 1175
9.3 SHUT OFF FLAP

ABSPERRKLAPPE
IM-10-BFV 1191
WA-WM 1211
RE 1217
9.4 SPRING SAFETY VALVE

FEDERSICHERHEITSVENTIL
67.961 1219
SAFE 1237
9.5 BALL VALVE

KUGELHAHN
IM-10-BV 1283
9.6 SOLENOID VALVE

MAGNETVENTIL
330+331+332 1311
9.7 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST.
5281 1317
10168 1323
TFU006 1325
10168 1331
9.8 NON-RETURN VALVE

RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
RVA 1335
IM-10-NRV 1351
MR 1371
9.9 SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.

SENSORBLOCK VOLLST.
IM-47-SB_2062-8828-000_-010 1377
9.10 CONTROL VALVE

STELLVENTIL
BR440-446 1397

1452846667 / 00 / 11.04.2018
PREMIO-1.6KN 1407
10 MEASUREMENT
MESSTECHNIK
10.1 PRESSURE GAUGE
DRUCKMESSGERAET
RGG-63 1423
R-P-RS-KP 1425
10.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

DRUCKTRANSMITTER
8256NAE 1433
10.3 STEAM TRAP

KONDENSOMAT
FT14B 1439
10.4 PROXIMITY SENSOR

NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
NJ5-11-N-G 1447
10.5 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER
2XPT100 1451
W083 1453
W083 1485
W083 1487
11 ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS
ZUSÄTZLICHE KOMPONENTEN
11.1 TABLE OF LUBRICATING OILS 1489
SCHMIEROELTABELLE
12 MOTOR
MOTOR
12.1 THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
DREHSTROMMOTOR
IM-133-MOT 1499
12.2 GEAR PUMP UNIT, COMPL.

ZAHNRADPUMPENAGGREGAT VOLLST.
PE 1555

Safety precautions
for plants
No.: 9001
Edition: 0712
Designation: Safety precautions
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to
GEA Mechanical Equipment

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com,· www.westfalia-separator.com
GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012 3
For your safety

• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to the plant or plant components.
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the plant components and the
processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the plant. The plant operator must ensure
compliance with these regulations.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.

1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning ......................................................... 5
1.2 Performing work on a plant ...................................................................... 8
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ......................... 8
1.2.2 Spare part requirements .......................................................................... 9
1.2.3 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.2.4 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 10
1.2.5 Start-up .................................................................................................. 11
1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off« ......................................................... 13

1.1 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesives and metal plates) are attached to all plants, on
the hood and frame of the respective plant component in such a way that they
are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the plant, control system and plant components must al-
ways be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the monitoring system as
adhesive labels:
Be sure to adhere to the plant

documentation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the plant must
have read and understood the doc-
umentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Disconnect power prior to start-

ing work!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the plant!
Before carrying out work on the

plant and electrical plant compo-
nents:
• Make sure the plant is at a standstill.
• Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch,
• Lock the installation to prevent it
Fig. 2 from being accidentally switched on.

Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed the admissible
speed (see nameplate)!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 3
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the plant components

can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 4
Danger due to electrical current!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical com-

ponents:
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
Fig. 5 switch is off!
• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national orovisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or EVU
(Europäische Vereinigung für Unfallforschung und Unfallanalyse / European
Association for Accident Research and Analysis) institutions.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).

Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 6

1.2 Performing work on a plant
The plant works reliably, provided that

it is operated and maintained in ac-
cordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 7
Special attention must be given to:

• assembly
• electrical installation
• before start-up
• start-up
• shut-down
• maintenance and repair
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the plant

• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.
1.2.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability and availability,
– increased service requirement.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
spare parts, this may have legal consequences
Fig. 8 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
1.2.3 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 9
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
– Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
– Guidelines of the classification societies.

1.2.4 Before start-up
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 10
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 11
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 12

1.2.5 Start-up
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 13
In case of frequency converter

operation:
• Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible speed
(see nameplate).
• The plant may only be operated with
an independent device for speed
limiting.
Fig. 14
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• Do not operate the equipment in ex-
plosion-hazarded areas.
Note:
This is except for plants equipped for
operation in explosion-hazarded areas.
Fig. 15

• The plant may be fed with inflam-

mable product only when being in-
ert-gas blanketed.
• The oxygen level has to be kept be-
low limit of inflammability by means
of an appropriate inert gas.
Fig. 16
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Wear protective clothing.
Fig. 17
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– components,
– vessels
o
reach temperatures over 80 C
o
(176 F).
Fig. 18

1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off«
• For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation".
Fig. 19

Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Qualification of staff
Edition: 0712
Designation: Qualification of staff
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 0712 / Qualification of staff
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488

0712 / Qualification of staff 3
Qualification of staff
Work on / with separators requires special skills.

• Provide staff with special training / instruction for the following tasks:
– Operation,
– Maintenance,
– Repair.
• Clearly define responsibilities:
– Work performed by authorised persons only.
Type and source of danger:

Storage, transportation, erection, operation and maintenance of the sep-
arator / system by insufficiently trained staff.
Possible consequences of failure to observe:

Danger Incorrect operation, assembly and handling errors can cause serious damage,
injury / death.
Measures to prevent the danger:

– Use Westfalia Separator service.
– Take advantage of training opportunities.
– Read/follow operating manuals / operating instructions.
Westfalia Separator offers a comprehensive range of training measures.
The owner-operator is responsible for the training of staff.
NOTE
Contact Westfalia Separator or your nearest representative for more infor-

mation.
The owner-operator must select staff who, for example, fulfil the following re-
quirements:
• Minimum requirement:
– Read / understand the markings on the separator,
– Read / understand user instructions.
• Further requirements and skills:
– Basic general technical skills.
– Content of the operating manual / operating instruction.
– Measures for the prevention of accidents.
– Planning and implementation of installation.
– Securing of loads.
– Planning and implementation of start-up.
– Operation of the separator / system.
– Cleaning of the separator / system.
– Maintenance of the separator / system.
– Repair of the separator / system.
– Storage in case of extended periods of stoppage.

– Decommissioning of the separator / system.

– Disposal of operating material.
– Disposal of the separator / system.
• Other suitability:
– Only assign tasks to dependable persons.
– Minimum age of 18 years.
• Only employ persons undergoing training / apprenticeship under supervision.
The required skills and knowledge depend on the

tasks assigned.
NOTE
We reserve all rights to these documents. They may only be passed onto third parties after obtaining prior consent from Westfalia Separator Group GmbH.


Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Pos : 1.2 /BA/Standard/00_Titel_R üc ks eite/D ec kblatt_CD _2016_Ins tall ationsric htlini en @ 34\mod_1465543921873_18.doc x @ 1343889 @ @ 1
Safety Precautions and User Information

Machine and Skid Components
No.: 9953-9001-010
Version: 19.10.2016
About this document 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
ORIGINAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Contents subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for remarks and sugges-

tions for improving the documentation. These can be sent
to:
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Titelseite ===
2 GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 About this document
1 About this document 5
1.1 Sphere of application ................................................................................. 6

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel..................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation ................................................................. 7
1.4 Symbols used ............................................................................................ 7
1.5 Structure of the safety references ............................................................. 7
2 Safety precautions 9
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Foreseeable use ...................................................................................... 10
2.3 Residual risk ............................................................................................ 11
2.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ....................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning .................................................................. 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ........................................................................... 13
2.8.1 Electrical energy ...................................................................................... 13
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances ................................................ 13
3 Description 15
3.1 Description and functional principles ....................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions ................................................................................ 16
4 Transport and storage 17
4.1 Transport ................................................................................................. 18

4.2 Storage .................................................................................................... 18
5 Assembly and installation 19
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation. ............................................... 20

5.2 Assembly ................................................................................................. 20
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection ............................................... 20
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection .............................................. 20
5.3 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 21
5.4 Pneumatic connection ............................................................................. 21
5.5 Ex zone .................................................................................................... 21
6 Repair 23
6.1 Cleaning and care.................................................................................... 24

6.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 24
6.3 Repair ...................................................................................................... 24
GEA Westfalia Separator Group 3

7 Decommissioning 25
7.1 Machine disposal ..................................................................................... 26
8 Spare parts 27
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ................................................................. 28

Pos : 3 /BA/Standar d/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/01_Z u_di es em_D okument @ 0\mod_1315832097673_18.doc x @ 409 @ 1 @ 1

1 About this document

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel..................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation ................................................................. 7
1.4 Symbols used ............................................................................................ 7

Pos : 4 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Geltungs ber eich_Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e @ 38\mod_1472029688939_18.doc x @ 1383566 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Sphere of application

These Safety precautions and User Information are an important aid to
• avoid risks,
• reduce repair costs and downtimes and
• prolong the lifecycle of components.
The term “component” will be used in singular although this document is applicable
to all components incorporated in the separators/plants.
To assure reliable information of the component, the safety precautions and user
information must be read and understood before carrying out the following work:
• Installation
• Transport, storage
• maintenance work (cleaning and care, maintenance, servicing, repair) and
• Disposal
For questions that cannot be solved with the aid of this documentation, please
check back with GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
Pos : 5 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Qualifi kation_des_Personals @ 38\mod_1472030224751_18.doc x @ 1383601 @ 233 @ 1
1.2 Qualification of the personnel

Using these safety and user instructions and direct handling of the component re-
quire specialist qualification of the staff. For identifying the qualification level GEA
Westfalia Separator Group uses the following standard terms:
1.2.1 Operating personnel

• Qualified staff have the necessary technical know-how and extensive experi-
ence enabling them to avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or
mechanical components. Knowledge of English is required.
• Trained staff are instructed or supervised by qualified staff to enable them to
avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or mechanical compo-
nents.
When installing, operating and testing the equipment, the staff has to adhere to the
safety rules applicable in the respective industry.
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel

Service and repair work require specialist knowledge and skills. Such work may be
carried out only by competent persons in terms of specialist knowledge and skills.
Documents in English are provided for this circle of persons. It is essential that this
circle of persons has an adequate command of English.
Pos : 6 /---Neue Seite--- @ 0\mod_1317283043850_0.doc x @ 550 @ @ 1

Pos : 7 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Struktur _der_D okumentati on @ 38\mod_1472030598771_18.doc x @ 1383638 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Structure of the documentation
WARNING Risk due to non-observance of the documentation
There is a threat of serious injuries if the instructions in all documents are not fol-
lowed.
 Refer to the instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down
instructions for skids.
 Pay attention to the safety precautions and user instructions in machine and skid
documentation.
 Refer to the component manual.
 All safety precautions and warning instructions given in the documents have to
be adhered to.
 Access to the documentation must always be assured at the deployment site.
The documentation for components normally consists of:

• Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instructions for
skids.
• Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation (this docu-
ment).
• Reference to component manual and / or technical datasheet of the component.
Pos : 8 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Ver wendete_Symbole @ 38\mod_1472032765550_18.doc x @ 1383675 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Symbols used
This symbol gives information for better understanding the compo-

nent and its functions.
 The direction arrow marks work and/or operating steps. Keep to the order shown
from top to bottom.
• The bullet point marks lists.
Pos : 9 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Sig nal wörter /Signal wörter_für _War nhi nweise @ 8\mod_1385644090593_18.doc x @ 475171 @ 2444 @ 1
1.5 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
Signal words and their meaning
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.

NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals
This is the danger signal. It warns of injury risks.

 Comply with all measures marked with the danger signal to avoid injury or
death.
Structuring of the safety references according to the 5-point rule

1. Danger signals as a warning of injury risks.
2. Signal words signal the degree of risk.
3. The type and source of the hazard indicate from where the hazard origi-
nates.
4. Explanation of the hazard and consequences in the case of non-
compliance describe the threat and the consequences of human error.
5. Measures give instructions to avoid the hazard.
DANGER Type and source of the hazard
Explanation of the hazard and the consequences in the event of non-compliance.

 Measures to avert or minimise the hazard.
WARNING Type and source of the hazard

CAUTION Type and source of the hazard

NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Pos : 11 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/02_Sicherheits hinweis e @ 0\mod_1315831900616_18.doc x @ 402 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Safety precautions
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Foreseeable use ...................................................................................... 10
2.3 Residual risk ............................................................................................ 11
2.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ....................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning .................................................................. 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ........................................................................... 13
2.8.1 Electrical energy ...................................................................................... 13
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances ................................................ 13

Safety precautions 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 12 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Allgemeines _Sic herheit @ 38\mod_1472109455088_18.doc x @ 1384479 @ @ 1
The machine or skid components have been designed state-of-the-art and in ac-
cordance with the recognised safety regulations. However, when using the compo-
nent, risks may arise for the user or third party or the component or other assets
might get impaired if it is
• operated by persons who have not been trained or briefed,
• not used for the intended application,
• not correctly repaired or maintained.
Pos : 13 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Besti mmungsgemäß e_Verwendung @ 38\mod_1472033909992_18.doc x @ 1383710 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Intended use
The component is incorporated in machines and plants.

Precise details on the function of the component are found in the component man-
ufacturer’s manual.
The type of medium specified in the data sheet as well as the limit values for pres-
sure and temperature of the medium as per the specification must be complied
with at all times (see data sheet of the component manufacturer).
The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have to
be observed and adhered to.
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or data sheet of the manufacturer.
Pos : 14 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Vorhersehbar e_Fehlanwendung @ 38\mod_1472036879825_18.doc x @ 1383745 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Foreseeable use

A different usage or a usage which goes beyond the scope is not in compliance
with the intended use. The operator of the machine/skid is exclusively liable for any
damage resulting from such usage. This applies likewise for unauthorized modifi-
cations.
Non-intended use is the use of
• materials with excessively high temperature,
• materials with excessively high pressure,
• materials with smouldering, burning or sticky particles.
• highly explosive and pasty materials,
• materials that act chemically with the materials of the component.
Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the consent of the manufacturer are not in accordance with the in-
tended use.
WARNING Serious injury or death possible due to foreseeable misuse
Death or severe bodily injury to persons or damage to assets through disregarding

mechanical, chemical and electrical risks.
 The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have
to be observed and adhered to.

Pos : 16 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Res trisi ko @ 38\mod_1472037332032_18.doc x @ 1383780 @ 2 @ 1
2.3 Residual risk

An element of risk will remain when using the components, even when strictly ad-
hering to all safety rules and regulations.
All persons working with the component must be familiar with this residual risk and
follow all instructions that prevent accidents or damage.
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
 Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
 Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
 Secure against unintentional switching back on.
 Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
WARNING Serious injury due to non-use of personal protective gear
Fatal injuries due to non-use of personal protective gear!

 Make it compulsory for the maintenance personnel to wear personal protective
gear.
 Depending on the specific circumstances, wear safety shoes, protective gog-
gles, hearing protection etc.
 When surface temperatures of > 50 °C or < 0 °C (> 122 °F or < 32 °F) prevail,
wear temperature-resistant protective gloves when working on components.
Serious injury as a result of uncoordinated work in the area of the compo-

WARNING
nent
There is a threat of serious crushing, cuts and grazes as a result of uncoordinated
work in the area of the component.
 Be sure to work/move carefully in the area around the component.
Serious eye and/or skin injuries due to discharge of the medium under high
WARNING
pressure
Risk of burns when handling materials with abrasive or corrosive properties.
 Wear protective goggles or mask with eye protection to offset the risk of medium
spurting out.
Pos : 17 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits kennz eichnung @ 38\mod_1472038802245_18.doc x @ 1383815 @ 2 @ 1

2.4 Safety marking

The following markings (adhesive and metal plates) are fastened to the component
or its accessories:
Warning of dangerous voltage
The sign is attached to the electric terminal box.

The terminal box may only be opened by a qualified electrician.
Nameplate The nameplate contains specific component specifications.
All safety markings must always be in perfect condition.

 Clean dirty safety markings.
 Replace damaged safety markings.
 Note the safety marking.
Pos : 18 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits hinweise_Pers onal @ 38\mod_1472039143285_18.doc x @ 1383850 @ 2 @ 1
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel

Use only components that are in perfect technical condition in accordance with
their intended use, paying attention to safety and hazard awareness and following
the instructions in the documentation.
Eliminate all faults immediately, especially those that can negatively impact safety!
Clearly define and comply with competencies for activities relating to operation and
maintenance. Only in this way can mistakes -- especially in risk situations - be
avoided.
Do not fit the component until all protective and safety devices are fitted and opera-
tional. Do not remove them during operation.
In the event of functional faults or safety-relevant changes in the operating behav-
iour , shut down and secure the separator or skid. Have faults eliminated by quali-
fied personnel immediately.
Discharge leakage from hazardous materials so that no risk arises for the operator
or the environment.
Do not touch damaged, cracked and, in particular, live components.
Pos : 19 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Ei nstellar beiten_Inbetriebnahme @ 38\mod_1472039414715_18.doc x @ 1383885 @ 2 @ 1
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning

Through commissioning the component, the flow of medium can be changed or in-
terrupted. Prior to commissioning, make sure that possible adjustments cannot re-
sult in risks for persons or environment.
Check for correct functioning after each adjustment.
Implement suitable measures to avoid the crushing of limbs by moving actuators.
Pos : 20 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Instandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472109648159_18.doc x @ 1384513 @ 2 @ 1
2.7 Maintenance and servicing

When carrying out maintenance work, strictly adhere to all rules and regulations
applicable for handling the component or the medium (e.g. protective clothing, no
smoking).
Adhere to mandatory recurring tests and the intervals given in the documentation
for such tests and inspections.
Regularly check cables and hose connections, particularly on moving parts, for
damage and replace if necessary.
Pos : 21 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Spezielle_Gefahrenar ten @ 38\mod_1472039510559_18.doc x @ 1383920 @ 233 @ 1

2.8 Special types of hazard
2.8.1 Electrical energy

Never carry out work on live parts!
Do not modify constructional features in a way that impairs safety. Do not reduce
clearances and creepage distances through insulation.
Check the condition of cables on a regular basis and replace if necessary.
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances

When handling oils, fats and other chemical substances, pay attention to and com-
ply with the valid regulations and safety data sheets issued by the manufacturers of
these substances regarding storage, handling, use and disposal!
First-aid measures after skin contact:
 Take off all contaminated pieces of clothing.
 Rinse off the skin thoroughly with water or take a shower.
 consult a doctor immediately.
First-aid measures after eye contact:

 Rinse out with plenty of water.
 consult a doctor immediately.
Pos : 23 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/03_Besc hr eibung @ 0\mod_1315902879297_18.doc x @ 467 @ 1 @ 1


9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Description
3 Description
3.1 Description and functional principles ....................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions ................................................................................ 16

Description 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 24 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Bes chr eibung _und_F unkti ons weis e @ 38\mod_1472040215048_18.doc x @ 1383957 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Description and functional principles

The detailed description and functional principle of the respective component are
given in the corresponding component manual.
Pos : 25 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Eins atz bedi ngungen @ 38\mod_1472040299849_18.doc x @ 1383992 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Operating conditions

The housing and sealing materials are selected to suit the operating conditions.
The operating conditions have a major impact on the life of the component.
 Technical characteristics and the essential permissible limit values, especially
for pressure and temperature of the medium, are given in the manufacturer’s
manual.
 Care must be taken that the component is only used where the rating criteria
comply with the values stated on the nameplate. Proper and correct transport
and storage is essential.
 Faults arising from moving elements must be prevented by taking appropriate
measures.
Pos : 27 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/05_Trans port_und_Lager ung @ 0\mod_1326207116268_18.doc x @ 12410 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Transport and storage
4 Transport and storage
4.1 Transport ................................................................................................. 18

4.2 Storage .................................................................................................... 18

Transport and storage 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 28 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Tr ans port @ 38\mod_1472040425733_18.doc x @ 1384027 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Transport
The following conditions must be observed:
WARNING Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health
The component can come in contact with substances potentially harmful to health
during operation.
 De-contaminate the component prior to packing and/or transport.
• Use hoists to transport components that are too heavy to move by hand.
• Screw eye bolts or lugs into the component, attach properly to the hoist and then
transport the components.
• When using lifting straps, place them around the component, provide sharp-
edge protection if required, and watch for proper weight distribution.
• Protect the component against outside force during transport (impacts, vibra-
tions etc.).
• Protect the sealing surfaces of the connections against damage.
• Do not remove the corrosion protection layer.
Pos : 29 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Lag erung @ 38\mod_1472040914661_18.doc x @ 1384062 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Storage
Protect the component against external impacts and contamination.
• Keep the storage room dry and dust-free.
• Avoid condensate formation.
• Protect connection openings against dirt.
Pos : 31 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/06_M ontage_und_Installati on @ 0\mod_1326806855797_18.doc x @ 12953 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Assembly and installation
5 Assembly and installation
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation. ............................................... 20

5.2 Assembly ................................................................................................. 20
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection ............................................... 20
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection .............................................. 20
5.3 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 21
5.4 Pneumatic connection ............................................................................. 21
5.5 Ex zone .................................................................................................... 21

Assembly and installation 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 32 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Allgemeines_Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041207296_18.doc x @ 1384097 @ @ 1
• Refer to the component manual for specific information on the component.

• Before installation, read and follow the instructions in the chapter “Safety pre-
cautions”.
• Observe accident prevention regulations!
Pos : 33 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/M aß nahmen_vor_der _Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041459351_18.doc x @ 1384132 @ 2 @ 1
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation.
CAUTION Injuries as a result of non-compliance with safety requirements
Transport and/or storage may result in damage to the packaging to the extent that
the component no longer meets the safety requirements.
 Check for potential damage prior to fitting.
 Do not fit a damaged component.
Before fitting, pay attention to the following:

 Check the piping and component for absolute cleanliness.
 Remove the protective caps from the caps only just before fitting.
 Do not damage the sealing surfaces or threads.
Pos : 34 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/M ontage @ 38\mod_1472042030055_18.doc x @ 1384167 @ 2433 @ 1
5.2 Assembly
 Remove all the packaging parts directly before fitting.
 No dirt particles must be allowed to enter the component.
 When required, keep to the flow of direction shown on the component.
After fitting
 Perform a leakage and function test.
 Create the specified operating status.
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection

 Use a suitable sealant.
 Lay the piping so that no flow of forces runs through the component.
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection

 Fit the specified screws. Use all flange bores provided.
 Fit suitable gaskets and center between flanges.
 Tighten the screws evenly and crosswise to avoid distortion. A pipe must under
no circumstances be pulled against the component.
 Pay attention to correct seating of the gaskets.
 Tighten the screws with the specified torque.
Pos : 35 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Elektrisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042244966_18.doc x @ 1384205 @ 2 @ 1

5.3 Electrical connection

For components with electrical accessories.
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
 Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
 Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
 Secure against unintentional switching back on.
 Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
 Ground the component in accordance with the local regulations.
 Comply with the protective measures when connecting the component in ac-
cordance with the provisions of the responsible power company.
Pos : 36 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Pneumatisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042436028_18.doc x @ 1384240 @ 2 @ 1
5.4 Pneumatic connection

Actuate only with conditioned compressed air. Install a compressed air control unit
upstream if required.
Pos : 37 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Ex-Z one @ 38\mod_1472042494120_18.doc x @ 1384278 @ 2 @ 1
5.5 Ex zone
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or technical data sheet of the manufac-
turer.
Pos : 39 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/12_Instands etzung @ 0\mod_1328003270613_18.doc x @ 14220 @ 1 @ 1


9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Repair
6 Repair
6.1 Cleaning and care.................................................................................... 24

6.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 24
6.3 Repair ...................................................................................................... 24

Repair 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 40 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Allgemei nes_Ins tandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472042876993_18.doc x @ 1384313 @ @ 1
This chapter is divided into the sections cleaning and care, maintenance and re-
pair.
 Before carrying out maintenance and repair, read and follow the instructions in
the chapter “Safety precautions”.
Pos : 41 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/R einig ung_und_Pfleg e @ 38\mod_1472042973596_18.doc x @ 1384347 @ 2 @ 1
6.1 Cleaning and care
NOTICE Damage to the component due to a dirt layer coating
Blockage of function openings. Reduction of heat dissipation.

 Arrange for efficient covering of the component when carrying out dirty work
near the separator or the plant (e.g. laying concrete, brickwork, painting, sand-
blasting).
 Clean the component regularly.
NOTICE Functional fault and damage to the component
There is a threat of damage to property due to improper cleaning.

 When cleaning with aqueous cleaning agents, pay attention to the type of pro-
tection of the electric components. In case of doubt, do not use it!
 Do not use aggressive detergents. The latter can attack metal and plastic sur-
faces as well hose connections.
 Never clean sensitive components with coarse brushes under strong mechanical
pressure.
 Functional
Pos : 42 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Wartung @ 38\mod_1472043384840_18.doc x @ 1384382 @ 2 @ 1
6.2 Maintenance
 The maintenance intervals have to be re-determined (shortened) by the operator
according to prevailing operating conditions.
 Check or maintain the component for safety reasons. Note the following mini-
mum requirements:
- Regular check of the outer condition of the component and the accessories.
- Regular actuation so as not to impair the smoothness of action of all movable
parts through excessively long standstill times.
Pos : 43 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Ins tandsetz ung @ 38\mod_1472043537652_18.doc x @ 1384417 @ 2 @ 1
6.3 Repair
NOTICE Material damage due to mechanical stressing of the components
Tread load, stress through connected pipes, excessively high ambient temperature
destroy the component.
 Fit without using force. Avoid stresses.
 No additional stress, e.g. tread load (use as unauthorized climbing aid).
 No welding and heat treatment.
 No tool machining (e.g. drilling).
Pos : 45 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/13_Auß erbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1328016515064_18.doc x @ 14509 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Decommissioning
7 Decommissioning
7.1 Machine disposal ..................................................................................... 26

Decommissioning 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 46 /BA/Standard/13_Außer betriebnahme/Z entrifuge_ents orgen/Maschi ne_ents orgen @ 16\mod_1416303007584_18.doc x @ 869138 @ 2 @ 1
7.1 Machine disposal

When the machine has reached the end of its useful service life, the plant operator
is responsible for proper and correct disposal.
It is recommended to commission a company specialized in the disposal of ma-
chines or to obtain information from GEA Westfalia Separator service.
 Observe the local disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Have electrical connections disconnected by qualified personnel, e.g. electri-
cians.
IMPORTANT: Residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines can cause injury. Pro-
tective clothing must therefore be worn when dismantling lines.
WARNING Danger of acid and alkali burns
After cleaning, hot lye and acid residues can still be in the machine and the pipe-
lines. When working on the machine, contact with the lyes and acids can cause
burns.
 Wear acid-resistant safety gear, e.g. safety goggles, safety gloves, protective
overalls or protective suits.
 Take special care.
 Observe the plant operator's SOPs on handling acids and lyes as well as local
disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and dis-
pose of them properly.
 Observe regulations on product contact.
 Dismantle feed lines and utility lines, clean superficial impurities caused by lubri-
cants or product with suitable media and dispose of separately.
 Dismantle all seals and non-metallic materials, clean them to remove lubricants
and dispose of them separately or recycle.
 Separate and sort metal parts and recycle them.
Pos : 48 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/14_Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1328016648937_18.doc x @ 14543 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Spare parts
8 Spare parts
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ................................................................. 28

Spare parts 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 49 /BA/Standard/14_Ers atzteile/Original _Ersatzteile/Original _Ers atzteile_M asc hine @ 17\mod_1416476908928_18.doc x @ 872255 @ 2 @ 1
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts.

All spare parts, wear parts and operating materials are originally packed by GEA
Westfalia Separator.
The original packing is provided with the

marking shown.
Fig. 1
WARNING Danger due to defective spare parts
Non-original or unauthorized parts or supplies endanger the personnel working on

the machine.
Non-genuine or non-approved spare parts or operating materials reduce the avail-
ability of the machine.
 Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator to assure the oper-
ating safety and optimum availability of the machine.

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Spare parts
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===

Pos : 52 /BA/Standard/00_Ti tel _Rüc ks eite/Ruec ks eite_CD_2016 @ 33\mod_1463040149761_18.doc x @ 1329773 @ @ 1
We live our values.

Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 index.
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ruec ks eite ===
Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
Installation guidelines
Separator
No. 2058-9601-020
Edition 0717
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT

tions for improving the documentation. Remarks and sug-
gestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com


1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 8
2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 12
3.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 14

3.2 Transport in the transport packaging ....................................................... 14
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist .............................................................. 14
3.2.2 Transport with fork-lift trucks ................................................................... 15
3.3 Transporting the separator ...................................................................... 15
3.4 Storage after delivery .............................................................................. 20
3.4.1 Separator ................................................................................................. 20
3.4.2 Control cabinet......................................................................................... 20
3.5 Preservation measures on site ................................................................ 21
4 Installation 23
4.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 24
5 Separator 27
5.1 Space requirement for the separator ....................................................... 28

5.2 Bowl weights ............................................................................................ 30
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators........................................................... 30
5.4 Ventilating the separator room ................................................................ 31
5.5 Foundations ............................................................................................. 32
5.6 Installing the separators .......................................................................... 34
5.6.1 Separators …SD 2 and …TC 2, 3 ........................................................... 34
5.6.2 Separators …SD 6, 18, 35, 60 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 40, 30, 80, 120 –
…TC 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 ............................................................................. 34
5.7 Screw torques .......................................................................................... 36
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................... 36
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ......................................... 37
5.8 Fastening the foundation frame (shipboard operation) ........................... 38
5.8.1 Installing the separator (shipboard operation) ......................................... 39
5.9 Vibrations ................................................................................................. 40
5.10 Feed and discharge lines on the separator ............................................. 41
5.10.1 Feed and discharge lines ........................................................................ 41
5.10.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines ....................................... 43
6 Operating, filling and displacement water 45
6.1 Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines ...................... 46

6.2 Water quality ............................................................................................ 46

6.3 Supply pressure and temperature ........................................................... 46

6.4 Rating the water lines .............................................................................. 48
6.5 Water volume........................................................................................... 50
7 Compressed air 51
7.1 Compressed air quality ............................................................................ 52

7.2 Configuration of the compressed air line (per separator) ........................ 52
8 Product line 53
8.1 General .................................................................................................... 54

8.2 Pipe cross-sections ................................................................................. 54
8.2.1 Selection diagram .................................................................................... 55
8.3 Piping network ......................................................................................... 56
8.4 Product feed pump .................................................................................. 58
8.4.1 Pressure line ............................................................................................ 58
8.5 Strainers and pre-strainers ...................................................................... 59
8.6 Plate heat exchangers and tubular heat exchangers .............................. 60
8.6.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller............................ 61
8.6.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ........................ 62
8.6.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller .................... 63
8.6.4 Thermal oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ................. 64
8.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger................................................................ 65
8.8 Safety valve ............................................................................................. 66
9 Solids tank 67
9.1 Solids tank ............................................................................................... 68

9.2 Solids tank ventilation .............................................................................. 68
9.2.1 Solids tank venting .................................................................................. 70
9.2.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting ............................................................. 71
9.3 Solids discharge lines .............................................................................. 72
9.3.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap .................................................. 73
9.3.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps ...................................................... 74
9.4 Operating and dirty water discharge lines ............................................... 75
10 Electrical installation 77
10.1 Installing control cabinets ........................................................................ 78

10.1.1 Installation site and operation .................................................................. 78
10.1.2 Control cabinet D10 ................................................................................. 79
10.1.3 Control cabinet E40 ................................................................................. 81
10.1.4 Control cabinet IO .................................................................................... 83
10.1.5 Assembly example for control cabinets ................................................... 85
10.1.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 85
10.1.7 Type of protection .................................................................................... 86
10.1.8 External voltages ..................................................................................... 86
10.1.9 Shipboard operation ................................................................................ 86
10.1.10 Onshore operation ................................................................................... 87
10.2 EMC-compliant installation ...................................................................... 87
10.3 Solenoid valves........................................................................................ 88
10.3.1 Solenoid valve block ................................................................................ 88
10.3.2 Sensor block ............................................................................................ 89
10.3.3 Terminal box ............................................................................................ 90
10.4 Double thermometer PT 100 ................................................................... 91

10.5 Electric motors and sensors .................................................................... 92

10.6 Execution of the lectrical installation........................................................ 93
10.6.1 Voltage equalization of the separator ...................................................... 93
10.6.2 Equipotential bonding of the electric heater ............................................ 94
10.6.3 Equipotential bonding of the foundation plate ......................................... 95
10.6.4 Equipotential bonding of the control cabinet ........................................... 96
10.7 Electric motors procured by the customer ............................................... 97
11 Spare parts 99
11.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ............................................................... 100

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot


1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 8


This document represents an integral part of the contract when procuring separator
installations and is part of the complete documentation. The document describes
the specifications for the design, manufacture and implementation of separator
systems.
For the plant operator, this document is considered to be a basis for planning and
executing the installation of separator installations.
1.2 Other applicable documents

• P&ID (Piping & Instrumentation Diagram)
• Installation diagram and equipment list
• Dimensioned drawing
Information on space requirement for operation and maintenance, minimum
clearance from walls/pillars or other machines
• Centrifuge operating manual
• Control unit manual
• Instruction manuals for components from other manufacturers such as motors
and valves.
• Further order-specific documents if relevant.
1.3 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals

death.


nates.



NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 12

2.1 Materials
• All components are functional and of the best possible materials in terms of suit-
ability for the application.

3.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 14

3.2 Transport in the transport packaging ....................................................... 14
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist .............................................................. 14
3.2.2 Transport with fork-lift trucks ................................................................... 15
3.3 Transporting the separator ...................................................................... 15
3.4 Storage after delivery .............................................................................. 20
3.4.1 Separator ................................................................................................. 20
3.4.2 Control cabinet......................................................................................... 20
3.5 Preservation measures on site ................................................................ 21

3.1 Safety during transport

When the centrifuge is transported with hoists and fork-lift trucks, hazards can oc-
cur. Risk of injury and material damage are a threat when unqualified persons are
deployed and unsuitable or damaged lifting gear is used.
Therefore, pay attention to the following points during transportation:
 Assign only qualified personnel with the task of transporting the centrifuge.
 Use approved and intact lifting gear and hoists for transportation.
 Use only suitable hoists with adequate lifting capacity.
- For the weight of the centrifuge, refer to the separator manual, chapter "Tech-
nical Data / Weights".
3.2 Transport in the transport packaging
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist
 Always secure the goods to be trans-

ported in a suitable way against slip-
ping and tilting.
 When transporting the centrifuge in the
transport packaging, use only suitable
vehicles or suitable cranes.
 Ensure an even pressure distribution
on the bottom panel.
Fig. 1
Packaging example: Centrifuge with belt

drive
Fig. 2

3.2.2 Transport with fork-lift trucks
 Remove side walls, filling material and

all loose parts.
 Use the bottom panel of the transport
packaging as a pallet for transporting
the centrifuge with a fork-lift truck.
 Ensure an even pressure distribution
on the bottom panel.
Fig. 3
3.3 Transporting the separator
WARNING Danger of injury due to overturning of the separator during transport
Separators and their transport packagings can cause injuries through impacts and
crushing and tilting or slipping.
 Transport only by briefed and assigned persons.
 Pay attention to separator weight specifications (see separator manual, chapter
"Technical Data".
 Comply with the instructions for safe transportation.
 Secure separators adequately against slipping and tilting.
 Refer to the chapter "Transport" in the separator manual for suitable suspension
points and correct fastening methods.
 Remove the bowl from the frame be-

fore transporting the separator.
IMPORTANT: The separator is normally

delivered without installed bowl.
An exception to this rule are the separa-
tors…SD 2, …TC 2 and …TC 3. They
are delivered and transported with fitted
bowl.
Fig. 4
The examples below show how the transport ropes must be attached to the differ-
ent frames (see Fig. 5 – Fig. 14):

Separators …SD 6, 18 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 30 – …TC 5, 10, 20
 Unscrew screw plug (1) from the lower

section of the frame.
Fig. 5
 Screw double nipple (1) into the hole in

the frame.
Fig. 6
 IMPORTANT: Do not use the horizon-

tally screwed-in eye bolts of the motor
to suspend the separator.
 Hang in the transport ropes.
- Do not damage any machine com-
ponents when fastening the
transport ropes.
- Swing the transport ropes around
the machine A and the double nip-
ple and hang it in the load hook of
the hoist.
- Prevent the frame from overturning:
Place part of the rope around the
load hook in such a way that the
frame is lifted horizontally (see de-
tail).
- Make sure that the transport ropes
cannot slip.
- Ensure even load distribution.
Fig. 7

Separators …SD 35, …SE 40, …TC 40
 Unscrew screw plug (1) from the lower

Fig. 8
 Screw two eye bolts (1) into the upper

 Screw double nipple (1) into the hole in
the frame.
Fig. 9

transport ropes.
- Thread shackle (1) through the eye
bolts.
- Arrange the transport ropes around
the double nipple (2), pull through
the two shackles (1) and hang into
the load hook of the hoist.
tail).
cannot slip.
Fig. 10

Separators …SD 60, …SE 80, …TC 80
 Screw two eye bolts (1) into the upper

 Screw two eye bolts (2) with fitted
washers (3) into the intermediate
flange / holes in the frame.
Fig. 11

transport ropes.
bolts (1) and (2).
- Pull the transport ropes through the
four shackles and hang in the load
hook of the hoist.
tail).
cannot slip.
Fig. 12

Separator …SE 120
 Screw two eye bolts (1) (M 12) tightly

into the upper part of the frame.
 Screw two eye bolts (2) (M 20) tightly
into the intermediate flange / holes in
the frame.
Fig. 13

transport ropes.
bolts (1) and (2).
- Pull the transport ropes through the
four shackles and hang in the load
hook of the hoist.
tail).
cannot slip.
Fig. 14

3.4 Storage after delivery

• The original transport packaging must not be stored in the open.
• All parts must be stored in their original transport packaging in a suitable place
until commissioning.
• IMPORTANT: When stored under proper conditions, all separator parts are ad-
equately protected for maximum one year. A storage duration longer than 12
months is only possible after prior consultation with the manufacturer.
Pay attention to the following notes on storage and transport packaging:
• Handle delicate goods with care.
• Protect the goods against moisture and humidity.
• Protect the goods against heat.
• Pay attention when erecting the goods.
3.4.1 Separator
• If the separator is not installed immediately after delivery, it must be stored in the
original transport packaging.
• The storage location must be a closed, dry room.
• The storage temperature must not be lower than 5 C (41 F) and must not ex-
o o
o o
ceed 50 C (122 F).
• A storage duration longer than 12 months is only possible after prior consultation
with the manufacturer.
- If the machine is in storage for longer than 12 months, the maintenance inter-
vals specified in the separator manual must be adhered to.
3.4.2 Control cabinet

IMPORTANT: Improper storage discharges the manufacturer or supplier from the
warranty obligation.
• If the control cabinet is not installed immediately after delivery, it must be stored
in the original transport packaging in a protected place.
• The control cabinet must not come in contact with dusty and corrosive atmos-
phere.
• The storage location must be a closed, dry room.

• The control cabinet may not be exposed to foreign heat sources (e.g. direct sun-
light, heater fans etc.).
Additional requirements to be met by the place of storage
Ambient temperatures +5 to +45 °C (41 to 113 °F)

Air humidity max. 50 % at 40 °C (104 °F)
max. 90 % at 20 °C (68 °F)
Transport temperatures -25 to +55 °C (-13 to 131 °F)
3.5 Preservation measures on site
After installation until commissioning

• The spindle and drive chamber are lubricated at the factory. This affords them
protection for 12 months.
• After this time (12 months) has elapsed, it must be checked at 12 month inter-
vals whether all roller bearings and the spindle are adequately lubricated.
• Required lubricants:
- Shell Oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE 50) for roller bearings and spindle
- Roller bearing grease for the spindle cone.

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Installation
4 Installation
4.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 24

Installation 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
4.1 Installation
Fig. 15 Installation example
1 Separator
2 Separator foundation
3 Control unit
4 Control cabinet
5 Preheater
6 Solids tank
7 Vent on solids tank
8 Crane
9 Cleaning table
10 Supply air
11 Vent
• The prevailing regulations and standards of classification societies or other au-

thorized bodies must be complied with.
• All lubricating points and the drive housing of the separator must be easily ac-
cessible without having to remove pipes or gratings.
• All operating elements must be within easy reach of the operator and at an ap-
propriate height.
• Operating elements must not be mounted higher than 1800 mm above the work-
ing platform.
• All devices must be arranged so that they do not cramp the working area and so
that they can be safely serviced and operated.
• All fixed pipes and fittings must be securely attached in order to minimize vibra-
tions and movements.
• Contact points and supports must be attached in such a way that pipes can still
move in the event of temperature variations without causing stresses in the
lines.
• Pipes and pipe joints must be accessible for maintenance.
• Pipes may not be used to support electric distributors or devices.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Installation
• These installation guidelines do not apply for small, specially manufactured

components whose durability, accessibility and operation are not impacted.
These components must be mounted in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer.
• No galvanized parts may be fitted in product-carrying lines (e.g. heavy oil, diesel
oil, steam lines and thermal oil lines). This does not apply when type-tested pipe
connections are attached to pipe trace heaters.
• Y strainers must be preferably attached horizontally, whereby the filter element
must face downwards or to the side (turned through 90°).
If this is not possible for space reasons, the strainer can be installed vertically
with a flow from top to bottom. In this case, make sure that the filter element can
be removed.

Installation 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5 Separator
5.1 Space requirement for the separator ....................................................... 28

5.2 Bowl weights ............................................................................................ 30
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators........................................................... 30
5.4 Ventilating the separator room ................................................................ 31
5.5 Foundations ............................................................................................. 32
5.6 Installing the separators .......................................................................... 34
5.6.1 Separators …SD 2 and …TC 2, 3 ........................................................... 34
5.6.2 Separators …SD 6, 18, 35, 60 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 40, 30, 80, 120 –
…TC 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 ............................................................................. 34
5.7 Screw torques .......................................................................................... 36
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................... 36
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ......................................... 37
5.8 Fastening the foundation frame (shipboard operation) ........................... 38
5.8.1 Installing the separator (shipboard operation) ......................................... 39
5.9 Vibrations ................................................................................................. 40
5.10 Feed and discharge lines on the separator ............................................. 41
5.10.1 Feed and discharge lines ........................................................................ 41

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.1 Space requirement for the separator

• IMPORTANT: Apart from the feed and discharge pipes of the separator, ni pipes
may be laid in the operating area.
• it must be ensured that the separator is readily accessible from all sides.
• Minimum clearance to walls of buildings and other machines must be observed.
- All machine parts must be readily accessible for maintenance and repair work.
- For removing and fitting the drive motor F and the bowl G.
• In the case of an installed foundation, pay attention to the actual overall height
E including the height of the foundation frame.
- refer to the installation plan in the order-specific final documentation.
Front view and top view of the separator.
 See the following table to determine

the operating area (shaded).
Fig. 16

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
Operating range for separators
Dimensions in mm
Separator
A B C D E F G H X Y Z
…SD 2 100 100 500 100 750 100 250 280 500 425 700
…SD 6 150 150 750 400 1500 175 350 550 900 550 900
…SD 18 150 150 750 400 1700 175 425 640 1050 575 1025
…SD 35 200 150 750 300 2100 250 600 850 1325 750 1300
…SD 60 200 150 750 525 2150 225 700 1020 1650 875 1550
…SE 5 150 150 500 275 1200 175 326 375 790 460 770
…SE 10 150 150 750 400 1500 175 350 550 900 550 900
…SE 20 150 150 750 400 1700 175 425 640 1050 575 1025
…SE 30 150 150 750 400 1800 175 425 680 1060 660 1100
…SE 40 200 150 750 300 2100 250 600 850 1325 750 1300
…SE 80 200 150 750 525 2150 225 700 1020 1650 875 1550
…SE 120 200 200 750 250 2750 200 850 1040 1800 1200 1950
…TC 2 100 100 500 100 750 100 250 250 500 300 575
…TC 3 100 100 500 100 750 100 250 250 500 300 575
…TC 5 150 150 500 300 1500 175 326 360 650 350 875
…TC 10 150 150 750 300 1600 175 350 550 700 500 1000
…TC 20 150 150 750 300 1700 175 425 640 825 550 1150
…TC 40 200 150 750 300 2100 250 600 850 1050 625 1350
…TC 80 200 150 750 300 2250 225 700 1020 1650 775 1700

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.2 Bowl weights
Hoist rating specifications
Fig. 17
Bowl weight
Separator b h
(kg)
...SD 2 200 195 10
...SD 6 255 270 45
...SD 18 300 320 75
...SD 35 425 420 190
...SD 60 540 530 360
...SE 5 220 225 30
...SE 10 260 270 50
...SE 20 315 315 65
...SE 30 360 355 100
...SE 40 440 450 205
...SE 80 560 570 400
...SE 120 660 645 660
...TC 5 220 215 25
...TC 10 265 260 40
...TC 20 315 310 55
...TC 40 440 435 140
...TC 80 560 560 240
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators

• The hoisting equipment must be mobile or swivel-type.
• The hoist be rated to enable the following:
- Vertical removal and fitting of the bowl (see chapter “Space requirement for
the separator", table - dimensions E).
- Horizontal removal and fitting of the drive motor (see chapter “Space require-
ment for the separator", table - dimensions G).

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.4 Ventilating the separator room

• Pay attention to the correct attachment of the air intake and exhaust lines.
- Efficient aeration and deaeration of the separator room.
- No vacuum in the air intake lines and air exhaust lines.
o
- Do not exceed the permitted room temperature (normally max. 45 C
o
(113 F) ).
IMPORTANT:
• Dimensioning of the electrical devices is crucial in this connection.
• If the permissible temperatures are exceeded, special action must be taken. The
maintenance intervals and measures may have to be adapted accordingly.
Installation example of a ventilation sys-

tem
Fig. 18
1 Supply air
2 Vent
Approximate values on air exchange
-1
For small, closed separator rooms 30 – 50 h
-1
For large separator rooms 15 – 20 h
-1
For engine rooms (beside main or auxiliary engines) 50 – 70 h

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Air volume (pressed out of the separator frame)
Air volume
Separator
(m³/h)
...SD 2 10
...SD 6 35
...SD 18 45
...SD 35 55
...SD 60 75
...SE 5 10
...SE 10 40
...SE 20 50
...SE 30 55
...SE 40 60
...SE 80 80
...SE 120 150
...TC 2 10
...TC 3 10
...TC 5 10
...TC 10 10
...TC 20 50
...TC 40 60
...TC 80 80
5.5 Foundations
• To avoid the influence of foreign vibrations, foundations and foundation frames
for separators which have contact with other foundations must not exceed the
specified vibration values (see chapter "Vibrations").
IMPORTANT: If the foundation frame does not have an appropriate rigidity and
bending strength, this can result in loss of warranty.
Installation example for a foundation

frame
Fig. 19
1 Foundation frame

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
• The foundation frames must be de-

signed so that dimensions a and b in
• When other parts are used, the mo-

the table below are adhered to.
ment of resistance of the U-sections

may not be below the value stipulated
• The foundation frame must have a

in DIN 1026.
rigidity with a maximum permitted de-
• The separator feet must be fastened at

flection of 1:1000.
the neutral axis of the foundation

frame.
Fig. 20
Dimensioning of the foundation frame
Dimensions in mm
Separator
a b
...SD 2 80 45
...SD 6 140 60
...SD 18 140 60
...SD 35 180 70
...SD 60 180 70
...SE 5 140 60
...SE 10 140 60
...SE 20 140 60
...SE 30 140 60
...SE 40 180 70
...SE 80 180 70
...SE 120 220 80
...TC 2 80 45
...TC 3 80 45
...TC 5 80 45
...TC 10 140 60
...TC 20 140 60
...TC 40 180 70
...TC 80 180 70

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.6 Installing the separators

The following chapters will show how the different separators are installed.
5.6.1 Separators …SD 2 and …TC 2, 3
Assembly of the separators on a steel

foundation room with the aid of rubber-
metal cushions.
Fig. 21
 Screw rubber-metal cushions (4) into

foundation frame (5).
 Screw studs (2) into rubber-metal
cushions (4).
- Torque: 30 Nm
 Place plate (3) over the studs.
 Position the separator on the plate (3)
and bolt tight using hexagon nuts (1).
Fig. 22
5.6.2 Separators …SD 6, 18, 35, 60 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 40, 30, 80, 120 – …TC 5,
10, 20, 40, 80
 Align separator (1) with feet (2) and

plates (3) on foundation frame (4).
 Tack plates (3) in position.
 Loosen hex head screws (5).
 Raise the separator with feet, see
chapter "Transporting the separator".
 Weld plates (3) to foundation frame
(4).
 Position the separator on the plates (3)
and bolt tight using hex head screws
(5).
 Tighten the hex head screws (6) firmly
(the torques are specified in the table
Fig. 23 below).

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
Hex head screw Torque

Separator
(6) (Nm)
...SD 6
M 12 52
...SD 18
...SD 35
M 16 100
...SD 60
...SE 5
...SE 10
M 12 52
...SE 20
...SE 30
...SE 40
M 16 100
...SE 80
...SE 120 M 20 200
...TC 5
...TC 10 M 12 52
...TC 20
...TC 40
M 16 120
...TC 80

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.7 Screw torques

The torques apply for the following conditions:
• Metric screws with coarse-pitch threads.
- Hex head screws according to DIN EN ISO 4014
- Allen screws according to DIN EN ISO 4762
• Through holes according to DIN ISO 20273 (medium).
• Greased screws (total minimum coefficient of friction = 0.10).
• Torque wrench with a scatter (tolerance) of ±10 %.
• Material combinations:
- Steel-steel
- Stainless steel-stainless steel.
IMPORTANT: Screws whose torque deviates from this table are marked with the
required torque in the manual.
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm)
Super
A2-70 A2-80 Hastelloy
Strength class 8.8 10.9 12.9 Duplex
A4-70 A4-80 2.4819
1.4501
Yield stress/yield strength 640 450
940 1100 600 550 360
in N/mm² 660 250
Parameter Torque in Nm
M4 2.6 3.9 4.5 1.9 2.5 1.9 1.5
M5 5.2 7.6 8.9 3.6 4.8 3.6 2.9
M6 9.0 13.2 15.4 6.3 8.4 6.3 5.0
M8 21.6 31.8 37.2 15.2 20.2 15.2 12.1
M 10 43.0 63.0 73.0 30.0 40.0 30.0 24.0
M 12 73.0 108.0 126.0 52.0 69.0 52.0 42.0
M 14 117.0 172.0 201.0 82.0 109.0 82.0 65.0
M 16 180.0 264.0 309.0 126.0 168.0 126.0 100.0
M 18 259.0 369.0 432.0 177.0
M 20 363.0 517.0 605.0 248.0
M 22 495.0 704.0 824.0 187.0
M 24 625.0 890.0 1041.0 237.0
M 30 1246.0 1795.0 2077.0 472.0
M 36 2164.0 3082.0 3607.0
Screws made of Super Duplex 1.4501 are treated like A4-70 screws while neglect-
ing the higher yield stress.
In the case of screws larger than M 16, an individual drop in strength due to the
degree of deformation of the screw raw material and the thread rolling procedure
must be taken into account.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb)

The following formula is used to convert the torques (Ma) from “Nm“ to “inlb“:
Mainlb = MaNm x 8.85
Example:
Mainlb = Wanted (screw tightening torques in “inch-pound”)

MaNm = 50 (screw tightening torques in “Newtonmeter“)
Mainlb = 50 Nm x 8.85
Mainlb = 442.5 inlb

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.8 Fastening the foundation frame (shipboard operation)
• The foundation frame (2) can be di-

rectly welded onto the steel structure
(1).
Fig. 24
The detail view X shows an example for

welding the foundation frame to the steel
structure.
Fig. 25
X Fillet weld
Example 1
• The weld seams must be 100 mm long.
• The distance between the weld seams must be approx. 350 mm.
That means that three weld seams with a length of 100 mm stretch for a distance
of one metre.
Example 2
• The foundation frame can also be welded all the way round.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.8.1 Installing the separator (shipboard operation)
• The supports (1) must be attached
• The dimensional specifications a and b

beneath the separator feet.
for the clearance of the supports (1)

must be observed (see figure and ta-
• The position of the separator feet can

ble below).
be seen in the chapter "Space re-

quirement for the separator".
Fig. 26
Dimensional specifications a and b for

the clearance of the suports of the re-
spective separator.
Fig. 27
Dimension "a" Dimension "b"

Separator
[mm] [mm]
...SD 2 452 237
...SD 6 350 220
...SD 18 425 270
...SD 35 555 380
...SD 60 700 460
...SE 5 326 220
...SE 10 350 220
...SE 20 425 270
...SE 30 425 270
...SE 40 555 380
...SE 80 700 460
...SE 120 850 620
...TC 2 452 237
...TC 3 452 237
...TC 5 326 220
...TC 10 350 220
...TC 20 425 270
...TC 40 555 380
...TC 80 700 460

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.9 Vibrations
Fig. 28
Tolerable vibration Limits for Vibro 2

Permissible vibra- Limits for Vibro 1
values at the sepa- with installed vibra-
tion value at the with installed vibra-
Separator rator contact area tion sensor (3)
reference point (2) tion sensor (3)
(footprint) [1] (mm/s)
(mm/s) (mm/s)
max. (mm/s)
...SD 2 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 6 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 18 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 35 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 60 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 5 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 10 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 20 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 30 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 40 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 80 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 120 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 2 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 3 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 5 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 10 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 20 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 40 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 80 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
(1) Measured at separator standstill and normal ship operation.
(2) Measured when separators are running.
(3) The vibration sensor is fitted in this area.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.10 Feed and discharge lines on the separator

The general configuration of the piping network is described in the following chap-
ters:
5.10.1 Feed and discharge lines

• The feed and discharge lines must be laid in conformity with the guidelines of
GEA Westfalia Separator or the specifications of the classification societies.
WARNING Danger due to defective spare parts or operating materials
Non-original or unauthorized parts or operating materials endanger the personnel

working on the centrifuge.
ability of the centrifuge.
ating safety and optimum availability of the centrifuge.
• The lines must be flushed before commissioning to protect the valves and units.
• The following lines must be connected to hoses or compensators to prevent vi-
brations:
- Product feed line and product discharge line
- Operating, filling and displacement water lines
- Solids discharge
- Dirty water discharge line
- Frame drain
Special requirements apply for shockproof separators.
• The connection dimensions of the feed and discharge lines are given in the or-
der-specific dimensioned drawing.
• hoses and protective sleeves for cables:
Protective sleeve for cables
 IMPORTANT: Avoid abrasion.

- Fit protective sleeve (1) along the
full length of the cable harness (con-
tact points to the machine).
- Adapt the length of the protective
sleeve (1).
Fig. 29

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Corrugated hose with braiding
 IMPORTANT: Do not twist corrugated

hose.
- Fit corrugated hose without torsion.
 Fix side of corrugated hose (1) with
screws and align.
 Fix side of corrugated hose (2) with
screws.
 Tighten all bolts fully.
Fig. 30
 IMPORTANT: Do not over-bend cor-

rugated hose.
- Fit corrugated hose as shown.
- Fit a pipe bend to divert if neces-
sary.
Fig. 31
 IMPORTANT: Do not kink corrugated

hose.
 Remove all corrugated hoses for ser-
vicing work (before removing the
hood).
Fig. 32

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.10.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines
• The water lines must be laid so that

they can be drained completely at the
lowest point without having to be dis-
• Y-strainers are fitted horizontally at the

mantled.
factory, whereby the filter elements (1)
• The solenoid valves for operating,

face downwards.
filling and displacement water to the

separator are fitted so that the hose
between the separator and solenoid
valves cannot drain.
Fig. 33

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Operating, filling and displacement water
6 Operating, filling and displacement water
6.1 Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines ...................... 46

6.2 Water quality ............................................................................................ 46
6.3 Supply pressure and temperature ........................................................... 46
6.4 Rating the water lines .............................................................................. 48
6.5 Water volume........................................................................................... 50

Operating, filling and displacement water 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
6.1 Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines

• Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines may not be led into
public sewage systems, draining ditches and waters.
- Comply with environmental protection legislation.
6.2 Water quality

• IMPORTANT: When desalinated water or condensate is used, corrosion must
be reckoned with.
• The use of boiler feed water is not permitted.
• land water is not recommended since its degree of hardness is normally too
high.
• The water must be as pure as possible and meet the following standards:
Hardness
- up to 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature < 12° dH
- above 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature < 6° dH
The different hardness values are linked by the following relationships:
1° dH = 1.79° fH = 1.25° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
pH 6.5 – 7.5
Chloride ions < 100 mg/l
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l
Particle size max. 50 µm
dH = German hardness | fH = French hardness | eH = English hardness
6.3 Supply pressure and temperature
Fig. 34
IMPORTANT: The pressure downstream of the water pressure reducer must be

set to 0.25 Mpa (2.5 bar) when the operating water valve is open.

 Refer to the dimensioned drawing of the separator.
• The supply pressure and the temperature for the operating, filling and displace-
ment water must meet the following specifications:
Supply pressure 0.3 – 1.0 MPa (3 – 10 bar)

Temperature min. 10 °C (50 °F)
max. 85 °C (185 °F)
6.3.1 Operating, filling and displacement water lines
• The water lines must be laid so that

they can be drained completely at the
lowest point without having to be dis-
• Y-strainers are fitted horizontally at the

mantled.
factory, whereby the filter elements (1)
• The solenoid valves for operating,

face downwards.
filling and displacement water to the

separator are fitted so that the hose
between the separator and solenoid
valves cannot drain.
Fig. 35

6.4 Rating the water lines

• Manifolds must be dimensioned in such a way that the separators are always
supplied with an adequate water volume to ensure smooth operation.
• The manifolds must be laid in such a way as to enable fitting and removing the
solenoid valves and filters,
• In the case of a separator, the mani-

fold must have the same nominal width
• The nominal width R is given in the

as the separator feed lines.
following table.
Fig. 36 1 Separator
Fig. 37 2 Separators
With two separators:

IMPORTANT: When two separators request water simultaneously, the water sup-
ply can be dimensioned as for one separator.
• The manifold must have a nominal width S (see following table).
• The feed lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see the follow-
ing table).
With three and more separators

• The manifold must have a nominal width of DN 32.
• The feed lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see the follow-
ing table).

Nominal diameter (DN)

Separator Manifold Feed line
S R
...SD 2 25 20
...SD 6 25 20
...SD 18 25 20
...SD 35 32 20
...SD 60 32 20
...SE 5 25 20
...SE 10 25 20
...SE 20 25 20
...SE 30 32 20
...SE 40 32 20
...SE 80 32 20
...SE 120 32 20
...TC 2 25 20
...TC 3 25 20
...TC 5 25 20
...TC 10 25 20
...TC 20 25 20
...TC 40 32 20
...TC 80 32 20

6.5 Water volume

The following water quantities are required for precise program control with simul-
taneous actuation of the solenoid valves.
Solenoid valve Total con- Total con-

V2 V2 V3 sumption sumption
per cycle per cycle
Filling water Displace- Operating
Separator without
ment water water * filling wa-
ter
l/s l/s l/s l (approximate)
...SD 2 0.25 0.25 0.25 2 1.5
...SD 6 0.1 0.1 0.5 3 2
...SD 18 0.1 0.1 0.8 5 3.5
...SD 35 0.1 0.1 0.8 10 6.5
...SD 60 0.1 0.1 0.8 23 13
...SE 5 0.1 0.1 0.5 1.6 1.1
...SE 10 0.1 0.1 0.5 2.3 1.5
...SE 20 0.1 0.1 0.5 3.2 2.0
...SE 30 0.1 0.1 0.5 6.4 4.2
...SE 40 0.1 0.1 0.8 11.6 7.6
...SE 80 0.1 0.1 0.8 25.4 15.4
...SE 120 0.5 0.5 1.0 46 31
...TC 2 0.1 0.1 - 1.5 0.8
...TC 3 0.1 0.1 - 2.4 1.2
...TC 5 0.1 0.1 - 2.9 1.3
...TC 10 0.1 0.1 - 4.5 2.0
...TC 20 0.1 0.1 - 6.6 3.1
...TC 40 0.1 0.1 - 17.7 9.0
...TC 80 0.1 0.1 - 42.6 21.0
* Ejection cycle = Σ (filling water + displacement water + operating water)

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Compressed air
7 Compressed air
7.1 Compressed air quality ............................................................................ 52

7.2 Configuration of the compressed air line (per separator) ........................ 52

Compressed air 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
7.1 Compressed air quality

• The compressed air must be free from impurities and dry.
- Comply with all pertinent national and international regulations.
7.2 Configuration of the compressed air line (per separator)
Fig. 38 Example of a separator
1 Pressure reducer
• IMPORTANT: The standard scope of delivery for separators does not in-
clude a compressed air control assembly.
• When other pneumatic components are operated, the corresponding in-
structions on air quality and air purity must be followed.
Pressure of compressed air supply and compressed air consumption
Permitted supply pressure 0.3 – 1.0 MPa (3 – 10 bar)

Supply pressure 0.3 MPa (3 bar)
downstream of the pressure reducer (1)
Max. compressed air consumption (per separa- 3
0.01 Nm /h
tor)

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8 Product line
8.1 General .................................................................................................... 54

8.2 Pipe cross-sections ................................................................................. 54
8.2.1 Selection diagram .................................................................................... 55
8.3 Piping network ......................................................................................... 56
8.4 Product feed pump .................................................................................. 58
8.4.1 Pressure line ............................................................................................ 58
8.5 Strainers and pre-strainers ...................................................................... 59
8.6 Plate heat exchangers and tubular heat exchangers .............................. 60
8.6.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller............................ 61
8.6.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ........................ 62
8.6.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller .................... 63
8.6.4 Thermal oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ................. 64
8.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger................................................................ 65
8.8 Safety valve ............................................................................................. 66

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.1 General
• Pay special attention to the chapter "Installation"!
• The suction lines must be as short as possible to avoid pressure losses.
• When dimensioning the suction line, it must be ensured that the total pressure
loss in the suction line does not exceed the maximum suction head of the pump.
• The pipes must be installed at an adequate distance from the electronic compo-
nents.
• IMPORTANT: Liquid seals (siphons) in the pipes must be avoided. The liquid
must be able to flow off freely.
• When different products, e.g. diesel oil and heavy oil, are fed to the separator, it
must be ensured that the respective product feed lines are not interchanged.
8.2 Pipe cross-sections

• All pipes, valves, fittings and instruments must be laid so that an insulation of 40
mm is possible.
• The dimensions of the pipes are given in the corresponding dimensioned draw-
ing.
• The pipes can be selected using the diagram below. The specifications in the
dimensioned drawing have priority.
• The pipe resistances must be kept as low as possible.
• Under consideration of the total pressure losses the flow velocities must be:
- between 0.5 m/s and < 1 m/s in suction lines
- between 1 m/s and 3 m/s in pressure lines

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.2.1 Selection diagram
Fig. 39
Q Flow
v Velocity in m/s
Example:
3
A flow rate of 5 m /h produces a velocity of 1.2 m/s with a nominal width of 40.

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.3 Piping network

IMPORTANT: A return line into the suction side of the pump is not allowed.
Fig. 40 Lubrication oil schematic
1 Lube oil tank
• When separating lube oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve can be led into the
product discharge line of the separator.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
Fig. 41 Diesel oil schematic
1 Diesel oil tank

2 Service tank
3 Heat exchanger (option)
• When separating diesel oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve must be led into
the DO tank (1).
Fig. 42 Lubrication oil schematic
1 Settling tank
2 Service tank
• When separating heavy oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve must be led into
the settling tank (1).

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.4 Product feed pump
Product feed pump

- Gear pump Max. 0.04 MPa (0.4 bar)
- Worm pump Max. 0.05 MPa (0.5 bar)
Required pressure head approx. 0.3 MPa (3 bar)
Viscosity of the oil to be conveyed < 1 000 cSt
Feed pressure in the suction line Max. 0.05 MPa (0.5 bar)
IMPORTANT:
• The total pressure loss in the pipe must not exceed the maximum suction height
of the pump.
• The viscosity of the oil to be conveyed must be kept below the specified value, if
necessary by means of preheating and trace heating.
• To protect the preheater against overheating, a pump post-running time must be
programmed for the pump units and the product preheating.
8.4.1 Pressure line

• When dimensioning the pressure line, it must be ensured that the total pressure
loss in the pipes does not exceed the maximum pressure head of the pump.
• The pressure line from the product feed pump via the orifice plate, the pre-
heater and the 3/2-way valve to the separator must be kept as short as possible.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.5 Strainers and pre-strainers

• The strainers and pre-strainers are fitted in the suction line of the feed pump to
protect it from coarse impurities.
• During installation, special attention must be paid to the fitting position, see
chapter "Installation".
• Use only strainers with the following

characteristics:
Fig. 43
Nominal width Filter element (1)

(DN) Mesh width
mm mm
15 – 50 1.00
65 – 80 1.25
> 100 1.60
• Use only pre-strainers with a mesh

width of the filter element (1) of 0.63
mm.
Fig. 44

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.6 Plate heat exchangers and tubular heat exchangers

• The heat exchanger must be installed so that no heat is given off to the control
cabinet.
• IMPORTANT: To avoid accidents during venting due to releasing hot vapours
and liquids, the discharge lines of the vent valves must be laid at minimum floor
height.
• The discharge line of the safety valve must be laid so that there is no accident
risk when the safety valve responds due to overpressure.
• The discharge line must be laid so that it can always be monitored. It must not
be concealed by pipes, valves or other components.
• Steam traps
– must be attached horizontally between two connections.
– may not be insulated to assure correct operation.
– must be installed in such a way that the condensate can discharge without
backpressure.
• At least one proportional-integral controller must be used for the heat exchang-
ers.
The following installation examples are set out in the next chapters:
• Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
• Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller
• Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
• Thermal-oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.6.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 45
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Steam inlet
D Condensate outlet
0.1 Spring safety valve
1.0 Plate heat exchangers
1.1 Resistance thermometer (PT 100)
2.1 Strainer
2.2 Control valve
2.3 Ball float condensate trap

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.6.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 46
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Steam inlet
D Condensate outlet
2.1 Strainer
2.2 Control valve
2.3 Ball float condensate trap

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.6.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 47
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Thermal oil inlet
D Thermal oil outlet
2.1 Control valve

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.6.4 Thermal oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 48
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Thermal oil inlet
D Thermal oil outlet
1.0 Tubular heat exchanger
2.1 Control valve

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger
IMPORTANT:
• Deformations, distortion or any other kind of stress of the soldered connecting
points must be prevented.
• The pipes must be securely in place.
Fastening plate heat exchangers:

 Prepare an assembly plate support
and bolt it to the foundation.
 Fasten assembly plate (50) with
screws (70) and nuts (80) to the as-
sembly plate support.
 The assembly plate must be installed
vertically relative to the pipe axis.
 IMPORTANT: The assembly plate
must not be welded to the support.
 Fasten heat exchanger with gaskets
(40), counterflanges (30), lock washers
(20) and screws (10) to the assembly
plate.
 Attach the pipes to the counterflanges
by tack-welding.
 Dismantle the heat exchanger and
gaskets.
 Completely weld the pipes to the coun-
terflanges.
 Finally, re-assemble the parts as per
instruction.
Fig. 49
A A The illustrated channel steel must be provided by the shipyard.

B Recommendation: U-section in accordance with DIN 1026-1-50.
Allen Lock Counter- Assembly Hex head Hexagon

Gasket
Type screw washer flange plate screw nut
(10) (20) (30) (40) (50) (70) (80)
ISO 4017 – ISO 3032 –
ISO 4762 – DIN127 – B10 1 in - 32.92 x 3.53 352 x 125 x 12
M 12 x 40 M 12
B 10 M 10 x 45 (16 x) SAE3000PSI (8 x) (1 x)
(2 x) (2 x)
(16 x) (4 x)
ISO 4762 - DIN127 – B12 5.08 cm - 56.74 x 3.53 563 x 290 x 12 ISO 4017 – ISO 3032 –
M 12 x 55 (16 x) SAE3000PSI (8 x) (1 x) M 12 x 40 M 12
B 45 (16 x) (4 x) (2 x) (2 x)

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.8 Safety valve
Safety valve in vertical fitting position
Fig. 50
• IMPORTANT: Do not use galvanized
• The safety valve outlet should be led

components and hoses.
• A discharge line is welded to the fun-

via a funnel (1).
nel (1) through which the medium is

discharged.
Fig. 51

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
9 Solids tank
9.1 Solids tank ............................................................................................... 68

9.2 Solids tank ventilation .............................................................................. 68
9.2.1 Solids tank venting .................................................................................. 70
9.2.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting ............................................................. 71
9.3 Solids discharge lines .............................................................................. 72
9.3.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap .................................................. 73
9.3.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps ...................................................... 74
9.4 Operating and dirty water discharge lines ............................................... 75

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.1 Solids tank

IMPORTANT: This chapter does not apply to the separators with sludge transfer
units (STU) from GEA Westfalia Separator.
• There should always be separate sol-

ids tanks (also called sludge tanks) for
• A tank heating system (3) must be

the lube oil and fuel systems.
installed depending on the viscosity
• The general designs and constructions

and ambient temperature respectively.
are subject to the valid regulations.
Fig. 52
1 Monitoring
2 Ventilation
3 Tank heating
4 Utilizable volume
Minimum volume of the solids tank

Volume Maximum usable volume
Separator
(l) (%)
...SD 2 80 60
...SD 6 200 60
...SD 18 200 60
...SD 35 300 60
...SD 60 300 60
...SE 5 80 60
...SE 10 200 60
...SE 20 200 60
...SE 30 250 60
...SE 40 300 60
...SE 80 300 60
...SE 120 450 60
9.2 Solids tank ventilation

The following criteria must be taken into consideration when ventilating the tank:
• Installation in accordance with the guidelines of the classification societies
• Controlled discharge of oil and water vapours
• An uncontrolled discharge of the solids (e.g. sludge) must be avoided.
• The vent lines of the solids tank must be laid so that a suction effect is created.
This suction effect must be strong enough to ensure that the air geneated by the
running separator can be ld off under all operating conditions (see chapter
"Venting the separator room").
The volume of air generated during each bowl ejection must additionally be tak-
en into account.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
Bowl top
Volume
Separator
(l)
...SD 2 1
...SD 6 1.5
...SD 18 3
...SD 35 8
...SD 60 21
...SE 5 1
...SE 10 2
...SE 20 3.6
...SE 30 6
...SE 40 10
...SE 80 23
...SE 120 42
• Vent lines may not be laid horizontally.

o
They must have a slope of at least 5 .
• When laying vent lines, avoid water

pockets.
Fig. 53
• All possible bends in the vent lines

must be arranged stepwise.
Fig. 54

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.2.1 Solids tank venting

• IMPORTANT: Connect the solid tank vent to the local venting system only.
Separators
• If one or more separators are connected to a solids tank, the nominal sizes DN
from the following table must be used.
Separators Solids tank venting

per solids DN in mm
tank ...SD 2 ...SD 6 ...SD 18 ...SD 35 ...SD 60
1 50 80 80 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150
...SE 5 ...SE 10 ...SE 20 ...SE 40 ...SE 80 ...SE 120

...SE 30
1 50 80 80 125 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150 150
• When combining separator models at a solids tank, the total number of all sepa-
rators must be used as a basis and the nominal width DN of the largest model
must be used.
Separators with sludge transfer units (STU)

• If one or several separators with sludge transfer unit (STU) are connected to the
venting system, the standard tank vents of the STU must be equipped with ex-
tensions in accordance with the following table. The extension must, if possible,
be executed from the existing pipe socket or at the latest from the hose piece
supplied.
Separators Solids tank venting

per solids DN in mm
tank ...SD 2 ...SD 6 ...SD 18 ...SD 35 ...SD 60
1 50 80 80 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150
…SE 5 …SE 10 …SE 20 …SE 40 …SE 80 …SE 120

…SE 30
1 50 80 80 125 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150 150
• When combining separator models with STU to a manifold, the total number of
all separators must be used as a basis and the nominal width DN of the largest
model must be used.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
Example:
2 separators OSE 40 with STU and 1 separator OSE 10 with STU at common man-
ifold.
 Extend tank venting for each separator OSE 40 to DN 125.
 Extend tank venting for each separator OSE 10 to DN 80.
 Prepare manifold for 3 tank ventings in DN 150.
9.2.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting

The nominal width DN is specified in the table above (see chapter "Solids tank
venting").
. Solids tank with one separator
Fig. 55
Solids tank with several separators
Fig. 56
Solids tank with surge plates

A solids tank with surge plates is required
if the movements of the ship cause a
• If surge plates are used, each individ-

malfunction in the level monitoring.
• The vent lines must be joined.

ual section must be vented.
Fig. 57

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.3 Solids discharge lines
• IMPORTANT: This piping arrange-

ment is not permissible.
Fig. 58
• The solid discharge lines must, if pos-
• The solids discharge line must always

sible, always be vertical.
• The solid discharge line must never be

end 50 – 100 mm below the tank top.
located below the maximum level in
• The maximum level in the solids tank

the solids tank.
must be monitored with the aid of a
• The pipeline network of the solids dis-

level switch.
charge lines must be attached without
• The length of 2 m may not be exceed-

reduction and with compensators.
Fig. 59
ed without trace heating.
• If there is a deviation from the vertical

arrangement, an angle of 45° must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 60

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
9.3.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap
Fig. 61
• A shut-off valve (4) in the solids discharge line (1) prevents vapours from enter-
ing a stationary separator while another separator is operating.
• If more than one separator is used for a solids tank, a shut-off flap (4) must be
installed in the solids discharge line (1).
GEA Westfalia Separator recommends monitoring the shut-off flap (4) by means
of a limit switch. It prevents the separator from being switched on when the shut-
off flap is closed.
• When several separators or separators with sludge transfer unit are connected
to a vent manifold, a shut-off flap (4) must be installed in the solids discharge
line (1). Alternatively, the shut-off flap (4) can also be fitted in the respective line
of the solids tank vent (3) of the STU.
• GEA Westfalia Separator recommends monitoring the shut-off flap (4) by means
of a limit switch. It prevents the separator from being switched on when the shut-
off flap is closed.
• Shut-off flaps (4) are not included in the standard supply schedule of GEA West-
falia Separator. They can, however, be delivered by GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Centri-Packs kids or modules delivered with a solids tank from GEA Westfalia
Separator and equipped with more than one separator are always delivered with
shut-off flaps.

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.3.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps
...SD- and ...SE separators
Fig. 62
1 Solids tank discharge line

2 Hood and frame drain
3 Solids tank venting
4 Shut-off flap
• IMPORTANT: The shut-off flaps must be open during separator operation.

• The discharge lines (1) and (2) must be installed as shown in the illustration be-
low.
• The solids discharge line must always

Shut-off flap
• For the dimension X see chapter "Sol-

end below the solids tank cover.
ids discharge lines", first figure.
Fig. 63
1 Shut-off flap
2 Flange
3 Pipe
4 Hose (is delivered with the separator)
5 Solids tank cover

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
9.4 Operating and dirty water discharge lines

• IMPORTANT: Operating and dirty water discharges may not be led into public
sewage systems, draining ditches and waters.
- Comply with environmental protection legislation.
• The discharge lines for operating and waste water can be conveyed into a sepa-
rate tank for oily water.
• The pipeline network for the operating and waste water must be attached verti-
cally, without reduction and with vibration compensators. There is no upper
length limit.
Separators ...SD, ...SE and OTC
• The water discharge must be im-

mersed (longitudinal / transverse incli-
• The dimension h1 is:

nation)
- min. 50 mm for shipboard operation,

- min. 20 mm for onshore operation,
Fig. 64

• If a siphon is installed, the frame drain

does not have to be immersed to un-
der the minimum fill level, as a liquid
• Dimensions h1 and h2 are given in the

seal is ensured.
table below.
Fig. 65

4 Siphon for hood and frame drain

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Siphon length (mm)

Separator
h1 h2
...SD 6
200 150
...SD 18
...SD 35
300 200
...SD 60
...SE 5
...SE 10
200 150
...SE 20
...SE 30
...SE 40 200
...SE 80 300
250
...SE 120
…TC 2 - -
…TC 3 - -
…TC 5 - -
…TC 10 - -
…TC 20 - -

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Electrical installation
10 Electrical installation
10.1 Installing control cabinets ........................................................................ 78

10.1.1 Installation site and operation .................................................................. 78
10.1.2 Control cabinet D10 ................................................................................. 79
10.1.3 Control cabinet E40 ................................................................................. 81
10.1.4 Control cabinet IO .................................................................................... 83
10.1.5 Assembly example for control cabinets ................................................... 85
10.1.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 85
10.1.7 Type of protection .................................................................................... 86
10.1.8 External voltages ..................................................................................... 86
10.1.9 Shipboard operation ................................................................................ 86
10.1.10 Onshore operation ................................................................................... 87
10.2 EMC-compliant installation ...................................................................... 87
10.3 Solenoid valves........................................................................................ 88
10.3.1 Solenoid valve block ................................................................................ 88
10.3.2 Sensor block ............................................................................................ 89
10.3.3 Terminal box ............................................................................................ 90
10.4 Double thermometer PT 100 ................................................................... 91
10.5 Electric motors and sensors .................................................................... 92
10.6 Execution of the lectrical installation........................................................ 93
10.6.1 Voltage equalization of the separator ...................................................... 93
10.6.2 Equipotential bonding of the electric heater ............................................ 94
10.6.3 Equipotential bonding of the foundation plate ......................................... 95
10.6.4 Equipotential bonding of the control cabinet ........................................... 96
10.7 Electric motors procured by the customer ............................................... 97

Electrical installation 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
10.1 Installing control cabinets

• Control cabinets may only contain electrical components, assemblies or systems
specified in the circuit diagram.
• Incorrect and improper installation discharges the supplier from his warranty ob-
ligation.
10.1.1 Installation site and operation

• The control cabinets may not be installed in the open.
• Select the installation site so that
- the control cabinet does not come in contact with dust and corrosive atmos-
phere.
- the control cabinet is not installed in an excessively moist or damp environ-
ment.
- the sun does not shine on the control panel or the displays since this would
make operation and monitoring more difficult.
- heating up of the controls is avoided.
• If necessary, check screwed connections and plug-in connections for reliable

contact.
• Connect the thermostat-controlled control cabinet heating to an external energy
source and switch on to avoid damage.
• The control cabinet heating must be switched on before the temperature drops
below the dew point.
Dewing can occur during the night which is not good for the electrical compo-
nents.
• Check that the mains voltage and frequency correspond to the connection data
of the control system (see nameplate).
Permissible installation and operation data:
Voltage fluctuations +/- 10 % of the mains voltage

Frequency fluctuations +/- 2 % of the mains frequency
o o
Ambient temperatures + 5 to + 45 C (41 to 113 F)
o o
Air humidity max. 50 % at 40 C (104 F)
o o
max. 90 % at 20 C (68 F)
Installation height up to 1000 m above sea level
o o
Transport temperatures – 25 to + 55 C (–13 to 131 F)

10.1.2 Control cabinet D10
Control cabinet configuration (front

view)
Fig. 66
1 Interlock
2 Control unit
3 OFF/ON keys for separator
4 OFF/ON keys for product feed pump
5 Manual swiches for optional function
6 Main switch

Control cabinet configuration (inner

view)
Fig. 67
1 Isolator amplifier for analog output (option)

2 WMS-Relais (WMS = Water Content Monitoring System), if applicable
3 Full motor protection module
4 Interface relay
5 Auxiliary contactor
6 Main contactor
7 Current transformer
8 Power supply for PLC and valves
9 Connection strip
10 Control transformer for heating and air (option)
11 Main switch
12 Control voltage transformer (option)
13 Motor protection switch
14 Safety cut out

10.1.3 Control cabinet E40
Control cabinet configuration (front

view)
Fig. 68
1 Interlock
2 Control unit E40
5 MANUAL/0/AUTOMATIC selector switch for solids pump (option)
6 Main switch

Control cabinet configuration (inner

view)
Fig. 69
1 Door locking devices (180°)

2 CPU / expansion modules
3 Power supply unit (24 V DC)
4 Switch amplifier (optional)
5 Interface relay
6 Duct for wiring
7 Terminal strip
8 Motor starter
9 Contactor
11 Safety cutout
12 Control transformer (option)

10.1.4 Control cabinet IO
Fig. 70 Control cabinet configuration (front view)
1 Interlock
2 Control unit IO
6 Main switch

Fig. 71 Control cabinet configuration (inner view)
1 Door locking devices (180°)

5 Interface relay
6 Duct for wiring
7 Terminal strip
8 Motor starter
9 Contactor
11 Safety cutout

10.1.5 Assembly example for control cabinets
Fig. 72
1 Gasket (10.5 x 23 x 5)
2 Threaded bolt (M 8) (embedded in the wall)
3 Washer
4 Rear panel of the control cabinet
5 Washer
6 Wall
• The control cabinet

- must be allocated to the respective separator by means of a code.
- must be mounted on a frame or a wall in the vicinity of the separator.
• It must be possible to open the control cabinet door wide so that the door fas-
tener can lock in place.
• Select the installation site so that
- the control cabinet can be easily operated and monitored.
- an ambient temperature of 50 °C (122 °F) is not exceeded. If necessary, en-
sure that an adequate supply of fresh air is present.
• If the control cabinet is mounted on a wall, a wall clearance of 20 mm must be
observed to achieve a vibration-free fastening arrangement.
• Although the buttons and switches as well as the electronic control unit are pro-
tected against moisture by the protective foil and door seal, the control cabinet
may nevertheless not be installed in an excessively damp and moist environ-
ment.
• IMPORTANT: To keep the temperature constant inside the control unit after
starting, the main switch should remain switched on even when the separator is
at a standstill.
10.1.6 Electrical connection

• The control system is designed for the connection voltage specified on the
nameplate in the control cabinet.
• In the case of a version without motor starter, the rated connection voltage is
115 VAC or 230 VAC, which must be protected by a 6-A slow blow fuse.

10.1.7 Type of protection

• Type of protection IP 54 applies as a minimum for control cabinets set up in the
vicinity of the separator or skid.
• Cable ducts, fans or other openings made afterwards must comply with the said
type of protection as a minimum requirement.
10.1.8 External voltages

• The deenergized contacts of the output modules
- carry foreign voltage (even if the main switch is off!).
- can be determined by the orange cable.
- can be used up to 250 VAC for external control systems.
• A cross-section of 1.5 mm Cu is appropriate for all control lines and interlocking
2
lines.
10.1.9 Shipboard operation

• The standard control cabinets are equipped with halogen-free, oil-resistant plas-
tic.
• Only cables of type "MGCH“ conforming to DIN 89158.
• All cables must meet the test requirements for the spread of fire when bundling
cables in accordance with IEC 60332-3 or IEEE 45-18.13.
• All cable materials must be halogen-free in accordance with IEC 60754-1 and
must not generate toxic gases in accordance with IEC 60754 and no corrosive
gases in accordance with IEC 60754-2.
• All cables must be approved by the responsible classification society.
• Insulation resistance 0.6/1KV
• Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV
• Connecting and control cables can be laid jointly without clearance
• IMPORTANT: In the case of HFO separators in series operation, the signal ex-
change between the control cabinets must be in accordance with the circuit dia-
gram (see chapter "Electromagnetically compatible installation").
Cable glands for shipboard installation
Female Cable outer Grounding device +

Cable gland
thread Ø (mm) Design of the inner parts
M 16 x 1,5 4 – 11 M 24 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5 8 – 13 M 24 x 1,5
M 25 x 1,5 11 – 17 M 36 x 1,5
M 32 x 1,5 15 – 21 M 36 x 1,5
M 40 x 1,5 19 – 28 M 36 x 1,5

10.1.10 Onshore operation

• The local regulations and guidelines of the plant operator must be complied with.
• "Ölflex" cables are normally used and "NSSHÖU" for outer installation.
• Commercially available cable glands can be used.
• Separate cable routing must be used for connecting and control lines.
• Cable entries with plastic or metal glands are permitted.
10.2 EMC-compliant installation

• The control cabinet is designed to meet requirements for electromagnetic com-
patibility (EMC).
• The following must be taken into consideration for EMC-compliant electrical in-
stallation:
- Grounding straps
- Equipotential bonding
- Shielding of cables
- Separate cable routing
- Use of cut-off elements in the case of inductance
• In the case of HFO series operation, procedure must be in accordance with the
circuit diagram below.
Fig. 73
A Switch ON
B Control cabinet HFO No. 1
C Control cabinet HFO No. 2
D Connecting terminals
F Cable type
E Customer shipboard installation
• IMPORTANT: use only data cable UNITRONIC-BUS-FD P L2/F.I.P

2
(1 x 2 x 0.25 mm + screen).

• IMPORTANT: Do not lay data cables directly next to connecting cables since
this can cause problems with the electromagnetic compatibility.
• Pay attention to the different software statuses of the control system.
- 1. Unit has the MPI addresses 1 / 2
• Faulty or broken cable connections are displayed with error code no. 551.
- Check all connections.
10.3 Solenoid valves

Only original solenoid valves with integrated suppressor diodes and protection
against battery discharge in the connection head may be used for the filling, dis-
placement and operating water lines (see chapter "Use only original spare parts").
10.3.1 Solenoid valve block
This diagram shows an original valve

block which is used in filling, displace-
ment and operating water lines.
Fig. 74
Connections:
Fig. 75
A Connecting terminal + 24 V DC
B Connecting terminal + 0 V DC
C Grounding
D Status LED

10.3.2 Sensor block

The sensor block serves to measure pressure, to detect oil or water and to control
the product flows. Depending on the separator version, it can consist of the parts
set out below that are wired to the terminal box.
Fig. 76
1 Pressure transmitter (product discharge line)

2 Pressure transmitter (unitrolplus system – SMS-function)
3 2/2-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
4 2/2-way solenoid valve (circuit)
5 Water detector (unitrolplus system – WMS function)
6 Test flange (product discharge pressure)
7 Test flange (circulation pressure unitrolplus system)
8 Terminal strip and cabling

10.3.3 Terminal box

• All solenoid valves and supervisory equipment are installed ready-to-connect in
a local terminal box on the separator.
• The connection to the control cabinet must be created with the aid of a connect-
ing cable in accordance with the order-specific circuit diagram.
Separator without sensor block (example)
Fig. 77

Separator with sensor block (example)
Fig. 78
10.4 Double thermometer PT 100
The double thermometer (1) serves to

monitor and display the temperature of
the dirty oil after the pre-heater. It also
regulates the required separating tem-
perature.
IMPORTANT: The double thermometer

(1) is used only in conjunction with a
control system.
Fig. 79

Connection plan
• The double thermometer (1) is inte-

grated in the 3/2-way piston control
• All sensors must be installed so that

valve.
they are continuously flushed with oil.
Fig. 80
10.5 Electric motors and sensors

• Connection of electric motors and sensors with the aid of a cable loop enables
easy replacement and function testing of the components (see examples).
Example 1: Electric motor
Fig. 81

Example 2: Sensor
Fig. 82
10.6 Execution of the lectrical installation

The following standards and guidelines must be taken into consideration in the
electrical installation unless the specifications and standards of classification socie-
ties have to be met:
• EN 60204-1 or VDE 0113-1
Safety of machines - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General re-
quirements
• Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EC
• Electromagnetic Compatibility 89/336/EC
• …
10.6.1 Voltage equalization of the separator
IMPORTANT: Protective grounding is a

measure which in the event of a fault,
routes a hazardous contact voltage to
earth.
• The separator must always be

grounded.
The grounding connection is marked
with this symbol (see separator frame).

• Including the insulated installed sepa-

rator in the voltage equalization of the
installation is done via the voltage
equalization connection on the motor
side.
• If there is no protective conductor in-

corporated in multi-core cables (e.g., in
the armoured marine cable), the drive
motor must also be integrated in the
equipotential bonding.
The same applies for pump motors and
electric pre-heaters.
Fig. 83
, • The cross-section of the equipotential

bonding cable, which is normally insu-
lated green-yellow, is connected to the
largest external equipotential bonding
cable in the customer network.
• In practice, table 1 from EN 60204-1 is

used for this.
• GEA Westfalia Separator chooses:

2 2
10 mm < S < 25 mm Cu
Fig. 84
10.6.2 Equipotential bonding of the electric heater
Fig. 85

10.6.3 Equipotential bonding of the foundation plate
• The customer must fit a marked con-

necting bolt to the foundation frame for
equipotential bonding.
Fig. 86
Fig. 87

10.6.4 Equipotential bonding of the control cabinet

• The connection is via the PE bar or terminal inside the control cabinet to the
frame connection.
PE connection
Fig. 88
PE connection
Fig. 89
PE connection
Fig. 90

10.7 Electric motors procured by the customer

• When the motors are procured by the customer, they must have the following
specifications and comply with the following standards:
Design IM B5* according to IEC 34 – Part 7)

Rating Classification according to IEC 72 – Teil 2
Type of protection IM B5 according to IEC 34 – Part 5
Vibration severity Quality grade N * / S *(according to IEC 34 –
Part 14)
Full key balanced * / Half-key balanced *
Synchronous speed 50 Hz 60 Hz
3000 * / 1500 * 3600 * / 1800 *
Type of cooling 1C411 according to IEC 34 – Part 6
Flange sizes according to IEC 72
Shaft sizes according to IEC 72
Direction of rotation According to IEC 34 – Part 8
Insulation material class F according to IEC 34 – Part 1
Motor protection PTC thermistors as full motor protection
(PTC = Positive Temperature Coefficient)
• The PTC resistors must be fitted in the end

windings - one per strand.
• PTC resistors – temperature feelers which
are mounted on the winding package from
the outside are not acceptable.
Operating mode SI according to IEC 34 – Part 1
* depending on the separator type
IMPORTANT: Consequential damage to the separator caused by motors provided

by the customer cannot be asserted as warranty claims with GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator.

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Spare parts
11 Spare parts

Spare parts 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18


marking shown.
Fig. 91


2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Spare parts

We live our values.
GEA Germany
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS ACCORDING TO DIN ISO 10628-2 (DIN EN 62424)
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE IN ANLEHNUNG AN DIN ISO 10628-2 (DIN EN 62424)
GEA EQUIPMENT HEATER AND COOLING EQUIPMENT PUMPS / PUMPEN SEPARATION EQUIPMENT MIXING AND MILLING EQUIPMENT
ABSCHEIDER
DEFOAMING PUMP PUMP (GENERAL)

STATIC MIXER
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER PUMPE (GENEREL) DOUBLE BASKET FILTER
STATISCHER MISCHER
DOPPELTER KORBFILTER
SEPARATOR
BELT DRIVE
FINISCHER CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
DYNAMIC MIXER
KREISELPUMPE
DYNAMISCHER MISCHER
CONVEYING
TUBE BUNDLE HEAT EXCHANGER
FLOUR MIXER DIAPHRAGM PUMP
MEMBRANPUMPE MALAXEUR
MEHLMISCHER
SCREW CONVEYOR MALAXEUR
SEPARATOR ECCENTRIC SCREW PUMP

GEAR DRIVE EXZENTERSCHNECKENPUMPE AGITATOR
CONVEYOR BELT
WATER COOLER
PISTON PUMP AGITATOR

VESSEL BASIC SYMBOL
KOLBENPUMPE CONVEYOR BELT
AIR COOLER
DISPLACEMENT PUMP
MILL
SEPARATOR
DIRECT DRIVE COMPRESSING
VERDICHTER
CONICAL BOTTOM VESSEL VACUUM PUMP
STEAM / WATER COIL
DAMPF / WASSER ROHRSCHLANGE VAKUUMPUMPE
COMPRESSOR
VERDICHTER
STEAM JET INJECTOR
STRAHLPUMPE
HEAT EXCHANGER VENTILATOR
VENTILATOR
DOME ROOF VESSEL
SEPARATOR GEAR PUMP
INTEGRATED DIRECT DRIVE ZAHNRADPUMPE
M
SPIRAL HEATER
SCREW PUMP
SCHRAUBENSPINDELPUMPE MOTOR / MOTOR
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
DECANTER ELECTRIC MOTOR

M
ELEKTROMOTOR
GREASE PUMP
TUBULAR PREHEATER
BALANCE TANK FETTSCHMIERPUMPE Processing functions for (N) actuators - motors
NS On / Off
An/ Aus
ROTARY BRUSH STRAINER CYCLONE FC normal overload For small loads
NCN Bei geringen Belastungen
ZYKLON FU Normal Overload
350 mm
TUBULAR PREHEATER NCH FC high overload Preset

FU High Overload Voreinstellung
OPERATING WATER SIPHON
STEUERWASSERSIPHON
350 mm
ELECTRIC PREHEATER
SETTLING VESSEL
Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Datum Rev.-Name
Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Date Rev.-Name
Datum Name Beschreibung Zeichnungs.-Nr.

Date Name Description Drawing-No.
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Format
We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 1/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
SYMBOLS AND CODE LETTERS ACCORDING TO DIN EN 62424 - CATEGORY
Code letter /
Kenn- Application Verwendung
buchstabe
Analysis Analyse PCE CATEGORY PCE PROCESSING (NEXT LETTER)
A
PCE KATEGORIE PCE VERARBEITUNGSFUNKTION (FOLGEBUCHSTABEN)
Burner control, Brennersteuerung,
B
flame monitoring A ANALYSIS
Freely usable ANALYSE
C Frei verwendbar
N S T AH PART OF MCC OR PLC B BURNER CONTROL/ FLAME DETECTION
D Density Dichte xxx-9-xxx/M1 xxx-9-xxx FUNKTION IN DER STEUERUNG
E Electrical voltage Elektrische Spannung D DENSITY
DICHTE
F Flow rate Durchfluss TE LOCAL MEASURING ELEMENT E ELECTRICAL VOLTAGE
G Distance, length, position
M xxx-9-xxx/B1 LOKALER MESSAUFNEHMER ELEKTRISCHE SPANNUNG
F FLOW
Manual input, DURCHFLUSS
H Handeingabe, Handgriff
manual intervention G DISTANCE, LENGHT, POSITION, STRETCHING
I Electrical current Elektrischer Strom
H MANUAL
J Electrical output Elektrische Leistung MANUELL
K Time-based functions Zeitbasierte Funktionen MEASURING AND CONTROL EXAMPLES I CURRENT

ELEKTRISCHER STROM
MESS - UND REGELUNGSBEISPIELE
L Filling level J POWER
LEISTUNG
M Humidity Feuchte 0-xx bar 0-xx bar K TIME
Regulating member PI PI ZEIT
N Stellglied ( Motor)
(motor) xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx
L LEVEL
NIVEAU
0 Optical measurement Optische Messung xxx-9-xxx/B1 xxx-9-xxx/B1
M MOISTURE
FEUCHTIGKEIT
P Pressure Druck
N ACTUATOR (MOTOR)
Q Quantity or number Menge oder Anzahl STELLGLIED (MOTOR)
R Radiation variables O OPTICAL

0 - xx m3/h OPTISCH
0 - xx m3/h
S
Speed, speed of rotation, Geschwindigkeit, Drehzahl, FICALAH FIT P PRESSURE
frequency Frequenz xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx/B1
DRUCK
T Temperature Temperatur
YC1
Q QUANTITY
xxx-7-xxx
U Do not use Nicht benutzen DN R RADIATION QUANTITY
NO STRAHLUNGSMENGE
V Vibration, oscillation Vibratin, Schwingung
S SPEED, rpm, FREQUENCY
GESCHWINDIGKEIT, rpm, FREQUENZ
W Weight, mass Gewicht, Masse 0 - xx bar
PAL PIS T TEMPERATURE
X Other variables *1 *1 xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx/B1
TEMPERATUR
Regulating member V VIBRATION
Y Stellglied (Ventil) VIBRATION
(valve)
W WEIGHT, MASS
Z Freely usable Frei verwendbar GEWICHT, MASSE
Y ACTUATOR (VALVE)
STELLGLIED (VENTIL)
LOCAL DISPLAY RELEVANT TO GMP
LOKALE ANZEIGE GMP RELEVANT
CENTRAL CONTROL CENTER RELEVANT TO SAFETY

ZENTRALER LEITSTAND SICHERHEITSRELEVANT
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL RELEVANT TO QUALITY Datum Name Beschreibung Zeichnungs.-Nr.
LOKALER STEUERSCHRANK
gez.
D-59302 Oelde
SYMBOLS AND CODE LETTERS ACCORDING TO DIN EN 62424 - PROCESS
Kenn- Verwendung
Appplication
buchstabe
A Alarm, message Alarm, Meldung PCE CATEGORY PCE PROCESSING (NEXT LETTER)
PCE KATEGORIE PCE VERARBEITUNGSFUNKTION (FOLGEBUCHSTABEN)
B Limit, restriction
A ALARM/ NOTIFICATION
C Control Regelung ALARM/ MELDUNG
D Difference Differenz N S T AH PART OF MCC OR PLC B LIMITATION / DEFINING
xxx-9-xxx/M1 xxx-9-xxx FUNKTION IN DER STEUERUNG
E Element Element
C CONTROLLER
REGLER
F Ratio
TE LOCAL MEASURING ELEMENT D DIFFERENCE
G Not applicable Nicht anwendbar M xxx-9-xxx/B1 LOKALER MESSAUFNEHMER DIFFERENZ
Top limit value, oberer Grenzwert, E ELEMENT
H on, open ELEMENT
an, offen
F PROPORTION
I Analogue display Analoganzeige PROPORTION
J Not applicable Nicht anwendbar H UPPER LIMIT/ ON/ OPEN
OBERER GRENZWERT/ AN/ OFFEN
K Not applicable Nicht anwendbar MEASURING AND CONTROL EXAMPLES I INDICATION
Bottom limit value, unterer Grenzwert, MESS - UND REGELUNGSBEISPIELE ANZEIGE
L LOWER LIMIT/ OFF / CLOSED
off, closed aus, geschlossen L
0 - xx m3/h UNTERER GRENZWERT/ AUS/ GESCHLOSSEN
M Not applicable Nicht anwendbar 0-xx bar
FI PI O LOCAL OR PCS STATUS OF BINARY SIGNALS
N Not applicable Nicht anwendbar xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx
lokale oder Q SUMMARY

Local or PCS status xxx-9-xxx/B1 SUMME
0 PCS Statusanzeige xxx-9-xxx/B1
display of binary signals R RECORDED VALUE
AUFGEZEICHNETER WERT
P Not applicable Nicht anwendbar S BINARY CONTROL FUNCTION OR SWITCHING FUNCTION
Q Integral, sum Integral, Summe
0 - xx m3/h
0 - xx m3/h
T TRANSMITTER
R Recorded value Aufgezeichneter Wert TRANSMITTER
FICALAH FIC
Binary control function YC1

xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx/B1
Y CALCULATOR FUNCTION
RECHENFUNKTION
S or switching function oder Schaltfunktion BINARY CONTROL FUNCTION OR SWITCHING FUNCTION
xxx-7-xxx
(not relevant to safety) (nicht sicherheitsrelevant) DN
NO Z (RELEVANT SAFETY)
T Transmitter Transmitter (SICHERHEITSRELEVANT)
U Not applicable Nicht anwendbar 0 - xx bar
PAL PIS
V Not applicable Nicht anwendbar xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx/B1
W Not applicable Nicht anwendbar
X *1 *1
Y Calculating function Rechnerfunktion

Binary control function
Z or switching function oder Schaltfunktion
( relevant to safety) (sicherheitsrelevant) Revision
Revision
Description of Revision
Description of Revision
Rev.-Datum
Rev.-Date
Rev.-Name
Rev.-Name

gez.
D-59302 Oelde
ACCESSORIEST LIST
1 60 - 3 - 001 / M1
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
LEVEL 3 / EBENE 3
COMPONENT TAGGING Component tag: 1 digit / Komponentennummer: 1 Zahl B1
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
KOMPONENTENBESCHREIBUNG M1 MOTOR
MOTOR
LEVEL 2 / EBENE 2
Subsection: 2 digits / Untersektion: 2 Zahlen L1 ILUMINATION
BELEUCHTUNG
LEVEL 1 / EBENE 1
GSH / GSL LIMIT SWITCHES
Section: 1 digit / Sektion: 1 Zahl GRENZSCHALTER
YS1 PILOT VALVES - OPEN / CLOSE

STEUERVENTILE - AUF / ZU
YC1 REGULATING VALVES

STELLARMATUR GEREGELT
YD DIRECT ACTUATED SOLEVOID VALVE

DIREKT GESTEUERTES MAGNETVENTIL
FAT - 160 PL004 - 16H11 - WI40 HTe
LEVEL 6 / EBENE 6
Heat tracing specification: 3 letters
Begleitheizungsspezifikation: 3 Buchstaben
LEVEL 5 / EBENE 5
Insulation specification / Isolierspezifikation
Insulation type: 2 letters / Isoliertyp: 2 Buchstaben
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
PIPING DESCRIPTION Piping specification / Rohrleitungsspezifikation
Nominal pressure: 2 digits / Nenndruck: 2 Zahlen
ROHRLEITUNGSBESCHREIBUNG Pipe class: 1 letter + 2 digits / Rohrklasse: 1 Buchstabe + 2 Zahlen
LEVEL 3 / EBENE 3
Pipe line number: PL + 3 digits
Rohrleitungsnummer: PL + 3 Zahlen
LEVEL 2 / EBENE 2
Section + subsection number: 3 digits
Sektion + Untersektion Nummer: 3 Zahlen
LEVEL 1 / EBENE 1
Product short code: 2 to 4 letters
Medium Kurzzeichen: 2 bis 4 Buchstaben


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - PIPE FITTINS, VALVES
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - LEITUNGSFITTINGE, ARMATUREN
Stellantrieb mit rotierendem System

PIPE FITTINGS
Stellantrieb mit Elektromagnet

Actuator with rotating system
LEITUNGSFITTINGE
Actuator, manually operated
Actuator with electromagnet
Stellantrieb mit Schwimmer

Stellantrieb mit Membrane
Actuator with diaphragm
Stellantrieb mit Kolben
Stellantrieb mit Feder

Actuator with spring
Actuator with piston
Stellantrieb mit Lift
Actuator with float

Actuator with lift
Non return fitting
FLEXIBLE
KOMPENSATOR
Non return fitting

DIRT STRAINER
Valves symbols
Symbole Armaturen Non return valve
RESTRICTION ORIFICE
BLENDE
Shut-off fitting (general) Non-return flap
Absperrarmatur (allgemein) SIGHT GLASS
SCHAUGLAS
Gate valve Valves with safety function
Absperrschieber Armaturen mit Sicherheitsfunktionen SIGHT GLASS WITH LIGHT
SCHAUGLAS MIT BELEUCHTUNG
Shut-off valve Safety valve
GERADE
Absperrventil Sicherheitsventil IN-LINE HOUSING
Shut-off flap
Absperrklappe PULSATION DAMPER
Pressure valve
Druckventile Constant-pressure valve
Stopcock
Konstantdruckventil
Absperrhahn
STEAM TRAP
KONDENSATABSCHEIDER
Diaphragm valve Angle constant-pressure valve
Membranventil Konstantdruckventil in Eckform
FUNNEL
Needle valve PI TRICHTER
SELF ACTING BACK-PRESSURE REGULATOR INTERNAL SENSING
Nadelventil
xxx-7-xxx xxx-7-xxx
SPRAY BALL
Angle shut-off fitting PI
Absperrarmatur in Eckform xxx-9-xxx
TRAP
Angle shut-off valve ABSCHEIDER
ECK
Absperrventil in Eckform PI PI
PRESSURE REDUCER WITH STRAINER AIR FILTER
Angle stopcock DRUCKMINDERVENTIL MIT FILTER LUFTFILTER
xxx-7-xxx xxx-7-xxx
Absperrhahn in Eckform
OIL FILTER
Safety position
Angle diaphragm valve
Sicherheitsposition
Membranarmatur in Eckform
DIFFERENTIAL METERING PISTON
Three-way shut-off fitting DOSIERKOLBEN
DREIWEG
Dreiwegearmatur NO NORMALLY OPEN
xxx-7-xxx xxx-7-xxx STRAINER

Three-way shut-off valve DN xxx-7-xxx DN
= NO NC NORMALLY CLOSED FILTER
Absperr-Dreiwegeventil
DN
NC
FEDERSCHLIESSEND
Three-way stopcock = INDIFFERENT DISTRIBUTER UNIT
Dreiwegehahn VERTEILER
Multiport
MULTIPORT
MULTIPORT


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
last modified 25.07.2017 KARA GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 5/7 A2
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, LABELS, BREAK IDENTIFIERS
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - ROHRLEITUNG, LEITUNGSFITTINGE, BESCHRIFTUNG, TRENNSTELLEN
PIPE SYMBOLS PIPE FITTINGS BREAK IDENTIFIERS

ROHRLEITUNGSSYMBOLE LEITUNGSFITTINGE TRENNSTELLEN
PROCESS MAIN PIPE

FLANGE SET CHANGE IN PIPE LINE ID NUMBER
PROZESS HAUPTLEITUNG
FLANSCHPAAR LEITUNGSNUMMERNWECHSEL
SECONDARY PROCESS PIPE / UTILITIES PIPE

PROZESS NEBENLEITUNG TRI CLAMP
TRI CLAMP ... ... CHANGE IN PIPING CLASS
CROSSING OF PIPES
LEITUNGSKREUZUNGEN
VERSCHRAUBUNG
CONNECTION OF PIPES
BLIND FLANGE L ...
LEITUNGSANSCHLUSS SCOPE OF SUPPLY
BLINDFLANSCH
LIEFERGRENZE
CONCENTRIC / EXCENTRIC REDUCER
HOSE CONNECTION
KONZENTRISCHE / EXZENTRISCHE REDUZIERUNGEN
... ...
INSTRUMENT AIR / COMPRESSED AIR SCOPE OF SUPPLY
INSTRUMENTENLUFT / DRUCKLUFT SLEEVE LIEFERGRENZE
MUFFE
NITROGEN
STICKSTOFF CONNECTOR
STUTZEN
INSTRUMENTATION SIGNAL
INSTRUMENTIERUNG SIGNAL L ... L = GEA WS Supplied and controlled
INJECTION NOZZEL GEA WS liefert und steuert
FLOW DIRECTION
P = GEA WS supplied, Customer controlled
FLUSSRICHTUNG
GEA WS liefert, Kunde steuert
2% ... ...
SLOPE INDICATOR C = Customer supplied, GEA WS controlled
Kunde liefert, GEA WS steuert
LIMITS S = Customer supplied and controlled

Kunde liefert und steuert
GRENZEN
+7,5 m W = --- (freely definable in project)

REFERENCE SYMBOL FOR LEVEL INDICATION (im Projekt frei definierbar)
BOTTOM
BODEN


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - MEDIUM CONSUMPTION, CROSS REFERENCE
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - MEDIENVERBRAUCH, QUERVERWEIS
MEDIUM CONSUMPTION CROSS REFERENCE

MEDIENVERBRAUCH QUERVERWEIS
MEDIUM MEDIUM
MEDIUM MEDIUM
Product feed Product feed
PRESSURE Produktzulauf DRAWING CONNECTOR FUNCTION Produktzulauf DRAWING CONNECTOR
DRUCK 3 bar ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS FUNKTON Q001 ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS
15 m3/h PID002.A1
FLOW RATE P&ID NO. SQUARE
P&ID NR. QUADRAT
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUR
MEDIUM MEDIUM
MEDIUM MEDIUM
Product feed DRAWING CONNECTOR Product feed DRAWING CONNECTOR
PRESSURE Produktzulauf ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS FUNCTION Produktzulauf ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS
DRUCK 3 bar FUNKTON Q001
15 m3/h PID002.A1
FLOW RATE P&ID NO. SQUARE
P&ID NR. QUADRAT
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUR


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GEA Service
Ordering of replacement parts and other consumable items for centrifuge-specific GEA
systems.
For all questions concerning technical support, the ordering of replacement parts or to
request on-site support for your systems please contact your nearest GEA agent.
IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE CONTACT DETAILS TO HAND, YOU CAN ACCESS
THEM QUICKLY AND CONVENIENTLY AT:
gea.com/Service
If you do not have access to the internet please call our German head office in Oelde and
ask for the contact details for your location:
Tel.:+49 2522 77 – 0
To speed up your request and to ensure that we deliver the right parts please include the
following information:
- For model designation and serial number of the equipment please refer to the nameplate
- Number of parts required
- Part numbers and designations as per parts list
- Your enquiry / order number
- Preferred delivery date (from GEA works)
- Your company address
• Your complete company name or customer number
• Your invoice address (if it differs from the delivery address)
• Your delivery address
THE GEA SERVICE PHILOSOPHY

Our integrated approach to service partnership ensures long-term business success – for our
customers and for GEA.
We work alongside our customers as a partner and support you over the whole life cycle of
your system as well as that of the particular equipment.
From tailored installation and commissioning to professional maintenance that guarantees a
smooth production run, from proactive process improvement to continuing customer service
–we are always on the spot to maximise the safety, performance and reliability of our
customers’ systems.
Fig. 1:GEA Service – Four levels for lasting success
The service products

FIELD SERVICE
Our customers expect that as a service provider, GEA will have the necessary expertise
and experience to carry out all the maintenance measures needed for a specific machine
or process. Service activities have to be supplied globally, regardless of which local
market our customers are active in and where the value-added process takes place.
We are always close at hand and can provide you with advice and practical support
within Germany, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Original GEA replacement parts provide reliability and protect your investment.
Our high quality replacement parts will keep your operation running with maximum efficiency.
Original replacement parts are manufactured to the highest quality standards. Moreover, the
advance identification of critical parts, short delivery periods and constant availability will
ensure the safe and reliable operation of your plant.
We can give you the assurance of:

• Tested high standard of processing and delivery quality:
• The development of new machinery and hence the further development of spare
parts
• Maximum operational security for your equipment
• Permanent and partly very long-term availability of parts
• Optimised logistics processes and locations of our logistics centres
• Short delivery periods
REPAIRS – CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

The GEA repair service is always close at hand.
We not only carry out repairs all over the world, but also optimisation measures individually
tailored to your GEA equipment using state-of -the-art technology.
We can guarantee you:
• The same care, precision and responsibility as we exercise in the manufacture of
GEA equipment
• Certification to DIN EN ISO 9001
• Original spare parts
• Attractive upgrade options
• Proven safety, quality and performance
RENTAL AND EXCHANGE COMPONENTS

GEA constantly endeavours to maintain the safety and availability of your systems at the
highest possible level. To do this, we can offer rental bowls and a trade-in and part exchange
service, so that downtimes can be reduced to the absolute minimum. In addition to bowls and
screws, various other exchange components are available for centrifuges.
UPGRADES / MODERNISATION / OPTIMISATION

Our proactive service concept includes ongoing identification and introduction of possible
optimisations of processes and systems.
Do your systems require an upgrade or modernisation as a result of market conditions or
new regulations? We will support you on the path to energy savings, cost reductions,
capacity adjustments and enhanced security. We will provide you with our expertise and
latest innovations in order to implement precisely the optimisations that you require.
Our global consultancy and certification framework is part of the GEA service philosophy and
will be of benefit to you all over the world..
We can guarantee you:
• A longer service life
• Lower capital expenditure compared to purchasing new equipment
• A reduction in production costs
• The maintenance of individual safety standards with qualified information on industrial
safety with corresponding specialist machine safety audits.
• Reliability and optimal benefit-cost ratio
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Our GEA PerformancePlus service concept takes an intelligent and economic approach to
ensuring plant availability and security.
The availability of historic and actual measurement data provides you and also GEA with a
detailed insight into the status of the plant. This enables a forward-looking introduction of
corrective, and in particular, planned measures.
We can guarantee:
• The planning of optimal service intervals
• Concise status information
• Minimum unplanned downtimes
• Enhanced plant security
• Optimised plant availability
PERFORMANCE AGREEMENTS
Even the best plant is worthless without the right service.GEA provides an approach for
preventing expensive cost traps.
Our service packages, individually tailored to your requirements, place particular emphasis
on plant availability, security and cost controls. Let the GEA experts take over the inspection,
maintenance and status control of your plant.
Our service modules can be adapted to changes in production conditions in all life cycle
phases without additional costs.
We can guarantee:
• A high level of plant availability
• A reduction in downtimes
• Optimised plant operation
• Maximum planning security
• Short response times
TRAINING
Our qualified staff will train your employees on site in one of our excellently equipped training
centres.
GEA training modules are tailored to your individual requirements. Our experienced
engineers offer comprehensive practical training, impart process expertise and raise
awareness in your employees of plant status to ensure safe, professional plant operation
from the outset.
We can guarantee:
• Optimal plant efficiency
• High availability and reliability
• Highly qualified personnel
• Awareness of plant status
• Motivation
USED MACHINES – FACTORY-REFURBISHED PLANT

Used GEA systems are efficient, reliable and are rapidly installed in situ where they still have
many years of operation ahead of them.
Because the systems were manufactured by GEA, we have the technical expertise to
guarantee their efficient and safe operation.
We can guarantee:
• Factory-refurbished systems
• Service for refurbished systems
• Shorter delivery periods than for new systems
• Excellent price-performance ratio
• The expertise of the manufacturer
• Safety, quality, performance and guarantee
SERVICE CONSULTANCY
Service consultancy is an essential stage in the optimisation and adaptation of operating
processes. Even in this area we have set ourselves the goal of fulfilling the requirements of
our clients with a market-leading service through the use of the latest technology – so that
you can provide your customers with superb products. That is why we bring all the necessary
tools and latest technical know-how together with our experience to bear on the problem
analysis, assessments and complex solutions to problems, in order to jointly overcome the
challenges.
Customer: Santierul Naval Constanta Project-/Order-No.: 30040524 / 1452846667
Location: H589-H591 Project-title: 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18

GEA Westfalia Separator
Equipment List
Order-No.: 1452846667
Project - title: 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 15.11.2017 Dept.: 2321
Type: Singleseparators Corr. Drawing: P1452846667-9913-PID000 Belongs to:
Repl for: --- Repl. by: --- Std. checked: ---
Explanations:
Priority(A): Procurement (B): Scope of supply (C):
N = Obligatory M = Must be obtained from Westfalia L = Scope of supply by WS
E = Recommended K = May be obtained from Westfalia S = Supplied by client
P = Possible Z = Supplied by client F = to be removed
U = --- V = --- W = loose supply
Created Date: 29/06/2017 Checked Date: 29/06/2017 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
By: PDM By: 2211-NI By: P1452846667-9913-DVL000 1/7
Copyright. © All rights reserved


Equipment List
ID Quantity Description Size/Type Power Comments Part-No. A B C
Usage Nominal Bore PID Code
10-1-001 1 Pcs Separator OSE 20-0136-067/18 N M L
10-1-001/M1 1 Pcs Motor Frame size 132 N M L
10-3-001 1 Pcs Gear Pump KF 32 RF 2-D15 9085-2109-000 N M L

1 1/2"
10-5-001 1 Pcs Plate Heat Exchanger OC4/60 9085-1105-070 N M L
1"
10-7-002 1 Pcs Safety Valve 67.961/6bar 0018-7445-400 N M L
G1/2"
10-7-005 1 Pcs Throttle Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN25
10-7-006 1 Pcs 3/2-Way Feed Valve Assembly 0018-7621-000 N M L
DN25
10-7-010 1 Pcs 2/2 Way Solenoid Valve 0331 0018-8133-600 N M L
10-7-012 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge Cock belongs to *0-1-001 N M L

1/4"
10-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer 0018-6127-210 N M L
DN40
10-9-006 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer 2 x PT 100 TE 0001-1579-400 N M L
1/2" belongs to 10-7-006
10-9-007 1 Pcs Temperature Regulator TC integrated in Control N M L

Cabinet


Equipment List
10-9-009 1 Pcs Pressure Transmitter NAE PT 0005-1533-300 N M L

1/4"
10-9-010 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer TE installed in Motor N M L
10-9-011 1 Pcs Current Transformer TA32710B500 IAL 0005-0924-240 N M L
10-9-013 1 Pcs Water Detector CLS50 0022 001V1 CS 0005-1464-070 N M L

1/4"
10-9-018 1 Pcs Proximity sensor SIS 0005-0868-000 N M L
11-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Valve 0018-2990-650 N M L

1"
1/4"
11-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..10bar PI 0001-1572-600 N M L
1/4"
1/4"
12-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Flap belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN 25
14-7-001 1 Pcs Butterfly Valve WA 532 0018-6612-400 N M L
DN80
14-9-001 1 Pcs Limit Switch ZS belongs to *4-7-001 N M L


Equipment List
16-7-002 1 Pcs Motor Control Valve 23.440 - kvs 4,0 0018-8155-220 N M L

DN20
DN20
17-8-001 1 Pcs Steam Trap FT 14-10 0018-7589-200 N M L
1"
18-7-002 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
1/4"
19-7-002 1 Pcs Ball Valve 0018-1763-630 N M L
3/4" belongs to *9-7-003
19-7-003 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve Assembly compl. 0018-7614-000 N M L

3/4"
19-7-004 1 Pcs 2/2-Way Solenoid Valve belongs to *9-7-003 N M L
1/2"
1/4"
19-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer belongs to *9-7-003 N M L
3/4"
belongs to *9-7-003
20-1-001 1 Pcs Separator OSE 20-0136-067/18 N M L
20-1-001/M1 1 Pcs Motor Frame size 132 N M L
20-3-001 1 Pcs Gear Pump KF 32 RF 2-D15 9085-2109-000 N M L

1 1/2"


Equipment List
20-5-001 1 Pcs Plate Heat Exchanger OC4/60 9085-1105-070 N M L

1"
20-7-002 1 Pcs Safety Valve 67.961/6bar 0018-7445-400 N M L
G1/2"
20-7-005 1 Pcs Throttle Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN25
20-7-006 1 Pcs 3/2-Way Feed Valve Assembly 0018-7621-000 N M L
DN25

1/4"
DN40
20-9-006 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer 2 x PT 100 TE 0001-1579-400 N M L
1/2" belongs to 10-7-006
20-9-007 1 Pcs Temperature Regulator TC integrated in Control N M L

Cabinet

1/4"
20-9-010 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer TE installed in Motor N M L
20-9-011 1 Pcs Current Transformer TA32710B500 IAL 0005-0924-240 N M L


Equipment List
20-9-013 1 Pcs Water Detector CLS50 0022 001V1 CS 0005-1464-070 N M L

1/4"
20-9-018 1 Pcs Proximity sensor SIS 0005-0868-000 N M L
21-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Valve 0018-2990-650 N M L

1"
1/4"
1/4"
1/4"
22-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Flap belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN 25
24-7-001 1 Pcs Butterfly Valve WA 532 0018-6612-400 N M L
DN80
24-9-001 1 Pcs Limit Switch ZS belongs to *4-7-001 N M L
26-7-002 1 Pcs Motor Control Valve 23.440 - kvs 4,0 0018-8155-220 N M L

DN20
DN20
27-8-001 1 Pcs Steam Trap FT 14-10 0018-7589-200 N M L
1"


Equipment List
28-7-002 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L

1/4"
29-7-002 1 Pcs Ball Valve 0018-1763-630 N M L
3/4" belongs to *9-7-003
29-7-003 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve Assembly compl. 0018-7614-000 N M L

3/4"
1/2"
1/4"
29-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer belongs to *9-7-003 N M L
3/4"
belongs to *9-7-003

Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Santierul Naval 30040524 / 1452846667
Constanta
Location: Project-title: GEA Westfalia Separator
H589-H591 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18
Process Condition Data Sheet
Order overview
Hull No.: IMO No.: Classification: Project No.: Order No.:

H589 9800790 RINA 30040524 1452846667
H590 9800805 RINA 30055993 1452846674
H591 9800817 RINA 30055995 1452846876
Oil to be processed
Application: 2.4 HFO - DO
Viscosity: 700
Density: 0.991
Inlet temperature: 40 °C
Separating temperature: 98 °C
Throughput capacity: 2400 l/h
Separator
Type: 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18
Operation mode: 2.4
Ejection method: total
Clean oil discharge: 1 - 2 bar g
Finish color: RAL 6026 Opal Green
Total weight: 320 kg
Bowl speed: 12000 rpm
Bowl weight: 65 kg
Separator motor
Type: Frame size 132
Output: 7.5 kW
Speed: 3600 rpm
IP class: 55
Weight: 37-48 kg
Feed Pump
Kind : geartype
Type: KF 32 RF 2
Rated capacity: 2820 l/h
Suction height: 4 mWS (0,39 Bar)
Delivery height: 20 mWS (1,96 Bar)
Output: 1,3 kW
IP class: 55
Weight: 28 kg
Heating Medium: steam

Pressure inlet: 6 bar abs
Temperature: 159 °C
Consumption: 139.2 kg/h
Permissible back pressure of condensate: max. 1,5 bar g
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
29/06/2017 29/06/2017 P1452846667-9913-PDS000 1/2
By: PDM By: 2211-NI By:
Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Santierul Naval 30040524 / 1452846667
Constanta
Location: Project-title: GEA Westfalia Separator
H589-H591 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18
Process Condition Data Sheet
Ambient Conditions
Ambient temperature: +50°C
Humidity: up to 92%
Atmospheric pressure: up to 1000 m Above Sea Level
Electrical Supply
Control unit type: IO / Final color: RAL 7035 Light Grey
Infeed voltage: 440 Volt AC ± 10%
Frequency: 60 Hz ± 2%
Valve operating voltage: 24V DC DC
Control Voltage: 220...230V Volt AC
IP class: 54
Weight: See Circuit Diagram - Arrangement drawing
Operating water
Hardness: < 55°C 12° dH
> 55°C 6° dH
Chloride Ions: < 100 mg/l
PH - Value: 6,5 - 8,5
Temperature: +10°C up to +85°C
Feed Pressure: 3 - 10 bar (min.3bar)
Required Capacity: 0,5 l/h
Consumption / Ejection: 3-5l
Compressed Air (if mentioned on P&ID)

Standard operating compressed air pressure: min. 3 bar / max. 10 bar
Adjustments and set points

Type: P&ID tag no.: Set point:
Inlet temperature controller TC *0-9-007 98°C
Inlet temperature alarm high TAH *0-9-006 108°C
Inlet temperature alarm low TAL *0-9-006 88°C
Water pressure reducer PCV *9-7-003 3 - 10 bar g
Pressure alarm low PAL (Clean oil discharge) *1-9-002 1 bar
Pressure alarm high PAH (Clean oil discharge) *1-9-002 3 bar
Pressure transmitter PT (Sludge monitoring system) *0-9-014 1 bar
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
29/06/2017 29/06/2017 P1452846667-9913-PDS000 2/2
By: PDM By: 2211-NI By:
CONNECTIONTABLE
CONNECTIONS
10 12 11 20 22 21 POS. DESCRIPTIONS DN PN ACCORDING TO

05 DIRTY OIL DRAIN SAFETY VALVE DN15 16 DIN2633
06 STEAM INLET DN20 16 DIN2633
07 CODENSATE OUTLET DN25 16 DIN2633
08 COMPRESSED AIR INLET R 1/4" 25 DIN2353
09 WATER INLET 3/4" 16 EN10242
10 HFO INLET DN40 16 DIN2633
11 HFO OULTET DN25 16 DIN2633
12 HFO RETURN DN25 16 DIN2633
13 WATER DISCHARGE DN40 DN 40 FOR PIPE 48,3 x 2,6
14 SLUDGE DISCHARGE DN80 DN 80 FOR PIPE 88,9 x 3,2
07 20 DO INLET DN40 16 DIN2633
06 21 DO OULTET DN25 16 DIN2633

22 DO RETURN DN25 16 DIN2633
23 WATER DISCHARGE DN40 DN 40 FOR PIPE 48,3 x 2,6
10-8-001
20-8-001
DN40
DN40
24 SLUDGE DISCHARGE DN80 DN 80 FOR PIPE 88,9 x 3,2
10-3-001
20-3-001
1 1/2"
1 1/2"
M M
10-7-002 20-7-002
G1/2" G1/2"
05
16-7-002 26-7-002
DN20 DN20
16-8-001 M 17-8-001 26-8-001 M 27-8-001

DN20 10-5-001 1" DN20 20-5-001 1"
TC TC
10-9-007 20-9-007
TE TE
TAH TAH
TE TE
10-9-006 20-9-006
2 x PT 100 TAL 10-7-005 2 x PT 100 TAL 20-7-005
DN25 DN25
12-7-001 22-7-001
10-7-006 20-7-006
18-7-002 DN 25 28-7-002 DN 25
DN25 DN25
1/4" 1/4"
PT PT
10-9-009 20-9-009
08
09
19-7-002
29-7-002
3/4"
3/4"
19-8-001
29-8-001
3/4"
3/4"
19-7-003
29-7-003
3/4"
3/4"
PI PI
19-9-001 29-9-001
11-7-001
21-7-001
19-7-004 19-7-005 29-7-004 29-7-005 Sinnbilder siehe: DIN ISO 10628-2
1"
1"
1/2" 1/4" 1/2" 1/4"
(DIN EN 62424)
10-7-011 10-7-010 20-7-011 20-7-010
FOR SYMBOLS REFER TO: DIN ISO 10628-2
(DIN EN 62424)
PI PT PI PT
CS 11-9-001 11-9-002 CS 21-9-001 21-9-002
PT 10-9-013 PT 20-9-013
11-7-003 21-7-003
10-9-014 1/4" 20-9-014 1/4" Installationsrichtlinien
10-7-012 20-7-012
1/4" 1/4"
TE TE
M 10-9-010 M 20-9-010
beachtet werden
IAL IAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
10-9-011 20-9-011 NO. 2058-9601-020 HAVE
10-1-001/M1 20-1-001/M1 TO BE OBSERVED
10-1-001 20-1-001
OSE 20-0136-067 + OSE 20-0136-067 +

SIS SIS
10-9-018 20-9-018
13 14 - 23 24 -
14-7-001
24-7-001
DN80
DN80
ZS ZS
14-9-001 24-9-001
max. Liquid Level max. Liquid Level
SUBJECT TO TECHNICAL MODIFICATIONS
min. Liquid Level min. Liquid Level Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Date Rev.-Name
Client
Santierul Naval Constanta
NB-No. Country
H589-H591 Romania
Copyright reserved
Revision proof
is electronically stored
We reserve all rights
on this drawing
CAD-Drawing
29/06/2017 PDM
Created
P&ID
Checked 29/06/2017 2211-NI GEA Westfalia Separator 2.4 HFO - DO P1452846667-9913-PID000
Scale Sheet / Sheets Size
30040524
Approved D-59302 Oelde 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18 1:1 1 1 A0
Instruction manual
Operating panel
Type: GEA IO OSE
No.: 8555-9001-040
Version: 14.07.2017
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Contents subject to modification!

tions for improving the documentation. These can be sent
to:
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel +49 2522 77-0 e-mail@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com

1.1 Sphere of application ............................................................................... 10

1.2 Other applicable documents .................................................................... 10
1.3 Structure of safety notices ....................................................................... 11
1.4 Target groups .......................................................................................... 12
1.4.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 13
1.4.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 13
1.5 Service offers ........................................................................................... 13
1.5.1 Service ..................................................................................................... 13
1.5.2 Training .................................................................................................... 13
1.6 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 14
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 16

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 16
2.3 Qualification of personnel ........................................................................ 16
2.1 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 17
2.2 Modifications or manipulation of the unit ................................................. 17
2.3 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device ................................................. 17
2.3.1 Open equipment ...................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Electrical power ....................................................................................... 18
2.3.3 Operating the HMI device safely ............................................................. 18
2.3.4 Areas at risk of explosion ........................................................................ 18
2.3.5 High-frequency radiation ......................................................................... 18
2.3.6 Instructions for using the device .............................................................. 18
2.4 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 19
2.5 Liability ..................................................................................................... 19
3 Description 21
3.1 Personal safety gear ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Function of control unit and HMI IO device ............................................. 23
3.3 HMI devices 4“ – 9“ ................................................................................. 23
3.3.1 4" HMI device .......................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 7" – 9" HMI devices ................................................................................. 25
3.3.3 Interfaces ................................................................................................. 28
3.4 Features ................................................................................................... 30
3.5 Getting to know the control panel of your WS IO .................................... 30
3.5.1 Treating the WS IO control panel properly .............................................. 30
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel ............................................................ 32
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area ................................... 32
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays ................................................................ 34
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens ................................................. 35
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements .................................................. 36
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off ................................................ 38
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines .................................................................. 38
3.5.9 Displaying output fields ............................................................................ 39
3.5.10 Displaying input fields .............................................................................. 40
3.6 Editing data in input fields ........................................................................ 41
3.6.1 Opening input fields ................................................................................. 41
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields ................................................................ 41
3.7 Password protection ................................................................................ 43

3.8 Start-up and commissioning .................................................................... 43

3.9 Factory configurator ................................................................................. 45
3.10 I/O check .................................................................................................. 50
3.10.1 Test digital inputs ..................................................................................... 51
3.10.2 Test digital outputs .................................................................................. 55
3.10.3 Test analogue inputs ............................................................................... 57
3.10.4 Test analogue outputs ............................................................................. 59
3.11 Process settings ...................................................................................... 60
3.11.1 Process settings: Timer ........................................................................... 60
3.11.2 Process settings: Time recordings .......................................................... 61
3.11.3 Process settings: Counter ....................................................................... 62
3.12 Data backup............................................................................................. 63
3.12.1 Backup of data ......................................................................................... 63
3.13 Operation ................................................................................................. 65
3.13.1 Display and set feed data ........................................................................ 66
3.13.2 Displaying and setting machine data ....................................................... 71
3.13.3 Displaying and setting discharge data ..................................................... 75
3.13.4 Displaying alarms and warnings .............................................................. 77
3.13.5 Opening the “Motor" screen..................................................................... 78
3.13.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen ...................................................... 80
3.13.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen ......................................................... 84
3.13.8 Opening the “Valve" screen ..................................................................... 84
3.13.9 Open the “Controller” screen ................................................................... 86
3.13.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen ....................................................... 89
3.14 Help ......................................................................................................... 93
3.14.1 Documentation......................................................................................... 94
3.14.2 Colour concept......................................................................................... 95
3.14.3 Messaging function .................................................................................. 96
3.14.4 Remote operation .................................................................................... 97
3.14.5 Screen settings ........................................................................................ 98
3.14.6 Machine information .............................................................................. 104
3.15 Service ................................................................................................... 105
3.15.1 Values and Settings ............................................................................... 106
3.15.2 “Unitrol“ System ..................................................................................... 107
3.16 Training .................................................................................................. 108
3.17 GEA Westfalia Separator ...................................................................... 109
3.18 Central control via potential-free contacts ............................................. 111
3.19 Diagram of monitoring systems ............................................................. 111
3.20 Diagram of ejection monitoring via motor current.................................. 111
3.20.1 Diagram of bowl monitoring via motor current ....................................... 112
3.20.2 Diagram of ejection monitoring via speed measurement ...................... 113
3.20.3 Diagram of bowl monitoring via bowl speed .......................................... 114
3.21 Timer description T00 to T62................................................................. 115
3.22 Programme logic for OSE separators.................................................... 118
3.22.1 Programme logic - Diagram ...-0136-... ............................................... 118
3.22.2 Programme logic - Diagram ...0196-... ................................................ 124
3.22.3 Programme logic - Diagram ...-91-... ................................................... 130
3.23 Identification of the contents of pipelines for seagoing ships ................ 136
3.23.1 Colour-coded identification of the media ............................................... 136
3.24 Control cabinet of the control................................................................. 136
3.24.1 Frontal view of control cabinet ............................................................... 136
3.24.2 Inner view control cabinet ...................................................................... 138
3.24.3 Special designs...................................................................................... 138
4 Technical data 141
4.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................... 142

4.1.1 Certificates and approvals ..................................................................... 142
4.1.2 Directives and declarations ................................................................... 142
4.1.3 Dimensional drawing HMI 4“, 7“ and 9“ ................................................. 142
4.1.4 Technical data of the HMI device .......................................................... 142

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device ........................................................... 148

5.1.1 Safety during transport .......................................................................... 148
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures ..................................................... 148
5.1.3 Check for transport damage .................................................................. 148
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions ..................................... 148
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage ................ 148
6 Assembly and installation 149
6.1 Safety information .................................................................................. 150

6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection ................................. 150
6.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 150
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use ............................................ 150
6.2.2 Use with additional measures................................................................ 150
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions ............................................................. 150
6.3 Specify mounting position ...................................................................... 151
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out ............................................................. 152
6.5 Installing the HMI device ....................................................................... 153
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps ........................................................................... 153
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket ............................................................... 154
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device ........................................................................ 155
6.6 Connecting the HMI device ................................................................... 156
6.6.1 Information about the connection .......................................................... 156
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding ............................................................................ 157
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding ................................................ 157
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply ................................................................ 158
6.6.5 Connecting the control unit .................................................................... 159
6.6.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device .............................................. 159
7 Settings 161
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device ............................................................. 162

7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel ............................................... 162
7.2 Set and document operating parameters .............................................. 163
7.3 Visualisation file in the HMI device ........................................................ 165
7.3.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”) ............................................. 165
7.3.2 Backing up the current visualisation ...................................................... 169
7.4 Set IP address ....................................................................................... 173
7.5 Alarm simulation and alarm test ............................................................ 177
7.5.1 Alarms#01 to #67................................................................................... 177
7.6 Timer list OSE 5-…-… ........................................................................... 182
7.7 Timer list OSE 10-…-… ......................................................................... 183
7.7.1 Timer list OSE 20-…-… ......................................................................... 184
7.7.2 Timer list OSE 40-…-… ......................................................................... 185
7.7.3 Timer list OSE 80-…-… ......................................................................... 186
7.7.4 Timer list OSE 120-…-… ....................................................................... 187
7.8 Description counter and time recording ................................................. 188
7.9 Settings counter/time recording ............................................................. 190
7.10 Speed settings ....................................................................................... 192
7.11 Settings for temperature and ejection monitoring.................................. 194
7.12 Set maintenance and repair intervals .................................................... 196
7.12.1 Set service interval of separator ............................................................ 196
7.12.2 Set service interval water detector (WMS sensor) ................................ 197

8 Commissioning 199

8.1.1 Safety during commissioning................................................................. 200
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................. 200
8.2.1 Program memory ................................................................................... 200
8.2.2 Front panel controls ............................................................................... 202
8.3 Using the service concept ..................................................................... 202
8.3.1 Activating the service concept ............................................................... 202
8.3.2 Replacing HMI device ............................................................................ 202
8.3.3 Deactivating the service concept ........................................................... 203
8.4 Commissioning the project .................................................................... 203
8.4.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device .................................................. 203
8.4.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project ........................................ 203
8.4.3 Operating modes of the HMI ................................................................. 203
8.4.4 Change operating mode ........................................................................ 203
8.4.5 Possibilities of data transfer ................................................................... 204
8.4.6 Set transfer mode .................................................................................. 204
8.4.7 Start transfer .......................................................................................... 205
8.4.8 Test project ............................................................................................ 206
8.4.9 Backup and restore data ....................................................................... 207
8.4.10 Update operating system ....................................................................... 207
8.4.11 Manage options and license keys ......................................................... 207
8.5 Operate separator.................................................................................. 207
8.5.1 Start the separator ................................................................................. 207
8.5.2 Switch on the separator ......................................................................... 208
8.5.3 Start production ..................................................................................... 209
8.5.4 Stop production...................................................................................... 209
8.5.5 Stop separator ....................................................................................... 210
9 Operation 213
9.1 Avoiding hazards before start-up........................................................... 214

9.2 Safety during operation ......................................................................... 214
9.3 Monitoring operation .............................................................................. 216
9.4 Starting up the centrifuge ...................................................................... 216
9.4.1 Before starting-up .................................................................................. 216
9.5 Operate device IO.................................................................................. 216
9.5.1 Use on-screen keyboard ....................................................................... 217
9.6 Manual and automatic mode ................................................................. 217
9.7 Check water detector (WMS sensor)..................................................... 218
10 Trouble shooting 223
10.1 Safety when eliminating operating malfunctions ................................... 224

10.2 Alarm overview ...................................................................................... 225
10.3 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 226
10.3.1 Fluctuating or non-existent speed display ............................................. 235
10.3.2 Checking the speed sensors ................................................................. 235
10.4 Operational faults help texts .................................................................. 236
10.4.1 Status and fault indication ..................................................................... 241
11 Maintenance 245
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance ............................................... 246

11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen ...................................................................... 246
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices ...................................... 246

11.2.2 Cleaning the screen ............................................................................... 247
12 Repair 249
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ...................................... 250

12.1.2 Hazards from electricity ......................................................................... 250
12.2 Repair .................................................................................................... 250
13 Decommissioning 251
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal ...................................................... 252
14 Spare parts 253
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 254



1.1 Sphere of application ............................................................................... 10

1.2 Other applicable documents .................................................................... 10
1.3 Structure of safety notices ....................................................................... 11
1.4 Target groups .......................................................................................... 12
1.4.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 13
1.4.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 13
1.5 Service offers ........................................................................................... 13
1.5.1 Service ..................................................................................................... 13
1.5.2 Training .................................................................................................... 13
1.6 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 14


This document applies to all persons who work with or on the system. It applies to
the plant operator as a basis for compiling standard operating procedures (SOP)
for conduct at the workplace on the HMI device of the machine/system.
This manual is valid for HMI devices with 4" operating panels.
This document is part of the HMI device and is also required for repeat commis-
sioning:
• Retain documents supplied and supplementary documents throughout the life-
time of the HMI device.
• Pass on all retained documents to the subsequent owner of the HMI device.
Due to the colour scheme, approved copies of this document of any kind are only
valid if prepared using the RGB (red-green-blue) colour space. Black and white co-
pies are not admissible.
1.2 Other applicable documents

Besides this instruction manual, the following documents included in the overall
documentation also apply:
• Safety information for the machine/system
• Instruction manual of the control manufacturer
• Instruction manual for the machine/system
• Project-related documents
• Set of drawings
• Data sheets
• Plans and lists
• P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram)
• Documentation for the machine/system
• Instruction manuals for components of other manufacturers, such as motors,
heaters, pumps, valves and measuring equipment.
Pertinent standards and regulations
• DIN EN 62079 for manuals

1.3 Structure of safety notices

The device has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operated
safely. This manual will refer to further potential risks by using warning notices at
the relevant points.
A distinction is made between hazards which result in damage to the device, to
system components and to the environment and hazards which lead to potential or
probable injury or loss of life to staff.
plemented, the device or something else in its vicinity may be damaged.
Danger signals

death.


nates.



NOTICE Type and source of hazard
1.4 Target groups

The target groups for this documentation are all persons involved in installing, as-
sembling, operating, maintaining and repairing the machine.
What work may be carried out by what target group depends on the qualification of
the personnel and on the type of work.
In the tables in the chapters entitled "Troubleshooting" and "Maintenance", the re-
sponsible target group is specified in addition to the activity.
1.4.1 Operator
Abbreviation: Op
The operator is employed by the customer and has been briefed in the following
operations:
• Starting and shutting down the machine.
• Monitoring the machine and process (e.g. by means of indicators).
• Execution of easy re-lubrication and cleaning operations.
When given specific directions, the operator is able to carry out simple modifica-
tions to the process, e.g.:
• Adjusting temperatures, pressures and throughput capacities.
• Dosing additives.

1.4.2 Skilled worker

Abbreviation: Skilled
The skilled worker is normally employed by the customer and has been briefed in
the following areas:
• Performing easy assembly work
• Performing routine maintenance work or servicing
• Limited settings and parametrization on the components and control system
The skilled worker has basic technical knowledge. The basic knowledge corre-
sponds to a technical apprenticeship (mechanical or electrical).
The skilled worker is selected and deployed by the employer (plant operator).
GEA Westfalia Separator will carry out the briefing only in specific technical fea-
tures that are part of the supply schedule and and will indicate potential hazards.
This briefing is no substitute for an apprenticeship.
1.4.3 Trained specialist

Abbreviation: Tspec
The trained specialist normally belongs to the service team of GEA Westfalia Sep-
arator Group.
In exceptional cases, skilled workers employed by the customer can obtain a cor-
responding qualification by attending training courses held by GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator Group.
1.5 Service offers
1.5.1 Service
GEA Westfalia Separator offers comprehensive service for the following areas:
• Assembly
• Commissioning
• Regular maintenance
• Repairs
• Checking the operating state
• Checking in dismantled state
• Decommissioning for a long-term shut-down
• Storage and conservation during long-term standstill
• Restarting
• Decommissioning and disposal
• Training
1.5.2 Training
GEA Westfalia Separator regularly holds training courses for customer employees.
Training content is aimed at the customer's operating and service staff who work
with the machine. The operator must know how the machine functions.
Trained operators assure the operating safety of the machine.
Many different applications require competent process engineering know-how. On-
ly adequately trained employees in service ensure a high quality standard. This re-
quires ongoing further training.

The demands on the qualification of the service staff are growing increasingly.
GEA Westfalia Separator consequently offers a qualification model and training
concept.
• Contact the following addresses for training courses for operating and service
staff.
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Werner Habig Straße 1 • 59302 Oelde
(Germany) • Tel. +49 (0)2522 77-1469 • Fax +49 (0)2522 77-31469 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Hammerbrook Straße 90 • 20097 Ham-
burg (Germany) • Phone +49 40 589650-0 • Fax +49 40 7380585 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
1.6 Additional documentation

Request further information and technical documentation from the following places:
• Directly from GEA Westfalia Separator in Oelde.
• From the nearest representative of GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Per Internet under: gea.com
• Vie e-mail at: wsinfo@gea.com

2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 16

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 16
2.3 Qualification of personnel ........................................................................ 16
2.1 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 17
2.2 Modifications or manipulation of the unit ................................................. 17
2.3 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device ................................................. 17
2.3.1 Open equipment ...................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Electrical power ....................................................................................... 18
2.3.3 Operating the HMI device safely ............................................................. 18
2.3.4 Areas at risk of explosion ........................................................................ 18
2.3.5 High-frequency radiation ......................................................................... 18
2.3.6 Instructions for using the device .............................................................. 18
2.4 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 19
2.5 Liability ..................................................................................................... 19

2.1 Intended use

The HMI device in conjunction with the control unit is for
• visualizing the separator with all the drives, valves and controls required and lo-
cated on the separator.
• menu-controlled user guidance.
• Measure the bowl speed.
• display the bowl speed.
• monitoring sensors and safety functions.
• controlling/locking pumps and peripheral equipment.
2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

The manual contains instructions for the intended use. Any operation of the HMI
device that does not fall under the intended use constitutes unintended use and is
considered to be misuse.
Reasonably foreseeable misuse includes:
• Use of unsuitable spare parts
• Use of non-approved external storage media.
• Exceeding the defined limits.
• Modification or extension of the HMI device.
• Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the manufacturer's consent.
Any misuse of the control may cause personal injury and property damage.
 Use the unit only as intended.
2.3 Qualification of personnel

Special expertise is required for working on and with the HMI device. The qualifica-
tion of the personnel with this expertise is an important requirement for the opera-
tional reliability. The requirements for the qualification are described in the individ-
ual chapters of the instruction manual. They depend on the tasks assigned.
Faulty operation, installation errors and handling errors can result in danger to life
and limb as well as severe damage to property.
The plant operator must implement measures for the qualification of its personnel:
 Assign only reliable persons to work on the HMI device.
 Allow only authorised individuals to work on the HMI device.
 Give special training and briefings to the personnel for the tasks assigned.
 Clearly define responsibilities.
 Make sure that the assigned individuals have read and understood the safety in-
formation before beginning work.
 Make sure that the assigned individuals have read and understood all sections
of the instruction manual required for their work before beginning work.
 Give special briefings to persons who cannot read, and monitor their work.
 Persons still undergoing training may only be deployed under supervision.

2.1 Responsibility of the plant operator

The operation of a machine/system and its control unit is subject to rules and regu-
lations for occupational health and safety.
The order of the rules and regulations listed below is not a reflection of their priori-
ty. The list lays no claim to completeness:
• Regulations relating to safety and health (accident prevention regulations) based
on Article 118a of the treaty establishing the EEC, e.g. directive 89/655/EEC and
follow-up versions or corresponding national regulations issued by the country of
operation.
• Regular check of safety devices
• Compliance with regulations governing occupational health and safety of em-
ployees in areas at risk of explosion, e.g. directive 1999/92/EC or corresponding
national regulations issued by the country of operation.
• Compliance with directive 94/9/EC (ATEX), directive 2004/108/EC (electromag-
netic compatibility), directive 2006/95/EC (low-voltage directive) or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Compliance with directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) or corresponding
national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within the
responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Compliance with the German Equipment and Product Safety Act or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
The plant operator is responsible for complying with rules and regulations and the
safety-conscious and hazard-conscious work of the assigned persons. These in-
clude the following measures:
 Ensuring that the statutory and other binding regulations on safety, accident pre-
vention and occupational safety are known and complied with.
 Assigning only qualified and authorised staff with technical understanding and
fundamental technical knowledge and skills to work on the control unit.
 Clearly defining and communicating responsibilities for tasks.
 Operating the control of the machine/system only when it is in perfect working
order in accordance with intended use, see the section entitled "Intended use“.
 Checking all safety devices for proper functioning before each startup.
 Having the control unit checked regularly by qualified persons for its operational
reliability. Having the control unit checked in accordance with the maintenance
schedule.
2.2 Modifications or manipulation of the unit

Modifications to the operator terminal are prohibited. They represent an unintended
use and endanger the operational reliability of the machine / system. This may
cause physical injury and damage to property.
 If modifications to the operator terminal are necessary, e.g., due to new opera-
tional sequences, contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
 Clarify the planning and the measures for the modifications to the control unit
with GEA Westfalia Separator.
2.3 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device

2.3.1 Open equipment

The HMI device is an open piece of equipment. In other words, the HMI device
may only be fitted in housings or cabinets. The HMI device is operated from its
front.
Only qualified staff may open the switch cabinet in which the HMI device is located.
Keys or a special tool should be used for this.
2.3.2 Electrical power

When the switch cabinet is open, individual areas or components may carry a le-
thal voltage.
If it is possible for these areas or components to be contacted, death or electric
shock may result.
2.3.3 Operating the HMI device safely

Directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) regulates inter alia precautions to be
taken during the startup and operation of machines within the European Economic
Area.
Ignoring these regulations is a breach of the machinery directive and the plant op-
erator is liable for the consequences. Depending on the machine being operated,
personal and material damage over and above this is not excluded.
Only start up the HMI device in a machine/system which complies with the terms of
directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive).
2.3.4 Areas at risk of explosion

The HMI device is suitable for use in areas at risk of explosion under special condi-
tions.
Follow the instructions in the manufacturer's manual.
2.3.5 High-frequency radiation

High-frequency radiation, e.g. from a mobile phone, interferes with the HMI de-
vice's functions and can lead to it malfunctioning.
 For further information, see the chapter of the same name in the manufacturer's
manual for the HMI device.
2.3.6 Instructions for using the device

Requirement for place of use
If the HMI device is operated outside closed indoor areas, it may be damaged. To
prevent damage, take suitable measures. Discuss suitable measures with GEA
 Use the HMI device only indoors.
Place of use
The HMI device is not intended for use in residential areas. If the HMI device is
used in residential areas, radio or television reception may be affected.
If the HMI device is used in a residential area, limit value class B to EN 55011 with
regard to the emission of radio interference must be ensured.

Suitable measures for achieving radio interference suppression of limit value class
B include, for example:
• fitting the HMI device in earthed switch cabinets
• using filters in power supply cables
Separate approval is also required.
2.4 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials

Spare parts, wear parts, and operating materials can cause bodily injury and prop-
erty damage if they do not meet the requirements.
Genuine spare parts and operating materials from GEA Westfalia Separator Group
satisfy all pre-conditions for the operating safety of the unit.
 Use only genuine spare parts.
 Use only genuine operating materials.
 Use the order-specific spare parts catalog supplied.
 See the chapter "Spare parts" for ordering spare parts and operating materials.
 Comply with limits.
2.5 Liability
Reasons for the immediate passing of liability to the plant operator independent of
existing warranty and guarantee periods.
• Improper installation by inadequately trained persons.
• Improper handling in deviation from the intended use.
• Non-observance of the user instructions.
Warranty and liability conditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA
Westfalia Separator are not extended by the above information.
Note:
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified or
unauthorised personnel.


8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3 Description
3.1 Personal safety gear ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Function of control unit and HMI IO device ............................................. 23
3.3 HMI devices 4“ – 9“ ................................................................................. 23
3.3.1 4" HMI device .......................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 7" – 9" HMI devices ................................................................................. 25
3.3.3 Interfaces ................................................................................................. 28
3.4 Features ................................................................................................... 30
3.5 Getting to know the control panel of your WS IO .................................... 30
3.5.1 Treating the WS IO control panel properly .............................................. 30
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel ............................................................ 32
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area ................................... 32
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays ................................................................ 34
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens ................................................. 35
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements .................................................. 36
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off ................................................ 38
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines .................................................................. 38
3.5.9 Displaying output fields ............................................................................ 39
3.5.10 Displaying input fields .............................................................................. 40
3.6 Editing data in input fields ........................................................................ 41
3.6.1 Opening input fields ................................................................................. 41
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields ................................................................ 41
3.7 Password protection ................................................................................ 43
3.8 Start-up and commissioning .................................................................... 43
3.9 Factory configurator ................................................................................. 45
3.10 I/O check .................................................................................................. 50
3.10.1 Test digital inputs ..................................................................................... 51
3.10.2 Test digital outputs .................................................................................. 55
3.10.3 Test analogue inputs ............................................................................... 57
3.10.4 Test analogue outputs ............................................................................. 59
3.11 Process settings ...................................................................................... 60
3.11.1 Process settings: Timer ........................................................................... 60
3.11.2 Process settings: Time recordings .......................................................... 61
3.11.3 Process settings: Counter ....................................................................... 62
3.12 Data backup............................................................................................. 63
3.12.1 Backup of data ......................................................................................... 63
3.13 Operation ................................................................................................. 65
3.13.1 Display and set feed data ........................................................................ 66
3.13.2 Displaying and setting machine data ....................................................... 71
3.13.3 Displaying and setting discharge data ..................................................... 75
3.13.4 Displaying alarms and warnings .............................................................. 77
3.13.5 Opening the “Motor" screen..................................................................... 78
3.13.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen ...................................................... 80
3.13.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen ......................................................... 84
3.13.8 Opening the “Valve" screen ..................................................................... 84
3.13.9 Open the “Controller” screen ................................................................... 86
3.13.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen ....................................................... 89

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.14 Help ......................................................................................................... 93

3.14.1 Documentation......................................................................................... 94
3.14.2 Colour concept......................................................................................... 95
3.14.3 Messaging function .................................................................................. 96
3.14.4 Remote operation .................................................................................... 97
3.14.5 Screen settings ........................................................................................ 98
3.14.6 Machine information .............................................................................. 104
3.15 Service ................................................................................................... 105
3.15.1 Values and Settings ............................................................................... 106
3.15.2 “Unitrol“ System ..................................................................................... 107
3.16 Training .................................................................................................. 108
3.17 GEA Westfalia Separator ...................................................................... 109
3.18 Central control via potential-free contacts ............................................. 111
3.19 Diagram of monitoring systems ............................................................. 111
3.20 Diagram of ejection monitoring via motor current.................................. 111
3.20.1 Diagram of bowl monitoring via motor current ....................................... 112
3.20.2 Diagram of ejection monitoring via speed measurement ...................... 113
3.20.3 Diagram of bowl monitoring via bowl speed .......................................... 114
3.21 Timer description T00 to T62................................................................. 115
3.22 Programme logic for OSE separators.................................................... 118
3.22.1 Programme logic - Diagram ...-0136-... ............................................... 118
3.22.2 Programme logic - Diagram ...0196-... ................................................ 124
3.22.3 Programme logic - Diagram ...-91-... ................................................... 130
3.23 Identification of the contents of pipelines for seagoing ships ................ 136
3.23.1 Colour-coded identification of the media ............................................... 136
3.24 Control cabinet of the control................................................................. 136
3.24.1 Frontal view of control cabinet ............................................................... 136
3.24.2 Inner view control cabinet ...................................................................... 138
3.24.3 Special designs...................................................................................... 138

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.1 Personal safety gear

Follow the instructions on general requirements for working on electrical installa-
tions.
To prevent danger to life and limb, the specified personal safety gear must be
worn. If a machine or system belongs to the HMI, the personal safety gear speci-
fied for this machine/system must also be worn for operation. The safety gear must
also be worn for maintenance and repair work on the HMI or the machine/system,
see the chapter entitled "Personal safety gear" in the machine/system manual.
3.2 Function of control unit and HMI IO device

Visualizing and operating the control unit
The HMI IO device is programmed at the factory for the required operation of the
control task.
The motors and valves connected to the control unit are actuated in accordance
with the control task in question.
Measuring (control unit)

The bowl speeds of the connected separator are measured and displayed. This is
effected via speed sensors installed on the separator, see the section entitled "Ar-
eas of application".
Displays (HMI IO device)

The following measured/calculated values can be displayed:
• bowl speed
• state of the connected valves and motors
• feed quantities, discharge quantities, pressures, temperatures.
Important: The plant operator is not authorised to carry out program modifications.
The plant operator can make the following settings on the touchscreen of the HMI
device:
• machine-specific, product-specific and process-specific preselections
• threshold values
• System-specific settings
3.3 HMI devices 4“ – 9“

This chapter describes the hardware for the three different HMI devices. Only the
4“ HMI has function keys.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.3.1 4" HMI device
Fig. 1 Operating panel 4“ HMI device with function keys
Important: The function keys (1) are not active.

Rear view
Fig. 2 Rear of 4" HMI device
1 Nameplate
2 Slot for SD memory cards - accessible from the device side
3 Labelling strips
Side view

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Fig. 3 Side view of 4" HMI device
1 Openings for clamps
2 Interfaces
3 Mounting gasket
4 Slots for SD memory cards
3.3.2 7" – 9" HMI devices
Fig. 4 Control panel of 7" – 15" HMI IO device

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Rear view
Fig. 5 Rear of 7" – 9" HMI device
1 Nameplate
2 Slots for SD memory cards

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Side view of 7" HMI device
Fig. 6 As example: Side view of 7" HMI device with touchscreen
1 Openings for clamps
2 Interfaces
3 Mounting gasket

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.3.3 Interfaces
Interfaces for the 4" HMI device
Fig. 7 Interfaces for 4" HMI device
Legend 1 X2 PROFIBUS (Sub-D RS422/485)
2 Connection for equipotential bonding (earthing)
3 X60 USB Type Mini-B
4 X1 PROFINET (LAN), 10/100 MBit
5 X61 USB Type A
6 X80 terminal for power supply
Interfaces for the 7" and 9" HMI device
Fig. 8 Interfaces for 7" and 9" HMI device
Legend 1 X80 terminal for power supply
2 Connection for equipotential bonding (earthing)

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3 X2 PROFIBUS (Sub-D RS422/485)
4 X61 / X62 USB Type A
5 X1 PROFINET (LAN), 10/100 MBit
6 X90 audio line IN / OUT
7 X60 USB Type Mini-B
NOTES:
Use interface X1 or interface X60 for connecting a projecting PC.
Use interfaces X61/X62 for connecting peripherals like a printer or keyboard.
Use interface X90 for connecting a loudspeaker.
Fix the connecting cables for USB and PROFINET on the rear of the HMI device
using cable ties.
On the 4” and 7" variants, secure cables with a separate strain relief plate. Fit the
strain relief plate to the HMI device.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.4 Features
The HMI device has the following features:
• Graphic display for machine monitoring and machine control
• Control system with modular expandability
• Multilingual text display
• Touch screen or function keys with LED status display
• Programmable logic control
• Control voltage 24V
• High operational reliability
• Long service life
3.5 Getting to know the control panel of your WS IO

The control panel of the "WS IO" control unit was developed in accordance with the
new uniform operating philosophy at GEA Westfalia Separator. All HMI devices are
equipped with touchscreens. The fixed arrangement of the screen and standard-
ised symbols ensure rapid orientation.
Important: The touchscreen is adapted for use in industry. Gentle contact with the
panel, like that on tablets, is not sufficient to execute the command. Noticeable
pressure needs to be exerted on the panel.
3.5.1 Treating the WS IO control panel properly

The WS IO control panel is operated using the touchscreen. All the control objects
required for operation are shown on the touchscreen after the HMI device is started
up.
Fig. 9 Start screen after switching on and booting of the HMI device
If you press one of the symbols with your finger, the respective menu opens.
The following points should be observed when operating the touchscreen:

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
 do not execute several operations simultaneously.

This may trigger an unintended action.
 always press only one control object on the screen.
 do not touch the touchscreen with sharp or pointed objects.
 avoid contacting the screen by hitting it with hard objects.
Both can lead to a significant reduction in lifetime up to and including total failure of
the touchscreen.
 only touch the HMI device touchscreen with a finger.
 if necessary, use protective films for the touchscreen.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel

The control panel is divided up into fixed areas.
Fig. 10
1 Visualization (process, assistence systems,...)
2 Process operation tool bar
3 Main navigation area
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area

On the right-hand side is the main navigation area with the assistants. The mean-
ing of the icons is explained below.
The active or selected assistant is white, the others are shown in grey.
S8555002 Fig. 11

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area
Startup Assistant
Factory settings, commissioning information, I/O check, customer-

specific extensions
Operation Assistant
Operation, overview of system, process status information
Help Desk
Documentation, colour concept, remote access facilities, screen

settings, customer-specific extensions
Service Assistant
Contact/hotline, servicing information, customer-specific extensions
Training
Safety instructions, separation technology, operating simulation,

customer training
Company portrait
General information about GEA
Screenshot
Screenshot function for current screen display; image saved to USB

stick.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays
Show status display
Status display
02.00 Fig. 12 Example for start screen of Operating Assistant with status displays
Icons can display a status using indicator colours. Status displays can be found on
modules or complex components.
Status relates to the complete sensor system on this module or the component.
The indicator colours correspond to traffic light colours.
Important: Persons with restricted ability to perceive colour may only be able to
assign these colours correctly to a restricted extent under certain conditions. This
should be taken into account when selecting operating staff.
Meaning of the status displays
Red indicates a fault/alarm.
Yellow defines an incorrect status, a warning.
Green indicates a correct status.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
When the status display is pressed, the message screen for associated active
warnings and alarms opens.
Status displays are found only on modules which are also equipped with sensor
systems. The sensor system must be able to generate warnings and alarms.
Faults and alarms can be acknowledged, see the section entitled "Alarms, warn-
ings and message screens".
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens
Icon for Operation Assistant in the case of an alarm
"Operation Assistant" icon starts flashing red. This alarm can al-
ways be seen, regardless of the current display being shown.
Important: No additional pop-up screen appears.
Once the "Operation Assistant" icon is pressed, the "Process" overview screen ap-
pears.
Pressing on a yellow or red status indicator opens a screen containing the associ-
ated and currently active alarms or warnings.
02.05.01 Fig. 13 Active alarm messages
The status of the messages is "K", i.e. "Alarm message has arrived".
The following designations show the status of the alarm message:
Designation of alarm message status
K Alarm message has arrived

KQ Alarm message (has arrived and) has been acknowledged
KQG Alarm message (has arrived, has been acknowledged and) has
gone

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Acknowledging alarms and warnings
Acknowledgement key
Acknowledge active alarm messages individually or en masse,

depending on application.
 Press the icon for the acknowledgement key to acknowledge
messages and alarms.
No alarms or warnings active.
Active alarms and warnings are acknowledged with the "Acknowledgement" key.
The status of the acknowledged warnings and alarms in each case switches to
"KQ". When all active alarms and warnings have been acknowledged, the colour of
the acknowledgement key switches from red to white.
Alarm key
The "Alarm memory" screen can also be opened via the "Alarm
key" in the toolbar of the "Active alarm messages/warnings"
screen.
The "Alarm memory" shows all the alarms including active ones.
Pressing the "Alarm key" again returns you to the "Active alarm messag-
es/warnings" screen
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements

In addition to the indicator colours, other colours are used for elements:
• white icons are active. They are significant for the selected screen or show the
user where he or she currently is. When pressed, the assigned function (e.g. "X"
to close a screen) is executed.
• Grey icons are inactive elements. Grey icons occur in the navigation bar. When
they are selected, the level is changed and their colour changes to white.
Displaying active and inactive elements
The white colour indicates an active element.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
The grey colour indicates an inactive element.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off

Different functions can be switched on and off. The icons used for this are shown in
white, supplemented by a green or red icon to activate or deactivate the function in
question.
Examples for icons for switching on and off
Activate process.
Deactivate product feed.
Close valve.
Open valve.
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines

The colours assigned to pipelines depend on the media being transported in them
and are generally based on “ISO 14726 . marking of pipelines on seagoing ships”.
These colours are assigned to the following media:
Colour display Main colour Medium
1)
Black Contaminated media
Blue Freshwater
Brown Fuel
2)
Green Sea water
Grey Non-flammable gases

3)
Red-brown/ mahogany Masses (dry and moist)
Orange Oils, other than fuels
Silver Vapour
Red Fire extinguishing media

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Colour display Main colour Medium
Purple Acids, lyes
White Air in ventilation systems
Yellow-ochre Flammable gases
1) Black water, grey water, old oil, exhaust

2) For ships with different shipping areas (sea/river ships) all water from outboard.
3) Except for powder and foam for fire fighting
 Further details on identification colours on pipelines see chapter “Marking of
pipelines on seagoing ships”.
NOTE:
• On an application-specific basis, standards which deviate from this colour sys-
tem may be followed.
• Persons with restricted ability to perceive colour may only be able to assign
these colours to a restricted extent under certain conditions. This should be tak-
en into account when selecting operating staff.
3.5.9 Displaying output fields

Measured values are shown in green typeface on a black background.
If they are assigned to a module, they are shown as follows, e.g. on the feed side:
Example: Displaying the measured values of a module
Rectangles with
• rounded corners,
• a white edge and
• green typeface on a
• black background.
Other output values or display values which are not measured values are shown in
white typeface on a black background.
Example: Displaying output values which are not measured values
Pressing on a "measured value" opens

the associated screen to the analogue
value.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.5.10 Displaying input fields

Input fields are kept IO-compliant with black typeface on a white background.
Example: Displaying input fields
07.00.01 Fig. 14
 For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.6 Editing data in input fields

In input fields, it is possible to enter on the control panel numbers and text required
for the process.
Certain input fields are password-protected and may only be changed by author-
ised persons.
3.6.1 Opening input fields

Input fields are present in various menus.
02/01/2003 Fig. 15 Example: Opening input fields
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields
Changing a value in an input field
 Press on the white input field to change values.
The numerical or alphanumerical input field for manual entry appears on the
screen.
Manual input of numerical values
Manual input
 Press on keys to enter values.
 Press the ENTER key.

The value entered is saved.
Display switches back to previous page.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
Manual input of alphanumerical data
Manual input
 Press keys to enter text or numbers.
 Press the ENTER key.

The value entered is saved.
Display switches back to previous page.
Exit input field

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.7 Password protection

Certain entries and functions are only possible after entering a password.
• Company-related basic settings (password level 1)
• Readout of CPU data (password level 2)
When selecting enter the required pass-

word after being asked to do so.
NOTE: You can obtain the password
from GEA Westfalia Separator.
If no operation is carried out for 10
minutes, the programme returns to entry
level 0 (logout). For further processing
the password has to be entered again.
Fig. 16
IMPORTANT: However, the menu opened now is not protected. This means that
unauthorised persons can make changes in this menu.
To protect the control unit against unauthorised access, go back in the menu until
only the freely accessible menus are shown on the display.
3.8 Start-up and commissioning

The Startup Assistant includes assistance systems which support both initial com-
missioning of the machine and optimisation of the machine's performance charac-
teristics.
Further assistants can be installed here depending on machine type and applica-
tion, sales & marketing requirements or customer requirements.
Opening the Startup menu

 Press the "Startup" icon in the navigation bar.
The icon changes colour from grey (inactive) to white (active).

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
01.00 Fig. 17 Opening the Startup menu
Startup Assistant menu
1.1 Factory configurator Machine-specific default settings.
NOTE: This area is password-protected and

accessible only to authorised persons.
1.2 I/O check Digital and analogue inputs and outputs can be
tested, see section entitled "I/O check".
1.3 Process settings Process data and machine data can be en-
tered.
1.3 Data backup Contents of the menu:

• Data backup on memory card,
• load data from memory card
• Reset data to factory settings
The startup menus are standard in all controls.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.9 Factory configurator

Basic settings to the machine or system before initial commissioning are made in
the menu “factory configurator”.
These settings can be made at the following locations:
• GEA Westfalia Separator test benches
• during the switch cabinet test
• by the customer in situ
Amendments in the factory settings can only be made by trained specialists if the
following conditions are met:
• all the machine-specific safety instructions of GEA Westfalia Separator must be
followed.
• the associated machine record must be available and followed.
• customer-specific installation must be followed.
Settings can be made on the following topics:
• Machine type
• Process/ product
• Timer limits
• Sludge tank
• Bowl monitoring
• Sensor check
• Temperature regulation
• Partial ejection
• Speed monitoring
• Series mode
• 01/36 with filling
• Motor current end value
• Sep. off in standby
• Vibration monitoring
• CIP cleaning
• FSH signal
• PSL monitoring
• Flowmeter
• SMS signal
• Pure oil drain signal
• Operating-water pressure
• Cat Fine Master
• Optimum bowl cleaning
• Sludge drain flap
• Leakage sludge drain flap
• Local remote control

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
• Separator motor with frequency converter

• Startup data backup
• Startup data retrieval
Settings in the factory settings are made on a menu-guided basis. The user is led
systematically step-by-step through the values to be set. All the values which have
to be set once can be found in the factory settings.
Values which only have to be changed in exceptional circumstances are likewise
stored here.
 Switch on the HMI device and wait until the project starts.
Opening the "Startup" menu.
The icon changes colour from grey (inactive) to white (active).
Opening the "Factory settings" menu
1.1 Factory configurator  Press the factory configurator icon to display

the menu for factory settings.
NOTE: This area is password-protected and

accessible only to authorised persons.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
01.01.00 Fig. 18 Example: Factory settings
 To change data, press the respective input field and enter the desired data in the
selection window.
The following machine data are entered on this and the following pages:
Basic machine values
Designation input field Description

Machine type Press input field to select the type of installed
centrifuge, e.g. OSE or OSD.
Timer limit values When activating the selection field, the pro-
cess timers are limited to a min. and max.
value.
Sludge tank Press in the selection field to select a desired
variant of the fill level monitoring of the sludge
tank.
Bowl monitoring Press in the selection field and switch bowl
monitoring <ON> or <OFF>.
Sensor check Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
sensor check is scheduled. In case of <ON>:
Open the window of volume calculation via
the input icon to display or change values.
Temperature regulation Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
temperature regulation is scheduled.
Partial ejection Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
partial ejection is scheduled.
Speed monitoring Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
speed monitoring is scheduled.
Series mode Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
series mode is scheduled.
01 & 01/36 with filling When selecting the function, the Filling step
is added to the in the ejection process.
Motor current end value Press in the selection field to enter the motor
current end value.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Basic machine values
Designation input field Description

Sep. off in standby Press in the selection field and select <ON>, if
the function “Separator OFF in standby” is
scheduled.
Vibration monitoring Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
vibration monitoring is scheduled.
CIP cleaning Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
CIP cleaning is scheduled.
FSH signal Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
FSH cleaning is scheduled. Only for process
01 or 91.
PSL monitoring Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
PSL monitoring is scheduled.
Flowmeter Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
flowmeter is scheduled.
Flow measurement When selecting flowmeter <ON>, the flow is

shown by means of a pressure measurement.
Press the input icon to get to the window
“Flowmeter”. There you can see the current
pressure and flow and select the machine
type and orifice plate diameter.
SMS signal/ FSH signal Press in the selection field and select, if the
SMS signal is digital or analogue.
Pure oil monitoring Press in the selection field and select, if the
pure oil is scheduled digital or analogue.
Operating-water pressure Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
operating water pressure monitoring is
scheduled.
CatFineMaster Press in the selection field and select, if Cat-
FineMaster is present (<ON>) or not (<OFF>).
In case of <ON>: Open the window of the
CatFineMaster via the input icon to display or
change values.
Optimum bowl cleaning Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
the bowl cleaning needs to be increased.
Sludge drain flap Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
an automatic sludge flap is installed (option-
al).
Leakage sludge drain flap Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
a leakage detection mechanism is installed at
the sludge flap (optional).
Local remote control Press in the selection field and select <ON> if
the machine can be started via remote con-
trol.
Data backup on memory card Currently set system data are stored.
To navigate in the menu

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Press arrow for next page.
Press arrow for previous page.
 Press the icon to return to the Startup Assistant overview.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.10 I/O check

In this menu, it is possible to open all digital and analogue inputs and outputs and
test them.
Open menu I/O check
1.2 I/O check  Press icon to open the I/O menu.
01.02.00 Fig. 19 I/O check portal
 Press the designations to open the inputs or outputs.

All inputs and outputs are grouped numerically and their individual statuses dis-
played.
Inputs are shown flush left:
01.02.01.01

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Fig. 20 Example for display of inputs
Outputs are shown flush right:
01.02.02.01Fig. 21 Example for display of outputs
An icon in the form of a square shows the status of the signal and links to the rele-
vant screen.
The following icons are used:
Icons for inputs and outputs
Signal "0" in automatic mode.
Signal "1" in automatic mode.
Signal "Fault" in automatic mode.
Signal "0" in simulation mode/manual mode, yellow frame flashes.
Signal "1" in simulation mode/manual mode, yellow frame flashes.
Signal "Fault" when simulation mode/manual mode are switched

on, yellow frame flashes.
When any input or output is selected, the associated screen component in which
simulation or manual mode can be selected opens.
3.10.1 Test digital inputs
Open digital inputs
Digital inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

inputs.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
01.02.01.01 Fig. 22 Example: Digital inputs
Digital inputs DI 0.0 to DI 0.4
Designation Description
DI 0.0 The separator in ope- Feedback separator motor ON/OFF
ration
DI 0.1 Separator with fault Feedback separator motor PTC
DI 0.2 Speed bowl Speed sensor bowl
DI 0.3 Free
DI 0.4 LSL sludge tank Feedback level switch sludge tank empty
Digital inputs DI0.5 to DI1.1
DI 0.5 LSH sludge tank Feedback level switch sludge tank full
DI 0.6 LSHH sludge tank, Feedback level switch 1 sludge tank overflow
level 1
DI 0.7 LSHH sludge tank, Feedback level switch 2 sludge tank overflow
level 2
DI 1.0 Feed pump operation Feedback feed pump motor ON/OFF
DI 1.1 Feed pump fault Feedback feed pump motor PTC

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
DI 1.2 Feedback valve Feedback pressure sensor water discharge

sludge flap too high
DI 1.3 Water sensor Feedback water sensor (Unitrol)
DI 1.4 Vibro 1 Feedback contact vibration monitoring level 1
DI 1.5 Vibro 2 Feedback contact vibration monitoring level 2
DI 2.0 Sludge pump ON Feedback feed pump motor ON/OFF
DI 2.1 Sludge pump fault Feedback sludge pump motor PTC
DI 2.2 PSL discharge pres- Feedback pressure sensor product discharge
sure too low
DI 2.3 PSH discharge pres- Feedback pressure sensor product discharge
sure too high
DI 2.4 PSL SMS pressure Feedback pressure sensor sludge space too
low
DI 2.5 FSH water discharge Feedback pressure sensor water discharge
too high
DI 2.6 Fill level sludge Monitoring of sludge discharge with automatic
discharge sludge flap.
DI 2.7 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop active
DI 3.0 Remote: Separator Separator motor ON / external
ON
DI 3.1 Remote: Separator Separator motor OFF / external
OFF
DI 3.2 Remote: Pump ON Feed pump motor ON / external

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Digital inputs DI 3.3 to DI 3.7
DI 3.3 Remote: Pump OFF Feed pump motor OFF / external
DI 3.4 Remote: Process ON Process ON / external
DI 3.5 Remote: Process Process OFF / external
OFF
DI 3.6 SPS voltage supply Feedback SPS voltage supply ok
OK
DI 3.7 Voltage supply OK Feedback voltage supply ok
Press arrow for "I/O check" start page.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.10.2 Test digital outputs
Open digital outputs
Digital outputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

outputs.
01.02.02.01 Fig. 23 Example: Digital outputs
Digital outputs DQ 0.0 to DQ 0.4
DQ 0.0 Feed valve Control product valve Closed / Open
DQ 0.1 Displacement and Control displacement and filling water valve
filling water valve Open / Closed
DQ 0.2 Control water valve Control operating water valve Closed / Open
DQ 0.3 Free
DQ 0.4 Free

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
DQ 0.5 Free
DQ 0.6 Lamp test When pressing the key the output is set for 2
sec.
DQ 0.7 Release of heater Release of an external heater
DQ 1.0 Heater control valve Vapour or thermal oil valve open.
Open
DQ 1.1 Heater control valve Vapour or thermal oil valve closed.
Closed

DQ 2.0 Separator: Motor Off Stop signal for contactor/FC main motor
DQ 2.1 Feed pump: Motor Stop signal for contactor/FC pump motor
Off
DQ 2.2 Sludge pump
ON/OFF
DQ 2.3 Free
DQ 2.4 Free
DQ 2.5 Free
DQ 2.6 Free
DQ 2.7 Floating contact: Col- Floating signal exchange to customer collec-
lective alarm tive alarm.
DQ 3.0 Floating contact: Wa- Floating signal exchange to customer alarm
ter seal broken water lock lost
DQ 3.1 Floating contact Floating signal exchange to customer alarm
alarm TSH temperature too high

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
DQ 3.2 Floating contact Floating signal exchange to customer alarm
alarm TSL temperature too low
DQ 3.3 Free
DQ 3.4 Free
DQ 3.5 Free
DQ 3.6 Free
Digital outputs DQ 3.7
DQ 3.7 Free
3.10.3 Test analogue inputs
Open analogue inputs
Analogue inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the ana-

logue inputs.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
01.2.01.04 Fig. 24 Examples for analogue inputs
Analogue inputs AI 100 to AI 106
AI 100 Product temperature PT Measurement of product temperature Shut-
100 min./max. down if the min/max settings are undercut and
exceeded.
AI 102 PI controller PT 100 Measurement of the product temperature,
with set PI controller.
AI 104 Control cabinet PT 100 Measurement of the control cabinet tempera-
ture (optional)
AI 106 Motor current separator Power consumption of the separator motor
in input fields".
Analogue inputs AI 110 to AI 116
AI 110 Discharge pressure Measurement of the product discharge with
pure oil pressure transmitter.
AI 112 SMS pressure Measurement of the sludge monitoring sys-
tem with pressure transmitter.
AI 114 Free
AI 116 Flow feed Measurement of the flow in the feed with a
pressure transmitter.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
in input fields".
3.10.4 Test analogue outputs
Open analogue outputs
Analogue outputs  Press icon to open the pages of the ana-

logue outputs.
01.02.03.01 Fig. 25 Examples for analogue outputs

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Analogue outputs AQ 90 to AQ 112
AQ 90 Current separator motor Current power consumption of the
separator motor
AQ 92 Product temperature Current product temperature
AQ 110 Free
AQ 112 Free
 Press arrow for "I/O check" start page.
 Press the icon to return to the Startup Assistant overview.
3.11 Process settings
Display “Process settings” menu
1.3 Process settings  Press field to open the “Process settings”

menu.
3.11.1 Process settings: Timer
01.03.01 Fig. 26
Process-relevant data such as fair values and counter can be read and/or set.
 Further information on timers and counters see chapter “Settings”, sections
“Timer” and “Counter”.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
If data has to be changed, the input of a password is required for some timers.
 All timers, with number, designations and descriptions see chapter “Timer de-
scriptions....”.
3.11.2 Process settings: Time recordings
01.03.01 Fig. 27 Process settings time recordings
 All counters, numbers, descriptions and the machine types in which they are
used, see chapter “Settings” sections “Description counters and time record-
ings”.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Exit menu “Process settings”
 Press icon for start page menu “Startup”.
3.11.3 Process settings: Counter
01.03.01 Fig. 28 Process settings counter
NOTE: If data must be changed, a password is required.

 All counters, numbers, descriptions and the machine types in which they are
used, see chapters “Description counters and time recordings”.
Exit menu “Process settings”
 Press icon for start page menu “Startup Assistant”.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.12 Data backup
Display the “Data backup” menu
1.5 Data backup  Press field.

The login window for the input of a password is
opened.
The data backup, loading of data from a memory card or resetting to factory set-
tings is reserved to authorised persons after having entered a password.
 Enter password.
 Press again on the field “Data backup”
to open the menu “Data backup”.
 Should you have any questions, kindly
contact GEA Service, see chapter
“Service”.
Fig. 29
3.12.1 Backup of data
01.05.01 Fig. 30
 Insert suitable memory card in HMI device, see chapter “HMI devices 4“ – 9“.
Backup or load data or reset it to factory settings.
 Press field to backup settings to memory card.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
 Press field to load settings from memory card.
 Press field to reset to factory settings.
 Press the arrow to exit the data backup and to return to the first
window of the startup assistant.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.13 Operation
Open the "Operation" menu
Open mode
 Press the "Operation" icon in the navigation bar.
02.00_OSE Fig. 31 Operation menu, overview
The "operation" overview shows the feed, the centrifuge and the discharge in a
general overview.
Basic measured values are assigned to the following areas here:
Meaning of the Operation Menu icons
If you press "Feed", the "Feed" page is shown, e.g. feed

rates for product/water, feed paths, controls in the feed
… to the extent that these are recorded by sensors.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting feed
data".
When the centrifuge icon is pressed, the "Centrifuge"

page is displayed.
Information about the machine, including its speed and
power reserves, is also displayed.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting ma-

chine data".
When the analog value is pressed, the analog window

"pressure gauge-Unitrol system" opens.
 For further details, see section "Unitrol system".

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
If you press the discharge icon, the "Discharge" page is

shown, e.g. discharge quantities, discharge paths, dis-
charge controls … to the extent that these are recorded
by sensors.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting dis-
charge data".
3.13.1 Display and set feed data

Display product feed rates
Display product feed data
 Press the rectangle in the main menu to display and

amend product feed data.
02.01.01 Fig. 32 Example: 2. menu level, feed
Display and set feed data
 Press the pump icon to have the pump motor screen

displayed and to make settings.
 Press the valve icon to have the valve screen dis-

played and to make settings.


8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Output field for feed temperature and icon for controller

“WXY”.
 Press the controller icon to have current control pa-

rameters and graphs of controller characteristics dis-
played and to modify them.
Display and set pump data
 Press the pump icon to have the pump motor screen

displayed and to make settings.
07.03.01
Fig. 33 3. Menu level: Settings feed pump motor
 Description of the icons and timer see chapter “Display “Motor” window”.
 To amend input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the previous
menu level.
Back
 Press the "Operation" icon to return to the overview on the first

menu level.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Show valve data
Display and set valve data

07.01.01 Fig. 34 Valve window: Step motor valve, automatic mode
Set manual mode, terminate automatic mode.
 Press icon to exit automatic mode and activate manual mode.
07.01.01.01 Fig. 35 Window: Step motor valve, manual mode

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Settings for the timers of the step motor can be effected in this window.
 Description of the icons and timer see chapter “Display “Step motor valve” win-
dow”.
 To amend values, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Terminate manual mode, activate automatic mode.
 Press the icon to activate automatic mode.
Display feed temperature and control data
Display and set feed temperature
 Press on temperature display to open the analogue

window of the feed temperature.
07.04.01-1 Fig. 36 Analogue window feed temperature, example
 Description of data and descriptions see chapter “Display “Analogue input” win-
dow”.
 To amend limit and areas, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to return to the overview on the first menu lev-
el.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Display and set controller data
 Press on controller symbol “WXY” to open the ana-

logue window of the controller.
07.04.01-1 Fig. 37 Control window
Time progression curve of the temperature controller.
 Press the icon to display the progression curve.
07.04.01-2 Fig. 38 Time progression curve of the controller

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Return to the controller window
 Press icon to return to the controller window.
Back
 Press the "Mode" icon to return to the overview on the first menu
level.
3.13.2 Displaying and setting machine data

Open second menu level
2. Open menu level
 Press the "Machine" icon to display machine data.
02.02.01 Fig. 39 Example: 2. Menu level: Machine data
 Press the icon to open the “Unitrol” menu.

For further information, see chapter “Unitrol”.
NOTE: The icon is showed only for specific machine types.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Set motor current data and speeds
 Press icon to display and set motor current data and speeds.
Note: Input is protected and a password is required to make amend-
ments.
 For more information, see the section entitled "Opening "Motor"

screen".
Descriptions of the window “Speed settings”
No. Function Description

01 Min. If the value is undercut, the machine is shut
down.
02 Max. If the value is exceeded, the machine is shut
down.
03 Offset bowl monitoring Notes see chapter “Diagram monitoring sys-
tems”.
04 Offset ejection monito- Notes see chapter “Diagram monitoring sys-
ring tems”.
05 current Current speed of the machine.
06 Impulses per revolution Impulses for speed sensor.
Descriptions of the window “Motor current settings”
No. Function Description

03 Offset bowl monitoring Notes see chapter “Diagram monitoring sys-
tems”.
04 Offset ejection monito- Notes see chapter “Diagram monitoring sys-
ring tems”.
05 Motor current Display of the current motor current

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Exiting screen
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the previous
menu level.
2. Menu level: meaning of the "Machine data" menu icons
Drive motor
 Press the "!" status symbol to display alarm messag-

es. Note the section entitled "Alarms, warnings and
message screens" in the chapter entitled "Getting to
know the control panel".
 Press the "M" motor icon to open the "Main motor"
screen.
 Further descriptions see section "Opening "Motor"
screen".
 Press on the green analogue input value "Motor cur-

rent” to open the "Analogue input value" screen.
 Further descriptions see section "Display “Analogue
input” screen".
NOTE: Input is protected and a password is required to
make amendments.
Separator valves
 Press individual valves to open the "Valve" screen

and effect settings.
Note: Input is protected and a password is required to
make amendments.
For more information, see the section entitled "Display

"Valve" screen".
Show and set Unitrol data
 Press the "!" status symbol to display alarm messag-

es.
 Press on analogue value or square symbol to show
the screen of the digital or analogue inputs or to
change values.
WMS = Water monitoring system, water sensor

SMS = Sludge monitoring system

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
02.03.01 Fig. 40 Screen separator Unitrol
Meaning of the icons of the “Separator Unitrol” screen
Water sensor (WMS) and sludge monitoring system

(SMS) of the Unitrol system.
 Press icon to show the digital signal screen (D 103).

 Further descriptions see section "Display “Digital
signal” screen".
 Press icon to show the analogue signal screen (A

002).
 Further descriptions see section "Display “Analogue
input” screen".
Set maintenance interval data WMS
 Press icon to display and set the maintenance inter-

vals WMS.
 Further information see “maintenance intervals

WMS” screen.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Screen “maintenance intervals WMS (water monitoring system)
02.03.11 Fig. 41 3. Menu level: Descriptions maintenance intervals WMS
Descriptions of the “maintenance interval WMS” screen
Maintenance interval of WMS.
Time interval to the last water detection.
 Press in input field “Nominal value” to set a new

maintenance interval.
 For changing data and entering characters, see the
chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
“Actual value” for the maintenance intervals of the water

sensor (WMS).
Exiting screen
Back one menu level
 Press the "Operation Assistant" icon to return to the

overview on the first menu level.
3.13.3 Displaying and setting discharge data

From first menu level:
 Press a square to open and change discharge da-
ta.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
02.04.01 Fig. 42 2. Menu level: discharge (example)
NOTE: The display will vary depending on the sensors and/or actuators used in the
discharge. The preselection is made in the factory settings, see chapter entitled
"Factory configurator“.
 Press “sludge” field to open the “motor sludge pump”

screen.
 Press “pure oil” field to open the associated "Ana-

logue input" screen.
 Press “signal” icon to open the associated "Sensor"

screen.
Abbreviations:
• LSHH2
• LSHH1
• LSG
• LSL
• FSH = icon only available, if digital sensor is in-
stalled.
• PSL = icon only available, if digital sensor is in-
stalled.
• PSH = icon only available, if digital sensor is in-
stalled.
 Meaning of the abbreviations see chapter “I/O test".
For an explanation of the icons for inputs and outputs, see chapter entitled "I/O
check".
Exit input field
 Press icon to exit the screen and get to the first

menu level.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.13.4 Displaying alarms and warnings
 Press the status symbol to have alarm messages displayed.
02.05.01 Fig. 43 From first + second menu level: Displaying alarm messages
Acknowledging active alarm messages

 Press the icon for the acknowledgement key to
acknowledge messages and alarms, individually or
en masse, depending on application.
Symbol is white, i.e. all alarm messages have been

acknowledged.
 Press the "Alarm screen" icon to switch between the

"Active alarm messages" and "Alarm memory"
screens.
 Press the "info" icon to display help texts.
Exit input field

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.13.5 Opening the “Motor" screen

The “Motor” screen is divided into 3 levels.
In the top level, the system number and a free description (max. 12 characters)
about the motor are displayed, together with an icon for closing the "Motor" screen.
The next level includes the manual/automatic modes and a status display for the
motor.
In the bottom level, delay times can be set.
M004 Fig. 44 "Motor" screen
Meaning of the icons in the “Motor” screen
System number of the motor and its designation, e.g. PID

no./motor name.
Closes the “Motor” screen and displays the previous

screen.
Switch off motor.
Switch on motor.
Activate manual mode.
Activate automatic mode.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Alarm delay
 To edit input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input

fields".
Switch-on delay

fields".
Switch-off delay

fields".
Status display of motor
Motor fault
Motor Off
Motor On
No motor feedback.
Motor in manual mode.
Motor locked or simulating.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.13.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen

The information on the analogue input is presented in three screens (1-3).
In all three screens is the same top level, which consists of information on the ana-
logue input and the current value of the analogue input.
“Analogeingang” screen 1 is used to make basic settings for the measuring range
and the limits.
In the “Analogeingang” screen 2, the short time curve or the current curve is dis-
played below the first level.
In the “Analogeingang” screen 3, the long time archive of the measured value of
the analogue input is displayed below the first level.
Opening the “Analogeingang” screen 1
07.00.01 Fig. 45 Analogue input screen1
Description of the icons in the top level of the 3 “Analogue input” screens
System number of the analogue input, e.g. “A4”.

Right field, PID no. or name of the analogue input.
Current measured value of the analogue input with unit.
Closes the “analogue input” screen and displays the previ-

ous screen.
Description of the icons in the medium level of the 3 screens:
Setting the measuring range of the analogue

value.
Option: Compensation of the measured value (for PT 100

only).

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Description of the icons in the lower level of the 3 screens:
Limit for alarm “Low Low”.

limit
Limit for alarm “Low”.

limit
Limit for alarm “High”.

limit
Limit for alarm “High High”.

limit
Press <I> to get further information about the meaning of

the input fields in the medium and bottom level of the
screen.
Open the progression curves
Opens screen 2, curve representation of the measured

value of the analogue input, e.g. here the short time curve.
Display “Analogue input” screen 2

The “Analogeingang” screen 2 displays the short time curve of the measured val-
ue. The right-hand pane shows the current time value; the stored values move to
the left in the display. If necessary, the scaling of the time axis can be adjusted us-
ing the zoom buttons.
Fig. 46 Analogue input screen 2

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Meaning of the icons in “Analogue input” screen 2
Opens the curve representation of the measured value of

the analogue input, e.g. here the long time curve.
Zooms into the curve.
Zooms out of the curve.
Opening the “Analogeingang” screen 3

The “Analogue input” screen 3 displays the long time curve of the measured value.
The right of the screen initially shows the time value when switching to the long-
term archive. The archived values can be viewed using the arrow buttons depend-
ing on the sampling frequency. If necessary, the scaling of the time axis can be ad-
justed using the zoom buttons.
Fig. 47 Analogue input screen 3
Scrolls the long-term curve to the left.
Scrolls the long-term curve to the right.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Zooms into the curve.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.13.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen

The “Digital signal” screen is divided into 3 levels.
The top level displays information about the digital signal and an icon for closing
the "Digital signal" screen.
The next level includes the simulation/automatic modes and a status display for the
digital signal.
D_000. Fig. 48 "Digital signal" screen
Meaning of the icons in the “Digital signal” screen
Code/designation of digital signal
Closes the “Digital signal” screen and displays the previ-

ous screen.
Alarm delay

fields".
Status display of the digital signal
No digital signal/input 0
Digital signal active/input 1
Fault
Digital signal simulating (yellow square flashing)/input 1
3.13.8 Opening the “Valve" screen

The “Valve” screen is divided into 3 levels.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
The top level displays information about the valve and an icon for closing the
"Valve" screen.
valve.
V 000. Fig. 49 "Valve" screen
Description of the icons in the “Valve” screen
System number of the valve and PID no. or valve name
Close "Valve" screen and display previous screen.
Close valve.
Open valve.
Manual mode ON.
Automatic mode ON.
Alarm delay

fields".
Alarm delay

fields".

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Description of the icons in the “Valve” screen
Switch-off delay

fields".
Select NC (normally closed)
Select NO (normally open)
Status display of the valve
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Valve in manual mode.
Valve locked or simulating.
3.13.9 Open the “Controller” screen

The “Controller” screen is divided into 4 sections.
The top level displays the system number of the controller, the measuring point
used and the manipulated variable of the controller.
The middle level contains information on the analogue input in the left section, and
on the analogue output driven by the controller in the right section.
In the lower level, the behaviour of the controller can be set.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
07.04.01-1 Fig. 50 “Controller” screen
Description of the icons in the “Regler” screen
System number of the controller.
The analogue input “A 003” is the measuring point of con-

troller “C 105”, the analogue output “Q 000” is the assigned
manipulated variable.
Closes the “Regler” screen and displays the previous

screen.
Measuring range of the analogue input “A 000”.
Actual value (controlled variable)
Current value of the analogue input.
Setpoint
Specifies the setpoint of the analogue input

fields".
Proportional coefficient (P term of the controller)
The actual value of “x” varies proportionally with the set-

point “y”. The proportional coefficient is proportional factor.
“Gain> 1” has an increasing effect
“Gain <1” has a decreasing effect

fields".

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Description of the icons in the “Regler” screen
Integral time (I term of the controller)
The integral term responds sluggishly to a deviation. Devi-

ations are added over time. The greater the integration
time, the slower the changes of the I term of the controller.
The I term makes the controller more stable but also slow-
er (more sluggish).

fields".
Calculation of control difference
The difference of nominal and actual value is the control

difference. For purposes of suppression of a minor contin-
uous oscillation due to the variable quantisation (e.g. with
a pulse-width modulation with PULSEGEN) the control
difference is guided via a deadband. With DEADB_W = 0
the deadband is switched off.

fields".
The output parameter “output signal positive impulse” is

set, if an impulse is to be emitted.

fields".
The output parameter “output signal negative impulse” is

set, if an impulse is to be emitted.

fields".
 Press icon to call up the controller graphs.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
07.04.01-2 Fig. 51 Time progression curve of the controller
 Display real time progression time progression curve.
 Stop real rime progression of the time progression curve.
 Zoom into the time progression curve.
 Zoom out of the time progression curve.
Return to the controller window
 Press icon to return to the controller window.
Back
 Press the "Mode" icon to return to the overview on the first menu
level.
3.13.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen

The “Step motor valve” screen is divided into 3 levels.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
The top level displays information about the step motor valve and an icon for clos-
ing the "Valve" screen.
valve.
07/01/2001 Fig. 52 Screen “Step motor valve”, automatic mode
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen
System number of the valve and PID no. or valve name
Close "Valve" screen and display previous screen.
Manual mode ON.
Automatic mode ON.
Run time of the motor control valve from 0 to 100%.

fields".
The output parameter “Output signal negative impulse” is

set for the set time.

fields".

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen

set, if an impulse is to be emitted. In case of manual mode
an impulse is emitted once.

fields".
Current position in % of the motor control valve.
Set manual mode
 Press the icon to activate manual mode.
Fig. 53 Open the “Step motor valve manual mode" screen
Settings for the timers of the step motor can be effected in this window.
 To change timer settings, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen in manual mode

set, if an impulse is to be emitted. Pressing the button
emits a singe pulse
The valve is in manual mode.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Status display of the valve
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Valve in manual mode.
Valve locked or simulating.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.14 Help
Opening Help and information
Open Help
 Press the “Help” icon in the navigation bar.
03.00 Fig. 54 Opening the Help Desk
Help menu
3.1 Documentation Documentation relating to the job, such as the

manual, can be retrieved here.
3.2 Colour concept Details on the colour concept of the control panel,
colour allocations, notes on standards and suitable
operating staff.
 Further information on the colour concept can
be found in chapter “Getting to know the operat-
ing panel”.
3.3 Messaging function Notes on the option of sending SMS or e-mail

messages from the control unit (e.g. in the event of
an alarm).
3.4 Remote control Notes on the option of visualizing or controlling the

control unit via a wide variety of IT components
from your own network or on an Internet-supported
basis.
3.5 Panel settings In this menu, it is possible to make various screen

settings, such as cleaning the screen, calibrating
the screen or brightness.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.6 Machine information In this menu different information about the system
can be displayed, e.g. Series number of the sepa-
rator, date of commissioning, program number etc.
3.14.1 Documentation
Opening the “Documentation” help menu
3.1 Documentation Display documentation
 Press the “Documentation” icon.
Important: Depending on the application, various documents may be stored in the

control unit. At the USB port on the HMI device, there is the option of updating
these documents using a memory stick.
Open documentation
Open documentation
 Press the PDF icon of the desired documentation.
PDF viewer opens, the desired document is displayed.
NOTE: The 4“ monitor is not suited to display documents.
03.01.02.01 Fig. 55 Help: View documentation through PDF viewer

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Navigating the PDF document
Return to the previous image.
Go to the next image.
Enlarge view
Reduce view.
Exit "Documentation" menu.
Scroll view to the left.
Scroll view to the right.
Scroll view up.
Scroll view down.
3.14.2 Colour concept
Open the “Colour concept” help menu
3.2 Colour concept Display colour concept
 Press the “Colour concept" icon.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
03.02.01 Fig. 56 Help: Information about color concept of the IO-control panel
 Further notes see chapter “Display media in pipelines”.
Important:
• On an application-specific basis, standards which deviate from this colour sys-
tem may be followed.
• Persons with restricted ability to perceive colour may only be able to assign
these colours to a restricted extent under certain conditions. This should be tak-
en into account when selecting operating staff.
3.14.3 Messaging function

This menu displays information about the messaging function.
Open the "Messaging function" menu
3.3 Messaging Notes on the option of sending SMS or e-mail

messages from the control unit (e.g. in the event
of an alarm).

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
03.01.02.01 Fig. 57 Help: Information about messaging funktion of the control panel
Important: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO HMI devices provide the option of
sending SMS or e-mail messages to fixed addresses in defined operating situa-
tions. Essentially this requires an e-mail address for the HMI device and a link be-
tween the control unit and a local SMTP server. SMS messaging is also dependent
on the provider and the receiver's associated mobile wireless contract.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
3.14.4 Remote operation

This menu includes information about the option of operating the HMI device re-
motely.
Opening the "Remote operation" menu
3.4 Remote operation Open remote operation
 Press the “Remote operation" icon.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
03.01.02.01 Fig. 58 Help: Information about remote access to the control
Important: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO HMI devices offer the option of visualiz-
ing or even operating the control unit via remote IT components (PCs, mobile
phones, tablets …). This essentially requires the control unit to be connected to a
local network or the Internet. Additional measures (for the technical security of this
"Smart Service", for example) may be necessary depending on use.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
3.14.5 Screen settings

In this menu, it is possible to make settings on the panel and call up other infor-
mation.
Open the “Panel settings” menu
3.5 Panel settings Open the “Panel settings” menu
 Press the "Screen settings" icon.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
03.05.01 Fig. 59 Help: panel settings
Making panel settings
Carry out lamp test

 Press icon to carry out lamp test.
When pressing the lamp test button all lamps available on the control
panel are switched on.
Terminate Runtime
 Press the icon to terminate the programme. The execution requires
the input of a password and is accessible only to authorised per-
sons.
Change language setting

 Press the icon, see Section “Change language”.
Clean the screen

 Press the icon, see Section “Cleaning the screen”.
 Clean the screen with a soft cloth.
Functions are blocked until the progress bar is complete.
Adjust the brightness

 Press the icon, see section entitled “Setting brightness”.
Calibrate the screen

 Press the icon, see Section “Calibrating the screen”
Set the date and time

 Press the icon and make the desired settings.
Changing language

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
03.05.07 Fig. 60 Help: panel settings - change language
Changing language
To change language setting.
 Press the flag icon, select the desired language.
Important: Depending on the philosophy of the "IO" control unit, the items which
can currently be selected will be displayed. For language selection in the exam-
ple screen above, this means that as an alternative to the current screen lan-
guage, the display will be switched to "English" after the icon is pressed.
Exit language setting.
 Press the icon to exit the language setting.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Clean the screen
Clean the screen
 Press the icon to clean the screen.

 Watch the screen cleaning time elapse.
Please clean the screen!
Fig. 61 Help: panel settings: cleaning the screen
The screen should be cleaned with a soft cloth. During screen cleaning, remaining
time is indicated by a grey progress bar shrinking to the left.
 Clean the screen, see also chapter entitled “Maintenance”.
Change the brightness
Adjust the brightness

 Press the icon, see section entitled “Setting brightness”.
03.05.02 Fig. 62 Help: Screen settings, change brightness settings

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Change the brightness
Changing the brightness
 Enter the desired percentage value in the input field.

Max. brightness at 100 %.

 Press the icon to calibrate the screen.
Fig. 63 Help: Screen Settings : Calibrate screen
 Briefly press the centre of the calibration target.

The calibration crosshairs are displayed at the next position.
 Proceed as outlined above for each of the following four positions of the calibra-
tion target.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
When the calibration target has been contacted in all positions, the following dia-
logue is displayed:
03.06.04 Fig. 64 Help: panel settings - confirm calibration
 To accept the calibration, touch the touchscreen within 30 seconds.

After touching within 30 seconds, the new calibration is saved and the display
changes back to the “Bildschirmeinstellungen” overview screen.
Otherwise, the calibration is discarded and the original calibration is used.
Set time and date
Set time and date

 Press the icon to calibrate the screen.
03.05. Fig. 65 Help: Screen Settings : Change or set time an date

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Set time and date
 Press on the input field.

An input keyboard is shown.
 Enter the current data using the input keyboard.
Further information, see chapter "Description”, section “Editing data in input fields".
3.14.6 Machine information

Information about the machine/system can be retrieved in this menu.
Open “Machine information” menu
3.6 Machine information

 Press “Machine information” field.
03.06.01 Fig. 66 Help: show an set machine information
The following information can be retrieved:

• Serial number of the separator
• Date of commissioning
• Software programme no.
• Type of HMI device
• Part no. of HMI device
• Network address of the HMI device/ the control

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.15 Service
This menu provides the relevant information for servicing and maintenance of the
system, e.g. service intervals or contact data.
Open the "Service" menu
 Press the "Service" icon in the navigation bar.
04.00 Fig. 67 Open the "Service" menu
Description of the icons in the “Service” menu
4.1 Contact/hotline Contact data and hotline for GEA Westfalia Separator.
4.2 Service intervals Information about the maintenance intervals of the ma-
chine/system.
 Display and change maintenance intervals, see

chapter “Settings”, “Set maintenance and repair in-
tervals”.
4.3 Spare parts Information about the available spare parts sets for the
machine/system.
4.4 Alarm counters Information about the alarm counters of the ma-
chine/system.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Description of the icons in the “Service” menu
4.5 Condition monito- Information about condition monitoring of the machine

ring by GEA Westfalia Separator wewatch®.
4.6 Values/Settings Information about values and settings.
4.7 Unitrol Information about values and settings for Unitrol con-
trol.
NOTE: This function is available only for particular sep-
arator types.
For further information, see chapter “Unitrol”.
3.15.1 Values and Settings
Open the “Value/settings” menu
4.6 Values/Settings  Press field to open the “Values/settings” menu.
Description of the icons in the “Value/settings” menu
The current temperature in the control cabinet is dis-

played.
 Press icon to backup data to memory card.
 Press icon to load data from memory card.
 Stop runtime.
The programme is terminated and the windows interface is shown.
NOTE: A password only accessible by authorised persons is required
for the execution of this command.
 Activate simulation mode to simulate the input and output signals.
 Press arrow for previous page.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
 Press arrow for next page.
 Press icon to return to the start page of the service menu.
3.15.2 “Unitrol“ System
Open the "Unitrol" menu
4.7 Unitrol  Press on field to open the “Unitrol” menu.
04.07.01 Fig. 68 Unitrol menu
This menu is used to control the “Unitrol” system.
Meaning of the icons in the command bar
 Press the icon to initiate total ejection.
 Press the icon to control “V5” valve.
 Press the icon to control “V6” valve.
 Press the icon to open or close water feed.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Meaning of the icons in the menu screen
 Press on a square symbol to show the screen of the digital input or

to change values.
 Press on an analogue value to show the screen of the analogue

input or to change values.
 Valve V2 is triggered with total ejection.
 Press on the associated input field to set the time for which
the valve remains closed.
NOTE: A password is required for changes.
 Press on the associated input field to set the time for which
the valve remains open.
NOTE: A password is required for changes.
Display if vale is open or closed.
Display if vale is open or closed.
3.16 Training
In this menu, general information about centrifuges, their safety, centrifugal separa-
tion technology and also about training sessions for operating staff run by GEA
Westfalia Separator can be retrieved.
Open the "Training" menu
Open Training
 Press the "Training" icon in the navigation bar.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
05.00 Fig. 69 Opening "Training" (example screen)
"Training" menu
5.1 Separation technology General information about separation technology

and how it is used at GEA Westfalia Separator.
5.2 GEA Westfalia Separator Information about the concept of the new genera-
IO tion of IO controls.
5.3 Customer training Information on training offers.
5.4 E-Learning Information on online training offer from GEA

WS.
3.17 GEA Westfalia Separator

In this chapter you can find information about the GEA Westfalia Separator.
Open the "Company portrait" menu
Open GEA
 Press the "Company portrait" icon in the navigation bar.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
06.00 Fig. 70 Open company portrait
Company portrait menu
Company portrait of GEA Westfalia Separator
Information about GEA Westfalia Separator

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.18 Central control via potential-free contacts

The control unit can only be linked to a central control unit via hardware signals.
The signal exchange sequence is outlined below.
Customer
IO control
control unit
Functions executed Signals
Separator start / operation Separator ON
Water seal ALARM no water seal
TAH temperature alarm max. ALARM temperature too high
TAL temperature alarm min. ALARM temperature too low
Fault
Fault active Common failure = 0
No fault and previous fault Common failure = 1

acknowledged and eliminated.
3.19 Diagram of monitoring systems
3.20 Diagram of ejection monitoring via motor current
Ejection monitoring system

Rated current [%]
Setpoint
Offset
Motor start Cleaning cycle

Separation
Time
Fig. 71
1 Separator motor start
2 Feed valve V1 open: separation
3 Feed valve V1 closed for ejection

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
4 Operating water valve V3 open for T04: ejection
3.20.1 Diagram of bowl monitoring via motor current
Bowl monitoring system

Rated current [%]
Current
Safety water
greater
pulse
than 1 A
Motor start Separation Cleaning cycle
Time
Fig. 72 Bowl monitoring system
3 Operating water valve V3 open for T06: safety water pulse
4 Operating water valve V3 closed: separation
5 Feed valve V1 closed: ejection

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.20.2 Diagram of ejection monitoring via speed measurement
Ejection monitoring system via speed measurement

Only active during separation when time T20 has elapsed.
Reference speed
before ejection
Pre-set speed for

ejection monito-
Bowl speed [%]

ring
Cleaning
Motor start Separation cycle
Time
Fig. 73

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.20.3 Diagram of bowl monitoring via bowl speed
Bowl monitoring system via speed measurement

Reference speed
before ejection
Preset speed for

bowl monitoring
Bowl speed [%] Closing

water
cycle
Separation Separation
Motor start
Time
Fig. 74

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
3.21 Timer description T00 to T62

Ac tive in
Tim e r De s ig n a tio n Ac tio n De s c rip tio n
-0136- -0196- -91-
T00 Partial ejection Operat. water valve V3 opens. The solids space of the bowl is partially ejected by
actuating the operating water valve V3 (option). X X X
T01 Displacement Displacement water valve V” The bowl content is displaced without loss by
opens. actuating the displacement water valve V2.
If selected in the control system, the time is calcu- X X X
lated automatically during the sensor check.
T02 Filling Filling water valve V2 opens. The required water seal in the bowl is created by
actuating the filling water valve V2.
If selected in the control system, the time is calcu-
lated automatically during the sensor check. X X X
Filling water is also active for HFO separators if
preselected in the configuration.
T03 Wait start Product feed valve V1 closes. Time elapses before the displacement water func-
Clean oil discharge pressure tion when key “Process START” has been actuat- X X X
drops. ed.
T04 Total ejection Operat. water valve V3 opens. The solids space of the bowl is emptied by actuat-
ing the operating-water valve V3. X X X
T05 Speed recovery after Time to reach operating speed after speed drop
total ejection during total ejection. X X X
T06 Closing water pulse Operat. water valve V3 opens. Time for safety closing water to keep the bowl
closed during separation. X X X
T07 Alarm delay After this time has expired, the After this time has expired, standard alarms like
product feed valve i closed and PAL1/PAH1, TAL/TAH, PAH2 etc. are triggered. X X X
an alarm is triggered.
T08 Waiting after dis- Time for stabilizing the system after displacement.
placement X X X
T09 Waiting after filling Time for stabilizing the system after filling. --- X X
T10 Separator startup Press button „Separator 1“ has Time to reach the operating speed of the separator
been activated, after pressing button “Separator 1”. X X X
separator motor runs up.
T11 Alarm bypass Alarms not active. Time to stabilize the process conditions. X X X
T12 Waiting after 1st Time to reach operating speed after speed drop
Draining during the fist total ejection. X X X
T13 Speed recovery after Time to reach operating speed after speed drop
partial ejection during the partial ejection. X X X
T14 Pause closing water Time interval between two closing water pulses.
pulse X X X
T15 Circulation valve Circulation valve V5 closes. Time for which the circulation valve V5 is closed.
close X --- ---
T16 Circulation valve Circulation valve V5 opens. Time for which the circulation valve V5 is open.
open WMS sensor is active. The WMS sensor monitors the feeler current. X --- ---
T17 Water content bypass Warning water content. Time to prevent a false alarm due to too much
Not active. filling water. Time starts with T20 “Separation”. --- X ---
T18 Alarm delay sludge After this time has expired, theTime delay for sludge tank alarm LAHH. The prod-
tank product feed valve i closed and uct feed valve is closed and an ejection cycle is X X X
an alarm is triggered. started.
T19 Water impulse at Operat. water valve V3 opens. Time to close the bowl after reaching the operating
start speed by opening the operating water valve V3. X X X
T20 Separation Product feed valve V1 opens. Time to adjust the duration of the separating time.
(time interval between ejections) X X X
T21 Min. separation time In the case of a pressure drop Time during separation in which a system pressure
during this time, the product drop (SMS) is evaluated as an alarm during this
feed valve V! is closed and an time.
alarm and an ejection are The time starts together with the separating time
triggered. After this time has T20. A pressure drop after this time has expired X --- ---
expired, the product feed valve triggers an ejection (“self-thinker” control).
V1 is closed and an ejection is
triggered without alarm.
T22 High water content Water discharge valve V6 is Time to trigger the alarm „WMS system error – too
open. much water” when the WMS sensor outputs a
water signal during the entire running time. X X ---
The SMS sensor PT2 must simultaneously output
a pressure signal.
T23 Post-run feed pump Feed pump is switched off Time in which the pump continuous to run to let
after this time has expired. the heater cool off. X X X
T24 Post-run sludge Sludge pump is switched off Time in which the sludge pump continues to run to
pump after this time has expired. ensure that the sludge tank is emptied completely. X X X
T25 Vibration 1 - delay After this time has expired, Time delay for the vibration 1 alarm which is
the product feed valve is triggered in the case of a continuous signal on the X X X
closed and an ejection is vibration measuring device.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Ac tive in
-0136- -0196- -91-
triggered.
T26 Vibration 2 -delay After this time has expired, Time delay for the vibration 2 alarm which is
the product feed valve is triggered in the case of a continuous signal on the
closed and an alarm is trig- vibration measuring device.
gered.
– Filling water valve V2 is
opened and safety water is X X X
fed into the bowl.
– Pneumatic brake is acti-
vated (option).
– The separator motor is
switched off immediately.
T27 PSL delay SMS After this time has expired,The time expires when the SMS pressure has
the product feed valve is dropped off and T21 “minimum separating time”
closed and an ejection is has elapsed. An ejection is triggered. Accumulat- X --- ---
triggered. ed solids in the solids space of the space has
caused the pressure drop.
T28 Ejection monitoring The motor current or speed is The motor current or speed is monitored during
monitored within this time. An the ejection phase. If the motor current or speed
alarm is triggered after this does not exceed the adjusted offset during this X X X
time has expired. time, an alarm is triggered.
T29 Brake for separator The brake is actuated for this Time to brake the separator automatically after an
time. alarm “Vibration 2”. X X X
T30 Brake for separator The brake is actuated for this Time to brake the separator automatically after an
time. alarm “Vibration 2”. X X X
T31 Wait water pressure The ejection time is delayed Monitoring time for control water pressure The
and after this time has ex- separation time is extended until the control water
pired, the product feed valve pressure exceeds again the nominal value PT3 or X X X
is closed and an ejection is an alarm #51 control water pressure is triggered
triggered. when the time has expired.
T32 WMS mode Water discharge valve V6 is Time for water content monitoring during the
closed; it opens only when the separating process. The separator functions as a
SMS pressure transmitter PT2 purifier. --- X ---
is activated.
Circulation valve V5 is closed.
T33 SMS mode Water discharge valve V6 is Time for solids space monitoring. Only the SMS
closed. sensor PT2 is activated. The solid content of the --- X ---
Circulation valve V5 is closed. bowl is monitored.
T34 WMS pressure test Circulation valve V5 is closed. Time to flush the WMS sensor.
Water discharge V6 is opened
and closes after this time has --- X ---
expired.
T35 Water seal broken Circulation valve V5 is open. Time in which the alarm “no water seal” triggers
Water discharge valve V6 is when the WMS sensor oil and the SMS sensor
closed. PT2 indicate pressure during the running time of --- X ---
Alarm “no water seal” is trig- the timer.
gered.
T36 SMS pressure test Filling water valve V2 is open. Bowl is filled with filling water pulse-wise for
SMS sensor PT2 is activated. checking the solids space. If the solids space is
not filled with solids, the SMS pressure switch X --- ---
PT2 must output a pressure signal. If no pressure
builds up, an ejection is triggered.
T37 SMS Waiting Filling water valve V2 is Time interval between two filling water pulses
closed. during solids space monitoring. X --- ---
SMS sensor PT2 is activated.
T38 WMS sensor WMS sensor not active. Time to rinse the sensor line after the first pro-
flushing SMS sensor PT2 not activat- gram start and to let the surplus filling water dis-
ed. charge. --- X ---
Water discharge valve V6 is
open.
T39 Separator motor off After this time has expired, Time delay to switch off the separator motor. The
the separator motor is function must be pre-selected in the program. X X X
switched off.
T40 CU sludge pump On Sludge pump is activated. Time in which the sludge pump is switched on to
ensure that the sludge tank is emptied completely. X X X
T41 CU sludge pump Sludge pump is not activated. Time interval between two sludge pump starts.
pause X X X
T42 Free
T43 Free
T44 SMS sensor test Water discharge valve V6 is Time in which the function of the SMS sensor PT2
closed. is checked. X X ---
Circulation valve V5 is closed. If no pressure signal is identified on the SMS

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Ac tive in
-0136- -0196- -91-
SMS sensor PT2 is activated. sensor PT2 after this time has elapsed, an alarm
“SMS sensor error” is triggered.
T45 Free –
T46 Free
T47 Min.SMS Time If the SMS sensor P2T is Capacity and machine-type specific time with
activated during this time, the which the increase in water in the product feed is
water discharge valve V6 is determined during WMS mode. The pressure
opened for 3 seconds and the increase is evaluated as a function of T47 via --- X ---
counter Z5 “water content” several successful cycles which are defined via
evaluates the signal. counter Z5 “water content”.
T60 Start impulse Filling water valve V2 is open. Time to fill the filling water into the separator bowl.
This time works before the timers T61 „sensor
pause“ and T62 „sensor pulse“.
The total time is required for the automatic calcu- X X ---
lation of the timers T01 “Displacement” and T02”
“Filling”. The time T60 is protected.
T61 Sensor pause Filling water valve V2 is Time interval between two closing water pulses.
closed. The time T61 is protected. X X ---
T62 Sensor impulse Filling water valve V2 is open. Time to fill the filling water into the separator bowl.
This time works pulse-wise in accordance with
timer T61 „sensor pause“. The time is required for
the automatic calculation of the timers T01 “Dis- X X ---
placement” and T02” “Filling”. The time T62 is
protected.

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.22 Programme logic for OSE separators

3.22.1 Programme logic - Diagram ...-0136-...
Mounting location: Symbol: Name of the component:
PCV1 Pressure control valve

V2 Filling, displacement water valve
Water feed
V3 Control water valve
V4 Orifice plate
V1 Feed valve
Dirty oil feed TI Temperature indication
TT Temperature transmitter
PI1 Pressure indication

PT1 Pressure transmitter
Pure oil discharge
V7 Pure oil discharge (option)
- -
Dirty oil return
V5 Circuit valve
V6 Water discharge valve
WMS Water monitoring sensor
Sensor line
PT2 Pressure transmitter (SMS)
PI2 Pressure display (option)
LSHH Level switch HH

LSH Level switch high
Sludge tank
LSL Level switch low

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …- 0136 -… chapter “A”
A
A
Power supply ON
Self-test of the
control unit
Button "Separator ON” activated

Button "Feed pump ON” activated
Separator start (T10)
Water impulse at start (T19)
Closing water program

Pause closing water impulse (T14)
Closing water impulse (T06)
Process
Activate
options
D
Key “Prog. ON” activated
Start of the sensor check se-

quence
Pre-condition:
Oil temperature > TSL setting value
Oil temperature < TSH setting value
LSHH not activated
Vibro 2 not activated
B

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Diagram …-136-… Chapter “B“
B
B
Start of the
separating sequence
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
E
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Waiting after displacement (T08)
Total ejection (T04)
Waiting after 1st ejection (T12)
Speed recovery (T05)

Separating (T20)
Alarm bypass (T11)
SMS sensor PT2 activated

Circulation valve is closed
(T15)
Circulation valve is open
(T16)
Stop of the separating sequence

C

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …-136-… Chapter “C“
C
C
Key “Prog. “OFF” activated or

button "Separator OFF” activated or
SMS filling (counter 3) expired or
flush ejection (counter 1) expired
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Separator
Ready for operation
A

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Diagram …-136-… Chapter “D“
D
D
Process
Options
activated
Mode "Separator OFF” Button "Separator OFF”

activated activated
“Separator motor OFF” Motor OFF

(T39) A
Alarm
“Separator motor OFF”
activated
A

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …-136-… - Chapter “E“
E
E
Process mo-
nitoring
activated
PAL / PAH or LSHH activated LSL / LSH activated

TAL / TAH activated LSHH sludge tank (T18) Start of sludge pump
Alarm delay (T07) Total ejection (T04) Post-run sludge pump (T24)
Sludge pump OFF
Option CU:
CU sludge pump ON (T40)
CU sludge pump pause (T41)
Alarm
CU = Compact Unit
PAL / PAH
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.22.2 Programme logic - Diagram ...0196-...

Water feed
V4 Orifice plate
V1 Feed valve

Pure oil discharge
- -
Dirty oil return
V5 Circuit valve
V6 Water discharge valve
WMS Water monitoring sensor
Sensor line

Sludge tank

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
A
A
Power supply ON
Self test
Control unit


Pause closing water impulse
(T14)
Process
options
activated
D
Key “Prog. ON”

activated
Start of the sensor check se-

quence
Pre-condition:
Oil temperature > TSL setting
value
Oil temperature < TSH setting
value

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Diagram …0196-… Chapter “B“
B
B
Start of separating
sequence
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
E
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Separating programme
Filling water (T02)
Waiting after filling (T09)
Separating (T20)
WMS sensor flushing (T38)
Alarm bypass (T11)
SMS sensor PT2 is not activated.

WMS mode (T32)
SMS mode (T33)
SMS pressure test (T36)
SMS maintenance (T37)
Stop of the separating se-

quence
C

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …0196-… Chapter “C“
C
C
Stop of the separating se-
quence
Key “Prog. “OFF” activated or

SMS filling (counter 3) expired or
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Separator
Ready for operati-
on
A

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Diagram …0196-… Chapter “D“
D
D
Process
Options
activated

activated activated

(T39) A
Alarm
activated
A

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …0196-… - Chapter “E“
E
E
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated

Sludge pump OFF
Option CU:
Alarm
PAL / PAH CU = Compact Unit
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.22.3 Programme logic - Diagram ...-91-...

Water feed
V4 Orifice plate
V1 Feed valve

Pure oil discharge
- -
Dirty oil return
Sensor line

Sludge tank

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
A
A
Power supply ON
Self test
Control unit


Pause closing water impulse
(T14)
Process
options
activated
D
Key “Prog. ON” activated
Start of separating sequence

Pre-condition:
Oil temperature > TSL setting value
Oil temperature < TSH setting value
LSHH not activated
Vibro 2 not activated
B

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Diagram …91-… Chapter “B“
B
B
Start of separating sequence
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated
E
Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Separating programme
Filling water (T02)
Waiting after filling (T09)
Separating (T20)
Alarm bypass (T11)
SMS sensor PSL2 is not activated

Separating (T20)

C

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …91-… Chapter “C“
C
C
Button „Process STOP“ activated or

Ejection programme
Wait - Start (T03)
Displacement (T01)
Separator
Ready for operation
A

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Diagram …91-… Chapter “D“
D
D
Process
Options
activated

activated activated

(T39) A
Alarm
activated
A

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Diagram …91-… - Chapter “E“
E
E
Process mo-
nitoring acti-
vated

Sludge pump OFF
Option CU:
Alarm
PAL / PAH CU = Compact Unit
TAL / TAH
LAHH
A

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.23 Identification of the contents of pipelines for seagoing ships

This chapter describes the identification of pipelines regarding the flowing medium
on seagoing ships according to DIN EN ISO 14726.
The following data are only an assistance when identifying the media with colour-
coded pipelines on seagoing ships. Coloured deviations of the colours displayed
on the monitor or on paper are possible and cannot be avoided. GEA Westfalia
Separator therefore cannot assume any responsibility for the correctness of colour
tones shown.
3.23.1 Colour-coded identification of the media
Colour Main colour Medium RAL RGB* Pantone Munsell code

representa-
tion
Black Contaminated media 1) 9005 003 005 010 Black c N1
Blue Freshwater 5015 023 097 171 PMS 2925 c 2.5PB 3.5/10
Brown Fuel 8001 145 082 046 PMS 154 c 5YR 3.5/4
Green Sea water 2) 6018 079 168 051 PMS 362 c 10GY 4/10
Grey Non-flammable gases 7001 135 148 166 PMS 430 c N5
Red-brown/ Masses (dry and moist) 3) 8015 077 031 028 PMS 490 c 2.5RP 4/12
mahogany
Orange Oils, other than fuels 2003 255 099 054 PMS 158 c 2.5YR 6/14
Silver Vapour 9006 166 171 181 PMS 877 c -
Red Fire extinguishing media 3000 171 031 028 PMS 1797 c 7.5R 4/14
Purple Acids, lyes 4001 130 064 128 OMS 2633 c 2.5O 4/11
White Air in ventilation systems 9010 250 255 255 White N9.5
Yellow-ochre Flammable gases 1021 252 189 031 PMS 116 c 2.5Y 8/14
*)The RGB colour space is approximately, deviations are possible, no guarantee of

correctness.
1) Black water, grey water, old oil, exhaust
2) For ships with different shipping areas (sea/river ships) all water from outboard.
3) Except for powder and foam for fire fighting
3.24 Control cabinet of the control

The design can vary depending on the scope of delivery.
The controls are fitted in the door of the control cabinet ready for connection.
NOTE: Order-based drawings are enclosed in the electronic documentation.
3.24.1 Frontal view of control cabinet

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description
Fig. 75 Example for control cabinet with IO HMI
1 Lock
2 HMI IO
4 OFF/ON keys for feed pump
6 Main switch

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
3.24.2 Inner view control cabinet
Fig. 76 Example for inside view of a control cabinet
1 Door lock (180°)
5 Interface relay
6 Duct for wiring
7 Terminal strip
8 Motor starter
9 Contactor
11 Safety cutout
3.24.3 Special designs

Special versions differing from the ones described in this manual are available:
• The housing
- can have other dimensions.
- can be made of stainless steel.
• Individual components of the control can be integrated in a compact control cab-
inet or in a central control.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Description

Description 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Technical data
4 Technical data
4.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................... 142

4.1.1 Certificates and approvals ..................................................................... 142
4.1.2 Directives and declarations ................................................................... 142
4.1.3 Dimensional drawing HMI 4“, 7“ and 9“ ................................................. 142
4.1.4 Technical data of the HMI device .......................................................... 142

Technical data 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
4.1 Technical specifications
4.1.1 Certificates and approvals

For certificates and approvals for the HMI device, see the manufacturer's operating
instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
The certificates and approvals include:
• CE approval
• UL approval
• FM approval
• Ex approval
• Marking for Australia
• Marking for Korea
4.1.2 Directives and declarations

For directives and declaration for the HMI device, see the manufacturer's operating
instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
The directives and declarations include:
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• ESD guidelines (electrostatic sensitive device)
4.1.3 Dimensional drawing HMI 4“, 7“ and 9“

For the dimensions of the HMI device, see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions in Chapter “Technical information”.
4.1.4 Technical data of the HMI device

The information provided here is the technical data of the 4", 7", and 9" HMI devic-
es.
For more information and details of the HMI device, see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
Technical data of the HMI devices
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Weight [kg] 0.6 1.4 1.9 5.2
Active display area [mm] 4.3“ 7.0“ 9.0“ 15.4“
95x53 152x91 195x117 331x207
Resolution [Pixels] 480x272 800x480 800x480 1280x800
Number of colours up to 16 million

Brightness control Yes, value range 0 to 100 1, 0 = backlight off
Backlight [h] LED
Half brightness Life time 80000
(MTBF 2)

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Technical data
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Pixel error class accord- II I
ing
ISO 9241-307
Function keys 4 - - -
Labelling strips Yes - - -
Usable memory for [Mbytes] 4 12 12 24
user data
Usable memory for [Mbytes] 0.512 2 2 4
Recipe data
Additional memory for [Mbytes] 4 12 12 24
options
Memory card 2 x MMC/SD combination slot
Interfaces
1 x RS 422/485 [Mbps] 12
(PROFIBUS) (Applies to DP mode)
Ethernet (PROFINET) 1 x RJ45 2 x RJ45 10/100Mbps

10/100
Mbps
Ethernet (PROFINET - - - 1 x RJ45
basic functionality) 10/100/
1000
Mbps
Audio Line In and Line Out
USB 2.0 1 x Host 2 x Host
1 x De- 1 x Device
vice
Power supply
Rated voltage [DC V] 24
Permissible voltage ran- [V] +19.2 V to +28.8 V
ge
Rated current [A] 0.13 0.5 0.75 1.5
Inrush current I2t [A²s] 0.5
Rating [W] 3.1 12 18 36
Max. permissible tran- [V] 35 (500 ms)
sients
Minimum time between [s] 50
two
transients
Internal protection Electronic
Other
Buffered real-time clock Yes
Sound Onboard Integrated or external via Line OUT
beeper
Magnetic field strength 50/60 Hz;

Technical data 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
100 A/m RMS
Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are specified in the table in
the form of sinusoidal oscillations.
Frequency range f Continuous Occasional
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz Amplitude 0.0375 mm Amplitude 0.075 mm

8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz Constant acceleration 0.5 Constant acceleration 1
g g
Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Remarks
Temperature [°C]:
Vertical installation 0 to 50 °C
(Landscape)
0 to 40 °C
(Portrait) Inclination angle
Inclined installation 0 to 40 °C max. 35°
(Landscape)
0 to 35 °C
(Portrait)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
without condensation
Air pressure 1 080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an alti-
tude of
-1000 m to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
Insulation test
Test voltages
The insulation strength is demonstrated by the type test using the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Technical data
Circuits with rated voltage Ue rela- Test voltage

tive to other circuits or ground
24 V 520 VDC or 370 VAC
For Ethernet port: 1500 VAC
Protection class
Protection class I acc. to IEC 61140, i.e. earthing conductor connected to mounting
rail required!
Foreign body and water protection
Protection class Explanation

acc. to
IEC 60529
Front face in built-in condition
 IP65
 Front face only Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only)
Rear panel IP20
Protection against contact with standard probes.
Not protected against ingress of water!
Note:
The protection class at the front can only be ensured if the mounting seal rests
completely against the mounting cut-out.

Technical data 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device ........................................................... 148

5.1.1 Safety during transport .......................................................................... 148
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures ..................................................... 148
5.1.3 Check for transport damage .................................................................. 148
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions ..................................... 148
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage ................ 148

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device
5.1.1 Safety during transport

Note the following information for transport and storage:
• Transport the HMI device only in the original packaging.
• Note the transport instructions on the packaging.
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures

The HMI device has sensitive electronic components. The HMI device can be
damaged as a result of frost or high temperatures.
 To avoid damage, prevent the effects of frost during transport and storage.
 Avoid installing or storing the HMI device near objects with string heat radiation.
5.1.3 Check for transport damage

Check the package contents for visible transport damage and completeness.
Damaged parts
A damaged part leads to malfunctions of the operator terminal.
Do not install damaged parts included in the package.
Contact GEA Westfalia Separator if there are any damaged parts.
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage

The HMI device exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 regarding transport and
storage conditions. The following specifications apply for an HMI device that is
transported and stored in its original packaging.
The climatic conditions conform to the following standards:
• IEC 60721-3-2, Class 3K7 for storage
• IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport
The mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 61131-2.
Avoid condensation
If the HMI device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme temperature fluctu-
ations, moisture may condense on or inside the HMI device. Condensation may
occur. This can cause malfunction.
Before commissioning, the HMI device must be allowed to reach room tempera-
ture.
 Do not exposed the HMI device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
 In case of condensation, switch on the HMI device only after complete drying af-
ter a waiting time of approximately 4 hours.
Problem-free and safe operation of the HMI device requires proper transport, stor-
age, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Failure to comply with these provisions will void the warranty of the HMI device.

6 Assembly and installation

6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection ................................. 150
6.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 150
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use ............................................ 150
6.2.2 Use with additional measures................................................................ 150
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions ............................................................. 150
6.3 Specify mounting position ...................................................................... 151
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out ............................................................. 152
6.5 Installing the HMI device ....................................................................... 153
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps ........................................................................... 153
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket ............................................................... 154
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device ........................................................................ 155
6.6 Connecting the HMI device ................................................................... 156
6.6.1 Information about the connection .......................................................... 156
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding ............................................................................ 157
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding ................................................ 157
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply ................................................................ 158
6.6.5 Connecting the control unit .................................................................... 159
6.6.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device .............................................. 159

6.1 Safety information
6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection

Choose the installation location of the HMI device.
The following must be observed when installing the HMI device:
• Position the HMI device such that it is not exposed to direct sunlight.
• Place the HMI device in a position that is ergonomically convenient to the opera-
tor.
• Choose an appropriate installation height.
• Avoid glare from light.
• Avoid covering the vents of the HMI device by the installation.
• Observe the permissible mounting positions.
6.2 Operating conditions
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use

The HMI device is designed for weather-protected locations. The operating condi-
tions meet the requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
6.2.2 Use with additional measures

Do not use the HMI device in the following locations without additional measures:
• In locations with a high degree of ionising radiation.
• In locations with difficult operating conditions, for example by: corrosive vapours,
gases, oils or chemicals,
• strong electric or magnetic fields,
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example, in lifts or elevators,
• in systems in particularly hazardous areas.
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are listed in Chapter “Tech-
nical data”.
Reducing vibrations
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, acceleration or the
amplitude must be reduced by appropriate measures.
We recommend to mount the HMI device or the control cabinet on damping mate-
rials, for example, elastic mounts.
Check conditions of use

Check the following points before installing the HMI device:
 standards, approvals, EMC parameters and technical information on the applica-
tion of the HMI device.

You can find this information in the following chapters:

• “Technical data”, Section “Certificates and approvals”
• “Technical data”, Section “Electromagnetic compatibility”
Check the mechanical and climatic ambient conditions for operation of the HMI de-
vice; see Chapter “Technical data”, Section “Ambient conditions”.
 See the information on the local use of the HMI device; see Chapter “Safety”,
Section “Usage notes”.
Permissible rated voltage and corresponding tolerance range:
• Rated voltage: +24 VDC
• Tolerance range: 19.2 V to 28.8 V
6.3 Specify mounting position

Determine the installation position of the HMI device; see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions for the HMI device.
• Mounting the HMI device horizontally.
For vertical installation (0° inclination

angle), a max. ambient temperature of
+50 °C is permissible, +40 °C for installa-
tion at an angle.
Fig. 77
The HMI device is designed for installation in:

• Built-in cabinets
• Control cabinets
• Control panels
• Panels
All of these mounting options are referred to as “control cabinet”.
The HMI device is self-ventilated and allowed for inclined installation up to an angle
of +/-35° in stationary control cabinets.
Damage by overheating
When installed at an angle, the convection through the HMI device is reduced,
which also lowers the maximum permissible ambient temperature during operation.
If there is sufficient forced ventilation, the HMI device can also be operated at an
inclined mounting position up to the maximum permissible ambient temperature for
vertical installation. Otherwise, the HMI device may be damaged and its approvals
and warranty may be void.

For information on the ambient conditions, see Chapter “Technical data”, Section
“Ambient conditions”.
Check clearances
Required clearance around the HMI device to ensure sufficient self-ventilation must
be maintained.
X clearance at least 15 mm.

Y clearance at least 50 mm.
Z clearance at least 10 mm.
Fig. 78
NOTE:
For installation in control cabinets and specifically in closed housings, be sure not
to exceed the permitted ambient temperature.
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out

The following requirements must be observed for selecting the installation location:
• The material around the cut-out must be sufficiently stable to ensure a secure at-
tachment.
• The material must not be deformed by the fastening elements, so that the re-
quired protection classes are achieved.
Protection classes
For the requirements to comply with the protection classes, see also the manufac-
turer's operating instructions for the HMI device:
• material thickness for protection class IP65 or protection class front face only
Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only) at the mounting cut-out: 2 mm to 6 mm
• Permissible deviation from flatness at the mounting cut-out: ≤ 0.5 mm
• This condition must be fulfilled also for the installed HMI device.
• Permissible surface roughness in the area of the mounting gasket: ≤ 120 μm (Rz
120)

Compatibility of the mounting cut-out with other HMI devices

For mounting cut-outs of other HMI devices, see the manufacturer's operating in-
structions for the HMI device.
Dimensions of the mounting cut-out
Note:
For vertical installation, width and height
have to be changed accordingly.
Fig. 79
Dimensions of the mounting cut-outs
HMI device W [mm 0/+1]] h [mm 0/+1]

4“ 122 98
7“ 197 141
9“ 250 166
6.5 Installing the HMI device
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps

Position the clamps as shown below so that the specified protection class is
achieved.
Insert the clamps as follows:
 Position the clamps at the cut-outs, note the embossing.
 Insert one clamp into each embossing.

The table below shows the type, number and location of the clamps for the respec-
tive HMI device.
Position of the clamps at the HMI device
HMI device Clamps

Type Quantity Location on the HMI device
4“ Plastic clamps 4
7“ Aluminium clamps 10
9“ Aluminium 12
clamps
The following requirements must be met before installing the HMI device:
• All the packaging components and protective foils on the HMI device have been
removed.
• The mounting clamps from the accessory kit are complete.
• The mounting gasket on the HMI device is present.
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket
NOTICE Property damage caused by improperly installed mounting gasket.
The assured protection class is not ensured If the mounting gasket is damaged,
twisted or protrudes beyond the HMI device.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket; it must not be damaged, twisted or pro-
trude in order to avoid leaks.
 Replace damaged mounting gasket.

6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device
 Insert the HMI device from the front

into the mounting cut-out.
Fig. 80
4" HMI device
 1. Insert the clamp into the cut-out

provided on the HMI device.
 2. Tighten the set screw to secure the
clamp, tightening torque 0.2 Nm.
 Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until all
clamps are installed.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket.
7” - 9” HMI device
 1. Insert the clamp into the cut-out

provided on the HMI device.
 2. Tighten the set screw to secure the
clamp, tightening torque 0.5 Nm.
 Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until all
clamps are installed.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket.
Fig. 81

6.6 Connecting the HMI device
6.6.1 Information about the connection

Conditions for connection:
• The control unit is installed in accordance with the specifications of this instruc-
tion manual.
• Use only shielded standard cables for data cables.
Order of connections
Failure to follow the proper order in making the connections may cause
NOTICE
damage to the HMI device.
The HMI device may be damaged if it is not connected in the order described be-
low.
 Connect the HMI device in the order listed below.
Connect the HMI device in the following order:

• Equipotential bonding
• Power supply
 Perform a power-on test to make sure that the power supply is not connected
with reverse polarity.
• Control unit
• Configuring PC if required
• Peripherals if required
Important: If the HMI device must ever be disconnected, the order must be re-
versed.
Connecting the cables

Connect the HMI device with the connecting cable to the terminal box of the asso-
ciated machine/system; see circuit diagram.
Information on the connecting cable:
 Route the cable from the HMI device to the machine/system without using the
terminal block in the control cabinet.
Only this will ensure that a proper and EMC-compliant connection of the proximity
switches is established to the evaluation unit.
 Cut excess cable length. If it is not possible to cut the cable. wrap up the cable
and secure it with cable ties.
 When connecting the cables, make sure that the contact pins are not bent.
 Secure the cable connectors to the socket with screws.
 Provide adequate cable strain relief.

6.6.2 Equipotential bonding

Potential differences
Potential differences can occur between spatially separated system parts. The po-
tential differences can lead to high equalizing currents over the data cables thereby
destroying their interfaces. Equalizing currents can develop if the cable shielding is
terminated at both ends and earthed at different system parts.
Potential differences can be caused by different power inputs.
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding

Potential differences must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding to a level
that does not affect the proper functioning of the electronic components.
When fitting the equipotential bonding, note the following:
• The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases, the smaller the impedance
of the equipotential bonding conductor or the large the cross-section of the equi-
potential bonding conductor.
• If two system parts are connected to each other via shielded data cables whose
shields are both connected to the protective earthing conductor, the impedance
of the additional equipotential bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of the
shield impedance.
• The cross-section of an equipotential bonding conductor must be rated for the
maximum equalization current. In practice, potential equalization conductors with
a minimum cross-section of 16 mm² have proved effective.
• Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanised steel.
• Connect the equipotential bonding conductors over a large area to the protective
earthing conductor and protect them from corrosion.
• Clamp the shield of the data cable flat to the equipotential bonding rail using a
cable tie. Keep the cable length between the HMI device and the equipotential
bonding rail as short as possible.
• Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables parallel to each oth-
er with minimum clearance.
Connection diagram
NOTICE Unsuitable cables may damage interface components.
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Equipotential bonding

conductors must have a minimum cross-section of 16 mm², otherwise the interface
modules can be damaged.
 Use only prescribed equipotential bonding conductors.

Connection of equipotential bonding by the example of the 7" HMI device.
Fig. 82 Equipotential bonding by the example of the 7" HMI device.
1 Earth connection
2 Cable tie
3 PROFIBUS data line
4 PROFINET data line
5 Equipotential bonding conductor
6 Equipotential bonding rail
7 Control cabinet
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply
Damage to the HMI device by external voltages or excessive operating volt-

NOTICE
ages.
There is a risk of property damage, if the connection voltages do not match the
specifications on the nameplate of the HMI device. Potential-free contacts of cou-
pling relays carry external voltages that need to be considered.
 Connect the HMI device only to voltages that are specified on the nameplate in-
side the HMI device.
 Use only power supplies with DC 24V supply voltage and safe electrical isolation
in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDI 0100, part 410), for
example, according to PELV standard.
For non-isolated system setup:
Connect the GND 24V port of the 24V power supply output to the equipotential
bonding for uniform reference potential. Choose a central connection point if possi-
ble.

Power supply connection diagram
 Note when connecting:

The electrical mains terminal for connec-
tion of the supply voltage is included in
the accessory kit.
The electrical mains terminal is rated for
cables with a cross-section of max.
1.5 mm².
 Do not tighten the cable fastening
screws of the mains terminal with a
screwdriver, if it is already plugged into
the HMI device.
Fig. 83 The pressure by the screwdriver might
damage the socket in the HMI device.
Reverse polarity protection

The HMI device has reverse polarity protection.
6.6.5 Connecting the control unit

Connection diagram
Malfunction if control is connected to the HMI device with non-approved ca-

NOTICE
bles.
The use of non-approved cables for connecting a control may cause malfunctions.
 Use only approved cables to connect a control.
 Standard cables are available for cou-

pling. For details see the operating in-
structions of the manufacturer of the
HMI device.
1 = connection to control via PROFIBUS
2 = connection to control via PROFINET

(LAN)
Fig. 84
Note:
HMI devices from 7" have an internal switch. This allows setting up a ring topology
without an external switch.
For more information on connecting a control, refer to the operating instructions of

the manufacturer of the HMI device, for example on connecting via PROFINET.
6.6.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device

 Switch on the power supply.
After switching on the power supply, the monitor screen lights up.
An animated graphic is displayed during the start-up process.

If the HMI device does not start, the wires on the mains terminal may be reversed.
 Check the connected wires and change their connection if necessary.
After starting the operating system, the loader is displayed.
Under the following conditions, the HMI device automatically enters “transfer”
mode during commissioning:
• No project is defined on the HMI device.
• At least one data channel is configured.
Meanwhile, the transfer is performed.
If the transfer is to be aborted, use the “Cancel” button.
The loader appears again.
IMPORTANT:
When restarting the system, a project may already exist on the HMI device. The
project will then start after an adjustable delay time or via the “Start” button.
The project is exited with the appropriate control object.
Refer to the system documentation for more detailed information.
Function test
After commissioning, run a functional test.
If any of the following conditions occurs, the HMI device is functional:
• The “Transfer” dialogue box is displayed.
• The loader is displayed.
• A project is started.
Switching off the HMI device

Exit the project on the HMI device before the HMI device is turned off.
There are the following options to switch off the HMI device:
• Cut off the power supply.
• Pull out the mains terminal on the HMI device.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device ............................................................. 162

7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel ............................................... 162
7.2 Set and document operating parameters .............................................. 163
7.3 Visualisation file in the HMI device ........................................................ 165
7.3.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”) ............................................. 165
7.3.2 Backing up the current visualisation ...................................................... 169
7.4 Set IP address ....................................................................................... 173
7.5 Alarm simulation and alarm test ............................................................ 177
7.5.1 Alarms#01 to #67................................................................................... 177
7.6 Timer list OSE 5-…-… ........................................................................... 182
7.7 Timer list OSE 10-…-… ......................................................................... 183
7.7.1 Timer list OSE 20-…-… ......................................................................... 184
7.7.2 Timer list OSE 40-…-… ......................................................................... 185
7.7.3 Timer list OSE 80-…-… ......................................................................... 186
7.7.4 Timer list OSE 120-…-… ....................................................................... 187
7.8 Description counter and time recording ................................................. 188
7.9 Settings counter/time recording ............................................................. 190
7.10 Speed settings ....................................................................................... 192
7.11 Settings for temperature and ejection monitoring.................................. 194
7.12 Set maintenance and repair intervals .................................................... 196
7.12.1 Set service interval of separator ............................................................ 196
7.12.2 Set service interval water detector (WMS sensor) ................................ 197

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device

The following parameters can be set for the HMI device; see the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.
7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel
After starting the HMI device, the “Start

centre” is displayed.
If a project (operating program of the

machine/system) exists in the HMI de-
vice, it is automatically started after a
delay time.
If the button “Settings” is pressed during

the delay time, an overview page opens
in the operating system of the HMI de-
vice. All symbols shown there are listed
and described below.
Fig. 85
The following parameter can be shown and set on the overview page in the operat-
ing system of the HMI:
Setting option in the operating system of the HMI device
Symbol Description
Import and delete certificates.
Set date and time.
Change the monitor settings.
Configure the on-screen keyboard.
Change general Internet settings.

Set proxy server.
Change security settings.
Set the character repeat.
Set double-clicking characteristics.
Change network settings.
Change login data.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
Display system data of the HMI device.
Change password protection.
Change print settings.
Activate PROFINET services.
Country-specific settings
Set the screen saver.
“Service & Commissioning”

Backup to an external storage device.
Restore from an external storage device.
Enable sound and adjust sound volume.

Assign a sound to an event.
View system settings.

View memory allocation.
Set the computer name of the HMI device.
Configure the data channel.

Set the delay time.
Set the storage location.
Change MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings.
Switch on the uninterruptable power supply.
Status of the uninterruptible power supply.
Change e-mail settings.

Configure Telnet for remote control.
 For more information on settings, refer to the operating instructions of the manu-
facturer of the HMI device.
7.2 Set and document operating parameters

During initial commissioning or in case of changes, kindly enter the set parameter
into this table.
Machine type
Date of initial commissioning __–__–____
Settings and parameters

 Kindly mark current values Value at
Current
commissioning

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Settings
Timer limit values OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sludge tank Without sludge tank Without sludge tank
LSHH – LSHH LSHH – LSHH
LSHH – LSH LSHH – LSH
LSHH – LSH – LSL LSHH – LSH – LSL
Bowl monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sensor check OFF/ON OFF/ON
Temperature regulation OFF/ON OFF/ON
Partial ejection OFF/ON OFF/ON
Speed monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
Series mode OFF/ON OFF/ON
01 & 01/36 with filling OFF/ON OFF/ON
Motor current end value OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sep. off in standby OFF/ON OFF/ON
Vibration monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
CIP cleaning OFF/ON OFF/ON
FSH signal OFF/ON OFF/ON
PSL monitoring OFF/ON OFF/ON
Flowmeter OFF/ON OFF/ON
SMS signal/ FSH signal Analogue / digital Analogue / digital
Pure oil monitoring Analogue / digital Analogue / digital
Operating-water pressure OFF/ON OFF/ON
CatFineMaster OFF/ON OFF/ON
Optimum bowl cleaning OFF/ON OFF/ON
Sludge drain flap OFF/ON OFF/ON
Leakage sludge drain flap OFF/ON OFF/ON
Local remote control OFF/ON OFF/ON
Data backup on memory card Date:

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7.3 Visualisation file in the HMI device

It is possible to load a new program of the visualisation interface into the HMI de-
vice without a programming device (“Restore”) or to store the current program
stored on a storage medium as a backup (“Backup”).
7.3.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”)
Fig. 86
1 Slot “X51”
2 HMI Memory Card, SD Card
 Disconnect power to the control.

 Import the HMI memory card (2) into the “X51” slot (1).
IMPORTANT: Alternatively, the visualisation can also be updated from other stor-
age media, such as a USB stick. The restore procedure is then analogous to the
process described here. Only the selection of the storage medium is to be adapted.
 Switch the power back on.
The loader is briefly displayed in the start phase of the operator panel.

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
 Touch “Settings” button in the “Start

centre”.
An overview screen in the operating sys-
tem of the HMI device opens, which is
shown below.
Fig. 87
Fig. 88
 Open the “Service & Commissioning” button with a double-click.
 Touch the “RESTORE” button to start

the “Restore a visualisation” operation.
 Touch the “Next” button.
Fig. 89

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
Multiple storage media can be connected

to the controller. The available storage
media are displayed.
 Select the desired-storage medium.

Only then the next step can be executed.
Fig. 90
The visualisation files available on the

selected storage medium are scanned
and listed automatically in a new screen.
Fig. 91
 Select the desired visualisation file.

Only then further options are available.
 Touch the “Restore” button to restore
the selected visualisation file.
When selecting the “Details” button,
properties of the selected file are availa-
ble.
Fig. 92
IMPORTANT: The “Delete” button is used to delete the selected file from the stor-
age medium.
Selecting the “Details” and “Delete” buttons opens another screen that can be
closed by touching the “X” icon.

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Touching the “Restore” button opens the

screen shown here with an additional
security prompt.
 When you touch the “Yes” button, the

visualisation currently stored in the
panel visualization is deleted and re-
placed with the previously selected
new visualisation file from the storage
medium.
Fig. 93
The storage process is automatic and

may take a few minutes. The status of
the process is displayed by a progress
bar.
Fig. 94
When the restore operation is complete, the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
 Touch the “OK” button to confirm.
The panel will then automatically reboot, which may take a few minutes.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7.3.2 Backing up the current visualisation
Fig. 95
1 Slot “X51”
2 HMI Memory Card, SD Card

 Import the HMI memory card (2) into the “X51” slot (1).
IMPORTANT: Alternatively, the visualisation can also be updated from other stor-
age media, such as a USB stick. The backup procedure is then analogous to the
process described here. Only the selection of the storage medium is to be adapted.
 Touch “Settings” button in the “Start

centre”.
An overview screen in the operating sys-
tem of the HMI device opens, which is
shown below.
Fig. 96

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Fig. 97
 Open the “Service & Commissioning” button with a double-click.
 Touch the “BACKUP” button to start

the “Backup the current visualisation”
operation.
Fig. 98
Multiple storage media can be connected

to the controller. The available storage
media are displayed.
 Select the desired-storage medium.

Only then the next step can be executed.
Fig. 99

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
The selected storage medium is first

scanned and the contents are automati-
cally listed in a new screen.
Fig. 100
The files available on the selected stor-

age medium are listed.
 Touch the “Backup” button to save the

current visualisation as a file on this
storage medium.
Fig. 101
The settings shown here are recom-

mended to backup the current visualisa-
tion.
 Touch the “File name” input screen.
Fig. 102

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Fig. 103
 Enter a file name for the backup of the current visualisation file.
The storage process is automatic and

may take a few minutes. The status of
the process is displayed by a progress
bar.
Fig. 104
When the restore operation is complete,

the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
The panel will then automatically reboot,

which may take a few minutes.
Fig. 105

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7.4 Set IP address

For using data communication with the HMI device, connection to existing net-
works/systems or commissioning of replacement components, it may be necessary
to set the IP address of the HMI device.
This is possible on the HMI device without additional hardware.
IMPORTANT: When setting the IP address of the HMI device, be sure to observe
also the IP address assigned to the control (CPU) to avoid compromising the
communication between the HMI device and the CPU.

 Touch the “Control Panel” button in the

loader.
An overview page opens in the operating
system of the HMI device, see image
below.
Fig. 106
Fig. 107
 Open the “Transfer” button with a double click.

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
To transfer data, settings can be made

for different selectable data connections
in this screen.
The default data transfer method of the
IO control is “Ethernet”.
 Touch the “Properties...” button to

configure the properties of the Ether-
net connection.
Fig. 108
 Touch the “PN_X1” button to select the

Ethernet interface to be configured.
Fig. 109
Fig. 110
In the settings screen of the Ethernet interface, enter the “IP Address” and the as-
sociated “Subnet Mask”.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
 Touch input fields to open the alphanumeric keyboard.
Fig. 111 Keyboard display for input
IMPORTANT: The alphanumeric keyboard can be moved on the screen so the in-
put field remain visible during the entry.
Move alphanumeric keyboard on the menu image
 Press symbol and move while pressing to position the keyboard.
 Accept the input by double-clicking on the designated area of the keyboard.

 After finishing the entry, exit the settings screen with “OK”.
Fig. 112
 Press button “X” to close the configuration page

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
 Close the settings screen by touching

the “OK” or “X” button.
Fig. 113

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7.5 Alarm simulation and alarm test
7.5.1 Alarms#01 to #67
SIMULATION AND TEST OF THE DIFFERENT ALARMS

Alarm display Status Mechanical Electrical Action
MOTOR PROTECTION Control active Not possible Disconnect PTC  Separation Stop
Temp. >max temp. sensor  V1 in circ.
Motor switched off  Collective alarm
Alarm#01  Motor OFF
Free
Alarm#02
Free
Alarm#03
Free
Alarm#04
TAL PRODUCT FEED Separation Not possible Set temperature set-  Separation Stop
Temp.< min ting higher than the  V1 in circ.
Separation Stop actual temperature.  Collective alarm
Alarm#05  Draining
TAH – PRODUCT FEED Separation Not possible Set temperature set-  Separation Stop
Temp. >max ting lower than the  V1 in circ.
Separation Stop actual temperature.  Collective alarm
EJECTION MONITORING Draining Close ball valve Loosen cable head  Separation Stop
Eject. Curr.< offset ahead of V3 shortly from V3 or increase  V1 in circ.
Separation Stop before and during the offset of ejection  Collective alarm
Alarm#07 ejection cycle T04. current during the
ejection cycle T04.
LAHH – SLUDGE TANK Control active Immerse or dampen Loosen cable head of  Separation Stop
Sludge tank - full LSHH sensor. LSHH sensor.  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop  Collective alarm
FEED PUMP FAULT Control active Not possible Trigger motor protec-  Separation Stop
Motor protection tion switch.  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop  Collective alarm
Alarm#09  Pump motor off
SLUDGE PUMP FAULT Control active Not possible Trigger motor protec-  Separation Stop
Programme stop tion switch.  V1 in circ.
 Collective alarm
Alarm#10  Pump motor off
VIBRATION STAGE 1: Separation Not possible Disconnect contact.  Separation Stop
Motor off after T25  V1 in circ.
 Draining
Alarm#11  Motor off after
T26
VIBRATION STAGE 2: Control active Not possible Disconnect contact.  Separation Stop
Separator - off  V1 in circ.
Alarm#12

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

FAULT – SERIES Control active Not possible Disconnect the MPI  Separation Stop
OPERATION line connection from  V1 in circ.
Line or the control.  Collective alarm
Pre-selection not ok
Alarm#13
Free
Alarm#14
WMS – SYSTEM FAULT Separation Not possible WMS sensor bypass,  Separation Stop
Too much water bridge pressure  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop switch PSL 2.  Collective alarm
 Draining
Alarm#15
Free
Alarm#16
Free
Alarm#17
BOWL MONITORING Separation Not possible Extend T06 to 3 secs,  Collective alarm
Current too high while T20 runs and
During TIMER 06 reduce T14 to 30
secs.
Alarm#18 Wait until T14 has run
down.
SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF Control active Not possible Reduce T39 to 5 secs  Collective alarm
Sep. in circ. TIMER 39 Circ. while T20 runs.  Motor Off
Expired Motor off Press “Process
STOP”.
Alarm#19
Free
Alarm#20
Free
Alarm #21
SLUDGE PUMP CLOSED Control active To start the Reduce TR2 to 1 min  Collective alarm
TIME LONG sludge/solid pump: and trigger the test
In TR3 hours - Reduce TR2 to function of the LSH
1 min and function by means of
Alarm#22 - immerse or a magnet.
dampen LSH
sensor in liquid.
WMS ACTIVATES TOO Separation Not possible Extend T22 to 300  Collective alarm
OFTEN secs, reduce TR1 to 1
min and bridge WMS
Alarm#23 sensor.
Free
Alarm#24
Free

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings

Alarm#25
Free
Alarm#26
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Control active Not possible Set setting to the  Message in dis-
For execution, see value of the actual play
Instruction manual counter plus 1 min
and wait until the
Alarm#27 minute has expired.
WARNING After expiry of Not possible Set counter 5 to 1  Message in dis-
WATER CONTENT T17 during and bridge pressure play
separation switch PSL2 in short  Valve V6 opens.
Alarm#28 intervals or optionally
set pressure transmit-
ter PT2 alternately to
0 bar and 1 bar.
Free
Alarm#29
Free
Alarm#30
Free
Alarm#31
Free
Alarm#32
EJECTION MONITORING Draining Close ball valve Loosen cable head  Separation Stop
Eject. Speed< offset ahead of V3 shortly from V3 or increase  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop before and during the offset of ejection  Collective alarm
ejection cycle T04. speed during the
Alarm#33 ejection cycle T04.
BOWL MONITORING Separation Not possible Extend T06 to 3 secs,  Collective alarm
Speed drop too large while T20 runs and
During TIMER 06 reduce T14 to 30
secs!
Alarm#34 Wait until T14 has
expired.
Separator-start Separator Set T10 to 10 secs Set min. speed higher  Motor Off
Monitoring motor start and press key “Sepa- than the normal oper-  Message in
during T10 rator ON”. ating speed. display
 Collective alarm
Alarm#35
Belt monitoring Separator Not possible Loosen cable connec-  Motor Off
Belt defective during motor start tion of the speed  Message in
separator start pickup and press key display
“Separator ON”.  Collective alarm
Alarm#36
Max. speed Separator Not possible Set max. speed lower  Motor Off
Monitoring motor start than the normal oper-  Message in
during operation Separation ating speed. display
Alarm#37  Collective alarm

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

Min. speed Separator Not possible Set min. speed higher  Motor Off
Monitoring motor start than the normal oper-  Message in
during operation Separation ating speed. display
Alarm#38  Collective alarm
PT1 function Draining Not possible Set setting of pres-  Separation Stop
In clean oil discharge sure transmitter PT1  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop to 0 before the ejec-  Collective alarm
Alarm#39 tion sequence T04
expires.
NO WATER SEAL Separation Reduce T34 and T35 Set setting of pres-  Separation Stop
During TIMER 35 to 5 secs and close sure transmitter PT2  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop hand valve before V2 to 0 and loosen cable  Collective alarm
while T02 expires. gland of WMS sen-  Draining
Alarm#40 sor.
MIN - SEPARATING TIME Separation Not possible Loosen cable head  Separation Stop
< 10 mins from pressure trans-  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop mitter PT2 while T21  Collective alarm
runs.  Draining
Alarm#41
SMS – SENSOR FAULT Sensor check Close hand valve Loosen cable head  Collective alarm
During SMS CHECK before V2 while sen- from pressure trans-  Draining
During TIMER 44 sor check runs. mitter PT2 while the
sensor check runs.
Alarm#42
SMS SENSOR ACTIVE Circ. Open valve V2 by Set setting of pres-  Message in dis-
WHEN IDLING means of manual sure transmitter PT2 play
override until the to 0 in idle mode.  Collective alarm
Alarm#43 pressure transmitter  Draining
PT2 outputs a pres-
sure signal.
PAL1 - CLEAN OIL Separation Open clean oil dis- Loosen cable head  Separation Stop
DISCHARGE charge valve V7. from pressure trans-  V1 in circ.
Pressure< nominal value mitter PT1.  Collective alarm
Separation - stop  Draining
Alarm#44
PAH1 – CLEAN OIL Separation Close clean oil dis- Set pressure trans-  Separation Stop
DISCHARGE charge valve V7. mitter PT1 to a lower  V1 in circ.
Pressure >3.0 bar setting than the actual  Collective alarm
Separation - stop pressure setting. ejection
Alarm#45
EMERGENCY STOP Control active Not possible Actuate the “Emer-  All electrical
Button activated gency-Off switch. equipment is
switched off!
Alarm#46
Free
Alarm#47
WATER DISCHARGE: Separation Close clean oil dis- Set setting of pres-  Separation Stop
Overflow charge valve V7. sure transmitter PT2  V1 in circ.
Separation - stop Keep in mind that the to 0 in operating  Collective alarm
optional PAH1 (PT1) mode.  Draining
Alarm#48 in the clean oil dis-
charge must have a
higher pressure set-
ting.
MAINTENANCE WMS sensor Separation See chapter “Mainte- See chapter “Mainte-
nance”. nance”.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings

Alarm#49
Free
Alarm#50
For a simulation, the respective function must be activated and valid for the prod-
uct.
IMPORTANT: Following simulation, all altered settings must be rest to their initial
values.

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.6 Timer list OSE 5-…-…

Co n tro l E40 Separator type
Timer OSE 5
Limiting -0136- -0196- -91-
Timer
Complete text Display text Min. / Max. HFO LO LO / (M)DO / HFO

(Option)
Seconds
T00 Partial ejection Partial ejection 1 1 1
T01 Displacement Displacement 2 8 6 6 6
T02 Filling Filling 2 8 3 5 5
T03 Wait start Wait start 5 5 5
T04 Total ejection Total ejection 1 1 1
T05 Speed recovery after total ejection Speed recovery Total 8 8 8
T06 Closing water pulse Closingwater imp 0.08 0.08 0.08
T07 Alarm delay Alarm delay 5 15 10 10 10
T08 Waiting after displacement Wait aft.displac 5 5 5
T09 Waiting after filling Wait aft.filling 5 5 5
T10 Separator startup Sep. runup 240 240 240
T11 Alarm bypass Alarm bypass 15 40 30 30 30
T12 Waiting after 1st Draining Wait aft 1. Eject 10 10 10
T13 Speed recovery after partial ejection Speed rec.part Speed 8 8 8
T14 Pause closing water pulse Closing Interval 300 1800 600 600 600
T15 Circulation valve close Circ.valve clos 60 0 0
T16 Circulation valve open Circ.valve open 5 0 0
T17 Water content bypass Water cont.byps 0 600 0
T18 Alarm delay sludge tank LSHH sludge 10 10 10
T19 Water impulse at start Water imp.start 3 3 3
T20 Separation Separation 3600 3600 3600
T21 Min. separation time Min.sep.t 600 0 0
T22 High water content High water cont. 2 30 10 10 0
T23 Post-run feed pump Post-run feed pump 300 300 300
T24 Post-run sludge pump Post-run sludge 5 5 5
T25 Vibration 1 - delay Vibro 1 180 180 180
T26 Vibration 2 -delay Vibro 2 2 2 2
T27 PSL delay SMS PSL delay SMS 5 15 10 0 0
T28 Ejection monitoring Ejection monitor 5 5 5
T29 Brake for separator Brake for Sep. 300 300 300
T30 Wait water pressure Wait water pressure 600 600 600
T31 Flushing water Flushing water 5 5 5
T32 WMS mode WMS mode 0 3600 0
T33 SMS mode SMS mode 0 0 0
T34 Circuit valve delay Circuit v. delay 1 20 0 10 0
T35 Water seal broken Water.Seal 0 2 0 1 0
T36 SMS pressure test SMS pressure test 0 1 0
T37 SMS Waiting SMS Waiting 0 3 0
T38 WMS sensor flushing WMS sensor flushing 0 20 0
T39 Separator motor off Separator off 1 800 1 800 1 800
T40 CU sludge pump On CU sludge pump On 20 20 20
T41 CU sludge pump pause CU sludge pump pause 600 600 600
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T44 SMS sensor check SMS sensor check 15 40 25 25 0
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -
T47 Min.SMS Time Min SMS Time 1 25 0 20 0
T60 Start impulse Start impulse 6 6 0
T61 Sensor pause Sensor pause 2 2 0
T62 Sensor impulse Sensor impulse 1 1 0

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7.7 Timer list OSE 10-…-…

Co n tro l E40 Separator type
Timer OSE 10
Limiting -0136- -0196- -91-
Timer
Complete text Display text Min. / Max. HFO LO LO / (M)DO / HFO

(Option)
Seconds
T10 Separator startup Sep. startup 240 240 240
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.7.1 Timer list OSE 20-…-…

Co n tro l E40 S e p a ra to r typ e
Timer OS E 20
Tim e r
Limiting -0136- -0196- -91-

Co m ple te te xt Dis p la y te xt Min. / Max. HFO LO LO / (M)DO / HFO
(Option)
Seconds
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings

Timer OS E 40
Tim e r
Limiting -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
Seconds
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -
T47 Min.SMS Time Min SMS Time 1 9 0 3.5 0

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

Timer OS E 80
Tim e r
Limiting -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
Seconds
T29 Brake for separator Brake for Sep. 1 200 1 200 1 200
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings

Timer OS E 120
Tim e r
Limiting -0136- -0196- -91-

(Option)
Seconds
T06 Closing water pulse Closingwater imp 1 1 1
T42 Free Free - - -
T43 Free Free - - -
T45 Free Free - - -
T46 Free Free - - -

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.8 Description counter and time recording
Ac tive in
No . De s ig n a tio n Ac tio n /s ta tu s De s c rip tio n
-0136- -0196- -91-
Co u n te r (Z… or C… = counter …)
Z01 Flush ejection Counter for performing Counter with which it is defined after
a double total ejection. how many individual ejections a dou- X X X
ble flush ejection is carried out.
Z02 Partial ejection Counter for performing Counter with which it is defined after
(Op tio n)
a double total ejection. how many partial ejections a double X X X
total ejection is carried out.
Z03 SMS filling Counter for filling wa- Counter with which the filling water
ter pulses in SMS mo- pulses are defined.
de after T33. After expiry of the SMM mode T33 for --- X ---
solids space monitoring, filling water
pulses are activated.
Z04 Sensor check Counter for sensor Counter with which it is defined after
(Op tio n)
check. how many ejections an SMS check is X X ---
carried out.
Z05 Water imp.start Counter for SMS sen- Counter which registers the SMS sen-
sor signals during the sor signals PT2 which are activated
WMS mode. within the time T47 „min. SMS time”.
The counter is reset when the pres-
sure signal is activated after expiry of --- X ---
T47 „min. SMS time”.
When the counter has run down, a
warning is output tat there is a high
water content in the product feed.
Tim e re c o rd in g (TR… = Time Record …)

TR1 WMS time During separation process the time
during which the WMS sensor detects
water is recorded. X X ---
The time recording is reset after ex-
piry of TR3.
TR2 Sludge pump During separation the running time of
time the sludge pump is recorded.
X X X
The time recording is reset after ex-
piry of TR3.
TR3 Time recording After the pre-set time has expired, all
zero position time recordings are displaced into the
X X X
“prev. in xh value” and the “act. in xh”
value is reset to zero.
TR4 WMS time During separation cycle (T20) the time
during during which the WMS sensor detects
separating time water is recorded. After expiry of the X X ---
separation time (T20) the time is re-
set.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.9 Settings counter/time recording
Settings counter/time recording (NOTE: Table extends across the left and right side)
Control unit
Complete text Text display Remarks
(P= nominal value; A=
actual value)
Counter
Z01 Flush ejection Counter flush ejection Z1 flush ejection:
P: 5
A: 0
Z02 Partial ejection Counter partial ejection Z2 partial ejection:
P: 5
A: 0
Z03 SMS filling Counter SMS filling: Z3 SMS filling:
P: 3
A: 0
Z04 Sensor check Counter for sensor check. Z 4 Sensor check:
P: 10
A: 0
Z05 Water imp.start Counter for water content Z5 water content
alarm P: 5
A: 0
Time recording (TR… = Time Record …)

TR1 WMS time Time recording of the WMS time
WMS time during the ope-
Max. in 24 h 60 min
ration within the preset
nominal value set in TR3 Current 24 h 0 min (Act. in = actual 24h)
(24h). in (Prev. in = previous 24h)
Previ- 24 h 0 min
ous in
TR2 Sludge pump Time recording of the Sludge pump time (Act. in = actual 24h)
time sludge pump operating (Prev. in = previous 24h)
Max. in 24 h 30 min
time within the preset no- TR2 is only active with
minal value set in TR3 Current 24 h 0 min preselection “LSHH/LSH“ and
(24h). in “LSHH/LSH/LSL“
Previ- 24 h 0 min
ous in
TR3 Time recording Zero position of all time Time recording zero
Zero position recordings according to position
the tims set as nominal P: 24
value in TR3 (24h). A: 0
TR4 WMS time Time recording for WMS WMS time during sepa-
during sepa- time during separation rating time
rating time (T20)
Max. in T 20 5 min
Current T 20 0 min Act. in = current 24h
in (Prev. in = previous 24h)
Previ- T 20 0 min
ous in

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
(continuation)
Control unit
OSE OSE OSE OSE OSE OSE
5 10 20 40 80 120
Counter
Z01 Flush ejection 5 5 5 5 5 5
Z02 Partial ejection 5 5 5 5 5 5
Z03 SMS filling 5 5 5 5 5 5
Z04 Sensor check 10 10 10 10 10 10
Z05 Water imp.start 5 5 5 5 5 5
Time recording (TR… = Time Record …)

TR1 WMS time 40 60 150 150 240 300
TR2 Sludge pump 30 30 30 40 50 60

time
TR3 Time recording 24 h 24 h 24 h 24 h 24 h 24 h

Zero position
TR4 WMS time 5 5 5 5 5 5

during sepa-
rating time

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.10 Speed settings
Separator model
OSE 5 / OSE 10 / OSE 20 OSE 40 OSE 80 OSE 120
Speed in rpm
Max. speed 12 200 8 400 7 000 6 100
Min. speed 11 500 7 700 6 300 5 400
Rated speed 12 000 8 200 6 800 5 900
Speed offset
100 100 100 100
ejection monitoring
Speed offset
100 100 100 100
bowl monitoring

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.11 Settings for temperature and ejection monitoring
Settings for temperature and ejection monitoring

Alarms Control unit Remarks
Complete text Text display
Temperature monitoring
TAH product feed Temp. alarm high TAH product feed

Temp. >max. [°C] Alarm is triggered when Temp. >max
the pre-set temperature Separation Stop
is exceeded. Alarm #06 bet. Help
TAL product feed Temp. alarm low TAL product feed
Temp. < min. [°C] Alarm is triggered when Temp.< min
the pre-set temperature Separation Stop
is undershot. Alarm #05 bet. Help
Ejection monitoring
Eject. Curr.< offset Alarm for monitoring Ejection monitor Settings dependent on state of
the ejection after end Eject. Curr.< offset the energy supply and the
of separating time or Separation Stop clutch shoes.
after SMS ejection. Alarm #07 bet. Help
The motor current is
monitored.
Eject. Speed< offset Alarm for monitoring Ejection monitor Settings dependent on state of
(Option) the ejection after end Eject. Speed< offset the energy supply and the
of separating time or Separation Stop clutch shoes.
after SMS ejection. Alarm #33 bet. Help
The bowl speed is
monitored.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
Settings for temperature and ejection monitoring (continuation)
Alarms Product
OSE
Temperature monito- DO MDO LO HFO
ring
Separating tempera- 20 40 95 98
ture [°C]
TAH product feed 30 50 105 105
Temp. >max. [°C]
TAL product feed 10 30 85 90

Temp. < min. [°C]
Ejection monitoring Separator type
OSE 5 OSE 10 OSE 20 OSE 40 OSE 80 OSE120
Eject. Curr.< offset 0.5 0.5 0.5 3 5a 8

[A]
Eject. Speed < offset 100 100 100 100 100 100
(option) [1/min]

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
7.12 Set maintenance and repair intervals
To open the "Service" menu
4.2 Maintenance intervals  Press symbols to show and change the ser-
vice intervals.
7.12.1 Set service interval of separator
04.02.01 Fig. 114
At the factory, a maintenance interval of 4000 operating hours is set after the point
“nominal value”. Under "actual value", the number of separator operating hours is
displayed.
After reaching the preset operating hours, a message is output and a correspond-
ing service notification appears in the display. The message does not interrupt the
separating program. It must be acknowledged by means of the ACK key. The
acknowledgement resets the actual value.
NOTE: Refer to the different maintenance intervals of the separator used in the
separator manual, see section "Maintenance schedule".

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Settings
7.12.2 Set service interval water detector (WMS sensor)
04.02.01 Fig. 115
Under “nominal value" a maintenance interval of 168 operating hours (1 week con-
tinuous operation) is factory-set. Under "actual value", the number of operating
hours of the water detector (WMS sensor) is registered.
After reaching the preset operating hours, a message is output and a correspond-
ing service notification appears in the display. The water detector (WMS sensor)
must be checked for functionality.
 Check water detector, see operating manual of the machine/system chapter
“maintenance”, “check water detector”.
The message does not interrupt the separating program. It must be acknowledged
by means of the ACK key. The acknowledgement resets the actual value. A water
signal likewise resets the actual value.
Under the item "last water signal WMS", the operating hours since the last water
signal registration are recorded. A water signal resets the operating hours "Last
water signal WMS".
separator manual, see section "Maintenance schedule".

Settings 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
8 Commissioning

8.1.1 Safety during commissioning................................................................. 200
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................. 200
8.2.1 Program memory ................................................................................... 200
8.2.2 Front panel controls ............................................................................... 202
8.3 Using the service concept ..................................................................... 202
8.3.1 Activating the service concept ............................................................... 202
8.3.2 Replacing HMI device ............................................................................ 202
8.3.3 Deactivating the service concept ........................................................... 203
8.4 Commissioning the project .................................................................... 203
8.4.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device .................................................. 203
8.4.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project ........................................ 203
8.4.3 Operating modes of the HMI ................................................................. 203
8.4.4 Change operating mode ........................................................................ 203
8.4.5 Possibilities of data transfer ................................................................... 204
8.4.6 Set transfer mode .................................................................................. 204
8.4.7 Start transfer .......................................................................................... 205
8.4.8 Test project ............................................................................................ 206
8.4.9 Backup and restore data ....................................................................... 207
8.4.10 Update operating system ....................................................................... 207
8.4.11 Manage options and license keys ......................................................... 207
8.5 Operate separator.................................................................................. 207
8.5.1 Start the separator ................................................................................. 207
8.5.2 Switch on the separator ......................................................................... 208
8.5.3 Start production ..................................................................................... 209
8.5.4 Stop production...................................................................................... 209
8.5.5 Stop separator ....................................................................................... 210

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
8.1 Safety information
8.1.1 Safety during commissioning

Commissioning
The commissioning of the HMI device serves to import project data and enter ope-
rating parameters, if this has not already been done at the factory. This may only
be performed by trained personnel of the operator or by service personnel or by
commissioning personnel of GEA Westfalia Separator.
Follow the commissioning check list for the machine/system

To commission the machine/system with the HMI device, follow the check list of the
machine/system and perform the necessary tests; refer to the operating instruc-
tions of the machine/plant, Chapter “Commissioning”.
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device
8.2.1 Program memory

The HMI device uses the following memory types:
• Internal memory
• Memory card
• System memory card
• USB mass storage
Internal memory
The following data is stored in the internal memory:
• Operating system
• Project file
• Licence keys
• User management
• Control program
Note:
Cyclic write access to internal memory is not allowed; see the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.
Use only external memory cards for the storage of data and archives.
Memory card
The following data is stored on the memory card:
• Archives
• Backups
• Control program
Standard SD(IO/HC) or MMC type commercial memory cards can be used. For da-
ta consistency, we recommend memory cards of the manufacturer; see the opera-
ting instructions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
NOTE:
Data consistency:
• If the HMI device is switched off, consistency of stored data is only ensured for
the 2 GB or higher memory card recommended by the manufacturer.
• In commercially available memory cards, shutdown of the device may result in
the loss of stored data, e.g. due to a power outage.
• In archives, consistency of the stored data is only ensured if you use the RDB
format.
System memory card

The system memory card is part of the service concept of the HMI devices. If the
service concept is enabled, all data in the internal memory of the HMI device are
transferred to the system memory card.
If the HMI device fails, insert the system memory card into the replacement device.
In this way, downtime of your machine/system is reduced to a minimum.
The system memory card is not visible in the user interface of the HMI device and
is not available for data storage.
In order to be recognised by HMI device, insert the system memory card into the
slot provided.
NOTE:
Format of the system memory card:
• Only the 2GB or more memory card offered by the manufacturer is allowed as
system memory card. All other memory cards are not recognised as system
memory card by the HMI device.
Slots for memory cards and system memory cards

On the 4" HMI device, the slots for memory cards and system memory cards are
on the side of the housing.
On the 7" to 15" HMI device, the slots are on the rear of the housing. The memory
cards and system memory cards are therefore accessible from the rear inside the
control cabinet.
Memory cards and system memory cards are protected by a safety latch.
Memory cards and system memory cards can be inserted and removed during
operation of the HMI device.
Replacing the memory card

Memory cards and system memory cards are protected by a safety latch.
Memory cards and system memory cards can be inserted and removed during
operation of the HMI device.
CAUTION Potential data loss if memory card is pulled out during data transfer.
If the HMI device is accessing data on the memory card when pulling the memory
card, the data may be destroyed on the memory card.
 Do not pull the memory card during data access.

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
 Note corresponding messages on the screen.
NOTE: The project is terminated if the system memory card is pulled out during a
running project.
Prerequisite
There is no write access to the memory cards.
Replace the memory card as follows:

 Move the safety latch to the appropriate position.
 To remove the memory card and/or system memory card, briefly push on the
card.
The card is released and can be removed.
This step does not apply during commissioning.
 Insert the new memory card and/or system memory card.
 Move the safety latch back into the original position.
After the system memory card has been inserted, the HMI device will prompt the
operator to enable the service concept.
The memory card and/or system memory card is swapped.
For more details, refer to the manufacturer's instruction manual for the HMI device.
8.2.2 Front panel controls

The front panel controls are described in Chapter “Description”, Section “Getting to
know the WS IO user interface”.
 Read the description of the touch user interface in Chapter “Description”, Sec-
tion “Getting to know the WS IO user interface”.
8.3 Using the service concept

If the service concept is activated, the HMI device saves all the necessary opera-
ting data on the system memory card. The system memory card can be used in
any device of identical design. Once the data have been copied and the HMI de-
vice has been re-started, it is ready for operation.
IMPORTANT: System memory cards can only be used in HMI devices of identical
design.
8.3.1 Activating the service concept

Service concepts may only be activated by authorised persons.
For more detailed information, see the chapter of the same name in the manufac-
turer's manual for the HMI device.
8.3.2 Replacing HMI device

HMI devices may only be replaced by authorised persons.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
8.3.3 Deactivating the service concept

If you do not want to continuously back up the data of an HMI device to a memory
card for information security reasons, the service concept can be deactivated.
Service concepts may only be deactivated by authorised persons.
8.4 Commissioning the project
8.4.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device

To visually display automated work processes, a project, the image of the work
process, is programmed. Thus the term project stands in this text for the operating
programme of the machine/system.
Projects must only be transferred to the HMI device by authorised persons and
transfer processes are password protected.
There are the following possibilities to transfer a projet to the HMI device:
• Transfer from the projecting PC.
• Restore via ProSave from a PC.
Here a saved project is transferred from a PC to the HMI. It is not necessary that
the projecting software is installed on this PC.
• Insertion of a system memory card filled with project data from an identical HMI.
For further information, see “Activate service concept” in the manufacturer's manu-
al for the HMI device.
• Restoring from an external storage medium from an identical HMI (restore).
8.4.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project

Initial commissioning
On initial commissioning there is no project in the HMI. This is also the case when
the operating system has been updated.
Restarting
During restarting a project already existing on the HMI is replaced.
8.4.3 Operating modes of the HMI

The following operating modes of the HMI are possible:
• Offline
• Online
• Transfer
8.4.4 Change operating mode

To change the operating mode of the HMI during the running operation, the project
engineer must have projected the associated operating objects.
Operating mode “offline”

In this operating mode there is no communication connection between HMI and
control. The HMI can be operated, however no data are transferred to the control
or received from the same. To familiarise yourself with the HMI, see chapter
“Description”.

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Operating mode “online”

In this operating mode there is a communication connection between HMI and con-
trol. The machine/system is operated with the HMI according to the project.
Operating mode “transfer”

The following can be carried out in this operating mode:
• A project can be transferred from the projecting PC to the HMI device.
• Backup and restore data of the HMI device.
The following possibilities are available to switch the HMI device to the “transfer”
operating mode:
• When starting the HMI device
The “transfer” operating mode is started manually in the “start centre” of the HMI
device.
• In running operation
The “transfer” operating mode is started manually with an operating object within
the project. In case of automatic transfer, the HMI device changes to “transfer”
operating mode if a transfer is started at the projecting PC.
8.4.5 Possibilities of data transfer

A table in the operating manual of the manufacturer in chapter “Possibilities of data
transfer” shows the possible data transfers between the HMI device and a projec-
ting PC.
8.4.6 Set transfer mode

The data transfer can be effected manually or automatically.
If automatic transfer is activated, the HMI device changes to the transfer mode af-
ter starting the connected projecting PC.
NOTE
In case of automatic transfer, the HMI device changes only to the “transfer” opera-
ting mode, if the project is running on the HMI device.
The automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project, as
the transfer is effected without intervention from the HMI device.
If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device and if on the projecting PC a

transfer is started, the running project is automatically terminated. The HMI device
automatically changes to the “transfer” operating mode.
Deactivate automatic transfer after the commissioning phase so that the HMI de-
vice does not enter transfer mode unintentionally. The transfer mode can trigger
unintentional reactions in the system.
A password is assigned in the control panel to block access to the transfer settings
and thus avoid unauthorised modification.
Pre-conditions:
• Control panel is open.
• Runtime software is terminated.
Open dialogue “Transfer settings”

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
 Press button “Transfer” in the control panel.
 Change to “General” in register.

 Select data channel in “Transfer chan-
nel” and set via “Properties” if possible.
 Select “Automatic” to start the “Trans-
fer” operating mode automatically.
 Select “Automatic” to start the “Trans-
fer” operating mode manually.
 Close dialogue with “OK”.
 Close control panel.
 Activate the transfer mode with “trans-
fer” in the “start centre”.
Fig. 116
Result
The project is transferred to the HMI device from the projecting PC via the selected
data channel. If required, set the data channel also on the projecting PC. The data
are written to the internal memory of the HMI device.
Further information see operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer, e.g.
“Alternative procedure” when setting the “Transfer” operating mode and “Parame-
terise data channel”.
8.4.7 Start transfer

The project must be transferred to the HMI device so that the machine/ system can
be operated. It must be specified if the existing data on the HMI device should be
overwritten.
Preconditions for the data transfer are:
• Project is open in WinCC on the projecting PC.
• Project navigation is shown.
• Projecting PC is connected to the HMI device.
• The transfer mode is set on the HMI device.
The procedure is as follows:

 Select the command “Load in device > software" in the context menu.
 If the dialogue “Extended loading” is opened, configure the “Settings for loading”.
Ensure that the “Settings for loading” meet the “Transfer settings” on the HMI:
- – Select the protocol used, e.g. Ethernet or USB.
If you use Ethernet or PROFINET, the network address can also be configured in
WinCC in the editor "Devices & networks". Further information on this topic can be
found in the online help of WinCC.
 –Configure appropriate interface parameters at the projecting PC.
 –If required effect settings related to interfaces or protocols.
 –Click on “load".
The dialogue “Extended loading” can be opened at any time via the menu com-
mand "Online >Extended loading in device…".

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
The dialogue “Load preview” is opened. The project is translated at the same time.
The result is shown in the dialogue “Load preview”.
 Check shown presettings and edit if required.
 Click on “load”.
The project is not transferred to the selected HMI device.
If errors or warnings occur during transfer, appropriate messages will be displayed
under "Info > Load".
The project can be run on the HMI device after successful transfer.
8.4.8 Test project

If a project should be tested, there are the following possibilities:
• Test project on the projecting PC.
You can test a project on a projecting PC using the simulator. Detailed information
can be found in the online help of WinCC.
• Test project offline on the HMI device.
Offline testing means that the communication is interrupted between HMI device
and control during the tests.
• Test project online on the HMI device.
Online testing means that the HMI device and control communicate with each other
during the tests.
Carry out the tests in the sequence “Offline test” and “Online test”.
Note
Always test the project on the HMI device on that the project is used.
Test the following:
 Check images for proper display.
 Check image hierarchy.
 Check input objects.
 Enter variable values.
The test increases the safety that the project runs without errors on the HMI de-
vice.
Offine test
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Offline” mode.
The project can be tested without influence from the control. Control variables are
not changed.
Note
Customer-specific machine parameters/ system parameters can be entered in off-
line test, see chapter “Description”, section “Show and edit input fields”.
Online test
Note

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
An online test corresponds to a test run of the machine/ system, see operating ma-
nual of the machine/ system, section “Carry out test run”. The checks and instruc-
tions listed there are to be followed to prevent risks with consequences for life and
limb.
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Online” mode.
• Customer-specific parameters were checked and updated, if needed.
• I/O test was carried out and all errors rectified.
The project can be tested with influence from the control. Control variables are
changed.
8.4.9 Backup and restore data

During backup the contents of the internal memory are stored.
Message archives and process value archives are not backed up. If required, the
contents of the external memory card must be backed up manually.
If the HMI device is integrated in a network, the data can also be backed up to a
network drive.
The following data are backed up:
• Project and HMI device image
• User management
• Recipe data
• Licence keys
Use WinCC for backup and restore.
NOTICE Data loss possible in case of power cut.
If complete restoring is interrupted by a power cut at the HMI device, the operating
system of the HMI device can be deleted. In this case, reset the HMI device to fac-
tory settings. The operating device changes automatically to “bootstrapping” mode.
 Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer
in chapter “Backup and restore”.
8.4.10 Update operating system

Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer in
chapter “Update operating system”.
8.4.11 Manage options and license keys

Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer in
chapter “Options and license keys”.
8.5 Operate separator

Start and stop separator and description of functions of drives and components
triggered in this process.
8.5.1 Start the separator

Pre-conditions

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
The following preconditions must be met to start the separator:

• All checks set out in the maintenance schedule in the operating manual have
been carried out and all faults detected have been eliminated.
• The control unit is switched on, the project (operating program) has booted and
is ready for operation.
• All error messages (red status symbols) queued at the control unit have been
acknowledged and all faults have been eliminated, see chapter "Troubleshoot-
ing".
Open the "Operation" menu
 Press the "operation" icon to display help texts.
02.00 Fig. 117 Menu operation machine/system
The overview image of the menu "operation of the machine or system” is shown.
8.5.2 Switch on the separator
 Switch on the separator at the control

cabinet.
Fig. 118

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
 Switch on the feed pump at the control

cabinet.
Fig. 119
Result:
• The bowl motor is switched on.
• The time "ramp up separator" starts.
• The feed pump is switched on.
After termination of the ramp up phase, the message "Separator ready for opera-
tion" appears in the menu.
8.5.3 Start production
Start production process
 Press icon “Product ON” to start the production process.
Result:
• The message “Separator product” appears in the “Mode” menu.
• The feed pump is switched on.
 Press icon “Total ejection” to manually start a total ejection cycle of

the separator.
Result:
• The process of the total ejection starts and the progress is shown in the menu
window at the top.
8.5.4 Stop production

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Stop production process
 Press icon “Product OFF” to stop the production process.
Result
The message "Product stop" appears in the menu.
• The feed is stopped.
8.5.5 Stop separator
 Switch off the feed pump at the control

cabinet.
Fig. 120
The message "Rinse delay" appears in the menu.

• The feed pump is stopped.
After the "Rinse delay" time has elapsed, the message "Rinse separator” appears
in the menu.
The following functions are carried out:
• The feed pump is switched off.
• The rinsing valve is open.
• The time "Rinse feed" starts.
After the post-lubrication time has elapsed, the rinsing valve is closed.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Commissioning
Stop separator
When pressing “Separator OFF”, the production is stopped if it is still active.
 Switch off the separator at the control
cabinet.
Fig. 121
The following functions are carried out in the run on phase:

• The time "Post-run separator" starts.
• The drive motor is switched off.

Commissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Operation
9 Operation
9.1 Avoiding hazards before start-up........................................................... 214

9.2 Safety during operation ......................................................................... 214
9.3 Monitoring operation .............................................................................. 216
9.4 Starting up the centrifuge ...................................................................... 216
9.4.1 Before starting-up .................................................................................. 216
9.5 Operate device IO.................................................................................. 216
9.5.1 Use on-screen keyboard ....................................................................... 217
9.6 Manual and automatic mode ................................................................. 217
9.7 Check water detector (WMS sensor)..................................................... 218

Operation 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
9.1 Avoiding hazards before start-up

Only start up the centrifuge/system if no defects conflicting with safe operation are
present.
The plant operator is responsible for ensuring that the necessary checks are main-
tained and performed carefully.
Perform the actions below before starting up the centrifuge/system each time.
• Visual inspection for obvious damage to centrifuge/system.
• Check connections and pipes for leaks.
• Check setting parameters and connection data.
• Eliminate all defects detected prior to start-up.
• Acknowledge all alarms reported by the controller and eliminate any faults.
9.2 Safety during operation

Operating a centrifuge can involve risks when the operator does not operate the
centrifuge correctly in accordance with its intended use.
The plant operator is responsible for ensuring that necessary checks are done
carefully and that suitable personnel are deployed.
 Comply with the operating instructions.
 Only operate the centrifuge if there are no defects that could impair safe operati-
on.
 Only operate the centrifuge for the intended purpose and in accordance with the
agreed process conditions.
 Only operate the centrifuge at the bowl speed specified on the nameplate and in
the data sheet.
 Use only qualified personnel, see chapter "Safety precautions / Qualification of
the personnel".
 Wear ear protection.
Fig. 122

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Operation
In case of frequency converter opera-

tion:
 Do not under any circumstances ma-
nipulate the frequency converter to
exceed the permissible bowl speed
(see nameplate).
 The centrifuge may only be operated
with an independent device for speed
limitation.
Fig. 123
Some plant components can get very

hot.
• In normal operating conditions, this
applies, for example, to the bearing
housing.
• In hot operating conditions, this parti-
cularly applies to parts coming into
contact with the product (e.g. pipes
and hoses, traps).
 If the hot surfaces are readily acces-
sible, warning signs must be attached
to protect personnel.
Fig. 124
 Shut down the centrifuge immediately

if unusual noises, vibrations or over-
heating occur.
 Evacuate the room and do not re-enter
the room until the centrifuge has come
to a standstill.
Fig. 125
 The bowl is not allowed to run without

liquid supply for more than 15 minutes,
as otherwise it would result in overhea-
ting of the bowl material.
Fig. 126

Operation 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
9.3 Monitoring operation

In addition to constant monitoring of operations at control stations and in control
rooms or online monitoring, regular inspection rounds must be carried out.
During operation monitoring and daily inspection rounds, especially during the first
1500 operating hours, the following must be observed:
• OIL LEVEL
• Temperatures
• Pressures
• Check the pipe joints and hoses for leaks.
• Vibrations
• Current consumption
• Starting time
• Check the separating result (product, solids) in terms of quality and quantity.
• Check personnel-occupied areas of the centrifuge for cleanliness.
IMPORTANT:
• Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs of
aging and mechanical damage.
• Replace damaged installation components with new parts immediately.
 In the event of damage or deviations, inform the service personnel of GEA West-
falia Separator.
9.4 Starting up the centrifuge
9.4.1 Before starting-up

When the centrifuge is started up at the start of a shift or after recommissioning,
the checks below must be carried out to ensure full operational readiness.
• Pipes and fittings have no visible defects and no leaks.
• All pipes and pumps are filled and primed.
• The control panel of the controller has no error messages.
 Eliminate faults or damage immediately; only start up the centrifuge after this.
9.5 Operate device IO

After starting the HMI device, the “Start centre” is displayed automatically. If an
operating programme is available on the HMI device, it is automatically started af-
ter the delay time.
NOTE: The display of the “Start centre” is part of the initialisation of the HMI device
after switching on. It can take up to 40 seconds and should not be interrupted ma-
nually.
If the “Start centre” is operated during this delay time, the project is no longer
started automatically.
If “Runtime” is terminated on the HMI device or if the Windows CE desktop is faded
it, the “Start centre” is opened automatically.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Operation
The figure shows “Start centre” with ver-

sion details in title bar.
Fig. 127
Depending on the software installed, other icons can be shown in the status bar of
the desktop.
9.5.1 Use on-screen keyboard

The on-screen keyboard can be used to enter values on an HMI device with touch
screen.
The on-screen keyboard is operated like a normal keyboard.
If an operating object with value input is touched, the on-screen keyboard opens
automatically. Depending on the operating object, either the alphanumerical or
numerical on-screen keyboard will open.
The appearance and the layout of the on-screen keyboard depends on the HMI
device used.
Depending on the configuration in the control panel, the on-screen keyboard can
be moved or its size can be changed.
Further information on on-screen keyboards for touch screens can be found in the
operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer in the eponymous chapter.
9.6 Manual and automatic mode

NOTE: These specifications are examples. Further descriptions are set out in the
machine-specific control manuals.
By default, valves and drives are switched in automatic mode. They can also be
switched to manual mode for particular purposes, e.g. for maintenance work or
tests.
Meaning of the icons manual mode and automatic mode
System components are in automatic mode.

Press icon <manual mode ON> to change to manual mo-
de.
System components are in manual mode.

Press <automatic mode ON> to change to automatic mo-
de.
IMPORTANT: With some valves it is necessary to shut down the machine/plant for
maintenance work or repairs before manual operation is possible. This includes all
of the control water valves of the centrifuge bowl.

Operation 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
02/02/2001 Fig. 128 2. Menu level: Machine data (example)
Display valve data
 Press on a valve icon to show the time position of the

valve.
NOTE: Input is protected and a password is required to

make amendments.
07.05.01.02 Fig. 129 Example: Operating water valve 002, valve is in manual mode (example)
NOTE: Operation and information see chapter “Description”, section “Show valve
screen”.
9.7 Check water detector (WMS sensor)

If the message “Maintenance WMS sensor” is shown on the display of the HMI de-
vice, the proper function of the WMS sensor must be checked manually. This work
can be carried out by the operators.
The following steps must be carried out for the functional check:

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Operation
Stop production process
 Press icon for <Product OFF> in the command bar.

The separation process is terminated.
 Loosen the screw connection of the

filling and displacement water hose
(1).
Fig. 130
 Remove dummy plug of the connec-

tion sleeve (2).
 Connect the filling and displacement
hose (1) with the connection sleeve (2)
at the sensor block using screws.
Fig. 131
 Activate the manual operation (A) of

the filling and displacement water so-
lenoid valve (right solenoid valve of the
solenoid valve block) for max. 5 sec-
onds.
A:
Position 1: closed
Position 2: open
Fig. 132
At the HMI device

 Check signal input of the water detector (WMS sensor).

Operation 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
Open the "Startup" menu.
Open menu I/O check
1.2 I/O check  Press icon to open the I/O menu.
Open digital inputs
Digital inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

inputs.
 Browse the menu to open digital input <DI 1.3>.

Digital input DI 1.3 must change from status “0” to “1”.
 Meaning of the abbreviations see chapter “I/O test".
 If there is no signal change, dismantle the water detector (WMS sensor) and
check its function.
Should the malfunction continue to exist, replace water detector (WMS sensor).
manual, see section "Maintenance schedule".
Open the "Service" menu
 Press “Service intervals” field to show maintenance inter-

vals and to check values.
The values for “actual” and “last water signal” must have
reset to 0.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Operation
 Remove filling and displacement water

hose (1) from the connection sleeve
(2) and reconnect to the body.
 Close the connection sleeve (2) again
with the dummy plug.
Fig. 133
Start production process
 Press icon for <Product ON> in the command bar.

The separation process is started.

Operation 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Trouble shooting
10 Trouble shooting
10.1 Safety when eliminating operating malfunctions ................................... 224

10.2 Alarm overview ...................................................................................... 225
10.3 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 226
10.3.1 Fluctuating or non-existent speed display ............................................. 235
10.3.2 Checking the speed sensors ................................................................. 235
10.4 Operational faults help texts .................................................................. 236
10.4.1 Status and fault indication ..................................................................... 241

Trouble shooting 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
10.1 Safety when eliminating operating malfunctions

Faults during troubleshooting can endanger the operating safety of the decanter.
This can lead to accidents with damage to persons and property.
 When troubleshooting, pay attention to and comply with the instructions in the
chapter "Servicing / Safety during servicing".
 Determine the source of the fault and inform the responsible departments in the
company if necessary. Carry out troubleshooting and fault elimination with care.
 When safety devices on the centrifuge/installation respond, stop operating the
centrifuge/installation until the cause has been identified and remedied.
 Ensure that persons are not put at risk through the troubleshooting.
 Observe the local standard operating procedures (SOPs) at the workplace and
wear the specified protective gear.
 Cordon off the working area and hang up a warning sign.
 Remove unauthorized persons from the cordoned-off working area.
 Before troubleshooting, all rotating parts of the centrifuge (drive, bowl) must be
at a standstill.
 Prior to troubleshooting, switch off the main switches and secure against re-
activation.
 Set down dismantled centrifuge parts only on level, anti-slip surfaces, e.g. rub-
ber mat or wooden pallet.
 Secure dismantled centrifuge parts by suitable means to prevent them from
overturning or rolling away, e.g. with wooden wedges or square timbers.
 Never weld the bowl, hood or solids catcher.
 Do not machine the bowl, hood and solid catcher.
 Do not climb onto or sit on the centrifuge or parts of the centrifuge.
 Before re-starting, ensure that there is no unbalance due to fouling. Open and
clean the bowl prior to start-up.
 Bowls may be balanced only by authorized specialists and authorized work-
shops.
 After carrying out maintenance and repair work on centrifuges, reattach all pro-
tective devices and check the safety devices.

10.2 Alarm overview

 Details on the below listed alarms with causes and remedies can be found in the
following chapter “Eliminate malfunctions”.
List of alarms
Alarm Designation Active in

-0136- -196- -91-
#00 Know-how protection   

#01 Motor protection   
#05 TAL product feed   
#06 TAH product feed   
#07 Ejection monitoring   
#08 LAHH sludge tank   
#09 Feed pump fault   
#10 Sludge pump fault   
#11 Vibration stage 1   
#12 Vibration stage 2   
#13 Fault series operation  --- ---
#15 WMS system fault   ---
#18 Bowl monitoring   
#19 Separator motor off   
#22 Sludge pump run time too long   
#23 WMS activates too often   ---
#27 Maintenance interval   
#28 Warning water content. ---  ---
#31 Warning TAL product feed   
#32 Warning TAH product feed   
#33 Ejection monitoring   
#34 Bowl monitoring   
#35 Separator start monitoring   
#36 Belt monitoring   
#37 Max. speed monitoring   
#38 Min. speed monitoring   
#39 PT -1 function   
#40 No water seal ---  ---
#41 Min. separating time   ---
#42 SMS sensor fault   ---
#43 SMS sensor active during idling   
#44 PAL 1 pure oil discharge   
#45 PAH 1 pure oil discharge   
#46 Emergency Stop --- --- 

List of alarms
Alarm Designation Active in

-0136- -196- -91-
#48 Water discharge   ---

#49 Maintenance WMS sensor X --- ---
10.3 Troubleshooting
Legend of the target groups for persons carrying out the elimination of faults:
• OP = Operator (semi-skilled worker)
• Skilled = Instructed skilled worker (skilled worker IHK, e.g. electrician or installer)
• Tspec = Trained specialist (service specialist from GEA or authorised skilled
worker trained at GEA)
 Further details on skills and activities of the target groups, see chapter “About
this document”.
Malfunctions of the HMI device

Fault/Message Possible cause Action Operator
Know-how protection Not using a device released  Use a device released by Op
Alarm #00 by GEA Westfalia Separator. GEA Westfalia Separator.
No warranty is granted for  Contact customer service! Op
unintended use.
MOTOR PROTECTION Motor protection switch signal  Check the function of the Skilled
Temp. >max temp. missing. motor protection switch.
Motor switched off Brake not released.  Check brake. Op
Alarm#01
Thermistor relay has trigge-  Check thermistor relay and Skilled
red. wiring.
Operating water valve V2  Check operating water Op
open. valve, close if required.
Block drive.  Check drive. Skilled
Incorrect number of clutch  Check number of clutch Skilled
shoes. shoes.
Feed capacity too high.  Check capacity. Op
Motor ventilation inadequate.  Improve motor ventilation. Skilled
TAL PRODUCT FEED Product too cold before pre-  Check the settling tank Skilled
Temp.< min heater temperature.
Separation Stop Feed capacity too high.  Check feed capacity. Skilled
Alarm#05
Setpoint TAL set too high.  Check setpoint TAL. Skilled
Temperature of heating me-  Check the heating medium Op
dium too low. temperature.
Temperature controller defec-  Check temperature control- Op
tive. ler.
Controller setting or function  Check controller setting Skilled
not o.k. and function.
Line compensation at control-  Check line compensation Skilled
ler not correctly adjusted. at controller.
Preheater soiled.  Check preheater. Skilled


PT 100 sensor defective  Check sensor. Skilled
TAH – PRODUCT FEED Product too hot.  Check control valve. Skilled
Temp. >max Feed capacity too low.  Check feed capacity. Op
Separation Stop
Alarm#06 Setpoint TAH set too low.  Check setpoint TAH. Skilled
Controller setting or function  Check controller setting Skilled
not o.k. and function.
Line compensation at control-  Check line compensation Tspec
ler not correctly adjusted. at controller.
Temperature controller defec-  Check temperature control- Skilled
tive. ler.
PT 100 sensor defective  Check PT 100 sensor. Skilled
EJECTION MONITORING Operating water valve V3 is  Check bowl hydraulic func- Skilled
Eject. Curr.< offset defective. tion with operating water
Separation Stop valve V3.
Alarm#07 Connector on operating water  Check connector on oper- Skilled
valve V3 is loose. ating water valve V3.
Offset setting for ejection  Check offset setting. Skilled
current adjusted too high.
Water volume at V3 too low.  Check water volume. Skilled
Monitoring time T28 set too  Check T28. Skilled
short.
Current evaluation defective.  Check current transformer Skilled
electrically.
Filter insert in strainer at sol-  Check filter insert. Skilled
enoid block soiled.
Clutch shoes worn or oily.  Check clutch shoes. Skilled
LAHH – SLUDGE TANK Sludge pump does not func-  Check sludge function. Skilled
Sludge tank - full tion.
Separation - stop Bowl open.  Check bowl hydraulics. Tspec
Alarm#08
Product overflow due to ex-  Check valves in the clean Tspec
cessively high clean oil dis- oil line and position V7.
(Sludge tank full-separator charge pressure.
stop) Closing water pulse T06 too  Check T06. Skilled
long.
Polyamide gasket in bowl top  Check polyamide gasket in Tspec
defective. the bowl top and replace if
necessary.
Gaskets in bowl defective.  Check gaskets. Tspec
Level switch LSHH soiled or  Check level switch LSHH. Skilled
defective.
FEED PUMP FAULT Feed pump overloaded.  Check protective switch Skilled
Motor protection and current consumption.
Separation - stop Feed pump mechanically  Check pump. Skilled
Alarm#09 blocked.
Valve in the suction line of  Check valves. Skilled
the feed pump closed.
Feed temperature  Check feed temperature. Skilled
Filter in feed line soiled.  Check filter. Skilled


Electrical connections incor-  Check electrical connec- Skilled
rect. tions and wiring.
SLUDGE PUMP FAULT Sludge pump overloaded.  Check protective switch Skilled
Programme stop and current consumption.
Alarm#10 Sludge pump mechanically  Check pump. Skilled
blocked.
Valve in the pressure line  Check valves. Skilled
closed.
Pipe on the suction and pres-  Check pipes. Skilled
sure side of the pump
blocked.
Electrical connections incor-  Check electrical connec- Skilled
rect. tions and wiring.
VIBRATION STAGE 1: Limit value 1 longer than T25.  Check T25. Skilled
Motor off after T25 Uneven solid deposits in the  Check solids space and Tspec
Alarm#11 bowl. polyamide gasket of the
bowl top.
Vibration sensor is loose.  Check sensor fastening. Skilled
Limit value 1 set too low.  Check setting. Tspec
Bowl not correctly mounted  Open and clean the bowl Tspec
or wrong parts from other and mount in accordance
bowl. with the manual.
IMPORTANT:
Use only parts with identical
serial number.
External vibrations  Check foundation fastening Skilled
arrangement.
VIBRATION STAGE 2: Limit value 2 set too low. Check setting. Skilled
Separator - off Uneven solid deposits in the Check solids space and poly- Tspec
Alarm#12 bowl. amide gasket of the bowl top.
Vibration sensor is loose. Check sensor fastening. Skilled
Bowl not correctly mounted  Open and clean the bowl Tspec
or wrong parts from other and mount in accordance
bowl. with the manual.
IMPORTANT:
Use only parts with identical
serial number.
External vibrations  Check foundation fastening Skilled
arrangement.
FAULT – SERIES “SERIES” key not pressed on  Press “SERIES” key on Op
OPERATION both controls. both controls.
Line or Both separators not ready for  Check operational readi- Op
Pre-selection not ok operation ness of the two separators.
Alarm#13
Line (MPI) for series opera-  Check line (MPI). Skilled
tion defective or missing.
Switch position on MPI bus  Check switch position. Skilled
connector not correct. Switch Switch position must be
position is at “OFF”. “ON”, terminator is active.
WMS – SYSTEM FAULT Water content in feed too  Check product feed. Op
Too much water high.


Separation - stop Too much filling water.  Check T02. Skilled
Alarm#15 T02 set too long.
Filling water valve V2 leaks.  Check filling water valve Skilled
V2.
Incorrect setting on evaluat-  Check setting on evaluat- Skilled
ing relay. ing relay.
T22 set too short.  Check setting T22. Op
 If necessary, extend T22 Skilled
during this phase.
BOWL MONITORING Closing water pulse T06 too  Check T06. Skilled
Current too high long, bowl has opened.
During TIMER 06 Water pressure for hydraulics  Check water pressure with Skilled
Alarm#18 during T06 too high, bowl has open valve V3.
opened.
Valve V3 is soiled, catches,  Check valve V3. Skilled
remains open too long.
New clutch shoes fitted.  Check current value. Skilled
New belt fitted.  Check current value. Skilled
 Deselect function if requi- Tspec
red.
Alarm #19 Separator runs in circulation  Before run-down T39, Op
SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF mode T39 has expired press “Process START”.
T39 set too short.  Check T39. Skilled
 Deselect function if requi- Skilled
red.
SLUDGE PUMP CLOSED Time recording TR2 set too  Check time recording TR2. Skilled
TIME LONG short.
In TR3 hours Bowl leakage  Check bowl func- Tspec
Alarm#22 tion/hydraulics.
Water content in feed too  Drain product upstream of Skilled
high. separator.
Slight product overflow due to  Check clean oil discharge Skilled
clean oil discharge pressure setting.
set too high.
Sludge pump output too low.  Check pump function. Skilled
WMS ACTIVATES TOO Time recording TR1 set too  Check time recording TR1. Skilled
OFTEN short.
Alarm #23 Water content in product too  Dewater product upstream Skilled
high. of separator.
Valve V2 leaks.  Check V2. Skilled
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Operating hours have  Carry out maintenance Tspec
For execution, see reached according to separator
Instruction manual - 4 000, manual.
Alarm#27 - 8 000,  Order spare parts from Skilled
- 12 000, GEA Westfalia Separator.
- 16 000
- or more.  Order service from GEA Skilled
WARNING WATER Heightened water content in  Pre-dewater product and Skilled


CONTENT product feed. check cause.
Warning #28 T47 set too long, does not  Check setting T47. Skilled
correspond to throughput
capacity.
Filling water valve V2 leaks.  Check valve V2. Skilled
TAL PRODUCT FEED Product too cold before pre-  Check the settling tank Op
Warning #31 heater temperature.
Feed capacity too high.  Check the feed capacity Skilled
Setpoint TAL set too high.  Check setpoint TAL Skilled
Temperature of heating me-  Check temperature of Skilled
dium too low heating medium
tive ler
Electric preheater base load  Check the switching stages Skilled
or regulating step inter- electrically
changed
Preheater soiled  Check the preheater Skilled
PT 100 sensor defective  Check sensor Skilled
TAH – PRODUCT FEED Product too hot  Check control valve Skilled
Warning #32 Feed capacity too low  Check the feed capacity Skilled
Setpoint TAH set too low  Check setpoint TAH Skilled
Electric preheater base load  Check the switching stages Skilled
or regulating step inter- electrically
changed
tive ler
PT 100 sensor defective  Check PT 100 sensor Skilled
EJECTION MONITORING Operat. water valve V3 do-  Check bowl hydraulic func- Skilled
Eject. Speed< offset esn’t open. tion with valve V3.
Separation - stop Connector on valve V3 loose.  Check connector on V3. Skilled
Alarm#33
Offset for ejection speed  Check offset setting. Skilled
adjusted too high.
Water volume at V3 too low.  Check water volume. Skilled
Monitoring time T28 set too  Check T28. Skilled
short.
Speed sensor defective.  Check speed sensor elec- Skilled
trically; replace if neces-
sary.
Filter insert in strainer at sol-  Check filter insert. Skilled
enoid block soiled.


BOWL MONITORING Closing water pulse T06 too  Check T06. Skilled
Speed drop too large long, bowl has opened.
During TIMER 06 Water pressure for hydraulics  Check water pressure with Skilled
Alarm#34 during T06 too high, bowl has open valve V3.
opened.
(speed drop too high during
TIMER 06) Valve V3 is soiled, catches,  Check valve V3. Skilled
remains open too long.
New clutch shoes fitted.  Check speed offset. Skilled
New drive belt fitted.  Check drive belt. Skilled
red.
SEPARATOR START Separator starting time T10  Check T10. Skilled
Monitoring during T10 too short.
Alarm #35 Brake not released.  Check brake. Skilled
Drive belt worn or oily.  Check drive belt; replace if Skilled
necessary.
Speed setting for minimum  Check speed setting. Skilled
operating speed too high.
Speed sensor defective.  Check speed sensor Skilled
electrically; replace if ne-
cessary.
red.
Belt monitoring Drive belt defective.  Check drive belt. Tspec
Belt defective during Motor defective.  Check motor electrically. Skilled
separator start
Alarm#36 Clutch shoes too heavily  Check clutch and clutch Tspec
worn, oily or missing. shoes.
sary.
red.
Max. speed Actual speed higher than  Check speed. Skilled
Monitoring permitted speed.
during operation Speed setting for maximum  Check maximum speed Skilled
Alarm#37 speed too low. setting.
Frequency not stable.  Check frequency. Skilled
Separator drive (50 or 60 Hz)  Check separator configura- Skilled
does not match frequency on tion for the frequency with
site. the frequency on site.
sary.
red.
Min. speed Actual speed lower than the  Check speed. Skilled
Monitoring permitted speed.


during operation Speed setting for minimum  Check minimum speed Skilled
Alarm#38 speed too high. setting.
Frequency not stable.  Check frequency. Skilled
Separator drive (50 or 60 Hz)  Check separator configura- Skilled
does not match frequency on tion for the frequency with
site. the frequency on site.
sary.
red.
PT1 function No pressure drop at PT1  Check switching function. Skilled
In clean oil discharge during the ejection.
Separation - stop PT1 is soiled, catches or is  Clean and check PT1. Skilled
Alarm#39 defective.
PT1 is set too low.  Check switching point PT1. Skilled
No ejection, ejection monitor-  Check bowl hydraulics and Skilled
ing has not responded. ejection monitoring.
System pressure too high in  Check delivery head at Skilled
clean oil discharge (product clean oil discharge (prod-
discharge). uct discharge).
red.
NO WATER SEAL Clean oil discharge pressure  Check clean oil discharge
During TIMER 35 (product discharge pressure) pressure product discharge
Separation - stop too high, valve V7 closed too pressure).
Alarm#40 far.
Filling water valve V2 doesn’t  Check function V2. Skilled
(T during TIMER 35 Separa- open.
tion - Stop)
Filling water volume too low,  Check filling water volume. Skilled
e.g. other consumers at the
same time.
Filling water valve V2 or filter  Check valve V2 and filter. Skilled
soiled.
Water pressure for hydraulics  Check water pressure with Skilled
too high or closing water open valve.
pulse T06 too long.  Check T06.
Separating zone displace-  Check temperature and Skilled
ment: setpoint TAL.
Product temperature too low.
Wrong sensing liquid pump  Check fitted sensing liquid Tspec
fitted. Diameter too large. pump as described in the
separator manual.
Pressure transmitter PT2  Check setpoint PT2. Skilled
bridged or set to 0.
MIN - SEPARATING TIME Pressure transmitter PT2 not  Pressure transmitter PT2 Skilled
< 10 mins connected, soiled or defec- Check switching function.
Separation - stop tive.
Alarm#41
Alarm bridging time T11 too  Check T11. Skilled
short.


Setpoint at pressure transmit-  Check setpoint at pressure Skilled
ter PT2 set too high. transmitter PT2.
Water or solid content in the  Pre-dewater product Skilled
bowl too high. and/or check solid content.
Too much filling water.  Check filling water volume. Skilled
During HFO operating mode  Remove the threaded pins Tspec
and parallel mode, threaded from the separating disc.
pins are fitted in the separat-
ing disc.
Filling water valve V2 leaks.  Check filling water valve Skilled
V2.
orifice plate in centripetal  Check orifice plate. Tspec
pump chamber cover
blocked.
SMS – SENSOR FAULT PT2 no pressure signal.  Check setpoint PT2. Skilled
During SMS CHECK Filling water valve V2 no  Check function V2. Skilled
During TIMER 44 function.
Alarm#42
T44 too short.  Check T44. Skilled
Solids space blocked pres-  Clean bowl, check bore in Tspec
sure sensor line to PT2. centripetal pump chamber
cover.
Bowl not closed.  Check bowl hydraulics. Tspec
Filling water capacity during  Check water capacity Skilled
T44 is too low. (0.1/s)
Pressure switch PT2 defecti-  Check pressure switch Skilled
ve. PT2.
Incorrect switching point at  Check switching point PT2. Skilled
PT2.  Deselect function if requi- Skilled
red.
SMS SENSOR ACTIVE Pressure transmitter PT2 was  Check pressure transmitter Skilled
WHEN IDLING activated when idling. PT2.
Alarm#43 Filling water valve V2 leaks.  Check V2. Skilled
Product valve V1 doesn’t  Check valve V1. Skilled
close properly.
Non-return flap at V7 jams,  Close pure oil discharge Op
product runs back into the valve (product discharge
bowl. valve) V7 when idling.
PAL1 - CLEAN OIL Pure oil discharge valve  Check valve position V7.
DISCHARGE (product discharge valve) V7
Pressure< nominal value open too wide.
Separation - stop Feed capacity reduced.  Check feed capacity.
Alarm#44
Setpoint at pressure transmit-  Check setpoint at pressure
ter PT1 set too high. transmitter PT1.
 See also PAH-1 alarm.
Water pressure for hydraulics  Check water pressure with
during closing water pulse open valve V3.
T06 too high, bowl has
opened.
Closing water pulse T06 too  Check T06.


long, bowl has opened.
Feed pump failure  Check feed pump.
Frequency converter speed  Check pump speed.
too low.
Feed valve V1 in circulation  Check compressed air and
position. signal output for solenoid
valve at V1.
Overflow to water side.  Check filling water volume.
Incorrect direction of rotation  Check direction of rotation
of pump. and correct if necessary.
Bowl gaskets leak.  Check gaskets; replace if
necessary.
Alarm delay T07 too short.  Check T07.
Alarm bridging T11 too short.  Check T11.
PAH1 – CLEAN OIL Clean oil discharge valve  Check valve position V7.
DISCHARGE (product discharge valve) V7
Pressure >3.0 bar closed too far.
Separation - stop Feed capacity too high.  Check feed capacity.
Alarm#45
Setpoint at pressure transmit-  Check setpoint at pressure
ter PT1 set too low. transmitter PT1.
Alarm delay T07 too short.  Check T07.
Alarm bridging T11 too short.  Check T11.
Product temperature too low.  Check temperature in
product feed.
EMERGENCY STOP The “Emergency-Off switch  Check the reason for actu-
(Button activated) has been activated. ating the Emergency-Off
Alarm #46 switch.
WATER DISCHARGE: Water content in product feed  Check product feed. Skilled
Overflow too high.
Separation - stop Clean oil discharge pressure  Check clean oil discharge Skilled
Alarm#48 (product discharge pressure) valve (product discharge
too high.. valve) V7.
Filling water volume too  Check function V2 and Skilled
small. filling water volume.
Product temperature too low.  Check product tempera- Skilled
ture.
Regulating ring too large.  Fit next smallest regulating Skilled
ring.
Water pressure for hydraulics  Check water pressure with Skilled
too high or closing water open valve and
pulse T06 too long.  Check T06.
Polyamide gasket in bowl top  Check polyamide gasket in Tspec
defective. bowl top.
Gaskets in bowl defective.  Check gaskets. Tspec
MAINTENANCE WMS The actual value of the WMS  A WMS sensor test must Tspec
SENSOR sensor monitoring has ex- be carried out.
Alarm #49 ceeded the nominal value.
No water signal was detected


in the monitoring period.
 Press the “ACK” key after having eliminated the fault to acknowledge the fault.
 Observe the chapter "Troubleshooting" in the operating manual of the ma-
chine/system.
10.3.1 Fluctuating or non-existent speed display

Fluctuating/non-existent speed displays are often caused by defective or incorrect
speed sensor settings.
Since the measured values affect each other the speed sensors must be checked
in the following order:
• Switch-on the separator and wait for it to start up.
• Display bowl speed and gearbox input speed.
The speed sensor "bowl" is OK, if the displayed bowl speed is approximately equal
to the speed on the decanter nameplate and the display is constant.
The speed sensors are not OK, if there is no display or the display fluctuates when
there is no torque. The corresponding speed sensor must be checked.
10.3.2 Checking the speed sensors

Note:
The speed sensors in use are referred to as Namur-sensors.
Observe the following points before starting with the checks:
 Carry out the checks only when the separator is at a standstill!
 The work may only be carried out by a specialist e.g. electrician.
 Check the voltage on the speed sensor.
Properly installed and functioning speed sensors have the following voltage values:
• actuated approx. 7.5 V
• unactuated approx. 3.5 V
 Check distances, see table in chapter "Speed sensor types; distances and puls-
es."
 Check the shape of the actuating plates.
Install speed sensors according to the circuit diagram.
 Cut off the tin plated ends and strip the cable.
 Furnish the stripped cable ends with ferrules and reconnect according to the wir-
ing diagram (blue = negative, brown = plus).
The speed sensor shielding may only be connected on one end and then directly
under the control unit CPU.
The following table does not claim to be complete. We reserve the right to make
changes.
Speed sensor type Installation spa- Pulses

cing
2.5 ± mm
0.5
NJ5–11–N–G 2 pulses (depending on machine type)
NJ10–22–N_G 5 ±1 mm 2 pulses (depending on machine type)

10.4 Operational faults help texts

This chapter contains all help texts on the alarm messages and measures.
Display help texts
 Press on an alarm message and mark it.

 Press the icon for “information” in the command bar to display
help texts for the selected alarm.
Exit “Help texts” window
 Press “x” icon on the help text window to exit the help text window
and to return to the alarm list.
Acknowledge alarm
 Press on the alarm message and mark it.

 Press the icon for “Confirm” in the command bar to delete the
selected alarm message in the list.
The causes of the alarms are described in the chapter “Remedy operational faults”.
Legend of the target groups for persons carrying out the elimination of faults:
• OP = Operator (semi-skilled worker)
 Further details on skills and activities of the target groups, see chapter “About
this document”.
Help texts to the operational faults displayed on the HMI device.

Measure at the HMI
Fault/Message Help texts Operator
device
Alarm #00 KNOW-HOW PROTECTION  Display help Op
KNOW-HOW protection Not a GEA-specific device  Fault acknowledge-
No warranty for operation! ment
Alarm #00, please check:  Contact customer ser- Op
Contact Westfalia vice!
service!
Alarm #01 MOTOR PROTECTION Temp.>  Display help Op
MOTOR PROTECTION max temp  Fault acknowledge-
Alarm #01, please check: ment
Motor protection function / brake /
thermistor relay/ operating water
valve V2 /
Number of clutch shoes / whether
drive
blocked / feed rate /


Measure at the HMI
device
Alarm #05 TAL- PRODUCT FEED TEMP.<  Display help Op
TAL PRODUCT FEED MIN  Fault acknowledge-
Please check alarm#05: ment
Bilge tank / feed capacity
Setpoint TAL. / temp. heating me-
dium
temp. controller / switching stages
electr.
preheater / PT 100 sensor
Alarm #06 TAH PRODUCT FEED TEMP.  Display help Op

TAH – PRODUCT FEED >MAX  Fault acknowledge-
Please check alarm#06: ment
Control valve / feed capacity /
setpoint TAH / switching stages
electr.
temperature controller / PT 100
sensor
Alarm #07 EJECTION MONITORING  Display help Op
EJECTION MONITORING Please check alarm#07:  Fault acknowledge-
Function bowl / hydraulics with V3 / ment
Connector valve V3 Current offset
settings / water volume / T28
Current transformer electr. / prest-
rainer
Alarm #08 LAHH-SLUDGE TANK FULL  Display help Op

LAHH – SLUDGE TANK Please check alarm#08:  Fault acknowledge-
Sludge pump / bowl hydraulics / ment
(Sludge tank full-separator valves
stop) in the clean oil line / position V7 /
Closing water impulse / polyamide
gasket /
LSHH switch
Alarm #09 FEED PUMP FAULT  Display help Op

FEED PUMP FAULT Please check alarm #09:  Fault acknowledge-
Protective fault / current consump- ment
tion
pump / valves / feed temperature /
filter /
electrical connections cabling


Measure at the HMI
device
Alarm #10 SLUDGE PUMP FAULT  Display help Op
SLUDGE PUMP FAULT Alarm #10, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Protective fault / current consump- ment
tion
pump / valves / pipeline /
Electrical connections cabling
Alarm #11 VIBRATION STAGE 1  Display help Op

VIBRATION STAGE 1 Alarm #11, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
TIMER 25 / solids space / ment
Polyamide gasket / sensor fasten-
ing /
limit value 1 / correct bowl parts /
foundation fastening
Alarm #12 VIBRATION STAGE 2  Display help Op

VIBRATION STAGE 2 Alarm #12, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Limit value 2 / solids space / ment
Polyamide gasket / sensor fasten-
ing /
correct bowl parts /
foundation fastening
Alarm #13 FAULT – SERIES OPERATION  Display help Op
FAULT – SERIES Alarm #13, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
OPERATION “Series” key pressed on both de- ment
vices, both separators ready for
operation
Line MPI
Alarm #15 WMS – SYSTEM FAULT  Display help Op
WMS – SYSTEM FAULT Alarm #15, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Water contents in feed / ment
Filling water volume T02 / valve V2
/
setting on evaluating relay /
Setting T22
Alarm #18 BOWL MONITORING  Display help

BOWL MONITORING Alarm #18, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
TIMER T06 / function V3 / ment
water pressure for hydraulics /
Current value
Alarm #19 SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF  Display help Op

SEPARATOR MOTOR OFF Alarm #19, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
TIMER 39 run down ment
Alarm #22 SLUDGE PUMP RUN TIME TOO  Display help Op

SLUDGE PUMP RUN TIME LONG  Fault acknowledge-
TOO LONG Please check alarm #22: ment
TR2 time recording / sludge pump /
bowl function / bowl leakage / wa-
ter contents in product / pump func-
tion
Alarm #23 WMS ACTIVATES TOO OFTEN  Display help text Op


Measure at the HMI
device
WMS ACTIVATES TOO Check alarm#23:  Fault acknowledge-
OFTEN TR1 Time recording / ment
water contents in product / check if
valve V2 leaks
Alarm #27 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL  Display help text Op
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Operating hours have reached  Fault acknowledge-
4,000, 8,000, 12,000, 16,000 or a ment
multiple.
Carry out maintenance in ac-
cordance with instruction
manual.
Warning #28 WARNING WATER CONTENT  Display help text Op

WARNING WATER Alarm #28, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
CONTENT water content in product / ment
Setting TIMER 47 and feed capaci-
ty /check if V2 leaks
Warning #31 PRODUCT TEMP. MIN  Display help text Op

TAL PRODUCT FEED Alarm #31, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Bilge tank temperature / feed ment
capacity / nominal value TAL /
temp. heating medium / temp. con-
troller / switching stages elec.
preheater / PT 100 sensor
Warning #32 PRODUCT TEMP.- MAX  Display help text Op

TAH – PRODUCT FEED Alarm #32, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Control valve / feed capacity / ment
setpoint TAH / switching stages
electr. / temperature controller /
PT 100 sensor
Alarm #33 EJECTION MONITORING  Display help text Op
EJECTION MONITORING Alarm #33, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Function bowl / hydraulics with V2 / ment
valve V3 plug / speed offset / water
quantity / T28 / speed sensor elec /
prestrainer
Alarm #34 BOWL MONITORING  Display help text Op

BOWL MONITORING Alarm #34, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Timer 06 / water pressure for hydr. ment
(speed drop too high during /
TIMER 06) function V3 / speed offset
Bowl monitoring
Alarm #35 SEPARATOR START  Display help text Op
SEPARATOR START Alarm #35, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Timer 10 too short / release brake / ment
(Monitoring during T10) Clutch shoes oily / belts oily / set-
ting min speed /
speed sensor defective


Measure at the HMI
device
Alarm #36 BELT MONITORING  Display help text Op
BELT MONITORING Alarm #36, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Drive belt / motor defective ment
(belt defective during separa- electrically? / clutch shoes
tor run-up) worn, defective, missing,
oily / speed sensor defective?
Alarm #37 MAX. SPEED MONITORING  Display help text Op

Max. SPEED MONITORING Alarm #37, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Operating speed / setting max. ment
(...during operation) speed / frequency / sep. configura-
tion
Frequency to frequency on site /
Speed sensor
Alarm #38 MIN. SPEED MONITORING  Display help text Op

Min. SPEED MONITORING Alarm #38, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Operating speed / setting max. ment
(...during operation) speed / frequency / sep. configura-
tion
Frequency to frequency on site /
Speed sensor
Alarm #39 PT 1 function  Display help text Op

PT1 FUNCTION Alarm #39, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Switching function PT 1 / PT 1 dirty ment
(... in pure oil discharge sepa- / switch point PT 1 / bowl hydrau-
ration – Stop) lics /
ejection monitor / delivery head at
pure oil discharge
Alarm #40 NO WATER SEAL  Display help text Op

NO WATER SEAL Alarm #40, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Pure oil discharge pressure / func- ment
(T during TIMER 35 Separa- tion V2
tion - Stop) Filling water quantity / valve V2 and
filter
Water pressure / TIMER T06
Nominal value TAL / nominal value
PSL2
Alarm #41 MIN. SEPARATION TIME < 10  Display help text Op
MIN SEPARATION TIME MIN  Fault acknowledge-
(< 10 Min separation – Stop) Pressure transmitter PT2 / TIMER
11 /
Nominal value PT2 / water con-
tents / valve V2 / with HFO operati-
on screws on separating disc
Alarm #42 SMS – SENSOR FAULT  Display help text Op
SMS – SENSOR FAULT Alarm #42, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
Nominal value PT 2 / function V2 / ment
(…during SMS CHECK TIMER 44 / sludge space /
during TIMER 44) hole in centripetal pump chamber /
bowl hydraulics / function PT 2


Measure at the HMI
device
Alarm #43 SMS SENSOR ACTIVE  Display help text Op
SMS SENSOR ACTIVE WHEN IDLING  Fault acknowledge-
DURING IDLING Alarm #43, please check: ment
Pressure transmitter PT 2 / if V2
leaks / if product valve V1 closes
properly / if product runs back into
the bowl
Alarm #44 PRESS. DROP-PURE OIL  Display help text Op
PAL1 - PURE OIL Alarm #44, please check:  Fault acknowledge-
DISCHARGE Valve position V7 / feed capacity / ment
Nominal value PT1 / water pres-
(Pressure less than nominal sure with open valve V3 / TIMER
value separation - Stop) 06 / filling water quantity /
bowl leakage / T07 alarm delay
Alarm #45 PRESSURE INCREASE PURE  Display help text Op

PAH1 – PURE OIL OIL  Fault acknowledge-
DISCHARGE Alarm #45, please check: ment
Valve position V7 / feed capacity /
(Pressure greater 3.0 bar nominal value PT1 / T07 alarm
separation - Stop) delay /
T11 alarm bridging / temperature
product feed
EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH  display help text Op
Alarm #46
ACTIVATED  Fault acknowledge-
EMERGENCY STOP
Cause of activation of
(Button activated)
emergency-off switch
Alarm #48 WATER DISCHARGE overflow:  Display help text Op
WATER DISCHARGE Check alarm#48:  Fault acknowledge-
Pure oil valve V7 / function V2 ment
(overflow separation - Stop) filling water quantity / product temp.
regulating ring / Polyamide seal
Pressure switch PT2
Alarm #49 MAINTENANCE WMS sensor:  Display help text Op

MAINTENANCE WMS Please check alarm#49:  Fault acknowledge-
SENSOR Monitoring time of the WMS sensor ment
has exceeded the limit without
water detection
Carry out maintenance in ac-
cordance with operating manual
 Press the “ACK” key after having eliminated the fault to acknowledge the fault.
 Observe the chapter "Troubleshooting" in the operating manual of the machi-
ne/system.
10.4.1 Status and fault indication

NOTE: The control cabinet may only be opened by appropriately qualified person-
nel.
The processor is located on the mounting plate in the control cabinet.

Fig. 134
The operating mode indicator (1) indicates the different operating modes by way of
colour-coded LEDs. The states of the digital inputs integrated in the processor unit
are indicated via LEDs (2). The same apples for the digital outputs(3).
Fault and status are indicated by the following LEDs:
Fault and status indication of the LEDs
Display Meaning
RUN / STOP (green • Yellow continuous light indicates the operating state
/ yellow) STOP.
• Green continuous light indicates the operating state
RUN.
• Flashing (green and yellow alternately) indicates that
the CPU is in the operating mode STARTUP.
ERROR (red) • Flashing indicates a fault, e.g. an internal fault in the
CPU, a fault in the memory card or a configuration fault
(incompatible modules).
• A red continuous light indicates defective hardware.
• All LEDs flash when a fault is identified in the firmware.
MAINT (green) • Flashing, when starting the CPU, when the memory
card is inserted, during the LED test, in the case of de-
fective CPU firmware or unknown/incompatible version
of the CPU configuration.
• A green continuous light indicates that servicing is re-
quired.
RUN (green)
Operating state RUN of the control unit CPU.
• This LED lights up when the control unit is processing
the user program.
• This LED flashes (2 Hz) during the control start-up (the
STOP LED then also lights up; when the STOP LED
goes out the outputs are released).

Fault and status indication of the LEDs
Display Meaning
STOP (yellow)
Operating state STOP of the control unit CPU.
The LED:
• lights up when the control unit is not processing the user
program.
• flashes slowly when the control unit requests a master
reset.
• flashes fast when the control unit executes a master
reset.


8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance ............................................... 246

11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen ...................................................................... 246
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices ...................................... 246
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen ............................................................................... 247

Maintenance 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance

The HMI device is designed for low maintenance operation. However, the touch
screen and keyboard membrane should be cleaned regularly.
Pay attention to the following points during maintenance and cleaning:
• Unintentional response
If the touch screen or an HMI device with keyboard membrane is cleaned while ac-
tivated, operating errors may be triggered.
 Switch off the HMI device or clean the touch screen during operation only in lo-
cked condition.
 Note that the locked state of the touch screen is automatically terminated after
15 seconds.
• Damage caused by non-approved cleaning agents
The use of compressed air, steam cleaners or aggressive solvents or scouring
agents may damage the HMI device.
 Do not clean the HMI device using compressed air or steam cleaners.
 Do not use aggressive solvents or scouring agents.
11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices

The touchscreen of the HMI device can be cleaned when switched on and with a
project running. For this purpose, a control object must be available in the project
which can be used to call up the Cleaning screen. Once the Cleaning screen has
been activated, the touchscreen is locked for operation for the projected time span.
The time span for lockout can be between 5 and 30 seconds. The time remaining
until the end of lockout is indicated by a progress bar.
Note the information below when cleaning the touchscreen.

Unintended reactions
When the touchscreen is being cleaned, touching keys may trigger an unintended
reaction in the control unit.
 If the device is running, only clean the touchscreen with the Cleaning screen ac-
tivated or switch off the HMI device.
No operation with the Cleaning screen active

If the Cleaning screen is active, the HMI device cannot be operated.
 To call up the Cleaning screen, see the chapter entitled "Descrip-
tion/Help/Screen settings/Clean screen".
 Wait for the Cleaning screen time span.
After this, the system can then be operated with the HMI device.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Maintenance
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen

A damp cleaning cloth and commercial detergent or foaming screen cleaner can be
used for cleaning.
 Switch off the HMI device or lock the touchscreen with the Cleaning screen.
 Spray detergent onto the cleaning cloth.
 Do not spray directly onto the HMI device.
 Clean the HMI device.
 When cleaning, wipe from the edge of the screen inwards.

Maintenance 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Repair
12 Repair
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ...................................... 250

12.1.2 Hazards from electricity ......................................................................... 250
12.2 Repair .................................................................................................... 250

Repair 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work

Safety and availability of the system are dependent on proper carrying-out of re-
pairs.
Repairs may only be carried out by persons qualified to perform these activities,
e.g., technicians from GEA Westfalia Separator and personnel trained and author-
ized (certified) by GEA Westfalia Separator.
12.1.2 Hazards from electricity

The following must be observed for handling of electricity when performing repairs:
• Observe the values for the power supply specified on the system.
• Perform only repair work that is described in the manual.
• Do not touch electrical components with wet hands!
• Before working on electrical components, switch off the power supply and
secure it to prevent switch-on.
• Defective cables must be replaced by qualified personnel as soon as possible.
12.2 Repair
For repairs, the HMI device must be returned to GEA Westfalia Separator or to an
authorised representative.
The operator is not authorised to carry out any repairs.
Assign only a qualified specialist, such as an electrician, with disconnecting and
removing the HMI device.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Decommissioning
13 Decommissioning
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal ...................................................... 252

Decommissioning 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal
Do not dispose of HMI devices as normal household waste, as dam-

age to humans and the environment is possible.
Dispose of or recycle electronic components and plastics in accordance with the

applicable rules at the location of operation.
The described HMI devices can be recycled due to their low pollutant design.
Assign a certified disposal organisation with the environment-friendly recycling and
disposal of waste equipment.

8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Spare parts
14 Spare parts
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 254


Spare parts 8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts

Rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order con-
tains the following details:
• Type: see the nameplate on the rear of the HMI device
• Order number with the main item of the associated machine/system
The information must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.


marking shown.
Fig. 135


8555-9001-040 / 14.07.17 Spare parts

We live our values.
GEA Germany
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - 59302 Oelde ( Germany ) - Phone +49 2522 77-0
Kunde : -
Customer
Anlagenbezeichnung : -
Designation of plant
Zeichnungsnummer : 0505-0120-001
Drawing no.
Kommission : -
Internal order no.
Hersteller (Firma) : GEA Westfalia Separator

Manufacturer (company)
Projektname : -
Name of project
Typ : IO / OSE 20-91
Type
Sprache : de/en
Language
Technische Daten : 380-420VAC/ 50/60 Hz +/-5 % -
Technical data 440-480VAC
Erstellt am : 08.10.2015 Bearbeitet am : 28.08.2017 Angewandte Normen IEC 81346

Prepared Processed Applied standards IEC 61355
IEC 60617
GEA Projektsachbearbeiter : Chr. Teiner
GEA project contact
Date 28.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 =

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Titel- / Deckblatt
Tested TE - Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 1
Project: Title- / cover sheet
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EAA 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Dokumentenart Seite Seitenbeschreibung Anlage Einbauort Datum Bearbeiter
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
Titel- / Deckblatt
&EAA 1 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Title- / cover sheet
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 2 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 3 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 4 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 5 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Revisionsübersicht
&EBH 6 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Revision overview
Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
&EDB 7 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Overview structure indicator
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 8 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 9 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Einspeisung
&EFS 10 =0 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Incoming
Steuerspannung
&EFS 11 =0 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Control voltage
Not-Halt
&EFS 12 =0 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop
Separator
&EFS 13 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator
&EFS 14 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator Drehzahlmessung
&EFS 15 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator speed measuring
Separator Signale
&EFS 16 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator signals
Separator Vibro
&EFS 17 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator vibro
Separator Ventile
&EFS 18 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator valves
Separator Schlammklappe
&EFS 19 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator sludge flap

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Inhaltsverzeichnis
Project: Table of contents
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EAB 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 20 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 21 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Produkt Temperaturregelung
&EFS 22 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Product temperature control
FI Durchflussmessung
&EFS 23 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
FI flow measuring
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 24 =16 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 25 =16 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Signalaustausch
&EFS 26 =100 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Signal exchange
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 27 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Prozessanzeige KPT 400
&EFS 28 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Process display KPT 400
SPS Spannungsversorgung
&EFS 29 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC power supply
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 30 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 31 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 32 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 33 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 34 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Aufbauplan
&ELU 35 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Aufbauplan
&ELU 36 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
&ELU 37 KTP 400 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Not-Halt Box
&ELU 38 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop box

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
&EMA 39 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-PE
&EMA 40 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-PE
&EMA 41 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
&EMA 42 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-X1
&EMA 43 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-X1
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 44 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 45 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 46 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+JB-1X10
&EMA 47 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+JB-1X10
&EMA 48 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 49 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 50 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 51 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 52 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 53 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Klemmenkasten Übersicht
&EMB 54 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal box overview
Hinweise zur Installation
&EMB 55 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Instructions for installation
Potentialausgleich Separator
&EMB 56 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Potential equalization separator
Stückliste
&EPB 57 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Stückliste
&EPB 58 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 59 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 60 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Revisionsübersicht
Revision overview
Revisionsname Revisionskommentar Revisionsänderungsgrund Seitenname Ersteller Datum
Revision name Revision comment Revision on the basis of change Page name Author Date

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Revisionsübersicht
Project: Revision overview
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EBH 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
Dokumentenart Deckblatt
&EAA
Document type Cover sheet
Dokumentenart Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB
Document type Table of contents
Dokumentenart Revisionsübersicht
&EBH
Document type Revision overview
Dokumentenart Strukturkennzeichen Übersicht / Vorschriften
&EDB
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions
Dokumentenart Stromlaufplan
&EFS
Document type Circuit diagram
Dokumentenart Aufbauplan
&ELU
Document type Arrangement drawing
Dokumentenart Klemmenanschlussplan
&EMA
Document type Terminal connecting plan
Dokumentenart Kabelübersicht
&EMB
Document type Cable layout
Dokumentenart Stückliste
&EPB
Document type Parts list
Anlage Einspeisung
=0
Plant Incoming
Anlage Separator
=01
Plant Separator
Anlage Zulaufpumpe
=11
Plant Feed pump
Anlage Schlammpumpe
=16
Plant Sludge pump
Anlage Signalaustausch
=100
Plant Signal exchange
Anlage SPS
=00
Plant PLC
Anlage Zugabe
=Additions
Plant Addition
Anlage Kunde
=Customer
Plant Customer
Anlage Erhitzer
=Heater
Plant Heater
Einbauort Abzweigdose
+JB
Mounting place Junction box
Einbauort Lokal
+L
Mounting place Local
Einbauort Kommandostelle Zulaufpumpe
+OP_FP
Mounting place Control station feed pump

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
Project: Overview structure indicator
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EDB 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vorschriften / Spezifikation
Instruction / specification
Schaltschrank : Ausführung:
Control cabinet : Version:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Aderkennzeichnung
CC Core indentification
YES
Denomination control cabinet
Schutzart Potentialbezeichnung
Protective rating
IP54 Potential designation
NO
Umgebungstemperatur Halogenfreie Verdrahtung / Kanäle

Ambient temperature
(+5) - (+50) °C Halogen free wiring / channels
NO
Kabelkennzeichnungsschilder
Cable marking plates
YES
Klassifizierung ABS, BV, CCS, DNV, GL, KR, LRS,

Classification NKK, RINA, RMRS
Kennzeichnungsschilder
Labels
PLASTIC WHITE, LETTERS BLACK
Sprache Kennzeichnungsschilder
Language labels
de/en
Schnittstelle:
Interface:
Bus Verbindung zum Kunden PLC
Bus connection to customer PLC
NO
Einspeisung:
Power supply
Netz-/ Anschlussspannung 380-420VAC/
Mains-/ input voltage 440-480VAC
Netzfrequenz
Mains frequency
50/60 Hz
Drehfeld
Rotary field
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
Spannungstoleranz
Voltage tolerance
+/-5 %
Kabeleinführung
Cable inlet
BOTTOM
Einspeisung redundant
Incoming redundant
NO
Steuerspannungen:
Control voltages:
Steuerspannung 1
Control voltage 1
230V AC
Steuerspannung 2
Control voltage 2
24V DC

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Informations-Blatt
Project: Information-sheet
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Verdrahtung
Wiring
Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Hauptstromkreise 380-420VAC/ L1 Schwarz ≥ 1,5mm² Steuerspannung 230V AC L Rot ≥ 0,75mm²
Main circuits 440-480VAC Black Control voltage Red
L2 Schwarz N Rot / weiß
Black " Red / white "
L3 Schwarz
Black "
N Hellblau ≥ 1,5mm²
Light blue
PE Grün / gelb ≥ 2,5mm²
Green / yellow
Steuerspannung 24V DC + Dunkelblau ≥ 0,75mm²

Control voltage Dark blue
- Blau / weiß
Blue / white "
Analog abgeschirmt L+ Weiß ≥ 0,75mm²

Analog screened White
M Braun
Brown "
Messleitung Weiß ≥ 0,75mm²

Measuring circuit White
Stromwandlerleitungen Schwarz ≥ 2,5mm²

Current transformer lines Black
Verriegelungsleitungen (AC/DC) Orange ≥ 0,75mm²

Interlocking conductors (AC/DC) Orange

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1 / 13.0
L2 / 13.0
L3 / 13.0
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1.2 / 20.0
L2.2 / 11.0
L3.2 / 11.0
13
21
1
-Q1
14
22
24...32A
In: 29A
/26.1
I> I> I>

2
Daten Einspeisung:
Data Power supply
Min. Querschnitt:
6 mm²
Min. Cross-section:
-PE -PE -SC -PE -PE -PE
Vorsicherung:
-
Pre-fuse:
Umgebungstemperatur:
(+5) - (+50) °C
-WD001 Ambient temperature:
_-J
4x6 mm² Max. Kabellänge:
50 m
PE
PE
PE
Max. Cable length:
-1M -1T -1G U: 380-420VAC/

PE
L1
L2
L3
440-480VAC
Earthing mounting plate 1

f: 50/60 Hz
=Customer Erdung Montageplatte 1 P: Max. 11 kW
+L-X
Erdung Gehäuse 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Icn: 35/10 kA
Earthing screen
Earthing door 1
Erdung Schirm
Erdung Tür 1
Vollaststrom:
~29 A
Einspeisung Full load current:
Incoming
Date 28.08.2017 Kunde: - GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description: Rev.00 = 0

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Einspeisung
Project: Incoming
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EFS 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380-420VAC/ 380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 440-480VAC
10.9 / L2.2 L2.2 / 20.0
10.9 / L3.2 L3.2 / 20.0
230V AC
L.A / 13.4
N.A / 12.0
230V AC
L.X / 12.0
1
5
-F1 N.X / 20.4
0,9...1,25A
EW: see table
I> I> I>
2
N/L2
L1
Primär Spannung T1 Anschluss (X1, X2) Verbindung (X3, X4) Einstellung F1
X1 X3 X4 X2 Primary voltage T1 Connection (X1, X2) Connection (X3, X4) Setting F1
-T1 -T2 INPUT
400VA 380VAC B-H C-E 1,22A 120/230VAC GEA
400VAC B-J C-E 1,16A 24VDC/5A power
420VAC B-J C-F 1,10A
GND 440VAC A-J C-F 1,05A
OFF
ON
ua va PE ub vb 460VAC A-K D-E 1,01A
230V AC
230V AC
480VAC A-K C-F 0,97A A

B
OUTPUT
-PE
L+
L+'
PE
M'
1
M.A / 15.0
-F2
-PE M.K / 27.0
2
C6A
M.R / 14.0
2
-24M
-PE
M.T / 28.0
=00-K2 =00-K2 M.X / 18.0
PT100 PT100 24V DC
L+.A / 12.7
/31.5 24V DC
L+.K / 29.0
AI104 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 24V DC
L+.X / 16.0
24V DC
X12 X12 X12 X12 L+.T / 28.0
AI 2 I+
6
AI 2 I-
7
AI 2 M+
4
AI 2 M-
5
1
-X1
-PE
N
-PE
L
-M1
M -R1
19/18W 1~ PT100
2
Schaltschranklüfter
PE
Cabinet fan
Steuerspannung AC Messung Schrankinnentemperatur Steuerspannung DC

Control voltage AC Measurement cabinet inner temperature Control voltage DC

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Steuerspannung
Project: Control voltage
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC 230V AC
11.9 / L.X L.X / 22.0
230V AC
1L.X / 13.4
230V AC
1L.A / 20.4
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.A L+.A / 14.0
11
-K1
12
14
/12.6
DI a .7
7
X11
DI2.7
/33.5
=00-K4
Separator
Not-Halt
Separator
emergency stop
A1
-K1
A2
11.9 / N.A N.A / 13.4
-PE
Brücke entfernen bei
Anschluß eines
7
externen Not-Halt!
(Option) -X1
Remove link in case of
an external emergency
stop! (optional)
-WG001
.-J
3x1,5 mm²
21
14
PE
11 /12.8
12
-S01
22
Not-Halt extern Not-Halt

Emergency stop external Emergency stop

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Not-Halt
Project: Emergency stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 230V AC 230V AC
10.9 / L1 11.9 / L.A L.A / 22.0
230V AC
10.9 / L2 12.9 / 1L.X
10.9 / L3
Strommessung
Separator
Current measuring
separator
=00-K2
/31.5
AI106
X13
AI 3 I1~
1
AI 3 I2~
2
13
-F1
14
/13.4
11
1
-Q1 -K1
2
12
14
/13.8 /14.1
S1
21
-B1
S2
50/1A -S1
22
/13.8
13
13
-S1 -Q1
14
14
/13.8 /13.8
A1
A1
T1
-F1 M -Q1
T2
A2
A2
12.9 / N.A N.A / 20.4
-PE -PE
1
-X1 -X2
-WD001 -WG003
_-J .-J
Linkslauf 4x6 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
Anti-clockwise rotation
W1
U1
V1
PE
13 14 /13.8 1 2 /13.1
M 21 22 /14.2 3 4 /13.1
*0_1_001 3~ 5 6 /13.1
13 14 /13.9
380-420VAC/50Hz/7,5kW/13,1-14,7A ‎Θ
440-480VAC/60Hz/7,5kW/13,1-14,7A 21 22
T2
T1
33 34 /14.1
43 44 /26.2
Separator PTC-Fühler Separator Betrieb

Separator Separator Separator operation
PTC-feeler
separator

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator
Project: Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
12.9 / L+.A L+.A / 15.0
33
21
-Q1 34 -F1
22
/13.8 /13.4
DI a .0
DI a .1
7
X10 8
X10
DI0.0 DI0.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Separator Separator
Betrieb Störung
Separator Separator
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.0
X10
DQ a .0
4
A1
-K1
A2
11.9 / M.R M.R / 21.0
14
11 /13.8
12
Separator
Start/Stop
Separator
start/stop

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator
Project: Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
14.9 / L+.A L+.A / 17.0
11.9 / M.A
=00-K1
0-12000 r.p.m.
/30.3
DI0.2
X10
DI a .2
5 9
6
-T1
8-
24V DC
7+
1+
2-
3+
4-
3
-X2
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/16.1
+JB
-1X10 1 2
+JB-WG101
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
+
*0_9_020
SI
-
+ BN = brown
- BU = blue
Drehzahlüberwachung
Speed monitoring device

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Drehzahlmessung
Project: Separator speed measuring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3 =00-K3
4-20mA 4-20mA
/32.5 /32.5
AI110 AI112
X10 X10
=00-K1
AI 0+
4
AI 1+
6
/30.3
-SC -SC
DI1.3
=0-SC
=0-SC
X10
DI b .3
18
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.X L+.X / 19.0
-PE
10
5
-X2 9
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/15.1
+JB
PE_1X10 / 18.3
L+_1X10 / 17.1
4
-1X10
+JB-WG102 +JB-WG103
.-O .-O
2x0,34 mm² 2x0,34 mm²
1
*1_9_002 I *0_9_014 I
PSL/H P PSH P
4-20mA 4-20mA
Reinoel Wasserablauf Reserve

Ablaufdruck Water discharge Spare
Clean-oil
discharge pressure

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Signale
Project: Separator signals
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
15.9 / L+.A L+.A / 21.0
=00-K1 =00-K1
/30.3 /30.3
DI1.4 DI1.5
X10 X10
DI b .4
19
DI b .5
20
11
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/18.3
+JB 16.3 / L+_1X10
M_1X10 / 18.3
-1X10 8 9 10 11
+JB-WG104
_CY-O
4x0,75 mm²
SC
1
*1_9_012
PCH 1220
+24V DC
0V
NAHH
-D1
Relais
Relay
(Option) NAHH Separator (Option) NAHH Separator

Vibrationsüberwachung Vibrationsüberwachung
(optional) NAHH separator (optional) NAHH separator
vibration monitoring vibration monitoring

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Vibro
Project: Separator vibro
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/30.5 /30.5 /30.5 /30.5 /30.5
DQ0.0 DQ0.2 DQ0.1 DQ0.3 DQ0.4
X12
DQ a .0 X12 X12 X12 X12
3
DQ a .2
5
DQ a .1
4
DQ a .3
6
DQ a .4
7
11.9 / M.X M.X / 19.0
PE -PE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/17.4
+JB 17.1 / M_1X10
16.3
PE_1X10
12
13
15
14
16
-1X10 PE PE
-WG010 +JB-WG105 +JB-WG106

.-J .-J .-J
3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
+
PE
PE
PE
+
*8_7_002 *9_7_004 *9_7_005

-
-
-
Zulaufventil Steuerwasser Verdrängungs- und Reserve Reserve

Feed valve Operating water Füllwasser Spare Spare
Displacem- and
filling water

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Ventile
Project: Separator valves
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K5 =00-K1
/34.5 /30.3
DQ3.5 DI1.2
X13 X10
DQ b .5
5
DI b .2
17
24V DC 24V DC
16.9 / L+.X L+.X / 23.0
18.9 / M.X M.X / 24.0
PE PE
20
21
22
23
-X2 -X2
-WG012 -WG013
.-J .-J
3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
13
+
PE
PE
*4_7_001 *4_9_001
14
-
(Option) Ventil (Option) Rückmeldung

Schlammablauf Klappe Schlammablauf Klappe
(optional) valve (optional) feed back
sludge discharge flap sludge discharge flap

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Schlammklappe
Project: Separator sludge flap
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
10.9 / L1.2 12.9 / 1L.A
11.9 / L2.2
11.9 / L3.2
5
-Q1
17
LUB12 L1 L2 L3
13
21
A1
/20.9
-Q1
18
/20.2
14
22
A2
1,25...5A
110-220V DC/AC Steuereinheit
LUCA05FU Control unit
In:...A
21
11
-S1 -K2
22
14
12
/20.7 /21.1
LUA1C20
17
97
18
98
/20.7 /21.2
T1 T2 T3
2
11
13
11
2,5 BK2,5 BK2,5 BK
-K1 -S1 =100-K1
12
14
14
12
14
/20.7 /20.7 /26.1
A1
A1
-K1 -Q1
A2
A2
/20.2
13.9 / N.A
11.9 / N.X N.X / 22.0
-PE -PE
10
11
12
13
=0-PE
=0-PE
1
9
-X1 -X1
remove bridge for
remote start/stop!
-WD001 -WG005
_-J .-J
4x2,5 mm² 7x1,5 mm²
Rechtslauf
Clockwise rotation Achtung! 14
W1
U1
11 /20.7
V1
PE
-BP 12
X1
13
21
Vor dem Einschalten der Zulaufpumpe
PE
Option! 24
*0_3_001
M den Leistungsschalter auf Nennstrom Optional!
-S1 -S2 14 -P1 22
21 /21.1
X2
0,55-2,2kW
3 des Motors einstellen (s. Typenschild des Motors)
22
1,32-4,8A
Attention!
binary contacts for
Before switch-on feed pump, adjust the circuit breaker remote start/stop
to nominal current of the motor (look at motor label)
Zulaufpumpe (Option) (Option) (Option) Zulaufpumpe
Feed pump Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Feed pump
Stop Extern Start Extern Betrieb Extern
(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump
stop external start external operation external
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Zulaufpumpe
Project: Feed pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
17.9 / L+.A
21
97
-K1 -Q1
22
24
98
/20.7 /20.3
DI b .0
DI b .1
15
X10 16
X10
DI1.0 DI1.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe
Betrieb Störung
Feed pump Feed pump
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.1
X10
DQ a .1
A15
-K2
A2
14.9 / M.R M.R / 22.2
14
11 /20.8
12
Zulaufpumpe
Ein / Aus
Feed pump on
/ off

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
13.9 / L.A
230V AC
12.9 / L.X
20.9 / N.X
=00-K2 =00-K2 =00-K2 =00-K2
13.
13.
13
13
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
-K3 -K4 /31.5 /31.5
14
14.
14
14.
/22.3 /22.4 AI102 AI100
/31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5
open close
X11 X11 X11 X11 X10 X10 X10 X10
AI 1 M+
4
AI 1 M-
5
AI 1 I+
6
AI 1 I-
7
AI 0 I-
7
AI 0 M+
4
AI 0 M-
5
AI 0 I+
Clamp 7 is attached only with "Spring-loaded"
=00-K1 =00-K1
Klemme 7 wird nur bei "Spring-loaded"
/30.5 /30.5 -SC -SC

DQ1.0 DQ1.1
=0-SC
=0-SC
X12 X12
Stellventil angeschlossen
DQ b .0
11
DQ b .1
12
control valve
A1
A1
-K3 -K4
A2
A2
21.9 / M.R M.R / 26.0

-PE
SC
4
4
-X1 -X2
-WG002 -WG003
.-J .CY-O
5x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm²
13 14 /22.2 13 14 /22.2
close
open
*6_7_002 13. 14. /22.2 13. 14. /22.3 *0_9_006

1
3
1 2/14 3/11 40 PE
PT100 PT100
Motor valve
M
2
4
1 ~
Stellventil - Heizmedium Stellventil Auf Stellventil Zu Produkt Min / max

Regulating valve - heating medium Regulating valve open Regulating valve closed Temperaturregelung Temperaturüberwachung
Product Min / max
temperature control temperature monitoring

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Produkt Temperaturregelung
Project: Product temperature control
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3
4-20mA
/32.5
AI116
X11
AI 3+
6
-SC
=0-SC
24V DC 24V DC
19.9 / L+.X L+.X / 24.0
5
-X2
-WG006
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
1
*0_9_002 I
FI P
4-20mA
FI flow measuring

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator FI Durchflussmessung
Project: FI flow measuring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Option A
applicable for 2 x
LSHH Liquitec
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT
LOW 1 LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0 STUs
HIGH 0 HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1 2024-1165-020
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-020
2026-1165-030
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-040
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
23.9 / L+.X
19.9 / M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE -PE -PE
10
11
12
14
13
15
16
17
18
2
-X2 -X2
WG001 WG002 -WG005

.-J .-J .-J
4x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
/25.1 /25.4 /25.7
PE
3
+ - PE + - PE 98_7_002
90_9_001 90_9_002 /25.7
-
/25.1 /25.4
2
Niveauschalter 1 Niveauschalter 2
Level switch 1 Level switch 2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank (Option) LAHH Schlammtank Reserve Reserve (Option) Ventil Pneumatische
Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Spare Schlammpumpe
(optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) valve pneumatic
level max. / max. level max. / max. sludge pump

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Schlammpumpe
Project: Sludge pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Option B
applicable for
1 x LSHH + 1 x LSH Baumer
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-050
2026-1165-060
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-050
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
/ L+.X
/ M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE
11
12
10
14
13
15
16
17
18
1
-X2 -X2
WH
WH
BN
BN
BU
BU
BK
BK
WG001 WG002 -WG005

.-O .-O .-J
4x0,75 mm² 4x0,75 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
/24.1 /24.2 /24.7
1
3
1
PE
+ -
+ -
90_9_002 98_7_002
90_9_001 /24.7
-
/24.1 /24.3
2
4
2
LAHH Schlammtank LAH Schlammtank Reserve Ventil Pneumatische

Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Schlammpumpe
LAHH sludge tank LAH sludge tank Valve pneumatic sludge
level max. / max. level max. / max. pump

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K1

/34.5 /34.5 /34.5 /34.5 /30.5
DQ2.7 DQ3.0 DQ3.1 DQ3.2 DQ0.7
X11 X12 X12 X12 X12
DQ a .7
7
DQ b .0
4
DQ b .1
5
DQ b .2
6
DQ a .7
10
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
22.4 / M.R
14 14 14 14 14
11 /20.8 11 /26.3 11 /26.4 11 /26.5 11 /26.7
12 12 12 12 12
24
21 /26.0
22
22
24
21
43
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
-K1 =0-Q1 =01-Q1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
21
22
44
11
11
11
11
/26.1 /10.1 /13.8 /26.3 /26.4 /26.6 /26.7
PE PE PE PE PE
10
11
12
1
3
4
9
-X2 -X2
-WG001 -WG002 -WG003 -WG004 -WG005
.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
5x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
=Customer+L-X =Heater
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
Kunde +L-X
-X -X -X -X -X -X
Sammelstörung Separator Wasserschlossalarm TAH Temperatur TAL Temperatur Erhitzerfreigabe

Common failure Betrieb (nur bei LO -0196) Alarm max Alarm min Heater release
Separator Water seal broken TAH temperature TAL temperature
operation alarm (only at LO -0196) alarm max alarm min

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Signalaustausch
Project: Signal exchange
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 -K1 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3

/30.3 /30.3 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5
AI90 AI92
X11 X11 X10 X10 X11 X11 X13 X13
AI 0
5
AI 1
6
AI 0-
5
AI 1-
7
AI 2-
5
AI 3-
7
AQ 0M
4
AQ 1M
6
11.9 / M.K M.K / 29.0
Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog
Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator SPS Übersicht
Project: PLC overview
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-P1
KTP400
X2 X61
Profibus Profinet USB
X1
POWER DC
SC
SC
A
A
B
B
24V
0V
PA
=0-PE
24V DC
11.9 / L+.T
11.9 / M.T
-PE
Ethernet / 29.0

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Prozessanzeige KPT 400
Project: Process display KPT 400
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 CPU 1215C

-K2 3RTD / 1ACI
-K3 4AI / 2AO
-K4 16DI
-K5 16DO 0,5A
6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0
SIMATIC
S7 1200
AQ90 - AQ92
DI0.0 - DI1.5 AI100 - AI102 AI110 - AI116 DI2.0 - DI2.7 DQ2.0 - DQ2.7
AI90 - AI92
RUN / STOP
ERROR
MAINT
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
SM 1231 SM 1234 SM 1221 SM 1222
GEA LV DC
DQ0.0 - DQ1.1 AI104 - AI106 AQ110 - AQ112 DI3.0 - DI3.7 DQ3.0 - DQ3.7
DQ a 4L+ /30.5
DQ a 4M /30.5
Ethernet Ethernet
DQ a L+ /34.5
DI b 3M /33.5
DI b 4M /33.5
DI a 1M /30.3
DI a 1M /33.5
DI a 2M /33.5
DQ a M /34.5
AQ 2M /30.3
AI 3M /30.3
AI L+ /32.5
AI M /32.5
24V DC 24V DC
L+ /31.5
X1 P1 X1 P2
M /31.5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
L+
L+
M
M
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:6
X11:1
X11:4
X12:1
X12:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X11:1
X10:3
X11:3
X12:3
X13:3
X11:1
X10:1
X10:2
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
24V DC -PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
11.9 / L+.K
27.9 / M.K
28.9 / Ethernet
Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung

Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator SPS Spannungsversorgung
Project: PLC power supply
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
X10:6 X12:1
0V /29.3 /29.4 24V
DI a 1M DQ a 4L+
Separator Betrieb X10:7 X12:2
=01-Q1:34 /14.1 DI0.0 /29.4 0V
Separator operation DI a .0 DQ a 4M
Separator Störung X10:8 X12:3 Zulaufventil
=01-F1:22 /14.2 DI0.1 DQ0.0 /18.1 =01-X2:12
Separator failure DI a .1 DQ a .0 Feed valve
Drehzahlüberwachung X10:9 X12:4 Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser
=01-T1:5 /15.2 DI0.2 DQ0.1 /18.4 =01-X2:15
Speed monitoring device DI a .2 DQ a .1 Displacem- and filling water
X10:10 X12:5 Steuerwasser
DI0.3 DQ0.2 /18.3 =01-X2:14
DI a .3 DQ a .2 Operating water
Reserve /24.5 X10:11 X12:6 Reserve
=16-X2:14 DI0.4 DQ0.3 /18.5 =01-X2:17
Spare /25.5 DI a .4 DQ a .3 Spare
Reserve /24.4 X10:12 X12:7 Reserve
=16-X2:10 DI0.5 DQ0.4 /18.6 =01-X2:18
Spare /25.4 DI a .5 DQ a .4 Spare
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. /24.1 X10:13 X12:8
=16-X2:2 DI0.6 DQ0.5
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. /25.1 DI a .6 DQ a .5
=16-X2:7 DI0.7 DQ0.6
Zulaufpumpe Betrieb X10:15 X12:10 Erhitzerfreigabe
=11-K1:24 /21.1 DI1.0 DQ0.7 /26.7 =100-K5:A1
Feed pump operation DI b .0 DQ a .7 Heater release
Zulaufpumpe Störung X10:16 X12:11 Stellventil Auf
=11-Q1:98 /21.2 DI1.1 DQ1.0 /22.3 =11-K3:A1
Feed pump failure DI b .1 DQ b .0 Regulating valve open
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe X10:17 X12:12 Stellventil Zu
=01-X2:22 /19.3 DI1.2 DQ1.1 /22.4 =11-K4:A1
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap DI b .2 DQ b .1 Regulating valve closed
Reserve X10:18
=01-X2:10 /16.3 DI1.3
Spare DI b .3
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung X10:19
=01-T1:7+ /17.3 DI1.4
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring DI b .4
=01-X2:11 /17.4 DI1.5
X11:1
0V /29.3
AQ 2M
X11:2
AQ90
AQ 0
X11:3
AQ92
AQ 1
X11:4
0V /29.3
AI 3M
Masse Analog X11:5
=0-T2:M' /27.1 AI90 V
Earth analog AI 0
Masse Analog X11:6
-K1:X11:5 /27.2 AI92 V
Earth analog AI 1

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K2
X10:1
/29.5 24V
L+
X10:2
/29.5 0V
M
X10:4 Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
/22.7
AI 0 M+ Min / max temperature monitoring
/22.7
AI 0 M- Min / max temperature monitoring
AI100 /22.6 =11-X2:3
AI 0 I+ Min / max temperature monitoring
/22.6
AI 0 I- Min / max temperature monitoring
X11:4 Produkt Temperaturregelung

/22.4
AI 1 M+ Product temperature control
/22.5
AI 1 M- Product temperature control
AI102 /22.5 =11-*0_9_006:1
AI 1 I+ Product temperature control
/22.5
AI 1 I- Product temperature control
X12:4 Messung Schrankinnentemperatur

/11.4
AI 2 M+ Measurement cabinet inner temperature
/11.4
AI 2 M- Measurement cabinet inner temperature
AI104 /11.3 =0-R1:1
AI 2 I+ Measurement cabinet inner temperature
/11.3
AI 2 I- Measurement cabinet inner temperature
X13:1 Strommessung Separator

AI106 /13.2 =01-B1:S1
AI 3 I1~ Current measuring separator
A /13.2

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K3
X10:1
/29.6 24V
AI L+
X10:2
/29.6 0V
AI M
X10:4 Reinoel Ablaufdruck
AI110 /16.1 =01-X2:6
AI 0+ Clean-oil discharge pressure
V X10:5 Masse Analog
A /27.3
AI 0- Earth analog
X10:6 Wasserablauf
AI112 /16.2 =01-X2:8
AI 1+ Water discharge
A /27.4
AI 1- Earth analog
X11:4
AI114
AI 2+
A /27.4
AI 2- Earth analog
X11:6 FI Durchflussmessung
AI116 /23.1 =11-*0_9_002:2
AI 3+ FI flow measuring
A /27.5
AI 3- Earth analog
X13:4 Masse Analog

/27.6
AQ 0M Earth analog
X13:5
AQ110
AQ 0
X13:6 Masse Analog
/27.7
AQ 1M Earth analog
X13:7
AQ112
AQ 1

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K4
X10:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 1M
X10:4
DI2.0
DI a .0
X10:5
DI2.1
DI a .1
X10:6
DI2.2
DI a .2
X10:7
DI2.3
DI a .3
X11:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 2M
X11:4
DI2.4
DI a .4
X11:5
DI2.5
DI a .5
X11:6
DI2.6
DI a .6
X11:7 Separator Not-Halt
DI2.7 /12.8 =0-K1:14
DI a .7 Separator emergency stop
X12:3
/29.7 0V
DI b 3M
X12:4
DI3.0
DI b .0
X12:5
DI3.1
DI b .1
X12:6
DI3.2
DI b .2
X12:7
DI3.3
DI b .3
X13:3
/29.8 0V
DI b 4M
X13:4
DI3.4
DI b .4
X13:5
DI3.5
DI b .5
X13:6
DI3.6
DI b .6
X13:7
DI3.7
DI b .7

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K5
X10:1
/29.9 24V
DQ a L+
X10:2
/29.9 0V
DQ a M
X10:4 Separator Start/Stop
DQ2.0 /14.1 =01-K1:A1
DQ a .0 Separator start/stop
X10:5 Zulaufpumpe Ein / Aus
DQ2.1 /21.1 =11-K2:A1
DQ a .1 Feed pump on / off
X10:6 /24.7 (Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe
DQ2.2 =16-X2:17
DQ a .2 /25.7 (optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump
X10:7
DQ2.3
DQ a .3
X11:4
DQ2.4
DQ a .4
X11:5
DQ2.5
DQ a .5
X11:6
DQ2.6
DQ a .6
X11:7 Sammelstörung
DQ2.7 /26.1 =100-K1:A1
DQ a .7 Common failure
X12:4 Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196)

DQ3.0 /26.3 =100-K2:A1
DQ b .0 Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196)
X12:5 TAH Temperatur Alarm max
DQ3.1 /26.4 =100-K3:A1
DQ b .1 TAH temperature alarm max
X12:6 TAL Temperatur Alarm min
DQ3.2 /26.6 =100-K4:A1
DQ b .2 TAL temperature alarm min
X12:7
DQ3.3
DQ b .3
X13:4
DQ3.4
DQ b .4
X13:5 (Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe
DQ3.5 /19.2 =01-X2:20
DQ b .5 (optional) valve sludge discharge flap
X13:6
DQ3.6
DQ b .6
X13:7
DQ3.7
DQ b .7

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=0-M1 Filter / Lüfter Filter / fan 600 mm

=0-M1 Filter / Lüfter Filter / fan
=00-P1 Prozessanzeige Process display 560 mm 250 mm
=0-Q1 Hauptschalter Isolator
=01-S1 Separator Start/Stop Separator start/stop Cabinet ø 8mm
=11-S1 Zulaufpumpe Start/Stop Feed pump Start/Stop
30 mm
=0-M1
100 mm
TOUCH
320 mm
=00-P1
65 mm
F1 F2 F3 F4
Filter
filter
540 mm
=01-S1 =11-S1
800 mm
760 mm
110 mm
=0-Q1
TRIP. I
On
RESET
O =0-M1
Off
Maßstab 1:3,5 mm
Scale 1:3,5 mm
50 mm
Gewicht: ca. ...kg

Weight: ca. ...kg
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Aufbauplan
Project: Arrangement drawing
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & ELU 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Moutingplate
25x80
25x80
=0-T1
=01-T1
=01-F1
=100-K1
=100-K2
=100-K3
=100-K4
=100-K5
=11-K1
=01-K1
=11-K2
=11-K3
=11-K4
=0-K1
40x80
=100-X2
=16-X2
=00-K1
=00-K2
=00-K3
=00-K4
=00-K5
PE
25x80
40x80
40x80
=0-24M
=01-Q1
=0-T2
=01-B1
=11-Q1
=0-F1
=0-F2
25x80
Cable glands Yard cable size WS part-no..
=0-Q1
13x M16 5,0 - 10,0mm 0005-4486-930
7x M20 8,0 - 13,0mm 0005-4487-930
2x M25 11,0 - 17,0mm 0005-4488-930
3x M16 Spare 0005-4442-900 40x80
=01-X1
=11-X1
=01-X2
=11-X2
=0-X1
PE

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Regelung Gerät KTP 400

Control unit KTP 400
Bestell-nr.
0005-4760-400
order no.
Programm-Nr.
8107-0004-000...199
program-no.
TOUCH
160
Tiefe: 54mm
depth:
Ausschnittmass: 134x114mm
cutout dimension:
Gewicht: _,__kg
F1 F2 F3 F4 weight:
158

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator KTP 400
Tested TE Project:
- Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 37
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Not-Halt Gehäuse mit Schutzkragen

Emergency stop cabinet with protective collar
=Additions 71 mm
-S01
Not-Halt-Box
85 mm
54 mm
mm
ø5
85 mm
109 mm
protection class: "IP 65"

61 mm
M20
8-13mm Note: Installation should be carry out by customer!
18 mm

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Not-Halt Box
Project: Emergency stop box
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU1,5/ZZ
WDU1,5/ZZ
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
Querverweis
Cross reference
X80:0V
PE
Ziel intern
=00-P1
Target internal -T2
-PE
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-24M
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EMA 60 Bl./Sh.
=0+-PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=11-BP-P1
Editor
&EFS/20.7
Tested
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern PE PE
PE
=11-WG005
PE
PE
(optional)feed pump operation external
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=11-*0_3_001 &EFS/20.1
Zulaufpumpe PE
PE
28.08.2017
U1 =11-WD001
PE
PE
Feed pump AK 4
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
3
U1
V1
M
W1
V1
Kunde:
PE
Project:
Projekt:
W1
Customer:
-
-
2
=Customer+L-X &EFS/10.1
Einspeisung PE
PE
PE
-WD001
PE
PE
Incoming
_-J 4x6 mm²
-SC &EFS/10.3
Erdung Schirm PE
SC
SC
Earthing screen
-1M &EFS/10.6
Erdung Montageplatte 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing mounting plate 1 -PE
3
GN/YE
GN/YE
-1T &EFS/10.6
Erdung Tür 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing door 1 -PE

GN/YE
GN/YE
-1G &EFS/10.6
Erdung Gehäuse 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing cabinet 1 -PE

GN/YE
GN/YE
© This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-T1 &EFS/11.1
4
GND
Separator
Steuerspannung AC PE
GND
GEA Westfalia
Control voltage AC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-T2 &EFS/11.6
Steuerspannung DC PE PE
PE
Control voltage DC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-24M &EFS/11.6
= PE
2
2
GN/YE
GN/YE
Benennung/Description:
5
-X1 &EFS/11.2
6
6
Control voltage AC -PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
=01-*0_1_001 &EFS/13.2
Separator PE
PE
=01-WD001
PE
PE
Separator -PE
_-J 4x6 mm²
PTC-Fühler Separator PE &EFS/13.3
PE
=01-WG003
PE
PE
PTC-feeler separator -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
T2 U1
U1
6
V1
‎Θ
M
3~
V1
T1 W1
PE
W1
T2
-
T1
Sprache:
Language:
7
-M1 &EFS/11.2
PE

L
GN/YE
GN/YE
M
1~
PE N
de/en
N
-S01 &EFS/12.2
Not-Halt extern PE PE
Drawing No.:
PE
-WG001
PE
PE
Emergency stop external -PE

Zeichnungs Nr.:
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

8
=01+JB-1X10 &EFS/16.3
Reserve PE
PE
PE
=01-WG004
PE
PE
Spare
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=01-*8_7_002 &EFS/18.2
Zulaufventil PE PE
PE
0505-0120-001
=01-WG010
PE
PE
Feed valve -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
=01-*4_7_001 &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
& EMA
PE
9
=01-WG012
PE
PE
(optional) valve sludge discharge flap -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
40
=0+-PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=01-*4_9_001
Editor
&EFS/19.3
Tested
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
PE
=01-WG013
PE
PE
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=01+JB-1X10 &EFS/18.4
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE
PE
28.08.2017
PE
=01-WG011
PE
PE
Displacem- and filling water -PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=11-*6_7_002 &EFS/22.2
Stellventil - Heizmedium PE
PE
PE
=11-WG002
PE
PE
Regulating valve - heating medium -PE
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
=16-90_9_001 &EFS/24.2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. PE PE
PE
=16-WG001
PE
PE
2
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max.

.-J 4x1,5 mm²
Separator Betrieb PE
PE
PE
=100-WG001
PE
PE
Separator operation
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
=16-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
PE
=16-WG002
PE
PE

.-J 4x1,5 mm²
3
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) PE
PE
PE
=100-WG002
PE
PE
Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196)

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=16-98_7_002 &EFS/24.8
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe PE PE
PE
=16-WG005
PE
PE
(optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TAH Temperatur Alarm max PE
PE
=100-WG003
PE
PE
TAH temperature alarm max

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
PE
&EFS/26.6
4
Separator
TAL Temperatur Alarm min PE
PE
=100-WG004
GEA Westfalia
PE
PE
TAL temperature alarm min

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=Heater+L-X &EFS/26.8
Erhitzerfreigabe PE
PE
PE
=100-WG005
PE
PE
Heater release
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1
PA PE
-PE
X80:PA
GN/YE
GN/YE
5
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1
Spannungsversorgung 3 PE
X10:3
Power supply -PE

GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
6
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
- =00-K5 &EFS/29.8
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0120-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/10.3
&EFS/16.1
&EFS/16.2
&EFS/22.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
Ziel intern
Target internal -SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-SC
Klemmennummer
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
Terminal number
PE SC
PE SC
-PE
=11-X2
Min / max Temperaturüberwachung
Min / max temperature monitoring
Clean-oil discharge pressure
Reinoel Ablaufdruck
FI flow measuring
Water discharge
Earthing screen
Erdung Schirm
Wasserablauf

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/11.0
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.2
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
vb
PE
21
13
Ziel intern
=01-F1
Target internal
-S01
-M1
-T1
-PE
-F2
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
8
Terminal number
RDWHU 1 2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

-WG001
RDWHU 1 2
N L PE 21 22
N
L
21
M
1~
PE
22
-M1
-S01
Emergency stop external
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
Not-Halt extern
Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-X1
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-X1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-XQ1
Klemmennummer
2
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x6 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
L1 L2 L3
L1
=Customer+L-X
Einspeisung
Incoming
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU6
WDU6
WDU6
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=01+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x6 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
U1 V1 W1 T2 T1 PE
W1
U1
V1
PE
M
3~
‎Θ
T2
T1
-*0_1_001
Separator
Separator
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
=01+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_1_001
Editor
&EFS/13.3
Tested
PTC-Fühler Separator 1
T1
1
1
PTC-feeler separator -F1 T1 WDU2,5
TE
= -WG003 2 &EFS/13.3
T2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
1
2
2
T2 U1
-F1 T2 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
U1
28.08.2017
V1
‎Θ
M
3~
T1 W1
V1
PE
W1
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
PE
Customer:
-
-
2
+JB-1X10 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung 3
1
1
1
Speed monitoring device -T1 1+ WDU2,5

= 4 &EFS/15.2
2
2
2
-T1 2- WDU2,5
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 5 &EFS/16.1
4
4
4
Clean-oil discharge pressure =0-T2 L+ WDU2,5

= -WG004 6 &EFS/16.1
3
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
3
3
WDU2,5
Wasserablauf 7 &EFS/16.2
1
Water discharge WDU2,5
3
= 8 &EFS/16.2
6
5
5
WDU2,5
Reserve 9 &EFS/16.3
Spare WDU2,5
= 10 &EFS/16.3
=00-K1 X10:18 WDU2,5
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 11 &EFS/17.4
10
1
1
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring -WG011 =00-K1 X10:20 WDU2,5

.-J 7x1,5 mm²
-*8_7_002 - + &EFS/18.1
4
Separator
Zulaufventil 12
+
1
1
GEA Westfalia
Feed valve =00-K1 X12:3 WDU2,5
-WG010 &EFS/18.1
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 13

2
2
=0-24M 1 WDU2,5
+JB-1X10 &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 14
12
2
2
Operating water =00-K1 X12:5 WDU2,5

Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser 15 &EFS/18.4
15
4
4
Displacem- and filling water =00-K1 X12:4 WDU2,5

12
-WG011 &EFS/18.4
= 16
13
.-J 7x1,5 mm²

5
3
3
WDU2,5
Reserve 17 &EFS/18.5
16
5
5
Spare =00-K1 X12:6 WDU2,5

= 18 &EFS/18.6
=00-K1 X12:7 WDU2,5

= 19 &EFS/18.7
WDU2,5
-*4_7_001 - + &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe 20
+
1
1
(optional) valve sludge discharge flap =00-K5 X13:5 WDU2,5

-WG012 &EFS/19.2
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 21

2
2
=16-X2 3
6
WDU2,5
-*4_9_001 &EFS/19.3
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe 22
13
1
1
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap =00-K1 X10:17 WDU2,5

14 13
= -WG013 23 &EFS/19.3
14
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

2
2
=11-X2 5 WDU2,5
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0120-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
46
=01+JB-1X10
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*9_7_004
Editor
&EFS/18.3
Tested
Steuerwasser PE PE
PE
-WG105
PE
PE
Operating water =0-PE PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
-*0_9_020 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung - + 1
28.08.2017
Speed monitoring device -X2 3
BN
BN
-WG101 &EFS/15.2
-
= .-O 2x0,34 mm² 2
-X2 4
BU
BU
-*1_9_002
I
1
Kunde:
&EFS/16.1
Project:
Projekt:
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 3
Customer:
-
-
Clean-oil discharge pressure -X2 6
WH
WH
= 2
-WG102 4 &EFS/16.1
1
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
-X2 5
2
BK
BK
P
-*0_9_014
I
1 &EFS/16.2
Wasserablauf 5
1
BK
BK
Water discharge
= 2
-WG103 6 &EFS/16.2
2
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
-X2 8
P
WH
WH
Reserve 7 &EFS/16.3
Spare
-*1_9_012 &EFS/17.1
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 8
1
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring -*1_9_012 3
BN
BN
3
= 9 &EFS/17.1
2
1
-WG104
BU
BU
_CY-O 4x0,75 mm²

= 10 &EFS/17.4
4
-X2 11
WH
WH
= 11 &EFS/17.4
-*9_7_004 - + &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 12
+
Operating water -X2 14

BN
BN
-WG105 &EFS/18.3
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 13

-X2 16
BU
BU
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-*9_7_005 - + &EFS/18.4
-
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser 14

Displacem- and filling water
BU
BU
= 15 &EFS/18.4
+
-X2 15
BN
BN
Reserve -WG106 16 &EFS/18.5

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Spare -X2 17
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE PE &EFS/18.4
PE
PE
PE
Displacem- and filling water =0-PE PE
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0120-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
47
=11+-X1
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_3_001
Editor
&EFS/20.1
Tested
Zulaufpumpe 1
U1
1
1
Feed pump U1 -Q1 2 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/20.1
V1
3
V1
1
2
2
-WD001 -Q1 4
M
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
= W1 3 &EFS/20.1
28.08.2017
W1
3
3
-Q1 6 WDU2,5
PE
PE
-*6_7_002
Kunde:
&EFS/22.1
Project:
Projekt:
Stellventil - Heizmedium 4
1
1
1
Customer:
-
-
Regulating valve - heating medium WDU2,5
= 5 &EFS/22.1
1
2
2
2/14
-WG002 -K3 14
2
.-J 5x1,5 mm²

WDU2,5
= 6 &EFS/22.1
3
3
3/11
-K4 14 WDU2,5
= 7 &EFS/22.1
=0-X1 7 WDU2,5
-BP-S1 &EFS/20.5
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Stop Extern 8
21
1
1
(optional)feed pump stop external -S1 22 WDU2,5

22 21 &EFS/20.5
= 9
22
2
2
WDU2,5
3
-BP-S2 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Start Extern 13
10
3
3
(optional)feed pump start external -K1 11 WDU2,5

= 14 13 -WG005 11 &EFS/20.6
14
.-J 7x1,5 mm²

4
4
-K1 14 WDU2,5
-BP-P1 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern 12
X1
5
5
(optional)feed pump operation external X2 X1 WDU2,5

= 13 &EFS/20.6
X2
6
6
=0-X1 6 WDU2,5
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia Benennung/Description:
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0120-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
48
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.7
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/23.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
X11:6
X11:7
X10:6
X10:7
SC
23
X11:6
Ziel intern
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K3
=01-X2
=0-SC
Target internal
Brücken
Bridges
=11+-X2
Klemmennummer
SC
1
6
Terminal number
1 2 3 4 WH BK
.CY-O 4x1,5 mm²
.-O 2x0,34 mm²

-WG003
-WG006
1 2 3 4 WH BK
1 2 3 4 1 2
1
2
1
I
P
2
-*0_9_006
-*0_9_002
FI flow measuring
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
=16+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-90_9_001
Editor
&EFS/24.1
Tested
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. 1
3
1
1
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. 2 3 =11-X2 5 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/24.1
2
1
2
2
1 -WG001 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
MIL/PLE
= 3 &EFS/24.1
28.08.2017
3
3
=01-X2 21 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/24.1
WDU2,5
-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
= 5
1
1
1
2 3 WDU2,5
Kunde:
&EFS/24.3
Project:
Projekt:
= 6
3
2
2
Customer:
-WG002
-
-
1 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
= 7 &EFS/24.2
2
3
3
2
WDU2,5
= 8 &EFS/24.3
WDU2,5
Reserve 9 &EFS/24.4
Spare WDU2,5
= 10 &EFS/24.4
=00-K1 X10:12 WDU2,5
= 11 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
= 12 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
3
= 13 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 14 &EFS/24.5
=00-K1 X10:11 WDU2,5
= 15 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 16 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
-98_7_002 - + &EFS/24.7
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe 17
+
1
1
(optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump =00-K5 X10:6 WDU2,5
-WG005 &EFS/24.7
4
Separator
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 18
2
2
GEA Westfalia
WDU2,5
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0120-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
50
=100+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=Customer+L-X
Editor
&EFS/26.1
Tested
Sammelstörung 1
1
1
Common failure -K1 21 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/26.1
1
2
2
-K1 24 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
Separator Betrieb -WG001 3 &EFS/26.2
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
28.08.2017
3
3
Separator operation =01-Q1 44 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/26.2
4
4
=01-Q1 43 WDU2,5
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) 5 &EFS/26.3
1
1
Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196) -K2 11 WDU2,5
Kunde:
-WG002 &EFS/26.3
Project:
Projekt:
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 6
2
2
Customer:
-
-
-K2 14 WDU2,5
TAH Temperatur Alarm max 7 &EFS/26.4
1
1
-K3 11
2
TAH temperature alarm max WDU2,5

= -WG003 8 &EFS/26.4
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K3 14 WDU2,5
TAL Temperatur Alarm min 9 &EFS/26.6
1
1
TAL temperature alarm min -K4 11 WDU2,5

= -WG004 10 &EFS/26.6
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K4 14 WDU2,5
Erhitzerfreigabe 11
1
1
Heater release -K5 11 WDU2,5

3
= -WG005 12 &EFS/26.7
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K5 14 WDU2,5
4
Separator
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0120-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
60 Bl./Sh.
51
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
Kabelname /Seite.Pfad Quelle (von) Ziel (bis) Kabeltyp Adern gesamt
verwendet
Querschnitt Länge Verschraubung / Klemmbereich Bemerkung
Cable name /page.path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Cross-section Length Cable gland / clamping range Remark
Wires used
=0-WD001 &EFS/10.1 =0-PE;=0-XQ1 =Customer+L-X _-J 4x 4 6 mm² M25x1,5 / 11-17mm
=0-WG001 &EFS/12.1 =0-PE;=0-X1 =0-S01 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01-WD001 &EFS/13.1 =0-PE;=01-X1 =01-*0_1_001 _-J 4x 4 6 mm² M25x1,5 / 11-17mm
=01-WG003 &EFS/13.3 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01-*0_1_001 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01-WG004 &EFS/16.1 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01+JB-1X10 .-J 7x 6 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-WD001 &EFS/20.1 =0-PE;=11-X1 =11-*0_3_001 _-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-WG003 &EFS/22.5 =11-X2 =11-*0_9_006 .CY-O 4x 4 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-BP-P1;=11-BP-S1
=11-WG005 &EFS/20.5 =0-PE;=11-X1 .-J 7x 7 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=11-BP-S2
=11-WG006 &EFS/23.1 =11-X2 =11-*0_9_002 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=16-WG001 &EFS/24.1 =0-PE;=16-X2 =16-90_9_001 .-J 4x 4 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=100-WG001 &EFS/26.1 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Customer+L-X .-J 5x 5 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Kabelübersicht
Project: Cable layout
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EMB 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
verwendet
Wires used
=100-WG005 &EFS/26.7 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Heater+L-X .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG101 &EFS/15.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*0_9_020 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12x1,5 / 3-6mm
Integrated in the sensor

=01+JB-WG102 &EFS/16.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*1_9_002 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm²
block
=01+JB-WG103 &EFS/16.2 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*0_9_014 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm²
block
=01+JB-WG104 &EFS/17.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*1_9_012 _CY-O 4x 4 0,75 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG105 &EFS/18.3 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*9_7_004 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Schaltschrank Klemmenkasten Separator +JB-1X10

Control cabinet Terminal box separator +JB-1X10
PE-BUS
PE
=01+-X2 +JB-1X10
PE PE
PE
1
1 brown
N Drehzahlueberwachung
1
2
2x0,34mm² speed monitoring device

1 2 blue
I
2
-WG004
3
2
7x1,5mm² 3 white PSL/H Reinoel
P
3
M20 (8-13mm)
4
2x0,34mm² Ablaufdruck
4 4 black PSL/H clean oil
+
+
+
5
discharge pressure
3 black
+ P
+
6
2x0,34mm² PSH Wasserablauf

5 PSH water discharge
white
I
+
6
7
5 black black
7
8
brown
9
+
8
+
4x0,75mm² Vibro PCH1220

PCH vibro PCH1220
blue
10
-
9
-
1
11
1 white
10
12
11
2
13
- brown
12
Steuerwasser
-WG011 3x1,5mm²
2 operating water
14
7x1,5mm² 3 blue
13
-
-
M20 (8-13mm)
4
15
blue
14
-
-
Verdraengungs-u. fuellwasser
3x1,5mm²
displacem. a. filling water
3
16
- 4 brown
15
5
17
5
16
18
PE
PE
19
PE
PE-BUS
Bestell-Nr.:0005-1539-280
order-no.:0005-1539-280

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenkasten Übersicht
Project: Terminal box overview
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hinweise zur Installation von Kabeln und Leitungen

Directions for installation from cables and conductors
* Schutzmaßnahmen nach Bestimmungen des VDE bzw. zuständigen EVU ausführen!

All protective measures are to be taken in accordance with electric codes, rules and regulations!
* Generell sind die Vorgaben des lokalen Energieversorgers zwingend einzuhalten
In general the the rules and regulations of the lokal power authorities has to be followed.
* Kabel und Leitungen sind so auszuwählen und zu verlegen, dass eine Gefährdung von Personen und der Umgebung ausgeschlossen ist.
Die angegebenen Kabelquerschnitte sind bezogen auf eine Kabellänge von 50m, Kupfer als Leitematerial, Verlegeart "C" und
eine maximale Umgebungstemperatur von 30°C. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0298-4 (Verwendung von Kabeln und isolierten Leitungen für Starkstromanlagen - Teil 4:
Empfohlene Werte für die Strombelastbarkeit von Kabeln und Leitungen für feste Verlegung in und an Gebäuden und von flexiblen Leitungen).
Neben der Strombelastung sind bei der Errichtung von Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen weitere Faktoren zu berücksichtigen.
Siehe hierzu IEC 60364-5-52 (Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen - Teil 5: Auswahl und Errichtung elektrischer Betriebsmittel - Kapitel 52: Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen)
Cables and lines must be selected and laid in a way to eliminate any risk to persons and the environment.
The cable cross-sections specified in these drawings are based on a max. length of 50m, copper as conducting material,laying version "C" and a maximum ambient temperature of 30°C.
Refer also to DIN VDE 0298-4 (Usage of cables and cords in power installations - Part 4:
Recommended current-carrying capacity for sheathed and nonsheathed cables for fixed wirings in and around buildings and for flexible cables and cords).
Besides the current load are in the erection of wiring systems additional parameters to take into account.
Refer also to IEC 60364-5-52 (Erection of low voltage installations - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Chapter 52: Wiring systems)
* Messleitungen sind grundsätzlich abgeschirmt zu verlegen!
Measuring lines must always be laid shielded!
* WD-Kabel getrennt vom WF-/WG-Kabeln verlegen!
WD-cables to be installed separate from WF-/WG-cable!
* Alle Kabel müssen den Flammentest Anforderungen für gebündelte Kabel nach IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13 gerecht werden.
All cables must meet the flame test requirements for bunched cables acc. to IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13.
* Das gesamte Kabelmaterial muss halogenfrei nach IEC 60754-1, giftfrei nach IEC 60754 und korrosionsfrei nach IEC 60754-2 sein
All cable materials must be free of halogens acc. to IEC 60754-1, no toxicity acc. to 60754 and no corrosivity acc. to IEC 60754-2.
* Alle Kabel müssen eine Abnahme der relevante Abnahmegesellschaft haben. Isolierungsfestigkeit: 0.6/1KV
All cables must have an approval of the relevant classification society. Insulating strength: 0.6/1KV * GEA WSPN Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV.
WD-Kabel Energiekabel < 1kV WE-Kabel Erdungs-/Potentialausgleichsleiterleiter

WD-cable = Energy cable < 1kV WE-cable = Earth-/ Equipotential bonding conductor
WF-Kabel Datenbus WG-Kabel Steuer-/ Messkabel WH-Kabel Lichtwellenleiter
WF-cable = Data bus WG-cable = Control-/measuring cable WH-cable = Optical fibre
* Legende Kabeltypen (Kabelliste)

Legend cable typ (list of cables)
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter

-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor FC.CY = Motorkabel FU mit konzentrischem Außenleiter (PE)
Motor cable FC with concentric outer (PE)
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter
-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor PL = Potentialausgleichsleiter
Equipotential bonding conductor
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor screened Ex-CY = Steuerleitung blau für eigensichere Stromkreise
Control line blue for intrinsically safecircuits
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor screened CY-TP = Datenleitung paarverseilt
Data line twisted pair
Motorkabel FU geschirmt mit Schutzleiter
FC.CY-J = Motor cable FC screened with protective conductor

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Hinweise zur Installation
Project: Instructions for installation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FU
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
General Information for the equipotential bonding system.

≥10 mm²
GN YE Please note, that the information shown on this page are
not customised.
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
≥25 mm²
GN YE
≥10 mm²
GN YE
PA
Potentialausgleichsschiene
equipotential bonding strip
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
≥10 mm²
GN YE
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
≥25 mm²
GN YE
Fundamenterder
foundation earth

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Potentialausgleich Separator
Project: Potential equalization separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
Funktionszeichen /Seite.Pfad WS Teil-Nr Hersteller Bestell-Nr. Bezeichnung Hersteller
Function sign /page.path WS part-no. Manufacturer order no.. Name Manufacturer
=0-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1437-030 GV2P32 Motorschutzschalter GV2-P - 24...32A Groupe Schneider

Motor circuit breaker GV2-P - 24...32A
=0-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1517-000 GVAE11 Hilfsschalter querliegend, 1S+1Ö Groupe Schneider
Auxiliary switch, 1NO+1NC
=0-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1437-230 GV2APN02 Drehantrieb für Türeinbau, abschließbar, rot/gelb Groupe Schneider
Front-rotating drive, red
=0-F1 &EFS/11.1 0005-1872-670 3RV2411-0KA10 Leistungsschalter, 0,9...1,25A, BGR S00, für den Transformatorschutz Siemens
Circuit-breaker, 0,9...1,25A, size S00, transformer protection
=0-F2 &EFS/11.1 A9F04106 A9F04106 Sicherungsautomat C 6A, 1 pol, iC60N Groupe Schneider
Circuit breaker C 6A, 1 pol, iC60N
=0-M1 &EFS/11.1 3239100 3239100 Filterlüfter, 105/120m³/h 230V, 50/60Hz, RAL 7035 Rittal
Fan-and-filter unit, 105/120m³/h 230V, 50/60Hz, RAL 7035
=0-M1 &EFS/11.1 0005-1805-320 3238200 Austrittsfilter RAL 7035 für Filterlüfter 3238.xxx Rittal
Outlet filter RAL 7035 for fan-and-filter units 3238.xxx
=0-24M &EFS/11.6 0005-4708-890 1031400000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 1,5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal
=0-R1 &EFS/11.3 32 209 210 32 209 210 Temperatursensor Pt100, To92, Temperaturbereich: -50...+150°C Heraeus
Pt100 temperature sensor, To92, temperature range: -50...+150°C
=0-T1 &EFS/11.1 0005-0551-490 700199 Steuerspannungstransformator, Prim.: 200-560VAC, Sek.: 115/230V, 400VA Ismet
Control voltage transformer
=0-T2 &EFS/11.5 0005-1407-050 6EP1333-2BA20-0AA0 Einphasennetzgeraet Prim.: 120/230V, 50/60Hz, Sec.: 24VDC, 5A Siemens
Single phase power supply
=0-X1 &EFS/11.0.. 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
Feed-through terminal, 2.5mm², TS 35
=0-K1 &EFS/12.6 0005-4033-110 2966207 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay single-contact, 230 VAC/ 220 VDC
=01-B1 &EFS/13.1 4NC5112-0BC20 4NC5112-0BC20 Stromwandler, 50/1A, 2,5VA Siemens
Current transformer
=01-F1 &EFS/13.4 0005-1100-070 3RN1010-1CM00 THERMISTOR-MOTORSCHUTZ, STANDARD-AUSWERTEGERÄT, AUTO, 1S+1OE, AC 230V Siemens
THERMISTOR MOTOR PROTECTION, EVALUATION UNIT, AUTO, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V
=01-Q1 &EFS/13.8 0005-1871-570 3RT2026-1AL20 Schütz, AC-3, 11KW/400V, 1S+1OE, AC 230V 50/60HZ, Siemens
Contactor, AC-3, 11KW/400V, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V 50/60HZ,
=01-Q1 &EFS/13.8 3RH2911-1HA20 3RH2911-1HA20 Hilfsschalterblock, 2S, für Motorschütze Siemens
Auxiliary switch block, 2NO
=01-Q1 &EFS/13.8 3RT2926-1CD00 3RT2926-1CD00 RC-Glied, AC 127...240V, DC 150...250V Siemens
RC-Element
=01-S1 &EFS/13.8 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21-BC Doppeldrucktaster komplett, tastend, grün/rot, 1x1NO+1x1NC Siemens
Double push button complete
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Stückliste
Project: Parts list
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0120-001 & EPB 60 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=01-X1 &EFS/13.1 0005-3506-890 1020200000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 6 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=01-X2 &EFS/13.3; 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 2.5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=01-K1 &EFS/14.1 0005-4033-040 2966171 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Un=24 Phoenix Contakt
Relay single contact
=01-T1 &EFS/15.1 0005-4509-010 7505501 Schaltverstärker Turck
Amplifier
=0-PE &EFS/20.1 0404017 404017 Einspeiseklemme, Belastungsstrom: 41 A, Querschnitt: 0,5 mm² - 6 mm², Breite: 7 mm, Phoenix Contakt
Power terminal block, Load current : 41 A, Cross section: 0.5 mm² - 6 mm², Width: 7 mm,
=11-K1 &EFS/20.7 0005-4033-120 2967099 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 2 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact, 230 VAC/220 VDC
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-000 LUB12 Motorabgang Grundgerät - 12A AC-43, 440V Groupe Schneider
Motor outlet of basic unit - 12 A AC-43, 440 V
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-120 LUCA05FU Steuereinheit Standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10 Groupe Schneider
Control unit, standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-310 LUA1C20 Hilfsschaltermodul MSS LUA, 2S Groupe Schneider
Aux. switch module, MSS LUA, 2 NO.
=11-K3 &EFS/22.3 0005-4033-140 2967604 Relais Mehrfachkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais, für hohe Einschaltströme, 1 Schließer Phoenix Contakt
Relay twin-contact
Relay twin-contact
Relay twin-contact
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-4760-010 6AV2124-5DC00-0AC0 Touchpanel KTP400 Comfort, 4" Farb-Display, 24VDC Siemens
Touch panel KTP400 Comfort
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-3668-100 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 Speicherkarte, 2 GByte, SD Siemens
Memory card, 2 GByte, SD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 Zentralbaugruppe, SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1215C, 14DI/10DO/2AI/2AO Siemens
CPU module
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 0005-4278-060 6XV1850-2GH20 SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD RJ45/RJ45, LAENGE 2 M Siemens
SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 Speicherkarte, 12 MByte, MMC Siemens
Memory card, 12 MByte, MMC
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4 0005-4281-060 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 Analog Eingangsmodul, SM 1231, 4AI Siemens
Analog module input
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5 0005-4281-100 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 Analogein-/ausgabe, SM 1234, 4AE/2AA, U/I, 13/14BIT Siemens
Analoge module in-/output
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6 0005-4280-040 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Eingangsmodul, SM 1221, 16DI Siemens
Digital input module
=00-K5 &EFS/29.8 0005-4280-060 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Ausgangsmodul, SM 1222, 16 DO, 24VDC/0,5A Siemens
Digital output module
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-0058-500 1058500 Kompakt-Schaltschrank AE, lackiert RAL 7035, mit Montageplatte, eintürig Rittal
Compact enclosure AE, painted RAL 7035, with mount. plate, single door
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-1412-000 2519000 Türarretierung für das AE Programm Rittal
Door stay for the AE range
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 AKZ, Kabelcenter AKZ, Kabelcenter Aderkennzeichnung, Kabelcenter Plenge
Wire marking, cable center
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 8556-9999-000 KLEINMATERIAL Kleinmaterial Schaltschrank Plenge
Incidentals control cabinet
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4486-930 70-16-060-000-10-041 Verschraubung Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogenfrei, d=5-10mm Jacob
Screw connection polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7032, halogen free, 5-10mm
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0013-0130-900 50.216 PA7035 Gegenmutter Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Counter nut polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4442-900 81-16-866-0000-04 Blindstopfen Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Blanking plug polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
=Additions &ELU/36.9 0830407 0830407 Kabelmarker, weiß, Schriftfeldgröße: 40 x 12 mm Phoenix Contakt
Cable marker
=Additions &ELU/36.9 8555-9001-040 8555-9001-040 Betriebsanleitung IO, englisch WS Mineraloil Systems
Instruction manual IO

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - 59302 Oelde ( Germany ) - Phone +49 2522 77-0
Kunde : -
Customer
Anlagenbezeichnung : -
Designation of plant
Zeichnungsnummer : 0505-0620-001
Drawing no.
Kommission : -
Internal order no.
Hersteller (Firma) : GEA Westfalia Separator

Manufacturer (company)
Projektname : -
Name of project
Typ : IO / OSE 20-0136/0196
Type
Sprache : de/en
Language
Technische Daten : 380-420VAC/ 50/60 Hz +/-5 % -
Technical data 440-480VAC
Erstellt am : 25.08.2015 Bearbeitet am : 28.08.2017 Angewandte Normen IEC 81346

Prepared Processed Applied standards IEC 61355
IEC 60617
GEA Projektsachbearbeiter : Ch. Teiner
GEA project contact

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Titel- / Deckblatt
Project: Title- / cover sheet
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0620-001 & EAA 61 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Titel- / Deckblatt
&EAA 1 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Title- / cover sheet
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 2 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 3 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 4 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB 5 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Table of contents
Revisionsübersicht
&EBH 6 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Revision overview
&EDB 7 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 8 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Informations-Blatt
&EDB 9 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Information-sheet
Einspeisung
&EFS 10 =0 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Incoming
Steuerspannung
&EFS 11 =0 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Control voltage
Not-Halt
&EFS 12 =0 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop
Separator
&EFS 13 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator
&EFS 14 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator
Separator Drehzahlmessung
&EFS 15 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator speed measuring
Separator Signale
&EFS 16 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator signals
Separator Vibro
&EFS 17 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator vibro
Separator Ventile
&EFS 18 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator valves
Separator Schlammklappe
&EFS 19 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Separator sludge flap

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 20 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
Zulaufpumpe
&EFS 21 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Feed pump
&EFS 22 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EFS 23 =11 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
FI flow measuring
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 24 =16 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Schlammpumpe
&EFS 25 =16 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Sludge pump
Signalaustausch
&EFS 26 =100 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Signal exchange
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 27 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Prozessanzeige KPT 400
&EFS 28 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Process display KPT 400
SPS Spannungsversorgung
&EFS 29 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC power supply
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 30 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 31 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 32 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 33 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
SPS Übersicht
&EFS 34 =00 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
PLC overview
Aufbauplan
&ELU 35 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
Aufbauplan
&ELU 36 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Arrangement drawing
&ELU 37 KTP 400 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Not-Halt Box
&ELU 38 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Emergency stop box

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
&EMA 39 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
&EMA 40 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 41 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
&EMA 42 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
&EMA 43 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 44 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
&EMA 45 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 46 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 47 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+SB-1X20
&EMA 48 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal connecting plan =01+SB-1X20
&EMA 49 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 50 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 51 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
&EMA 52 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 53 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Kabelübersicht
&EMB 54 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Cable layout
Klemmenkasten Übersicht
&EMB 55 =01 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Terminal box overview
Hinweise zur Installation
&EMB 56 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Instructions for installation
Potentialausgleich Separator
&EMB 57 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Potential equalization separator

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Table of contents
Stückliste
&EPB 58 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 59 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 60 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list
Stückliste
&EPB 61 28.08.2017 NAT/PLE
Parts list

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Revisionsübersicht
Revision overview
Revisionsname Revisionskommentar Revisionsänderungsgrund Seitenname Ersteller Datum
Revision name Revision comment Revision on the basis of change Page name Author Date

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Revisionsübersicht
Project: Revision overview
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. Language: de/en Drawing No.: 0505-0620-001 & EBH 61 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung Vollständige Bezeichnung Beschriftung Strukturbeschreibung
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
Dokumentenart Deckblatt
&EAA
Document type Cover sheet
Dokumentenart Inhaltsverzeichnis
&EAB
Document type Table of contents
Dokumentenart Revisionsübersicht
&EBH
Document type Revision overview
Dokumentenart Strukturkennzeichen Übersicht / Vorschriften
&EDB
Document type Structure indentification overview / instructions
Dokumentenart Stromlaufplan
&EFS
Document type Circuit diagram
Dokumentenart Aufbauplan
&ELU
Document type Arrangement drawing
Dokumentenart Klemmenanschlussplan
&EMA
Document type Terminal connecting plan
Dokumentenart Kabelübersicht
&EMB
Document type Cable layout
Dokumentenart Stückliste
&EPB
Document type Parts list
Anlage Einspeisung
=0
Plant Incoming
Anlage Separator
=01
Plant Separator
Anlage Zulaufpumpe
=11
Plant Feed pump
Anlage Schlammpumpe
=16
Plant Sludge pump
Anlage Signalaustausch
=100
Plant Signal exchange
Anlage SPS
=00
Plant PLC
Anlage Zugabe
=Additions
Plant Addition
Anlage Kunde
=Customer
Plant Customer
Anlage Erhitzer
=Heater
Plant Heater
Einbauort Abzweigdose
+JB
Mounting place Junction box
Einbauort Sensorblock
+SB
Mounting place Sensor bloc
Einbauort Lokal
+L
Mounting place Local
Einbauort Kommandostelle Zulaufpumpe
+OP_FP
Mounting place Control station feed pump

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Strukturkennzeichenübersicht
Project: Overview structure indicator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Vorschriften / Spezifikation
Instruction / specification
Schaltschrank : Ausführung:
Control cabinet : Version:
Bezeichnung Schaltschrank Aderkennzeichnung
CC Core indentification
YES
Denomination control cabinet
Schutzart Potentialbezeichnung
Protective rating
IP54 Potential designation
NO
Umgebungstemperatur Halogenfreie Verdrahtung / Kanäle

Ambient temperature
(+5) - (+50) °C Halogen free wiring / channels
NO
Kabelkennzeichnungsschilder
Cable marking plates
YES
Klassifizierung ABS, BV, CCS, DNV, GL, KR, LRS,

Classification NKK, RINA, RMRS
Kennzeichnungsschilder
Labels
PLASTIC WHITE, LETTERS BLACK
Sprache Kennzeichnungsschilder
Language labels
de/en
Schnittstelle:
Interface:
Bus Verbindung zum Kunden PLC
Bus connection to customer PLC
NO
Einspeisung:
Power supply
Netz-/ Anschlussspannung 380-420VAC/
Mains-/ input voltage 440-480VAC
Netzfrequenz
Mains frequency
50/60 Hz
Drehfeld
Rotary field
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
Spannungstoleranz
Voltage tolerance
+/-5 %
Kabeleinführung
Cable inlet
BOTTOM
Einspeisung redundant
Incoming redundant
NO
Steuerspannungen:
Control voltages:
Steuerspannung 1
Control voltage 1
230V AC
Steuerspannung 2
Control voltage 2
24V DC

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Verdrahtung
Wiring
Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt Stromkreise Leiter Farbe Querschnitt
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Hauptstromkreise 380-420VAC/ L1 Schwarz ≥ 1,5mm² Steuerspannung 230V AC L Rot ≥ 0,75mm²
Main circuits 440-480VAC Black Control voltage Red
L2 Schwarz N Rot / weiß
Black " Red / white "
L3 Schwarz
Black "
N Hellblau ≥ 1,5mm²
Light blue
PE Grün / gelb ≥ 2,5mm²
Green / yellow
Steuerspannung 24V DC + Dunkelblau ≥ 0,75mm²

Control voltage Dark blue
- Blau / weiß
Blue / white "
Analog abgeschirmt L+ Weiß ≥ 0,75mm²

Analog screened White
M Braun
Brown "
Messleitung Weiß ≥ 0,75mm²

Measuring circuit White
Stromwandlerleitungen Schwarz ≥ 2,5mm²

Current transformer lines Black
Verriegelungsleitungen (AC/DC) Orange ≥ 0,75mm²

Interlocking conductors (AC/DC) Orange

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1 / 13.0
L2 / 13.0
L3 / 13.0
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC
L1.2 / 20.0
L2.2 / 11.0
L3.2 / 11.0
13
21
1
-Q1
14
22
24...32A
In: 29A
/26.1
I> I> I>

2
Daten Einspeisung:
Data Power supply
Min. Querschnitt:
6 mm²
Min. Cross-section:
-PE -PE -SC -PE -PE -PE
Vorsicherung:
-
Pre-fuse:
Umgebungstemperatur:
(+5) - (+50) °C
-WD001 Ambient temperature:
_-J
4x6 mm² Max. Kabellänge:
50 m
PE
PE
PE
Max. Cable length:
-1M -1T -1G U: 380-420VAC/

PE
L1
L2
L3
440-480VAC
Earthing mounting plate 1

f: 50/60 Hz
=Customer Erdung Montageplatte 1 P: Max. 11 kW
+L-X
Erdung Gehäuse 1
Earthing cabinet 1
Icn: 35/10 kA
Earthing screen
Earthing door 1
Erdung Schirm
Erdung Tür 1
Vollaststrom:
~29 A
Einspeisung Full load current:
Incoming

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Einspeisung
Project: Incoming
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380-420VAC/ 380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 440-480VAC
10.9 / L2.2 L2.2 / 20.0
10.9 / L3.2 L3.2 / 20.0
230V AC
L.A / 13.4
N.A / 12.0
230V AC
L.X / 12.0
1
5
-F1 N.X / 20.4
0,9...1,25A
EW: see table
I> I> I>
2
N/L2
L1
Primär Spannung T1 Anschluss (X1, X2) Verbindung (X3, X4) Einstellung F1
X1 X3 X4 X2 Primary voltage T1 Connection (X1, X2) Connection (X3, X4) Setting F1
-T1 -T2 INPUT
400VA 380VAC B-H C-E 1,22A 120/230VAC GEA
400VAC B-J C-E 1,16A 24VDC/5A power
420VAC B-J C-F 1,10A
GND 440VAC A-J C-F 1,05A
OFF
ON
ua va PE ub vb 460VAC A-K D-E 1,01A
230V AC
230V AC
480VAC A-K C-F 0,97A A

B
OUTPUT
-PE
L+
L+'
PE
M'
1
M.A / 15.0
-F2
-PE M.K / 27.0
2
C6A
M.R / 14.0
2
-24M
-PE
M.T / 28.0
=00-K2 =00-K2 M.X / 18.0
PT100 PT100 24V DC
L+.A / 12.7
/31.5 24V DC
L+.K / 29.0
AI104 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 24V DC
L+.X / 16.0
24V DC
X12 X12 X12 X12 L+.T / 28.0
AI 2 I+
6
AI 2 I-
7
AI 2 M+
4
AI 2 M-
5
1
-X1
-PE
N
-PE
L
-M1
M -R1
19/18W 1~ PT100
2
Schaltschranklüfter
PE
Cabinet fan
Steuerspannung AC Messung Schrankinnentemperatur Steuerspannung DC

Control voltage AC Measurement cabinet inner temperature Control voltage DC

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Steuerspannung
Project: Control voltage
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC 230V AC
11.9 / L.X L.X / 22.0
230V AC
1L.X / 13.4
230V AC
1L.A / 20.4
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.A L+.A / 14.0
11
-K1
12
14
/12.6
DI a .7
7
X11
DI2.7
/33.5
=00-K4
Separator
Not-Halt
Separator
emergency stop
A1
-K1
A2
11.9 / N.A N.A / 13.4
-PE
Brücke entfernen bei
Anschluß eines
7
externen Not-Halt!
(Option) -X1
Remove link in case of
an external emergency
stop! (optional)
-WG001
.-J
3x1,5 mm²
21
14
PE
11 /12.8
12
-S01
22
Not-Halt extern Not-Halt

Emergency stop external Emergency stop

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Not-Halt
Project: Emergency stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380-420VAC/
440-480VAC 230V AC 230V AC
10.9 / L1 11.9 / L.A L.A / 22.0
230V AC
10.9 / L2 12.9 / 1L.X
10.9 / L3
Strommessung
Separator
Current measuring
separator
=00-K2
/31.5
AI106
X13
AI 3 I1~
1
AI 3 I2~
2
13
-F1
14
/13.4
11
1
-Q1 -K1
2
12
14
/13.8 /14.1
S1
21
-B1
S2
50/1A -S1
22
/13.8
13
13
-S1 -Q1
14
14
/13.8 /13.8
A1
A1
T1
-F1 M -Q1
T2
A2
A2
12.9 / N.A N.A / 20.4
-PE -PE
1
-X1 -X2
-WD001 -WG003
_-J .-J
Linkslauf 4x6 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
Anti-clockwise rotation
W1
U1
V1
PE
13 14 /13.8 1 2 /13.1
M 21 22 /14.2 3 4 /13.1
*0_1_001 3~ 5 6 /13.1
13 14 /13.9
380-420VAC/50Hz/7,5kW/13,1-14,7A ‎Θ
440-480VAC/60Hz/7,5kW/13,1-14,7A 21 22
T2
T1
33 34 /14.1
43 44 /26.2
Separator PTC-Fühler Separator Betrieb

Separator Separator Separator operation
PTC-feeler
separator

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator
Project: Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
12.9 / L+.A L+.A / 15.0
33
21
-Q1 34 -F1
22
/13.8 /13.4
DI a .0
DI a .1
7
X10 8
X10
DI0.0 DI0.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Separator Separator
Betrieb Störung
Separator Separator
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.0
X10
DQ a .0
4
A1
-K1
A2
11.9 / M.R M.R / 21.0
14
11 /13.8
12
Separator
Start/Stop
Separator
start/stop

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator
Project: Separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
14.9 / L+.A L+.A / 17.0
11.9 / M.A
=00-K1
0-12000 r.p.m.
/30.3
DI0.2
X10
DI a .2
5 9
6
-T1
8-
24V DC
7+
1+
2-
3+
4-
3
-X2
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/16.1
+JB
-1X10 1 2
+JB-WG101
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
+
*0_9_020
SI
-
+ BN = brown
- BU = blue
Drehzahlüberwachung

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Drehzahlmessung
Project: Separator speed measuring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3 =00-K3
4-20mA 4-20mA
/32.5 /32.5
AI110 AI112
X10 X10
=00-K1
AI 0+
4
AI 1+
6
/30.3
-SC -SC
DI1.3
=0-SC
=0-SC
X10
DI b .3
18
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.X L+.X / 19.0
-PE
10
5
-X2 9
-WG004
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/15.1
+JB
L+_1X10 / 17.1
PE
4
-1X10 PE
+JB-WG121
.-J
5x1,5 mm²
+SB
PE_1X20 / 18.6
M_1X20 / 18.5
2
-1X20
+SB-WG201 +SB-WG202 +SB-WG203

.-O .-O .-O
2x0,34 mm² 2x0,34 mm² 3x0,75 mm²
A/Q
+
1
*1_9_002 I *0_9_014 I *0_9_013

PSL/H P SMS P WMS
4-20mA 4-20mA
Reinoel Schlammraumüberwachung Wasserabfuhr

Ablaufdruck Sludge room monitoring Water discharge
Clean-oil
discharge pressure

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Signale
Project: Separator signals
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
15.9 / L+.A L+.A / 21.0
=00-K1 =00-K1
/30.3 /30.3
DI1.4 DI1.5
X10 X10
DI b .4
19
DI b .5
20
11
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/18.3
+JB 16.3 / L+_1X10
M_1X10 / 18.3
-1X10 8 11 9 10
+JB-WG104
_CY-O
4x0,75 mm²
SC
1
*1_9_012
PCH 1220
+24V DC
0V
NAHH
-D1
Relais
Relay
(Option) NAHH Separator (Option) NAHH Separator

Vibrationsüberwachung Vibrationsüberwachung
(optional) NAHH separator (optional) NAHH separator
vibration monitoring vibration monitoring

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Vibro
Project: Separator vibro
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1

/30.5 /30.5 /30.5 /30.5 /30.5
DQ0.0 DQ0.2 DQ0.1 DQ0.3 DQ0.4
X12
DQ a .0 X12 X12 X12 X12
3
DQ a .2
5
DQ a .1
4
DQ a .3
6
DQ a .4
7
11.9 / M.X M.X / 19.0
PE -PE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-X2
-WG011
.-J
7x1,5 mm²
/17.4
+JB
17.1 / M_1X10
-PE -PE
12
13
15
14
16
18
17
PE
-1X10 PE PE -1X10 PE
+JB-WG122
.-J
4x1,5 mm²
+SB
16.3 / M_1X20
16.3
PE_1X20
11
10
PE
PE
8
9
-1X20 PE PE
-WG010 +JB-WG105 +JB-WG106 +SB-WG204 +SB-WG205

.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
+
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
+
+
*8_7_002 *9_7_004 *9_7_005 *0_7_010 *0_7_011
-
-
-
Zulaufventil Steuerwasser Verdrängungs- und Kreislaufventil Wasserabfuhrventil

Feed valve Operating water Füllwasser Circulation valve Water discharge valve
Displacem- and
filling water

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Ventile
Project: Separator valves
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K5 =00-K1
/34.5 /30.3
DQ3.5 DI1.2
X13 X10
DQ b .5
5
DI b .2
17
24V DC 24V DC
16.9 / L+.X L+.X / 23.0
18.9 / M.X M.X / 24.0
PE PE
20
21
22
23
-X2 -X2
-WG012 -WG013
.-J .-J
3x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
13
+
PE
PE
*4_7_001 *4_9_001
14
-
(Option) Ventil (Option) Rückmeldung

Schlammablauf Klappe Schlammablauf Klappe
(optional) valve (optional) feed back
sludge discharge flap sludge discharge flap

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Separator Schlammklappe
Project: Separator sludge flap
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
10.9 / L1.2 12.9 / 1L.A
11.9 / L2.2
11.9 / L3.2
5
-Q1
17
LUB12 L1 L2 L3
13
21
A1
/20.9
-Q1
18
/20.2
14
22
A2
1,25...5A
110-220V DC/AC Steuereinheit
LUCA05FU Control unit
In:...A
21
11
-S1 -K2
22
14
12
/20.7 /21.1
LUA1C20
17
97
18
98
/20.7 /21.2
T1 T2 T3
2
11
13
11
2,5 BK2,5 BK2,5 BK
-K1 -S1 =100-K1
12
14
14
12
14
/20.7 /20.7 /26.1
A1
A1
-K1 -Q1
A2
A2
/20.2
13.9 / N.A
11.9 / N.X N.X / 22.0
-PE -PE
10
11
12
13
=0-PE
=0-PE
1
9
-X1 -X1
remove bridge for
remote start/stop!
-WD001 -WG005
_-J .-J
4x2,5 mm² 7x1,5 mm²
Rechtslauf
Clockwise rotation Achtung! 14
W1
U1
11 /20.7
V1
PE
-BP 12
X1
13
21
Vor dem Einschalten der Zulaufpumpe
PE
Option! 24
*0_3_001
M den Leistungsschalter auf Nennstrom Optional!
-S1 -S2 14 -P1 22
21 /21.1
X2
0,55-2,2kW
3 des Motors einstellen (s. Typenschild des Motors)
22
1,32-4,8A
Attention!
binary contacts for
Before switch-on feed pump, adjust the circuit breaker remote start/stop
to nominal current of the motor (look at motor label)
Zulaufpumpe (Option) (Option) (Option) Zulaufpumpe
Feed pump Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe Feed pump
Stop Extern Start Extern Betrieb Extern
(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump(optional)feed pump
stop external start external operation external
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
17.9 / L+.A
21
97
-K1 -Q1
22
24
98
/20.7 /20.3
DI b .0
DI b .1
15
X10 16
X10
DI1.0 DI1.1
/30.3 /30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Zulaufpumpe Zulaufpumpe
Betrieb Störung
Feed pump Feed pump
operation failure
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.1
X10
DQ a .1
A15
-K2
A2
14.9 / M.R M.R / 22.2
14
11 /20.8
12
Zulaufpumpe
Ein / Aus
Feed pump on
/ off

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Feed pump
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC
13.9 / L.A
230V AC
12.9 / L.X
20.9 / N.X
=00-K2 =00-K2 =00-K2 =00-K2
13.
13.
13
13
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
-K3 -K4 /31.5 /31.5
14
14.
14
14.
/22.3 /22.4 AI102 AI100
/31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5 /31.5
open close
X11 X11 X11 X11 X10 X10 X10 X10
AI 1 M+
4
AI 1 M-
5
AI 1 I+
6
AI 1 I-
7
AI 0 I-
7
AI 0 M+
4
AI 0 M-
5
AI 0 I+
Clamp 7 is attached only with "Spring-loaded"
=00-K1 =00-K1
Klemme 7 wird nur bei "Spring-loaded"
/30.5 /30.5 -SC -SC

DQ1.0 DQ1.1
=0-SC
=0-SC
X12 X12
Stellventil angeschlossen
DQ b .0
11
DQ b .1
12
control valve
A1
A1
-K3 -K4
A2
A2
21.9 / M.R M.R / 26.0

-PE
SC
4
4
-X1 -X2
-WG002 -WG003
.-J .CY-O
5x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm²
13 14 /22.2 13 14 /22.2
close
open
*6_7_002 13. 14. /22.2 13. 14. /22.3 *0_9_006

1
3
1 2/14 3/11 40 PE
PT100 PT100
Motor valve
M
2
4
1 ~
Stellventil - Heizmedium Stellventil Auf Stellventil Zu Produkt Min / max

Regulating valve - heating medium Regulating valve open Regulating valve closed Temperaturregelung Temperaturüberwachung
Product Min / max
temperature control temperature monitoring

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Produkt Temperaturregelung
Project: Product temperature control
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3
4-20mA
/32.5
AI116
X11
AI 3+
6
-SC
=0-SC
24V DC 24V DC
19.9 / L+.X L+.X / 24.0
5
-X2
-WG006
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
1
*0_9_002 I
FI P
4-20mA
FI flow measuring

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator FI Durchflussmessung
Project: FI flow measuring
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Option A
applicable for 2 x
LSHH Liquitec
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-020
2026-1165-030
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-040
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
23.9 / L+.X
19.9 / M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE -PE -PE
10
11
12
14
13
15
16
17
18
2
-X2 -X2
WG001 WG002 -WG005

.-J .-J .-J
4x1,5 mm² 4x1,5 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
/25.1 /25.4 /25.7
PE
3
+ - PE + - PE 98_7_002
90_9_001 90_9_002 /25.7
-
/25.1 /25.4
2
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank (Option) LAHH Schlammtank Reserve Reserve (Option) Ventil Pneumatische
Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Spare Schlammpumpe
(optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) LAHH sludge tank (optional) valve pneumatic
level max. / max. level max. / max. sludge pump

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Option B
applicable for
1 x LSHH + 1 x LSH Baumer
ALARM 0 ALARM 0 2025-1165-050
2026-1165-060
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
2027-1165-050
/30.3 /30.3 /30.3 /30.3
DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
X10 X10 X10 X10
DI a .6
13
DI a .7
14
DI a .5
12
DI a .4
11
24V DC
/ L+.X
/ M.X
=00-K5
/34.5
DQ2.2
X10
DQ a .2
6
-PE
11
12
10
14
13
15
16
17
18
1
-X2 -X2
WH
WH
BN
BN
BU
BU
BK
BK
WG001 WG002 -WG005

.-O .-O .-J
4x0,75 mm² 4x0,75 mm² 3x1,5 mm²
/24.1 /24.2 /24.7
1
3
1
PE
+ -
+ -
90_9_002 98_7_002
90_9_001 /24.7
-
/24.1 /24.3
2
4
2
LAHH Schlammtank LAH Schlammtank Reserve Ventil Pneumatische

Füllstand max. / max. Füllstand max. / max. Spare Schlammpumpe
LAHH sludge tank LAH sludge tank Valve pneumatic sludge
level max. / max. level max. / max. pump

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K1

/34.5 /34.5 /34.5 /34.5 /30.5
DQ2.7 DQ3.0 DQ3.1 DQ3.2 DQ0.7
X11 X12 X12 X12 X12
DQ a .7
7
DQ b .0
4
DQ b .1
5
DQ b .2
6
DQ a .7
10
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
22.4 / M.R
14 14 14 14 14
11 /20.8 11 /26.3 11 /26.4 11 /26.5 11 /26.7
12 12 12 12 12
24
21 /26.0
22
22
24
21
43
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
-K1 =0-Q1 =01-Q1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
21
22
44
11
11
11
11
/26.1 /10.1 /13.8 /26.3 /26.4 /26.6 /26.7
PE PE PE PE PE
10
11
12
1
3
4
9
-X2 -X2
-WG001 -WG002 -WG003 -WG004 -WG005
.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
=Customer+L-X =Heater
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
Kunde +L-X
-X -X -X -X -X -X
Sammelstörung Separator Wasserschlossalarm TAH Temperatur TAL Temperatur Erhitzerfreigabe

Common failure Betrieb (nur bei LO -0196) Alarm max Alarm min Heater release
Separator Water seal broken TAH temperature TAL temperature
operation alarm (only at LO -0196) alarm max alarm min

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Signalaustausch
Project: Signal exchange
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 -K1 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3

/30.3 /30.3 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5 /32.5
AI90 AI92
X11 X11 X10 X10 X11 X11 X13 X13
AI 0
5
AI 1
6
AI 0-
5
AI 1-
7
AI 2-
5
AI 3-
7
AQ 0M
4
AQ 1M
6
11.9 / M.K M.K / 29.0
Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog Masse Analog
Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-P1
KTP400
X2 X61
Profibus Profinet USB
X1
POWER DC
SC
SC
A
A
B
B
24V
0V
PA
=0-PE
24V DC
11.9 / L+.T
11.9 / M.T
-PE
Ethernet / 29.0

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Prozessanzeige KPT 400
Project: Process display KPT 400
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 CPU 1215C

-K2 3RTD / 1ACI
-K3 4AI / 2AO
-K4 16DI
-K5 16DO 0,5A
6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0
SIMATIC
S7 1200
AQ90 - AQ92
DI0.0 - DI1.5 AI100 - AI102 AI110 - AI116 DI2.0 - DI2.7 DQ2.0 - DQ2.7
AI90 - AI92
RUN / STOP
ERROR
MAINT
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
SM 1231 SM 1234 SM 1221 SM 1222
GEA LV DC
DQ0.0 - DQ1.1 AI104 - AI106 AQ110 - AQ112 DI3.0 - DI3.7 DQ3.0 - DQ3.7
DQ a 4L+ /30.5
DQ a 4M /30.5
Ethernet Ethernet
DQ a L+ /34.5
DI b 3M /33.5
DI b 4M /33.5
DI a 1M /30.3
DI a 1M /33.5
DI a 2M /33.5
DQ a M /34.5
AQ 2M /30.3
AI 3M /30.3
AI L+ /32.5
AI M /32.5
24V DC 24V DC
L+ /31.5
X1 P1 X1 P2
M /31.5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
L+
L+
M
M
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:6
X11:1
X11:4
X12:1
X12:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X11:1
X10:3
X11:3
X12:3
X13:3
X11:1
X10:1
X10:2
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
24V DC -PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
11.9 / L+.K
27.9 / M.K
28.9 / Ethernet
Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung Spannungsversorgung

Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator SPS Spannungsversorgung
Project: PLC power supply
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
X10:6 X12:1
0V /29.3 /29.4 24V
DI a 1M DQ a 4L+
Separator Betrieb X10:7 X12:2
=01-Q1:34 /14.1 DI0.0 /29.4 0V
Separator operation DI a .0 DQ a 4M
Separator Störung X10:8 X12:3 Zulaufventil
=01-F1:22 /14.2 DI0.1 DQ0.0 /18.1 =01-X2:12
Separator failure DI a .1 DQ a .0 Feed valve
Drehzahlüberwachung X10:9 X12:4 Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser
=01-T1:5 /15.2 DI0.2 DQ0.1 /18.4 =01-X2:15
Speed monitoring device DI a .2 DQ a .1 Displacem- and filling water
X10:10 X12:5 Steuerwasser
DI0.3 DQ0.2 /18.3 =01-X2:14
DI a .3 DQ a .2 Operating water
Reserve /24.5 X10:11 X12:6 Kreislaufventil
=16-X2:14 DI0.4 DQ0.3 /18.5 =01-X2:17
Spare /25.5 DI a .4 DQ a .3 Circulation valve
Reserve /24.4 X10:12 X12:7 Wasserabfuhrventil
=16-X2:10 DI0.5 DQ0.4 /18.6 =01-X2:18
Spare /25.4 DI a .5 DQ a .4 Water discharge valve
=16-X2:2 DI0.6 DQ0.5
=16-X2:7 DI0.7 DQ0.6
Zulaufpumpe Betrieb X10:15 X12:10 Erhitzerfreigabe
=11-K1:24 /21.1 DI1.0 DQ0.7 /26.7 =100-K5:A1
Feed pump operation DI b .0 DQ a .7 Heater release
Zulaufpumpe Störung X10:16 X12:11 Stellventil Auf
=11-Q1:98 /21.2 DI1.1 DQ1.0 /22.3 =11-K3:A1
Feed pump failure DI b .1 DQ b .0 Regulating valve open
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe X10:17 X12:12 Stellventil Zu
=01-X2:22 /19.3 DI1.2 DQ1.1 /22.4 =11-K4:A1
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap DI b .2 DQ b .1 Regulating valve closed
Wasserabfuhr X10:18
=01-X2:10 /16.3 DI1.3
Water discharge DI b .3
=01-T1:7+ /17.3 DI1.4
=01-X2:11 /17.4 DI1.5
X11:1
0V /29.3
AQ 2M
X11:2
AQ90
AQ 0
X11:3
AQ92
AQ 1
X11:4
0V /29.3
AI 3M
Masse Analog X11:5
=0-T2:M' /27.1 AI90 V
Earth analog AI 0
Masse Analog X11:6
-K1:X11:5 /27.2 AI92 V
Earth analog AI 1

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K2
X10:1
/29.5 24V
L+
X10:2
/29.5 0V
M
/22.7
AI 0 M+ Min / max temperature monitoring
/22.7
AI 0 M- Min / max temperature monitoring
AI100 /22.6 =11-X2:3
AI 0 I+ Min / max temperature monitoring
/22.6
AI 0 I- Min / max temperature monitoring

/22.4
AI 1 M+ Product temperature control
/22.5
AI 1 M- Product temperature control
AI102 /22.5 =11-*0_9_006:1
AI 1 I+ Product temperature control
/22.5
AI 1 I- Product temperature control

/11.4
AI 2 M+ Measurement cabinet inner temperature
/11.4
AI 2 M- Measurement cabinet inner temperature
AI104 /11.3 =0-R1:1
AI 2 I+ Measurement cabinet inner temperature
/11.3
AI 2 I- Measurement cabinet inner temperature

AI106 /13.2 =01-B1:S1
A /13.2

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K3
X10:1
/29.6 24V
AI L+
X10:2
/29.6 0V
AI M
X10:4 Reinoel Ablaufdruck
AI110 /16.1 =01-X2:6
AI 0+ Clean-oil discharge pressure
A /27.3
AI 0- Earth analog
X10:6 Schlammraumüberwachung
AI112 /16.2 =01-X2:8
AI 1+ Sludge room monitoring
A /27.4
AI 1- Earth analog
X11:4
AI114
AI 2+
A /27.4
AI 2- Earth analog
X11:6 FI Durchflussmessung
AI116 /23.1 =11-*0_9_002:2
AI 3+ FI flow measuring
A /27.5
AI 3- Earth analog
X13:4 Masse Analog

/27.6
AQ 0M Earth analog
X13:5
AQ110
AQ 0
X13:6 Masse Analog
/27.7
AQ 1M Earth analog
X13:7
AQ112
AQ 1

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K4
X10:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 1M
X10:4
DI2.0
DI a .0
X10:5
DI2.1
DI a .1
X10:6
DI2.2
DI a .2
X10:7
DI2.3
DI a .3
X11:3
/29.7 0V
DI a 2M
X11:4
DI2.4
DI a .4
X11:5
DI2.5
DI a .5
X11:6
DI2.6
DI a .6
X11:7 Separator Not-Halt
DI2.7 /12.8 =0-K1:14
DI a .7 Separator emergency stop
X12:3
/29.7 0V
DI b 3M
X12:4
DI3.0
DI b .0
X12:5
DI3.1
DI b .1
X12:6
DI3.2
DI b .2
X12:7
DI3.3
DI b .3
X13:3
/29.8 0V
DI b 4M
X13:4
DI3.4
DI b .4
X13:5
DI3.5
DI b .5
X13:6
DI3.6
DI b .6
X13:7
DI3.7
DI b .7

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K5
X10:1
/29.9 24V
DQ a L+
X10:2
/29.9 0V
DQ a M
X10:4 Separator Start/Stop
DQ2.0 /14.1 =01-K1:A1
DQ a .0 Separator start/stop
X10:5 Zulaufpumpe Ein / Aus
DQ2.1 /21.1 =11-K2:A1
DQ a .1 Feed pump on / off
X10:6 /24.7 (Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe
DQ2.2 =16-X2:17
DQ a .2 /25.7 (optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump
X10:7
DQ2.3
DQ a .3
X11:4
DQ2.4
DQ a .4
X11:5
DQ2.5
DQ a .5
X11:6
DQ2.6
DQ a .6
X11:7 Sammelstörung
DQ2.7 /26.1 =100-K1:A1
DQ a .7 Common failure
X12:4 Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196)

DQ3.0 /26.3 =100-K2:A1
DQ b .0 Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196)
X12:5 TAH Temperatur Alarm max
DQ3.1 /26.4 =100-K3:A1
DQ b .1 TAH temperature alarm max
X12:6 TAL Temperatur Alarm min
DQ3.2 /26.6 =100-K4:A1
DQ b .2 TAL temperature alarm min
X12:7
DQ3.3
DQ b .3
X13:4
DQ3.4
DQ b .4
X13:5 (Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe
DQ3.5 /19.2 =01-X2:20
DQ b .5 (optional) valve sludge discharge flap
X13:6
DQ3.6
DQ b .6
X13:7
DQ3.7
DQ b .7

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=0-M1 Filter / Lüfter Filter / fan 600 mm

=0-M1 Filter / Lüfter Filter / fan
=00-P1 Prozessanzeige Process display 560 mm 250 mm
=0-Q1 Hauptschalter Isolator
=01-S1 Separator Start/Stop Separator start/stop Cabinet ø 8mm
=11-S1 Zulaufpumpe Start/Stop Feed pump Start/Stop
30 mm
=0-M1
100 mm
TOUCH
320 mm
=00-P1
65 mm
F1 F2 F3 F4
Filter
filter
540 mm
=01-S1 =11-S1
800 mm
760 mm
110 mm
=0-Q1
TRIP. I
On
RESET
O =0-M1
Off
Maßstab 1:3,5 mm
Scale 1:3,5 mm
50 mm
Gewicht: ca. ...kg

Weight: ca. ...kg
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Moutingplate
25x80
25x80
=0-T1
=01-T1
=01-F1
=100-K1
=100-K2
=100-K3
=100-K4
=100-K5
=11-K1
=01-K1
=11-K2
=11-K3
=11-K4
=0-K1
40x80
=100-X2
=16-X2
=00-K1
=00-K2
=00-K3
=00-K4
=00-K5
PE
25x80
40x80
40x80
=0-24M
=01-Q1
=0-T2
=01-B1
=11-Q1
=0-F1
=0-F2
25x80
Cable glands Yard cable size WS part-no..
=0-Q1
13x M16 5,0 - 10,0mm 0005-4486-930
7x M20 8,0 - 13,0mm 0005-4487-930
2x M25 11,0 - 17,0mm 0005-4488-930
3x M16 Spare 0005-4442-900 40x80
=01-X1
=11-X1
=01-X2
=11-X2
=0-X1
PE

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Regelung Gerät KTP 400

Control unit KTP 400
Bestell-nr.
0005-4760-400
order no.
Programm-Nr.
8107-0004-000...199
program-no.
TOUCH
160
Tiefe: 54mm
depth:
Ausschnittmass: 134x114mm
cutout dimension:
Gewicht: _,__kg
F1 F2 F3 F4 weight:
158

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator KTP 400
Tested TE Project:
- Sprache: Zeichnungs Nr.: DCC Bl./Sh. 37
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Not-Halt Gehäuse mit Schutzkragen

Emergency stop cabinet with protective collar
=Additions 71 mm
-S01
Not-Halt-Box
85 mm
54 mm
mm
ø5
85 mm
109 mm
protection class: "IP 65"

61 mm
M20
8-13mm Note: Installation should be carry out by customer!
18 mm

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Not-Halt Box
Project: Emergency stop box
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU1,5/ZZ
WDU1,5/ZZ
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
&EFS/11.6
Querverweis
Cross reference
X80:0V
PE
Ziel intern
=00-P1
Target internal -T2
-PE
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-24M
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
Steuerspannung DC
Control voltage DC
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-24M
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-24M
=0+-PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=11-BP-P1
Editor
&EFS/20.7
Tested
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern PE PE
PE
=11-WG005
PE
PE
(optional)feed pump operation external
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=11-*0_3_001 &EFS/20.1
Zulaufpumpe PE
PE
28.08.2017
U1 =11-WD001
PE
PE
Feed pump AK 4
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
3
U1
V1
M
W1
V1
Kunde:
PE
Project:
Projekt:
W1
Customer:
-
-
2
Einspeisung PE
PE
PE
-WD001
PE
PE
Incoming
_-J 4x6 mm²
-SC &EFS/10.3
Erdung Schirm PE
SC
SC
Earthing screen
-1M &EFS/10.6
Erdung Montageplatte 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing mounting plate 1 -PE
3
GN/YE
GN/YE
-1T &EFS/10.6
Erdung Tür 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing door 1 -PE

GN/YE
GN/YE
-1G &EFS/10.6
Erdung Gehäuse 1 PE PE
PE
Earthing cabinet 1 -PE

GN/YE
GN/YE
-T1 &EFS/11.1
4
GND
Separator
GND
GEA Westfalia
Control voltage AC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-T2 &EFS/11.6
Steuerspannung DC PE PE
PE
Control voltage DC
GN/YE
GN/YE
-24M &EFS/11.6
= PE
2
2
GN/YE
GN/YE
5
-X1 &EFS/11.2
6
6
GN/YE
GN/YE
=01-*0_1_001 &EFS/13.2
Separator PE
PE
=01-WD001
PE
PE
Separator -PE
_-J 4x6 mm²
PTC-Fühler Separator PE &EFS/13.3
PE
=01-WG003
PE
PE
PTC-feeler separator -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
T2 U1
U1
6
V1
‎Θ
M
3~
V1
T1 W1
PE
W1
T2
-
T1
Sprache:
Language:
7
-M1 &EFS/11.2
PE

L
GN/YE
GN/YE
M
1~
PE N
de/en
N
-S01 &EFS/12.2
Not-Halt extern PE PE
Drawing No.:
PE
-WG001
PE
PE
Emergency stop external -PE

Zeichnungs Nr.:
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

8
=01+JB-1X10 PE &EFS/16.3
Wasserabfuhr PE
PE:PE
=01-WG004
PE
PE
Water discharge
PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=01-*8_7_002 &EFS/18.2
Zulaufventil PE PE
PE
0505-0620-001
=01-WG010
PE
PE
Feed valve -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
=01-*4_7_001 &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
& EMA
PE
9
=01-WG012
PE
PE
(optional) valve sludge discharge flap -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
40
=0+-PE
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=01-*4_9_001
Editor
&EFS/19.3
Tested
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe PE PE
PE
=01-WG013
PE
PE
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
=01+JB-1X10 PE &EFS/18.7
Wasserabfuhrventil PE
28.08.2017
PE:PE
=01-WG011
PE
PE
Water discharge valve -PE
PE
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
=11-*6_7_002 &EFS/22.2
Stellventil - Heizmedium PE
PE
PE
=11-WG002
PE
PE
Regulating valve - heating medium -PE
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
=16-90_9_001 &EFS/24.2
PE
=16-WG001
PE
PE
2

.-J 4x1,5 mm²
Separator Betrieb PE
PE
PE
=100-WG001
PE
PE
Separator operation
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
=16-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
PE
=16-WG002
PE
PE

.-J 4x1,5 mm²
3
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) PE
PE
PE
=100-WG002
PE
PE
Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196)

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=16-98_7_002 &EFS/24.8
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe PE PE
PE
=16-WG005
PE
PE
(optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TAH Temperatur Alarm max PE
PE
=100-WG003
PE
PE
TAH temperature alarm max

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
PE
&EFS/26.6
4
Separator
TAL Temperatur Alarm min PE
PE
=100-WG004
GEA Westfalia
PE
PE
TAL temperature alarm min

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
Erhitzerfreigabe PE
PE
PE
=100-WG005
PE
PE
Heater release
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1
PA PE
-PE
X80:PA
GN/YE
GN/YE
5
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1
Spannungsversorgung 3 PE
X10:3
Power supply -PE

GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5
= 3 PE
X10:3
-PE
6
GN/YE
GN/YE
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
- =00-K5 &EFS/29.8
= 1 PE
X11:1
-PE
GN/YE
GN/YE
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/10.3
&EFS/16.1
&EFS/16.2
&EFS/22.7
Querverweis
Cross reference
Ziel intern
Target internal -SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
-SC
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-SC
Klemmennummer
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
Terminal number
PE SC
PE SC
-PE
=11-X2
Clean-oil discharge pressure
Schlammraumüberwachung
Sludge room monitoring
Reinoel Ablaufdruck
FI flow measuring
Earthing screen
Erdung Schirm

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-SC
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-SC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/11.0
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.1
&EFS/11.2
&EFS/12.1
&EFS/12.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
vb
PE
21
13
Ziel intern
=01-F1
Target internal
-S01
-M1
-T1
-PE
-F2
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
8
Terminal number
RDWHU 1 2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

-WG001
RDWHU 1 2
N L PE 21 22
N
L
21
M
1~
PE
22
-M1
-S01
Emergency stop external
Steuerspannung AC
Control voltage AC
Not-Halt extern
Reserve
Spare
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
&EFS/10.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=0+-XQ1
Klemmennummer
2
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x6 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
L1 L2 L3
L1
=Customer+L-X
Einspeisung
Incoming
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenanschlussplan =0+-XQ1
Project: Terminal connecting plan =0+-XQ1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU6
WDU6
WDU6
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
&EFS/13.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
6
Ziel intern
Target internal -Q1
-Q1
-Q1
Brücken
Bridges
=01+-X1
Klemmennummer
1
Terminal number
1 2 3
_-J 4x6 mm²
-WD001
1 2 3
U1 V1 W1 T2 T1 PE
W1
U1
V1
PE
M
3~
‎Θ
T2
T1
-*0_1_001
Separator
Separator
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
=01+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_1_001
Editor
&EFS/13.3
Tested
PTC-Fühler Separator 1
T1
1
1
PTC-feeler separator -F1 T1 WDU2,5
TE
= -WG003 2 &EFS/13.3
T2
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
1
2
2
T2 U1
-F1 T2 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
U1
28.08.2017
V1
‎Θ
M
3~
T1 W1
V1
PE
W1
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
PE
Customer:
-
-
2
+JB-1X10 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung 3
1
1
1
Speed monitoring device -T1 1+ WDU2,5

= 4 &EFS/15.2
2
2
2
-T1 2- WDU2,5
Reinoel Ablaufdruck 5 &EFS/16.1
4
3
3
Clean-oil discharge pressure =0-T2 L+ WDU2,5

= 6 &EFS/16.1
3
4
4
=00-K3 X10:4 WDU2,5

Schlammraumüberwachung -WG004 7 &EFS/16.2
.-J 7x1,5 mm²
1
Sludge room monitoring WDU2,5
3
= 8 &EFS/16.2
6
5
5
=00-K3 X10:6 WDU2,5

Reserve 9 &EFS/16.3
Spare WDU2,5
Wasserabfuhr 10 &EFS/16.3
7
6
6
Water discharge =00-K1 X10:18 WDU2,5

(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 11 &EFS/17.4
10
1
1
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring -WG011 =00-K1 X10:20 WDU2,5

.-J 7x1,5 mm²
-*8_7_002 - + &EFS/18.1
4
Separator
Zulaufventil 12
+
1
1
GEA Westfalia
Feed valve =00-K1 X12:3 WDU2,5
-WG010 &EFS/18.1
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 13

2
2
=0-24M 1 WDU2,5
+JB-1X10 &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 14
12
2
2
Operating water =00-K1 X12:5 WDU2,5

Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser 15 &EFS/18.4
15
3
3
Displacem- and filling water =00-K1 X12:4 WDU2,5

&EFS/18.4
= 16
5
WDU2,5
12
Kreislaufventil -WG011 17 &EFS/18.5

16
.-J 7x1,5 mm²

4
4
Circulation valve =00-K1 X12:6 WDU2,5

Wasserabfuhrventil 18 &EFS/18.6
18
5
5
Water discharge valve =00-K1 X12:7 WDU2,5

= 19 &EFS/18.7
17
6
6
WDU2,5
-*4_7_001 - + &EFS/19.2
(Option) Ventil Schlammablauf Klappe 20
+
1
1
=00-K5 X13:5
6
(optional) valve sludge discharge flap WDU2,5

-WG012 &EFS/19.2
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 21

2
2
=16-X2 3 WDU2,5
-*4_9_001 &EFS/19.3
(Option) Rückmeldung Schlammablauf Klappe 22
13
1
1
(optional) feed back sludge discharge flap =00-K1 X10:17 WDU2,5

14 13
-WG013 &EFS/19.3
-
= 23
14
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

2
2
Sprache: =11-X2 5 WDU2,5

Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
46
=01+JB-1X10
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*9_7_004
Editor
&EFS/18.3
Tested
Steuerwasser PE PE
PE
-WG105
PE
PE
Operating water -PE
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
TE
1
MIL/PLE
+SB-1X20 PE &EFS/16.3
Wasserabfuhr PE
28.08.2017
PE:PE
-WG121
PE
PE
Water discharge =0-PE PE
PE
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
-*0_9_020 &EFS/15.2
Drehzahlüberwachung - + 1
+
Speed monitoring device -X2 3
BN
BN
Kunde:
-WG101 &EFS/15.2
Project:
Projekt:
-
= .-O 2x0,34 mm² 2
Customer:
-
-
-X2 4
BU
BU
2
+SB-1X20 &EFS/16.1
1
1
1
Clean-oil discharge pressure -X2 6

= 4 &EFS/16.1
2
2
2
-X2 5
= 5 &EFS/16.1
1
-WG121
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
Schlammraumüberwachung 6 &EFS/16.2
4
3
3
Sludge room monitoring -X2 8

Wasserabfuhr 7 &EFS/16.3
5
4
4
Water discharge -X2 10

3
-*1_9_012 &EFS/17.1
(Option) NAHH Separator Vibrationsüberwachung 8
1
(optional) NAHH separator vibration monitoring

BN
BN
= 9 &EFS/17.3
3
BK
BK
= -WG104 10 &EFS/17.4
4
_CY-O 4x0,75 mm²

-X2 11
WH
WH
= 11 &EFS/17.1
2
BU
BU
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-*9_7_004 - + &EFS/18.3
Steuerwasser 12
+
Operating water -X2 14

BN
BN
-WG105 &EFS/18.3
-
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 13

BU
BU
-*9_7_005 - + &EFS/18.4
-
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser 14

Displacem- and filling water
BU
BU
-WG106 &EFS/18.4
= 15
+
.-J 3x1,5 mm²

5
-X2 15
BN
BN
+SB-1X20 &EFS/18.5
Kreislaufventil 16
8
1
1
Circulation valve -X2 17

Wasserabfuhrventil 17 &EFS/18.7
10
2
2
Water discharge valve -X2 19

8
= -WG122 18 &EFS/18.6
11
.-J 4x1,5 mm²

3
3
-X2 18
= PE &EFS/18.7
PE:PE
PE
PE
=0-PE PE
6
-*9_7_005 &EFS/18.4
Verdrängungs- und Füllwasser PE PE
PE
-WG106
PE
PE
Displacem- and filling water -PE

.-J 3x1,5 mm²
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
47
=01+SB-1X20
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*1_9_002
I
1
Editor
&EFS/16.1
Tested
2
Clean-oil discharge pressure +JB-1X10 3
WH
WH
TE
= 2
-WG201 2 &EFS/16.1
1
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
1
+JB-1X10 4
BK
BK
MIL/PLE
28.08.2017
-*0_9_014
I
1 &EFS/16.2
Schlammraumüberwachung 3
1
BK
BK
Sludge room monitoring
= 2
-WG202 4 &EFS/16.2
2
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
+JB-1X10 6
P
WH
WH
Kunde:
Project:
Projekt:
Customer:
-
-
-*0_9_013 &EFS/16.3
Wasserabfuhr +
5
A/Q
+JB-1X10 7
2
BK
BK
Water discharge
= A/Q 6 &EFS/16.3
+
-WG203
BN
BN
.-O 3x0,75 mm²

- &EFS/16.3
-
= 7
GY
GY
-*0_7_010 - + &EFS/18.5
Kreislaufventil 8
+
Circulation valve +JB-1X10 16
BN
BN
-WG204 &EFS/18.5
-
= .-J 3x0,75 mm² 9
BU
BU
3
-*0_7_011 - + &EFS/18.7
-
Wasserabfuhrventil 10
Water discharge valve +JB-1X10 17
BU
BU
= -WG205 11 &EFS/18.6
+
.-J 3x0,75 mm²

+JB-1X10 18
BN
BN
-*0_7_010 &EFS/18.6
Kreislaufventil PE PE
PE
-WG204
PE
PE
Circulation valve +JB-1X10 PE

.-J 3x0,75 mm²
4
Separator
GEA Westfalia
-*0_7_011 &EFS/18.7
Wasserabfuhrventil PE PE
PE
-WG205
PE
PE
Water discharge valve +JB-1X10 PE

.-J 3x0,75 mm²
5
Klemmenanschlussplan =01+SB-1X20
Terminal connecting plan =01+SB-1X20
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
48
=11+-X1
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-*0_3_001
Editor
&EFS/20.1
Tested
Zulaufpumpe 1
U1
1
1
Feed pump U1 -Q1 2 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/20.1
V1
3
V1
1
2
2
-WD001 -Q1 4
M
_-J 4x2,5 mm²
WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
= W1 3 &EFS/20.1
28.08.2017
W1
3
3
-Q1 6 WDU2,5
PE
PE
-*6_7_002
Kunde:
&EFS/22.1
Project:
Projekt:
Stellventil - Heizmedium 4
1
1
1
Customer:
-
-
Regulating valve - heating medium WDU2,5
= 5 &EFS/22.1
1
2
2
2/14
-WG002 -K3 14
2
.-J 5x1,5 mm²

WDU2,5
= 6 &EFS/22.1
3
3
3/11
-K4 14 WDU2,5
= 7 &EFS/22.1
=0-X1 7 WDU2,5
-BP-S1 &EFS/20.5
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Stop Extern 8
21
1
1
(optional)feed pump stop external -S1 22 WDU2,5

22 21 &EFS/20.5
= 9
22
2
2
WDU2,5
3
-BP-S2 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Start Extern 13
10
3
3
(optional)feed pump start external -K1 11 WDU2,5

= 14 13 -WG005 11 &EFS/20.6
14
.-J 7x1,5 mm²

4
4
-K1 14 WDU2,5
-BP-P1 &EFS/20.6
(Option) Zulaufpumpe Betrieb Extern 12
X1
5
5
(optional)feed pump operation external X2 X1 WDU2,5

= 13 &EFS/20.6
X2
6
6
=0-X1 6 WDU2,5
4
Separator
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
49
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
WDU2,5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.5
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.6
&EFS/22.7
&EFS/23.1
&EFS/23.1
Querverweis
Cross reference
X11:6
X11:7
X10:6
X10:7
SC
23
X11:6
Ziel intern
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K2
=00-K3
=01-X2
=0-SC
Target internal
Brücken
Bridges
=11+-X2
Klemmennummer
SC
1
6
Terminal number
1 2 3 4 WH BK
.CY-O 4x1,5 mm²
.-O 2x0,34 mm²

-WG003
-WG006
1 2 3 4 WH BK
1 2 3 4 1 2
1
2
1
I
P
2
-*0_9_006
-*0_9_002
FI flow measuring
=

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
=16+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
-90_9_001
Editor
&EFS/24.1
Tested
(Option) LAHH Schlammtank Füllstand max. / max. 1
3
1
1
(optional) LAHH sludge tank level max. / max. 2 3 =11-X2 5 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/24.1
2
1
2
2
1 -WG001 =00-K1 X10:13 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
MIL/PLE
= 3 &EFS/24.1
28.08.2017
3
3
=01-X2 21 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/24.1
WDU2,5
-90_9_002 &EFS/24.3
= 5
1
1
1
2 3 WDU2,5
Kunde:
&EFS/24.3
Project:
Projekt:
= 6
3
2
2
Customer:
-WG002
-
-
1 WDU2,5
-
.-J 4x1,5 mm²
= 7 &EFS/24.2
2
3
3
=00-K1 X10:14
2
WDU2,5
= 8 &EFS/24.3
WDU2,5
Reserve 9 &EFS/24.4
Spare WDU2,5
= 10 &EFS/24.4
=00-K1 X10:12 WDU2,5
= 11 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
= 12 &EFS/24.4
WDU2,5
3
= 13 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 14 &EFS/24.5
=00-K1 X10:11 WDU2,5
= 15 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
= 16 &EFS/24.6
WDU2,5
-98_7_002 - + &EFS/24.7
(Option) Ventil Pneumatische Schlammpumpe 17
+
1
1
(optional) valve pneumatic sludge pump =00-K5 X10:6 WDU2,5
-WG005 &EFS/24.7
4
Separator
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 18
2
2
GEA Westfalia
WDU2,5
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
51
=100+-X2
Changes
Date
0
Bridges
Brücken
Ziel intern
Querverweis
Target internal
Name
Cross reference
Terminal number
Klemmennummer
Date
=Customer+L-X
Editor
&EFS/26.1
Tested
Sammelstörung 1
1
1
Common failure -K1 21 WDU2,5
TE
= 2 &EFS/26.1
1
2
2
-K1 24 WDU2,5
MIL/PLE
Separator Betrieb -WG001 3 &EFS/26.2
.-J 5x1,5 mm²
28.08.2017
3
3
Separator operation =01-Q1 44 WDU2,5
= 4 &EFS/26.2
4
4
=01-Q1 43 WDU2,5
Wasserschlossalarm (nur bei LO -0196) 5 &EFS/26.3
1
1
Water seal broken alarm (only at LO -0196) -K2 11 WDU2,5
Kunde:
-WG002 &EFS/26.3
Project:
Projekt:
= .-J 3x1,5 mm² 6
2
2
Customer:
-
-
-K2 14 WDU2,5
TAH Temperatur Alarm max 7 &EFS/26.4
1
1
-K3 11
2
TAH temperature alarm max WDU2,5

= -WG003 8 &EFS/26.4
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K3 14 WDU2,5
TAL Temperatur Alarm min 9 &EFS/26.6
1
1
TAL temperature alarm min -K4 11 WDU2,5

= -WG004 10 &EFS/26.6
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K4 14 WDU2,5
Erhitzerfreigabe 11
1
1
Heater release -K5 11 WDU2,5

3
= -WG005 12 &EFS/26.7
.-J 3x1,5 mm²
2
2
-K5 14 WDU2,5
4
Separator
5
6
-
Sprache:
Language:
7
de/en Drawing No.:

Zeichnungs Nr.:
8
0505-0620-001
+
Rev.00 =
DCC
& EMA
9
Bl./Sh.
61 Bl./Sh.
52
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
verwendet
Wires used
=0-WD001 &EFS/10.1 =0-PE;=0-XQ1 =Customer+L-X _-J 4x 4 6 mm² M25x1,5 / 11-17mm
=0-WG001 &EFS/12.1 =0-PE;=0-X1 =0-S01 .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01-WD001 &EFS/13.1 =0-PE;=01-X1 =01-*0_1_001 _-J 4x 4 6 mm² M25x1,5 / 11-17mm
=11-WD001 &EFS/20.1 =0-PE;=11-X1 =11-*0_3_001 _-J 4x 4 2,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-WG003 &EFS/22.5 =11-X2 =11-*0_9_006 .CY-O 4x 4 1,5 mm² M20x1,5 / 8-13mm
=11-BP-P1;=11-BP-S1
=11-WG005 &EFS/20.5 =0-PE;=11-X1 .-J 7x 7 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=11-BP-S2
=11-WG006 &EFS/23.1 =11-X2 =11-*0_9_002 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Kabelübersicht
Cable layout
Adern
verwendet
Wires used
=100-WG005 &EFS/26.7 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Heater+L-X .-J 3x 3 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG101 &EFS/15.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*0_9_020 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12x1,5 / 3-6mm
=01+JB-WG104 &EFS/17.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*1_9_012 _CY-O 4x 4 0,75 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG121 &EFS/16.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01+SB-1X20 .-J 5x 5 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm
=01+JB-WG122 &EFS/18.5 =01+JB-1X10 =01+SB-1X20 .-J 4x 4 1,5 mm² M16x1,5 / 5-10mm

=01+SB-WG201 &EFS/16.1 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*1_9_002 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm²
block
=01+SB-WG202 &EFS/16.2 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_9_014 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm²
block
=01+SB-WG203 &EFS/16.3 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_9_013 .-O 3x 3 0,75 mm²
block
=01+SB-WG204 &EFS/18.5 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_7_010 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm²
block
=01+SB-WG205 &EFS/18.6 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_7_011 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm²
block

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Schaltschrank Klemmenkasten Separator -1X10 Sensorblock -1X20

Control cabinet Terminal box separator -1X10 Sensor bloc -1X20
PE-BUS
PE
+JB-1X10
PE
PE
=01-X2 PE PE
PE
1
1 brown
N Drehzahlueberwachung
1
2
2x0,34mm² speed monitoring device

2 blue -WG101
1
I
2
-WG004
+SB-1X20
3
7x1,5mm² 3 1
2
3
M20 (8-13mm) 1 white PSL/H Reinoel
4
-WG121 P
1
2x0,34mm² Ablaufdruck
4 4 2 5x1,5mm² -WG201 PSL/H clean oil
+
+
+ 2 black
5
M16 (5-10mm) + I
+
discharge pressure
3 +
6
+
black
+ P
+
3
2x0,34mm² SMS Schlammraumueberwachung
5 3 SMS sludge space monitoring
-WG202
7
6
+ 3 white
I
4
6 4
5
8
S
4 black
S
5
brown Wasserabfuhr
+
+
9
8
+ brown 3x0,75mm²
+ water monitoring system
+
-WG203
6 black
+ Vibro PCH1220
10
+
grey
-
7
4x0,25mm²
-
vibro PCH1220
-WG104 PCH
1 white
10
1
11
1 brown
-WG122
8
Kreislaufventil
3x0,75mm²
blue 4x1,5mm² circulation valve
11
- -WG204
12
-
blue
M16 (5-10mm) -
-
2 brown
12
13
- Steuerwasser 2 blue
10
3x1,5mm² -
-
-WG011 operating water 3x0,75mm² Wasserabfuhrventil
blue -WG105
water discharge valve
13
2 - -WG205
7x1,5mm²
14
3
-
brown
11
M20 (8-13mm) blue
14
3 - PE
15
PE
-
Verdraengungs-u. fuellwasser
PE
3x1,5mm²
-WG106 displacem. a. filling water
3 brown
15
16
- PE PE
PE
4 1
16
4
17
6 2
17
5 -
18
5 3
18
6
19
PE PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE-BUS
Bestell-Nr.:0005-1827-280
order-no.:0005-1827-280

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Klemmenkasten Übersicht
Project: Terminal box overview
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hinweise zur Installation von Kabeln und Leitungen

Directions for installation from cables and conductors
* Schutzmaßnahmen nach Bestimmungen des VDE bzw. zuständigen EVU ausführen!

All protective measures are to be taken in accordance with electric codes, rules and regulations!
* Generell sind die Vorgaben des lokalen Energieversorgers zwingend einzuhalten
In general the the rules and regulations of the lokal power authorities has to be followed.
* Kabel und Leitungen sind so auszuwählen und zu verlegen, dass eine Gefährdung von Personen und der Umgebung ausgeschlossen ist.
Die angegebenen Kabelquerschnitte sind bezogen auf eine Kabellänge von 50m, Kupfer als Leitematerial, Verlegeart "C" und
eine maximale Umgebungstemperatur von 30°C. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0298-4 (Verwendung von Kabeln und isolierten Leitungen für Starkstromanlagen - Teil 4:
Empfohlene Werte für die Strombelastbarkeit von Kabeln und Leitungen für feste Verlegung in und an Gebäuden und von flexiblen Leitungen).
Neben der Strombelastung sind bei der Errichtung von Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen weitere Faktoren zu berücksichtigen.
Siehe hierzu IEC 60364-5-52 (Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen - Teil 5: Auswahl und Errichtung elektrischer Betriebsmittel - Kapitel 52: Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen)
Cables and lines must be selected and laid in a way to eliminate any risk to persons and the environment.
The cable cross-sections specified in these drawings are based on a max. length of 50m, copper as conducting material,laying version "C" and a maximum ambient temperature of 30°C.
Refer also to DIN VDE 0298-4 (Usage of cables and cords in power installations - Part 4:
Recommended current-carrying capacity for sheathed and nonsheathed cables for fixed wirings in and around buildings and for flexible cables and cords).
Besides the current load are in the erection of wiring systems additional parameters to take into account.
Refer also to IEC 60364-5-52 (Erection of low voltage installations - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Chapter 52: Wiring systems)
* Messleitungen sind grundsätzlich abgeschirmt zu verlegen!
Measuring lines must always be laid shielded!
* WD-Kabel getrennt vom WF-/WG-Kabeln verlegen!
WD-cables to be installed separate from WF-/WG-cable!
* Alle Kabel müssen den Flammentest Anforderungen für gebündelte Kabel nach IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13 gerecht werden.
All cables must meet the flame test requirements for bunched cables acc. to IEC 60332-3 / IEEE 45-18.13.
* Das gesamte Kabelmaterial muss halogenfrei nach IEC 60754-1, giftfrei nach IEC 60754 und korrosionsfrei nach IEC 60754-2 sein
All cable materials must be free of halogens acc. to IEC 60754-1, no toxicity acc. to 60754 and no corrosivity acc. to IEC 60754-2.
* Alle Kabel müssen eine Abnahme der relevante Abnahmegesellschaft haben. Isolierungsfestigkeit: 0.6/1KV
All cables must have an approval of the relevant classification society. Insulating strength: 0.6/1KV * GEA WSPN Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV.
WD-Kabel Energiekabel < 1kV WE-Kabel Erdungs-/Potentialausgleichsleiterleiter

WD-cable = Energy cable < 1kV WE-cable = Earth-/ Equipotential bonding conductor
WF-Kabel Datenbus WG-Kabel Steuer-/ Messkabel WH-Kabel Lichtwellenleiter
WF-cable = Data bus WG-cable = Control-/measuring cable WH-cable = Optical fibre
* Legende Kabeltypen (Kabelliste)

Legend cable typ (list of cables)
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter

-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor FC.CY = Motorkabel FU mit konzentrischem Außenleiter (PE)
Motor cable FC with concentric outer (PE)
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter
-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor PL = Potentialausgleichsleiter
Equipotential bonding conductor
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor screened Ex-CY = Steuerleitung blau für eigensichere Stromkreise
Control line blue for intrinsically safecircuits
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter geschirmt
CY-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor screened CY-TP = Datenleitung paarverseilt
Data line twisted pair
Motorkabel FU geschirmt mit Schutzleiter
FC.CY-J = Motor cable FC screened with protective conductor

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Hinweise zur Installation
Project: Instructions for installation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FU
FC
=..-U.
Generelle Information zum Potentialausgleich.
Die Informationen auf diesem Blatt sind nicht
kundenspezifisch angepasst.
IP54
General Information for the equipotential bonding system.

≥10 mm²
GN YE Please note, that the information shown on this page are
not customised.
PE-Schiene
protective earth - rail
IDM
≥25 mm²
GN YE
≥10 mm²
GN YE
PA
Potentialausgleichsschiene
equipotential bonding strip
PA7
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
≥10 mm²
GN YE
equipotential bonding building
Potentialausgleich Gebäude
≥25 mm²
GN YE
Fundamenterder
foundation earth

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Separator Potentialausgleich Separator
Project: Potential equalization separator
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=0-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1437-030 GV2P32 Motorschutzschalter GV2-P - 24...32A Groupe Schneider

Motor circuit breaker GV2-P - 24...32A
=0-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1517-000 GVAE11 Hilfsschalter querliegend, 1S+1Ö Groupe Schneider
Auxiliary switch, 1NO+1NC
=0-Q1 &EFS/10.1 0005-1437-230 GV2APN02 Drehantrieb für Türeinbau, abschließbar, rot/gelb Groupe Schneider
Front-rotating drive, red
=0-F1 &EFS/11.1 0005-1872-670 3RV2411-0KA10 Leistungsschalter, 0,9...1,25A, BGR S00, für den Transformatorschutz Siemens
Circuit-breaker, 0,9...1,25A, size S00, transformer protection
=0-F2 &EFS/11.1 A9F04106 A9F04106 Sicherungsautomat C 6A, 1 pol, iC60N Groupe Schneider
Circuit breaker C 6A, 1 pol, iC60N
=0-M1 &EFS/11.1 3239100 3239100 Filterlüfter, 105/120m³/h 230V, 50/60Hz, RAL 7035 Rittal
Fan-and-filter unit, 105/120m³/h 230V, 50/60Hz, RAL 7035
=0-M1 &EFS/11.1 0005-1805-320 3238200 Austrittsfilter RAL 7035 für Filterlüfter 3238.xxx Rittal
Outlet filter RAL 7035 for fan-and-filter units 3238.xxx
=0-24M &EFS/11.6 0005-4708-890 1031400000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 1,5 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=0-R1 &EFS/11.3 32 209 210 32 209 210 Temperatursensor Pt100, To92, Temperaturbereich: -50...+150°C Heraeus
Pt100 temperature sensor, To92, temperature range: -50...+150°C
=0-T1 &EFS/11.1 0005-0551-490 700199 Steuerspannungstransformator, Prim.: 200-560VAC, Sek.: 115/230V, 400VA Ismet
Control voltage transformer
=0-T2 &EFS/11.5 0005-1407-050 6EP1333-2BA20-0AA0 Einphasennetzgeraet Prim.: 120/230V, 50/60Hz, Sec.: 24VDC, 5A Siemens
Single phase power supply
=0-K1 &EFS/12.6 0005-4033-110 2966207 Relais Einzelkontakt, PLC-Interface, Miniaturrelais mit Leistungskontakt, 1 Wechsler, Phoenix Contakt
Relay single-contact, 230 VAC/ 220 VDC
=01-B1 &EFS/13.1 4NC5112-0BC20 4NC5112-0BC20 Stromwandler, 50/1A, 2,5VA Siemens
Current transformer
=01-F1 &EFS/13.4 0005-1100-070 3RN1010-1CM00 THERMISTOR-MOTORSCHUTZ, STANDARD-AUSWERTEGERÄT, AUTO, 1S+1OE, AC 230V Siemens
THERMISTOR MOTOR PROTECTION, EVALUATION UNIT, AUTO, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V
=01-Q1 &EFS/13.8 0005-1871-570 3RT2026-1AL20 Schütz, AC-3, 11KW/400V, 1S+1OE, AC 230V 50/60HZ, Siemens
Contactor, AC-3, 11KW/400V, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V 50/60HZ,
=01-Q1 &EFS/13.8 3RH2911-1HA20 3RH2911-1HA20 Hilfsschalterblock, 2S, für Motorschütze Siemens
Auxiliary switch block, 2NO
=01-Q1 &EFS/13.8 3RT2926-1CD00 3RT2926-1CD00 RC-Glied, AC 127...240V, DC 150...250V Siemens
RC-Element
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=01-X1 &EFS/13.1 0005-3506-890 1020200000 Durchgangs-Reihenklemme, 6 mm², Schraubanschluss, Wemid, dunkelbeige, TS 35 Weidmueller
=01-T1 &EFS/15.1 0005-4509-010 7505501 Schaltverstärker Turck
Amplifier
=0-PE &EFS/20.1 0404017 404017 Einspeiseklemme, Belastungsstrom: 41 A, Querschnitt: 0,5 mm² - 6 mm², Breite: 7 mm, Phoenix Contakt
Power terminal block, Load current : 41 A, Cross section: 0.5 mm² - 6 mm², Width: 7 mm,
Relay twin-contact, 230 VAC/220 VDC
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-000 LUB12 Motorabgang Grundgerät - 12A AC-43, 440V Groupe Schneider
Motor outlet of basic unit - 12 A AC-43, 440 V
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-120 LUCA05FU Steuereinheit Standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10 Groupe Schneider
Control unit, standard LUCA, 1,25...5A, 110/220VAC/DC, Class 10
=11-Q1 &EFS/20.0 0005-1730-310 LUA1C20 Hilfsschaltermodul MSS LUA, 2S Groupe Schneider
Aux. switch module, MSS LUA, 2 NO.
Relay twin-contact
Relay twin-contact
Relay twin-contact
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-4760-010 6AV2124-5DC00-0AC0 Touchpanel KTP400 Comfort, 4" Farb-Display, 24VDC Siemens
Touch panel KTP400 Comfort
=00-P1 &EFS/28.1 0005-3668-100 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 Speicherkarte, 2 GByte, SD Siemens
Memory card, 2 GByte, SD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 Zentralbaugruppe, SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1215C, 14DI/10DO/2AI/2AO Siemens
CPU module
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 0005-4278-060 6XV1850-2GH20 SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD RJ45/RJ45, LAENGE 2 M Siemens
SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD
=00-K1 &EFS/29.1 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 Speicherkarte, 12 MByte, MMC Siemens
Memory card, 12 MByte, MMC
=00-K2 &EFS/29.4 0005-4281-060 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 Analog Eingangsmodul, SM 1231, 4AI Siemens
Analog module input
=00-K3 &EFS/29.5 0005-4281-100 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 Analogein-/ausgabe, SM 1234, 4AE/2AA, U/I, 13/14BIT Siemens
Analoge module in-/output
=00-K4 &EFS/29.6 0005-4280-040 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Eingangsmodul, SM 1221, 16DI Siemens
Digital input module
=00-K5 &EFS/29.8 0005-4280-060 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0 Digital Ausgangsmodul, SM 1222, 16 DO, 24VDC/0,5A Siemens
Digital output module
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-0058-500 1058500 Kompakt-Schaltschrank AE, lackiert RAL 7035, mit Montageplatte, eintürig Rittal
Compact enclosure AE, painted RAL 7035, with mount. plate, single door
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-1412-000 2519000 Türarretierung für das AE Programm Rittal
Door stay for the AE range
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 AKZ, Kabelcenter AKZ, Kabelcenter Aderkennzeichnung, Kabelcenter Plenge
Wire marking, cable center
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 8556-9999-000 KLEINMATERIAL Kleinmaterial Schaltschrank Plenge
Incidentals control cabinet
Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Stückliste
Parts list
-Ground_plate &ELU/36.0 0005-4442-900 81-16-866-0000-04 Blindstopfen Polyamid, M16x1,5, RAL 7035 Jacob
Blanking plug polyamide, M16x1,5, RAL 7035
=Additions &ELU/36.9 0830407 0830407 Kabelmarker, weiß, Schriftfeldgröße: 40 x 12 mm Phoenix Contakt
Cable marker
=Additions &ELU/36.9 8555-9001-040 8555-9001-040 Betriebsanleitung IO, englisch WS Mineraloil Systems
Instruction manual IO

Editor MIL/PLE
Customer: - +
Projekt:
Project: Parts list
Instruction manual
Designation Mineral oil centrifuge with self-cleaning bowl
Type OSE 20-0136-067
No. 2064-9001-001
Edition 1010
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2 2064-9001-001 / 1010

The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 3

Type S/N:
Year of manufacture
-1
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min
3
Max. admissible density in kg/dm of product
Heavy 3
liquid kg/dm
3 Solids kg/dm
3
Min/max throughput m /h
Min/max temp. of product in °C
Min/max housing pressure range in bar
This nameplate must be filled in by the operator.

Please transfer the data from the centrifuge nameplate.
®
Westfalia Separator
4 2064-9001-001 / 1010
For your safety

• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life!
• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.

This avoids damage to the separator and other equipment.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the separator or plant compo-
nents and the processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the separator. The plant operator must en-
sure compliance with these regulations.
• When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
Before working in electrical components, take adequate preventive
measures according to the national provisions (in Germany in accor-
dance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein Deutscher
Elektrotechnik / Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
the local electric power company.
Non-compliance with the protective measures can result in serious
damage to persons or property.
Any work on electrical components may only be carried out by an au-
thorized electrician.
• Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

tain and repair the separator.
Corresponding training courses take place in the manufacturer’s plant
or are held on site by the manufacturer.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.
• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

and operating parameters
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 5
• Maintain the separator

as specified in this manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in chapter "Safety precautions" in this manual
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

Liability for the function of the machine passes unconditionally to the
owner or operator irrespective of existing warranty periods in so far as
the machine is improperly maintained or serviced by persons other
than GEA Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is
not applied in accordance with the intended use.
GEA Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs
as a result of non-observance of the above. Warranty and liability con-
ditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator are not extended by the above.
®
Westfalia Separator
6 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 11
1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning ....................................................... 13
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ....................... 18
1.5.2 Spare part requirements ........................................................................ 19
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 22
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 27
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 29
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36
2 Machine description 37
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ...-0136-... ...................................................................................... 41
2.4.1 Separator with water content and sludge space monitoring system
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment ................................................... 42
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 43
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 51
2.6 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter ............................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Water detector ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.3 Solenoid valve ....................................................................................... 58
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 60
2.6.5 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 61
2.7 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 62
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 62
2.7.2 Throughput determination (product feed line A) -
only for control D10 ................................................................................ 63
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 64
2.8 Technical data ....................................................................................... 65
3 Operation 67
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 68
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 7
3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system .................................................. 68

3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 73
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 76
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 76
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 78
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Bowl faults.............................................................................................. 84
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair 91
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 94
4.1.2 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 96
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 100
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 101
4.2 Fitting orifice plates, flow indicator, pressure transmitter .................... 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 104
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 105
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 105
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 112
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 116
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 118
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from
GEA Westfalia Separator..................................................................... 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 122
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 138
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 139
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 139
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 140
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 141
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 143
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 157
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 166
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 167
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 170
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 172
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 174
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 178
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 180
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 184
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 186
4.6.7 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 192
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 197
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 197
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 198
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 200
®
Westfalia Separator
8 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 200

4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 200
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 201
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 202
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 202
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 202
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 202
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 203
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 204
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 204
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 205
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 205
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 206
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 208
5 Spare parts 211
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 212

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 212
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 9
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 11
1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning ....................................................... 13
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ....................... 18
1.5.2 Spare part requirements ........................................................................ 19
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 22
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 27
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 29
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36
®
Westfalia Separator
10 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.1 Correct usage

Centrifugal separators – called separators in short – are used
• for the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with simulta-
neous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
• for removing (clarifying) solids from a liquid.
The separator is designed

• for a very high bowl speed.
The admissible bowl speed depends on the chemical and physical properties
of the product:
– Temperature
– Density of the fluid and solid components.
• for products which contain no corrosive and erosive components.
The aggressiveness of the product influences the careful selection of the bowl
material.
Only products conforming to the specifications on the nameplate may be
processed.
• in accordance with the method of application of the separator agreed with
GEA Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractually agree-
ments.
• in accordance with the admissible utilities (cleaning agents, lubricants, operat-
ing liquids etc.) specified in the documentation or on the data sheet.
Intended use involves

• paying attention to the safety precautions, the instruction manual of the sepa-
rator and the safety markings on the separator.
• adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. maximum admissible bowl speed.
Further information on the intended use of the separator such as
– agreed areas,
– density of the product
– throughput capacities
– temperatures
– pressures etc.
is given in the documentation or the data sheet furnished with the documenta-
tion.
The contractually agreed conditions agreed with GEA Westfalia Separator on
the intended use of the separator must be passed on to the operating personnel
by the plant operator.
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and can result
in severe damage to property and persons!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 11
1.2 Non-compliance with the intended use

Any use that deviates from the intended use is considered to be non-
compliant.
The separator may not be operated by:

• Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
• Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manual of the
separator.
• Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation.
• Persons who have not been adequately trained.
• Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.
The separator may not be operated

• when the product fed does not conform to the specifications on the name-
plate.
– Product with excessively high density
– Solids with excessively high density
– Product with excessively high temperature
• when the max. admissible bowl speed has been exceeded through electrical
or electronic manipulation of the drive.
• in an incomplete state of assembly, e.g.
– required supervisory equipment is not activated or has been switched off.
– the required safety and/or protective covers have not been installed.
• by persons who are not adequately trained.
• when the separator is operated with spare parts which do not come from GEA
Non-compliance with intended use can result in severe damage to prop-

erty and persons!
®
Westfalia Separator
12 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.3 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesive and metal plates) are attached to all separators
on the hood and frame of the respective separator in such a way that they are
clearly visible.
All safety markings on the separator, control system and plant components must
always be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
Fig. 1 Example of markings on a separator
1 Pictograms (safety stickers)

2 Oil quality
3 Plates
4 Nameplate
5 Maker's nameplate
The texts and part numbers of the safety markings change depending on the
languages required by the customer.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 13
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the separator as adhesive
labels.
Fig. 2
Refer to the machine documen-

tation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the machine
must have read and understood the
documentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the machine and
be readily accessible to the opera-
tors. It must be available to the op-
erators at all times!
Fig. 3
®
Westfalia Separator
14 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Before carrying out work, dis-

connect power to all compo-
nents of the monitoring system!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the separa-
tor!

separator and electrical plant com-
ponents:
• Make sure the separator is at a
standstill.
Fig. 4 • Switch off all electrical appliances
from being accidentally switched on.
Danger to life and limb through

rotating machine parts!
• Do not loosen any part and do not
carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
Methods of how to check standstill
are described in the machine docu-
mentation.
Fig. 5
Warning of unusual noises or

vibrations!
When unusual noises or vibrations
• Immediately shut down the separa-

occur on the separator:
tor with filled bowl via “emergency-
• Never trigger a bowl ejection!

off”.
• Evacuate the room.

• Do not re-enter the room until the
centrifuge has come to a standstill.
Fig. 6
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 15
Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency con-
verter, do not exceed the admissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 7
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the separator and

plant components can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 8
Danger due to electrical voltage!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical separa-

tor/plant components:
via the main switch.
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
• Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of the
local electric power company.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).
®
Westfalia Separator
16 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Pictograms with warning text

Pictograms can be meaningfully supplemented as illustrated in the two following
examples:
– With warning text (Voltage is also present . .),
– with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text.
Bei ausgeschaltetem Sous tension même

Danger through external voltage!
Hauptschalter en position d’arrêt de
unter Spannung! l’interrupteur principal !
Voltage also present Con el interruptor

Voltage also present when main switch
when main
switch is turned off!
principal desconectado se
encuentra bajo tensión! is turned off!
CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1
ACHTUNG! Danger through external voltage!

Auch bei ausgeschaltetem
Hauptschalter können
orangefarbige Leitungen ATTENTION!
unter Spannung stehen.
ATTENTION!
Also in case of switched off main isola-
Also in case of switched off tor orange coloured cores can be un-
main isolator orange coloured cores
can be under voltage. der voltage.
ATTENTION!
Lorsque le commutateur principal
est éteint les files orange
peuvent être sous tension. CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
No te :
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at GEA Westfalia Separator.
Different colour leads can be fitted if requested by the customer!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 17
Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 12
1.4 Basic operating principles

Separators are used for the separation of liquid mixtures or for the separation of
solids out of liquids or liquid mixtures.
High centrifugal forces are produced in

the rotating bowl.
Fig. 13
Under the influence of the centrifugal forces, separation of the liquid mixture
and/or ejection of the solids particles takes place most rapidly.
The specifically heavier components are displaced to the bowl periphery, whe-
reas the specifically lighter components are displaced towards the centre of the
bowl.
The high centrifugal force is produced by very high bowl speeds. On the one
hand, high bowl speeds signify high efficiency, while on the other hand, they
signify high material stressing of the separator.
®
Westfalia Separator
18 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.5 Operations on the separator
The separator works reliably, provided

that it is operated and maintained in
accordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 14
Special attention must be given to:

• Assembly
• Electrical installation
• Before start-up
• Start-up
• Shut-down
• Maintenance and repair
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator or the separator plant requires
specialized knowledge.
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by un-

qualified or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.

who
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
ing.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.

The operator of the separator or separator plant
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.

• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 19
GEA Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced

training courses. You can obtain further information from GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator or from one of the authorized representatives.
1.5.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator. The original spare parts
are listed in the spare parts catalog.
– safety risks,
– reduced durability of these parts,
– reduced availability of the separator and
Fig. 15 If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
for the responsible persons. In such cases, GEA
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Assembly
• If the plant has several centrifuges,

be careful not to interchange parts of
different bowls since each bowl has
been balanced individually.
The bowl parts are marked with the
serial-number of the machine or with
the last three digits of the serial-
number.
Fig. 16

parts.
Fig. 17
®
Westfalia Separator
20 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Some bowl parts may be pre-

CAUTION:
assembled and balanced only by

specialists from GEA Westfalia
Separator or in workshops au-
thorized by Westfalia Separator.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
Fig. 18
• To avoid unbalance, when replacing

some bowl parts like
– Lock ring
– Bowl top
– Distributor
– Bowl bottom
– Water chamber bottom
GEA Westfalia Separator must be
consulted.
These parts
– are marked with a footnote in the
separator manual (see section
“Bowl”).
Fig. 19 – are marked in the column “ETS” of
the parts list with a 3 or 4.
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one an-
• Locking devices and alignment

other.
marks must be in perfect condition.

The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 20
• When transporting and assembling

machine parts, avoid crushing and
shear strain.
Fig. 21
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 21
• When assembling the bowl, be sure

to strictly adhere to the assembly in-
structions in order to avoid undue
• Before starting the bowl, be sure to

imbalance.
fit all parts.
Fig. 22
• Tighten the bowl lock ring securely:

the "O" marks on the bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
• Pay attention to the position of the

be in line with each other.
marks!
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring can endanger life!
Fig. 23
• Tighten the spindle screw with the

separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
Fig. 24
• Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring or cover securely (left-
hand thread).
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring or cover can en-
danger life!
Fig. 25
®
Westfalia Separator
22 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Carefully fasten hood 1, feed and

discharge housing 2 and centripetal
pump 3.
Fig. 26
• Check if the machine is completely

assembled and properly installed.
Fig. 27
1.5.4 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of GEA West-
falia Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 28
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/EC,
– Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC,
– Guidelines of the classification societies.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 23
1.5.5 Before start-up
• Check that the bowl lock ring has

been firmly tightened.
• The "O" marks on bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
be aligned.
Fig. 29
• The bowl must rotate in clockwise

direction (see arrow on frame or sol-
ids collector).
Fig. 30
• The separator may only be operated

with protection devices conforming
to EN 294.
• Equip solid and liquid discharges
accordingly where appropriate.
Fig. 31
®
Westfalia Separator
24 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 32
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 33
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
parts.
Fig. 34
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 25
1.5.6 Start-up
• Refer to chapter “operation”.

• Note nameplate. The values for
– bowl speed,
– density of the heavy liquid,
– density of the solids (centrifugally
dry)
are maximum values and must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 35
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36

operation:
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible bowl
speed (see nameplate).
• The separator may only be operated
with an independent device for
speed limiting.
Fig. 37
®
Westfalia Separator
26 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• The separator must not be used in
areas where explosion protection is
required.
Fig. 38
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Use protective gear, e.g.
– Protective clothing
– Eye protection
– Protective mask
Fig. 39

• Never trigger a bowl ejection!

off”.

separator has come to a standstill.
Fig. 40
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– hood,
– solids catcher
o
reach temperatures over 80 C .
o
(176 F).
Fig. 41
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 27
• The bowl is not allowed to run with-

out liquid supply for more than 15 –
30 minutes, as otherwise it would
result in overheating of the bowl ma-
terial.
Fig. 42
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off"
• For shut-down of the separator refer

to the chapter "Operation" of this
manual and follow the start-up and
shut-down instructions.
Fig. 43
®
Westfalia Separator
28 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation

When the voltage is cut off for longer than one second during operation, the
control system switches off automatically and the separating process is aborted.
Important:
– The bowl is not emptied. Product and solids remain in the bowl.
– The separator motor and product feed pump will be switched off.
– The control system switches itself back on automatically when the power
returns.
After the power returns

• Switch on the separator motor and product feed pump.
A closing water pulse after run-up of the separator triggers a total ejection
automatically.


off”.

Fig. 44
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 29
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair

Unfavourable operating conditions may require shorter maintenance intervals.
The factors listed below are unfavourable because they either attack the sepa-
rator material directly or impair the lubrication/cooling system:
• Aggressive product (chemical or physical)
• High product temperature
• Product with grease-decaying properties
• Environment: Temperature, dust, vapours
Particularly high-stressed separator

parts like
– Bowl lock ring,
– bowl bottom,
– bowl top and
– other bowl parts with a large outer
diameter
must be checked regularly to assure
safe and efficient operation.
Fig. 45
Timely maintenance of the separator and replacement of worn or damaged ma-

chine parts is essential for safe operation of the machine.
Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, safety
risks may arise (see section 1.5.2)
Carry out the required cleaning thoroughly.

One-sided solid deposits in the bowl cause severe unbalance!
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out to the extent described in
this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "repair shops" authorized by the
manufacturer.
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator in-
spected by our service engineers at regular intervals. These checks help to
maintain the operating safety and avoid unexpected downtime.
®
Westfalia Separator
30 2064-9001-001 / 1010

ponents:
• Make sure the separator is at a
standstill.
Fig. 46
• Do not loosen any part and do not

carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
The standstill check is described in
the section “bowl”.
Fig. 47
• Do not climb onto or stand on the

machine or parts of the machine.
• Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48
• Place dismantled machine parts on

a suitable base, e.g. rubber mat.
• Secure machine parts from rolling
away and overturning using suitable
aids!
Fig. 49
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 31
• Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame.
• Bowl parts must never be welded.
This also applies for hood and
solids catcher parts of steam-
sterilizable separators.
• Even during cleaning the bowl parts
the temperature must not exceed
100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
• Load-carrying equipment such as

– lifting devices for bowl or distribu-
tor,
– chains etc.
may only be used for their intended
purpose, i.e. the work routines as
described in this instruction manual.
• Do not use damaged or incomplete
load carrying equipment.
Fig. 51
• All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
possible damage at least once a year.
• In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable
legislation and safety rules have to be strictly observed.
• Do NOT step under hanging load.

CAUTION: Danger to life when transporting heavy parts!
• Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
be used for their intended purpose, i.e. the work routines as described in this
instruction manual.
• Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
– all moving parts are correctly aligned and not seized.
– that no parts are broken and that there is otherwise no damage which could
affect the operation of the tool.
• Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
– Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, the
safety of the tool can be impaired.
• Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
Properly maintained and cleaned tools work more precisely and can be
checked better.
®
Westfalia Separator
32 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

of slipping or product infection.
• When handling waste oils note:
– They can be injurious to health,
depending on their chemical com-
position.
– Waste oil must be disposed of in
accordance with local regulations.
Fig. 52
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 33
1.6 Corrosion
Corrosion can also affect bowl parts made of stainless steel. This corrosion can
be flat-spread or pit- or crack-shaped and merits special attention.
Corrosion on stainless steel bowl material should be examined thoroughly and
documented.
Flat-spread corrosion can usually be measured (reduction of wall thickness)
Pit- or crack-shaped corrosion cannot be measured without the risk of damage.
At the initial stage pit-shaped corrosion is generally caused by chlorine ions.
Depending on the stressing of the part, pit-shaped corrosion can result in crack-
shaped corrosion.
Possible formation of pit-shaped cor-

rosion.
Fig. 53
Such pittings can only be investigated by a materials expert.
In case of crack-shaped corrosion attack with or without superposed flat-

spread and pit-shaped corrosion on main bowl components, the machine
must be shut down immediately.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation.
Pittings
Pittings which are close together or
form a linear pattern can signify crack
formation beneath the surface.
Such pittings should be investigated by
a materials expert.
Fig. 54
®
Westfalia Separator
34 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.7 Erosion
Erosion is caused by solid particles in the process liquid.
These solid particles grind marks into the surfaces with which they come into
contact.
The following factors favour the occurrence of erosion:
• hard solids particles
• high throughput capacities
The first signs of erosion should be carefully observed and documented. Ero-
sion can deepen rapidly, thereby weakening the bowl material.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation. Information on the nature of the damage can be provided by photos,
plaster casts or lead molds.
Fig. 55
The surfaces most susceptible to erosion are:
1) the bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation),
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports,
4) the nozzles.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 35
Signs of erosion which you should

immediately report to your nearest
• The bottom of the erosion mark has

Westfalia Separator representative:
a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
• The depth of erosion mark exceeds

notch effect).
1 mm (0.04 inch) at the deepest

point.
Fig. 56
®
Westfalia Separator
36 2064-9001-001 / 1010
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
board contain greater amounts of substances injurious to health. These include:
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
- chemical residues.
An increased amount of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons is also present in used lube oils (waste oils).
The health hazards for the engine room staff depend to a large extent
• on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,
• the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),
• the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.
Possible short-term effects:

• headaches,
• dizziness,
• nausea,
• itching or burning of the skin,
Possible long-term effects:

• allergic reactions, especially skin allergies,
• festering inflammation of the skin pores (oil-acne),
• damage to the central nervous system after inhalation over a long period,
• skin cancer caused by direct skin contact over a long period,
• Lung cancer or cancer of the digestive organs after inhalation over a long period
(not certain as the causes are difficult to separate from the effects of smoking and alcohol).
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures
• Avoid skin contact with heavy oils or lube oils if possible!

- Wear suitable protective gloves.
- Apply a protective ointment to the skin (e.g. ointment no. 76), especially if no protective gloves are
worn!
• Avoid breathing in oil vapours if possible!
• If possible, improve the air circulation in the room!
Fully open the air regulation flaps in the outlets of the air supply ducts in the centrifuge and filter area.
• Wash affected areas of skin frequently and thoroughly!
Apply protective ointment to the skin!
• Personal hygiene is of the utmost importance!
• Change dirty overalls regularly!
• Exercise special care when carrying out maintenance work on and cleaning heavy oil and lube oil cen-
trifuges and filters!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 37
2 Machine description
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ...-0136-... ...................................................................................... 41
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment ................................................... 42
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 43
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 51
2.6 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter ............................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Water detector ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.3 Solenoid valve ....................................................................................... 58
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 60
2.6.5 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 61
2.7 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 62
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 62
2.7.2 Throughput determination (product feed line A) -
only for control D10 ................................................................................ 63
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 64
2.8 Technical data ....................................................................................... 65
®
Westfalia Separator
38 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator
• Refer to the installation guidelines for further information.
Minimum lifting capacity hoist: 100 kg

For repair and maintenance
bowl, motor
The complete bowl can then

be transported over adjacent
separators of identical type.
Centre of gravity
Water discharge/ Opera-

ting water discharge
Filling, displacement and operating water feed
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Water discharge / operating water discharge
These dimensions must be adhered to!

Do not discharge residuals into public waters!
Fig. 57 Refer to the project-specific dimensioned drawing!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 39
Pressure transmitter (product discharge)

Pressure transmitter („self-thinker“ system)
2/2-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
2/2-way solenoid valve (circuit)
Water detector
Centre of gravity
Socket:
Product discharge
Discharge by the centripetal pump built into the
separator
Product feed
Terminal box
Solenoid valve block Solids discharge

Filling, displacement and operating
water Pressure transmitter (product dis-
charge)
Pressure transmitter („Self-thinker“
system)
2/2-way solenoid valve (water dis-
charge)
2/2-way solenoid valvel (circuit)
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
Operating side
The separator foundation must not have contact with foundations of other units (e.g. aux-
iliary diesel engine, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.

Fig. 58 Refer to the prohect-specific dimensioned drawing!
®
Westfalia Separator
40 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.2 Section through separator
Fig. 59
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 41
2.3 General
The machine described in this manual is a high-speed centrifugal separator with
self-cleaning bowl.
"Separation" means the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liq-
uids, with simultaneous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"Clarification" is the removal of solids from a liquid.
Prerequisite for treatment technology (separation) is that the components of the
product
– can be separated mechanically,
– have different densities and
– do not emulsify.
2.4 OSE ...-0136-...

The OSE separator ...-0136-... with unitrolplus-System is equipped with a self-
cleaning disk bowl. It is used for clarification and purification of fuel oil (heavy oil
up to a density of 1.01 g/ml).
The separator with unitrol plus-System has two built-in monitoring functions:
– WMS - (water content monitoring system)
– SMS (sludge space monitoring system)
®
Westfalia Separator
42 2064-9001-001 / 1010
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment
The simultaneous water content and sludge space monitoring systems (WMS
and SMS) are used for the continuous purification of fuel oil.
Fig. 60 Example of monitoring
1 Dirty oil feed 11 Sensing liquid pump

2 Clean oil discharge 12 Centripetal pump (clean oil)
3 Displacement water 13 Separating disk
4 Pressure transmitter (clean oil) 14 Dirty water discharge
5 Water detector: 15 Solids holding space
6 Pressure transmitter 16 Solids discharge
7 Solenoid valve circuit 17 Operating water discharge
8 Solenoid valve water discharge 18 Operating water feed
9 Partial flow 19 Solenoid valve block
10 Control and monitoring device 20 Throttle
The fuel oil is conveyed to the separator via a separate pump.
The dirty oil feed occurs (1) through a closed line system.
The clean oil is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (12) via the
clean oil discharge.
The bowl is automatically opened and closed for desludging at full bowl speed
by means of a solenoid valve (19) in the operating water line.
The partial flow (9) diverted from the bowl via the separating disk (13) and the
sensing liquid pump (11) is monitored by a water detector (5) and a pressure
transmitter (6).
When the water detector (5) registers water (high capacity), the solenoid valve
(8) opens and the water is discharged through the dirty water outlet (14).
If the high capacity (water) changes due to oil flow (low capacity), the solenoid
valve (8) closes and the solenoid valve (7) opens intermittently. The partial flow
(9) is then recycled into the dirty oil feed (1).
When the sensing liquid inlet becomes blocked with water or solids accumula-
tion in the sludge space (15), the pressure transmitter (6) sends a pulse to the
control unit (10 and the automatic ejection program is initiated.
The control and monitoring unit (10) ensures unmanned operation.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 43
2.5 Main components of the separator
Fig. 61
Pos. Designation Function

connection • connects centripetal pump and hood.
• holds the filling and displacement water supply
1 Handle
piece
line.
2 Centripetal pump See section 2.5.1

Sensing liquid pump
• covers the rotating bowl.

• holds the feed and discharges (see section
3 Hood
2.7).
• is fitted to the hood.

• can be replaced as a complete unit.
4 Sensor block
• contains the following parts:

– Regulating ring (see section 2.6.1)
– Pressure transmitter (unitrolplus system –
SMS function) (see section 2.6.1)
– 2/2-way solenoid valve (water outlet) (see
section 2.6.3)
– 2/2-way solenoid valve (circulation) (see
section 2.6.3)
– Water detector (unitrolplus system – WMS
function) (see section 2.6.2)
5 Bowl: See section 2.5.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2.5.3
• contains the drive parts.

• supports motor, bowl and hood.
6 Frame
®
Westfalia Separator
44 2064-9001-001 / 1010

7 Sight glass allows checking the oil level.
8 Sight glass for checking the drive belt.
9 Solenoid valve block See section 2.5.5
10 Drive See section 2.5.4
11 Motor • accelerates the separator to the required
• is protected against overload during operation.

speed.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 45
2.5.1 Centripetal pump
Fig. 62
• discharges the purified liquid under pressure.

• is firmly connected to hood 2 of the separator.
1 Centripetal pump
• The disk provided with channels

dips into the liquid rotating with the
bowl.
• The liquid
– is pared off by the centripetal
pump and
– flows through its spiral channels
from the outside to the inside.
By this means the kinetic energy is
converted into pressure energy
which makes possible discharging
the liquid under pressure.
3 Sensing liquid pump • operates on the same principle as centripetal
• conveys the sensing liquid to the monitoring

pump 1.
system.
®
Westfalia Separator
46 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.5.2 Bowl
Fig. 63

1 Bowl produces high centrifugal forces through rotation
making possible separation and clarification.
2 Distributor accelerates the product fed in through feed A to
the rotational velocity of the bowl and then con-
veys it into the disk stack.
3 Disk stack • splits the liquid mixture consisting of a light
and heavy phase, e.g. oil-water, into its com-
• consists of a large number of conical disks

ponents.
positioned on top of one another.

Each disk is provided with spacers so that pre-
cisely defined interspaces are formed between
the individual disks.
The smooth disk surfaces facilitate sliding of the
solids and hence self-cleaning of the disks.
Separation chamber The separation space consists of a large number
of parallel chambers of low height. This pro-
duces very small radial sedimentation paths for
the product.
Solids collect on the upper wall of each disk interspace

and slide down into the solids holding space.
4 Solids holding space collects the solids separated in the disk stack.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 47
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics
A B
Fig. 64
A Separation – Bowl closed

B Ejection – Bowl open
1 Operating liquid In the rotating bowl the incoming, rotating oper-

(usually water) ating liquid generates a high centrifugal pres-
sure. This pressure is utilised for actuating the
annular piston and sliding piston which closes
and opens the bowl.
• is inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
2 Annular piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
• is located inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
3 Sliding piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
®
Westfalia Separator
48 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Closing the bowl (separation)
A B
Fig. 65

After starting the separator the solenoid valve for operating liquid is actuated
with the aid of the control unit, and the bowl is closed as follows:
1 Operating liquid • flows into the injection chamber 4 of bowl
• from there through feed holes into closing

bottom 5 and
chamber 6.
This initiates closing of the bowl.
2 Annular piston • moves into closed position.
3 Sliding piston • is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in
• is pressed against the gasket 7 of bowl top

closing chamber 6.
• closes the bowl.

due to the hydrostatic pressure and
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 49
Opening the bowl (ejection)
A B
Fig. 66

The solenoid valve for operating liquid is opened with the aid of the control unit,
and the ejection cycle is triggered as follows:
• flows first into injection chamber 4 and

• from there into opening chamber 8.
1 Operating liquid
• rises and
• empties closing chamber 6.
2 Annular piston
• moves downwards and

• opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom 5 for
3 Sliding piston
the separated solids 9.
®
Westfalia Separator
50 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.5.4 Drive
Fig. 67

1 Drive motor drives the separator.
Power transmission to the bowl spindle is via the
centrifugal clutch to the motor belt pulley and via
the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch • ensures power transmission between motor,
• accelerates the bowl gradually to rated

drive belt and spindle.
• is gentle on the drive belt and motor.

speed;
Important!
– The driving effect of new clutch shoes will
improve after several starts.
– Smoking of the centrifugal clutch during the
first few starts is perfectly normal and will dis-
appear after a short time of operation.
– Wear to the clutch shoes depends on the
number of starts and the ejection frequency
(see section 4.3.1).
3 Drive belt transfers the drive power of the drive motor 1 to

the bowl spindle 4.
Regularly check the seat and condition of the
drive belt. The inspection and replacement inter-
vals are given in the maintenance schedule (see
4.3.1).
4 Bowl spindle supports the bowl.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 51
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block

The solenoid valve block for operating, filling and displacement water consists of
two 2/2-way solenoid valves with servo control. They are equipped with a man-
ual override for testing purposes.
Fig. 68
10 Pressure controller 90 Diaphragm

20 Sleeve-type ball valve 100 Magnet core
30 Pressure gauge 110 Coupler socket
40 Filter insert 130 Hose
70 Magnet coil
80 Housing A Manual override
Manual override A
The manual override can only be

actuated with a screwdriver!
1 closed
2 open
Fig. 69
®
Westfalia Separator
52 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Adjusting the pressure setpoint

- pressure controller 10
• Correct the pressure setpoint by

If necessary:
turning the setpoint screw 1 (jaw

span 7).
Pressure setpoint correction

• Open the operating water valve
using the manual override (see Fig.
69).
• Increase the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too low.
– Turn setpoint screw clockwise.
• Decrease the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too high.
– Turn setpoint screw counter-

clockwise.
The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

cated on pressure gauge 30.
SW = jaw span
Fig. 70
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 53
Technical data
• Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
ATTENTION:
• the installation guidelines.
Part-No. see parts list

Operating principles 2/2-way solenoid valve
NC
Material: Gasket EPDM
Housing CuZn
Solenoid
Coil size 32 mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(DN)
Operating voltage: 24 V DC
Rating 8 W (per solenoid valve)
Coupler socket with built-in electronics,
24 V DC, LED and free-wheeling diode
with fitted cable (1.5 m long)
Pressure Medium 0 to 10 bar
Control range 1 to 6 bar
Pressure setpoint 2 bar
with open operating water solenoid
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 – 176 °F)
In case of electrical faults
• Switch off the main switch and lock it.

CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
CAUTION: Danger of injury through very hot separator parts!

When carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury through hot
o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C(158 – 212 °F)).
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
ATTENTION:
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists

and with suitable tools!
®
Westfalia Separator
54 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Problem Cause Action
Solenoid valve does Control unit is defective. Contact service backup

not function. support.
Wire break in the connect- Replace wire.
ing terminal.
Connecting terminal on the Tighten the screw of the
connector block is loose. connecting terminal.
Bad contact on the con- Clean or replace the con-
necting terminal. tact.
Coupler socket loose. Tighten coupler socket.
Magnet coil defective. Replace the solenoid head.
Diaphragm defective. Replace diaphragm.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 55
2.6 Supervisory equipment

The separating process is monitored and controlled by an automatic control unit.
For further details, refer to the control unit manual.
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter
Pressure transmitters PT1 and PT2

(Pressure Transmitter)
– are included in the standard scope
of supply,
– provide alarm logging PAH (Pres-
sure Alarm High) and PAL (Pres-
sure Alarm Low),
– switch process-specifically in case of
pressure drop or increase,
– can be software-checked for correct
functionality and
can be adjusted to their switching
points,
Fig. 71 – are maintenance-free.
The pressure transmitter
– PT1 is installed in the product discharge line.
– PT2 is installed on the Unitrolplus-System.
Note:
Refer to the circuit diagram in the control cabinet and the manual of the control
system.
Setting the switching points

The switching points are set at the factory using appropriate software.
Factory settings
Product discharge line Unitrolplus-System
Pressure transmitter Pressure transmitter
PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAL
(1) (2)
1.0 bar 3.0 bar 0.5 bar
(1)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar above the switching point.
(2)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar under the switching point.
• Pay special attention to order-specific settings (see operating data sheet in

IMPORTANT:
the order documentation)!
®
Westfalia Separator
56 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Technical data
Voltage 24 V DC
Range 0 – 16 bar
Output signal 4 – 20 mA
Pressure connection G 1/4in outer (O-ring seal)
Tightening torque
Pressure connection max. 25 Nm
Connector plug M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1.5 m
Cable box M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pin1-, white; Pin4+, black
Enclosure IP 67
Working temperature :
-40 to +125 °C (-40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature
2.6.2 Water detector
The WMSwater detector (WMS sen-

sor)
– is included in the standard equip-
ment,
– is built into the unitrolplus-System,
– monitors the partial flow that is dis-
charged from the bowl via the sepa-
rating disk and the sensing liquid
pump.
– can be checked for functionality
using appropriate software.
Fig. 72
Note:
Refer to the terminal connection plan in the control cabinet and the manual of
the control system.
Setting the switching points

The switching points are preset for the specific area of application (HFL or LO)
at the factory.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 57
Technical data
Switching hysteresis Depending on the process HFO/LO
Ambient temperature -30 to +125 °C (-22 to +257 °F)
(LED: -30 to 100 °C / -22 to 212 °F )
Temperature drift dependent on medium
Enclosure (according to IEC 60529) Terminal strip: IP 54
Probe: IP 68 – 10 bar
Housing material MS
Immersion tube: PTFE
Connector plug Terminals
See terminal allocation
Connection M 30 x 1.5
Jaw span 32
Supply voltage UB 10 to 35 V DC
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Conformity
according to IEC 60947-5-2)
®
Westfalia Separator
58 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.6.3 Solenoid valve
The solenoid valve is a 2/2-way diaph-

ragm straight-way valve with internal
piloting.
Main components:
1 Diaphragm
2 Emergency locking manual override
A Operating mode
B Emergency manual override
Fig. 73
Note: The emergency manual override (2)

– is secured against accidental activation: see operating status (A).
– can be pressed and turned through 90°: see emergency manual override (B).
Technical data
Part-No. see parts list
Operating principles 2/2-way valve normally closed
Nominal width 3 mm
Gasket material FKM
Material CuZn
Line connection G-1/4 sleeve
Voltage 24 V
Kind of current DC (direct current)
Rating 8W
In case of electrical faults


o
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve may only be done by authorised spe-
cialists and with suitable tools!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 59
Problem Cause Action

Valve does not Control unit is defective. Contact service backup
function. support.
Wire break in the connect- Replace wire.
ing terminal.
Connecting terminal on the Tighten the screw of the
connector block is loose. connecting terminal.
Bad contact on the con- Clean or replace the con-
necting terminal. tact.
Magnet coil defective. Replace the solenoid head.
Diaphragm defective. Replace diaphragm.
®
Westfalia Separator
60 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option)

The separator is protected against inadmissibly high vibrations by means of an
electronic vibration monitoring system.
Fig. 74 Installation example
• is installed at the upper part of the frame.

• converts the separator vibrations into electric
1 Vibration pick-up
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.
• evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
3
unit
tion pickup.
The evaluation of the signal – depending on the version – takes place
in the control cabinet, on the control unit or directly on the vibration
pickup.
When the limit value or values are exceeded, an alarm and follow-up
measures are triggered and the separator motor switches off automati-
cally.
The operating status can be read off on the control unit.
ATTENTION!
• instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system

Pay attention to the following instructions and plans:
• instruction manual of the control unit

• terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
• circuit diagram
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 61
2.6.5 Speed monitoring

• displays bowl speed.
Speed deviations of up to 5 % are permissible.
• monitors speed drop as well as excess of speed and starting time.
Fig. 75
1 Spindle • rotates and generates speed pulses at prox-

imity switch 2.
2 Proximity switch • transmits the pulses triggered from the spindle

to control unit 3.
ATTENTION!
Align the proximity switch as illustrated.
The distance X between the spindle and the
proximity switch must be 2.5 mm.
• evaluates the speed pulses.

• triggers an alarm if the bowl speed is too low
3 Control unit
• initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed

or too high.
• indicates the current bowl speed and

is too low or too high.
• permits setting of limit values.
ATTENTION!
Pay attention to the terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the
refer to the instruction manual of the control unit.
®
Westfalia Separator
62 2064-9001-001 / 1010
2.7 Product feed line and product discharge line
Fig. 76
The separator is adapted to local conditions for throughput capacity and line
pressure by means of orifice plates installed in product feed line A and product
discharge line B (see section 4.2).
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A)

The effective throughput capacity of the separator is stated on the project de-
pendent data sheet.
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Flowmeter – Scale: 0 – 10
Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
1 000 – 1 400 6
1 400 – 2 200 8
2 200 – 3 300 10
3 300 – 4 800 12
4 800 – 7 000 14
7 000 – 13 000 no orifice plate
When using a D10 control unit

• During commissioning mark the respective scale area on flowmeter 4 (see
Fig. 76 with the sticker supplied.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 63
When using an E10 control unit

The effective throughput capacity is displaced on the control unit via the pres-
sure transmitter 5.
Throughput values deviating between the actual value and the setpoint value
can be adapted in the control unit.
2.7.2 Throughput determination (product feed line A) - only for control

D10
Fig. 77 Diagram for determining the throughput rate
A Inner diameter of orifice plate (mm)

B Throughput capacity (x 1000 l/h)
C Scale area of flowmeter
The throughput capacity of the separator (volume of product to be treated fed by

unit of time) can be determined with the aid of the diagram.
®
Westfalia Separator
64 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3/2-way valve with flow indicator 4

Procedure:
• Read the value on the scale of flowmeter 4 (see Fig. 76).
e.g. 3
• From the value read from the scale (e.g. 3) draw a line up to the curve of the
inner diameter of the built-in orifice plate A (e.g. Ø 10).
• Read the throughput rate B appearing vertically below:
e.g. 2.7 (= 2 700 l/h)
The precision in throughput determination depends on the following characteris-
tics of the product to be processed:
– Viscosity
– Temperature
– Density
The parameters mentioned here can lead to inexact determination of the
throughput rate.
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B)

The pressure in the discharge line is displayed on pressure gauge 1 (see Fig.
76).
• Note factory adjusted switch points (see section 2.6.1).
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Pressure gauge - Measuring range: 0 – 10 bar

Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
1 000 – 1 800 6
1 800 – 2 800 8
2 800 – 4 300 10
4 300 – 6 300 12
6 300 – 9 100 14
9 100 – 13 000 no orifice plate
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 65
2.8 Technical data

The order-specific process data are given on the operating data sheet in-
cluded in the documentation.
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 1.5 dm
–1
Speed 12 000 min
– for densities of the product up to
3 o (see name-plate)
1.01 kg/dm (at 15 C) and
– for densities of the separated solids up to
3
1.4 kg/dm
Speed for higher densities contact the factory
Starting time approx. 2 – 4 min

Run-down time (after switching off the motor
45 min
with drive belt))
Run-down time (without drive belts, i.e. in
the case of torn, jumped off or defective drive 90 min
belt)
Centripetal pump
Output (depending on medium) max. 10 000 l/h
Pressure head 1 – 2 bar
Operating water
Qty. min. 1 800 l/h

Pressure (with open valve) 2–3 bar
Standard operating water specification
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l

Particle size max. 50 µm
Hardness:
o o
– up to 55 C separating temperature < 12 dH
o o
– above 55 C separating temperature < 6 dH
To convert the hardness values stated use the following equation:
1° dH = 1.79 ° fH = 1.25 ° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
Chlorine ions < 100 mg/l

pH 6.5 – 7.5
®
Westfalia Separator
66 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Normal separating temperature of the product
DO 20 °C (68 °F)
MDO 40 °C (104 °F)
LO 90 °C (194 °F)
LO HD 95 °C (203 °F)
HFO 98 °C (208 °F)

Due to the large number of products to be treated, it is not possible
to specify an exact separating temperature of the product in this
manual.
The exact separating temperature of the product (in °C) is stated in
the order-specific data sheet.
Motor
Power rating 50 Hz 7.5 kW
60 Hz 8.6 kW
Speed 50 Hz 3 000 RPM

60 Hz 3 600 RPM
Design IM V1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 2.5 l
Oil quality, see section 4.3.3
Product feed pump
Pump unit (gear or screw pump)
Output depending on plant rating
Suction height max. 0.4 bar
Pressure head 2 bar
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 240 kg
Bowl 70 kg
Motor 53 kg
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 67
3 Operation
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 68

3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system .................................................. 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 73
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 76
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 76
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 78
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Bowl faults.............................................................................................. 84
®
Westfalia Separator
68 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.1 Technical information

Take note of the following sections:
3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system

The separator with unitrol plus-System has two built-in monitoring functions:
– water content monitoring system - WMS
– sludge space monitoring system - SMS
Procedure:
• Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
• Set the separating time on the control unit.
• Start the separator (see 3.2).
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection

The bowl is ejected automatically at full speed during the program sequence.
The time at which the ejection is triggered is
• determined by the preset separating time
or
• by the solids level in the bowl,
if:
– SMS was selected on the control unit,
– the sludge space is full before the separating time has elapsed.
For determining the separating time see 3.5.
Sequence of an ejection (example without “Filling”)

1. Separating time has elapsed.
2. Product feed valve is closed.
3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil side.
4. Operating water opens and closes the bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
5. Waiting time for speed recovery.
6. Product valve is opened.
7. Separating time resumes.
Displacement
• When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
reduced to a minimum by displacing the feed liquid with water before sludge
ejection takes place (especially important when processing valuable feed liq-
uid).
• The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
control unit manual).
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 69
• If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
• If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl
and is lost during desludging.
Flush ejection
If the solids cant be completely ejected,
– due to an excessively long dwell time in the bowl or
– are stuck too firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
• either the separating time must be shortened or
• a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
with water or product and emptying it again.
Program control
• "Displacement", "ejection" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined intervals
are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
• Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.
®
Westfalia Separator
70 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.2 Before start-up
Note:
• Safety precautions in chapter 1.
• Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
• Instructions “Settings and malfunctions”
• Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
• Process-related deviations are possible
(refer to the order-specific operating data sheet!)
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair
ATTENTION!
In order not to endanger the operating safety of the separator, keep
to the recommended maintenance intervals.
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table

to a long standstill period or storage),
• Replace if necessary.
“Maintenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g.
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule

due to a long standstill period or storage),
(table “Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the lat-
• replace if necessary.
est),
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).
• the bowl can be rotated by hand.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the spindle screw with the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 71
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).

• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly connected (see 4.1.3).
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.
®
Westfalia Separator
72 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.2.2 Before every start-up
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the spindle screw with the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 73
3.3 Starting the separator

• See section 3.2.1 or 3.2.2
• Switch on the control unit.
• Switch on the separator motor.
Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (section
4.1.3) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
Note:
The run-up phase of the separator motor is signalled by slow flashing of the
LED in the “Status Separator” key.
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
• Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.

on the separator -
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glass in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 78
• Switch on the product feed pump (option).

– Ensure that the product feed valves to the suction and pressure side are
open!
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
• Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.

on the product feed pump -
The direction of rotation of the product feed pump is correct when the fan
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise.
• Put the preheater in operation (option).
P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Steam or thermal oil feed and discharge valves are open!
– Electric preheater is switched on!
• Open the product discharge valve in the product discharge line (option).
®
Westfalia Separator
74 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Open the shut-off flap in the solids

discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 79
• Start the program.

P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Continuous lighting of the LED in the “Status Separator” button.
– The specified separating temperature has been reached.
– The solids tank has been released (level switch LSHH).The solids tank is
empty.
• After the product feed valve has automatically opened.
– Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approx. 1.5 to 2.5 bar
(see order-specific operating data sheet).
– Adjust the desired throughput capacity; while doing so, maintain the back-
pressure in the product discharge line in the specified area.
• Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow
ATTENTION!
during the separating process!
3.4 Monitoring of operation

The machine is monitored largely by the separator control.
Operations to be carried out regularly:

• On your daily round, especially during the first 1500 operating hours, pay at-
tention to the following:
– Oil level
– Temperatures
– Pressures
– Leakage
– Vibrations
– Current consumption
– Starting time
– Hoses and hose pipes
– Pipe joints
• Keep to the maintenance schedule (see 4.3.1)!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 75
• Inspection
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator in-
spected by our service engineers once a year. These checks help to
– maintain the operating safety of the machine and
– avoid unscheduled downtime.
Im p o rta n t!
• Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage.
®
Westfalia Separator
76 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.5 Setting the separation time

When using time-dependent automatic control programs, accurate setting of the
separation time (time between ejection cycles) is only possible if the throughput
capacity and solids loading in the feed remain constant. If this is not the case, it
may be necessary to correct the settings during operation.
• the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),

The separating time depends on
• the solids loading in the feed,

• the consistency of the solids,
• the effective solids space volume in the bowl,
• the separator throughput.
Given constant conditions, the separating time can be determined by calcula-
tion.
The following times have proven appropriate in practice (examples):
Product Total ejection Partial ejection

HFO max. 2 h max. 1 h
MDO max. 2 h max. 1 h
DO max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO mild max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO HD max. 2 h max. 1 h
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation

Example for mathematical calculation of the separating time:
(1)
Given: Solids content p = 0.05 %
Solids holding space volume V = 1.5 l
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation V' = 1.13 l
(1) o
Throughput capacity V = 2 000 l/h
Wanted: Separating time t = ? min
The separating time to be set is calculated as follows:
V’ 1.13
t = ——— • 60 • 100 = —————— • 6 000 = 57.8 min = 1.1 h
V° • p 2 000 • 0.05
(1)
Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from
the order specification.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 77
3.6 Ejecting the bowl
Automatic operation
• Initiate ejection program by pressing the key ”Process START”:

– Product feed is closed.
– Displacement
– Bowl ejection
– Speed recovery
– Filling water (process-dependent)
• The product valve opens again.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut–down)
• Close the product feed line.

– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Eject the bowl:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 –
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• New separating operation
– Open the product feed valve manually.
®
Westfalia Separator
78 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.7 Shutting down the separator
Automatic operation
• End the separation program with the key "Process STOP”.

– Two total ejections are performed automatically.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut–down)
• Switch off the preheater (option).

– Continue to feed product for a few minutes since the preheater continues
to heat for a short time.
• Close the product feed line.
– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Displacement:
– Open the displacement water valve using the manual override.
(The bowl contents are displaced without loss by opening the displace-
ment water valve).
• Eject the bowl:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 –
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• Switch off the product feed pump (option).

– The product feed pump continues to run (timer 23)!
– The LED in the “FEED” button shows the post-run phase by slow flashing.
– The control valves for thermal oil and steam preheater close automatically.
ATTENTION!
If the control unit or the control voltage 24 VDC fails, the automatic post-run
phase of the product feed pump is disabled.
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off valve
without a delay time. The pre-heater could get damaged!
All heaters (e.g. steam-fired, thermal oil, electric heaters) must be manually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed.
• Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion).
• Switch the separator motor off.
• Close the discharges.
• Close the supply lines such as heating steam, water, compressed air lines
with hand valves.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!
still.
– The run-down time of the bowl is 45 minutes after switching off the motor.
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 79
Standstill of drive belt

• Shine a torch through the frame
• Visually check that the drive belt is

sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 80
• Unscrew the sight glass,

When the sight glass is turbid:
• shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.

CAUTION: Danger of injury through rotating drive belt!
– Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.
In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
• Be sure to observe the run-down time of 90 minutes until dismantling the

still.
separator!
ATTENTION!
• Close the shut-off flap in the solids

Only after standstill of the bowl,
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 81
Risk of injury due to electrical volt-

age and unintended start-up of the
separator!

ponents:
Fig. 82
®
Westfalia Separator
80 2064-9001-001 / 1010

o o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 F).
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off"

In a hazardous situation (unusual noises or vibrations) or in the case of damage
to the separator or plant components (e.g. burst hoses), a manual quick shut-
down of the installation can be carried out.
Depending on the version, the control cabinet is equipped with:
– a main switch (yellow-red) with integrated “Emergency-Off” function and
additional connection for an external “Emergency-Off”-switch (example 1),
– an “Emergency-Off” switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection for an external “Emergency-Off”-switch (example 2) or
– an “Emergency-Off” switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection, via approved “Emergency-Off” relay for several “Emer-
gency-Off”-switches (example 2).
Main switch (yellow-red) with inte-

grated “Emergency-Off” function
• Actuate the main switch with “Emer-
gency-Off” function.
– The complete control unit is de-
energised.
– No bowl ejection is performed.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 83 Example 1
“Emergency-Off”-switch (yellow-
red) and main switch (grey-black)
• Actuate the “Emergency-Off switch.
– The complete drives of the control
unit are de-energised.
– The separator is shut down in a
controlled manner with two total
ejections.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 84 Example 2
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 81
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
82 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.8 Trouble shooting

The following tables are an aid for locating and eliminating faults.
If assembly operations have to be carried out refer to the section "Maintenance
and Repair".
3.8.1 Trouble shooting
Failure Possible causes Action

The bowl does not come up Oil has run down the spindle onto the • Clean belt contact surface of the
• Replace the drive belt.

to rated speed or takes too drive belt; the drive belt is slipping on spindle and clutch pulley.
long to do so. the bowl spindle.
Motor is incorrectly connected. • Check connection.

Insufficient number of clutch shoes. • Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
• Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace drive belt.

on the bowl spindle.
Drive belt has not been fitted correctly. • Check position of drive belt on cen-
Liquid or dirt has collected in the upper • Check operating water discharge:
trifugal clutch and bowl spindle.
• Clean inside of upper section of

section of frame and is braking the Liquid must flow off freely.
bowl.
• Wipe dry friction surfaces.

frame.
• ATTENTION: Do not use

The bowl speed drops during Friction surfaces of clutch shoes are
operation. oily.
benzene, trichlorethy-
lene or any other sol-
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace the drive belt.
vent!
on the bowl spindle.

The motor speed drops during opera- • Check motor and line voltage.
tion.
• Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
• Make sure that the
The bowl reaches the rated Too many clutch shoes are used.
speed too fast (in less than
1.5 minutes). The starting clutch shoes are
current of the motor is hence evenly spaced.
inadmissibly high.(Imax >2 x IN).
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 83

Uneven run of the centrifuge. Bowl is out of balance for the following For pos. 1 - 4:
reasons: • Shut down separator.
• Close the product feed and dis-
charge.
• Bowl must not be emptied

CAUTION:
as otherwise the vibrations

occurring during shut-down
will intensify.
If bowl leaks,
• Completely open the water supply.
1. The separated dirt has deposited • Clean bowl.
unevenly in the bowl.
2. Bowl has not been correctly as- • Assemble bowl properly.
sembled or parts of different bowls
(if plant has several separators)
have been interchanged.
3. The tension in the disk stack has
slackened:
– The bowl top is not screwed on CAUTION: A loose bowl
until O mark alignment. top can endanger life!
• The O marks of
the bowl bottom
and the bowl top
must be aligned.
– Insufficient number of disks. • Check number of disks; add a spare
• Send bowl to factory for repair.

disk if necessary.
4. Bowl parts are damaged.
CAUTION: Do not carry out
your own repairs!
Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the bowl!
Ball bearings are worn. • Replace damaged bearings.
ATTENTION!
Use only the ball bearings
specified in the parts list.
®
Westfalia Separator
84 2064-9001-001 / 1010
3.8.2 Bowl faults
Fig. 85 Bowl and operating water feeding system
1 Gasket (bowl top) 11 Operating water feeding system

2 Gasket (bowl top) 12 Injection chamber
3 Gasket (sliding piston) 13 Closing chamber bottom
4 Gasket (annular piston) 14 Bowl bottom
5 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) 15 Drain hole
6 Gasket (annular piston) 16 Annular piston
7 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 17 Drain hole
8 Gasket (bowl bottom) 18 Sliding piston
9 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 19 Bowl top
10 Gasket (water chamber bottom) 20 Solenoid valve block
21 Solenoid valve for operating water
22 Solenoid valve for filling and displacement water
23 Filling and displacement water line
24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve
26 Operating water line
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 85
The bowl does not close. Operating water

Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
• Check or reset program parameters.
ATTENTION: Motor is not correctly set.
– Product flows out of the
(See control unit documentation.)
solids discharge.
– Current consumption is too
• Set 1 seconds (see also control unit

high.
Closing water pulse too short.
• Close shut-off cock 25.

documentation).
Strainer 24 in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 24 (see 4.4.4).
The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.
Operating water data:

– Pressure 2 – 3 bar (with open valve)
the capacity by litres) ≅ 1.0 l in

– Volume flow min. 1 800 l/h (gauge
• Clean or replace operating water

3 secs
The operating water line 26 has be-
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 26.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
The operating water solenoid valve 21 • Check solenoid valve 21 and re-
ber.
does not open properly. place if necessary.

Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled.
or
• Thoroughly clean all bores.

section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
Gaskets and piston guide ring are • Replace all sealing elements.
damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
• Change polyamide gasket 5 only

lation!
when it is damaged (see section

4.4.9).
Sealing rim of sliding piston 18 is • Lightly remachine the sealing sur-
damaged. face of the sliding piston – max. 1
• send in the sliding piston for repair.

mm! – see section 4.4.10) or
®
Westfalia Separator
86 2064-9001-001 / 1010

24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 87
The bowl does not open or Operating water

not properly Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
Motor is not correctly set. • Check or reset program parameters.
• Set 3 – 4 seconds (see also control

(See control unit documentation.)
Time for opening water too short.
• Close shut-off cock 25.

unit documentation).
Strainer 24 in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 24 (see 4.4.4).
The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.


• Clean or replace operating water

3 secs
The operating water line 26 has be-
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 26.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
The operating water solenoid valve 21 • Check solenoid valve 21 and re-
ber.
does not open properly. place if necessary.

Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled
or
• Thoroughly clean all bores.

section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
– Thoroughly check outlet bore 17
• Replace all sealing elements.

and clean if necessary.
Gaskets and piston guide ring are
damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
• Change polyamide gasket 5 only

lation!
when it is damaged (see section
• Thoroughly check polyamide gasket

4.4.9).
5 for proper location in its groove.
®
Westfalia Separator
88 2064-9001-001 / 1010

24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 89

The bowl does not empty The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
completely. Solids remain in low. necessary.
the bowl.

The separating time has been set too • Shorten the separating time (see
3 secs
long with the result that the solids con- section 3.5).
• Readjust the closing water impulse

tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short.
ration. – Closing water evaporates. (see control unit documentation).
Closing water pulse is too long.
– Closing water impulse opens the
bowl.
®
Westfalia Separator
90 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 91
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 94
4.1.2 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 96
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 100
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 101
4.2 Fitting orifice plates, flow indicator, pressure transmitter .................... 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 104
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 105
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 105
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 112
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 116
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 118
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from
GEA Westfalia Separator..................................................................... 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 122
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 138
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 139
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 139
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 140
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 141
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 143
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 166
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 167
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 170
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 172
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 174
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 178
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 180
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 184
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 186
4.6.7 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 192
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 197
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 197
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 198
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 200
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 200
4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 200
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 201
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 202
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 202
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 202
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 202
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 203
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 204
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 204
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 205
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 205
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 206
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 208
®
Westfalia Separator
92 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.1 Installation of the separator
• Refer to the installation guidelines for further information.
Minimum lifting capacity hoist: 100 kg

For repair and maintenance
bowl, motor
The complete bowl can then

be transported over adjacent
separators of identical type.
Centre of gravity
Water discharge/ Opera-

ting water discharge
Product discharge
Product feed
Solids discharge
Water discharge / operating water discharge

Fig. 88 Refer to the project-specific dimensioned drawing!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 93
Pressure transmitter (product discharge)

Pressure transmitter („self-thinker“ system)
2/2-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
2/2-way solenoid valve (circuit)
Water detector
Centre of gravity
Socket:
Product discharge
Discharge by the centripetal pump built into the
separator
Product feed
Terminal box
Solenoid valve block Solids discharge

Filling, displacement and operating
water Pressure transmitter (product dis-
charge)
Pressure transmitter („Self-thinker“
system)
2/2-way solenoid valve (water dis-
charge)
2/2-way solenoid valvel (circuit)
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
Operating side
The separator foundation must not have contact with foundations of other units (e.g. aux-
iliary diesel engine, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.

Fig. 89 Refer to the prohect-specific dimensioned drawing!
®
Westfalia Separator
94 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.1.1 Transporting the separator
• CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

– Be sure to use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation.
• CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

– Do NOT step under hanging load.
• Always transport the separator without installed bowl!
• For special tools, see section 4.14 or parts list.
• Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 90
• Screw double nipple 1 into the hole

in the frame.
Fig. 91
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 95
• CAUTION! Do not use the eye bolt

of the motor to suspend the sepa-
rator.
• ATTENTION: Do not damage any

machine attachment parts when fas-
tening the ropes.
• Attach the transport ropes

– to the machine A as illustrated,
– around the double nipple and
– hang them into the load hook of
the hoist as illustrated.
ATTENTION: Prevent the ropes from
• Wind one piece of rope twice round

slipping!
the hook (see detail).
• Make sure the machine touches

down gently.
Fig. 92
• Unscrew double nipple 1
Fig. 93
• Screw in the screw plug 1.
Fig. 94
®
Westfalia Separator
96 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.1.2 Installing the separator

• Before installing the separator make sure that
– sufficient space is available for operating and dismantling the machine.
– the foundation is not connected to foundations of other vibrating units to
avoid the transfer of vibrations.
• Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

plates 3 on foundation 4.
• Tack plates 3.
• Unscrew screws 5.
• Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1).
• Weld plates 3 to foundation 4.
• Place the separator on plates 3 and
• bolt tight with hexagon nuts 5.
• Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 95
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 97
4.1.3 Motor
Fig. 96 Start-up diagram (current and speed characteristics) – example
at
De- Enclo-
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
sign sure *
rpm min s kW rpm rpm
IP 55
see name- approx. 2 – IM V ISO-

3 7.5 8.6 3 000 3 600
plate 4 1 class
F*
* WS standard
The separator is driven by a three-phase AC motor via a centrifugal clutch and
the drive belt.
The specified motor ratings are minimum values which are based on the in-
creased starting current. Since the current consumption of the motor drops after
start-up, overloading of the motor during operation is not possible.
The starting time depends on the
– flywheel effect of the bowl,
– number of clutch shoes used,
– condition of the clutch shoes.
The starting current can peak at about 1.8 - 2 times the rated current (see start-
up diagram). This is to be considered when selecting switches, lead-in wires
and fuses.
The motor
– can be started direct online (WS standard) or via a motor control for star-
delta switching (Ex-zone).
®
Westfalia Separator
98 2064-9001-001 / 1010
– is protected against overheating by thermal overload releases or a PTC

thermistor as sole protection.
(As WS standard, the motor is protected against overheating by three PTC
thermistors).
– can be equipped with a frequency converter if requested by the customer.
When using thermal overload releases, the motor has to be protected as fol-
lows:
– during operation by a release set to the rated current and
– during start-up by a second release set to 1.8 - 2 times the rated current.
The release set to the rated current must be bridged during start-up.
Note:
• The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
• External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers.
• When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.
Electrical connection
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb through electric current!

There might be residual voltage!
In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages in the motor
terminal box are possible despite switched off main switch.
• Refer to the motor nameplate.

Prior to working on the motor:
• Refer to the motor instruction manual.

Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Associa-
tion of German Electrical Engineers) or of the local electric power company.
• Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.
• Connect the motor.

Refer to the motor instruction man-
ual.
Fig. 97 Connection scematic
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.
• Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).
Refer to the motor instruction manual.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 99
Star switching (example)
Fig. 98
Delta switching (example)
Fig. 99
• In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space

IMPORTANT:
heaters, refer to the motor manual.
Shipboard operation
• When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
guidelines issued by the respective classification societies.
• When using ship wiring cables, cable entry must be by means of marine-type
glands.
®
Westfalia Separator
100 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl
Provided that:
– The drive chamber is filled with oil
up to the half way mark on the sight
glass.
• Switch on motor.
Fig. 100
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glass in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 101

operation:
• Before working on the motor,
note that residual voltage may be
present!
• In this connection:
– Read the documentation supplied
by the frequency converter manu-
facturer.
– Have protective measures imple-
mented by suitably qualified per-
sonnel.
Fig. 102
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 101
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl
Speed see name-plate

– for densities of the product up to
3
max. 1.01 kg/dm and
– for densities of the separated solids up to max.
3
1.4 kg/dm
Starting time approx. 2 – 4 min
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the
separator.
Before the first start-up

• Check spindle speed (= bowl speed)
with a hand tachometer before fitting
the bowl.
CAUTION!
Risk of injury through rotating
• Keep a safe distance away from the

spindle.
• Do not wear long, open hair or wide,

rotating spindle.
• Wear a hairnet!
loose clothing!
• IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the

maximum spindle running time of
1 minute!
• Speed deviations of up to 5 % are

permissible.
Fig. 103
®
Westfalia Separator
102 2064-9001-001 / 1010
In case of frequency converter operation:

The frequency converter is equipped with a reliable frequency limitation to pre-
vent operation at inadmissibly high bowl speeds.
• Operate the separator with fre-

CAUTION!
quency converter, speed monitor-

ing device and hardware-
controlled speed shut-off device.
manipulate the frequency con-
verter to exceed the permissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)!
• Check from time to time that
– the bowl speed (see nameplate)
and
Fig. 104 – motor frequency (see nameplate
and frequency converter display!)
coincide with the separator speed.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 103
4.2 Fitting orifice plates, flow indicator, pressure transmitter

A set of orifice plates (with different inner diameters) and a set of commissioning
parts are supplied with the separator.
– The set of orifice plates is fastened to the separator hood.
– The set of commissioning parts comprises the flow indicator 4 or the pres-
sure transmitter 5.
By installing an orifice plate the separator throughput can be monitored.
Fig. 105
A Product feed line

B Product discharge line
1 Pressure gauge
2 Orifice plate
3 Orifice plate
4 Flow indicator (option – for control D10)
5 Pressure transmitter (option – for control E40)
6 3/2-way valve
ATTENTION! Before starting up the separator check that the following

parts are installed:
• Select the orifice plates from the set of plates supplied, according to the re-
Orifice plates 2 and 3
quired throughput capacity (see section 2.7).

• Install orifice plate 3 in product feed line A (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Install orifice plate 2 in product feed line B (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Remove the plug from the corresponding hole of 3/2-way valve 6.

Flow indicator 4 (option – for control D10)
• Secure the thread of flowmeter 4 with Loctite 245.

• Install flowmeter 4 into 3/2-way valve 6.
®
Westfalia Separator
104 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Remove the plug from the corresponding hole of 3/2-way valve 6.

Pressure transmitter 5 (option – for control E40)
• Fit pressure transmitter 5 in the 3/2-way valve 6 and connect to the control
unit in accordance with the order-specific circuit diagram. The circuit diagram
is kept inside the control cabinet.
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates

Installation of the orifice plates is explained here for product feed line B for ex-
ample.
Required material:
– Open ended wrench
– Lubricating grease
• Unscrew corrugated hose 3.

• Insert the selected orifice plate 2 into
connection piece 1 and press in
evenly, by hand.
Fig. 106
• Slightly grease the threaded area of
• Insert corrugated hose 3 and firmly

connection piece 1
tighten with hexagon nut 2.
Fig. 107
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 105
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication
• Special care must be taken when performing maintenance and lubrication

operations.
Conscientiously performed maintenance and lubrication operations improve
the service life of the separator.
• In the case of accessories (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve
block etc.) the manufacturer’s maintenance and lubrication instructions must
be observed.
• Maintenance and repair work may be carried out only by persons
– who are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings
and training.
– who are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
• Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
ATTENTION!
The following maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only for normal operating
conditions.
Negative operating conditions (e.g. low-grade fuel, excessively high temperature, strong vibrations,
frequent starting and stopping of the separator etc.) can necessitate shorter maintenance intervals.
To assure correct functioning and operating safety,

• in case of non-routine shut-down, see section 3.7 - manual operation.
• Pay attention to the following points during servicing:
– Oil level – Current consumption
– Temperatures – Starting time
– Pressures – Hoses and hose pipes (see 4.3.2)
– Leakage – Pipe joints
– Vibrations
• Before every assembly, grease the main components of the bowl at guide and contact surfaces (see section 4.3.4 -
lubrication schedule).
• in the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and in power plants, the
condition of the clutch shoes must be checked more often than stated in this schedule. It is not possible to state a defini-
tive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1000 operating hours or after 2 months at the latest.
• We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service specialist once a year.
®
Westfalia Separator
106 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Fig. 108 Set of spare parts "bowl/hood“ (operation: 1 year or 8000 hours)
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 107
Commissioning date:
(to be filled in by user)
Maintenance work Remark

– After 4000 operating hours – after 6 months at the latest
– After 12,000 operating hours – after 1 ½ years at the latest
• Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.
• Clean the bowl and centripetal pump parts and check for
Bowl inspection
• Clean all holes, nozzles and chambers of the hydraulic

corrosion and erosion.
• The cones of bowl and spindle must be clean and dry

system.
• Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“

when fitting.
Replace gaskets (see accompanying illustration).
(Operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours).
See spare parts list.
Important: Time-consuming installation!
Only replace polyamide gasket 100 if damaged (see section
4.4.9)!
Check the motor. • See instructions of motor manufacturer
• See section 4.3.3 - oil quality and oil change.

Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required)
When using mineral oil:
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4.
system on the self-cleaning separator.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
water feed and rinse with water.
Check the functionality of the non-return valve.
Carefully clean the water detector (if installed) with a soft
cloth, use diesel oil if necessary.
Clean the sight glass/glasses in the frame for observation
of the drive belt.
Check the hoses and hose pipes and replace when neces-
sary.
Clean the filter in the suction line of the product feed pump
(option).
®
Westfalia Separator
108 2064-9001-001 / 1010
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 109

– After 8000 operating hours – after 1 year at the latest
– After 24,000 operating hours – after 3 years at the latest
Bowl inspection • Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.


system.
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
ure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).

See parts list.
Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged (see
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Check grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and re- • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace vibration absorber.
place if necessary. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).

Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when See parts list.
h smaller than 18 mm.
• See instructions of motor manufacturer

New condition of clutch shoe h = 26 mm
Check the motor.
(2)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil
(2)
• See section 4.7.1.

When using synthetic oil
Check the bowl height.
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
In case of direct current:
Check the spindle speed (bowl).
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4
water feed and rinse with water.

Carefully clean the water detector (if provided) with a soft
Clean the sight glass(es) in the frame for observing the
drive belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change
®
Westfalia Separator
110 2064-9001-001 / 1010
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 111

Bowl inspection • Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.


system.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide strips (see • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
adjacent figure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).

See parts list.
Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged (see
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Replace vibration absorber.
Replace grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch.
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when
h smaller than 18 mm.
• See instructions of motor manufacturer

New condition of clutch shoe h = 26 mm
Check the motor.
(2)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil
(2)

When using synthetic oil
Check the bowl height.
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
In case of direct current:
• Check only after drive replacement.
In case of three-phase current:
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4
operating water feed.

Carefully clean the water detector (if provided) with a soft
Clean the sight glass(es) in the frame for observing the
drive belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change
®
Westfalia Separator
112 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Maintenance work
Equip the separator with new vibration isolators.

We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service engineer.
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes

Replace hose pipes when an inspection reveals one or more of the following de-
fects:
• Damage of the outer layer down to the fabric (e. g. chafe marks, cuts or
cracks).
• Leaky spots.
• Damage to or deformation of the hose fittings.
– Slight surface damage is not a reason for replacement.
• The hose becomes dislodged from the fitting.
• Corrosion of the fitting diminishing function and strength.
Protective hose 1
• Fit the protective hoses at all contact

points to the separator.
• Adapt the length of the protective

hose.
Fig. 111
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 113
4.3.3 Lubrication
The spindle bearings are splash-lubricated from a central oil bath.
MOTOR BEARINGS
For re-greasing the motor bearings, refer to the instructions of the motor manu-
facturer.
OIL QUALITY (mineral oil)

The mineral gear oil tested by Westfalia Separator with the designation "Separa-
tor lube oil CLP 100" meets the requirements and should preferably be used.
Designation according to DIN

51502 CLP
100
Designation as per ISO 3498 CC 100
Viscosity class SAE 30
o o 2
Viscosity (at 40 C/104 F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litres)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
The viscosity class SAE 30 covers a larger viscosity range than specified here.
However, only oils with the viscosity range specified here may be used.
OIL QUALITY (synthetic oil)

Use the synthetic lube oil tested by Westfalia Separator AG!
Viscosity class (ISO) VG 68

Viscosity
o o 2
– at 40 C (104 F) 65 mm /s
o o 2
– at 100 C (212 F) 10,4 mm /s
Viscosity index (VI) 147
o o
Density (at 15 C/59 F) 0.857 g/ml
based on Polyalphaolefin
Part Number 0015-0020-010 (1 litre)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
®
Westfalia Separator
114 2064-9001-001 / 1010
OIL QUANTITY
IMPORTANT: Do not forget to top up the oil in good time!
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis-
sioning the separator.
• Unscrew the screw plug and
• fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity approx. 2.5 litres
Fig. 112
Oil level
• Check the oil level only when the

IMPORTANT:
• The oil level must never drop below

separator is at standstill.
the lower third of the sight glass dur-

ing operation.
1 Maximum oil level

2 Minimum oil level
Fig. 113
Minimum oil level approx. up to lower third of sight glass

(at separator standstill)
Maximum oil level up to middle of sight glass
(at separator standstill)
OIL CHECK
• Check the oil level every week!
• From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is water
in the oil bath. When the oil exhibits a milky colouring (emulsification), the oil
must be changed immediately.
OIL CHANGE
• Change oil after about
– 4000 operating hours or 6 months at the latest (mineral oil).
– 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
• Clean sight glass.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 115
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
116 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart
Fig. 114 Lubrication schedule
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 117
Lubricant Lubrication frequency

Lubricat- Amount of
after Lubrication point
ing point lubricant
Designation Designation operating per year
hours
CLP
100
Lube oil DIN 51502 3

4 000 2x 2 500 cm Drive chamber
(mineral)
1
CC 100
ISO 3498
Lube oil 3
ISO VG 68 8 000 1x 2 500 cm Drive chamber
(synthetic)
2 according to instructions of motor manufacturer Motor bearings
Threads and sliding sur-

3 2x
faces of bowl
Lubricating see
as required apply sparingly
grease parts list
4 1x Threads of fittings
• Check oil level regularly through sight glass.

• Manual lubrication
• Refer to lube oil table (see section 4.3.5):
®
Westfalia Separator
118 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils
Lubricating oil sorts suggested by some firms
Manufac-
Viscosity
Designation at 40 °C (104 °F)
turer
mm2/s (cSt)
Lubricating oil table
for separators in onshore and shipboard opera- BLASIA 100
tion RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator Lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
Viscosity 105
(Designation accord-
DISOLA M 3015
ing to DIN 51502)
MONTANOL HK 100 100

Oil filling
Symbol
Kinematic
Type viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
(104 °F)
2
l mm /s (cSt) HYSPIN AWS 100
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 1 MARINE HEAVY 99
CTC 3
MTC 3 1.3 GST OIL 100
100
OTC 2 NL Gear Compound 100
OTC 3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WTC 2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
OSE 5 1
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD 2 TURBINE T 100 95
SD 1 1.3
SSD 2 EXX-MAR XP 110
TSD 2 NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
ESD 18 GULF HARMONY 100 95

GSC 15 VERITAS 30 110
OSD 6 CLP 90 to 110 0015-0003-080
OSD 18 2.5 100 (2.5 l) HIDRAOIL HD 70 95
WSD 8
WSD 18
OSE 10 MOBILGARD 312 106
OSE 20
GADINIA 30 104
GSC 25 ROTELLA MX SAE 30 105
OSD 20
OSD 25
OSD 30 3.7 HYDRA WAY HMA 100
100
OSD 35 LOAD WAY EP 100
SD 30
WSD 35
OSE 40 DORO AR SAE 30 119
OSD 50 TARO XD SAE 30 105
OSD 60
OSD 80
5.0
SD 50
WSD 60
OSE 80
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 119
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from GEA Westfalia Separator
Faultless functioning of separators very much depends on the proper type of lubricating oil used, since a
high grade oil, selected to meet all service requirements, will minimize the wear, thus extending the ser-
vice life and increasing the operating safety.
For the lubrication of our separators we recommend to use the oils specified by us since continuous qual-
ity checks are performed by GEA Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected
to these tests.
Therefore, GEA Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
Be sure to select only high grade solvent refined products.
The specified oil types meet the requirements according to DIN. Under unfavourable operating condi-
tions, e.g. high temperatures, the quality of the oils may be insufficient so that more efficient oils, e.g.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult GEA Westfalia Separator.
For the different separator types and oil types the viscosity ranges are specified in the table of lubricating
oils.
The operating temperature of the separator exceeds normally 80 oC (176 oF). At those temperatures
some oils age quickly, so that they have to be changed prematurely.
Be sure not to use lubricating oils with viscosities lower than those specified in the table. Due to the pos-
sibility of the oil film breaking down, oil of too low a viscosity will give insufficient lubrication, resulting in
increased wear. However, oils with a slightly higher viscosity than specified may be used.
Bear in mind that the viscosity groups SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Automotive Engineers)
cover larger viscosity ranges and be sure to select lubricating oils with viscosities not lower than the
minimum values of the viscosity ranges restricted for the different separator types.
®
Westfalia Separator
120 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.4 Bowl
Fig. 115 Exploded view of the bowl and centripetal pump
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 121
Pos. Designation Dimensions
20 (1) Bowl bottom, compl.

30 Gasket
40 Piston guide ring
50 (2) Water chamber bottom
60 Gasket
70 Gasket
80 Allen screw ISO 4762 – M 8 x 16 – A4-80
90 Annular piston
100 Gasket
110 Gasket
120 Closing chamber bottom
130 Gasket
140 Gasket
150 Gasket
180 Sliding piston
200 Gasket
210 (1) Distributor
220 Disk stack, complete

230 Separating disk
240 (1) Bowl top
250 Gasket
260 Gasket
290 Threaded pin ISO 4026 - M 10 x 10 -1.4571
310 Gasket
320 Centripetal pump chamber
cover
330 Centripetal pump chamber
cover
340 Lock ring
350 Spindle screw:
360 Gasket
510 Centripetal pump, compl.
520 Gasket
530 Sensing liquid pump
540 Gasket
550 Spacer ring
560 Gasket
570 Gasket
(1) IMPORTANT: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!

The complete bowl must be re-balanced in one of our authorized workshops or in the manufacturer’s plant.
(2) IMPORTANT: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!
A vibration check must be carried out on the machine by a WS service specialist.
®
Westfalia Separator
122 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl

still.


sight glass..
no longer moving.
Fig. 116



still.
separator!

o



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
only.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 123
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

– precise positioning,
– no diagonal pull!
– selecting the low lifting speed of the hoist.
• Use suitably rated, intact hoists.

CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

• Use tools only for their intended use!

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged, complete tools!
– For special tools, see section 4.14 or spare parts catalog.

– For standard tools, see section 4.13.
• Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.
• Treat all bowl parts

– gently.
– Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance!
• Do not interchange parts from different bowls.

If an installation is equipped with several separators:
The bowl parts are marked with the serial number of the machine or the last
three digits of the serial number.
• Certain bowl parts (see sect. 4.4)

CAUTION:
may be pre-assembled and bal-

anced only by specialists from
Westfalia Separator or in work-
shops authorized by Westfalia
Separator.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
Fig. 117
®
Westfalia Separator
124 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Hinging up the hood
• Unscrew filling and displacement

water line 1.
Fig. 118
• Unscrew handle connection piece 1

by lightly hammering with a mallet
• hold the centripetal pump with offset

(left-hand thread); at the same time
screwdriver 2.
Fig. 119
• Remove handle connection piece 1.
Fig. 120
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 125
• Unscrew three hex head screws with

their washers.
Fig. 121
• Hinge up the hood.
CAUTION: Danger of injury by in-
• The stirrup must register properly.

correct hinging up of the hood!
Fig. 122
If necessary (see section 4.3.1):

• Take gasket 1 out of the upper sec-
tion of the frame.
Fig. 123
®
Westfalia Separator
126 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Removing the centripetal pump
Required special tool

– Double hook wrench
• Loosen the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring using the double hook
wrench (left-hand thread) and re-
move it.
Fig. 124
• Screw handle connection piece into

the centripetal pump (left-hand
thread).
• Remove the complete centripetal
pump together with the centripetal
pump chamber covers.
Fig. 125

– Pressure piece 1
• Insert pressure piece 1 into spacer

ring 2.
• Pull off spacer ring 2 with fitted gas-
kets with the aid of a commercial
puller.
Fig. 126
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 127
• Remove the following parts if nec-

essary:
– centripetal pump chamber cover
1,
– sensing liquid pump 2 with in-
serted gaskets,
– centripetal pump chamber cover 4
with gaskets 3 and 5,
– centripetal pump 6 with inserted
gasket.
Fig. 127
Lifting out the bowl

– Socket wrench 1
• Unscrew the spindle screw (with

inserted gasket) with socket wrench
1 and a commercially available rat-
chet wrench (left-hand thread) and
remove it.
Fig. 128

– Eye bolt 1
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, hexagon

nuts, and bolt.
CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using
undamaged and complete tools!
The ring nut and the upper hexagon
nut must always be screwed into the
bolt and be secured with Loctite 275.
Fig. 129
®
Westfalia Separator
128 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Unscrew hexagon nut 2.

• Screw eye bolt 1 into the bowl bot-
tom.
• Press off the bowl from the spindle
cone by at least 10 mm.
Fig. 130
• CAUTION: Danger to life when

transporting heavy parts!
• Lift the bowl out of the frame with

• Set the bowl down on a rubber mat

the aid of a hoist.
or a wooden pallet for further dis-

mantling.
Fig. 131
Compressing the disk stack
Required special tools

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
– Bell-shaped piece 3
• Grease the contact surface of bell-
• Place bell-shaped piece 3 on the

shaped piece 3 (see chapter 4.3.4).
• Unscrew hexagon nut 2

bowl top.

tom.
Fig. 132
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 129
• Compress the disk stack firmly.

– Screw tight hexagon nut 1.
Fig. 133
Lifting off the bowl top
• Unscrew two threaded pins out of

the bowl top with a screwdriver.
Fig. 134

– ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
Fig. 135
®
Westfalia Separator
130 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• The O-marks of the bowl top and of

Important:
the bowl bottom must be visible.

– Do NOT hide them under ring
• The arrow and the "open" mark must

spanner 1!
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.

• Screw in two hex head screws 2 of
the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
Fig. 136
• CAUTION: Danger of injury

through rotating lever!
– Be careful when working in the
area around the lever.
• ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

point of impact A!
• Strike open the bowl top with a mal-

let (left-hand thread) and unscrew
it.
Fig. 137
• Remove eye bolt, bell-shaped piece,

and ring spanner.
Fig. 138
• Lift off the bowl top with fitted

gaskets by hand.
Fig. 139
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 131
Removing the separating disk
• Remove the Separating disk from

the distributor neck.
Fig. 140
Removing the disk stack and the distributor
• Remove the disks out of the distribu-

tor, one by one or group-wise.
Fig. 141
• Remove the distributor.
Fig. 142
®
Westfalia Separator
132 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Removing the sliding piston
• Insert the spindle screw into the hub.
Fig. 143

– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 144
• Assemble eye bolt 1 and bell-

shaped piece 2:
– Screw eye bolt 1 into bell-shaped
piece 2
– Screw eye bolt 1 into hexagon nut
3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 145
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 133
• Grease the thread of sliding piston 1
• Screw the bell-shaped piece with

(see chapter 4.3.4).
fitted eye bolt into the thread of the

sliding piston.
Fig. 146

– Socket wrench 1
• Press off the sliding piston from the

bowl bottom by turning the socket
wrench clockwise.
Fig. 147
• Remove the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) with bell-shaped piece and
• Remove the bell-shaped piece and

eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 148
®
Westfalia Separator
134 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Removing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom

– Socket wrench 1
• Unscrew the Allen screws holding

the bowl bottom and the closing-
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 149

– Eye bolt 1
– Assembling device 3
Fig. 150

shaped piece 2:
piece 2
– Screw eye bolts 1 into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 151
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 135
• Place the bell-shaped piece with
• Fit assembling device 3 onto the

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws 4 using

bell-shaped piece.
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks 5 of the assembling

and socket).
device towards the periphery, under
• Make sure that disks 5 are properly

the rim of annular piston 6.
positioned in the mounting groove of
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 4.

Fig. 152
the annular piston.
• Force off closing chamber bottom 3

together with annular piston 4 by
turning wrench 5 clockwise.
Fig. 153
• Remove closing chamber bottom 3

and annular piston 4 (with fitted
gaskets) with the bell-shaped piece

and the eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 154
• Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

ing chamber bottom 2 by tapping
with a mallet – as illustrated.
Fig. 155
®
Westfalia Separator
136 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Unscrew spindle screw 1.
Fig. 156
• Remove gasket 1 and piston guide

If necessary:
ring 2.
Fig. 157
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 137
Removing the water chamber bottom

– Socket wrench 1
• Turn bow bottom through 180 (up-

o
side down).
• Unscrew four Allen screws 2 from
water chamber bottom 3.
Fig. 158
• Force off water chamber bottom 1

with a screwdriver and remove it
with inserted gaskets.
Fig. 159
®
Westfalia Separator
138 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl

It is generally not necessary to dismantle self-cleaning bowls for cleaning after
separation unless
– the nature of the product makes it necessary,
– the separator is to be shut down for a lengthy period (see section 4.9).
• Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time. See section
4.3.1 - Maintenance schedule.
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.
• Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
• For cleaning the individual disks and bowl parts

Do not use metal scrapers and metal brushes!
• Take the gaskets out of the bowl

parts.
• Clean the grooves and gaskets to
avoid corrosion in the grooves.
• Replace damaged, very swollen,
hardened or brittle gaskets immedi-
ately.
Fig. 160
• Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
particular care to ensure trouble-free bowl ejections.
• Clean the distributor between the

ribs with the brush on the inside and
outside.
When the distributor neck is very
dirty, the feed clogs which can
cause overflow.
Fig. 161
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl
parts after drying (see 4.3.4 Lubrication schedule).
• Reassemble the bowl immediately after cleaning!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 139
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.

CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

ATTENTION!
Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.

• Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
• Clean the inside of the upper section of the frame from time to time:
To do this:
– Refer to the maintenance schedule (section 4.3.1),
– dismantle the bowl (section 4.4.1).
ATTENTION: Escaping cleaning

liquid!
When the bowl has been removed, no
cleaning liquid must spill onto the
drive belt via the spindle.
• Make sure that protective cap 2 and
spindle cap 1 with inserted gasket
are installed.
Fig. 162
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system
• The strainer and the operating water feeding system must be cleaned de-
pending on the quality of the operating water and overall load. See section
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
• Use citric acid in case of furring.
• Thoroughly clean the parts with water.
Replacing or cleaning the filter element


o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F) ).
®
Westfalia Separator
140 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Undo screw 1 (jaw span 22) with

fitted gasket 2.
• Remove filter element 3.
• Clean or replace filter element 3.
– Use citric acid in case of furring.
– Thoroughly clean the parts with
water.
Fig. 163
• Fit the cleaned or new filter element 3.

IMPORTANT: Cooper strip to the inside!
• Firmly screw in screw 1 with fitted gasket 2 so that it seals well.
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.

CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!
• Keep the motor clean as specified in the manual.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 141
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl

When the bowl has not been correctly assembled or is inadequately cleaned,
forces can be produced in the high-speed rotating bowl which endanger the
operating safety of the separator!
Therefore, the cleaning instructions (section 4.4.2) and assembling instructions
(section 4.4.7) must be exactly followed.
P a y p a rtic u lar atte ntio n to th e fo llowin g:
• Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
ATTENTION!
faces of the bowl are clean.

• Grease the guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one an-
• Locking devices and alignment

other.
marks must be in perfect condition.

IMP ORTANT:
The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 164
• When fitting the bowl parts, make

sure that the "O" marks on all parts
are aligned.
(Only then will the parts fit correctly
over arresting pins and guide ribs).
Fig. 165
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by



®
Westfalia Separator
142 2064-9001-001 / 1010


• If the plant has several separators,

be sure not to interchange parts of

different bowls.
The parts are marked
– with the serial number or
– the last three digits of the serial
number.
Fig. 166
• Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowl parts
and apply a thin coat of grease.
• After fitting check that
– the gaskets are not twisted,
– the gaskets are evenly positioned
in the groove.
Fig. 167
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 143
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl
• Pay special attention to sections “Safety”, 4.4.2 and 4.4.6

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.4 - exploded view.
Installing the water chamber bottom

– Socket wrench 4
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

grooves of the water chamber bot-
tom.
• Turn bow bottom through 180 (up-
o
side down).
• Place water chamber bottom 3 on
the bowl bottom.
– The O marks of the bowl bottom
and the water chamber bottom
must be aligned.
• Screw in the four Allen screws 5
holding the water chamber bottom
and bowl bottom together tight.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 168
Installing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom
• Grease guide surfaces as specified

in the lubrication schedule (see
• Insert gasket 1 and piston guide

4.3.4).
ring 2 into the grooves of the bowl

bottom.
Fig. 169
®
Westfalia Separator
144 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• For replacing the polyamide gasket

1 see section 4.4.9.
• Place gasket 2 into the groove of the
annular piston and press in evenly
and firmly.
4.3.4).
Fig. 170
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 171

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 172
• Turn sliding piston 3 through 180

o
• Place sliding piston 3, bell-shaped

(upside down).
piece 2 and eye bolt 1 on the annu-

lar piston.
Fig. 173
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 145
• Press the annular piston 1 into the

bowl bottom by turning hexagon nut
2 clockwise with the wrench.
• Remove special tools and sliding

piston.
Fig. 174

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 175
• Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
– The O marks of the closing cham-
ber bottom and the bowl bottom
must be aligned.
Fig. 176
• Fasten closing chamber bottom 1

onto the bowl bottom by tightening
Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 177
®
Westfalia Separator
146 2064-9001-001 / 1010

– Socket wrench 1
• Screw tight the Allen screws holding

the closing chamber bottom and the
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 178
• Make sure that piston guide ring 1 is

firmly located in the groove.
Fig. 179
Installing the sliding piston
• Insert the gasket in the groove of the

sliding piston.
4.3.4).
Fig. 180
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 147

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 181
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, hexagon nuts, and bolt.

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged and complete tools!
– The ring nut and the upper hexagon nut must always be screwed into the bolt
and be secured with Loctite 275.
• Grease thread 1 of the sliding piston
• Screw bell-shaped piece 2 into the

(see chapter 4.3.4).
thread of the sliding piston.
Fig. 182
• Install the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) into the bowl bottom, with
• Screw the eye bolt into the bowl

screwed-in bell-shaped insert.
bottom through the bell-shaped
• Press the sliding piston into its seat,

piece.
as far as it will go, by turning hexa-

gon nut 1 clockwise with an open-

ended wrench.
the eye bolt.

Fig. 183
®
Westfalia Separator
148 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Installing the distributor and the disk stack
• Insert the distributor into the sliding

piston.
– Pay attention to correct position-
ing.
– The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 184
ATTENTION: Pay attention for cor-

rect total number of disks!
It is marked on the blind disk, e.g.
84/1:
– Total number of disks A and B = 84
(number of disks with spacers A +
number of blind disks B)
– Number of blind disks B = 1
Fig. 185
ATTENTION: The last disks must be

properly located in the guide ribs of
the distributor!
• Carefully stack the disks on the dis-

tributor neck, one by one or group-
wise .
Fig. 186
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 149
Fitting the separating disk
• Mount the separating disk.

ing!
– The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 187
• Slightly compress the disk stack with

the bell-shaped piece and the eye
bolt.
Fig. 188
Installing the bowl top
• Thoroughly clean the grooves for

gaskets 1 and 2 in the bowl top.
• Check gaskets 1 and 2:
– replace when damaged,
– install if missing.
• Check the inserted gasket 3.
– replace when damaged,
– For replacing the polyamide gas-
ket 3 see section 4.4.8.
Fig. 189
®
Westfalia Separator
150 2064-9001-001 / 1010
ATTENTION: Prevent seizing of
• The following parts must be carefully

threads!
cleaned, wiped dry and greased in

accordance with the lubrication
schedule (see 4.3.4).
– threads and guide surfaces of
bowl bottom and bowl top
– contact surfaces of bowl top and
sliding piston
Fig. 190

– ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
• If threaded pins are screwed into the

Important:
bowl top, undo them with a screw-
• The O mark of the bowl top must be

driver.
visible.
– Do NOT hide them under ring
Fig. 191
• The arrow and the "open" mark must

spanner 1!
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.
– Screw in two hex head screws 2 of the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
• Screw the bowl top by hand into the

bowl bottom as far as it will go (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 192
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 151
Compressing the disk stack
• Compress the disk stack firmly.

– Screw tight hexagon nut 1.
Fig. 193
• Compress the disk stack again and

• Screw in the bowl top using the ring
spanner (left-hand thread).
Fig. 194
• CAUTION: Danger of injury

through rotating lever!
– Be careful when working in the
area around the lever.

point of impact A!
CAUTION:
• Strike the bowl top with a mallet until

A loose bowl top can endanger life!
the "O" mark is reached (left-hand

thread).
Fig. 195
®
Westfalia Separator
152 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Remove eye bolt, bell-shaped piece,

and ring spanner.
Fig. 196
• Screw in two threaded pins using a

screwdriver.
Fig. 197
Installing the complete bowl and the centripetal pump
• Clean and wipe dry the spindle

cone with a suitable cloth.
ATTENTION: Do not grease the
conical parts!
Fig. 198
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 153

– Eye bolt 1

tom.
Fig. 199
• Turn bowl through 90 (opposite the

o
fitting position).
• Clean the bowl hub with a suitable
cloth.
ATTENTION: Do not grease the
bowl hub!
Fig. 200

• Carefully place the bowl using eye

• Unscrew the eye bolt from the bowl

bolt and hoist on the spindle cone.
bottom and remove the hoist.
Fig. 201
Required tools
– Socket wrench
– Torque wrench
• Provide spindle screw 2 with gasket

1.
• Put spindle screw into socket
wrench and screw in (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 202
®
Westfalia Separator
154 2064-9001-001 / 1010
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
• Tighten spindle screw.

Torque: 50 Nm
Fig. 203
• Check that the spindle and bowl are

centric.
The control dimension B
– is 4 ±1.5 mm
– between the bowl and the upper
• Pay attention to bowl height A (see

section 4.7.1.
Fig. 204
• Insert gasket 1 in the centripetal

pump groove.
• Lightly grease threads and contact
surfaces of the centripetal pump.
• Install centripetal pump 2.
Fig. 205

grooves of the centripetal pump
chamber cover.
Fig. 206
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 155
• Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover with fitted gaskets.
– The “O” marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 207
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the sensing

liquid pump grooves.
• Grease guide surfaces.
• Install sensing liquid pump.
Fig. 208
• Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover.
– The “O” marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 209

– Double hook wrench
• Grease the threads on the bowl top

and on the centripetal pump cham-
ber lock ring as specified in the Lu-
brication schedule (see 4.3.4).
CAUTION:
A loose centripetal pump chamber
• Screw tight the centripetal pump

lock ring can endanger life!
chamber lock ring using the double

Fig. 210 hook wrench (left-hand thread).
®
Westfalia Separator
156 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in spacer

ring.
• Grease the guide surfaces of the
centripetal pump as specified in the
lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
• Fit spacer ring.
Fig. 211
• Pay attention to section 4.7.1.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 157
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL
ATTENTION: Sensitive bowl part!
– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approx. 50 to
60 mm.
Fig. 212

– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when screwing in!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 213
Note:
If the polyamide gasket can’t be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
• Heat the gasket in approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
o
• Wipe dry the gasket.
• Fit the gasket into the groove of the

bowl top (with the narrow side facing
• Place on a smooth wooden block.

the bowl top).
• hammer the gasket evenly into the

groove.
Fig. 214
®
Westfalia Separator
158 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Assemble the bowl and centripetal pump and fit in the separator (see section
4.4.7 "Assembling the bowl".
• Close the hood (see section 4.5 “Closing the hood”).
• Start the separator (see section 3.3 “Starting the separator”).
ATTENTION! Do not start the program!
• Start the program.

Only after a running time of 30 minutes
This running time must be adhered to so that the polyamide gasket is pressed
properly into the bowl top.
• switch on the separator motor by pressing the start key.

If the separator is switched off by the program,
• Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (section
4.1.3) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
Note:
The run-up phase of the separator motor is signalled by slow flashing of the
LED in the “Status Separator” key.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 159
4.4.9 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged.
• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL

– Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approx. 50 to
60 mm.
Fig. 215

– Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when screwing in!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 216
Note:
If the polyamide gasket can’t be removed, repeat this procedure.
®
Westfalia Separator
160 2064-9001-001 / 1010
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the

groove.
• Heat the new polyamide gasket in
o
approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5
minutes.
• Wipe the gasket dry and press it
evenly and firmly into the groove, at
four opposite points
Fig. 217
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 218

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 219
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 161
• Turn sliding piston 3 through 180

o
• Place sliding piston 3, bell-shaped

(upside down).
piece 2 and eye bolt 1 on the annu-

lar piston.
Fig. 220
• Press the annular piston 1 into the

bowl bottom by turning hexagon nut
2 clockwise with the wrench.
• Remove special tools and sliding

piston.
Fig. 221

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 222
• Clamp mounting ring 1 under the rim

of the closing chamber bottom.
Fig. 223
®
Westfalia Separator
162 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
– The O marks of the closing cham-
ber bottom and the bowl bottom
must be aligned.
Fig. 224
• Fasten closing chamber bottom 1

onto the bowl bottom by tightening
Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 225

– Socket wrench 1
• Screw tight the Allen screws holding

the closing chamber bottom and the
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 226
• Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 227
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 163
• Unscrew the Allen screws holding

the bowl bottom and the closing-
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 228

– Eye bolt 1
– Assembling device 3
Fig. 229

shaped piece 2:
piece 2
– Screw eye bolts 1 into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 230
• Place the bell-shaped piece with
• Fit assembling device 3 onto the

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws 4 using

bell-shaped piece.
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks 5 of the assembling

and socket).
device towards the periphery, under
• Make sure that disks 5 are properly

the rim of annular piston 6.
positioned in the mounting groove of
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 4.

Fig. 231
the annular piston.
®
Westfalia Separator
164 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Force off closing chamber bottom 3

together with annular piston 4 by
turning wrench 5 clockwise.
Fig. 232
• Remove closing chamber bottom 3

and annular piston 4 (with fitted gas-
kets) with the bell-shaped piece and

the eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 233
• Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

ing chamber bottom 2 by tapping
with a mallet – as illustrated.
• Remove the mounting ring.
Fig. 234
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 165
• Unscrew the spindle screw.
Fig. 235
• By carrying out several measure-

ments around the entire circumfer-
ence of the annular piston, check
that the polyamide gasket is seated
parallel in the groove.
Fig. 236
®
Westfalia Separator
166 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston
• the sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 237) (Sealing surface A as de-
The bowl seal consists of
• the polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 239).

livered 2 mm high) and
When worn, the sealing surface A of

the sliding piston can be remachined
up to max. 0.5 mm several times be-
fore it has to be replaced.
When the first erosion marks (0.2

mm deep) are detected, i.e. as soon
• Remachine the sealing surface of

as the bowl starts to leak:
the sliding piston.
Fig. 237
• When remachining, make sure that

– the sealing surface is machined
cleanly and
– shoulder H at diameter X is still at
least 1.5 mm high.
Fig. 238
Standard parameters for remachining the sealing surface

Surface quality Ra 2 µm (Rz 12.5 µm)
Tool Hard metal steel of ISO quality M 30 or K 20
-1
Speed 55 min
Cutting depth max. 0.15 mm
Forward feed max. 0.1 mm/revolution
• fit a new polymide gasket B into the

After facing
bowl top (see section 4.4.8)!
Fig. 239
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 167
4.5 Closing the hood
If the gasket has been removed to
• insert a new gasket 1 in the groove

keep to the service intervals:
of the upper part of the frame.
Fig. 240
CAUTION: Danger of injury!

• Unlock the shackle.
• Carefully close the hood.
Fig. 241
• Screw in three hex head screws (M

12 x 30) with washers.
Fig. 242
®
Westfalia Separator
168 2064-9001-001 / 1010
If the gaskets 2 have been removed
• Provide handle connection piece 1

to keep to the service intervals:
with new gaskets 2.
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the

guide surfaces and threads of the
handle connection piece as speci-
fied in the lubrication schedule (see
4.3.4).
Fig. 243

– Offset screwdriver 2
• Introduce handle connection piece 1
• Hold the centripetal pump with the

into the hood.
offset screwdriver and tighten it by

lightly hammering the handle con-
nection piece with a mallet (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 244
• Carefully clean the holes in the non-
• rinse with water.

return valve and
• Check the functionality of the non-

return valve.
Fig. 245
• Assemble the filling and displace-

ment water line 1 and connect it.
Fig. 246
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 169
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
170 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6 Drive
Fig. 247 Exploded view of the drive
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 171
Pos. Designation Dimensions
1 Retaining ring 95 x 3
3 Clutch pulley
4 Grooved ball bearing
5 Spacer bush
8 Clutch driver
9 Clutch shoe
10 Washer 13 x 33 x 3
11 Hex head screw M 11 x 60
12 Washer
14 Drive belt
15 Spindle
17 Bearing cover
18 Bearing cover
20 Retaining ring 35 x 1,5
21 Ball bearing protection ring
22 Angular contact ball bearing
23 Bearing sleeve
24 Gasket
25 Rubber-metal cushion
26 Pivoting bearing
28 Gasket
29 Cup spring
30 Bearing cover
31 Washer
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loc-
tite 275.)
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loctite
275.)
®
Westfalia Separator
172 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive

still.


sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 248



still.
separator!

o



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
only.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 173
• Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by





• Treat all drive parts
– gently.
– Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
ATTENTION: Before fitting the drive parts

• Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch.
Use only the ball bearings specified in the parts list!
• always operate the separator with installed bowl!

ATTENTION: To avoid bearing damage,
®
Westfalia Separator
174 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly
• Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.
• Undo the oil drain screw and

• Drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
2.5 l).
Fig. 249
• Undo three hex head screws 1.

• Take off cover 2.
Fig. 250
• Unscrew four hex head screws 1.
Fig. 251
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 175
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
5 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-

ATTENTION!
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 252
• Lift the motor with centrifugal clutch

out of the lower section of frame.
Fig. 253
Remove the operating water feeding

device in the upper section of
• Undo nut 2.
frame:
• Take off pipe 3.
Fig. 254
• Remove spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 255
®
Westfalia Separator
176 2064-9001-001 / 1010

• Remove ring 2 and protective cap 3
with inserted gasket 4.
Fig. 256
Removing the speed monitoring
• Unscrew hex head screw 1.

device:
• Take off speed monitoring device 2

and lay it down in the lower section
of frame.
Fig. 257
• Take the drive belt out of the lower

section of frame.
Fig. 258

• Unscrew spindle assembly 2 from
the lower part of the frame.
(For dismantling the spindle assem-
bly, see section 4.6.3.)
Note:
If the vibration absorber is also pulled out
• Loosen it from the spindle assembly by

of the lower section of the frame:
striking the spindle on a wooden base.
Fig. 259
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 177
• Remove from the lower part of

frame:
– Gasket 1
– Rubber-metal cushion 2
Fig. 260
If necessary:
• remove bearing cover 2 with sealed
hex head screws, disk and cup
springs 3 from the lower part of the
frame.
Fig. 261
If necessary:
• Take out gasket 1.
Fig. 262
®
Westfalia Separator
178 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly
Spindle assembly
Required tools:
– Pulling device
– Open ended wrench
– Pliers with outer snap jaws
Fig. 263
• Detach the bearing sleeve 1 from

the spindle.
Fig. 264
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 179
• Pull off from the spindle:

– Angular contact ball bearing 2:
– Ball bearing protection ring 3
Fig. 265
• Remove the retaining ring.
Fig. 266
• Pull off from the spindle:

– Grooved ball bearing 1
– bearing cover 2
– bearing cover 3
Fig. 267
®
Westfalia Separator
180 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch

• Take off cover 2.
Fig. 268
Fig. 269
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
5 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-

ATTENTION!
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 270
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 181

• Lift the motor with fluid clutch out of

the lower section of the frame.
Fig. 271
• Turn the motor together with the

o
centrifugal clutch 90 (upside down)
with the aid of the hoist.
• CAUTION: Secure from rolling
away and overturning using suit-
able aids!
Fig. 272
• Undo retaining ring 1.

• Take off disk 2.
Fig. 273
• Pull the clutch shoes out of the

clutch driver.
Fig. 274
®
Westfalia Separator
182 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an

open-ended wrench.
• Unscrew hex head screw 2 from the
motor shaft end.
• Take off disk 3.
Fig. 275
Required special tool:

– Threaded pin 2 = M 12 x 40

open-ended wrench.
ATTENTION! For protecting the mo-
• Screw threaded pin 2 into the thread

tor shaft end:
of the motor shaft end.
Fig. 276
Required special tools:

– Eye bolt 1
– Socket wrench 3

• Screw eye bolt 1 into the clutch
driver.
• Arrest the clutch driver with an open-
ended wrench.
• Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the eye
bolt clockwise.
Fig. 277
• Remove eye bolt 1 from the clutch

driver and threaded pin 2 from the
motor shaft end.
Fig. 278
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 183

• Place the clutch pulley and clutch
driver on a wooden base using
transport ropes and hoist.
able aids!
• Take the retaining ring out of the
clutch driver groove.
Fig. 279
• Position wooden block.

• Drive the clutch driver downwards
by means of light hammer blows.
• Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the two ball bearings.
Fig. 280
• Turn the clutch pulley through 90

o
(opposite the fitting position) with the

aid of the hoist.

able aids!
• Take the retaining rings out of the

clutch drum grooves.
Fig. 281
Required tools
– Disk (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180

o
• place it on wooden supports as

and
shown.
• Drive the grooved ball bearing and
spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 282
®
Westfalia Separator
184 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly

• Insert gasket 1 in the groove in the

If necessary:
lower section of frame.
Fig. 283
If necessary:
ATTENTION: Pay attention to the
correct fitting position of the cup
• Fit bearing cover 1 (with sealed hex

springs!
head screws and washer) with cup

springs 2 and bolt tight with hex
head screws 3.
Fig. 284

correct fitting position of the rub-
ber-metal cushion!
– The two opposite inner holes 2 of
the rubber-metal cushion must be
directed upwards.
• Fit rubber-metal cushion 1.
• Insert gasket 3 in the groove in the
lower section of frame.
Fig. 285
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 185
• Turn spindle through 180 (upside

o
down).

correct fitting position of the bear-
• Mount bearing covers 1 and 2.

ing cover!
• Heat grooved ball bearing 3 in oil up

o o
to 100 C (212 F) and slip it onto
the spindle.
• Insert retaining ring 4 in the spindle
groove.
Fig. 286
• Heat ball bearing protection ring 1

and angular contact ball bearings 2
o o
in oil up to 100 C (212 F).
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is

caused by incorrect fitting!
– When fitting angular contact ball
bearings 2 on the spindle, make
sure that the narrow rim of the ball
bearing inner ring faces upwards.
• Slide ball bearing protection ring 1
and angular contact ball bearings 2
Fig. 287
onto the spindle.
• Heat bearing sleeve 1 in oil up to

o o
100 C (212 F).
• Important! Before fitting bearing
sleeve 1, make sure that the in-
stalled angular contact ball bearing
has cooled down to room tempera-
ture.
• Slide bearing bush 1 over the angu-
lar contact ball bearings and the ball
bearing protection ring.
Fig. 288
• Install the assembled spindle as-

sembly 1 in the lower part of the
frame.
ing!

correct fitting position of the spin-
dle!
– The holes in the bearing cover must
be aligned with the holes in the
lower section of the frame.
Fig. 289
• Bolt tight spindle with the three hex
head screws 2.
®
Westfalia Separator
186 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch

• Clean the clutch pulley.

• Insert retaining ring 1 in the lower
groove.
• Check that retaining ring 1 is cor-
rectly fitted.
Fig. 290
Required tools:
– Disk 2 (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer

– Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
• Carefully drive the first grooved ball

bearing 1 with disk 2 up to the re-
taining ring.
Fig. 291
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 187

– Distance bush 1 may only contact
the inner ring of grooved ball bear-
ing 2!
• Place distance bush on the ball

bearing inner ring.
Fig. 292

– Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
• Carefully drive the second grooved

ball bearing 1 with a suitable disk 2
up to the distance sleeve.
Fig. 293
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance by
• Insert retaining ring 2 180 offset

incorrect fitting!
o
relative to retaining ring 1 in the up-

per groove.
Fig. 294
®
Westfalia Separator
188 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Required tool:
– Disk 1 (Ø 61 – 69 mm)

• Turn clutch pulley with fitted grooved

o
ball bearings through 180 .
Fig. 295
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is caused by incorrect fitting!

– Disk 1 may only contact the inner ring of the grooved ball bearing!
• Place the ball bearing inner ring on disk 1.

correct fitting position of the dis-
tance bush!
– Distance bush 1 must be flush with
the inner rings of the grooved ball
bearings.
Fig. 296
Required tools:
– Wooden block
– Rubber hammer
• Carefully hammer the clutch driver

into the grooved ball bearing with
light blows.
Fig. 297
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 189
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180 .

o
• Fit the retaining ring in the groove of

the clutch driver.
Fig. 298

• Turn the motor through 90 with the
o
aid of the hoist.

able aids!
Fig. 299
Required tools:
– ring spanner 2
– Hex head screw 3 (M 10 x 200)
– Hexagon nut 4 (M 10)

feather key groove.
• Fit the assembled centrifugal clutch
on the motor shaft end.
open-ended wrench.
• Insert ring spanner 2 - as shown -
• Screw hex head screw 3 with hexa-

and
gon nut 4 into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 300
®
Westfalia Separator
190 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

motor shaft end as far as it will go,
by turning hexagon nut 4 with a sec-
ond open-ended wrench.
Fig. 301
• Undo hex head screw 3 together
• detach ring spanner 2.

with hexagon nut 4 and
Fig. 302
With driver 1 arrested:

• Provide hex head screw 2
(M 12 x 60) with washer 3 and
thread it into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 303

– Be sure to replace all clutch shoes
simultaneously!
Never replace individual clutch
shoes.
– Make sure that the clutch shoes are
evenly spaced!
• Fit clutch shoes.
Fig. 304
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 191
• Insert disk 2.
• Fit the retaining ring 1 in the groove
of the clutch driver.
Fig. 305
®
Westfalia Separator
192 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.7 Fitting the motor
• Carefully place the motor with pre-

assembled centrifugal clutch on
lower section of frame by means of
a hoist.
– Do not yet let the motor flange
lock into the frame opening.
Fig. 306
• Degrease the belt contact surfaces

ATTENTION:
of the spindle and clutch drum.

• Fit the drive belt:
– through upper section of frame
opening 1 and
– through brake housing opening 2
• Pay attention to correct seating of

(centrifugal clutch).
the drive belt on clutch pulley and

spindle pulley.
Fig. 307
• Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 308
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 193
• Screw hex head screw 1 (M 10 x

200) with hexagon nut 2 and washer
3 through the frame bore into the ta-
phole of the centrifugal clutch.
• ATTENTION: To avoid damage to
the grooved ball bearing:
– do not screw in hex head screw 1
all the way.
• Tension the drive belt by turning hex
head nut 2 clockwise until the mo-
tor flange locks into the frame open-
ing.
Fig. 309
• Fasten the motor with four hex head

screws 2 (M 12 x 30).
• Unscrew hex head screw 1 (with

hexagon nut and washer) from the
centrifugal clutch.
Fig. 310
• Screw in the screw plug 1.

• Remove the hoist.
Fig. 311
Note:
Due to the design concept used, the spindle is at an inclined angle relative to
the opposite side of the motor when the drive belt has not been fitted or ten-
sioned (see Fig. 312, pos. 2).
The spindle is pulled into the centric axis when the belt is tensioned (see Fig.
312, pos. 1).
®
Westfalia Separator
194 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Check
– that the spindle 1 can be turned
easily.
– whether the spindle 3 has been
pulled into the centric axis by
tensioning the drive belt 3 (see
Fig. 204).
Fig. 312
Installing the speed monitoring de-

vice:
• Place speed monitoring device 2 on
• fasten with hex head screw 1.

the lower section of frame and
Fig. 313
• Align proximity switch 1 as illu-

strated.
ATTENTION!
The distance X between the spindle
and the proximity switch must be 2.5
mm.
Fig. 314
• Insert protective cap 3 with fitted
• bolt tight with four hex head screws

gasket 4 and ring 2 and
1 (M 8 x 12).
Fig. 315
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 195
• Place spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket on the spindle.
ing!
Fig. 316
Fitting the operating water feeding

device in the upper section of
• Slide nut 2 over pipe 3.

frame:
• Fit pipe with nit into the screwed

connection 1 and slide on as far as it
will go.
ATTENTION: The narrow end of the

pipe must be directed upwards!
• Tighten nut 2 firmly.

Fig. 317
• Fit cover 2 to the lower section of

the frame with three hex head
screws 1 (M 8 x 20).
Fig. 318
• Screw in oil drain screw 1 with fitted

gasket.
• Screw in the sight glass 2.
• Fill in oil as described in section
• Screw in plug 3 with gasket.

4.3.3 and
Fig. 319
®
Westfalia Separator
196 2064-9001-001 / 1010
• Have the motor connected by an authorized electrician!

Danger to life and limb through electric current!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 197
4.7 Height adjustment
• bowl height
For reasons of operating reliability, adjustment of
• and centripetal pump play

must be performed with particular care.
4.7.1 Bowl height
ATTENTION: The bowl height must not be adjusted on this separator!

The bowl height may only be measured with fitted and tightened drive
belt!
A bowl height check is necessary, e.g.
– after replacing the drive parts,
– after fitting another bowl,
– after fitting a different centripetal pump,
– as soon as the centripetal pump exhibits grinding marks.
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
• Tighten the bowl top firmly.

– The O marks of the bowl bottom
and the bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 320
The control dimension A

– is 25 ±2 mm
– between upper edge of bowl top and
upper section of frame.
Fig. 321
If it does prove necessary to readjust the bowl height, consult the factory.
®
Westfalia Separator
198 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance
• Move the centripetal pump axially to

and fro in the centripetal pump
chamber.
• Measure the total clearance A
(approx. 10 Mm).
• Close the hood.
• Check:
– Is the hood correctly seated on
the frame rim?
– Are the hood screws tightened
firmly?
Fig. 322
• Lightly apply a thin coat of lubricant

to the threads of the centripetal
pump as specified in the lubrication
schedule.
• Fit handle connection piece 1 into
the centripetal pump.
• Hold the centripetal pump with offset
screwdriver 2.
• Screw handle connection piece into
the centripetal pump as far as it will
go (left-hand thread).
Fig. 323
• Hold the handle connection piece 1.

• Turn the offset screwdriver 2 until
the handle connection piece is
raised slightly from the hood
(approx. 0.5 mm).
Fig. 324
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 199
• Raise the handle connection piece

to its maximum.
• Measure the axial clearance.
A/2 = 4 – 6 mm
Fig. 325
®
Westfalia Separator
200 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator
Before starting the separator

Perform the following checks after assembling and before starting the separator
depending on the scope of the repair work:
Checks Section
1. Bowl height 4.7.1
2. Oil level in drive chamber 4.3.3
3. Direction of rotation of the bowl 4.1.4
4. Bowl speed 4.1.5
5. Starting time of bowl / current consumption 4.1.5
6. Running characteristics of the separator 3.8.1
7. Suction line of the product pump (if installed) for leakage
When starting the separator

Perform the following checks after carrying out repairs:
Checks Section
1. Temperature of product
2. Observe discharges for water, solids and oil to see if the 3.3
bowl is operating correctly.
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator

• Disconnect all electrical connections.
• Thoroughly clean the separator (see section 4.4.2, 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
• Dry and grease the clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts to
avoid corrosion damage.
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place until reuse.
• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, dust-free dark room to prevent them from be-
coming brittle.
• Check if the shut-off valves for water leak.
• If necessary, disconnect the water lines to prevent damage by dripping water.
4.9.1 Preserving the separator

• Drain the lube oil completely.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the lubricating oil.
• Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass.
• Let the separator run without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all
drive parts are coated with slushing oil.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 201
CAUTION!
• Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle.

Risk of injury through rotating separator parts.
• After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating.
• Take off the drive belt.
4.9.2 Preserving the motor

• Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer.
®
Westfalia Separator
202 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.10 Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the separator and control unit can dam-
age or destroy their components.
Store accessories like spare parts, tools, lubricants properly!
Note:
Gaskets, hoses and hosepipes, for example, change their physical properties in
unfavourable storage conditions. This can result in a shorter service life. They
can be rendered useless due to excessive hardening, softening, permanent de-
formation, flaking, cracks or other surface damage.
• Outdoor exposure is not admissible!

IMPORTANT:
4.10.1 After delivery
• store the separator and control unit in the original transport packaging.
If the separator and control unit are not installed immediately after delivery,
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 – 122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
possible after consulting the manufacturer.
4.10.2 Separator
The following procedure applies
– for storing the separator before commissioning and
– for storing the separator before a prolonged standstill period.
• Store the separator with dismantled bowl!

IMPORTANT:
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place.

• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, frost-free, dust-free dark room to prevent
them from becoming brittle.
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 - 122 °F)
• The separator with dismantled bowl must be stored dry and free from vibra-
tions.
(Vibrations during standstill can cause bearing damage!).
• Protect the drive spindle and motor from dust.
• Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.
4.10.3 Control system

• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
• Protect from excessive heat!
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 203
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to + 45 °C (41 – 113 °F)
4.11 Before restarting
Before re-starting, the operator must ensure

• that all separators and plant components have been function-checked
by competent personnel (qualified specialists).
• that the maintenance intervals are adhered to.
• that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.
Note:
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due to a
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table “Mainte-
long standstill period or storage),
nance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g. due
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (table
to a long standstill period or storage),
“Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
Procedure:
• Drain the slushing oil.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the slushing oil.
• Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts.
• Check gaskets.
Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately.
• Assemble the bowl (see section 4.4.7).
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
When damaged, replace the ball bearings immediately !
• Fit drive belt (see section 4.6.5 or 4.6.7).

When damaged, replace the drive belt immediately !
• Assemble the separator correctly.

• Fill the drive chamber with the specified lube oil as specified in section 4.3.3.
®
Westfalia Separator
204 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.12 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the separator has reached the end of
its service life, the operator is responsible for appropriate, environmentally
friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
– metal,
– caoutchouc and rubber
– plastics,
– glass,
– gear and lube oils on a mineral-oil basis,
– synthetic gear and lube oils,
– cleaning liquids,
– electric and electronic apparatus.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environment-protection legislation!
More information on disposal matters can be obtained from local authorities.
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils
Replacement and disposal of waste

oils recovered during the oil changes
and maintenance work must be carried
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

out carefully.
• They can be injurious to health,

of slipping or product infection.
depending on their chemical compo-
• Waste oil must be disposed of in

sition.
accordance with local regulations.
Note:
Fig. 326
Special attention must be paid to
the directive issued by the operator
on handling waste oils and the local
regulations.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 205
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids

Only those cleaning agents may be used that are specified in the overall docu-
mentation (see data sheet).
CAUTION: Danger of chemical burns!

The cleaning agents can be acids and caustics which, if used carelessly,
can cause severe damage to persons.
Note:
Pay particular attention to the directive issued by the operator on handling the
cleaning agents used and the local disposal regulations.
4.12.3 Separator
Before disposing of the separator
• Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1.
• Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and
dispose of them separately or recycle them where appropriate.
®
Westfalia Separator
206 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.13 Standard tools

are commercially available tools to be supplied by the customer.
Fig. 327
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 207
Pos. Designation
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (0 - 100 Nm)
with inserts and extension
3 Caliper gauge
4 Electric oil heater for ball bearings
5 Ratchet
with inserts and extension
6 Standard hammer and mallet
7 Inner snap pliers with offset jaws
(Ø 40 mm)
8 Outer snap pliers (Ø 35 mm)
9 Hand tachometer
10 Wrench, adjustable
11 Brushes
12 Puller (200 x 200 mm (H x W))
13 Open-ended wrench (jaw spans: 19, 32, 55 mm)
14 Wooden blocks
15 Drill
16 Drill bit (Ø 2 mm)
17 Wooden screws (max. Ø 4 mm x 50 mm length)
®
Westfalia Separator
208 2064-9001-001 / 1010
4.14 Special tools
Fig. 328
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 209
• Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

• For the delivery of special tools, the packing list supplied with the sepa-
rator is applicable.
Pos. Designation
10 Mallet
15 Complete socket wrench (spindle screw)
20 Offset screwdriver (centripetal pump)
30 Double hook wrench (centripetal pump chamber lock ring)
40 Hexagon nut M 10 (centrifugal clutch)
50 Hex head screw M 10 x 200 (centrifugal clutch)
60 Disk 11 x 27 x 2 (centrifugal clutch)
70 Eye bolt, complete (bowl / centrifugal clutch))
80 Bell-shaped piece (bowl top / disk stack / sliding piston)
90 Assembling device, complete (closing chamber bottom / annular pis-

ton)
100 Ring spanner (bowl top)
110 Mounting ring (annular piston)
120 Double nipple (transporting the separator)
130 Threaded pin M 12 x 40 (centrifugal clutch)
140 Disk (centrifugal clutch)
150 Pressure piece (centripetal pump)
®
Westfalia Separator
210 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 211
5 Spare parts
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 212

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 212
®
Westfalia Separator
212 2064-9001-001 / 1010
5.1 Spare part requirements

– safety risks,
ranty claims.
5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order
includes the following details:
• Separator model see name-plate

e.g. OSE 20-0136-067
• Serial-No. see name-plate

e.g. 9000-223
• Designation see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. frame
• Part Number see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. 2050-1100-020
The part number is also marked on almost all the
individual parts.
Only when ordering spare parts for bowls:

• Bowl S/N If this differs from the serial number.
The bowl serial number is engraved on the bowl
lock ring, bowl bottom and bowl top.
Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection parts:
• Model and number of see pump nameplate

pump
The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.
Available sets of spare parts

The following sets of spare parts are available depending on the respective
technical maintenance intervals:
– Set of spare parts “bowl and hood” for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
– Set of spare parts “Drive” for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
– Set of spare parts “Drive” for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
The maintenance schedule forms the systematic maintenance basis for the use
of these sets of spare parts.
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 213
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
214 2064-9001-001 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-001 / 1010 215
®
Westfalia Separator
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Data sheet
Description: Separator
Type: OSE 20-0136-067/18
Machine-No.: 9077-915
Order-No.: 1941846667/002000
Material-No.: 99870449871
Version: 20.03.2018
2 OSE 20-0136-067/18 | 1941846667/002000 | 20.03.2018
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
The authors are always grateful for remarks and

suggestions for improving the documentation. Remarks and
suggestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com

OSE 20-0136-067/18 | 1941846667/002000 | 20.03.2018 3
Preface to this datasheet

This datasheet contains the order-specific technical data for the centrifuge.
Non-compliance with this datasheet can not only result in danger for centrifuges,
material and the environment but also endanger persons working on or in the
vicinity of the centrifuge.
The technical data from this datasheet have sole validity!

Technical data in the centrifuge documentation which deviate from this are invalid.
 Keep the datasheet complete, close to the centrifuge and accessible to all those
working on or with the centrifuge. It must be available to these people at all
times!
Other applicable documents

The documents below apply in addition to this datasheet.
 Operating instructions for the centrifuge
 Dimensions sheet for the centrifuge
 Operating instructions for components made by other manufacturers
Abbreviations and symbols used

bar (g) bar (g = pressure)
approx. approximately (roughly)
dB (A) decibels (A)
f frequency
FU frequency converter (Frequenzumrichter)
Hz Hertz
I/O switch on/off
3
kg/dm kilogrammes per cubic decimetre
kW kilowatts
l litres
l/h litres per hour
max. maximum
min. minimum
min minute
rpm revolutions per minute
mm/s RMS millimetres per second, RMS (= Root Mean Square)
mW milliwatts
3
m /h cubic metres per hour
sec second
V volts
ºC degrees Celsius
% per cent
Y star
Δ delta

4 OSE 20-0136-067/18 | 1941846667/002000 | 20.03.2018
Centrifuge
Comments
Type OSE 20-0136-067/18
Serial no. 9077-915
Year of construction see centrifuge nameplate
Permitted bowl speed rpm 12000

3
Permitted density of feed material kg/dm 1.01 max.
3
Permitted density of heavy liquid kg/dm 1 max.
3
Permitted density of solids kg/dm 1.4 max.
3
Permitted throughput m /h -/2.4 min. / max.
Permitted temperature of feed material ºC 90/105 min. / max.
Permitted housing pressure range bar (g) / min. / max.
Run-down time without braking min 45

Run-down time without flat belt min 90
Permitted vibration velocity mm/s 7.0 max.
RMS Measuring point on
frame
Ambient temperature °C 10/50 min. / max.
Disk-stack compression bar (g) 82-112
Quantity of lubricating oil l 2.25 approx.
Ex range of centrifuge
Comments
Suitable for operation in an "Ex" area ? yes / no
Main drive motor

Comments
Design IMV1
Capacity kW 7.5
Voltage V 440 For wiring, see motor
rating plate
Frequency Hz 60
Enclosure IP55
Process data
Comments
Intended use, feed material HFO
Permitted operating pressure, light liquid bar (g) 2 Water at nominal
output
Permitted operating pressure, heavy liquid bar (g) 2 Water at nominal
output

We live our values.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and Process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

9077-915
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

9077-915
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

1941846667_02
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/59
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
1941846667 SEPARATOR OSE 20-0136-067_18 5
1941846667_02 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR OSE 20-0136-067_18 SEPARADOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n

9077-915
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
4/59 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
5/59
9987-0449-871 SEPARATOR OSE 20-0136-067_18
1941846667 SEPARATOR
1100 2064-1100-000 1 GESTELL VOLLST. 8
SEPARATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
BASTIDOR, COMP.
8800 2064-8800-000 1 HAUBE VOLLST. 25
HOOD, COMPL.
CAPÓ, COMP.
2213 2058-2213-060 1 GREIFER VOLLST. 34
CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
PINZA, COMP.
6600 2064-6600-500 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 36
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
3545 0024-3545-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
7828 5289-7828-139 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 42
Typ / Model THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
OSE 20-0136-067_18 9928 2059-9928-040 1 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 44
SET OF SHIPBOARD SCREW COUPLINGS
JUEGO RACORES DE TIPO MARINO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9902 2064-9902-550 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 46
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 2 YEARS
9077-915 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
9769 2064-9769-020 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 55
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
9901 2064-9901-000 1 SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE 57
9077-915 SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
JUEGO HERRAMIENTAS Y ACCESORIOS
2058-3002-101 1 SCHMIEROELTABELLE EN
Ausgabe / Edition 130 2058-3002-101 1 SCHMIEROELTABELLE EN
9001 2064-9001-001 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
08.03.2018 INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
9001 8555-9001-040 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
Seite/Page
9601 2058-9601-020 1 INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN EN
1941846667 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS EN
SEPARATOR OSE 20-0136-067_18 NORMATIVAS DE INSTALACIÓN EN
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
8/59
9/59
10 2059-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2064-1100-000 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
GESTELL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
20 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
FRAME, COMPL.
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
COJINETE ARTICULADO
30 0026-5841-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
70 0019-6933-300 6 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
120 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 15
Typ / Model FOOT, COMPL.
PIE, COMP.
OSE 20-0136-067_18 140 2064-1002-020 1 GESTELLOBERTEIL
UPPER SECTION OF FRAME
PARTE SUPERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 150 0019-6970-400 11 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
9077-915 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
155 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ARANDELA _ DISCO
160 0007-3414-750 1 DICHTRING
9077-915 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0026-1371-300 3 SCHEIBE
Ausgabe / Edition WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
08.03.2018 180 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
Seite/Page
200 2064-3060-000 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 17
2064-1100-000 SET OF DRIVE PARTS
GESTELL VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
210 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
PROXIMITY SWITCH
INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
220 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
HOLDER
SOPORTE
230 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
240 0019-6105-400 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
250 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
270 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
Typ / Model NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
OSE 20-0136-067_18 280 2059-3385-010 1 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 21
CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCH, COMPL.
EMBRAGUE CENTRÍFUGO, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 290 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
9077-915 ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
310 0026-2407-300 1 SCHEIBE
9077-915 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
08.03.2018 330 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
340 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
350 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
2064-1100-000 PROTECTIVE CAP
GESTELL VOLLST. TAPA PROTECTORA
360 2058-1089-000 1 RING
FRAME, COMPL.
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
380 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
400 0018-2477-030 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
410 2064-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
Typ / Model LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
OSE 20-0136-067_18 420 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 430 0018-7943-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
9077-915 TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
440 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 23
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
460 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
9077-915 HOSE
MANGUERA
470 0018-3804-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
08.03.2018 480 0018-6479-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
HOSE CLIP
Seite/Page
500 0019-8910-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
2064-1100-000 SCREW PLUG
GESTELL VOLLST. TORNILLO DE TOPE
FRAME, COMPL.
SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
510 0007-1796-550 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
520 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
540 0013-0289-150 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
550 0018-0992-260 1 STOPFEN
Typ / Model PLUG
TAPÓN
OSE 20-0136-067_18 560 0005-1720-900 2 SOCKEL
BASE
ZÓCALO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 570 0019-2247-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
9077-915 TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
580 0005-1455-900 4 KABELBINDER
CABLE TIE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BRIDA
610 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
9077-915 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
620 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
Ausgabe / Edition COVER
TAPA
08.03.2018 630 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
0024-6327-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Seite/Page
2064-1100-000 ADHESIVE PLATE
GESTELL VOLLST. RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
FRAME, COMPL.
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 20-0136-067_18 0024-3500-010 1 TYPENSCHILD
TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
NOTCHED NAIL
9077-915 REMACHE ESTRIADO
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
9077-915 PLATE
RÓTULO
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
15/59
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3308-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
17/59
10 2064-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 19
2064-3060-000 SPINDLE, COMPL.
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE HUSILLO, COMP.
20 0021-3337-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
30 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
19/59
10 2064-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2064-3429-010 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
40 0011-6207-000 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0008-2008-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
70 0011-7304-250 2 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
Typ / Model ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
MANGUITO DE COJINETE
9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
21/59
10 2059-3365-000 1 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE
2059-3385-010 CLUTCH PULLEY
FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. DISCO DEL EMBRAGUE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
30 0026-2501-400 1 ABSTANDSBUCHSE
DISTANCE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE SEPARACIÓN
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 2059-3483-000 1 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
DISCO ARRASTRADOR EQUILIBRADA CMCH
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
23/59
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
30 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9077-915 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9077-915 COUPLER SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
08.03.2018 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Seite/Page
25/59
10 2064-8808-000 1 HAUBE
2064-8800-000 HOOD
HAUBE VOLLST. CAPÓ
20 0026-2101-000 1 HALTERING VOLLST. 28
HOOD, COMPL.
RETAINING RING, CPL.
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
50 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
60 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2058-8839-000 1 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
NON-RETURN VALVE
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN
80 0013-1006-600 1 UEBERWURFMUTTER
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
90 0018-7940-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
Typ / Model LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
OSE 20-0136-067_18 100 0019-1611-300 3 FLACHKOPFSCHRAUBE
PAN HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO DE CABEZA PLANA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 110 0019-8904-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
9077-915 TORNILLO DE TOPE
PRESSURE GAUGE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
130 0018-6035-030 3 STUTZEN
9077-915 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
140 2065-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
JUEGO DE PLACAS PERFORADAS
08.03.2018 150 0018-6656-100 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. 30
CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
NON-RETURN VALVE
Seite/Page
170 0018-1566-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
2064-8800-000 LENGTH OF PIPE
HAUBE VOLLST. EMPALME DE TUBOS
180 0018-6652-000 1 STUTZEN
HOOD, COMPL.
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
190 2062-8828-000 1 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 32
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
BLOQUE SENSOR, COMP.
220 0005-1741-808 0.7 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
230 0005-1827-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
Typ / Model CYLINDRICAL SCREW
OSE 20-0136-067_18 250 0005-3838-128 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
CABLE DE NAVE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 260 0005-4658-088 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
9077-915 CABLE DE NAVE

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
28/59
10 2058-7788-010 1 BUEGEL
0026-2101-000 STIRRUP
HALTERING VOLLST. ESTRIBO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
40 0026-2840-890 1 KAPPE
CAP
CAPERUZA
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
30/59
10 0007-1729-830 4 DICHTRING
0018-6656-100 GASKET
WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
32/59
10 0018-8133-600 2 MAGNETVENTIL
2062-8828-000 SOLENOID VALVE
SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. ELECTROVÁLVULA
0018-5545-830 2 MEMBRANE
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
DIAPHRAGM
MEMBRANA
0007-2987-830 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
20 0005-1529-300 2 DRUCKTRANSMITTER
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN
30 0005-1464-070 1 WASSERDETEKTOR
WATER DETECTOR
DETECTOR DE AGUA
0005-1464-090 1 ANSCHLUSSKABEL
CONNECTION CABLE
CABLE DE CONEXIÓN
40 0007-2501-830 3 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 50 2062-8828-910 2 ABSPERRVENTIL
SHUT-OFF VALVE
VÁLVULA DE CIERRE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
70 0026-1345-300 3 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
80 2062-8828-920 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE
9077-915 SET OF SPARE PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
90 2062-8828-930 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
34/59
10 2058-2241-020 1 GREIFER VOLLST.
2058-2213-060 CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
GREIFER VOLLST. PINZA, COMP.
20 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2142-2239-000 1 DISTANZRING
DISTANCE RING
ANILLA DE SEPARACIÓN
70 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
36/59
5 2064-6600-508 1 TROMMEL VOLLST.(VORGEWUCHTET)
2064-6600-500 BOWL COMPL. (PRE-BALANCED)
TROMMEL VOLLST. TAMBOR, COMP. (EQUILIBRADO PREVIAMENTE)
20 2064-6601-000 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL
BOWL, COMPL.
BOWL BOTTOM
PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR
30 0007-2385-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0004-3274-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
50 2065-6698-020 1 WASSERKAMMERBODEN
WATER CHAMBER BOTTOM
BASE DE LA CÁMARA DE AGUA
60 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0019-9559-400 12 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 2064-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
9077-915 PISTÓN ANULAR
100 0007-3804-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
110 0007-3794-760 1 DICHTRING
9077-915 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
120 2064-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
Ausgabe / Edition CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
08.03.2018 130 0007-3794-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
140 0007-2338-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
150 0007-2706-750 1 DICHTRING
2064-6600-500 GASKET
TROMMEL VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
180 2064-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
BOWL, COMPL.
SLIDING PISTON
VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
200 0007-3247-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2064-6621-010 1 VERTEILER
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUIDOR
220 2064-6660-500 1 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 40
DISC STACK, COMPL.
SOPORTE DE PLATOS, COMP.
230 2064-6652-000 1 SCHEIDETELLER
SEPARATING DISC
PLATO SEPARADOR
240 2064-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
Typ / Model BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 250 0007-3803-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 260 0007-3884-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
9077-915 JUNTA ANULAR
290 0019-6324-400 4 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PRISIONERO
310 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
9077-915 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
320 2058-6642-040 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
Ausgabe / Edition CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
TAPA DE LA CÁMARA DEL RODETE
08.03.2018 330 2146-6642-010 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
340 2168-6631-020 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
Seite/Page
350 0019-0960-360 1 SPINDELSCHRAUBE
2064-6600-500 SPINDLE SCREW
TROMMEL VOLLST. TORNILLO DEL HUSILLO
360 0007-2393-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
990 0024-6180-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
40/59
10 2064-6663-000 113 TELLER VOLLST.
2064-6660-500 DISC, COMPL.
TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. PLATO, COMP.
20 2064-6666-000 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
DISC STACK, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
42/59
10 0005-4865-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7828-139 FLANGE
DREHSTROMMOTOR BRIDA
20 0005-4865-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4865-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4865-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
TOBERA DEL VENTILADOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
44/59
10 0005-4488-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2059-9928-040 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN RACOR
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
46/59
10 2064-9902-000 2 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 48
2064-9902-550 SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
20 2064-9902-020 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 51
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
48/59
10 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
2064-9902-000 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2730-750 2 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2385-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
60 0007-1997-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
100 0007-3804-840 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 110 0007-3794-760 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
140 0007-2338-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
150 0007-2706-750 2 DICHTRING
9077-915 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 0007-3247-760 4 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
08.03.2018 250 0007-3803-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-3884-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
310 0007-1861-750 8 DICHTRING
2064-9902-000 GASKET
360 0007-2393-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
370 0007-1936-750 12 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
380 0007-1904-750 8 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 0007-2485-390 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
400 0007-2925-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
410 0007-3414-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 420 0015-0082-000 2 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
51/59
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2064-9902-020 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB JUNTA ANULAR
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model DRIVE BELT
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
53/59
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2064-9902-040 GASKET
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
9077-915 ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
55/59
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2064-9769-020 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0015-0003-080 1 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
ACEITE LUBRICANTE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3337-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
9077-915 CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
95 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n GRASA LUBRICANTE
9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
57/59
10 0003-0644-300 1 SCHLAGBOLZEN
2064-9901-000 MALLET
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE PERCUTOR
15 0003-0596-320 1 STECKSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
SOCKET WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE DE TUBO, COMP.
0026-1438-170 1 SPRENGRING
SNAP RING
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN
20 0003-3796-320 1 WINKELSCHRAUBENDREHER
OFFSET SCREWDRIVER
DESTORNILLADOR ACODADO
30 0003-3685-000 1 DOPPEL-HAKENSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
DOUBLE HOOK WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE DE DOBLE GANCHO, COMP.
0026-1558-300 1 KERBSTIFT
NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
0026-1671-300 1 KERBSTIFT
Typ / Model NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
OSE 20-0136-067_18 40 0013-0279-300 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
60 0026-0356-300 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
70 2064-9982-000 1 RINGSCHRAUBE VOLLST.
9077-915 EYE BOLT, COMPL.
ANILLA, COMP.
80 2064-9822-000 1 GLOCKE
Ausgabe / Edition BELL-SHAPED PIECE
CAMPANA
08.03.2018 90 2064-9860-000 1 MONTAGEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
MOUNTING TOOL, COMPL.
DISPOSITIVO DE MONTAJE, COMP.
100 2064-9943-010 1 RINGSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
ANNULAR WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE ANULAR, COMP.
Seite/Page
110 2064-9823-000 1 MONTAGERING
2064-9901-000 MOUNTING RING
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE ANILLO DE MONTAJE
120 0018-2916-050 1 DOPPELNIPPEL
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
DOUBLE NIPPLE
BOQUILLA DOBLE
130 0019-6340-300 1 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
PRISIONERO
140 2058-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
150 2142-9935-000 1 DRUCKSTUECK
PRESSURE PIECE
PIEZA DE PRESIÓN
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
OSE 20-0136-067_18 240 2064-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
9077-915

9077-915
Ausgabe / Edition
08.03.2018
Seite/Page
Data sheet
Description: Separator
Type: OSE 20-0136-067/18
Machine-No.: 9077-916
Order-No.: 1941846667/003000
Material-No.: 99870449872
Version: 20.03.2018
2 OSE 20-0136-067/18 | 1941846667/003000 | 20.03.2018
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
The authors are always grateful for remarks and

suggestions for improving the documentation. Remarks and
suggestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com

OSE 20-0136-067/18 | 1941846667/003000 | 20.03.2018 3
Preface to this datasheet

This datasheet contains the order-specific technical data for the centrifuge.
Non-compliance with this datasheet can not only result in danger for centrifuges,
material and the environment but also endanger persons working on or in the
vicinity of the centrifuge.
The technical data from this datasheet have sole validity!

Technical data in the centrifuge documentation which deviate from this are invalid.
 Keep the datasheet complete, close to the centrifuge and accessible to all those
working on or with the centrifuge. It must be available to these people at all
times!
Other applicable documents

The documents below apply in addition to this datasheet.
 Operating instructions for the centrifuge
 Dimensions sheet for the centrifuge
 Operating instructions for components made by other manufacturers
Abbreviations and symbols used

bar (g) bar (g = pressure)
approx. approximately (roughly)
dB (A) decibels (A)
f frequency
FU frequency converter (Frequenzumrichter)
Hz Hertz
I/O switch on/off
3
kg/dm kilogrammes per cubic decimetre
kW kilowatts
l litres
l/h litres per hour
max. maximum
min. minimum
min minute
rpm revolutions per minute
mm/s RMS millimetres per second, RMS (= Root Mean Square)
mW milliwatts
3
m /h cubic metres per hour
sec second
V volts
ºC degrees Celsius
% per cent
Y star
Δ delta

4 OSE 20-0136-067/18 | 1941846667/003000 | 20.03.2018
Centrifuge
Comments
Type OSE 20-0136-067/18
Serial no. 9077-916
Year of construction see centrifuge nameplate
Permitted bowl speed rpm 12000

3
Permitted density of feed material kg/dm 1.01 max.
3
Permitted density of heavy liquid kg/dm 1 max.
3
Permitted density of solids kg/dm 1.4 max.
3
Permitted throughput m /h -/2.4 min. / max.
Permitted temperature of feed material ºC 90/105 min. / max.
Permitted housing pressure range bar (g) / min. / max.
Run-down time without braking min 45

Run-down time without flat belt min 90
Permitted vibration velocity mm/s 7.0 max.
RMS Measuring point on
frame
Ambient temperature °C 10/50 min. / max.
Disk-stack compression bar (g) 82-112
Quantity of lubricating oil l 2.25 approx.
Ex range of centrifuge
Comments
Suitable for operation in an "Ex" area ? yes / no
Main drive motor

Comments
Design IMV1
Capacity kW 7.5
Voltage V 440 For wiring, see motor
rating plate
Frequency Hz 60
Enclosure IP55
Process data
Comments
Intended use, feed material HFO
Permitted operating pressure, light liquid bar (g) 2 Water at nominal
output
Permitted operating pressure, heavy liquid bar (g) 2 Water at nominal
output

We live our values.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and Process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

9077-916
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

9077-916
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

1941846667_03
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/55
1941846667 SEPARATOR OSE 20-0136-067_18 5
1941846667_03 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
5/55
9987-0449-872 SEPARATOR OSE 20-0136-067_18
1941846667 SEPARATOR
1100 2064-1100-000 1 GESTELL VOLLST. 7
SEPARATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
BASTIDOR, COMP.
8800 2064-8800-000 1 HAUBE VOLLST. 24
HOOD, COMPL.
CAPÓ, COMP.
2213 2058-2213-060 1 GREIFER VOLLST. 33
PINZA, COMP.
6600 2064-6600-500 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 35
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
3545 0024-3545-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
7828 5289-7828-139 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 41
Typ / Model THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
OSE 20-0136-067_18 9928 2059-9928-040 1 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 43
JUEGO RACORES DE TIPO MARINO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9902 2064-9902-550 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 45
9077-916 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
9769 2064-9769-020 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 54
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
7/55
8/55
10 2059-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2064-1100-000 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
GESTELL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
20 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
FRAME, COMPL.
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
120 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 14
Typ / Model FOOT, COMPL.
PIE, COMP.
OSE 20-0136-067_18 140 2064-1002-020 1 GESTELLOBERTEIL
UPPER SECTION OF FRAME
PARTE SUPERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
HEX HEAD SCREW
155 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
160 0007-3414-750 1 DICHTRING
9077-916 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0026-1371-300 3 SCHEIBE
Ausgabe / Edition WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
07.03.2018 180 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
200 2064-3060-000 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 16
2064-1100-000 SET OF DRIVE PARTS
GESTELL VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
210 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
PROXIMITY SWITCH
INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
220 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
HOLDER
SOPORTE
230 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
250 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
270 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
Typ / Model NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
OSE 20-0136-067_18 280 2059-3385-010 1 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 20
EMBRAGUE CENTRÍFUGO, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 290 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
9077-916 ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
310 0026-2407-300 1 SCHEIBE
9077-916 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
07.03.2018 330 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
340 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
350 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
2064-1100-000 PROTECTIVE CAP
GESTELL VOLLST. TAPA PROTECTORA
360 2058-1089-000 1 RING
FRAME, COMPL.
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
380 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
400 0018-2477-030 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
410 2064-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
Typ / Model LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
OSE 20-0136-067_18 420 0018-3215-030 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 430 0018-7943-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
9077-916 TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
440 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 22
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
460 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
9077-916 HOSE
MANGUERA
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE CLIP
07.03.2018 480 0018-6479-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
HOSE CLIP
Seite/Page
2064-1100-000 SCREW PLUG
GESTELL VOLLST. TORNILLO DE TOPE
FRAME, COMPL.
SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
510 0007-1796-550 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
520 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
550 0018-0992-260 1 STOPFEN
Typ / Model PLUG
TAPÓN
OSE 20-0136-067_18 560 0005-1720-900 2 SOCKEL
BASE
ZÓCALO
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
580 0005-1455-900 4 KABELBINDER
CABLE TIE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BRIDA
610 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
9077-916 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
620 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
Ausgabe / Edition COVER
TAPA
07.03.2018 630 0024-4382-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Seite/Page
2064-1100-000 ADHESIVE PLATE
GESTELL VOLLST. RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
FRAME, COMPL.
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 20-0136-067_18 0024-3500-010 1 TYPENSCHILD
TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
NOTCHED NAIL
9077-916 REMACHE ESTRIADO
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
9077-916 PLATE
RÓTULO
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
14/55
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3308-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
16/55
10 2064-3429-010 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 18
2064-3060-000 SPINDLE, COMPL.
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE HUSILLO, COMP.
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
30 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
18/55
10 2064-3410-010 1 SPINDEL
2064-3429-010 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0008-2008-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
Typ / Model ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
MANGUITO DE COJINETE
9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
20/55
10 2059-3365-000 1 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE
2059-3385-010 CLUTCH PULLEY
FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. DISCO DEL EMBRAGUE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
30 0026-2501-400 1 ABSTANDSBUCHSE
DISTANCE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE SEPARACIÓN
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 2059-3483-000 1 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
DISCO ARRASTRADOR EQUILIBRADA CMCH
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
22/55
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9077-916 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9077-916 COUPLER SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
07.03.2018 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Seite/Page
24/55
10 2064-8808-000 1 HAUBE
2064-8800-000 HOOD
HAUBE VOLLST. CAPÓ
20 0026-2101-000 1 HALTERING VOLLST. 27
HOOD, COMPL.
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
50 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
60 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
NON-RETURN VALVE
80 0013-1006-600 1 UEBERWURFMUTTER
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
Typ / Model LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
OSE 20-0136-067_18 100 0019-1611-300 3 FLACHKOPFSCHRAUBE
PAN HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO DE CABEZA PLANA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 110 0019-8904-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
9077-916 TORNILLO DE TOPE
PRESSURE GAUGE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
130 0018-6035-030 3 STUTZEN
9077-916 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
140 2065-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
JUEGO DE PLACAS PERFORADAS
07.03.2018 150 0018-6656-100 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. 29
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
NON-RETURN VALVE
Seite/Page
170 0018-1566-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
2064-8800-000 LENGTH OF PIPE
HAUBE VOLLST. EMPALME DE TUBOS
180 0018-6652-000 1 STUTZEN
HOOD, COMPL.
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
190 2062-8828-000 1 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 31
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
BLOQUE SENSOR, COMP.
220 0005-1741-808 0.7 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
230 0005-1827-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
Typ / Model CYLINDRICAL SCREW
OSE 20-0136-067_18 250 0005-3838-128 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
CABLE DE NAVE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 260 0005-4658-088 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
9077-916 CABLE DE NAVE

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
27/55
10 2058-7788-010 1 BUEGEL
0026-2101-000 STIRRUP
HALTERING VOLLST. ESTRIBO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
40 0026-2840-890 1 KAPPE
CAP
CAPERUZA
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
29/55
10 0007-1729-830 4 DICHTRING
0018-6656-100 GASKET
WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
31/55
10 0018-8133-600 2 MAGNETVENTIL
2062-8828-000 SOLENOID VALVE
SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. ELECTROVÁLVULA
0018-5545-830 2 MEMBRANE
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
DIAPHRAGM
MEMBRANA
0007-2987-830 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
20 0005-1529-300 2 DRUCKTRANSMITTER
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN
30 0005-1464-070 1 WASSERDETEKTOR
WATER DETECTOR
DETECTOR DE AGUA
0005-1464-090 1 ANSCHLUSSKABEL
CONNECTION CABLE
CABLE DE CONEXIÓN
40 0007-2501-830 3 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 50 2062-8828-910 2 ABSPERRVENTIL
SHUT-OFF VALVE
VÁLVULA DE CIERRE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
70 0026-1345-300 3 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
80 2062-8828-920 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE
9077-916 SET OF SPARE PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
90 2062-8828-930 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
33/55
10 2058-2241-020 1 GREIFER VOLLST.
2058-2213-060 CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
GREIFER VOLLST. PINZA, COMP.
20 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 2168-2337-020 1 STEUERGREIFER
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2142-2239-000 1 DISTANZRING
DISTANCE RING
ANILLA DE SEPARACIÓN
70 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
35/55
5 2064-6600-508 1 TROMMEL VOLLST.(VORGEWUCHTET)
2064-6600-500 BOWL COMPL. (PRE-BALANCED)
TROMMEL VOLLST. TAMBOR, COMP. (EQUILIBRADO PREVIAMENTE)
20 2064-6601-000 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL
BOWL, COMPL.
BOWL BOTTOM
PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR
30 0007-2385-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
50 2065-6698-020 1 WASSERKAMMERBODEN
WATER CHAMBER BOTTOM
BASE DE LA CÁMARA DE AGUA
60 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0019-9559-400 12 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 2064-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
9077-916 PISTÓN ANULAR
100 0007-3804-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
110 0007-3794-760 1 DICHTRING
9077-916 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
120 2064-6426-000 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
Ausgabe / Edition CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
07.03.2018 130 0007-3794-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
140 0007-2338-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
150 0007-2706-750 1 DICHTRING
2064-6600-500 GASKET
TROMMEL VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
180 2064-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
BOWL, COMPL.
SLIDING PISTON
VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
200 0007-3247-760 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2064-6621-010 1 VERTEILER
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUIDOR
220 2064-6660-500 1 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 39
DISC STACK, COMPL.
SOPORTE DE PLATOS, COMP.
230 2064-6652-000 1 SCHEIDETELLER
SEPARATING DISC
PLATO SEPARADOR
240 2064-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
Typ / Model BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 250 0007-3803-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
290 0019-6324-400 4 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n PRISIONERO
310 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
9077-916 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
320 2058-6642-040 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
Ausgabe / Edition CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
07.03.2018 330 2146-6642-010 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
340 2168-6631-020 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
Seite/Page
350 0019-0960-360 1 SPINDELSCHRAUBE
2064-6600-500 SPINDLE SCREW
TROMMEL VOLLST. TORNILLO DEL HUSILLO
360 0007-2393-750 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
990 0024-6180-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
39/55
10 2064-6663-000 113 TELLER VOLLST.
2064-6660-500 DISC, COMPL.
TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. PLATO, COMP.
20 2064-6666-000 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
DISC STACK, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
41/55
10 0005-4865-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7828-139 FLANGE
DREHSTROMMOTOR BRIDA
20 0005-4865-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4865-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4865-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
TOBERA DEL VENTILADOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
43/55
2059-9928-040 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN RACOR
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
45/55
10 2064-9902-000 2 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 47
2064-9902-550 SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
Typ / Model
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
47/55
10 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
2064-9902-000 GASKET
20 0007-2730-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2385-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
60 0007-1997-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
100 0007-3804-840 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 110 0007-3794-760 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
140 0007-2338-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
150 0007-2706-750 2 DICHTRING
9077-916 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 0007-3247-760 4 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
07.03.2018 250 0007-3803-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-3884-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
310 0007-1861-750 8 DICHTRING
2064-9902-000 GASKET
360 0007-2393-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
370 0007-1936-750 12 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
380 0007-1904-750 8 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 0007-2485-390 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
400 0007-2925-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
410 0007-3414-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 420 0015-0082-000 2 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
50/55
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2064-9902-020 GASKET
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18

9077-916

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
52/55
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2064-9902-040 GASKET
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
9077-916 ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
54/55
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2064-9769-020 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 20-0136-067_18 80 0015-0003-080 1 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
ACEITE LUBRICANTE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3337-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
9077-916 CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
95 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n GRASA LUBRICANTE
9077-916
Ausgabe / Edition
07.03.2018
Seite/Page
Operating instructions
BKF0004EN
Transfer Gear Pumps KF 4...112
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Englisch
2011-03-24
Table of Content
1 General points 5
1.1 About the documentation 5

1.2 Manufacturer´s address 5
1.3 Intended use 5
2 Safety 7
2.1 Safety instructions and symbols 7

2.2 Staff qualification and training 7
2.3 General safety instructions 7
2.4 Hazard statements 8
3 Device description 13
3.1 General points 13

3.2 Basic construction 14
3.2.1 KF 4...112 R/L/B (with cover) 14
3.2.2 KF 4...112 R/L - D (with pressure relief valve) 16
3.2.3 KF 4...25 U (with universal valve) 18
3.3 Types of seals 22
3.4 Type key 23
3.5 Important special numbers 24
4 Technical data 25
4.1 General characteristics 25

4.2 Overview of nominal sizes 26
4.3 Permissible speed 26
4.4 Overview materials 27
4.5 Operating pressure and fluid temperature 28
4.6 Dimensions 29
5.1 Transport damage 30

5.2 Transport 30
5.3 Corrosion protection 32
6 Installation 33
6.2 Noise reduction 34
6.3 Definition of the direction of rotation and pumping 34
flow
6.3.1 KF 4...112 (with end cover or pressure relief valve) 35
6.4 Change of the direction of rotation 37
6.5 Design of suction and pressure line 39
6.5.1 Suction line 39
6.5.2 Pressure line 42
6.6 Mounting the clutch 44
6.7 Mechanical installation 47
6.8 Assembly with further components and devices 50
6.9 Electrical connection 50
7 Operation start-up 51
7.1 Preparation 51
7.2 Pumps with liquid seal (quenching connection) 53
7.2.1 General points 53
7.2.2 Seal variants with liquid seal 54
7.3 Setting the pressure relief valve 55
7.4 Further operation start-up 57
8 Removal 58

8.2 Disassembling the pump 58
9 Maintenance 60

9.2 Unusual noise 62
9.3 Cleaning 63
9.4 Static seals 63
9.5 Confining fluid level 63
9.6 Rotary shaft lip seal 63
9.7 Mechanical seal 64
9.8 Clutch 64
9.9 Screw joints 64
9.10 Damage 64
9.11 Surface temperature 64
9.12 Bearing, gear, wheel chamber housing 65
10 Repairs 66

10.2 Troubleshooting 66
10.3 Elimination of damage 66
10.4 Return 66
10.5 Disposal 67
10.6 Detecting and eliminating problems 67
1 General points
1.1 About the documentation
These operating instructions describe the installation, operation and mainte-

nance of the transfer gear pumps KF 4...112, also referred to below as the
device.
The device is manufactured in different versions. Information about the ver-
sion concerned in the individual case can be found on the device's type plate.
The structure of the type designation and a more detailed description of the
individual series and nominal sizes can be found in the chapter 3 “Device
description” and in the chapter 4 “Technical data”.
If you have any questions about this operating manual, please contact the
manufacturer.
1.2 Manufacturer´s address
Kracht GmbH
Gewerbestraße 20
DE 58791 Werdohl
phone: +49 (0) 23 92 / 935-0
fax: +49 (0) 23 92 / 935-209
email: info@kracht.eu
web: www.kracht.eu
1.3 Intended use
The device is a pump for continuous delivery of liquids. The various seal var-
iants and materials enable use with different media.
The device has been designed for operation with fluids. Dry operation is not
permitted. The medium must guarantee a minimum lubrication.
The medium must not contain any abrasive constituents.
Petrols, solvents, etc. are not permissible.
Use in explosive areas is not permissible.
The operator must guarantee that the medium to be conveyed is compatible
with the materials used in the device (see "Overview materials" in the chapter
4 “Technical data”). Chemical expertise is required for that.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 5
The maximum permissible operating data listed in the chapter 4 “Technical

data” must always be observed.
Deviations from the above-mentioned data and operating conditions require
express approval by the manufacturer and/or are specified on the type plate.
Type plates or other references on the device must not be removed nor made
illegible or irrecognisable.
In cases of noncompliance, all warranty claims and manufacturer responsi-
bility shall be void.
6 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
2 Safety
2.1 Safety instructions and symbols
The safety notices in these operating instructions are marked with caution
symbols.
Non-compliance can lead to hazards for people and the device.
In addition, the safety instructions are marked with signal words. They have
the meanings as explained below:
Caution: Identification of a low risk hazard, which could lead to minor or
medium bodily injury if not avoided.
Warning: Identification of a potential medium risk hazard, which would lead
to death or severe bodily injury if not avoided.
Danger: Identification of an immediate hazard, which would result in death
or severe bodily injury if not avoided.
Notice: Flagging of notices to prevent property damage.
Flagging of special user tips and other especially useful or important infor-
mation.
2.2 Staff qualification and training
The staff designated to install, operate and maintenance the device must be
properly qualified. This can be through training or specific instruction. Staff
must be familiar with the contents of this operating manual.
2.3 General safety instructions
The operational safety of the device delivered is only guaranteed when it is

used for the intended purpose (see chapter 1 “General points”).
The limit values given must never be exceeded (see chapter 4 “Technical
data”).
National regulations concerning accident prevention and health and safety
at work must be observed, as well as internal regulations laid down by the
operator, even if these are not specifically mentioned in this manual.
The operator must ensure that this operating manual is accessible to the
staff responsible at all times.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 7
2.4 Hazard statements
DANGER
Danger due to breakage or squirting fluids!
Operating the device with impermissibly high pressures can lead to damage
to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Breakage can
lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which can
lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Never allow positive displacement pumps to pump against "closed
gates".
● A pressure relief valve or other kind of over-pressure safeguard must
be installed as close as possible to the pump pressure connection. The
pressure relief device must be dimensioned so that the entire delivery
volume can be conducted through it with the lowest possible pressure
or must be depressurized.
● Do not put the device into operation without a pressure relief device.
DANGER
Using unsuitable connections and lines can lead to breakage. Parts flying
around uncontrolled or squirting fluids can lead to accidents with severe
injuries or even lead to death.
● Use only connections and lines approved for the expected pressure
range.
● Comply with each manufacturer's regulations.
DANGER
Using damaged connections and lines can cause parts to fly around un-
controlled or fluids to squirt out, which can lead to accidents and severe
injuries or even result in death.
● Immediately replace damaged connections, pipes and hose lines.
8 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
DANGER
Hazard caused by incorrect direction of rotation!
Operating the device with the incorrect direction of rotation can lead to
damage to the device and to the up or downstream plant elements. Break-
age can lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out
which can lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when installing
the pumps.
● Always pay attention to the correct direction of rotation when connecting
the motors.
● Secure the fitting keys against flying off when monitoring the direction
of rotation.
DANGER
Danger due to electric voltage!
Danger of death due to electric shock.
● Follow the special safety regulations during all work on electrical instal-
lations.
● Only allow electricians to work on electrical systems.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 9
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts and fluid squirting out!
During all work on the device, rotating parts and squirting fluids can lead to
accidents and severe injuries or even restult in death..
● Depressurize all connections lines during all work on the device.
● Depressurize or disconnect the driving motor during all work on the de-
vice.
● Securely prevent the motor and device from restarting during work.
● Wear suitable protective clothing.
WARNING
Danger due to hazardous fluid!
Danger of death upon contact with hazardous fluids and when inhaling va-
pours from these liquids.
● Comply with the safety data sheets and regulations on handling the
hazardous liquids!
● Collect and dispose leaks of hazardous materials so that no hazards
arise for people or the environment.
● Comply with national and international rules at the place of installation.
WARNING
Hazard caused by rotating parts!
Rotating parts can cause accidents with severe injuries or result in death
due to body parts, hair or clothing getting caught or wrapped up.
● Protect rotating parts (e.g., coupling and shaft ends) against uninten-
tional contact.
● Close any maintenance openings when using bell housings.
● Do not operate the device without safeguards.
WARNING
Danger due to exposed gears!
Gears can pull in and crush or cut off fingers and hands.
● Do not reach into the gears.
● Put the device into operation with connected lines only.
10 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
WARNING
Danger due to falling and or loads falling over!
Due to the size and weight of the unit, accidents can occur resulting in se-
vere injuries or death during transport and shipping.
● Compliance with applicable industrial safety requirements is mandatory.
● Use only suitable means of conveyance and lifting tackle with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.
● Attach lifting tackle only to suitable points (see table 5.1 and table 5.2).
● Attach the lifting tackle in such a manner that it cannot slip.
● The device's centre of gravity must lie between the lifting tackle mount-
ing points on the device.
● Secure the device so that toppling over and falling down is impossible.
● Always avoid jerks, impacts and strong vibrations during transportation.
● Never walk under suspended loads, never work under suspended
loads.
● To prevent damage to the device, be extremely cautious when shipping
or transporting.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 11
CAUTION
Danger due to hot surfaces!
When operating the device with hot media, there is a danger of being
burned and scalded when touching the hot surfaces.
● At medium temperatures above 60 °C, take measures against uninten-
ded contact.
● Wear safety gloves.
CAUTION
● Let the device cool off first when the medium temperature is over 48 °
C.
12 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
3 Device description
3.1 General points
KF series pumps are external gear pump types that work according to the
positive displacement principle.
When rotated, two gears being engaged with each other cause volume ex-
pansion by opening the tooth gaps in the pump inlet (suction side) so that the
medium can enter while a corresponding volume is being displaced in the
pump outlet (pressure side) through engagement of the teeth into the filled
tooth gap. Fluid transport takes place through entrainment in the tooth gaps
along the wall of the wheel chamber. The so-called geometric flow rate Vg is
being displaced per wheel rotation. A value that is stated in technical docu-
ments as rated volume Vgn to specify the pump size.
The actually delivered amount of liquid does not correspond with the theo-
retical value, it is being reduced through losses due to the necessary toler-
ances. The losses are less the lower the operating pressure and the higher
the viscosity.
Gear pumps are self-priming within wide limits. The displacement cycle de-
scribe initially takes place without exhibiting appreciable pressure build-up.
Only after setting external loads, for example, through delivery head, outlet
resistances, line elements, etc. the required working pressure will arise to
overcome these resistances.
As usual with so-called rigid pumps, i.e. non-axial play compensated pumps,
the lateral clearance between gear and front face has been set in such a way
that the maximum allowable operating pressure is managed in an adequate
and secure way.
The medium lubricates the pump's friction bearings and shaft seal. The
pump's operating life will be reduced if the medium contains abrasive ingre-
dients.
The shaft sealing pocket is connected to the pump's suction side. Therefore,
the max. permissible suction-side pressure is dependent on the type of seal.
Tab. 3.1: Functional principle external gear pumps
pe = Suction side
pb = Pressure side
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 13
3.2 Basic construction
3.2.1 KF 4...112 R/L/B (with cover)
Tab. 3.2: Basic construction KF 4...112
* Direction of rotation "B" (Right and left)
14 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Tab. 3.3: Basic construction KF 4...112
Description
1. Cover 8. Retaining ring
2. O-Ring 9. Parallel key
3. Housing 10. Hexagonal screw
4. Driven shaft 11. Adapter sleeve
5. Driving shaft 12. Valve
6. Plain bearing bush 13. Adjusting washer
7. Rotary shaft lip seal 14. Retaining ring
See section section 3.3 “Types of seals” for further seal types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 15
3.2.2 KF 4...112 R/L - D (with pressure relief valve)
Tab. 3.4: Basic construction KF 4...112 R/L - D
16 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Tab. 3.5: Basic construction KF 4...112 R/L - D
Description
1. Valve cover 10. Set screw
2. O-Ring 11. Hexagonal nut
3. Housing 12. Retaining screw
4. Driven shaft 13. O-Ring
5. Driving shaft 14. Compression spring
6. Plain bearing bush 15. Valve cone
7. Retaining ring 16. Adapter sleeve
8. Rotary shaft lip seal 17. Hexagonal screw
9. Parallel key
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 17
3.2.3 KF 4...25 U (with universal valve)
Tab. 3.6: Basic construction KF 4...25 U
18 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Description
1. Valve housing 14. Valve washer
2. Gasket 15. Valve cone
3. Adapter piece 16. Socket head cap screw
4. Plain bearing bush 17. Socket head cap screw
5. O-Ring 18. Rotary shaft lip seal
6. Driven shaft 19. Retaining ring
7. Driving shaft 20. Parallel key
8. Plain bearing bush 21. Cover
9. Housing 22. O-Ring
10. Roller bearing 23. Rod
11. Retaining ring 24. Compression spring
12. Hexagonal screw 25. Centering star
13. Retaining ring 26. Piston
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 19
* View without connection elbow

** View without universal device
20 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Description
1. Hexagonal screw 15. Parallel key
2. Screw plug 16. Retaining ring
3. Gasket 17. Roller bearing
4. Socket head cap screw 18. Retaining ring
5. Connection elbow 19. Rotary shaft lip seal
6. Gasket 20. Housing
7. Socket head cap screw 21. Plain bearing bush
8. Rod 22. Driving shaft
9. Piston 23. Driven shaft
10. Valve cone 24. O-Ring
11. Compression spring 25. Cover
12. Valve housing 26. Valve
13. O-Ring 27. Adjusting washer
14. Cover 28. Retaining ring
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 21
3.3 Types of seals
Tab. 3.10: Type of seals KF 4...112
Pump with single rotary Pump with single rotary Pump with double rota- Pump with double rota-
shaft lip seal shaft lip seal and out- ry shaft lip seal with ry shaft lip seal for vac-
Mounting: F / W board bearing connection borehole G uum operation with
Sealing materials: Mounting: G / X 1/8 for liquid seal connection borehole G
1: NBR Sealing materials: (quench) 1/8 for liquid seal
2: FKM 1: NBR Mounting: F / W (quench)
3: PTFE 2: FKM Sealing materials: Special number 74
9: EPDM 3: PTFE 4: PTFE Mounting: F / W
23, 31: FKM (low tem- 7: FKM Sealing materials:
perature) 19: NBR 4: PTFE
32: EPDM 7: FKM
19: NBR
32: EPDM
Pump with triple rotary Pump with mechanical Pump with mechanical Pump without shaft
shaft lip seal for vac- seal seal and connection G seal
uum and normal oper- Mounting: F / W 1/8 (KF 4...25) or G 1/4 Mounting: F / W
ation with connection Sealing materials: (KF 32...80) for liquid Sealing material:
borehole G 1/8 for liq- 5: FKM seal (quench) 30: FKM (O-Ring)
uid seal (quench) 6: PTFE Special number 198
Mounting: F / W 20: EPDM Mounting: F / W
(on request) Sealing material:
5: FKM
22 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
3.4 Type key
Tab. 3.11: Ordering example KF 4...112
KF 40 R F 1 /... - D 15 - ...
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Tab. 3.12: Explanation of type key KF 4...112
Explanation of type key KF 4...112

1. Product name
2. Nominal size
Vg Size 1: 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25 cm3
Size 2: 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 cm3
Size 3: 100, 112 cm3
3. Direction of rotation
R Right B Right and left
L Left U Universal (Direction of rotation right and
left, direction of discharge consistent)
4. Mounting
F DIN flange without outboard bear- W Mounting angle without outboard bearing
ing
G DIN flange with outboard bearing X Mounting angle with outboard bearing
5. Seal type
1 Single rotary shaft lip seal BABSL 18 Single rotary shaft lip seal BAUMX7 FKM
NBR
2 Single rotary shaft lip seal BABSL 19 Double rotary shaft lip seal BABSL NBR
FKM
3 Single rotary shaft lip seal PTFE 20 Mechanical seal with EPDM secondary
seal (not resistant to mineral oil)
4 Double rotary shaft lip seal PTFE 23 Singel rotary shaft lip seal MSS-1 FKM
(low temperature)
5 Mechanical seal with FKM secon- 30 Without shaft seal, O-Ring FKM
dary seal (external leak oil discharge)
6 Mechanical seal with PTFE secon- 31 Single rotary shaft lip seal BABSL FKM
dary seal (low temperature)
7 Double rotary shaft lip seal BABSL 32 Double rotary shaft lip seal EPDM
FKM (not resistant to mineral oil)
9 Single rotary shaft lip seal EPDM
(not resistant to mineral oil)
6. Special number for specific types
See section 3.5 “Important special numbers”
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 23
Explanation of type key KF 4...112

7. Pressure relief valve (only for direction of rotation R or L)
D 15 Adjustable from 0 - 15 bar D 25 Adjustable from 15 - 25 bar
8. Housing and cover material
Not specified: EN-GJL-250 (GG-25)
GJS EN-GJS-400-15 (GGG-40)
3.5 Important special numbers
Tab. 3.13: Important special numbers KF 4...112
Special Description
num-
bers
74 Pump with double rotary shaft lip seal for vacuum operation and connection for liquid
seal (quench), inner rotary shaft lip seal mounted with sealing lip towards shaft end
158 SAE ¾ connections for KF 4...12, SAE 1 connections for KF 16...25
197 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum
198 Mechanical seal with connection for liquid seal (quench)
232 SAE 2 connections for KF 50...80, SAE 2 1/2 connections for KF 100...112
304 Bearing bushings Iglidur® X, Δpmax = 10 bar
317 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum, bearing bushings Iglidur® X,
Δpmax = 10 bar
332 Version for low-viscous media (only in connection with material GJS), bearing bushings
Iglidur® X, νmin = 4 mm²/s at Δpmax = 10 bar
353 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum, bearing bushings DP4 (leadfree)
355 Bearing bushings Iglidur® X, SAE ¾ connections for KF 4...12, SAE 1 connections for
KF 16...25, Δpmax = 10 bar
363 Version for low-viscous media (only in connection with material GJS), bearing bushings
Iglidur® X, νmin = 4 mm²/s at Δpmax = 10 bar, SAE ¾ connections for KF 4...12, SAE 1
connections for KF 16...25
391 Noise-optimized version for aerated oils and vacuum, SAE 2 connections for KF 50...80,
SAE 2 1/2 connections for KF 100...112
Particularities in noise-optimized pumps

● Air trapped in the medium or too high negative pressure can result in
delivery rate reduction for pumps in noise-optimized version.
● Measures for noise optimisation are only feasible for one rotational di-
rection and only effective for aerated oils or vacuum.
24 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
4 Technical data
4.1 General characteristics
Tab. 4.1: General characteristics KF 4...112
General characteristics KF 4...112

Construction External gear pump
Materials See section 4.4 “Overview materials”
Fixing type Flange DIN ISO 3019
End of drive shaft ISO R 775 short-cylindrical
Pipe connection KF 4...12 Whitworth pipe thread G 3/4
KF 4...12/158 Flange connection SAE 3/4
KF 16...25 Whitworth pipe thread G 1
KF 16...25/158 Flange connection SAE 1
KF 32...80 Flange connection SAE 1 1/2
KF 50...80/232
Flange connection SAE 2
KF 100...112
KF 100...112/232 Flange connection SAE 2 1/2
Installation position KF ...R/L/B... ohne Quench Arbitrary*
KF ...R/L/B... mit Quench Horizontal, quenching connec-
tion on top
KF ...U... Horizontal, perssure connection
on top
Viscosity νmin 12 mm2/s**
νmax 20000 mm2/s
Ambient tempera- ϑu min -20 °C
ture ϑu max 60 °C
Speed n See section 4.2 “Overview of nominal sizes”
Fluid temperature ϑ
Operating pressure pe and See section 4.5 “Operating pressure and fluid temperature”
pb
Filtering Filter porosity ≤ 60 µm
Permissible media Fluids without abrasive components which are compatible with the
pump materials used. The fluids must guarantee minimum lubrica-
tion. Media-specific characteristics must be taken into account.
Petrols, solvents, etc. are not permissible.
* A reduced service life must be expected for the shaft seal when vertically installed.
** Lower viscosities only in connection with GJS housings and reduced pressures (consult manu-
facturer).
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 25
4.2 Overview of nominal sizes
Tab. 4.2: Nominal sizes KF 4...112
Nominal Geom. Speed Permissi- Sound lev- Weights

size* delivery ble radial el***** kg
volume nmin nmax force** LpA with cover with D- with
Vg Fradial db(A) valve univer-
rpm rpm
cm3 N sal de-
(n=1500 vice
rpm)
4 4,03
5 5,05
6 6,38 2,9*** 3,7***
6,9
8 8,05 4,2**** 5,0****
10 10,11 200 3000 700 ≤ 67
12 12,58
16 16,09
3,5*** 4,3***
20 20,10 7,5
4,8**** 5,6****
25 25,10
32 32,12
40 40,21 7,7 9,5 27,5
50 50,20 200 3000 1500 ≤ 68
63 63,18
9,4 11,2 29,5
80 80,50
100 101,5
200 3000 1500 ≤ 69 15,9 19,0 -
112 113,5
* See type key and type designation at pump: KF ...
** Radial forces only at version with outboard bearing. Fradial on central shaft end.
*** Valid for pump KF 4...25 with Whitworth pipe thread.
**** Valid for pump KF 4...25 with flange connection SAE.
***** n= 1500 rpm; v= 34 mm2/s ; p= 5...25 bar
4.3 Permissible speed
Tab. 4.3: Permissible speed depending on the viscosity
Kinematic viscosity ν in mm2/s

< 300 300 500 1000 2000 3000 6000 10000 20000 30000
≥ 1450 1250 1000 750 600 500 400 300 200 100
Speed nmax in rpm
26 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
4.4 Overview materials
Tab. 4.4: Materials KF 4...112
Seal Housing / cover Gear Bearing Shaft seal O-Rings

type*
1 NBR NBR
2 FKM FKM
3 PTFE FEP
4 PTFE FEP
5 CrMo-casting/ FKM
Carbon in syn-
thetic resin,
FKM, 1.4571,
1.4401
6 SiC-Si/SiC-Si FEP
(KF 4...25), SiC-
DU, P10 Si/Carbon in
synthetic resin
(Steel,
(KF 32...80),
sintered bronze,
EN-GJL-250 FFKM, 1.4571
PTFE, Pb)
7 (GG-25) Carburising steel FKM FKM
Iglidur® X
EN-GJS-400-15** (1.7139)
9 DP4 EPDM EPDM
(GGG-40)
18 (Steel, FKM FKM
sintered bronze,
19 NBR NBR
PTFE)
20 SiC-Si/Carbon, EPDM
CrNi-steel,
CrNiMo-steel
23 FKM (low tem- FKM (low
perature) tempera-
ture)
30 Without shaft FKM
seal
31 FKM (low tem- FKM (low
perature) tempera-
ture)
32 EPDM EPDM
** For version in EN-GJS-400-15 type designation: KF ... - GJS
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 27
4.5 Operating pressure and fluid temperature
Tab. 4.5: Operating pressure and fluid temperature KF 4...112
Type of Operating pressure Fluid temperature

seal* Suction side Pressure side
pe min bar abs.** pe max bar pb bar pb max bar ϑmin °C ϑmax °C
(perm. conti- (pressure
nous pressure) peaks)
1 90
...6****
2 150
3
2 200
4
5 150
10
6 - 10 200
7 ...6**** 150
9 0,6 *** 120
0,5
18 150
19 ...6**** 25***** 40 90
20 10 120
23 0,5 -30
30 25 -10 150
31 1 -30
32 0,5 120
4/74 200
7/74 -10 150
0,1 0,2
19/74 90
32/74 120
** Heed restrictions of pe min = -0,65 bar absolute for universal design (KF .. U).
*** Temporary during starting state: 0,4 bar absolute
**** See table 4.6 for permissible pressures
***** Type of seal 31: pb = 20 bar
28 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Tab. 4.6: Permissible operating pressures pe max for seal types 1, 2, 7 and 19
Max. speed nmax in rpm KF 4...80 KF 100...112

Permissible pressure pe max in bar Permissible pressure pe max in bar
750 6 6
1000 5 5
1500 4 3,5
2000 3 2,5
3000 2 1,5
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to overload
Overloads in pumps with Iglidur® X bearings can cause the bearings to
wear prematurely.
● Never exceed the max. permissible Δp = 10 bar.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when simultaneously utilizing multiple
operating limits
When simultaneously utilizing multiple operating limits (see chapter 4
“Technical data”), the pump could become damaged or prematurely wear.
● Do not use minimum and maximum parameters at the same time.
For example, maximum operating pressure ist not permissible in con-
nection with low speed and/or low viscosity.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when pumping aqueous fluids
When pumping aqueous dispersions or solvents, low pressure on the inlet
port can lead to cavitation damage on the pump.
● Comply with the media-specific attributes.
● When designing the inlet line, make sure the inlet port pressure on the
pump inlet during operation is always higher than the steam pressure
of the pumping fluid. While doing so, also take the altitude of the site of
the device over mean sea level into consideration.
● For aqueous dispersions and solvents, limit the operating temperature
to max. 50 °C, install the pump underneath the liquid level and limit the
rotational speed to maximal 1500 rpm.
4.6 Dimensions
Dimensions of the device can be found in the relevant technical data sheets.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 29
5.1 Transport damage
Inspect the device for shipping damage as soon as the delivery has been
received.
If shipping damage is discovered, inform the shipping company.
If proper operation of the device is impaired by the damage, the device must
be replaced or repaired. In that case, contact the manufacturer.
5.2 Transport
WARNING
Danger due to falling and or loads falling over!
Due to the size and weight of the unit, accidents can occur resulting in se-
vere injuries or death during transport and shipping.
● Compliance with applicable industrial safety requirements is mandatory.
● Use only suitable means of conveyance and lifting tackle with sufficient
load-bearing capacity.
● Attach lifting tackle only to suitable points (see table 5.1 and table 5.2).
● Attach the lifting tackle in such a manner that it cannot slip.
● The device's centre of gravity must lie between the lifting tackle mount-
ing points on the device.
● Secure the device so that toppling over and falling down is impossible.
● Always avoid jerks, impacts and strong vibrations during transportation.
● Never walk under suspended loads, never work under suspended
loads.
● To prevent damage to the device, be extremely cautious when shipping
or transporting.
30 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Handling aid
● When transporting individuals devices, the eyebolts can be screwed into
the connectiing flange as a handling aid.
Tab. 5.1: Example for safe transport of pumps
WARNING
Hazard from falling and tipping loads
Due to the size and weight of the device, accidents can occur resulting in
severe injuries or death during transport and shipping.
● For pump devices: do not use eyelets on the motor to transport the
pump devices. They can only support the weight of the motor.
Tab. 5.2: Examples for safe transport of pump units
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 31
5.3 Corrosion protection
The device's function is tested in the plant with mineral hydraulic oil. Then all
connections are closed. The remaining residual oil protects the interior parts
for about 6 months.
Clean bare outer metal parts have also been protected by anti-corrosive oil
or protective metal paint for a period of 6 months against corrosion.
The device must not be exposed in the influence of the weather and major
fluctuations in temperature during transport and storage and must be stored
in a dry place.
If the device is stored over a longer period, it must be treated on the inside
and outside with a suitable corrosion protecting oil. In addition, it must be
protected from humidity by a humidity-absorbing agent.
If high air humidity or aggressive atmosphere is to be expected during trans-
port, suitable corrosion prevention measures must be carried out.
NOTICE
Corrosion damage on units with EPDM seals
The functionality of units with EPDM seals is not tested. There is no pres-
ervation of the interior parts. If the unit is not put into operation immediately,
corrosion damage can occur.
● Protect the unit by using suitable corrosion-preventing measures.
NOTICE
Chemical impact on the device and the sealing materials
Incompatibility between the preservation agents and the materials and
elastomers used in the device can lead to damage of the device and the
seals being used.
● Check to make sure the preservation agent is compatible with the ma-
terials and elastomers used in the device.
● Check to make sure the preservation agent is compatible with the media
to be pumped.
32 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
6 Installation
6.1 General points
WARNING
vice.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to insufficiently qualified personnel
Improper work can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device and in
the plant.
● Permit only expert and technically qualified personnel to work on the
device.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to a lack of cleanliness
During installation, foreign bodies can get into the interior of the device or
the plant due to a lack of cleanliness and cause malfunctions there.
● Pay attention to cleanliness during all work.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 33
6.2 Noise reduction
Measures for sound optimizing

● In view of optimising noise protection, it is advisable to mount a bell-
housing with vibration damper between pump and motor as well as
vibration damper between motor and mounting surface. Suction and
pressure piping must be able to move freely or it needs to be elastically
suspended.
● Installation of suction and pressure hoses diminishes the noise level of
hydraulic systems. Some hose manufacturers offer special, highly flex-
ible suciton hoses for this purpose.
● Installation of the pump above the liquid level diminished the noise level
of hydraulic systems. The pressure pe on the pump's intake should be
approx. 0.8...0.9 bar absolute.
6.3 Definition of the direction of rotation and pumping flow
DANGER
the pumps.
the motors.
of rotation.
34 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
6.3.1 KF 4...112 (with end cover or pressure relief valve)
Tab. 6.1: Rotation and delivery direction KF 4...112
The following definition shall apply with respect to the rotation and delivery
direction of external gear pumps in case of pump connections being posi-
tioned below the drive shaft:
Looking at the pump shaft end, the Looking at the pump shaft end, the
pumping flow is from left to right pumping flow is from right to left
when the shaft is moving clock- when the shaft is moving anticlock-
wise. wise.
Without pressure relief valve
ps = Suction side pd = Pressure side

With pressure relief valve
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 35
Tab. 6.2: Rotating and delivery direction KF 4...25 U
With regard to the direction of rotation and pumping flow of pumps with
universal device KF 4...25 the following definition shall apply when looking
at the pump shaft end:
Direction of rotation right Direction of discharge consistent
and left
Tab. 6.3: Rotating and delivery direction KF 32...80 U
With regard to the direction of rotation and pumping flow of pumps with
universal valve KF 32...80...U2 the following definition shall apply when
looking at the pump shaft end:
Direction of rotation right and left Direction of discharge consistent
36 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
6.4 Change of the direction of rotation
Change of the direction of rotation in the case of KF...R... and KF...L... pump
types, i.e. pure clockwise or anticlockwise rotating pumps, is only possible by
converting the pump.
The manufacturer normally carries out the conversion work and the customer
should do this only in case of an emergency.
Pumps in noise-optimized version cannot be converted.
Guarantee and manufacturer responsibility

● All warranty claims and manufacturer responsibility shall be void when
improper conversation work takes place.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to incorrect installation
Improper retrofitting can lead to damages and malfunctions in the unit and
in the plant.
device.
NOTICE
Danger of leaks on the unit
When altering the unit, seals that are removed, damaged or jammed can
lead to leaks during operation.
● Do not remove, damage or jam seals.
NOTICE
Danger of damage on the device
The cover or pressure relief valve and housing are fixed to each other with
adapter sleeves or dwowel pins. If the bearings are damaged when as-
sembling or dismantling the cover or pressrue relief valve, e.g. by bending
out of line, there could be malfunctions and a decrease of the service life.
Furthermore, the seal faces on the cover or pressure relief valve could be
damaged. That can lead to leaks during operation.
● When mounting and dismantling the cover or pressure relief valve, do
not damage the bearings, e.g. by bending out of line.
● When dismantling the cover or pressure relief valve, do not lever in the
joint with a screwdiver or similar tools.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 37
Tab. 6.4: Change of the direction of rotation KF ...R... und KF ...L...
ps = Suction side * Fastening screws

pd = Pressure side ** Leak oil hole
In case of a pump's change of the direction of rotation the cover and/or pres-
sure relief valve must be rotated through 180°.
● Loose fastening screws.
● Remove the cover or the pressure relief valve respectively from the pump
housing and put it back on rotated by 180°.
● Tighten all fastening screws applying the below mentioned tightening
torques (see table 6.5).
When checking, pay attention to the following points:
● Pumps without pressure relief valve must have their leak oil hole on the
interior cover side at the pump's suction side.
● Pumps with pressure relief valve must have their pressure relief valve
adjusting screw point toward the pump's pressure side.
Tab. 6.5: Tightening torques for fastening screws
Nominal size* 4 ... 25 32 ... 80 100 ... 112

Tightening torque 25 Nm 49 Nm 79 Nm
In the case of pumps having seal type 6, the mechanical seal must be re-
placed in addition. During this process, the spring coiling direction must be
observed. Heed the assembly instructions of the respective manufacturer
when replacing the mechanical seal.
38 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
6.5 Design of suction and pressure line
DANGER
range.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to distortion
The load on the device due to impermissible external loads can lead to
malfunctions or to breakage of the flange or housing.
● Pipelines must be fitted absolutely tension-free to the device connec-
tions.
● Pipelines must be designed in such a way that no tension e.g. caused
by changes in length due to fluctuations in temperature can be trans-
ferred to the device.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage caused by foreign bodies in the device
During installation, when using unsuitable sealing materials foreign bodies
can get into the interior of the device or the plant due to a lack of cleanliness
and cause malfunctions there.
● During installation, do not use any hemp or filler as sealing material.
Suction and pressure hoses

● Installation of suction and pressure hoses diminishes the noise level of
hydraulic systems. Some hose manufacturer offer special, highly flexi-
ble suction hoses for this purpose.
● Lay pressure hoses in sufficiently large radii.
6.5.1 Suction line
NOTICE
Malfunction due to incorrectly designed inlet line
Due to excessive underpressure, an incorrectly designed inlet line can lead
to a reduction of the delivery rate, increased noise emissions and cavitation.
● Design the inlet line with extreme care since it will strongly influence the
pump's performance.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 39
The suction line must be piped as short as possible and in a straight line.
Avoid large suction heights.
Additional line resistance such as formed parts, fittings and closed meshed
suction filters increase the pipe resistance of the suction line and must be
avoided.
The negative pressure in the suction line is calculated from the sum of all
suction-side resistances and the suction height considering the media-spe-
cific data.
Check the underpressure

● The negative pressure can be controlled by fitting a vacuum gauge to
the pump suction line connector.
Ensure proper suction when piping the suction line and the distances to the
floor and to the bulkhead partitions must be sufficiently large.
The inlet port must have a sufficient distance to the lowest fluid level.
Nominal width of the suction line

● The nominal width of the suction line may actually be selected to be
larger than the pump connection.
Expansion of the suction cross section

● Funnel-shaped formation of the suction port at the pump suction side or
obliquely cutting the suction pipe end is recommended of enlargement
of the suction cross section.
When hose lines are used on the pump suction side, care must be taken to
ensure that the hoses are sufficient stability so that they will not be constricted
through the sucking action.
The media-specific data need to be observed, for example, the device must
be arranged below the fluid level in case of aqueous dispersions and solu-
tions.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when pumping aqueous fluids
When pumping aqueous dispersions or solvents, low pressure on the inlet
port can lead to cavitation damage on the pump.
● Comply with the media-specific attributes.
● When designing the inlet line, make sure the inlet port pressure on the
pump inlet during operation is always higher than the steam pressure
of the pumping fluid. While doing so, also take the altitude of the site of
the device over mean sea level into consideration.
● For aqueous dispersions and solvents, limit the operating temperature
to max. 50 °C, install the pump underneath the liquid level and limit the
rotational speed to maximal 1500 rpm.
40 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
The recommended flow velocity in the suction line is max. 1,5 m/s.
Tab. 6.6: Piping the suction line as siphon
If there is a possibility that the suction line

can run dry if the pump stops, piping the
suction line as siphon is an option to avoid
suction problems. This way, the pump will
remain permanently filled after initial com-
missioning.
The air in the pressure line can be conduc-
ted directly into the tank via a nozzel (see
section 6.5.2 “Pressure line”).
It is appropriate to employ a foot valve or a
non-return valve in case of longer suction
lines that can run dry while the pump is at
rest. These must have been designed for
use in suction lines and should offer as low
a flow resistance as possible.
Tab. 6.7: Suction line at vacuum operation
If the pump is to intake from a tank under

vacuum, the pump must be arranged ap-
prox. 0.8 m below the tank. The suction line
must run in a straight line and without any
resistances.
The tank may be subjected to vacuum only
then when the pipework and the pump have
been filled with liquid.
For this application, only pumps designed
as a vacuum system may be employed.
* = Vacuum
NOTICE
Malfunction due to excessive underpressure
Undercutting the permissible underpressure can lead to a decrease in the
delivery rate (due to short filling of the pump), high noise emission and cav-
itation. Furthermore, in shaft seals the sealing lip can lift up allowing air to
be sucked in.
● The permissible pressure at the pump inlet shall not be lower than value
pe min as stated in the chapter 4 “Technical data”.
An exception to this is the pump's starting state during which a pressure of

0.4 bar absolute is tolerable for max. 30 minutes.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 41
NOTICE
Damage or failure of the shaft seal due to high supply pressure
Exceeding the permissible supply pressure can lead to a failure of the shaft
seal or to impermissible heating and increased wear.
● The permissible pressure at the pump inlet must not exceed the value
pe max as stated in the chapter 4 “Technical data”.
6.5.2 Pressure line
DANGER
gates".
The nominal width of the pressure line must be selected such that the maxi-
mum permissible pressures are not exceeded.
The pressure must be checked by a manometer installed as closely as pos-
sible to the pressure connection.
To avoid pump overload caused by an impermissibly high pressure, a pres-
sure relief valve or a rupture disc with return to the supply tank must be
installed as closely as possible to the pump's pressure connection.
Another option of pressure limiting is to mount a pressure relief valve directly
to the pump.
During operation of a pump that has to pump media via a non-return valve in
a pressurized circuit (e.g. reserve pump in a lubricant circuit), intake problems
can occur if the inlet pipe is filled with air. In this case the pressure pipe must
be bled directly upstream of the non-return valve.
This can be carried out by a bleeding valve with return or a throttled bypass,
for example.
42 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Tab. 6.8: Bleeding valve and throttled bypass
Bleeding valve with return Throttled bypass
If none of the measures described is carried out, the volume of the pressure
pipe between the pump and the non-return valve must be at least 75 % of the
inlet pipe volume.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 43
6.6 Mounting the clutch
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to falsely dimensioned coupling.
An incorrect design can lead to premature failure of the coupling due to
breakage or wear.
● When dimensioning the coupling, pay attention to safe dimensioning to
be able to transfer the expected maximum torque reliably and perma-
nently.
● Take the vibrations, peak torques and temperatures into consideration.
The permissible values from the coupling manufacturer must not be ex-
ceeded.
● Comply with the coupling manufacturer's installation rules.
When mounting the clutch, keeping the "E" measure exactly is of the essence
so that the clutch will remain axially movable when used. In order to avoid
any frontal pressure against the elastic gear rim, measure "E" should each
be considered as minimum in the case of an axial displacement.
If the shaft clearance is less than clutch clearance "E", one of the shaft ends
can easily extend into the gear rim. Size "dW" corresponds to the max. shaft
diameter that may extend with the parallel key into the gear rim, size "dH". If
there is the chance to offset the parallel key, i.e. only the shaft extends into
the gear rim, the size of the shaft may be increased up to 2 mm below the
specified "dH" size in order not to obstruct the gear rim in its axial movability.
The permissible displacement values of the elastic clutches stated represent
general guide values taking a clutch loading up the the clutch nominal torque
and an operating speed n = 1500 rpm as well as an occurring ambient tem-
perature of +30 °C into account. Consultation with the manufacturer is
necessary for deviating operating conditions.
The displacement data may only be used individually in each case and in case
of simultaneous appearance in proportion only.
Increasing the service life of the coupling

● Careful and exact shaft alignment inreases clutch life.
44 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Fig. 6.1: Displacements - aligning the clutch
* Clutch clearance "E"

** Shaft with parallel key extends into the gear rim (dw)
Tab. 6.9: Types of coupling
19 24 28 38 42 48 55 65 75
Type of coupling*
19/24 24/28 28/38 38/45 42/55 48/60 55/70 65/75 75/90
Clutch clearance** E 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 35 40
Dimension** s 2 2 2,5 3 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
Dimension** dH 18 27 30 38 46 51 60 68 80
Dimension** dW 12 20 22 28 36 40 48 55 65
Max. axial displace- ΔKa 1,2 1,4 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,1 2,2 2,6 3,0
ment**
Max. radial displace- ΔKr 0,20 0,22 0,25 0,28 0,32 0,36 0,38 0,42 0,48
ment**
n=1500 1/min
Max. angular dis- ΔKw 1,2° 0,9° 0,9° 1,0° 1,0° 1,1° 1,1° 1,2° 1,2°
placement
n=1500 rpm
* Example: RA19-Z25/14-Z25/19 or RA19/24-Z25/14-Z25/24
** Dimensions in mm
NOTICE
Danger of property damage when mounting other types of couplings
If other coupling types are used, when mounting the coupling the instruc-
tions from the respective manufacturer is binding.
● The respective manufacturer's installation instructions must be com-
plied with when using other coupling types.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 45
NOTICE
Danger of property damage if installation is not correct
Do not strike the shaft when installing the respective coupling half on the
motor and pump shaft. There is a danger that the built-in bearing could be
damaged.
● Do not knock onto the shafts during installation of the clutch halves!
Easing coupling installation

● The hubs should be heated for mounting the clutch and slid onto the
shaft while hot.
Using a pinion gear drive, it must also be heated and slid onto the shaft
end while hot.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to displacement of the coupling
halves
When the coupling hub is not secured against axial displacement on each
shaft, there is a danger that the coupling hub will shift during operation. That
can lead to a failure of the coupling.
● Prevent axial displacement on every coupling hub on cylindrical shafts
with a threaded pin that presses against the fitting key or the shaft.
46 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
6.7 Mechanical installation
WARNING
vice.
NOTICE
Malfunctions due to leaking lines and connections
Leaks can occur and air can be sucked in if lines or connections are not
tight. Suctioned air leads to a decrease of the delivery rate and foams up
the medium.
● Make sure all lines and connections are tight.
● Before installation, the device must be checked for transport damage and
soiling.
● Any preserving agents must be removed before installation using ben-
zine or solvent.
● Clean the pipework of dirt, scale, sand, swarf, etc. prior to installation.
Welded pipes in particularly must be pickled or flushed. Cotton waste
must not be used for cleaning.
● Mount clutch and clutch halves respectively to pump and drive (see sec-
tion 6.6 “Mounting the clutch”").
WARNING
tional contact.
● Mount pump to bellhousing, foot or housing and pay attention to careful

alignment and correct fitting position (see chapter 4 “Technical data”).
● Tighten all fastening screws applying the torque as prescribed by the
manufacturer of the bellhousing avoiding any twisting of the pump in the
process without fail.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 47
● Remove the protective plugs in the pump's suction and pressure con-
nections.
WARNING
WARNING
hazardous liquids!
● Wet devices interiors with fluid being pumped.
DANGER
range.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to distortion
The load on the device due to impermissible external loads can lead to
malfunctions or to breakage of the flange or housing.
● Pipelines must be fitted absolutely tension-free to the device connec-
tions.
● Pipelines must be designed in such a way that no tension e.g. caused
by changes in length due to fluctuations in temperature can be trans-
ferred to the device.
48 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
● Connect suction and pressure side according to the marking on the pump
or the information on the type plate (see section 6.3 “Definition of the
direction of rotation and pumping flow”).
● Connect the pipework to the suction and pressure piping. Always heed
the respective manufacturer's instructions.
● Mount a suitable tank for the liquid seal (see chapter 7 “Operation start-
up”, if applicable) when operating the pump with liquid seal (quench).
DANGER
gates".
CAUTION
ded contact.
NOTICE
Danger of malfunctions through polluted medium
When filling the storage tank with the medium, impurities or small parts can
get into the tank and cause damage or malfunctions on the unit and in the
system.
● When filling the storage tank pay attention to the greatest possible
cleanliness.
● Before opening, clean filler screw and shutoff on fluid transport and stor-
age tank.
● Check media tank for contamination and clean if necessary. On no ac-
count remove the filter screen on the filler neck or the filter insert during
the filling process.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 49
● Filling the media tank with the prescribed fluid.

● Ensure sufficient filling of the media tank!
6.8 Assembly with further components and devices
NOTICE
Danger of property damage if installation is not correct
Incorrect assembly with components or devices from other manufacturers
can lead to breakdowns.
● Comply with each manufacturer's operating instructions when assem-
bling with additional components or devices.
DANGER
lations.
DANGER
the pumps.
the motors.
of rotation.
● All data stated on the motor type plate must be checked for conformity
to the required operating data.
● Adjust the overload protection to the correct value.
● Check the rotational drive direction of the pump before switching on.
50 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
7 Operation start-up
7.1 Preparation
WARNING
tional contact.
WARNING
WARNING
hazardous liquids!
CAUTION
ded contact.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 51
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to incorrect commissioning
Improper commissioning can lead to damages and malfunctions in the de-
vice and in the plant.
device.
● Comply with the permissible operating data such as rotational speed,
pressure temperature, permissible media, etc. (see chapter 4 “Techni-
cal data”).
● Before starting the system make sure that a sufficient quantity of the
service fluid is extant to avoid dry running.
● Before starting the plant, pumps and inlet line must be filled with oper-
ating fluid to prevent damage to the pump and the shaft seal during dry
runs. That also guarantees pump suction.
● For pumps with liquid seal (quench), fill the sealing cavity with a suitable
confining fluid before it is used for the first time.
● Make sure that all lines and connections are tight and that no leakages
can occur or air can be sucked in.
● Check the permissible operating data against the operating states to be

expected.
● Check all fastening screws on the device.
● Fill the pump and suction line with the operating fluid.
● In the case of pumps with liquid seal (quench), fill the sealing cavity using
an appropriate confining fluid (see section 7.2 “Pumps with liquid seal
(quenching connection)”).
● Checking the direction of rotation. See section "Change of the direction
of rotation" in chapter 6 “Installation” for any change in rotational direc-
tion.
52 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
7.2 Pumps with liquid seal (quenching connection)
7.2.1 General points
NOTICE
Danger of the failure of the seal due to a lack of sealing fluid
A lack of sealing fluid can lead to a failure of the shaft seal and to increased
temperatures and increased wear.
● Fill the pump's sealing cavity with a suitable sealing medium. The seal-
ing fluid must be compatible with the seals and materials used as well
as with the pumping medium.
● The confining fluid's minimum and maximum filling level must be en-
sured using appropriate technical and/or organisational measures.
● The liquid seal in the quenching connection must not be subjected to
pressure or vacuum.
If fluids are delivered,

● that cure in air,
● crystallise in contact with air humidity,
● the leakage of which must not be released into the environment,
● are under vacuum and their seal shall be gastight,
than the employment of a double seal with liquid seal is necessary.
● A tank for the liquid seal is to be connected to the quenching connection.
Suitable tanks are available from the manufacturer.
● The tank for the liquid seal must be placed above the pump.
● The installation position is restricted and the quenching connection shall
be directed upward..
● Check of the fluid level in the tank must be possible at any time.
Flushing connection sealing cavity

● A second port on the device enables purging of the sealing cavity and
draining of the seal liquid.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 53
7.2.2 Seal variants with liquid seal
Tab. 7.1: KF 4...112 with liquid seal (Quench)
Types of seals: Types of seals: Triple rotary shaft lip Type of seal: 5
4, 7, 19, 32 4, 7, 19, 32 seal Special number 198
Special number 74 (on request)
54 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
7.3 Setting the pressure relief valve
Applies for pumps with built-on pressure relief valve

(Type designation: KF ... - D15 or KF ... - D25)
Fig. 7.1: Pressure setting KF 4...112 - D..
- response pressure lower

+ response pressure higher
NOTICE
Danger of the pump overheating
The series D.. pressure relief valves are exclusively used to protect the
pump. The valves must only respond for short durations. Permanent drain-
ing of the volumetric flow through the valve will destroy the pump through
overheating.
● Make sure the valve responds only briefly.
For pressure setting on the pressure relief valve see figure 7.1:
● loosen the hexagon nut (1)
● adjust set screw (2)
clockwise = response pressure higher
anticlockwise = response pressure lower
● secure the set screw (2) using hexagon nut (1) once the desired pressure
has been adjusted.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 55
DANGER
When securing screw (3) is loose, set screw (2) can be screwed into the
valve until the valve is completely shut. That can result in inadmissibly high
pressures in the system if there is no other pressure relief device. Breakage
can lead to parts flying around uncontrolled or to fluids squirting out which
can lead to accidents and severe injuries or even result in death.
Fluid can spurt out from the valve if set screw (2) is completely screwed
out. That can lead to accidents with severe injuries or result in death.
● Never operate the unit with securing screw (3) loosened.
● Never completely screw set screw (2) into the valve.
● Never completely unscrew set screw (2) out of the valve.
56 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
7.4 Further operation start-up
● The pumps may only start without or with low pressure load. For this
purpose, open the existing shut-off elements and adjust the pressure
relief valve incorporated in the pressure pipe to the lowest opening pres-
sure.
● Start-up takes place by repeated quick on-off switching of the driving
motor (jog mode) without reaching full speed until proper operation of the
device is evident. This applies particularly when a cold pump is to start
with already heated medium. The reason for this is to achieve slow heat-
ing of the pump and prevent the pump seizing through thermal shock.
● Proper function indicated by noise generation or on the pressure gage
should be reached after max. 30 seconds.
● First of all, run the pump at zero pressure or low pressure for a couple
of minutes after switching on the motor.
● Bleed the plant on the distribution pipes, preferably at the highest point.
● Pressure loading can be gradually increased up to the desired operating
pressure (max. permissible pressures, see chapter 4 “Technical data”)
● Check the temperature of the medium and that of the pump after the
intended operating characteristics have been reached. Checkpoints on
the pump are the bearing locations, the housing and the shaft seal. The
temperatures observed on the pump surface may be approx. 10 °C
above medium temperature.
● Check the fluid level of the plant once more and top up if necessary.
● Check the final operating temperature after several hours running time
(see chapter 4 “Technical data” for max. permissible temperatures).
● Check the static seals on the suction and pressure connections and the
pump's joints for leakages.
● Check the threaded connections for leakages. Such leakages can be
easily eliminated by simply retightening the threaded connections.
● Also check all motor and pump fastening screws after a few hours of
operation.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 57
8 Removal
8.1 General points
NOTICE
the plant.
device.
NOTICE
A lack of cleanliness can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device
and in the plant.
● Close all openings with protective caps to prevent dirt from penetrating
into the system.
8.2 Disassembling the pump
WARNING
vice.
58 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
WARNING
hazardous liquids!
CAUTION
C.
● Remove the depressurised pipelines from the pump.

● Seal the pump connections and pipelines to prevent dirt penetration.
● Disassemble the pump
● Pull off clutch hub resp. the driving pinion from shaft end using an ex-
tractor.
NOTICE
Danger of malfunction due to curing liquids
Curing liquids can engage the device mechanically and make it unusable.
● Immediately clean the pump or store it in such a way that curing is def-
initely prevented in cases where the pump was operated with curing
liquids.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 59
9 Maintenance
9.1 General points
NOTICE
the plant.
device.
NOTICE
Danger of damages and malfunctions due to a lack of maintenance
If the device is not regularly maintained, damage that is not discovered or
not repaired can lead to malfunctions and to the failure of the device.
● Maintain the device regularly.
● Check the device initially right after commissioning.
● Adapt the scope and time between maintenance intervals to the de-
mands posed by the location.
● During visual inspections, look purposefully for possible damages.
● The device must not be used if visible damages are found.
● Document the type and extent of the maintenance work. That allows the
fastest possible detection of a change in operating performance.
When designed to the conditions of use and fitted correctly, the devices are
able to be used for long and problem-free operation. They only require a little
maintenance. This is absolutely essential for problem-free operation, howev-
er. Experience shows that a high percentage of the problems and damage
that occur can be traced back to dirt and lack of maintenance.
The scope and time intervals for inspections and maintenance are generally
specified by the operator in a respective plan.
Barriers and instructions

● All removed barrieres and warning signs must be put back to their orig-
inal position on completing maintenance and/or repair.
Checking the operating data

● Regular checking of all operating data such as pressure, temperature,
current consumption, degree of filter soiling etc. contributes to early
problem detection.
60 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
NOTICE
A lack of cleanliness can lead to damages and malfunctions in the device
and in the plant.
● Close all openings with protective caps to prevent dirt from penetrating
into the system.
NOTICE
Malfunctions due to leaking lines and connections
Leaks can occur and air can be sucked in if lines or connections are not
tight. Suctioned air leads to a decrease of the delivery rate and foams up
the medium.
● Make sure all lines and connections are tight.
DANGER
Using damaged connections and lines can cause parts to fly around un-
controlled or fluids to squirt out, which can lead to accidents and severe
injuries or even result in death.
● Immediately replace damaged connections, pipes and hose lines.
DANGER
lations.
WARNING
vice.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 61
DANGER
gates".
WARNING
hazardous liquids!
CAUTION
C.
9.2 Unusual noise
Some damage is indicated by unusual noises. If there is a change in the dec-

ive's operating noise, a thorough examination of the cause must always take
place.
62 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
9.3 Cleaning
The pump shaft as well as the associated hardware must not run in dust ac-
cumulations.
Regular cleaning of the pump and its environment is therefore necessary.
Cleaning the pump using a steam jet cleaner is not permissible.
9.4 Static seals
The static seals on the device's separation joints and the connection lines
must be periodically checked for leakproofness.
If there are any visible leaks, immediately stop plant operation.
If the leaks cannot be stopped by simply retightening the connection, replace
all affected seals.
9.5 Confining fluid level
Checking the confining fluid filling level is mandatory for safe pump operation.
Top up the confining fluid as required.
If there is no automatic monitoring, the filling level must be checked at least
befor each shift begins.
The outer but also the inner shaft seal could be leaking if the filling level should
dorp unusually fast within a short period of time. The confining fluid will then
leak into the coupling space or it will be sucked into the pump thereby mixing
with the medium.
If the filling level should rise, the inner shaft seal may probably be leaking and
the confining fluid is begin mixed with the pressurised medium.
Stop plant operation immediately in both cases.
9.6 Rotary shaft lip seal
Rotary shaft lip seals are particulary prone to wear for functional reasons and
must accordingly be carfully checked. Excessicely high supply pressure or
negative suction pressure, wrong rotational direction or pollution leads to in-
creased wear, increased and impermissible temperature rises.
Small amounts of leakage, however, are indispensable for function. The per-
missible amount of leakage, though, is highly dependet on the operational
conditions and cannot be quantified.
If there are excessive amounts of leakage, stop pump operation immediately.
Replace the rotary shaft lip seal.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 63
Increased wear on the rotary shaft lip seal should be taken into account in the
case of vertical pump installation.
9.7 Mechanical seal
Mechanical seals are particularly prone to wear for functional reasins and
must accordingly be carfully checked. Too high admission pressure, wrong
rotational direction, frequent star-ups, gas or air portions in the oil or contam-
ination lead to increased wear, increased leckage and impermissible tem-
perature rises.
Small amounts of leckages, however, are indispensable for mechanical seal
function. The permissible amount of leackage, though, is highly dependent
on the operational conditions and cannot be quantified.
If there are excessive amounts of leakage, stop pump operation immediately.
Replace the mechanical seal. In so doing, heed the assembly instructions of
the mechanical seal manufacturer.
Increased wear on the mechanical seal should be taken into account in the
case of vertical pump installation.
9.8 Clutch
Clutches must be maintained according to the specifications of the respective

manufacturer.
9.9 Screw joints
All the screw joints must be checked at regular intervals to make sure they
are tight fit. Loose screw joints must be tightened and, if necessary, secured
against loosening by e.g. Loctite (medium stregth).
9.10 Damage
Check the pump as well as its environment regularly for damage such as
dents in the clutch guard.
9.11 Surface temperature
For identifying premature wear or pump overload, it is useful to check the

temperatures on the pump surface at regular intervals.
64 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
This temperatures should never be much higher (max. 10 °C) than the media
temperature at the pump inlet. Checkpoints on the pump are the bearing lo-
cations, the housing and the shaft seal.
If the measured temperatures are higher than the permissible values, this is
an indication of wear or bearing damages. The pump must be replaced in this
case.
9.12 Bearing, gear, wheel chamber housing
Like shaft seals, bearings, gear and wheel chamber housings are wear items.
Wear largely depends on the occurring loads, life cycle as well as type and
proportion of solids in the medium. Wear cannot be identified from the outside.
The condition of a pump, however, can be analysed by the volumetric effi-
ciency factor. Decrease of the efficiency factor would normally indicate wear.
Therefore, a check on all operating data such as delivery, pressure, temper-
ature, drive data, degree of filter contamination should also be carried out
during maintenance work.
Further investigations into the cause are necessary in the event of major de-
viations (> 10 %) to the reference values. This helps detecting premature
pump failure in time. The pump must immediately be taken out of service at
a drop of delivery or pressure to 80 % of the original values. The achieved
values at initial commissioning serve as reference in this case.
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 65
10 Repairs
10.1 General points
The term repairs covers:

● Troubleshooting, in other words establishing damage, determining and
localising the reason for the damage.
● Elimination of the damage, in other words eliminating the primary cau-
ses and replacing or repairing faulty components.
10.2 Troubleshooting
Leaks are the most frequent problem. If these occure on the pipelines, they
can be eliminated by straightforward tightening of the screw joints.
If the device itself is leaking, the respective seals have to be replaced.
10.3 Elimination of damage
Repair damage onsite, predominantly by replacing the defective device. The

device itself is generally repaired by the manufacturer.
If corresponding expertise and sufficient equipment is available, the consum-
er or OEM can also make the repairs. For support, spare parts lists and
sectional drawings are available. They can be requested from the manu-
facturer.
NOTICE
Danger of property damage due to incorrect work and use of non-
original spare parts
the plant. That also applies to the use of non-original spare parts.
device.
● Use only genuine original spare parts.
10.4 Return
If the device has to be repaired or checked over the manufacturer's premises,

it must be packed suitably for transport. In addition, a safety data sheet for
the medium used must be enclosed with the device. In case of well-known
mineral oils, at least the exact type description is required.
66 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
If harding or agglutinative media are involved, the device must be cleaned

befor it is returned.
Cleaning is also necessary if the device has been operated with hazardous
fluids.
Any openings must be closed.
10.5 Disposal
Disposal of the packaging and used parts must be garried out according to
the regualtions valid in the country where the device is installed.
10.6 Detecting and eliminating problems
The following table lists the possible causes of the most frequently occuring
malfunctions and notes on possible remedies.
If the problems cannot be identified, please request help from the manufac-
turer.
Tab. 10.1: Transfer pumps: Faults and causes
Fault Potential causes

Increased Pump ● Negative pressure too high causing pump short filling
noise cavitation ● Suction height too high
● Suction filter plugged or too small
● Inner diameter of suction line too small
● Suction line too long
● Too many bends in the suction line
● Too many local constrictions in the suction line
● Suction line plugged or leaking
● Too high viscosity
● Temperature too low
● Wrong direction of rotation
● Place of installation too high
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 67

Foaming ● Suction line leaking
or trap- ● Fluid level in supply tank too low
ped air in
● Too little oil supply
medium
● Return line to tank leaking
● Wrong tank dimensioning
● Shaft seal or seal on suction line leaking
● Return line end above the fluid level in the supply tank
● Insufficient venting
● Too strong foaming in the gear
Mechani- ● Incorrectly aligned or loose clutch
cal vibra- ● Magnetic coupling defective
tions
● Faulty or insufficient line fastening
● Wobbling pressure relief valve
● No noise-optimized design (missing dampers)
● Unfavourable place of pump installation
● Pump worn out, tooth flanks worn out
● Disturbances in pump operation
Pump does ● Too high negative pressure
not suck ● Fluid level in supply tank too low
● Magnetic coupling torn off
● Wrong direction of rotation
● Throttled shut-off element in the suction line
● Suction line too long
● Suction line leaking
● Suction resistance too high
● Foreign objects in suction line
● Volume of pressure pipe between pump and non-return valve too
little, pump cannot compress the air contained in the suction line
● Non-return valve not bled
● Too high start-up pressure if suction line is filled with air
● Speed too low
68 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07

Insufficient ● Too high negative pressure
delivery ● Throttled shut-off element in the suction line
● Fluid level in supply tank too low
● Suction filter plugged or too small
● Too high viscosity
● Too low viscosity
● Too high speed
● Too high pressure
● Pressure relief valve set too low
● Pump sucks air
● Pump worn out
● Too high proportion of air in the oil
● Universal valve defective
Insufficient Delivery ● Too low viscosity
pressure too low, ● Pressure relief valve set too low or does not shut
work
● Too low speed
drags in
pressure ● Driving power too low
pipe too ● Pump worn out
low
Excessive ● Too high pressure
power con- ● Too high viscosity
sumption
● Driving power too low
● Motor winding defective
Excessive ● Pressure relief valve set too high
operating ● Speed too high
temperature
● Cooling and heat dissipation insufficient
● Supply of fluid too low
● Fluid is being delivered into the supply tank via pressure relief valve
under load
Impermissi- ● Delivery-side valve cone not completely shut
ble pump ● Directly mounted pressure relief valve set too low
heating
(does not apply for the "universal valve" and "T-valve" versions)
● Too high pressure
● Gland lid overtightened
● Separating can insufficiently bled
● Admission pressure impermissibly high
● Pump worn out
BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07 2011-03-24 69

Leakages ● Admission pressure impermissibly high
on shaft seal ● Wrong direction of rotation
● Too high radial shaft loading
● Temperature at sealing point too high
● Wrong seal material
● Missing confining fluid
● Separating can defective
● Sealing wear due to poorly lubricating medium
● Sealing wear through abrasive components in medium
● Sealing wear through curing medium
● Gland lid not sufficiently tightened
Clutch wear ● Incorrectly aligned or loose clutch
● Axial clutch clearance insufficient
● Clutch overloaded
● Temperature too high
Magnetic ● Magnetic coupling under-dimensioned
coupling ● Pressure too high
torn off
● Driving motor oversized
● Too high starting torque
● Too high operating temperature
● Pump is blocking due to foreign objects
Short opera- Wear on ● Wear through abrasive components
tional lives bearing, ● Wear due to poorly lubricating medium
gear and
housing
parts ● Check corrosion, material compatibility
● Too high operating pressure for the media properties
70 2011-03-24 BKF0004EN_D0024710002-07
Operating and installation instructions
Strainer
PN6-160
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 6.0 Putting the valve into operation .............. 2-7
instructions ................................................2-2 7.0 Care and maintenance.............................. 2-8
2.0 Notes on possible dangers.......................2-2 8.0 Troubleshooting ........................................ 2-9
2.1 Significance of symbols .................................... 2-2
9.0 Troubleshooting table .............................. 2-9
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ........... 2-2
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part . 2-10
3.0 Storage and transport ..............................2-2
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ............................ 2-10
4.0 Description .................................................2-3
4.1 Scope of applications ........................................ 2-3
4.2 Operating principles .......................................... 2-3
4.3 Diagram............................................................. 2-4
4.4 Technical data - remarks ................................... 2-5
4.5 Marking ............................................................. 2-5
4.5.1 PN6-40 ..................................................... 2-5
4.5.2 PN63-160 ................................................. 2-5
5.0 Installation..................................................2-6
5.1 General notes on installation............................. 2-6
5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends ................. 2-7
Rev. 0040101000 3517 englisch

Strainer PN6-160
1.0 General information on operating instructions

These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be
solved by reference to the operating instructions.
They are binding on the transport, storage, installation, start-up, operation, maintenance
and repair.
The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.
- Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be
supervised and checked.
It is the owner’s responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to
monitor the personnel.
- In addition, current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when
taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them.
The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.
These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.
2.0 Notes on possible dangers
2.1 Significance of symbols
ATTENTION !
... Warning of general danger.
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information

In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety
information are highlighted to attract special attention.
Information marked with the above symbol and “ATTENTION ! ” describe practices, a
failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third
parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with
these practices and to monitor compliance.
All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating
and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions,
product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest
extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage
to property.
3.0 Storage and transport

ATTENTION !
- Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to
take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
connecting points for lifting gear.
- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.
See catalog sheet for weights.
- At -20°C to +65°C.
- The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do
not damage paint protection.
Page 2-2 Rev. 0040101000 3517

Strainer PN6-160
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Strainers are used for "cleanin flowing mediums“.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering.
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.2 Operating principles

The medium flows through the strainer screen in the direction shown on the strainer and is
thereby cleaned.
Rev. 0040101000 3517 Page 2-3

Strainer PN6-160
4.3 Diagram
fig. 1: Strainer - Y fig. 2: Strainer - Y SE
fig. 3: Strainer - Y (1.4408)
fig. 4: Strainer - DG PN63-160 fig. 5: Strainer - DG SE PN63-160

Refer to the data sheet for information about materials with designations and figure
numbers.
Page 2-4 Rev. 0040101000 3517
Strainer PN6-160
4.4 Technical data - remarks
for
- Principal dimensions
- Pressure-temperature-ratings
- Valves with butt weld ends, etc. refer to datasheet.
4.5 Marking
4.5.1 PN6-40
Details of the CE-marking on the valve:
CE-marking
0525 Notified body
Manufacturer Address of manufacturer:
refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
Typ Type
Bj. Year of manufacture
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety
function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.
4.5.2 PN63-160
Type number Serial number Manufacturer CE-marking
Notified body
Body material
Year of
manufacture
(clear speach)
PSmax (max. allowed pressure) Customer-specific Screen design Approval

PS (operating pressure) information (No./inspector/year)
TS (operating temperature) EAC-marking

TSmax. (max. allowed temperature)
fig. 6: Name plate

Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
Rev. 0040101000 3517 Page 2-5

Strainer PN6-160
5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.
- Note installation position with reference to flow direction, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation.
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
See data sheet for weights.
- Leave sufficient space to remove the screen basket during installation in
pipelines.
- Installation position:
a) The screen basket should never be at the top, otherwise the dirt will
fall back into the pipe.
b) If water hammer is possible due to condensation in steam lines,
never install the trap with the screen basket at the bottom, but install
it so that it is horizontal.
- Centre gaskets between the flanges.
- Install compensators to compensate for thermal expansion of the piping.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
Page 2-6 Rev. 0040101000 3517

Strainer PN6-160
5.2 Installing valves with butt weld ends
Please note that only qualified persons using appropriate equipment and working in
accordance with technical rules are allowed to install fittings by welding.
The responsibility for this lies with the system owner.
Refer to the data sheet for information about the shape of the butt weld ends.
6.0 Putting the valve into operation
ATTENTION !
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature
and direction of flow.
- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.
- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage.
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50°C) or low (< 0°C) media
temperatures can cause injury.
Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate!
Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or
modification, always make sure that:
- All works has been completed!
- The valve is in the correct position for its function.
- Safety devices have been attached.
Rev. 0040101000 3517 Page 2-7

Strainer PN6-160
7.0 Care and maintenance

The strainer screens must be cleaned regularly. Maintenance and maintenance-intervals
have to be defined by the operator and depends on the degree of dirt accumulation in the
system.
- If necessary, the strainer can be fitted with an additional start-up filter (e.g. filter with
supporting basket) to start up the system.
- Flush the plant thoroughly before starting it.
- The strainer requires little maintenance.
ATTENTION !
Refer to point 10.0 before opening the strainer.
- Contaminated strainers in suction-lines will result cavitation and damage the
pumps.
- Before reassembling the unit, remember that the bearing surface must be cleaned and a
new gasket (pos. 6) must be inserted.
- Set the strainer cover (pos. 2) in place.
- Tighten the hexagon nuts (pos. 4) evenly crosswise.
- Tightening torque‘s for hexagon nuts / bolts:
hexagon nuts / Torque

PN DN
bolts (Nm)
6 - 40 15 - 32 M 10 20-35
40 M 12 20-35
50 - 65 M 12 60-80
80 - 150 M 16 100-125
200 M 20 150-200
250 - 400 M 24 340-410
500 M 27 340-410
63 - 160 10 - 25 M 16 50 ±2
32 - 50 M 20 150 ±3
65 M 24 200 +20
80 M 20 140 +20
100 M 24 200 +20
Page 2-8 Rev. 0040101000 3517

Strainer PN6-160
8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table

“9.0 Troubleshooting table”, the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.
9.0 Troubleshooting table

ATTENTION !
- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read point 6.0 before restarting the plant !
Fault Possible cause Corrective measures

No flow Flange covers have not been removed Remove flange covers
(Pos. 7, fig. 3) (Pos. 7, fig. 3)
Flow too low strainer clogged. Clean/replace screen.
Piping clogged. Check piping system.
Flange broken between Bolts tightened unevenly. Re-align piping and fit new valve!
unit and piping Mating flanges not properly aligned.
Rev. 0040101000 3517 Page 2-9

Strainer PN6-160
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part

ATTENTION !
The following points must be observed:
- Pressureless pipe system.
- Medium must be cool.
- Plant must be drained.
- Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic
media.
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and
Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG“ valid at the time of delivery or, by way of
departure, in the contract of sale itself.
We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the
confirmed application.
No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling
or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.
This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under
conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.
Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist
appointed by us.
No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement
delivery is excluded.
The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design
modifications or natural wear.
Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the
competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or
else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.
Technology for the Future.

GERMAN QUALITY VALVES
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159
Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com
Page 2-10 Rev. 0040101000 3517

ARI-Strainer
ARI-Strainer - Screen and supporting basket made of stainless steel
ARI-Strainer -
Y-pattern with flanges
• TRB 801 Annex II No. 45 (except EN-JL1040)
Grey cast
• EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft iron
TÜV-Test-No. TA 09 2016 C04
SG iron
Cast steel
Fig. 050 Page 2
Fig. 050
ARI-Strainer -
Y-pattern with flanges
• TRB 801 Annex II No. 45
• EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft
Stainless
steel
Fig. 059 Page 3
ARI-Strainer -
Y-pattern with butt weld ends
• TRB 801 Annex II No. 45
• EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft
Cast steel
Fig. 080 Page 4
Features:
• Screen and supporting basket made of stainless steel
• Screen from DN50 with reinforced ring
• Screen from DN150 with supporting basket
• Precise guidance of screen in cover and body
Edition 06/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! Data sheet 050001 englisch (english)
ARI-Strainer 050
Technical data
Strainer - Y-pattern with flanges (Grey cast iron, SG iron, Cast steel)
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter

10.050 PN6 EN-JL1040 DN15-200
12.050 PN16 EN-JL1040 DN15-300
22.050 PN16 EN-JS1049 DN15-300
23.050 PN25 EN-JS1049 DN15-150
34.050 PN25 1.0619+N DN15-200
35.050 PN40 1.0619+N DN15-200
A supporting basket is necessary, with higher differential pressures, dependent on

clogging-up (DN >125 standard)
Test: • EN ISO 15848-1 / TA - Luft TÜV-Test-No. TA 09 2016 C04
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 10./12.050 Fig. 22./23.050 Fig. 34./35.050
1 Body EN-JL1040, EN-GJL-250 EN-JS1049, EN-GJS-400-18U-LT GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Cover DN ≤150: EN-JL1040, EN-GJL-250 DN ≤80: EN-JS1049, EN-GJS-400-18U-LT DN ≤80: P250 GH, 1.0460
DN >150: P265 GH, 1.0425 DN >80: P265 GH, 1.0425 DN >80: P265 GH, 1.0425
3 x Screen X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
3.1 Supporting basket DN >125: X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
4 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218
5 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181
6 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500
Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558 Standard-flange dimensions refer to page 6
L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600 730 850
Dimensions
H (mm) 90 100 115 125 150 160 180 215 235 275 305 390 540 680
H1 (mm) 135 150 180 205 235 250 285 330 365 425 480 610 915 1110
B (mm) 10 10 25 35 45 45 25 40 55 65 50 80 230 350
l1 (mm) 56 68 82 98 114 119 134 149 169 199 224 284 434 555
Ød1 (mm) 23 28 36 42 50 61,5 78,5 89,5 109,5 137,5 160 210 258 308
Mesh width (mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,25 1,25 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
Standard screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,9 10,8 17,8 26,1 36,7 61 98,6 146 234 376 394 652 1225 1873
Zeta-value -- 1,7 2,2 2 2,5 3 2,7 2,9 3,1 2,9 2,8 5,2 6 4,2 3,7 on request
possible in straight
Mesh width (mm) 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 through form
Fine screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,2 10,1 16,8 24,3 32,9 49,5 80,3 115 189 303 405 590 1231 1883
Zeta-value -- 2,1 2,5 2,2 2,8 3,8 4,1 4,4 4,9 4,4 4,5 4,9 7,3 4,1 3,6
Ratio of the free screen surface area to the area of
10 8,4 8,3 7,1 6,8 5,2 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2,4 2,3 2,7 2,9
the nominal diametSp.p.
1)
Zeta-value ... range of tolerance for Kvs-values acc. to VDI/VDE 2173 Kvs-values based upon clean screen !
Weights
10.050 (kg) 2,5 3 4,5 5,5 7 9 13 19 26 38 54 110 -- --
12.050 (kg) 3 4 5 7 9 12 16 21 30 43 61 121 154 335
22.050 (kg) 3,5 4 5,5 7 9 12 16 21 28 41 58 115 154 335
23.050 (kg) 3,5 4 5,5 7 9 12 16 21 32 47 64 -- -- --
34./35.050 (kg) 4 5 6 8 10 13 19 24,5 35 51 71 144 -- --
Information / restriction of technical rules need to be observed!

Operating and installation instructions can be downloaded at www.ari-armaturen.com.
ARI-Valves of EN-JL1040 are not allowed to be operated in systems acc. to TRD 110.
A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available (acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 EN-JL1040 is not allowed.)
The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for the selection of the correct valve.
Resistance and fitness must be verified (contact manufacturer for information, refer to Product overview and Resistance list).
2 Edition 06/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com!
ARI-Strainer 059
Technical data
Strainer - Y-pattern with flanges (Stainless steel)
52.059 PN16 1.4408 DN15-200

54.059 PN25 1.4408 DN15-200
55.059 PN40 1.4408 DN15-200

Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 52./54./55.059
1 Body GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Cover X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 x Screen X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3.1 Supporting basket DN >125: X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Stud A4-70
5 Hexagon nut A4
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500
Face-to-face dimension FTF series 1 according to DIN EN 558 Standard-flange dimensions refer to page 6
L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600
Dimensions
H2 (mm) 94 94 102 102 123 126 148 170 202 285 320 417
H3 (mm) 130 138 150 143 166 172 206 234 282 388 443 585
l2 (mm) 48 48 57 57 68 70 85 97 112 138 169 230
Ød2 (mm) 25 25 31 36 46 55,5 69,5 85,5 105,5 131,5 159 210
Mesh width (mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,25 1,25 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
Standard screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,9 10,8 17,8 26,1 36,7 61 98,6 146 234 376 394 652 on request
Zeta-value -- 1,7 2,2 2 2,5 3 2,7 2,9 3,1 2,9 2,8 5,2 6
Mesh width (mm) 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25
Fine screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,2 10,1 16,8 24,3 32,9 49,5 80,3 115 189 303 405 590
Zeta-value -- 2,1 2,5 2,2 2,8 3,8 4,1 4,4 4,9 4,4 4,5 4,9 7,3
10 8,4 8,3 7,1 6,8 5,2 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2,4 2,3
1)
Weights
52./54./55.059 (kg) 4 5 6 8 10 13 19 24,5 35,0 51 71 144

A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available.
Edition 06/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! 3
ARI-Strainer 080
Technical data
Strainer - Y-pattern with butt weld ends (Cast steel)
35.080 PN40 1.0619+N DN15-300
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627 - 4 (refer to page 5)

Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 34./35.080
1 Body GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Cover DN ≤100: P250 GH, 1.0460
DN >100: P265 GH, 1.0425
3 x Screen X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
3.1 Supporting basket DN >125: X5CrNi18-10, 1.4301
4 Stud 25CrMo4, 1.7218
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
Face-to-face dimension ETE series 1 according to DIN EN 12982

L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600 730 850
Dimensions
H (mm) 90 100 115 125 150 160 180 215 235 275 305 390 540 680
H1 (mm) 135 150 180 205 235 250 285 330 365 425 480 610 915 1110
B (mm) 10 10 25 35 45 45 25 40 55 65 50 80 230 350
l1 (mm) 56 68 82 98 114 119 134 149 169 199 224 284 283 317
Ød1 (mm) 23 28 36 42 50 61,5 78,5 89,5 109,5 137,5 160 210 260 314
Mesh width (mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1,25 1,25 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6
Standard screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,9 10,8 17,8 26,1 36,7 61 98,6 146 234 376 394 652 1225 1873
Zeta-value -- 1,7 2,2 2 2,5 3 2,7 2,9 3,1 2,9 2,8 5,2 6 4,2 3,7
Mesh width (mm) 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25 0,25
Fine screen Kvs-value 1) (m3/h) 6,2 10,1 16,8 24,3 32,9 49,5 80,3 115 189 303 405 590 1231 1883
Zeta-value -- 2,1 2,5 2,2 2,8 3,8 4,1 4,4 4,9 4,4 4,5 4,9 7,3 4,1 3,6
10 8,4 8,3 7,1 6,8 5,2 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2,4 2,3 2,7 2,9
1)
Weights
35.080 (kg) 2,5 3 3,5 4 5,5 7,5 12 15 23,5 33 49 106 135 240

ARI-Strainer 080
Valves with butt weld ends / Special design / Accessories
L = Face-to-face dimension
Edge shaping acc. to DIN EN 25817
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627

L (mm) 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600 730 850 980 1100
ØA (mm) 22 28 35 44 50 62 77 91 117 144 172 223 278 329 362 413
ØB (mm) 17,3 22,3 28,5 37,2 43,1 53,9 68,9 80,9 104,3 130,7 157,1 204,9 257 307,9 338 384,4
Ødi (mm) 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 330 375
R (mm) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5
L1 (similar) (mm) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 14 18 20 20 25 33 45 45
Ød3 (mm) 21,3 26,9 33,7 42,4 48,3 60,3 76,1 88,9 114,3 139,7 168,3 219,1 273,0 323,9 355,6 406,4
s1 (mm) 2 2,3 2,6 2,6 2,6 3,2 3,6 4 5 4,5 5,6 7,1 8 8 8,8 11
Face-to-face dimension ETE series 1 according to DIN EN 12982
Butt weld ends according to DIN EN 12627 Fig. 4
Weld joint according to DIN EN 29692 code number 1.3.3
The material used for ARI valves with butt weld ends are:
GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N acc. to DIN EN 10213-2.
Based on our experience we recommend electric welding process for connecting valves or strainers with tubes or with each other.
Lime based electrodes with an appropriate composite material should be used as filler material for welding.
Gas welding should be avoided.
Because of the different material compositions and wall thickness of the steam traps and the pipe gas welding shall not be applied. Quenching cracks and coarse grain
structure may develop.
Bar magnet
Operating temperature: up to +450°C
DN15 to DN300
Pos. Description Fig. 10./12./22./23./34./35.050; Fig. 52./54./55.059;
34./35.080
8 Drain screw C35E, 1.1181 A4
9 Bellows housing St Aramid Only DN15:
view on the cover flange Holes for differential pressure measurement
13 Bar magnet 1.4571 / AlNiCo 1.4571 / AlNiCo
(not for stainless steel) on request
DN G
(mm) (inch)
15-20 3/8
25-32 3/4 Permanent magnet
40-80 1
100-150 1 1/2
200-300 2
350-500 on request Alternative:
Permanent magnet
Drain screw Operating temperature: up to +210°C
Pos. Description Fig. 10./12./22./23./34./35.050; Fig. 52./54./55.059; Pos. Description Fig. 10./12./22./23./34./35.050; Fig. 52./54./55.059;
34./35.080 34./35.080
8 Drain screw C35E, 1.1181 A4 8 Permanent magnet C35E, 1.1181 / AlNiCo A4 / AlNiCo
9 Bellows housing St Aramid

ARI-Strainer
Flange dimensions / Pressure-temperature-ratings
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
Standard-flange dimensions Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 (Flange holes / -thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533/2544/2545)
ØD (mm) 80 90 100 120 130 140 160 190 210 240 265 320 -- --
PN6 ØK (mm) 55 65 75 90 100 110 130 150 170 200 225 280 -- --
n x Ød (mm) 4x11 4x11 4x11 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 -- --
ØD (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460
PN16 ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410
1)
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26 12x26
ØD (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 360 425 485
PN25 ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 310 370 430
ØD (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 375 450 515
PN40 ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 320 385 450
1)
also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of
Pressure-temperature-ratings the given temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 6 (bar) -- 6 5,4 4,8 4,2 3,6 -- -- --
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 16 (bar) on request 16 15,5 14,7 13,9 12,8 11,2 -- --
EN-JS1049 25 (bar) on request 25 24,3 23 21,8 20 17,5 -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 8,2
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1.0460 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 10
1.0460 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 16
1.4408 16 (bar) 16 16 14,5 13,4 12,7 11,8 11,4 10,9 --
1.4408 25 (bar) 25 25 22,7 21 19,8 18,5 17,8 17,1 --
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
1)
Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Please indicate when ordering:

- Figure-No.
- Nominal pressure
- Nominal diameter
- Special design / accessories
Example:
Figure 35.050; Nominal pressure PN40; Nominal diameter DN100; with drain screw.

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock,
Tel. +49 52 07 / 994-0, Telefax +49 52 07 / 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com

Gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher / Brazed Plate Heat Exchanger /
Echangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées
Montage-, Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
Installation and Application Guide
Instructions de montage, d’installation et d‘entretien
Achtung:
Lesen Sie diese Anleitung vor Montage und Inbetriebnahme sorgfältig durch. Gewährleistungsansprüche
entfallen, soweit die Montage-, Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung nicht beachtet wird.
Prüfen Sie bitte bei der Anlieferung, ob Beschädigungen vorhanden sind bzw. ob Teile fehlen. Vermerken
Sie entsprechendes auf den Speditionspapieren.
KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher haben scharfe Kanten. Bitte beachten Sie dieses bei der
Handhabung.
Bauliche Veränderungen am Produkt dürfen nur von autorisierten Kelvion Brazed PHE Mitarbeitern
vorgenommen werden. Andernfalls erlöschen die Gewährleistungsansprüche.
Attention:
Before proceeding with installation and operation please read entire guide carefully. Failure to do so can
cause injury or property damage. In case of noncompliance warranty claims are voided.
When receiving heat exchangers, any claims for damage or shortage of parts in shipment must be filed
immediately against the transportation company by the consignee.
KELVION heat exchangers may have some sharp edges so please handle with care.
Structural alterations on the product are allowed only by authorised Kelvion Brazed PHE employees.
Otherwise warranty claims are voided.
Attention:
Ces instructions sont à lire avec soin avant le montage et la mise en service de l’échangeur. Si ces
instructions ne sont pas suivies, nous ne pouvons donner suite à une éventuelle demande de garantie.
Contrôler dès réception si l’échangeur de chaleur présente des dommages ou bien si des pièces
manquent. Dans ce cas, faire les remarques appropriées sur les bordereaux du transporteur.
Les échangeurs de chaleur peuvent avoir des arêtes coupantes. Maniez-les avec prudence.
Toute modification apportée sur l’échangeur sans autorisation préalable donnée par les employés de
Kelvion brasé PHE ne pourra être couvert par notre garantie.
Kelvion Brazed PHE GmbH

Remsaer Straße 2a, 04603 Nobitz - Wilchwitz, Deutschland
Tel. +49 3447 55 39 0, www.kelvion.com
Jena HRB 202818, ID-No. DE 150 539 388, Steuernr.: 306/5708/5007
Geschäftsführung: Alexander Reithmayer
Bankverbindung: Deutsche Bank AG Frankfurt; BLZ 500 700 10, S.W.I.F.T. Code DEUTDEFF, KTO 0 942 011 00, IBAN DE08 5007 0010 0094 2011 00
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Beschreibung / Konformitätserklärung 1
Montageposition 2
Anschluss an das Rohrnetz 3
Lötanschluss, Schweißanschluss, Gewindeanschluss 4
Inbetriebnahme 5
Betrieb 6
Frostschutz 6
Verschmutzung / Fouling 7
Reinigung 7
Korrosionsbeständigkeit von gelöteten Plattenwärmetauschern gegenüber Wasserinhaltsstoffen 8
Volumenangaben 10
Montageanleitung Isolierungen 11
Montageanleitung Verteilerrohre 12
Table of contents
Description / Declaration of Conformity 1

Mounting position 2
Piping connections 3
Soldering, welding, threading connections 4
Start of operation 5
Operation 6
Anti-freeze 6
Fouling 7
Cleaning 7
Corrosion resistance of soldered plate heat exchangers compared to water constituents 8
Volume of brazed plate heat exchangers 10
Fitting instructions for insulation 11
Fitting instructions for distributing pipes 12
Sommaire
Description / Déclaration de Conformité 1

Montage 2
Raccordement au système de tuyauteries 3
Raccords brasés, soudés, filetés 4
Mise en service 5
Fonctionnement 6
Protection antigel 6
Encrassement 7
Nettoyage 7
Résistance à la corrosion 8
Volume des échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées 10
Instructions de montage des isolations 11
Instructions de montage des échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées munis d’un distributeur 12
Kelvion Brazed PHE GmbH

Beschreibung / Konformitätserklärung
KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher bestehen aus einer Anzahl geprägter Edelstahlplatten, die in einem speziellen Lötverfahren
mittels Kupfer oder Nickel miteinander verbunden werden. Beim Zusammenfügen wird jede zweite Platte um 180 Grad in der Ebene
gedreht, wodurch sich zwei voneinander getrennte Strömungsräume bzw. Druckräume (Primär- und Sekundärseite) bilden.
Konformitätserklärung: siehe Homepage www.kelvion.com; News & Downloads
Werkstoffe:
Platten: Edelstahl 1.4404 - SA240 316L (Standard)
Edelstahl 1.4547 / SA240 S 31254 (XCR-Modelle, WP7M-40-XCR)
Lot: Kupfer Typ: GBE, GBS, GBH, GML, GMH, GBH-HP, GCS, GCH, GKE, GKS, GKH, GWH, WP, WH
Nickel Typ: GNS, NP, GKN
VacInox Typ: GVH, GVH-HP
Angaben zum Typ, Baujahr, Herstellernummer, Hersteller sowie die technischen Daten sind dem Typenschild zu entnehmen. Es sind
geeignete Maßnahmen zu treffen, damit die angegebenen zulässigen max. und min. Betriebsparameter weder im Betrieb noch im Stillstand
über- bzw. unterschritten werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die Angaben auf dem Typenschild des Wärmetauschers!
KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher sind Druckgeräte im Sinne der Richtlinie 2014/68/EU (DGRL). Die Prüfungen nach Modul B
(Baumuster) und Modul D erfolgten durch die benannte Stelle:
TÜV Thüringen e.V. - Melchendorfer Str. 64 - DE – 99096 Erfurt
Registrier-Nr. der benannten Stelle: 0090
Description / Declaration of Conformity

KELVION brazed plate heat exchangers consist of a pack of embossed steel plates which are brazed together by copper or nickel in a
furnace. When assembling the pack every second plate is turned 180° in the plane. There are two separate flow channels or pressure
channels (Primary and Secondary Side) with two mediums in counter current.
Declaration of Conformity: see homepage www.kelvion.com; News & Downloads
Materials:
Plates: Stainless steel 1.4404 - SA240 316L (Standard)
Stainless steel 1.4547 / SA240 S 31254 (XCR-models)
Solder: Copper Type: GBE, GBS, GBH, GML, GMH, GBH-HP, GCS, GCH, GKE, GKS, GKH, GWH, WP, WH
Nickel Type: GNS, NP, GKN
VacInox Type: GVH, GVH-HP
Details on the type, year of construction, serial number, manufacturer as well as technical data have to be taken from the nameplate of the
heat exchanger. Suitable measures have to be taken so that the given permitted max. and min. technical data neither in operation or in
interruption are shouted down or falls exceed.
Please note the data on the nameplate of the heat exchanger!
KELVION heat exchangers are pressure equipment according to the directive 2014/68/EU (PED). Notified body for module B (production
type) and module D is:
Registration No. of the Notified Body : 0090
Description / Déclaration de conformité

Les échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées KELVION sont constitués d’un empilage de plaques corruguées en acier inox, l’étanchéité
étant assurée par un procédé spécial de brasage au cuivre ou au nickel. A l’empilage, une plaque sur deux est inversée à 180 degrés afin
de créer deux zones de circulation séparées.
Déclaration de Conformité: voir page d'accueil www.kelvion.com; News et téléchargements
Matériaux:
Plaques: Acier inox. 1.4404 - SA240 316L
Acier inox. 1.4547 / SA240 S 31254 (modèle XCR)
Brasure: au Cuivre Type : GBE, GBS, GBH, GML, GMH, GBH-HP, GCS, GCH, GKE, GKS, GKH, GWH, WP, WH
au Nickel Type: GNS, NP, GKN
au VacInox Type: GVH, GVH-HP
Le modèle, l’année de fabrication, le no. de série, le fabricant ainsi que les données techniques sont indiqués sur la plaque signalétique.
Veillez à prendre les mesures adéquates afin que les paramètres techniques de service indiqués soient respectés tant en fonctionnement
que pendant les arrêts.
Prière de tenir compte des indications données sur la plaque signalétique de l’échangeur !
Les échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées sont des appareils sous pression conformément à la circulaire 2014/68/EU. Le dépôt des
modèles EG (module B) et l’examen du QS System (Module D) ont été effectués auprès du :
Enregistrement No.: 0090
-1- Kelvion Brazed PHE GmbH

Empfohlene Montageposition: Senkrecht Montageposition
Recommended mounting position: Vertical KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher sollten so montiert
Position de montage recommandée: Verticale werden, dass ausreichend Platz vorhanden ist, um
Wartungsaufgaben zu erfüllen. Die Einbaulage ist so zu wählen,
dass die Entlüftung und die Entleerung des Wärmetauschers
möglich sind. Bei wärmetechnischen Anwendungen ist die
senkrechte Einbaulage am effizientesten. Alle anderen Einbaulagen
können zu Leistungsverlusten führen. Kältetechnische
Anwendungen, wie Verdampfer- oder Kondensatoranlagen,
verlangen stets eine senkrechte Einbaulage.
Niemals den Wärmetauscher mit den Anschlüssen nach unten
montieren. Vorsorglich sollten die Wärmetauscher an einer Konsole
befestigt werden. Eine Halterung nur an den Anschlüssen ist nicht
ausreichend.
Die max. Anschlusskräfte und -momente nicht überschreiten.
Mounting position
KELVION heat exchangers should be mounted so there is sufficient
room around the heat exchanger to perform maintenance work. The
fitting position is to be chosen in such a way that venting and
draining of the heat exchanger are possible.
For thermal applications a vertical fitting position is the most
efficient one. All other fitting positions can lead to power loss.
For all two phase applications the heat exchanger should always be
mounted vertically (Evaporator, condenser...).
Never mount the heat exchanger with the connections pointing
down. Preferably the heat exchanger should be supported by a
bracket or support. The unit should not be supported solely by the
piping.
The maximum connecting forces and torques are not to be
exceeded.
Montage
Les échangeurs KELVION doivent être montés de façon à laisser
assez de place pour assurer les travaux d’entretien. La position de
montage doit permettre la purge de l’air et la vidange de
l’échangeur. Pour les applications de chauffage, l‘échangeur de
chaleur peut être monté en toute position. A noter toutefois que
seule la position verticale assure un rendement maximum, toute
autre position pouvant provoquer des pertes de rendement.
Lorsque l’échangeur est utilisé dans des applications diphasiques
(évaporateur, condenseur…) seule la position verticale est
admissible.
Ne jamais installer l’échangeur de chaleur avec les raccordements
tournés vers le bas. Il est recommandé de fixer l’échangeur sur un
support. Une fixation uniquement par les raccords n’est pas
suffisante.
Ne dépasser en aucun cas les couples de serrage admissibles.
Maximale Anschlusskräfte und Momente

Maximum fitting forces and torques
Couples de serrage admissibles:
BPHE Anschluss T F Mb Mv
G…; W…; NP… Connection (kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm)
Aansluiting
1,100,108,2,200,
22,220,228,24, G¾ 1,5 8 40 170
240
3,300,4,400,418,
420,5,505,525, G1 2,5 10 65 385
530,535, 550
3,300,4,400,418,
420,5,505,525, G1*
2,5 25 65 765
530,535, 550 G1¼
7,700,757,760, G2
770,8,800,9,900, G2½ 11,5 30 740 1000
910 G3
10,1000 G4 15 40 980 1300

* Innengewinde, Inside threading, Filetage intérieur
Bolzen, studs, boulons M6 M8 M10 M12

Mv (Nm) 10 20 25 30
Anschluss an das Rohrnetz
Die effizienteste Wärmeübertragung wird realisiert, wenn Primär-
und Sekundärmedium den Wärmetauscher im Gegenstrom
durchfließen.
Ein roter bzw. blauer Punkt auf der Frontplatte kennzeichnet die
Primärseite. Die Primärseite ist der innenliegende Kanal. Somit ist
der erste und letzte Kanal eines Wärmetauschers immer auf der
Sekundärseite zu finden.
Achtung: Rohrleitungen sind so zu verlegen, dass weder
Schwingungen, Spannungen, Stöße oder Pulsationen den
Wärmetauscher beaufschlagen. Die Lebensdauer der
Wärmetauscher wird durch falsche bzw. ungenügende
Regeltechnik stark verkürzt. Hier einige Faktoren, die sich nachteilig
auf die Lebensdauer auswirken und die zu vermeiden sind:
 überdimensionierte Regelventile bzw. schlechte Qualität
 ungenügende Reglereinstellungen
 übermäßige Druckschwankungen
 falsche Platzierung der Messfühler
Achtung: Rohrsysteme in neuen und rekonstruierten Anlagen vor
Montage des Wärmetauschers spülen! Ein Filter (Maschenweite 0,8
mm für geschlossene und 0,08 mm für offene Anlagen) zur
Vorbeugung von Verschmutzungen ist an den Medieneintritten des
Wärmetauschers vorzusehen. Verschmutzungen im
Wärmetauscher können zur Korrosion und bei einigen
Anwendungen zum Einfrieren des Wärmetauschers führen!
Piping connections
In most applications the highest efficiency will be realized by
connecting the heat exchanger for counter-current flow.
The primary side of the heat exchanger is identified by a red or blue
label. The primary channels are the inner channels. The first and
last channel is always on the secondary side.
Attention: Insure that severe vibrations or pulsations cannot be
transmitted to the heat exchanger by installing vibration absorbers
in the piping and using vibration absorbing material between the
heat exchanger and the equipment. Service life of the heat
exchangers is markedly reduced by incorrect or inadequate
automatic control. Here are some factors which have a detrimental
effect on the service life. This facts should be avoided:
 Oversized regulating valves
 Excessive variations in system differential pressures
 Regulating valves of poor quality
 incorrect regulator settings
 Incorrect sensor placing
Attention: On new or renovated systems, flushing the liquid piping
to remove construction debris is recommended before connecting
the piping to the heat exchanger. A mesh size of 0,8 mm (closed
circuits) and 0,08 mm (open circuits) will retain any particle. The
strainer must be located at the inlet to the heat exchanger.
Blockage in the heat exchanger will lead to fouling or freezing of the
heat exchanger!
Raccordement au système de tuyauteries
Pour assurer un échange de chaleur optimal, les fluides primaire et
secondaire doivent circuler à contre-courant dans l‘échangeur.
Le côté primaire de l’échangeur de chaleur est identifié par une
pastille rouge ou bleu. Les canaux primaires sont les canaux
intérieurs. Le premier et dernier canal sont toujours du côté
secondaire.
Attention: Les tuyauteries sont à monter de telle façon qu’aucun
mouvement, vibration, tension ou coup de bélier ou forces divers
venant de ces tuyauteries ne puissent se répercuter sur l’échangeur
de chaleur. La longévité des échangeurs peut être réduite
considérablement par une régulation mauvaise ou insuffisante. Les
facteurs suivants agissent de manière négative sur cette longévité:
 vannes de régulation surdimensionnées
 vannes de régulation de mauvaise qualité
 mauvais réglage de ces vannes
 trop grandes variations de pression
 mauvais emplacement de la sonde de mesure.
Attention: Avant le raccordement de l’échangeur de chaleur, il faut
impérativement procéder à un rinçage de l’installation. Installer un
filtre de granulométrie 0,8 mm pour circuits fermés et de 0,08 mm
pour circuits ouverts afin de prévenir un encrassement à l’entrée de
l’échangeur. En effet, des impuretés dans le système peuvent
conduire à la corrosion et, dans certains cas d’utilisation, au gel de
l‘échangeur!

Achtung:
Die Wärmetauscher dürfen keine dunkleren Anlassfarben als Lötanschluss
„Strohgelb“ annehmen, da sonst Korrosionsgefahr besteht. Säubern, entfetten und polieren Sie die Oberfläche des
Keine starken Kräfte und Momente auf den Anschluss Anschlusses und des Kupferrohres. Entfernen Sie Oxide. Tragen
ausüben. Sie das Flussmittel auf. Um Oxidation zu vermeiden ist der
Wärmetauscher von innen mit Stickstoff zu schützen. Die Flamme
Warning: nicht in Richtung Wärmetauscher richten, bei max. 650 °C löten.
The heat exchangers must not develop any darker Lötmaterial: 45 - 55 % Silberlot. Benutzen Sie einen nassen Lappen
annealing colours than 'straw yellow' as otherwise (1), um den Wärmetauscher vor Überhitzung zu schützen. Halten
there is a danger of corrosion. Do not exert any high forces Sie das Rohr in einer fixierten Position beim Löten.
and torques on the connection. Achtung: Zu starke Erwärmung kann zum Schmelzen des Kupfers
und damit zur Zerstörung des Wärmetauschers führen!
Attention:
Au démarrage, la couleur des échangeurs de chaleur ne doit Schweißanschluss
en aucun cas être plus sombre qu’un jaune paille, sinon il y a WIG-Schweißung verwenden.
risque de corrosion. Benutzen Sie einen nassen Lappen, um den Wärmetauscher vor
Überhitzung zu schützen.
Um Oxidation zu vermeiden ist der Wärmetauscher von innen mit
Stickstoff zu schützen.
Beispiel einer Lötverbindung
Sample of soldering connection Gewindeanschluss
Exemple de brasage Den Wärmetauscher montieren und anschließend die
Rohrleitungen über die Gewindeanschlüsse mit dem
Wärmetauscher verbinden.
Soldering connection
Clean the soldering assembly surface at the copper tube and heat
exchanger connections. Polish the surfaces to remove oxides.
Apply the flux to the surface. In order to prevent oxidation, the heat
exchanger is to be protected from the inside with nitrogen. Do not
aim the flame in the direction of the heat exchanger, solder at a
maximum temperature of 650 °C (1200 °F). Soldering material: 45 -
55 % silver filler for brazing. Use a wet rag (1) to prevent
overheating of the heat exchanger. Hold the tube in a fixed position
during soldering.
Warning: Excessive heating can lead to fusion of the copper and
thus to the destruction of the heat exchanger!
Welding connection
Use TIG (GTAW) welding.
Use a wet rag to prevent overheating of the heat exchanger.
In order to avoid oxidation the heat exchanger has to be protected
from the inside with nitrogen.
Threaded connection
Mount the heat exchanger and then connect the pipes to the heat
exchanger by means of the threaded connections.
Raccords brasés
Nettoyez les embouts du tuyau en cuivre et les raccords de
l’échangeur de chaleur. Enlevez toutes traces d’huile ou de
poussière. Polir la surface pour enlever toute trace d’oxydation.
Utiliser de l’azote pour protéger l’intérieur de l’échangeur de toute
oxydation. Ne pas diriger la flamme de brasage vers l’échangeur de
chaleur. Chauffer la surface à braser à une température max. de
650 °C, utiliser une brasure à l‘argent à 45 - 55 %. Utiliser des
linges mouillés (1) pour protéger l’échangeur d’une surchauffe.
Tenez le tuyau dans une position fixe pendant le brasage.
Attention: Un chauffage trop intense peut provoquer la fusion du
cuivre et la destruction de l’échangeur.
Raccords soudés
Utiliser un procédé de soudage de type WIG.
Utiliser un linge mouillé pour protéger l’échangeur de toute
surchauffe.
Utiliser de l’azote pour protéger l’intérieur de l’appareil de toute
oxydation.
Raccords filetés
Monter l’échangeur de chaleur et le raccorder aux tuyauteries à
l’aide de raccords filetés.

Inbetriebnahme Une évacuation d’air insuffisante empêcherait un rendement
Vor Inbetriebnahme ist zu kontrollieren, dass die auf dem maximum des échangeurs de chaleur, étant donné que la surface
Typenschild befindlichen Betriebsdaten nicht überschritten werden. d‘échange ne serait pas disponible dans sa totalité. De plus, un
Überprüfen Sie die Schraubverbindungen auf Anzug. reste d’air augmente le risque de corrosion. Démarrer
Die den Wärmetauscher speisenden Pumpen müssen mit simultanément et lentement les deux côtés primaire et secondaire.
Absperrventilen ausgerüstet sein. Pumpen oder Anlagen, die Si cela n’est pas possible démarrer le côté chaud en premier.
höhere Betriebsdrücke als für den Apparat zulässig erzeugen, sind Lorsque l’installation reste longtemps à l‘arrêt, l’échangeur de
mit Sicherheitsventilen auszurüsten. Die Pumpen dürfen keine Luft chaleur est à vidanger complètement et à nettoyer, et ceci tout
ansaugen, damit es zu keinen Betriebsstörungen durch particulièrement en cas de risque de gel, d’utilisation de produits
Wasserschläge kommt. Um Druckschläge zu vermeiden, sind die agressifs ou pouvant provoquer un encrassement biologique.
Pumpen gegen geschlossene Ventile anzufahren. Die Ventile im
Vor- und Rücklauf sind möglichst gleichzeitig langsam zu öffnen bis
die Betriebstemperatur erreicht ist. Druckstöße sind zu vermeiden.
Während des Füllens ist der Apparat über die in der Rohrleitung
befindlichen Entlüftungsventile zu entlüften. Unzulänglich entlüftete
Wärmetauscher erbringen keine volle Leistung, da nicht die volle
Heizfläche zur Verfügung steht. Verbleibende Luft erhöht die
Korrosionsgefahr. Das Abfahren hat für beide Seiten (Primär- und
Sekundärseite) langsam und gleichzeitig zu erfolgen. Ist dies nicht
möglich, ist die warme Seite zuerst abzufahren. Bei längerem
Stillstand der Anlage ist der Wärmetauscher vollständig zu
entleeren und zu reinigen. Dies gilt insbesondere bei Frostgefahr,
aggressiven Medien und bei Medien, die zu biologischem Fouling
neigen.
Start of operation
Before putting the device into operation it has to be checked to
ensure that the operation data shown on the nameplate are not
exceeded.
Check the tightness of the screw connections.
The pumps feeding the heat exchanger must be equipped with
shut-off valves. Pumps which generate higher pressures than
stated for the device must be fitted with safety valves. The pumps
must not aspirate any air so that no disruptions of operation due to
water hammer occur. In order to avoid pressure surges, the pumps
are to be started up against closed valves. The valves in the supply
and return lines are to be opened slowly and, as far as possible,
simultaneously, until the service temperature is reached. Pressure
surges are to be avoided. During filling the device is to be vented
via the vent valves located in the piping. Inadequately vented heat
exchangers do not yield their full performance as the complete
heating surface is not available. Remaining air increases the danger
of corrosion. Shutdown must be effected slowly and simultaneously
for both sides (primary and secondary sides). If this is not possible,
the hot side is to be shutdown first. For a relatively long downtime of
the plant the heat exchanger is to be completely drained and
cleaned. This applies in particular when there is a danger of frost, in
the case of aggressive fluids and fluids which have a biological
fouling tendency.
Mise en service
Avant la mise en service, vérifier que les conditions d’utilisation
prévues ne dépassent pas les indications mentionnées sur la
plaque signalétique.
En outre, contrôler que tous les raccords filetés soient bien serrés.
Les pompes doivent être équipées de vannes d’arrêt. Les pompes
produisant une perte de charges supérieure à celle donnée par
notre échangeur doivent être munies de vannes de sécurité. Pour
éviter tout dysfonctionnement, les pompes ne doivent en aucun cas
aspirer de l’air. Pour éviter de soudaines poussées de pression, les
pompes doivent être démarrées vannes fermées. Les vannes dans
les circuits départ et retour sont autant que possible à ouvrir
simultanément et lentement jusqu’à ce que la température de
fonctionnement soit atteinte. Eviter toute poussée soudaine de
pression. Durant le remplissage, l’air contenu dans l’échangeur est
à évacuer via les vis de purge montées sur les conduites.

Betrieb Frostschutz
Nach Inbetriebnahme ist zu prüfen, dass keine Druckpulsationen Eisbildung führt zur Zerstörung des Wärmetauschers. Bei
auf den Apparat einwirken. Ist der Wärmetauscher zwischen einem Temperaturen nahe dem Gefrierpunkt ist mit Frostschutzmitteln
Stellventil und einem Differenzdruckregler eingebaut, so ist (z.B.: Glykol) zu arbeiten.
sicherzustellen, dass bei gleichzeitigem Schließen beider Zur Installation eines Temperaturfühlers ist die Ausrüstung des
Reglereinrichtungen sich kein Unterdruck bilden kann und damit Wärmetauschers mit einem G½ Innengewindestutzen möglich.
Dampfschläge vermieden werden. Diese können dem Primär- oder Sekundäranschluss
In Fernwärmesystemen ist besonderes Augenmerk darauf zu legen, gegenüberliegend angeordnet werden.
dass die sekundärseitige Druckhaltung auf die maximale
Fernwärmevorlauftemperatur ausgelegt ist. Andernfalls kann es im Anti-freeze
Teillastbereich zu Dampfschlägen kommen. Icing results in the destruction of the heat exchanger. At
Überprüfen Sie die Funktionsfähigkeit der Regeleinrichtungen. (vgl. temperatures close to the freezing point anti-freeze fluids (e.g.
„Anschluss an das Rohrnetz“) glycol) are to be used. For the fitting of temperature sensor the
Generell ist darauf zu achten, dass keine Betriebszustände fitting of the heat exchanger with a G½ internal thread socket is
entstehen können, die im Widerspruch zu dieser Montage-, possible. These can be arranged opposite the primary or secondary
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung stehen. connection.
Achtung:
Dampfschläge sowie Druck- und Temperaturpulsationen Protection antigel
können zu Leckagen im Wärmetauscher führen. Une prise en glace de l‘échangeur peut conduire à sa détérioration.
Es ist auf ausreichenden Potentialausgleich zu achten, um den Lorsque la température est proche du point de solidification, utiliser
Korrosionsschutz nicht zu gefährden. un antigel (par ex. du glycol). Il est possible d’équiper l’échangeur
de chaleur d’un piquage G½ permettant l‘installation d’une sonde
Operation de température à monter face au raccordement primaire ou
After the device has been put into service it is to be checked to secondaire.
ensure that no pressure pulsations are acting on the device. If the
heat exchanger is fitted between a control valve and a differential
pressure regulator, it is to be ensured that with simultaneous
closing of both regulating devices no negative pressure can form
and thus steam hammers are avoided.
In district heating systems particular attention is to be paid to the
fact that the secondary pressure maintaining system is designed for
the maximum district heating supply temperature. Otherwise steam
hammers can occur in the part-load range.
Check the functional efficiency of the control devices (cf.
“Connection to the piping network”).
It is generally to be ensured that no operating conditions can arise
which are contradictory to these assembly, operating and
maintenance instructions.
Warning:
Steam hammers, pressure and temperature cycles can lead to
leaks in the heat exchanger.
Adequate equipotential bonding is to be ensured in order not
to endanger the corrosion-proofing.
Fonctionnement
Après la mise en service, vérifier qu’il n’y ait pas de variations de
pression pouvant s‘exercer sur l’échangeur. Lorsque l’échangeur
est monté entre une vanne de régulation et un régulateur de
pression, veiller à ce qu’il n’y ait pas de sous-pression lors de la
fermeture simultanée des deux dispositifs de réglage afin d’éviter
des coups de bélier. Dans les installations de chauffage urbain,
veiller tout spécialement à ce que la pression dans le circuit
secondaire soit adaptée à la température maximale côté départ du
chauffage urbain. Dans le cas contraire, des poussées soudaines
de pression pourraient se produire. Vérifier le bon fonctionnement
des dispositifs de régulation. (Voir aussi „Raccordement au
système de tuyauteries“).
En règle générale, veiller à ce qu’il ne se produise pas de
conditions d’utilisation contraires à nos instructions de montage, de
service et d’entretien.
Attention: Toutes poussées ou variations soudaines de
pression ou de température peuvent endommager l’appareil et
provoquer des fuites dans l’échangeur de chaleur.
Veiller à un équilibre potentiel électrique suffisant pour ne pas
endommager la protection anticorrosive.

Verschmutzung / Fouling Reinigung
Es ist darauf zu achten, dass die DIN Richtlinien für Trink- und Sollten aufgrund der Wasserqualität (z.B. hohe Härtegrade oder
Heizungswasser, Vd-TÜV Richtlinien, Richtlinien des AGFW sowie starke Verschmutzung) eine Belagbildung zu erwarten sein, ist in
die KELVION Richtlinien für Wasserinhaltsstoffe eingehalten regelmäßigen Abständen eine Reinigung vorzunehmen. Es besteht
werden (siehe Folgeseite). die Möglichkeit der Reinigung durch Spülen. Den Wärmetauscher
Viele unterschiedliche Faktoren können Fouling und entgegen der normalen Strömungsrichtung mit geeigneter
Verschmutzung beeinflussen. Diese sind z.B.: Temperatur, Reinigungslösung spülen. Werden Chemikalien zur Reinigung
Strömungsgeschwindigkeit, Turbulenz, Verteilung und verwendet, ist darauf zu achten, dass diese keine Unverträglichkeit
Wasserqualität. gegenüber Edelstahl, Kupfer oder Nickel aufweisen.
Die Medien sind mit größtmöglichen Massenströmen zu fahren. Bei Nichtbeachtung kann zur Zerstörung des Wärmetauschers führen!
zu geringen Massenströmen (Teillast) kann die Turbulenz im
Wärmetauscher zurückgehen und die Verschmutzungsneigung Grundsätzlich sind die Sicherheitsvorschriften und Empfehlungen
ansteigen. der Reinigungsmittelhersteller zu beachten. Für die
Kalkablagerungen im Wärmetauscher können bei Temperaturen Reinigungsflüssigkeit nur chloridfreies bzw. chloridarmes Wasser
größer 50°C (122°F) in Abhängigkeit zur Wasserqualität auftreten. geringer Härte verwenden.
Turbulente Strömung und niedrigere Temperaturen reduzieren das
Risiko des Verkalkens. Wählen Sie das Reinigungsmittel nach Art der zu entfernenden
Beim Abfahren der Anlage ist darauf zu achten, dass zuerst die Verschmutzung sowie nach Beständigkeit der
Primärseite und dann die Sekundärseite geschlossen wird. Beim Wärmetauscherplatten. Vom Reinigungsmittelhersteller sollte auf
Anfahren wird erst die Sekundärseite und dann die Primärseite jedem Fall die Bestätigung vorliegen, dass das Reinigungsmittel
geöffnet. Dadurch wird eine Überhitzung des Wärmetauschers den zu reinigenden Plattenwärmetauscher nicht angreift.
vermieden. Reinigen Sie den Wärmetauscher entsprechend der
Arbeitsanweisung des Reinigungsmittelherstellers. Spülen Sie den
Achtung: gereinigten Wärmetauscher vor dem Wiedereinbau stets
Schlechte Wasserqualität führt zu erhöhter ausreichend mit klarem Wasser.
Korrosionsanfälligkeit!
Cleaning
Fouling Should formation of deposits due to the water quality (e.g. high
It is to be ensured that the DIN Guidelines for Drinking and Heating degrees of hardness or severe fouling) be expected, cleaning is to
Water, Vd-TÜV guidelines, guidelines of the AGFW and the be carried out at regular intervals, for example by means of rinsing.
KELVION Guidelines for Water Constituents are observed (see next Rinse the heat exchanger against the normal flow direction with a
page). suitable cleaning solution. If chemicals are used for cleaning, it has
Many different factors can influence fouling. These are, for to be taken care that these don`t show any incompatibility against
example, velocity, temperature, turbulence, distribution, water stainless steel, copper or nickel. Non observance can cause the
quality. destruction of the heat exchanger!
The fluids are to be moved at the highest possible mass flows. In
the event of excessively low mass flows (part load) the turbulence Always follow the safety instructions and recommendations of the
in the heat exchanger can decrease and the fouling tendency cleaning agent manufacturer. Only use chloride-free or low-chloride
increase. water with a low hardness value for the cleaning liquid.
Lime deposits in the heat exchanger can be possible at
temperatures above 50°C (122°F). Turbulent flow and lower Choose a cleaning agent suitable for the type of contamination and
temperatures reduce the risk of calcification. for the properties of the heat exchanger plate materials. In any
During shutdown of the unit it is be ensured that first the primary case, a confirmation by the manufacturer of the cleaning agent
side and then the secondary side is closed. During start-up first the should be available, stating that the agent does not affect the plate
secondary side and then the primary side is opened. In that way materials used in the heat exchanger. Clean the heat exchanger
overheating of the heat exchanger is avoided. plates according to the work instructions of the cleaning product
manufacturer.
Warning: Before reassembling the cleaned heat exchanger, always rinse
Poor water quality leads to a higher susceptibility to corrosion! them with sufficient clean water.
Encrassement Nettoyage
Les instructions DIN concernant l’eau potable et l’eau chaude Si, en raison de la qualité de l’eau (dureté extrême ou forte pollution
sanitaire, les instructions Vd-TÜV et AGFW ainsi que nos par exemple) on peut s’attendre à des risques d’entartrage, il y a
instructions sur la composition de l’eau sont à respecter (Voir pages lieu de procéder à des nettoyages réguliers, à des rinçages par
suivantes). Divers facteurs sont en mesure d’influencer exemple.
l’encrassement, par ex. la vitesse, la température, la turbulence, la
répartition du fluide, la qualité de l‘eau. Le produit de nettoyage approprié circulera dans le sens opposé au
Si le débit devait être trop faible (charge partielle) la turbulence fluide. Pour certains encrassements et dépôts tenaces à la surface
dans l’échangeur serait également faible et le risque des plaques que cette méthode de nettoyage ne permet pas
d’encrassement augmenterait. d’éliminer, il est possible d’utiliser des produits chimiques. Veiller à
Des températures supérieures à 50° C (122°F) peuvent provoquer ce que ces produits soient compatibles avec l’inox, le cuivre ou le
des dépôts de calcaire sur les surfaces internes de l‘échangeur. nickel. Dans le cas contraire, il peut s’ensuivre une détérioration de
Une augmentation de la turbulence, du débit et des températures l’échangeur!
moins élevées réduisent les risques d’entartrage.
Lors de l’arrêt de l’installation, fermer d’abord le côté primaire et Respectez toujours les consignes de sécurité et les
ensuite le côté secondaire. Pour la remise en route, ouvrir en recommandations d’utilisation du produit de nettoyage du fabricant.
premier le côté secondaire et ensuite le côté primaire. Ceci permet Diluez le produit de nettoyage dans une eau ne contenant pas ou
d’éviter une surchauffe de l’échangeur. peu d’ions chlore et de très faible dureté.
Attention:
Une eau de mauvaise qualité accroit les risques de corrosion!

Korrosionsbeständigkeit von gelöteten Plattenwärmetauschern gegenüber Wasserinhaltsstoffen
Der gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher besteht aus geprägten Edelstahlplatten 1.4404 bzw. SA240 316L. Es ist somit das Korrosionsverhalten
von Edelstahl und dem Lotmittel Kupfer, Nickel oder VacInox zu berücksichtigen.
Corrosion resistance of soldered plate heat exchangers compared to water constituents

The brazed plate heat exchangers consist of embossed plates of stainless steel 1.4404 or SA240 316L. Therefore the corrosion resistance
of the stainless steel and of the brazing material, copper, nickel or VacInox, must be taken into consideration.
Résistance à la corrosion des échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées pour les composants contenus dans l‘eau
Les échangeurs de chaleur à plaques brasées sont constitués d’un empilage de plaques corruguées en acier inox 1.4404 ou
SA240 316L. Il faut donc tenir compte de la résistance à la corrosion de l’acier inox et du matériau de brasure, cuivre, nickel ou VacInox.
Folgende Werte für Wasserinhaltsstoffe und für Kennwerte sollten eingehalten werden (1.4404 - SA240 316L):
The following values for water constituents and parameters are to be observed (1.4404 - SA240 316L):
En ce qui concerne les éléments contenus dans l’eau ne pas dépasser les valeurs suivantes (1.4404 - SA240 316L):
Wasserinhaltsstoff + Kennwerte Einheit kupfergelötet nickelgelötet VacInox gelötet

Water constituent + parameters Unit copper brazed nickel brazed VacInox brazed
Eléments contenus dans l’eau Unité brasure au cuivre brasure au nickel brasure au VacInox
pH-Wert
pH-value 7–9 6 - 10 6 - 10
Valeur pH unter Beachtung SI-Index
Sättigungs-Index SI (delta pH-Wert) Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Saturation-Index SI (delta pH-value) -0,2 < 0 < +0,2 No specification No specification
Indes de saturation SI (valeur delta pH) Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Gesamthärte
Total hardness °dH 6 - 15 6 - 15 6 - 15
Dureté totale
Leitfähigkeit Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Conductivity µS/cm 10...500 No specification No specification
Conductibilité Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Abfilterbare Stoffe
Filtered substances mg/l <30 <30 <30
Substances filtrées
Chloride Siehe Diagramm Seite 9, oberhalb 100°C keine Chloride zulässig
Chlorides mg/l See diagram page 9, above 100°C no chlorides permitted
Chlorures Voir diagramme page 9, au-dessus de 100°C pas de chlorures admissibles
Freies Chlor
Free Chlorine mg/l <0,5 <0,5 <0,5
Chlore libre
Schwefelwasserstoff (H2S) Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Hydrogen sulphide mg/l <0,05 No specification No specification
Sulfure d’hydrogène Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Ammoniak (NH3/NH4+ ) Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Ammonia mg/l <2 No specification No specification
Ammoniaque Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Sulfat
Sulphates mg/l <100 <300 <400
Sulfates
Hydrogenkarbonat Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Hydrogen carbonate mg/l <300 No specification No specification
Carbone d’hydrogène Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Hydrogenkarbonat / Sulfat Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Hydrogen carbonate / Sulphates mg/l >1,0 No specification No specification
Carbone d’hydrogène / Sulfates Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Sulfid
Sulphide mg/l <1 <5 <7
Sulfures
Nitrat Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Nitrate mg/l <100 No specification No specification
Nitrates Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Nitrit Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Nitrite mg/l <0,1 No specification No specification
Nitrites Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Eisen, gelöst
Iron mg/l <0,2 <0,2 <0,2
Fer
Mangan Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Manganese mg/l <0,1 No specification No specification
Manganèse Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation
Freie aggressive Kohlensäure Keine Festlegung Keine Festlegung
Free aggressive carbonic acid mg/l <20 No specification No specification
Acide carbonique libre Pas de recommandation Pas de recommandation

Die genannten Werte sind Richtwerte, die unter bestimmten Betriebsbedingungen abweichen können.
Sollten Sie Fragen haben, rufen Sie uns bitte an unter Tel. +49 3447 55 39 0.
The values stated are guide values which show variations under certain operating conditions.
Should you have any questions please call us on Phone +49 3447 55 39 0.
Les valeurs données sont des valeurs pilotes susceptibles de changer sous certaines conditions de fonctionnement. N’hésitez pas à
nous contacter si vous avez des questions Tel. +49 3447 55 39 0.
Cloridgehalt, Chloride content, Chlorue
10000
oberhalb : kein Einsatz

above : not permissible
1000 au-dessus : pas d‘utilisation
admissible [mg/kg]
100
unterhalb: Einsatz ohne Probleme

below: no problem for application
10 dessous: sans problémes
1
0 25 50 75 100
Temperatur, Temperature, Température [°C]
Zulässiger Chloridgehalt in Abhängigkeit der Temperatur (1.4404 - SA240 316L)

Permitted chloride content into dependence of the temperature (1.4404 - SA240 316L)
Résistance à la corrosion en fonction de la température (1.4404 - SA240 316L)

Volumenangaben KELVION gelötete Plattenwärmetauscher
Volume of KELVION brazed plate heat exchangers
Volume des échangeurs de chaleur KELVION à plaques brasées
BPHE BPHE
G…; W…; NP… * Volumen/Kanal (Liter) G…; W…; NP… * Volumen/Kanal (Liter)
* Volume / Channel (Litre) * Volume / Channel (Litre)
* Volume / Canal (en Litres) * Volume / Canal (en Litres)
100; 1 0,025 525 0,125
108 0,010 700; 7 0,230
200; 2 0,030 757 0,310
220; 22 0,046 760 0,410
228 0,019 770 0,170
240; 24 0,070 800; 8 0,221
300; 3 0,030 900; 9 0,399
400; 4 0,065 910 0,480
418 0,055 1000H; 10 0,600
420 0,076 1000L;10L 0,466
Primär/primary/primaire
500; 505; 530; 535; 5 0,100 1000L;10L 0,733

Sekundär/secondary/secondaire
550 0,070
VP Volumen Primär:
Volume primary / Volume Côté primaire
Vs Volumen Sekundär
Volume secondary / Volume Côté secondaire
Plattenanzahl, number of plates, nombre de plaques
Beispiel, example, exemple:
BPHE: GBS100M-30
: 30
: 0,025
P...Primärseite, Primary Side, Côté primaire:
S...Sekundärseite, Secondary side, Côté secondaire:
- 10 - Kelvion Brazed PHE GmbH

PUR Hartschaum Isolierungen
PUR Hartschaumisolierungen bestehen aus zwei Halbschalen, die mittels zweier
Halteklammern verbunden werden. Die Montage der Isolierung erfolgt nach dem
Anschluss des Wärmetauschers an das Rohrnetz. Die Dauerwärmebeständigkeit
der Isolierung beträgt 130°C.
PU hardened polyurethane foam insulation

PU hardened polyurethane foam insulations consist of two half shells which are
bound together by two retaining clips. Fitting of the insulation is carried out after the
connection of the heat exchanger to the piping network. The durability of the heat
resistance properties is ensured up to 130°C.
Isolations en mousse de polyuréthane dure

Les isolations en mousse de polyuréthane dure sont constituées de deux coquilles
maintenues par deux agrafes. Le montage se fait après le raccordement de
l’échangeur au système de tuyauteries. Cette isolation convient pour des
applications dont la température maximale est de 130°C.
Diffusionsdichte Isolierungen
Diffusionsdichte Isolierungen bestehen aus 10/20 mm starkem geschlossenzelligen
Kunstkautschuk auf NBR Basis. Die Dauerwärmebeständigkeit der Isolierung
beträgt 105°C. Alle Teile sind passend für den jeweiligen Wärmetauscher
zugeschnitten und mit einer Klebeschicht versehen.
Installieren Sie die Isolierung erst, nachdem alle Löt- oder Schweißarbeiten
abgeschlossen sind und der Wärmetauscher abgekühlt ist. Überprüfen Sie die
Übereinstimmung von Isolierung und Wärmetauschertyp.
Nehmen Sie den Frontdeckel (1) und entfernen Sie die Klebefolie. Kleben Sie den
Frontdeckel auf die Frontplatte des Wärmetauschers (4). Kleben Sie den Enddeckel
(2), nachdem Sie die Klebefolie entfernt haben, auf die Endplatte des
Wärmetauschers (4). Nehmen Sie den Mantel (3) und entfernen Sie die Trägerfolie
der Klebeausrüstung. Kleben Sie den Mantel unter leichtem Zug um das
Plattenpaket des Wärmetauschers (4). Entfernen Sie die Klebefolie an der
Stoßkante des Mantels und kleben Sie die zwei Enden aneinander. Entnehmen Sie
der Verpackung das Kunstkautschukband und kleben Sie dieses an den Nähten um
die Anschlüsse und am Mantelstoß auf.
Diffusion resistant sealed insulation

Diffusion resistant sealed insulation consists of 10/20 mm gauge closed-pore
synthetic rubber of a NBR base with smooth surface skin. The durability of the heat
resistance properties is ensured up to 105°C. All insulation elements can be
trimmed to the size of any heat exchanger equipment and then treaded with an
adhesive coating.
Install the insulation kit after all soldering or welding is completed and the unit is
cooled down.
Check the fit of the insulation pieces to assure proper size before installation.
Take the front with adhesive (1) and remove the backing film. Press the panel in
place firmly and smooth it down with even pressure on the heat exchanger (4).
Install the rear panel (2), by removing the backing film. Install the side panel (3) by
removing the backing film. Starting at one end, wrap around the heat exchanger
with a slight stretching motion. At the end, remove the edge film and press the two
ends firmly together. Apply the thin cover pieces over the seams located around the
connections and at the place where the side panel ends meet.
Isolations NBR
Ces isolations sont faites en caoutchouc synthétique alvéolé à base de NBR.
L‘épaisseur est de 10 ou 20 mm et la surface est lisse. Cette isolation convient pour
des applications dont la température maximale est de 105°C. Elles sont livrées en
pièces autocollantes, prédécoupées et adaptées à chaque modèle d’échangeur.
Procéder au montage après achèvement de tous les travaux de brasage et de
soudure et lorsque l’échangeur est froid. Contrôler que l’isolation convient bien au
type d’échangeur.
Prenez la face avant (1), enlevez le film de protection et collez-la sur la face avant
de l’échangeur (4). Prenez maintenant la face arrière (2), enlevez le film de
protection et collez-la contre la face arrière de l’échangeur (4). Prenez l’enveloppe
(3) et enlevez le film de protection. Enveloppez l’échangeur (4) en tirant légèrement
sur l‘enveloppe. Enlevez le film de protection au point de rencontre des 2 extrémités
et appuyez ces 2 extrémités l’une contre l’autre pour bien les coller. Veiller
également à ce que l’isolation soit bien positionnée au niveau des raccordements.

Verteilerrohre
Achtung: Nur für Verdampfer-Anwendungen!
Das Verteilerrohr besteht, wie unten abgebildet, aus einer Lanze
(2), deren Länge von der Plattenanzahl des Wärmetauschers
abhängt und einem Ring (1), dessen Umfang von dem Typ des
Wärmetauschers bestimmt wird. Beide Teile werden fest verbunden
geliefert.
Die Lanze ist mit einem Schlitz versehen. Beim Einbau ist darauf zu
achten, dass dieser Schlitz nach unten gerichtet ist (5:00 Uhr).
Durch den Schlitz gelangt das noch flüssige Kältemittel in den
Wärmetauscher und gewährleistet die gleichmäßige Verteilung des
Kältemittels in die Primärkanäle. Der Ring des Verteilerrohres wird
in den primärseitigen Anschluss des Wärmetauschers mit Silberlot
AF 319 hart verlötet. Bitte beachten Sie, dass der Einbau des
Verteilerrohres bestimmte Stutzen am Kältemittel-Eintritt des
Wärmetauschers erfordert (vgl. Tabelle).
Distribution pipes
Attention: Vaporiser applications only!
The distributor pipe consists of a lance-piece (2), whose length is
dependent on the number of plates of the heat exchanger and a
ring (1), whose circumference is determined by the type of heat
exchanger. Both parts are supplied as a screw-jointed fixture. The
lance is equipped with a slot.
The distribution slot has to be mounted in the refrigerant inlet of the
vaporizer, the distribution slot must be mounted downside (5
o`clock position). The fluid refrigerant is fed into the heat exchanger
through the slot and this ensures a uniform distribution of the
refrigerant in the primary channels.
The ring of the distributor pipe is brazed as a fixture in the primary
side connection (refrigerant inlet) of the heat exchanger. Please
note, that the installation of the distributor pipe will require the
Hart löten – Silberlot AF 319 selection of certain specific connection-pieces to the heat
AF 319 silver filler for brazing exchanger (compare table).
Brasure argent AF 319
Distributeurs
Attention: Uniquement pour les échangeurs utilisés en tant
qu’évaporateurs!
Le distributeur (voir plan ci-dessous) comporte un tube (2) dont la
longueur est fonction du nombre de plaques de l’échangeur et un
anneau (1) dont le diamètre dépend du type d’échangeur choisi.
Ces deux pièces sont livrées fixées l’une à l’autre.
Le tube comporte une fente. Lors du montage veiller à ce que cette
fente soit dirigée vers le bas (Pos. 5). C’est par cette fente que le
fluide frigorigène se trouvant encore à l’état liquide, pénètre dans
l’échangeur de chaleur, assurant une répartition régulière du produit
dans les canaux du primaire. L’anneau du distributeur sera brasé
dans le raccord côté primaire de l’échangeur.
Attention: Le montage du distributeur exige des raccords
particuliers sur l’échangeur à l’entrée du fluide frigorigène.
Passend für PWÜ-Typ

Ø Ring/Stutzen Benötigter Stutzen am PWÜ
Ø Cu-Rohr
Suitable for heat exchanger
Ø Ring/connection Required connection
Ø copper pipe type
Ø Joint torique/raccord Lettre-repère pour
Ø tube en cuivre Convient pour l‘échangeur de
l’échangeur de chaleur
chaleur
WP5, WH5
28,70 mm IA 18 mm GB…500, GWH500, GML500
GK…550
WP7, WH7
42,10 mm LZ 22 mm
GB…700, GWH700
GK…770
35,10 mm K WP8, GB…800
28 mm
WP9, WH9
GB…900, GWH900

www.kelvion.com
170522_DE_EN_FR
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Bezeichnung Druckgesteuertes 3/2-Wege-Ventil

Pressure controlled 3/2-way valve
No. 9085-9000-000
Edition 0312
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2 9085-9000-000 / 0312
ORIGINALBETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Inhaltliche Änderungen vorbehalten!
Für Anmerkungen und Vorschläge zur Verbesserung der Dokumentation sind

die Verfasser stets dankbar. Diese können gerichtet werden an:

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_

The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 3
• Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
sorgfältig durch.
• Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt wer-
den.
• Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
________________________________________
• Before installing and maintaining your valve, please read this manual carefully.
• Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
• Please pay attention to the safety advices!
®
Westfalia Separator
4 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile
• Nur Original-Ersatzteile von GEA Westfalia

Separator verwenden. Die Original-
Ersatzteile sind im Ersatzteilkatalog aufge-
führt.
Der Einsatz von nichtoriginalen Teilen führt zu:
– Sicherheitsrisiken,
– verringerter Haltbarkeit dieser Teile,
– reduzierter Verfügbarkeit des Separators,
Fig. 1
– erhöhtem Servicebedarf.
Realisiert sich ein Sicherheitsrisiko beim Einsatz
von nichtoriginalen Ersatzteilen, ergeben sich
unter Umständen hierdurch auch strafrechtliche
Folgen für die handelnden Personen. GEA
Westfalia Separator übernimmt in diesen Fällen
keinerlei Haftung oder Gewährleistung.
Demands relating to spare parts

– safety risks,
ranty claims.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 5
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile ............................................................................... 4

Demands relating to spare parts .......................................................................... 4
1 DEUTSCH 7
Zu dieser Anleitung ........................................................ 8

Ziel der Anleitung ................................................................................................. 8
Abkürzungen und Symbole .................................................................................. 8
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
2 ENGLISH 19
This manual ................................................................. 20

Intention of this manual ...................................................................................... 20
Shortcuts and symbols ....................................................................................... 20
Specification of service ................................................ 21

Intended usage ................................................................................................... 21
Storage, transport, disposal ............................................................................... 21
Terms of general application .............................................................................. 21
Device description ........................................................ 22

Emergency operation ......................................................................................... 23
Spare Parts .................................................................. 24

Initial operation and maintenance ................................ 26
Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve ............................................ 26
®
Westfalia Separator
6 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
Faxformular - Fax Form ............................................. 32
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 7
1 DEUTSCH
Zu dieser Anleitung ........................................................ 8

Ziel der Anleitung ................................................................................................. 8
Abkürzungen und Symbole .................................................................................. 8
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
®
Westfalia Separator
8 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu

installieren und zu warten. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes
Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird
und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kun-
denbetreuer.
Abkürzungen und Symbole
Achtung! Bitte Achtung! Heiße

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente
Information beachten
Verletzungs- Hinweis auf

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 9
Leistungsbeschreibung
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Die druckgesteuerte 3/2-Wege-Zulaufarmatur ist zum Einsatz im industriellen Be-
reich geeignet. Die Armatur ermöglicht das Steuern gasförmiger und flüssiger Me-
dien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und
den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr!
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in das Ventil kann zu

schweren Verletzungen führen und sollte unbedingt vermieden werden!
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung

Die Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie
Feuchtigkeit oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst
kurz vor Montagebeginn zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu
schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss
nehmen. Bitte informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit be-
schädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmit-
telbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Pa-
rameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind unverzüglich
nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als abgenommen.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage

nach Erhalt der Ware schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der
Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchge-
spült werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei
der Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingun-
gen getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert
und getestet werden. Die Endlagen (offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und
ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter oder andere elektrische Geräte
zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung überprüfen!
®
Westfalia Separator
10 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Gerätebeschreibung
1 Einstellschraube d. Drossel
2 Eingang
3 Ausgang (stromlos offen)
4 Ausgang nach Betätigung
5 Zylinder
6a Sicherungskappe
6b Notbetätigung [Druckventil] (SW 19)
7 Befestigungsbohrungen
8 Schalldämpfer
9 Stecker für Magnetventil
10 Magnetventil
11 Notbetätigung [Magnetventil]
12 Lufteinlass
13 Temperaturfühler PT100
14 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 11
Notbetätigung
Sollte der Versorgungsdruck des Ventils einmal ausfallen, gehen Sie bitte
wie folgt vor:
 Transparente Kappe (6a) am oberen Ende des 3/2-Wege-Ventils ab-

schrauben.
 Sechskantmutter [SW 19] (6b) bis zu deutlich spürbarem Widerstand (ca.
10 mm) einschrauben.
 Ventil ist nun geschaltet. Vergessen Sie nicht, nach der Instandsetzung
der Druckluftversorgung die Notbetätigungsschraube zurück in ihren Ur-
sprung zu versetzen
Sollte die Versorgungsspannung für das Magnetventil (10) einmal ausfallen,

gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor:
 Mit Schraubendreher die Notbetätigung (11) um 180° drehen , bis das Ven-
til öffnet.
Die Stellung der Notbetätigung ist mit den Buchstaben o = geöffnet (open) und
c = geschlossen (closed) gekennzeichnet. Im Lieferzustand ist die Notbetäti-
gung auf die Position „geschlossen“ eingestellt („c“ steht rechts).
 Für die normale Funktion des Magnetventils muss die Notbetätigung wie-
der zurückgesetzt werden.
 Das Bild „A“ zeigt die geschlossene Stellung, das Bild „B“ die geöffnete
Stellung.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Ersatzteilsets
Rückschlagventil (9) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-920
Zylinder (Luft) (3) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-930
Klarsichtkappe mit Dichtung (1) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-940
Pilotventil mit Kabelkopf, Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-600

Skintopverschraubung und
Schalldämpfer mit montierter
Winkelverschraubung1/8 – DN8 und
montierter lösbarer Verschraubung 1/4 - 1/8
mit Drossel (2)
Doppel PT100 (4) Teil-Nr. 0001-1579-400
Spindeleinheit vollständig (6) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-950
Einschraubteil vollständig (5) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-960
O-Ring - 22x2 - 1 Stk. (7) Teil-Nr. 0007-2412-830
O-Ringe - 12x2 - 3 Stk. (8) Teil-Nr. 0007-1929-830
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 13
1 Klarsichtkappe mit Dichtung

2 Pilotventil mit Kabelkopf
3 Zylinder (Luft)
4 Doppel PT100
5 Einschraubteil vollständig
6 Spindeleinheit vollständig
7 O-Ring 22x2
8 O-Ringe 12x2
9 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
14 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen.
Das Ventilgehäuse mit den Flanschdichtungen vor-

sichtig zwischen die zuvor angebrachten Flansche
schieben.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass die verwendeten Dichtungen für das Durch-
fluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Die Flanschbohrungen zueinander ausrichten und

passende Schrauben oder Stehbolzen in die Bohrun-
gen stecken bzw. einschrauben.
Die Flansche mit passenden Schrauben fest und

kreuzweise befestigen bzw. passende Muttern fest
und kreuzweise auf die Stehbolzen aufschrauben.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 15
Wartung
Eine vorbeugende Wartung oder Reinigung wird in Abhängigkeit von den Be-
triebsbedingungen und bei auffälliger Veränderung von Schaltzeiten oder Schalt-
geräuschen empfohlen.
Je nach Umgebungsbedingungen sind in regelmäßigen Abständen die Magnet-
spulen auf Risse und Schmutzablagerungen und der elektrische Anschluss auf
festen Sitz und sichere Abdichtung zu überprüfen.
Der Betreiber trägt die Verantwortung für die Festsetzung angemessener Prüf-
und Wartungsintervalle in Abhängigkeit von den Einsatzbedingungen der Ventile.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von geschultem Fachpersonal und mit geeigneten
Werkzeugen durchgeführt werden.
Ablagerungen, Schmutz, gealterte oder verschlissene Dichtungen können zu
Funktionsstörungen führen.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur bei drucklosem Rohrsystem und von der Span-
nungsversorgung getrennten Magneten durchgeführt werden.
1. Kolbeneinheit
Demontage
Befestigungsschrauben des Zylinders lösen. Zylinder demontieren.
Kolbeneinheit demontieren.
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett (z. B. Molykote 55M) nachfetten oder ggf. austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
®
Westfalia Separator
16 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Wichtig: O-Ringe schmieren (z. B. mit temperaturbeständigem Mehrzweck-

fett)
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett schmieren (z. B. Molykote 55M)
Kolbeneinheit wieder montieren
2. Obere Spindellagerung
Demontage - Zylinder demontieren
Befestigungsschrauben des Zylinders lösen. Zylinder demontieren.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 17
Kappe demontieren. Obere Spindellagerung demontie-

ren.
O-Ring nachschmieren (z. B. mit temperaturbeständigem Mehrzweckfett) oder

ggf. komplette obere Spindeleinheit austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.
3. Rückschlagventil
Demontage
Sicherungsblech lösen. Sicherungsblech demontieren.
Rückschlagventil reinigen oder austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.
®
Westfalia Separator
18 9085-9000-000 / 0312
ACHTUNG: Vor Montage der Systemarmatur in die Rohrleitung die korrekte

Sicherung des Haltebleches sicherstellen.
Sicherung des Haltebleches sicherstellen.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 19
2 ENGLISH
This manual ................................................................. 20

Intention of this manual ...................................................................................... 20
Shortcuts and symbols ....................................................................................... 20
Specification of service ................................................ 21

Intended usage ................................................................................................... 21
Storage, transport, disposal ............................................................................... 21
Terms of general application .............................................................................. 21
Device description ........................................................ 22

Emergency operation ......................................................................................... 23
Spare Parts .................................................................. 24

Initial operation and maintenance ................................ 26
Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve ............................................ 26
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
®
Westfalia Separator
20 9085-9000-000 / 0312
This manual
Intention of this manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for
skilled employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
terminology and that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer
advisor!
Shortcuts and symbols
Attention! Please Danger!

read carefully Hot surface!
Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.
For your Please read

information documents
Attention! Hint to the

Risk of injury! manual part.
Supply items
needed!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 21
Specification of service
Intended usage
These pressure controlled valves are suitable for industrial use. The valve enables
the control of gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds
must be suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! 1
Do not put parts of your body or articles into the valve. This can cause
heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
Storage, transport, disposal

The products are protected by packaging against external influences such as
humidity or dirt. We recommend that the packaging is removed only briefly before
the beginning of assembly in order to protect the devices against impurities.
Make sure, that the devices are stored dry and dirt-free.
Influencing the handling during transport requires your assistance – please in-
form us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packaging! An exami-
nation of the technical parameters and a visual check of the products should take
place immediately after delivery. Notice on latent defects is to be given immediate-
ly after detection. Subsequent complaints will not be accepted.
Deficient goods or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest

7 days on receipt of the products in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim
will run out!
Terms of general application

It is advised to clean the valve and piping before initial use. Automated valves
need special attention! These devices can be tested under workshop conditions
only. Security positions should be systematically simulated and tested. The final
positions must be checked (open/closed) and re-adjusted if necessary! Additional
switches or other electric devices for the position feedback must be likewise
checked regarding correct settings.
®
Westfalia Separator
22 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Device description
1 Adjusting screw
2 Input
3 Output (normally open)
4 Output after operation
5 Cylinder
6a Safety cover
6b Emergency operation [valve] (SW 19)
7 fixing hole
8 Absorbing duct
9 Connector for solenoid valve
10 Solenoid valve
11 Emergency operation [solenoid valve]
12 Air input
13 Temperature sensor PT100
14 Non-return valve
Emergency operation:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 23
Emergency operation
In case of a supply pressure deficiency at the valve, please proceed as fol-

lows:
 Unscrew transparent cap (6a) at the upper end of the valve.

 Screw in hexagon nut [SW 19] (6b) up to clearly noticeable resistance
(app. 10mm).
 Valve is switched. Do not forget to screw back the emergency operating
screw into its original position when the compressed air supply is re-
stored.
In case of a supply voltage deficiency at the solenoid valve, please proceed

as follows:
 Turn the manual override (11) about 180° using a screwdriver until the
valve opens. The position of the manual override is marked with o = open
and c = closed. Delivery condition is closed (mark “c” on the right side).
 Reset the manual override to restore normal function.
 Picture „A“ shows the closed and picture B the open position.
®
Westfalia Separator
24 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Spare Parts
Non-return valve (pos. 9) Part no. 0018-7621-920
Cylinder (air) (pos. 3) Part no. 0018-7621-930
Transparent cap with sealing Part no. 0018-7621-940

(pos. 1)
Pilot valve with cable head, Part no. 0018-7621-600

skintop connection and ab-
sorbing duct with mounted elbow
union 1/8 – DN8 and assembled removable
screwing 1/4 - 1/8
with air regulation (pos. 2)
Double PT100 (pos. 4) Part no. 0001-1579-400
Spindle device, complete (pos. 6) Part no. 0018-7621-950
Screw-in fitting, complete (pos. 5) Part no. 0018-7621-960
O-ring 22x2 1 pc. (pos. 7) Part no. 0007-2412-830
O-ring 12x2 3pcs. (pos. 8) Part no. 0007-1929-830
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 25
1 transparent cap with sealing

2 pilot valve with cable head
3 cylinder (air)
4 double PT100
5 complete screw-in fitting
6 complete spindle device
7 o-ring 22x2
8 o-ring12x2
9 non-return valve
®
Westfalia Separator
26 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Initial operation and maintenance

Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve
Installation in unpressurised state only!
Push the valve housing with the flange seals carefully

between the flanges.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suita-
ble for the flowing medium!
Align the flange drillings to each other and put suitable

screws into the drillings
Fix the nuts crosswise and firmly onto the screws.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 27
Maintenance
Preventing maintenance or cleaning is recommended depending on the operating
conditions and in case of significant alteration of switching time or switching nois-
es.
Depending on ambient conditions the coil is to be checked regularly in terms of
cracks and dirt and the electric connection in terms of firm hold and safe sealing.
The operator is responsible for determining adequate maintenance intervals refer-
ring to the given operating conditions of the valve.
Any maintenance work is to be carried out by expert staff only. Adequate tooling is
required.
Functional failures can be provoked by disposal, dirt and aged or worn out sealing
material.
Any maintenance work has to be done with depressurized piping and disconnect-
ed solenoids only.
1. Piston unit
Disassembly
Loosen the fixing screws of the cylinder. Disassemble cylinder.
Dismount piston unit.
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M) or replace piston
when necessary.
Assembly takes place in reverse order.
®
Westfalia Separator
28 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Important: lubricate o-ring (e. g. using temperature resistant multi-purpose

grease)
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M).
Mount piston unit.
2. Upper spindle bearing

Disassembly - Dismantle cylinder
Loosen the fixing screws of the cylinder. Disassemble cylinder.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 29
Dismantle cap. Disassemble upper spindle bear-

ing.
Lubricate o-ring (e. g. using temperature resistant multi-purpose grease) or re-

place complete upper spindle bearing when necessary.
3. Check valve
Disassembly of check valve
Loosen retaining plate Dismount retaining plate
Clean or replace check valve.

®
Westfalia Separator
30 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Attention: make sure the retaining plate is fixed in correct position prior to
mounting the system valve into the piping!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 31
®
Westfalia Separator
32 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Seite / page: 1-2
Faxformular - Fax Form

(vor Benutzung kopieren! – Copy before use!)
zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
An / To
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
D-21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Fax-No.: +49 (0) 40-7380585
Besteller / Orderer
Firma / Company
Name
Straße, Haus-Nr.
Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort / ZIP, City
Telefon / Phone
Fax
Lieferanschrift (falls abweichend) Rechnungsanschrift (falls abweichend)

Delivery address (if different) Invoice address (if different)
Firma Firma
Company Company
Name Name
Straße, Straße,
Haus-Nr. Haus-Nr.
Street, house Street,
no. house no.
PLZ, Ort ZIP, PLZ, Ort
City ZIP, City
Telefon Telefon
Phone Phone
Fax Fax
Gewünschte Lieferzeit:
Desired delivery time:
Kommentar:
Remarks:
Ort, Datum / Place, Date Firmenstempel, Unterschrift / Company stamp, Signature
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 33
Seite / page: 2-2

Faxformular - Fax Form
(vor Benutzung kopieren! – Copy before use!)
zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
WICHTIG! Bei Anfrage oder Bestellung unbedingt angeben:

IMPORTANT! When submitting your inquiry or order, be sure to state:
Serien-
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Nr.
WSM Order No.: Serial No. Typ Type
Kundenauftrags-Nr.
Customer Order No.
Pos. (falls
vorhanden) Bestellnummer Menge Bezeichnung
Item (if Part-No. Qty. Description
available)
Ort, Datum / Place, Date Firmenstempel, Unterschrift / Company stamp, Signature
®
Westfalia Separator
34 9085-9000-000 / 0312
®
Westfalia Separator
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
BW-MV-direkt
Magnetventile direktgesteuert
Direct acting solenoid valves DEUTSCH
ENGLISCH
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Installation and Maintenance manual
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig
durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintanance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
-1-
BW-MV-direkt
©2006 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH, Vlotho
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder weitere
Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme verarbeitet,
vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH. It is not allowed to change
or duplicate even parts of it without written permission. We do not assume responsibility for correctness and integrity.
Colours of original products can differ from images.
Änderungen sind vorbehalten.

Errors excepted regarding print and technical changes.
Auflage: September 2008, Revision 2

Edition: September 2008, Revision 2
Anfragen richten Sie bitte schriftlich an:

MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH
Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
-2-
BW-MV-direkt
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Seite / page
Zu dieser Anleitung 4
This manual
Abkürzungen und Symbole 4
Leistungsbeschreibung 5
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung 5
Intended usage
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung 5
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen 5
Gerätebeschreibung 6
Device description
Wartung 6
Maintenance
Inbetriebnahme und Wartung 7, 8

Acticity description
Installation und Inbetriebnahme 7, 8
Installation
-3-
DEUTSCH BW-MV-direkt
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird
vorausgesetzt, dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische
Zeichnungen gelesen werden können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei
MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation im Internet
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH dar. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de
abrufen oder telefonisch bei Ihrem zuständigen Kundenbetreuer anfordern.
Gültigkeit der Anleitung
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
-4-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile der Baureihen GMV48, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2167, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 und FMV 2300 sind zum Einsatz im industriellen
Bereich geeignet. Die Magnetventile besitzen bei fachgerechter Montage der optional
lieferbaren Stecker eine Schutzart von IP65. Die Verteiler ermöglichen das Schalten
neutraler gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für
das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Anschlüsse der Armatur kann zu
MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit
oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn
zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei
Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und
sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte
Mängel sind unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als
genehmigt.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült

werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der
Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können bei MIT im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen
getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet
werden.
-5-
Gerätebeschreibung
1 - Steckerschraube
2 - Mutter
3 - Steckdose
4 - Steckdosendichtung
5 - elektrischen Anschlüsse
6 - Wellscheibe
7 - Scheibe
8 - Spule
9 - Tubus
10 - Anker
11 - Feder
12 - Gehäuse
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines direktgesteuerten Magnetventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen!
Der Einbau der Armatur sollte vorzugsweise senkrecht erfolgen!
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer hierfür ausgebildeten Fachkraft erfolgen!
Zum Anschluss des Magnetventils an Ihr Leitungssystem werden keine

Sonderwerkzeuge benötigt.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile sind in der Grundausstattung immer stromlos geschlossen. In

Ruhestellung verschließt der Anker durch Federkraft direkt den Sitz. Wird durch Anlegen einer Spannung
die Magnetspule erregt, so wird der Anker mit dem Dichtelement direkt vom Sitz angehoben.
Wichtig!
Die Standardventile sind immer stromlos geschlossen (NC)!
Einbau
In der Regel ist die Einbaulage mit stehendem Magneten in waagerechter Leistung vorgeschrieben.
Pfeilrichtung am Gehäuse mit Fließrichtung des Mediums vergleichen. Vor der Montage, Rohrleitung mit
Druckintervallen durchspülen. Bei verschmutzten Medien unbedingt einen Schmutzfänger möglichst nach
dem Ventileingang vorsehen. Wird ein Ventil mit Muffenanschluss montiert, Spule nicht als Hebel
benutzen. Ein Verspannen des Ventilgehäuses durch Einsatz von unsachgemäßem Werkzeug oder
Dichtungsmaterial oder durch nicht fluchtende Rohrleitungen muss vermieden werden. Bitte benutzen Sie
ausschließlich passendes Werkzeug an den Schlüsselflächen des Gehäuses!
Elektrischer Anschluss
Die Magnetsysteme des Standardprogramms haben einen Steckeranschluss oder eine Kabeleinführung
zum Klemmkasten an der Magnetspule. Vor Anschluss der Stromzufuhr die vorgeschriebene Stromart
und Spannung auf Typenschild und Lieferschein beachten. Spannungstoleranz +/-10%. Die
Einschaltdauer beträgt 100%ED. Als Dauerbetrieb (DB) gilt die Funktion, bei der die Spule solange
eingeschaltet bleibt bis die Belastungstemperatur erreicht ist. Achtung - Verbrennungsgefahr! Die
Oberflächen der Magnetspulen können bei Betrieb sehr heiß werden! Elektrische Anschlüsse vor
Feuchtigkeit schützen. Bei Freiluftmontage eine ausreichende Abdeckung vorsehen. Die Schutzart IP 65
ist nur für eine kurze Feuchtigkeitsbelastung ausgelegt. Elektrische Anschlüsse nur durch Fachpersonal
vornehmen lassen. Anschlusskabel entsprechend dem Einsatzfall und den örtlichen Begebenheiten (z.B.
erhöhte Temperaturen) auswählen. Bei zündfähiger Atmosphäre (Ex-Schutz) unbedingt die
Bestimmungen der Zulassungsbehörde beachten.
Anschlussplan
Erdanschluss
Für Gleich- und Mit einem Gleichrichter

Stromanschlüsse Wechselstrom für Wechselstrom
-7-
Wartung und Störungsbeseitigung
Die Magnetventile sind wartungsfrei!
Mögliche Störfälle!!
Bitte zunächst Pfeilrichtung, Spannung, Einsatzort und Betriebsdruck überprüfen!
Anker wird nicht angezogen.

1. Anschlussspannung ist unterbrochen oder nicht ausreichend
2. Magnetspule oder Gleichrichter defekt
3. Anker blockiert im verschmutzten Tubusraum; Wenn der Anker die Hubendlage nicht erreicht, führt
diese bei
erregter Wechselstrom-Spule, schon nach kurzer Zeit, zum Ausfall der Spule (thermische
Überlastung).
4. Nennspannung und Spulenspannung unterschiedlich.
Ventil schließt nicht!

1. Anker blockiert
3. Nennspannung liegt noch an
4. Handbetätigung nicht zurückgestellt
5. Pfeilrichtung mit Durchflussrichtung nicht identisch
Ventil öffnet nicht!

1. Membrane oder Kolben defekt
2. Entlastungsbohrung verstopft (Dichtmittel oder Verschraubung im Ausgang überprüfen)
3. Nennspannung liegt nicht an
4. Magnetspule defekt
5. Nennspannung und Spulenspannung unterschiedlich.
Bei Fehlfunktionen überprüfen Sie, ob der Ventilsitz, das Dichtungselement, der Anker und der Tubus
sauber sind.
Mögliche Instandsetzungsarbeiten dürfen nur vom Fachpersonal durchgeführt

werden!
-8-
ENGLISH
ENGLISH BW-MV-direkt
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for skilled
employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve terminology and
that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at
MIT!
Latest documentation on the internet
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited
and represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH at the
time of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
Validity of the manual
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH declares that it reserves its right to modify both the
manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
-4-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Intended usage
Direct acting solenoid valves of the type GMV4800, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 and FMV 2300 made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH are suitable for the producing industries. The valves have protection class IP65
when you use the optional deliverable plugs of MIT.
The valves are used for switching neutral gaseous and liquid media. The medium and
temperature range and pressure have to be suitable to the body and sealing materials.
Danger of injury
Don´t put parts of your body or other parts into the valve. This can cause heavy injuries
and should be avoided!
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt.
We recommend removing this packing just before assembly in order to protect the devices
against impurities.
During storage make sure that the devices are accommodated dry and dirt-free.
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform
us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical
parameters and a visual product check should take place emidiately after delivery.
Subsequent complains can not be excepted.
The warranty expires if product failings or quantity divergences are not announced in
writing within 7 days after receipt of goods!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the pipings. Automated valves need a special
attention in time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT Moderne
IndustrieTechnik GmbH only under workshop conditions. Security positions should be
simulated and tested straight.
-5-
BW-MV-direkt
ENGLISH
Device description
1 - Screw for the plug

2 - Nut
3 - Plug
4 - Plug sealing
5 - electric connectors
6 - Washer
7 - Washer
8 - Solenoid
9 - Tube
10 - Plunger
11 - Spring
12 - Body
Activity description
Installation of a direct acting solenoid valve
The installation may occur only in state without pressure.
We recommend the installation with the valve in upright position!
Electric connection is only allowed for skilled employees!
You don't need any special tools to connect the solenoid valve with your piping system.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Direct acting solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed". In rest position the plunger locks
the seat only by spring force. When the solenoid is energized the plunger with its sealing is directly lifted
from the seat.
IMPORTANT!
Our common solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed"!
Installation
Normally you have to install your solenoid valve with the solenoid in upright position and in a horizontal
piping.
Please compare the arrow on the body with the flow direction of your medium. Before installation keep
in mind to rinse your piping with pressure interval. If you have media with particles we recommend to
use a strainer directly in front of the solenoid valve. If you mount a valve with muffle connection don't
use the coil as hand lever. Avoid twisting of the valve body - this can be caused by wrong tools, sealings
or non-flush pipelines. Remind to use suitable tools at the spanner flats only.
Electric Connection
Our common solenoids have a plug connection or a cable entry point to the terminal box. Please mind
the required current and voltage before connection - you can find them on the type label or the bill of
delivery. The tolerance of voltage is +/- 10%. The duty time is 100%. The continous duty is the time
when the solenoid is energized until the load temperature is reached. Caution - risk of burnig! The
surfaces of the solenoids may become extremely hot! Protect the electric connection from humidity. If
the valve is mounted outside arrange for adequate cover. Protection class IP65 is only for short periods
of humidity. Choose the adequate connection cable according to the surrounding area and the local
conditions, e.g. high temperature. If you have ignitable atmosphere you have to follow the regulations of
your local accreditation agency.
Wiring diagram
Ground
for AC /DC with rectifier for AC

Current connection
-7-
ENGLISH
BW-MV-direkt
Maintenance
Our solenoid valves are maintenance-free!
Possible failures
First of all check the arrow on the body with your medium flow, the voltage, the place of installation and
the working pressure!
Also check if the valve seat, the sealing, the plunger and the tube are clean.
The Plunger is not lifted.

1. The connection voltage is broken or not high enough.
2. The solenoid or the rectifier is broken.
3. The plunger is blocked in the polluted plunger area. If the plunger can not reach the final position this
can lead to a broken solenoid (only with energized AC - solenoid) Thermal overload!
4. Nominal voltage and solenoid voltage are different.
The valve does not close properly!

1. The plunger is blocked.
2. There is still nominal voltage.
3. You did not reset the hand lever.
4. Arrow on the body and medium flow are not in the same direction.
The valve does not open properly!

1. Diaphragm or piston are broken.
2. The relief boring is blocked (please check the sealing compound ort he screwing in the outlet)
3. You don't have nominal voltage.
4. The solenoid is broken.
5. Nominal voltage and solenoid voltage are different.
Repair is allowed for skilled employees only!
-8-
BW-MV-direkt
-9-
BW-MV-direkt
Kontakt / Contact:
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.de
Internet: www.systemarmaturen.de
- 10 -
Mounting and Operating Manual
Butterfly Valves
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen · Telefon (05731) 7900-0 · Telefax (05731) 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
Impressum
© by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded, reproduced nor passed to third parties without the written
aggreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the butterfly valves at any time without prior
or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.

Oberbecksener Straße 78
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
Internet: http://www.end.de
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 11/02
2 http://www.end.de 11/02
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General Advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Warranty 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal safety 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Butterfly Valve 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting/Disassemble 11
5.4.1 Mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle 12
5.4.2 Mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve 14
5.4.3 Mounting of a LUG type butterfly valve 15
6 Maintenance 16
7 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC 18
11/02 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the butterfly valves
rapidly and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the butterfly valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the butterfly valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
General Advice
2 General Advice
2.1 Validity
This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the butterfly valves
and their variants.
2.2 Inward monitoring
Please check directly after delivery the butterfly valves for any transport damages and deficiencies
and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
Do not leave any parts in the package.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
In case of a return, please mention the following:

• Name and address of the consignee
• Stock-/ ordering-/ article-number
• Description of the defect
2.4 Warranty
For our butterfly valves we give a warranty period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
Symbols and their Signification
2.5 Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments / advices or tips.
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
Safety Advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the butterfly valves
are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety aspects in
each case!
If, for example, a butterfly valve works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential haz-
ards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for test
purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you.
Please observe (only) the advices which applies to your situation!
3.1 Personal safety
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and electrical installation of the butterfly valves must be carried out by trained specialist person-
nel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directive after the mounting and
installing of the butterfly valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform
the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order,
for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time
by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting
As a result of the starting (pneumatic, electric or by hand) of the butterfly valves the flow of
gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the
starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
Safety Advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the butterfly valve.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the butterfly valve will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions described in
this documentation!
Adjusting switches on butterfly valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the butterfly valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling the butterfly valve some essential points should be clarified!
• Will the butterfly valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the butterfly
valve is mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the butterfly valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
If you ascertain a damage of the butterfly valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please observe
the safety advices.
Safety Advice
Do not mount, start or adjust the butterfly valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the butterfly valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
3.2 Device safety
The butterfly valves

• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the butterfly vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The butterfly valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The butterfly valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the butterfly valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
seals and the bearings.
The operating of the butterfly valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Do not mount, start or adjust the butterfly valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the butterfly valve and the tightness
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
The butterfly valves will be provided with a name-plate, which permits a definite identification of the butterfly
valve and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not displaced or changed.

www.end.de post@end.de
Art./Type: WA/WM PS(bar): 16
Gehäuse/Body: GG-25 GGG-40 1.4408
Scheibe/Disc: GGG-40 1.4408
Dichtung/Seal: EPDM FKM NBR
TS(°C): -20 ... +120 -10 ... +180 -10 ... +80
Mit leicht geöffnerter Scheibe
einbauen! Assembly with slightly
0062 opened disc !
Fig. 4.1 - Name-plate
Type. type of the butterfly valve

Nominal pressure (PS) max. pressure range of the butterfly valve [bar]
Temperature range (TS) max. temperature range of the butterfly valve
Body body material
Disc disc material
Seal seal material
Butterfly Valves
5 Butterfly Valve
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a butterfly valve you have to read
the
Safety advices
If you have nor read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
5.2 Corresponding use
Butterfly valves will be used to control and to cut off media flow.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the butterfly valve will be
resistant. It should also be used for pulverised and past-like media and pouring goods if it suited
to the butterfly valve. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal
temperature range should causes damages on the butterfly valve especially on the seals.
5.3 Operation
The butterfly valve will be opened or closed by using a handle or actuator (option). The snap-in
handle of a hand actuated butterfly valve have to been snapped out during the operation. The
disc has 9 resp. 10 snap-in positions in which the lever could click in, to prevent an inadvertent
misplace.
During the closing operation take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs into the
armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it`s necessary you have to
install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting/Disassemble
The mechanical installation of the butterfly valves differs by the variants of the body. The wafer
type butterfly valve will be squeezed between to flanges and the lug type is able to be mounted
directly on flanges.
Butterfly Valves
5.4.1 Mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle
At butterfly valves which will be actuated by hand the snap-in disc and the handle will be enclosed
the package. Before installing the butterfly valve you have to mount the handle and the snap-in
disc.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the protective devices (eg. caps and plugs). Take care that there will be
no parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the butterfly valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the butterfly valve.
Avoid stress in case of non align pipes.
The flanges have to be align parallel and centircally and must have carefully worked surfaces.
o.k.
o.k.
operation position
Fig. 5.1 - Butterfly valves, mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
Butterfly Valves
The butterfly valve will be squeezed between two flanges. The sealing takes places by the sleeve
of the butterfly valve other sealing compounds are not allowed. Take care that there won`t be
insert any rests of sealing compounds or other pollution into the armature.
The flanges would not been welded into the pipes if the armature is mounted. The increasing
temperatures will destroy the sleeve of the butterfly valve.
At polluted media we recommend to install the butterfly valve horizontally. In this case the lower
disc half have to close in the flow direction.
o.k.
sectional drawing
Fig. 5.2 - Butterfly valves, mounting at pollute media (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
Butterfly Valves
5.4.2 Mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve
In the following description we assume that you have welded the flanges at the end of the pipes
and they are cooled down.
Adjust the disc in a not totally closed position so that the disc won`t be stand out off the body.
Put the butterfly valve between the flanges. The butterfly have to been insert between the flanges
easily so that the sleeve won`t be destroyed.
Align the butterfly valve and put fit screws through the borings of the flanges.
Screw nuts onto the screws and tighten them equaly slightly and crosswise.
Check whether the disc of the butterfly valve will be open and close easily. Let the disc a little bit
open.
Tighten all the screws crosswise and check the function of the butterfly valve again. Observe the
max. torque of the screws.
Check the tightness of all the connections.
disc not Mounting butterfly valves of type HA use

totally closed! suitable flange seals concerning to the
medium and the working conditions.
At butterfly valves type:

TA / TM - WA / WM - BA / BM
sectional drawing
the use of flange seals is not allowed.
Fig. 5.3 - Butterfly valves, mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
Butterfly valves
5.4.3 Mounting of a LUG type butterfly valve
In the following description we assume that you have welded the flanges at the end of the pipes
and they are cooled down.
Adjust the disc in a not totally closed position so that the disc won`t be stand out off the body.
Put the butterfly valve in front of the flange and tighten the screws slightly and crosswise.
Check whether the disc of the butterfly valve will be open and close easily. Let the disc a little bit
open.
Tighten all the screws crosswise and and check the function of the butterfly valve again. Observe
the max. torque moment of the screws.
You have to install a protective device, to prevent the insertion of any objects or limbs into the
butterfly valve.
Install protective devices, to prevent a uncontrolled outflow of the media.
Attention: When using the butterfly valve as end piping the nominal working pressure will be
decreased.
disc not Mounting butterfly valves of type HA use

totally closed! suitable flange seals concerning to the
medium and the working conditions.
At butterfly valves type:

TA / TM - WA / WM - BA / BM
sectional drawing
the use of flange seals is not allowed.
Fig. 5.4 - Butterfly valves, mounting of a LUG - type butterfly valve (Fig.: Art. TA534010/M)
Butterfly Valves
6 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the butterfly valve you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have nor read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
On normal accounts the butterfly valve is maintenance free. In periodical turns the controlling of
the function and the tightness should happen:
• Check the tightness of stem seals

• Check the tightness of the sleeve
• Check the wear of the sleeve
At a leaky stem seal or sleeve you have to disassemble the butterfly valve and sent it back to the
manufacturer.
Don`t try to disassemble the sleeve of the butterfly vale by yourself. Heavy injuries or damages
could be the consequence.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
Notes
(1)
7
Declaration in conformity
Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(2)
as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
and all variations of these articles
(4) of the company END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Germany
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
(6) Applied conformity assessment procedure: Modul H.
(7) Noti¿ed body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8) Certi¿cate numbers: Quality Management System: INT110198DE

Certi¿cate of System approval PED: 2011/70.10.1777/P
(9) Applied harmonized standards, in particular:
DIN EN 12516:2005 Industriearmaturen - Gehäusefestigkeit
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 07. July 2011

END-Armaturen Gm . 78
Oberb eck sen er Str
sen · Germany
32547 Bad Oeynhau - 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731 · post@end.de
http://www.end.de
Friedhelm König Michael End
Technical Manager Quality Manager
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen (Germany) · Telefon +49 - 5731 - 7900-0 · Telefax +49 - 5731 - 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
watergates
knife-gate-valves - Stoffschieber
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Technische Daten Specification
Artikel:
BAUFORM DESIGN WA / WM
1-teiliges Zentriergehäuse, mit auswechsel- Body consists of 1 part, with exchangeable
barer Manschette zum Einklemmen zwischen seat to be mounted between two flanges acc.
zwei Flansche nach EN 1092-1 Typ 11 Form to EN 1092-1 Typ 11 Form B (PN10/PN16);
B (PN10/PN16); andere auf Anfrage. others on request. Absperrklappe
PN 10/16
BAULÄNGE FACE TO FACE LENGTH
Nach EN 558-1 Reihe 20. Acc. to EN 558-1 R20.
BETÄTIGUNG OPERATION GG-25

90°-Drehung des Handhebels, mit 10 Einrast- Rotation of the handle through 90°, with 10 GGG-40
möglichkeiten und Stellungsanzeige. snap-in positions and optical positon indica-
tor. Edelstahl
ANSCHLUß CONNECTION
Flansch DN 50 bis DN 300 Flange DN 50 up to DN 300
Größere Nennweiten auf Anfrage. Bigger sizes on request.
BETRIEBSDRUCK PRESSURE RANGE

Artikel WA / WM* (zwischen 2 Flanschen) Type WA / WM* (between 2 flanges) WA
DN 50 - DN 300: max. 16 bar DN 50 - DN 300: max. 16 bar
DN 350 - größer: max. 10 bar DN 350 - bigger: max. 10 bar
FKM - Manschette: max. 6 bar FKM - seat: max. 6 bar WM
Artikel WM* (als Endklappe) Type WM* (dead end service)
max. 10 bar max.10 bar
FKM - Manschette: max. 6 bar FKM - seat: max. 6 bar
MEDIUMTEMPERATUR TEMPERATURE RANGE

NBR: -10°C bis max. + 80°C NBR: -10°C up to max. + 80°C
EPDM: -20°C bis max. +120°C EPDM: -20°C up to max. +120°C
FKM: -10°C bis max. +180°C FKM: -10°C up to max. +180°C
(pmax. = 6 bar) (pmax. = 6 bar)
andere auf Anfrage others on request
WERKSTOFFE MATERIALS
Gehäuse: GG-25 Body: GG-25
GGG-40 GGG-40
Edelstahl 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4408 Type:
Scheibe: GGG-40 Disc: GGG-40
(Nylon beschichtet) (Nylon coated) WA / WM
Edelstahl 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4408
Wellendichtung: NBR / POM Stem seal: NBR / POM
Welle: Edelstahl 1.4401 Shaft: Stainless steel 1.4401 Butterfly valve
Manschette: EPDM Seat: EPDM
NBR NBR PN 10/16
FKM FKM
Handhebel: Sphäroguß, Handle: Spheroidal cast iron, GG-25

lackiert varnished
GGG-40
ZUSATZAUSSTATTUNG
Pneumatischer oder elektrischer Schwenkan-
OPTIONS
Pneumatic or electric actuator, electric positi-
Stainless steel
trieb, elektrische Stellungsanzeige, Handhe- ton indicator, handle lockable in all positions.
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-WA -1/5 07.11.07 - Änderung: Betriebsdruck FKM
bel stufenlos verstellbar.
Alle Angaben sind freibleibend und The above information is intended for guidance
unverbindlich! only and the company reserves the right to
change any data herein without prior notice!
*Flansche PN16 - DN65 werden in 4-Loch- *Flanges PN16 - DN65 will be delivered in
Ausführung geliefert! 4-hole execution!
Art. WA/WM - Seite 1/5

Artikel- u. Bestellangaben: z.B. WA534010
= Absperrklappe, GG-25, Edelstahl 1.4408, EPDM, DN 100
1. + 2. Stelle 3. Stelle 4. Stelle 5. Stelle 6. Stelle 7. + 8. Stelle
Produkt Gehäusewerkstoff Scheibenwerkstoff Manschettenwerkstoff Zusatzausstattung Anschlußgröße
WA = 3 = Edelstahl 1.4408 3 = Edelstahl 1.4408 2 = NBR 0 = ohne 07 = DN 50

Absperrklappe (Art. WA + WM) 5 = GGG-40 3 = FKM 08 = DN 65
WM = 5 = GG-25 (pmax. = 6 bar) 09 = DN 80
Absperrklappe, (Art. WA) 4 = EPDM 10 = DN 100
Anflanschgehäuse GGG-40 11 = DN 125
(Art. WM + 12 = DN 150
WA DN200+DN300) 13 = DN 200
14 = DN 250
15 = DN 300
Größere Nennweiten
auf Anfrage.
Ordering example: e.g.WA534010

= Butterfly valve, GG-25, Stainless steel 1.4408, EPDM, DN 100
1. + 2. Digit 3. Digit 4. Digit 5. Digit 6. Digit 7. + 8. Digit
Product Body material Disc material Seat material Options Connection size
WA = 3 = Stainl. steel 1.4408 3 = Stainless steel 2 = NBR 0 = no options 07 = DN 50

Butterfly valve (Art. WA + WM) 1.4408 3 = FKM 08 = DN 65
Wafer type 5 = GG-25 5 = GGG-40 (pmax. = 6 bar) 09 = DN 80
WM = (Art. WA) 4 = EPDM 10 = DN 100
Butterfly valve GGG-40 11 = DN 125
LUG-type (Art. WM + 12 = DN 150
WA DN200+DN300) 13 = DN 200
14 = DN 250
15 = DN 300
Bigger sizes on
request
Hinweis Advice
Bei den in dieser Dokumentation beschrieben Produkten, in der von uns The products descript in this documentation in the conditions of our
gelieferten Form, handelt es sich weder um Maschinen gemäß Artikel delivery are no machinery according to annex 2 paragraph a respec-
2 Absatz a noch um unvollständige Maschinen gemäß Artikel 2 Absatz tively no partly completed machinery according to annex 2 paragraph
g im Sinne der Richtlinie 2006/42/EG über Maschinen. g of the directive 2006/42/EC on machinery.

Aufbau / Construction
10
11
1
8
Pos. Bezeichnung / Desciption Material / Material

1 Gehäuse Body GG-25 (Art. WA) GG-25 (Art. WA)
GGG-40 (Art. WM + WA DN200 + DN300) GGG-40 (Art. WM + WA DN200 + DN300)
Edelstahl 1.4408 (Art. WA + WM) stainless steel CF8M (Art. WA + WM)
2 Scheibe Disc GGG-40 GGG-40
● Rilsan® Polyamid 11 beschichtet ● Rilsan® Polyamide 11 coated
Edelstahl 1.4408 stainless steel CF8M

3 Sitz Seat NBR NBR
EPDM EPDM
FKM FKM
4 Spindel Stem Edelstahl stainless steel
5 Stift Pin Edelstahl stainless steel
6 Buchse Bush POM POM
7 O- Ring O- ring NBR NBR

8 Verstärkungsring Back up ring Kunststoff plastic
9 Buchse Bush Rotguss bronze
10 Rastscheibe Snap- in- disc Stahl steel
11 Handhebel Handle Guss cast iron

Abmessungen Art. WA
* DN40 - DN65
Dimensions Art. WA
E
Zentrierhilfe * S
H
Q
Ø
* DN80
ØR
C
M
* DN200 - DN300
ØD L
ab DN100 *
G
H1
Ød
SW
Ø
P
DN C L H M H1 E ØD G ØP ØQ ØR S Ød SW W kg*
50 50 43 143 65 204 19 96 70 F07 124 114 23 10 11 200 3,0
65 65 46 155 71 216 19 110 70 F07 127 145 23 10 11 200 3,8
80 80 46 162 77 223 19 124 70 F07 159 150 23 10 11 200 4,0
100 91 52 181 107 242 19 148 70 F07 190,6 175 23 10 11 200 5,2
125 115 56 197 122 258 19 180 70 F07 216 210 27 10 14 250 7,3
150 140 56 210 140 271 19 208 70 F07 242 235 24 10 14 250 8,2
200 186 60 240 165 308 24 259 100 F10 298,5 290 27 12 17 355 13,5
250 239 68 286 201 354 24 320 100 F10 362 350 27 12 19 355 21,2
300 288 78 309 234 377 24 370 100 F10 431,8 400 29 12 22 355 32,5

Abmessungen Art. WM
Dimensions Art. WM
E
H
C
M
N L
ØD
ØB
G
W
Ød
H1
SW
Ø
P
PN 16
DN C L H M H1 E G ØP Ød ØD SW W
N n ØB kg
50 57 43 143 65 204 19 70 F07 10 96 11 M16 4 125 200 3,4
65 * 70 46 155 71 216 19 70 F07 10 110 11 M16 4 145 200 4,0
80 82 46 162 77 223 19 70 F07 10 124 11 M16 8 160 200 4,5
100 102 52 181 89 242 19 70 F07 10 148 11 M16 8 180 200 7,6
125 126 56 197 112 258 19 70 F07 10 180 14 M16 8 210 250 9,5
150 148 56 210 123 271 19 70 F07 10 208 14 M20 8 240 250 10,4
200 193 60 240 150 308 24 100 F10 12 259 17 M20 12 295 355 17,5
250 244 68 286 179 354 24 100 F10 12 320 19 M24 12 355 355 26,5
300 294 78 309 216 377 24 100 F10 12 370 22 M24 12 410 355 43,5
* Flansche PN16 - DN65 werden in 4-Loch-Ausführung geliefert!
Flanges PN16 - DN65 will be delivered in 4-hole execution!

Artikel:
BAUFORM DESIGN RE
2 Elektrisch-mechanische Microschalter im 2 electric-mechanic limit switch in a protective
Schutzgehäuse inclusive optischer Stellungs- housing with optical position indicator.
anzeige. Endlagenschalter
For mounting on all actuators with mounting
Montage auf allen Antrieben mit Bohrbildern hole spacing acc. to NAMUR and stem heights elektrisch-mechanisch
nach NAMUR und 30mm Wellenhöhe. 30mm.
im Schutzgehäuse
WERKSTOFFE MATERIAL
Gehäuse: Vestamid, schwarz Housing: Vestamid, black
Deckel: Makrolon, glasklar (IP 65) Cover: Makrolon, crystal-clear (IP 65)
IP 65
TEMPERATUR TEMPERATURE RAGE
-20°C bis +100°C (IP 65) -20°C up to +100°C (IP 65)
ANSCHLUSSSPANNUNG LINE VOLTAGE

max. 250 V max. 250 V
SCHALTVERMÖGEN SWITCHING CURRENT

max. 10A (IP 65) max. 10A (IP 65)
MECHANISCHE LEBENSDAUER MECHANICAL OPERATING LIFE

bis zu 5 Mio. Schaltspiele up to 5 Mio. cycles
SCHUTZART PROTECTION
IP 65 nach DIN 40050 IP 65 according to 40050
KABELVERSCHRAUBUNG CONNECTION
1x M20x1,5 (IP 65) 1x M20x1,5 (IP 65)
SCHALTFUNKTION CONTACT
2 Schließer/Öffner 2 closing/opening contact
SONDERAUSFÜHRUNG SPECIAL DESIGN

Induktive Endschalter Proximity limit-switches
Integrierter direkter Anschluss für Direct connection for solenoid vavle inte- Type:
Magnetventil.(Option: /KI) grated. (Option: /KI)
RE
change any data herein without prior notice! Position limit switches
electric-mechanic
RExx0303 RExx0303/KI
with protective housing
IP 65
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-RE-1/2 26.06.02. - Änderung: Schaltplan geändert
Art. RE - Seite 1/2

Artikel- u. Bestellangaben: z.B. RE080303/A
= Endlagenschalter für pneumatische Schwenkantriebe, Bohrbild 80 x 30 mm, 30mm Wellenhöhe, auf Antrieb aufgebaut und justiert
1. - 2. Stelle 3. - 6. Stelle 7. + 8. Stelle 9. - 13. Stelle

Produkt Bohrbild Wellenhöhe Ausführung
RE = 0803 = 80 x 30 mm 03 = 30mm Wellenhöhe /A = aufgebaut und justiert

Zusatzausstattung 1303 = 130 x 30 mm
Endlagenschalter
für pneumatische
Schwenkantriebe
Ordering example: e.g. RE080303/A

= Position limit switch for pneumatic actuators, mounting hole spacing 80 x 30 mm, 30mm stem heights, on actuator mounted and adjusted
1. - 4. Digit 5. Digit 6. Digit 7. Digit
Product Mounting hole spacing Stem heights Design
RE = 0803 = 80 x 30 mm 03 = 30mm stem heights /A = mounted and adjusted

Electrical position in- 1303 = 130 x 30 mm
dicator, designed for
pneumatic actuators
Abmessungen /
Dimension
64 152
M12x1,5
74
103
M20x1,5
30
Namur 80 x 30
Namur 130 x 30
*
* = Für Antrieb HD / HE Sk 163 - 210

for actuator HD / HE Sk 163 - 210
Schaltbild1 /
Wiring diagram1
für IP 65 /
for IP 65
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-RE-2/2 26.06.02- Änderung: Schaltplan geändert
1) Der Anschlussplan zeigt den Endschalter in Zwischenstellung, Schalter sind nicht betätigt!
The terminal plan shows the limit switch in intermediate position, switches are not actuated!
Art. RE - Seite 2/2

Safety valves SAFE
SAFE SAFE-P
(Series 900) (Series 920)
SAFE-TC SAFE-TCP/TCS
(Series 940) (Series 960/950)
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 6.0 Putting the valve into operation ............. 2-10
instructions ..................................................2-2 7.0 Care and maintenance............................. 2-11
2.0 Notes on possible dangers........................2-2 7.1 Setting instructions ............................................ 2-11
2.1 Significance of symbols ...................................... 2-2 7.1.1 Removing the cap ......................................2-11
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ............. 2-2 7.1.2 Changing the set pressure “without”
3.0 Storage and transport ...............................2-3 spring change ......................................... 2-12
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure “with”
4.0 Description..................................................2-3 spring change ......................................... 2-12
4.1 Scope of applications .......................................... 2-3
7.2 Representation ................................................. 2-14
4.2 Operating principles ............................................ 2-3
8.0 Troubleshooting ....................................... 2-15
4.3 Diagram............................................................... 2-4
4.3.1 Parts list ..................................................... 2-5
9.0 Troubleshooting table ............................ 2-15
4.4 Technical data - remarks ..................................... 2-6
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part .. 2-17
4.5 Marking ............................................................. 2-7
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ............................. 2-17
5.0 Installation...................................................2-8
5.1 General notes on installation............................... 2-8
Rev. 0040401000 3616 englisch page 2-1

SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS

and repair.
ATTENTION !
Non-compliance with operating instructions is dangerous!

Read the operating instructions before installation, operation,
maintenance or disassembly and adhere to them strictly.

to property.
Page 2-2 Rev. 0040401000 3616


ATTENTION !
- At -20°C to +65°C.
4.0 Description
Safety valves are used to protect pressurised systems.
ATTENTION !
state the higher requirements when ordering
to TRD 110.
- When media in Fluid Group 1 are used, seal exteriors must be designed so that
they pose no danger to humans or the environment.
- Open safety valves (open bonnet / open cap) are not permissible for fluids,
dusty atmospheres, open air use or for any Group 1 fluids in accordance with
Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
Safety valves are safety devices designed to prevent the pressure in any pressurised
system from exceeding the maximum permissible pressure by more than the permissible
tolerance of, usually +10%.
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-3

4.3 Diagram
Fig. 901 Fig. 921 ig. 941 Fig. 961
Fig. 1
Fig. 902 / 912 / 903 / 904 / 922 / 924 / 945 / 946

Soft sealing /
EPDM bellows Stainless steel bellow
Vent hole
Vent hole G1/8
G1/4
Lever Disc
Fig. 951/952 Series 950 Series 900 Series 940

Fig. 961/962
Fig. 2
Page 2-4 Rev. 0040401000 3616

4.3.1 Parts list
Pos. Description Pos. Description

1 Body 32 Hex. nut
2 Seat (not changeable) 33 Lift bolt
2 Screwed seat (SAFE-TC) 34 Screw
3 Stud 35 Lift fork
4 Spindle guide 36 Lifting lever
7 Gasket 37 Spring
8 Hex. nut 38 Screw
9 Lift limitation ring 39 Bolt
10 Spindle ring 40 Split pin
11 Bonnet, closed 41 Lever open
12 Disc unit 42 Bonnet, open
13 Lifting aid 43 Bellow
14 Spindle 44 Ring
15 Gasket 45 Ring
16 Spring type straight pin 47 Ball
17 Adjusting screw 48 Retaining ring
18 Ball 55 Bellow unit
19 Spindle cap 59 Protective rim
20 Parallel pin 60 Spacer
21 Lock nut 61 Coupling
22 Plug screw 62 Weight
23 Lead seal 63 Guide bush
25 Snap ring 65 Coupling
26 Spring plate 66 O-Ring
27 Gasket 67 Lift button
28 Cap, closed 68 Spring type straight pin
29 Cap open 70 Balanced piston
31 Ring
Refer to the data sheet for information about materials.
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-5

4.4 Technical data - remarks
for
- Pressure-temperature-ratings, etc. refer to datasheet.
Series 900: DN 15/25 - DN 250/350, 1“x2“ - 6“x10“

EN-JL1040, EN-JS1049, 1.0619+N, 1.4408, SA 216 WCB
PN 16/16, PN 25/16, PN 40/16, ANSI 150/150, ANSI 300/150
Approval acc. to:
Figure 901, 902, 911, - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
912 TRD 421.
Application letter D/G and F
- ASME Code Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-Stamp)
Figure 903, 904, 990 -VdTÜV leaflet 100, -100/4, TRD 721, DIN EN 12828.
Application letter D/G/H and D (for Figure 904, 990)
Series 920: DN 20 - DN 100

EN-JL1040, 1.0619+N, 1.4408
PN 16, PN 40
Approval acc. to:
Figure 921-924 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
TRD 421.
Series 940: DN 15 - DN 25 (G 1/2“ - G 1“)

EN-JS1049, 1.4408
PN 40
Approval acc. to:
Figure 941-943 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
TRD 421.
Figure 945-946 -VdTÜV leaflet 100, -100/4, TRD 721, DIN EN 12828.
Application letter D/G/H and D
Series 950/960: DN 15 - DN 25 (G 1/2“ - G 1“)

EN-JS1049, 1.4581
PN 100
Approval acc. to:
Figure 951-953 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2.
Figure 961-963 Application letter D/G and F
Accessories: Stainless steel bellow for back-pressure compensation;

elastomer bellow; soft sealing disc; lock bush; proximity switch;
heating jacket; test gag; rupture disc; support tongues;
removable lifting aid
Page 2-6 Rev. 0040401000 3616

4.5 Marking
Fig.-No./Type Type-test approved No.
Manufacturer
Safety valve (TÜV) Kdr
EAC- Temperature d CE-marking
marking 0
Notified
body
Approval
Set pressure Adjusting services
Serial-No.
Disc design: Year of manufacture

E = EPDM -35°C up to 150°C Travel
V = Viton (FPM) -20°C up to 180°C
N = Neoprene -30°C up to 100°C
S = SHR -20°C up to 220°C
St = Stellitiert -60°C up to 450°C
Fig.-No./Type NB-stamp
EAC- Size ASME/UV-stamp CE-marking
marking
Safety valve (ASME)
Notified
body
Serial-No.
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Set pressure
Capacity/Unit
Disc design: SCFM = air
E = EPDM -35°C up to 150°C lb/h = steam
V = Viton (FPM) -20°C up to 180°C gal/min = water
N = Neoprene -30°C up to 100°C
S = SHR -20°C up to 220°C
Fig. 3: St = Stellitiert -60°C up to 450°C
Type test plates
Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0
Mechanic No.
BA/BQ
Logo of external approvals
Fig. 4: Body (outlet)

Series with thread connections are marked on the body.
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-7

5.0 Installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, bonnets must not be used to
See data sheet for weights.
- The blow-off line shall be sufficiently large to ensure that the internal back-
pressure while blowing-off does not exceed 10% (on request max. 15%) of the
set pressure. (Exception: safety valves with metallic bellow for back-pressure
compensation).
- If back pressure exceeds 10% (on request max. 15%) of set pressure, the
safety valve must be fitted with a metallic bellow seal for back pressure
compensation. The maximum back pressure must be specified by the
manufacturer. If necessary a leak detector should be provided to monitor the
back pressure compensating metallic bellow seal, but the leak detector must
not block the vent hole. With a closed vent hole the balanced piston loses it‘s
function (refer to Fig. 2).
- The ventilation hole in the bonnet of safety valves with a metallic bellow seal
must remain open as a matter of principle, although in the case of Group I fluids
(PED 2014/68/EU) a non-isolatable pipeline must be connected to remove the
medium safely (without back pressure if the bellow seal is damaged. The vent
hole must not be blocked by any leak detector used.
- No pipe sections or screws must protrude into the spring bonnet through the
inspection connection. Blockage hazard!
- The drainage system shall be adequate to remove the condensate.
- Blockage of the drainage system by dirt or foreign bodies shall be avoided.
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow with or without a
rupture disk.
Page 2-8 Rev. 0040401000 3616

- Safety valves shall be installed with vertical spindle. Differing valves of series
950 with set pressure > 5 bar can also be installed horizontally. Valves marked
with „Einbau nur horizontal (Installation only horizontal)“ shall be installed
horizontally (series 950 ≤5 bar set pressure).
- Flange gaskets shall be fitted concentrically and not restrict the flow cross
section.
- Keep the shaft of the spindle-unit free from paint (open bonnet / cap).
- Blow-off lines shall be laid with gradient.
- The ratio pao/po shall be taken into account when dimensioning the system.
- Safety valves shall be equipped with support tongues to absorb high reaction
forces.
- Pressure losses in the line to the safety valve shall not exceed 3%. This shall be
considered for selection of appropriate changeover valves.
- Ensure that adequate drip pans are used if setting media in Fluid Group
pursuant to PED 2014/68/EU.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
- Refer to appropriate TRD 421, AD2000-A2, DIN, ASME Code rules for piping and
installation.
- Remove transport fasteners and protective caps for inlet and outlet immediately before
installation.
- Water shall be drained from the safety valve and blow-off line via the blow-off line
(drainage points always at the lowest point).
Support
Bellow
Drip pan
Drainage Drainage at lowest point
fig. 5
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-9


ATTENTION !
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50°C) or low (< 0°C) media
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature,
direction of flow and also check that the data of the valve are correct for the
plant
(refer to type test plate)
- Remove any test gag from cap and close opening with stopper.
- Remove protective caps and lever lock before putting the valve into operation
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow without a rupture
disk. (Note point 5.0).
- When operating without a blow-off line, medium may spurt from the valve outlet.
Injury hazard!
- Blowing off may generate loud flow noise.
- Medium may be discharged from the vent hole in the spring bonnet (safety
valves with stainless steel bellows and heating valves)
Injury hazard!
- Hot vapour may be discharged if the spring bonnet is open.
Page 2-10 Rev. 0040401000 3616


Maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator according to
the requirements.
ATTENTION !
- Too frequent lifting for test purposes can increase wear of the sealing surfaces!
(by 85% from the set pressure) to ensure that the valve works correctly.
- The safety valve must be lifted from time to time in line with current regulations
(The intervals at which this must be done depends on various factors so that no
generally applicable interval can be specified)
- Original parts only should be fitted as spares as a matter of policy.
- In safety valves with an open spring bonnet there is a danger of being crushed
between the spring windings during lifting and setting.
- Lift the safety valve stem briefly (releasing the lever suddenly) to eliminate slight leaks due
to particles between the seat and disc.
- If this does not eliminate the leak, the sealing surfaces of the seat and/or disc have been
damaged.
This can only be rectified at our works or by an authorised contractor.
- With valves corresponding to Figures 901, 921 and 941, the lever must always be
returned to the original position after lifting the safety valve.
- With Fig. 951 and 961 the lift button must be pressed down again after lifting.
- The manufacturer accepts guarantee liabilities only if tampering by third parties is
prevented.
7.1 Setting instructions
ATTENTION !
The following work must only be carried out by authorised specialist workshops
or at the operator’s own responsibility with monitoring by an independent agency
(e.g. TÜV).
7.1.1 Removing the cap
ATTENTION !
If there is back pressure or during setting/lifting, medium may be discharged from
the open bonnet, or into the adjusting screw area if the bonnet is closed.
ATTENTION !
When changing to the cap without lifting device (series 911, 923, 943), the
spindel cap (pos. 19) must be removed.
Open caps
- Remove slit pin (pos. 40), bolt (pos. 39).
- Extract lifting lever (pos. 41).
- Remove screw (pos. 38).
- Unscrew cap (pos. 29).
Closed caps
- Press lifting lever (pos. 36) towards bonnet (pos. 11) and against stop.
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28).
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-11

Closed cap series 960/950
- Remove spring type straight pin (pos. 68)
- Remove lift button (pos. 67) or lifting lever (pos. 36)
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28)
7.1.2 Changing the set pressure “without” spring change
ATTENTION !
- When changing the set pressure in a pressurised system bear in mind vapour
discharge if bonnet is open, in adjusting screw area if bonnet is closed.
- Note spring setting range.
- Check the spring range.
- Spindle (pos. 14) must be held fast by all alterations.
- Loosen lock nut (pos. 21).
- Turn adjusting screw (pos. 17) clockwise to increase and anticlockwise to reduce the set
pressure.
- Secure spring setting by tightening lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure “with” spring change
ATTENTION !
- Depressurise the system before dismantling or opening the safety valve.
- For removing the cap refer to 7.1.1.

- Extract parallel pin (pos. 20) and lift off the spindle cap (pos. 19).
- Slacken locknut (pos. 21) and relieve spring (pos. 37) by turning adjusting screw (pos. 17)
anticlockwise.
- Unscrew nuts (pos. 8) at flange connection.
Fig. 940: loosen coupling (pos. 61)
Fig. 950/960: loosen bonnet (pos. 11)
ATTENTION !
- With higher set pressures the bonnet is under high spring preload! For
mounting of this bonnets, 2 of the studs (pos. 3) are designed longer. The nuts
(pos. 8) on the longer studs must be removed at last and simultaneously!
- Remove bonnet (pos. 11/42).
- Remove top spring-plate (pos. 26) and spring (pos. 37).
- Extract spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12/12a), guide plate (pos. 4/4a) and bottom
spring-plate (pos. 26).
- Clean seat (pos. 2) and disc (pos. 12).
- Insert spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12), guide plate (pos. 4), spring-plate (pos. 26) and
different spring (pos. 37).
Page 2-12 Rev. 0040401000 3616

- when carrying out any adjustment work hold the spindle (pos. 14) firm to prevent it
twisting.
ATTENTION !
- Torques must be observed:
M10 16-25 Nm screw joint BR940 100 Nm
M12 30-40 Nm screwed seat BR940 180 Nm
M16 70-90 Nm bonnet BR950/960 60 Nm
M20 150-175 Nm
- Check spring marking in accordance with manufacturer’s data.

- Note spring setting range.
- Change seals.
- Fit bonnet (pos. 11/42) and reset the set pressure; make sure spring setting range is
appropriate.
- Secure spring setting by means of lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
- If necessary, replace both spring plates (pos. 26) and use longer studs (pos. 3) when
fitting a spring for a higher set pressure.
- Further information obtainable from the manufacturer.
Only for series 900: DN20-100 (except safety valves with ASME approval)
ATTENTION !
When changing the set pressure and fitting a new spring, note that safety valves
with set pressures between 0.2 and 1.5 bar have a greater lift.
Therefore:
Set pressure in the range Spring change only in
the range
0.2 to 1.5 bar 0.2 to 1.5 bar
> 1.5 bar > 1.5 bar
Only for series 900: DN32 and DN65

ATTENTION !
When changing set pressure with spring change, notify that safety valves with set
pressure range 34,0 - 40,0 bar (DN32), 28,0 - 40,0 bar (DN65) are equipped with
a different lifting aid! Within this set pressure range a lifting aid appropriately
marked with „34,0 - 40,0 bar“ (DN32) resp. „28,0 - 40,0 bar“ (DN65) has to be
installed!
Only for series 950:

ATTENTION !
Safety valves for horizontal application, must also to be set in a
horizontal position ( 5 bar).
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-13

7.2 Representation
SAFE-TCS
SAFE-TCP
SAFE-TC
Bellow
Closed cap
Open cap
fig. 6
Page 2-14 Rev. 0040401000 3616

8.0 Troubleshooting
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-
It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.

“9.0 troubleshooting table”, the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.

ATTENTION !

Safety valve does not Flange covers not removed. Remove flange covers.
respond,
Test gag still in place. Remove test gag.
no flow
Spring blocked. Remove pipe or screw projecting into
bonnet through inspection connection.
Set pressure too high. Reset (point 7.1) or replace the safety
valve.
Stainless steel bellow defective, Replace the safety valve.
no back-pressure compensation.
Back-pressure not taken into account. Reset (point 7.1) or, if necessary,
replace the safety valve.
The use of a stainless steel bellow to
compensate for back-pressure should
be considered.
Medium viscous or sticky Use bellow / heating jacket. Insert
rupture disc upstream if necessary.
The valves and piping must be Heating !

protected against freezing and
solidifying media.
Stem cannot be lifted. Pressure less than 85% of set It must be possible to lift the spindle at
pressure. over 85% of the set pressure.
Safety valve seat leaking. Working pressure higher than 90% of Working pressure must be less than
set pressure. 90% of the set pressure.
At low pressures: lever not in neutral Press lever into neutral position
position with closed cap. (towards bonnet).
Safety valve flattering. Refer to separate point “Flattering”.
Medium contaminated; foreign body Raise spindle briefly or, if necessary,
between seat and disc. replace safety valve.
Use of a soft sealing disc should be
considered.
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-15


Flange broken. Damage during transport. Replace safety valve.
Flange bolts not evenly tightened. Replace safety valve.
Transfer of forces such as bending or Install free of tension.
torsional forces.
Pressure surges. Safety valve not installed at highest Install safety valve at highest point.
point.
Valve drainage inadequate or not fitted. Install drainage system a required by
regulations.
Valve constantly blows off. Transport fastening not removed. Remove transport fastening (red screw
above cap, Figure 990).
Spring corroded by medium and Replace safety valve.
broken. In the case of vapour, select open cap
or bonnet if possible.
Injury owing to medium. Danger of injury from medium (e.g. Replace safety valve.
liquids) emerging from valve. Select design with closed bonnet and
cap.
Install a guard if necessary.
Injury from vapour discharge Install a guard if necessary
(open bonnet / cap)
Flattering. Pressure loss >3% in line to valve. Reduce resistance by chamfering or
radius in connection socket. Select
larger line if necessary.
Poor welding (root pass), gaskets at Change conditions.
inlet and outlet flanges too small or not
concentric.
Safety valve capacity too high. Install smaller safety valve.
Burner capacity too low. Install smaller safety valve.
Blow-off line too long or diameter too Use larger diameter or back-pressure
small. compensation by stainless steel
bellow.
Inlet and/or outlet socket too small. Install with dimensions larger than DN
of inlet and outlet lines.
Back-pressure higher than 10%. Install stainless steel bellow for
pressure compensation.
Capacity too low. Safety valves not applied unsuitable for Select and install suitable safety
plant conditions. valves.
Safety valve not applied in line with Adjust conditions.
current DIN, AD, TRD, etc. rules.
Page 2-16 Rev. 0040401000 3616


ATTENTION !
media.
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and
Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG“ valid at the time of delivery or, by way of
departure, in the contract of sale itself.
We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the
confirmed application.
No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling
or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.
This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under
conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.
Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist
appointed by us.
No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement
delivery is excluded.
The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design
modifications or natural wear.
Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the
competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or
else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.
The manufacturer will accept warranty liability only if there has been no third party
tampering.

ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159
Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com
Rev. 0040401000 3616 Page 2-17

ARI-SAFE
Safety valve
Full lift safety valve / Standard safety valve
ARI-SAFE / SAFE-SN ANSI (Semi-Nozzle)

Full lift safety valve D/G
Standard safety valve F
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 / TRD421
• TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G Figure 901-912
• TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F Figure 901/911 Fig. 901 902 911 912
• Further approvals: see inside Page 2
ARI-SAFE
Standard safety valve
for the heating technology
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / DIN EN 12828 / TRD 721
• TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D/G/H Figure 903
• TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D Figure 904 Fig. 903 904
Page 14
ARI-SAFE-P
Standard safety valve D/G/F Fig. 900 Fig. 940
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2
• TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G Figure 921-924
• TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F Figure 921/923 Fig. 921 922 923 924
Page 20
ARI-SAFE-TC
Full lift safety valve D/G
Standard safety valve F
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 / TRD421
• TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G Figure 941-943
• TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F Figure 941/943 Fig. 941 942 943
Page 26
ARI-SAFE-TC
for the heating technology
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / DIN EN 12828 / TRD 721
• TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D/G/H Figure 945
Fig. 920 Fig. 950/960
• TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D Figure 946 Fig. 945 946 Page 30
ARI-SAFE-TCP
Standard safety valve D/G/F
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G Figure 961-963
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · F Figure 961/963 Fig. 961 962 963
Page 34
ARI-SAFE-TCS Features:
Standard safety valve D/G/F • Direct loaded with spring
• Type-test approved acc. to • Wear resistant seat/disc
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 • Precision disc alignment and guide
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G Figure 951-953 • Possible with soft seal disc
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · F Figure 951/953 Fig. 951 952 953 • Possible with EPDM bellows
ALSO FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATION • Possible with stainless steel bellows
Page 38
• ARI-SAFE-TC/TCP/TCS:
All common thread types
Edition 02/17 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! Data sheet 900005 englisch (english)
ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-- Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .901 Fig. ... .902 Fig. ... .911 Fig. ... .912
closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap, open lifting device,
closed bonnet open bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Flange
-thickness tolerances
12.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +300°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
23.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN25/16 (PN25/10) EN-JS1049 DN200/300 - 250/350 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2534/2533
25.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN40/16 EN-JS1049 DN20/32 - 250/350 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2535/2533
34.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN25/16 (PN25/10) 1.0619+N DN200/300 - 250/350 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2544/2543
35.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN40/16 1.0619+N DN15/25 - 250/350 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
55.901 / 911 PN40/16 1.4408 DN15/25 - 100/150 -60°C to +400°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
Construction
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, material selection observe TRB 801 No. 45!
Type-test approval
Full lift safety valve:
Fig. 901/902/911/912 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G
(acc. to VdTÜV-leaflet 663)
Standard safety valve: Fig. 901/911 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-Safety valve, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...bar
DN15/25 - 100/150 optional:
standard: without metal bellows
with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed on request
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request) on request

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.901/902/911/912 Fig. 23./25.901/902/911/912 Fig. 34./35.901/902/911/912 Fig. 55.901/911
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4 - 70
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT (≥ DN65: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181 A4
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
12 Disc X39CrMo17-1+QT, 1.4122+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
22 Plug screw 5.8 A4
27 x Sealing ring CuFA (≥ DN125: Graphit) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
29 Cap, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
31 x Packing rings Pure graphite
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 (DN200: GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N) GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
36 Lever, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
37 x Spring FDSiCr / 51CrV4, 1.8159 X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
42 Bonnet, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
43 Bellows (optional) EPDM
55 Bellows unit (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
Balanced piston
70 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
(at bellows)
└ Spare parts
DN 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Spring ranges: Standard design

(barg) 0,2 - 0,45 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,3 0,2 - 0,3
(barg) > 0,45 - 0,9 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,4 - 0,75 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,3 - 0,5 > 0,3 - 0,35
(barg) > 0,9 - 1,3 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,75 - 1,1 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,5 - 0,85 > 0,35 - 0,6
(barg) > 1,3 - 2 > 1,5 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,1 - 1,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 > 0,85 - 1,1 > 0,6 - 0,7
(barg) > 2 - 2,5 > 2,5 - 4,5 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 > 1,9 - 2,3 > 1,1 - 1,4 > 0,7 - 0,9
(barg) > 2,5 - 3,2 > 4,5 - 8,5 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 3 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,3 - 2,7 > 1,4 - 1,8 > 0,9 - 1,5
(barg) > 3,2 - 4,3 > 8,5 - 19 > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 > 2,7 - 3,3 > 1,8 - 2,0 > 1,5 - 1,9
(barg) > 4,3 - 5,6 > 19 - 28 > 5 - 9 > 5 - 9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 > 3,3 - 4,1 > 2,0 - 2,2 > 1,9 - 2,6
(barg) > 5,6 - 10 > 28 - 35 > 9 - 16 > 9 - 14 > 5 - 9 > 4 - 5,7 > 4,1 - 5,5 > 2,2 - 2,4 > 2,6 - 3,0
Full lift safety valve
Fig. 901/902/911/912
(barg) > 10 - 20 > 35 - 40 > 16 - 22 > 14 - 19 > 9 - 14 > 5,7 - 8,2 > 5,5 - 7,4 > 2,4 - 2,7 > 3,0 - 4,5
(barg) > 20 - 25,9 > 22 - 28 > 19 - 25 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 > 7,4 - 11 > 2,7 - 3,1 > 4,5 - 6,0
(barg) > 25,9 - 40 > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 > 11 - 16 > 3,1 - 4,0 > 6,0 - 7,0
(barg) > 34 - 40 > 17 - 24 > 16 - 21 > 4,0 - 4,8 > 7,0 - 8,5
(barg) > 24 - 27 > 21 - 26 > 4,8 - 5,6 > 8,5 - 10,0
> 5,6 - 6,8 > 10,0 - 11,5
Information / restriction of technical rules need to be observed! > 6,8 - 7,8 > 11,5 - 13,0
ARI-Valves of EN-JL1040 are not allowed to be operated in systems acc. to TRD 110. > 7,8 - 9,5 > 13,0 - 14,0
A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available > 9,5 - 11,0 > 14,0 - 15,0
(acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 EN-JL1040 is not allowed.) >11,0 - 13,0 > 15,0 - 16,0
The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for the selection of the correct valve. > 13,0 - 15,0 > 16,0 - 20,0
Resistance and fitness must be verified > 15,0 - 17,5
(contact manufacturer for information, refer to Product overview and Resistance list). > 17,5 - 21,0
> 21,0 - 25,0
Spring ranges: Bellows design (optional)

(barg) 5 - 6,4 3 - 3,7 2,5 - 3,3 2,5 - 3,2 2,6 - 3,6 2,8 - 3,4 2,5 - 3,7 2,5 - 3,3 2,5 - 3,5
(barg) > 6,4 - 7,7 > 3,7 - 4,6 > 3,3 - 4,6 > 3,2 - 4 > 3,6 - 4,5 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,7 - 4,6 > 3,3 - 4,5 > 3,5 - 4,2
(barg) > 7,7 - 10 > 4,6 - 6,3 > 4,6 - 5,4 > 4 - 5,5 > 4,5 - 5,6 > 4,5 - 8,4 > 4,6 - 5,9 > 4,5 - 5,8 > 4,2 - 4,9
Fig. 901/911
(barg) > 10 - 16 > 6,3 - 8,4 > 5,4 - 7 > 5,5 - 6,4 > 5,6 - 7,5 > 8,4 - 10 > 5,9 - 8 > 5,8 - 7,5 > 4,9 - 5,6
(barg) > 16 - 18,5 > 8,4 - 10,2 > 7 - 9 > 6,4 - 7,9 > 7,5 - 10 > 10 - 11,5 > 8 - 10 > 7,5 - 8,9 > 5,6 - 7 --
(barg) > 18,5 - 26 > 10,2 - 13 > 9 - 11,7 > 7,9 - 11,5 > 10 - 12,5 > 11,5 - 16 > 10 - 18 > 8,9 - 10,5 > 7 - 8
(barg) > 26 - 40 > 13 - 17 > 11,7 - 16 > 11,5 - 18,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 16 - 18,5 > 18 - 24 > 10,5 - 13 > 8 - 9,3
(barg) > 17 - 27,5 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 25 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 23 > 24 - 26 > 13 - 14 > 9,3 - 11,5
(barg) > 22 - 30 > 11,5 - 13

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 13 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125 165 200
A0 (mm2) 133 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272 21382 31416
l (mm) 80 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225 300 325
l1 (mm) 90 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285 305 340
H (mm) 260 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890 1105 1175
H (Bellows design) (mm) 290 310 335 390 445 500 620 690 770 -- -- -- --
X (mm) 150 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500 500 500
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408 -- --
C
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408 521 600
(Widthupport
1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408 521 600
tongues)
1.4408 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 -- -- -- --
(inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Drainhole with plug
Standard for EN-JL1040, EN-JS1049 1.0619+N, optional at 1.4408
Weights
standard (kg) 7 8,5 10 14 20 28 40 53 80 125 165 280 430
optional: Bellows design (kg) 7,5 9,5 11,5 16 22,5 32 47 59 90 -- -- -- --
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 -- --
ØD1 PN25 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 360 425
PN40 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 375 450
PN10 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 445 505
ØD2
PN16 (mm) 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460 520
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- 18 18 18 19 20 22 24 24 27 29 37 40
b1
1.0619+N (mm) 16 20 20 20 21 22 24 26 28 31 34 37 40
1.4408 (mm) 16 16 16 18 19 20 22 22 23 -- -- -- --
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 31 33 33 35
b2
1.0619+N (mm) 18 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 27 29 33 35
1.4408 (mm) 18 15 16 17 17 17 17 19 19 -- -- -- --
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2543 / 2545 / 28605 / 28607, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
Standard-Flangeholes
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
ØK (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 460
PN10 DIN 2532
n x Ød (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12x22 16x22
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410 470
PN16 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26 12x26 16x26
ØK (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 310 370 -- --
PN25 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12x26 12x30 -- --
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 320 385 -- --
PN40 DIN 2545
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 12x30 12x33 -- --
1) also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 25 (bar) on request 25 24,3 23 21,8 20 17,5 -- --
EN-JS1049 40 (bar) on request 40 38,8 36,8 34,8 32 28 -- --
1.0619+N 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 8,2
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
1) Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: DN15-100; 250 < 3,5 bar, DN125-200 < 4,0 bar)
DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G 0,74 0,7 0,75 0,7
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F 0,52 0,54 0,48 0,45 0,56 0,52

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Capacity: Saturated steam
Capacity saturated steam (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Set pressure Saturated steam (kg/h)
0,2 (barg) 42 81 126 210 324 506 855 1295 2024 2510 3490 6937 8931
0,4 (barg) 60 120 185 307 473 739 1250 1890 2960 3630 5050 9694 12615
0,5 (barg) 67 132 207 344 529 827 1400 2120 3310 4070 5660 10859 14204
0,6 (barg) 74 147 230 383 590 923 1560 2360 3690 4470 6220 11934 15698
0,8 (barg) 87 174 272 453 698 1090 1840 2790 4360 5240 7280 13901 18492
1 (barg) 100 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385 15868 21306
1,5 (barg) 133 272 425 707 1090 1700 2875 4355 6800 8050 11200 20739 28637
2 (barg) 164 305 477 792 1220 1900 3220 4880 7625 10125 14080 25647 36333
2,5 (barg) 194 366 572 950 1460 2285 3865 5855 9145 11990 16660 30689 43601
3 (barg) 224 424 662 1100 1695 2645 4475 6775 10600 13880 19300 35874 50185
4 (barg) 280 535 837 1390 2140 3350 5650 8570 13400 17550 24400 45676 62689
5 (barg) 335 640 1000 1665 2565 4000 6770 10260 16000 21000 29250 54723 75043
6 (barg) 390 745 1165 1940 2990 4665 7890 11950 18650 24500 34050 63698 87350
7 (barg) 445 850 1330 2210 3400 5320 9000 13600 21300 27900 38800 72658 99638
8 (barg) 500 957 1495 2485 3820 5980 10100 15300 23900 31350 43600 81599 111898
9 (barg) 554 1060 1660 2755 4245 6630 11200 16950 26500 34800 48400 90525 124139
10 (barg) 609 1165 1820 3025 4665 7290 12300 18650 29150 38250 53200 99452 136381
11 (barg) 664 1270 1985 3300 5080 7940 13400 20300 31750 41600 58000 108370 148610
12 (barg) 718 1375 2150 3570 5500 8590 14500 22000 34350 45100 62700 117282 160831
13 (barg) 773 1480 2310 3840 5920 9250 15600 23650 37000 48500 67500 126197 173057
14 (barg) 827 1580 2475 4110 6340 9900 16700 25350 39600 52000 72300 135113 185284
15 (barg) 882 1690 2640 4385 6760 10550 17800 27000 42200 55400 77000 144035 197518
16 (barg) 936 1790 2800 4655 7170 11200 18950 28700 44800 58800 81800 152960 209758
17 (barg) 991 1900 2965 4930 7590 11850 20050 30350 47400 62200 86600 161889 222002
18 (barg) 1046 2000 3130 5200 8010 12500 21150 32050 50100 65700 91400 170826 234257
19 (barg) 1101 2100 3295 5470 8430 13150 22250 33700 52700 69100 96200 179777 246532
(barg) 1156 2210 3460 5750 8850 13800 23350 35400 55300 72600 101000 188724 258800
← max. set pressure stainless steel version
20
21 (barg) 1210 2320 3620 6020 9250 14500 24500 37100 57900 76000 105800 197693
22 (barg) 1265 2420 3790 6290 9700 15150 25600 38800 60600 79500 110900 206658
24 (barg) 1375 2635 4120 6840 10500 16450 27850 42100 65900 86500 120600 224640
25 (barg) 1431 2740 4280 7120 10950 17100 28950 43800 90200 125500 233648
26 (barg) 1486 2850 4450 7390 11350 17800 30050 93700 130300
27 (barg) 1541 2950 4620 7670 11820 18460 31220 96950
28 (barg) 1597 3060 4780 7950 12250 19100 32300
30 (barg) 1708 3270 5120 8500 13100 20450 34550
32 (barg) 1819 3490 5450 9060 13950 21800 36800
34 (barg)
40 (barg)

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Capacity: Air
Capacity air (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Set pressure Air 0°C and 1,013 bara (Nm3/h)
0,2 (barg) 49 95 148 246 380 594 1003 1520 2375 2945 4100 8150 10398
0,4 (barg) 72 143 223 370 570 891 1505 2280 3565 4380 6090 11695 15219
0,5 (barg) 82 161 252 419 646 1009 1705 2585 4035 4970 6910 13256 17340
0,6 (barg) 91 182 284 472 728 1135 1920 2910 4545 5520 7675 14731 19376
0,8 (barg) 110 218 341 567 873 1365 2305 3490 5460 6555 9115 17428 23182
1 (barg) 126 255 398 661 1019 1590 2690 4075 6370 7575 10530 19963 26803
1,5 (barg) 168 344 538 894 1378 2150 3640 5510 8610 10195 14180 26284 36294
2 (barg) 209 388 607 1008 1550 2425 4100 6210 9700 12890 17920 32693 46314
2,5 (barg) 248 468 731 1215 1870 2925 4945 7490 11700 15330 21300 39310 55850
3 (barg) 288 544 850 1410 2175 3400 5750 8700 13600 17840 24800 46140 64547
4 (barg) 362 692 1080 1800 2770 4330 7310 11080 17300 22725 31600 59135 81161
5 (barg) 436 834 1300 2160 3330 5210 8800 13340 20840 27350 38000 71211 97653
6 (barg) 510 975 1520 2530 3900 6090 10300 15600 24370 31900 44400 83238 114146
7 (barg) 583 1115 1745 2900 4465 6970 11790 17860 27900 36600 50900 95264 130638
8 (barg) 657 1255 1965 3260 5030 7860 13280 20100 31430 41200 57300 107291 147130
9 (barg) 730 1395 2185 3630 5590 8740 14770 22370 34960 45800 63800 119318 163623
10 (barg) 804 1540 2400 3990 6150 9610 16250 24600 38500 50500 70200 131344 180115
11 (barg) 878 1680 2625 4360 6720 10500 17750 26900 42000 55100 76600 143371 196607
12 (barg) 951 1820 2845 4730 7290 11380 19240 29150 45500 59700 83100 155398 213099
13 (barg) 1025 1960 3070 5090 7850 12270 20730 31400 49000 64400 89500 167424 229592
14 (barg) 1099 2100 3290 5460 8400 13150 22200 33650 52600 69000 96000 179451 246084
15 (barg) 1173 2245 3500 5830 8980 14030 23700 35900 56100 73600 102400 191477 262576
16 (barg) 1246 2385 3725 6190 9540 14900 25200 38200 59600 78200 108800 203504 279069
17 (barg) 1320 2530 3950 6560 10100 15800 26700 40400 63100 82900 115300 215531 295561
18 (barg) 1394 2670 4170 6920 10670 16650 28100 42700 66700 87500 121700 227557 312053
19 (barg) 1467 2800 4390 7300 11240 17550 29600 44900 70200 92100 128100 239584 328546
20 (barg) 1541 2950 4610 7660 11800 18400 31150 47200 73700 96800 134600 251610 345038
21 (barg) 1614 3090 4830 8020 12370 19300 32650 49400 77300 101400 141000 263637
(barg) 1688 3230 5050 8390 12930 20200 34150 51700 80800 106000 147500 275664
22
24 (barg) 1835 3515 5490 9120 14060 21970 37100 56200 87900 115300 160400 299717
25 (barg) 1909 3655 5710 9490 14620 22850 38600 58500 120000 166900 311743
26 (barg) 1983 3800 5930 9850 15190 23730 40100 124600 173300
27 (barg) 2057 3930 6160 10240 15770 24630 41650 129350
28 (barg) 2130 4080 6370 10600 16320 25500 43100
30 (barg) 2277 4360 6810 11320 17450 27250 46100
32 (barg) 2425 4640 7250 12050 18570 29000 49100
34 (barg) 2572 4925 7700 12790 19700 30800 52050
40 (barg) 3014 5770 9030 14477 23810 36100 61000

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Capacity: Water
Capacity water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Set pressure Water 20°C (t/h)
0,2 (bar) 1,63 3,28 5,13 8,53 13,1 20,5 30,8 46,7 73 94,9 132 286 390
0,5 (bar) 2,60 5,19 8,12 13,5 20,8 32,5 48,8 73,9 115 150 209 452 616
1 (bar) 3,68 7,35 11,5 19,1 29,4 45,9 69 104 163 212 295 639 872
2 (bar) 5,20 10,4 16,2 27 41,6 64,9 97,5 148 231 300 417 903 1233
3 (bar) 6,38 12,7 19,9 33 50,9 79,5 119 181 283 368 511 1106 1510
4 (bar) 7,36 14,7 22,9 38,1 58,7 91,8 138 209 326 424 590 1278 1743
5 (bar) 8,24 16,4 25,7 42,6 65,5 102 154 233 365 474 660 1428 1949
6 (bar) 9,02 18 28,1 46,7 72 112 169 256 400 520 723 1565 2135
7 (bar) 9,75 19,4 30,4 50,4 77,7 121 182 276 432 562 781 1690 2306
8 (bar) 10,41 20,8 32,5 53,9 83,1 130 195 295 461 600 835 1807 2465
9 (bar) 11,05 22 34,4 57,2 88,1 138 207 313 490 637 885 1917 2615
10 (bar) 11,64 23,2 36,3 60,3 92,9 145 218 330 516 671 933 2020 2756
11 (bar) 12,21 24,4 38 63,2 97,4 152 229 346 540 703 977 2119 2891
12 (bar) 12,76 25,4 39,7 66 102 159 239 362 565 735 1022 2213 3019
13 (bar) 13,28 26,5 41,4 68,7 106 165 249 376 587 764 1062 2303 3143
14 (bar) 13,78 27,5 42,9 71,3 110 172 258 391 611 794 1104 2390 3261
16 (bar) 14,73 29,4 45,9 76,3 117 184 276 418 653 849 1181 2555 3486
18 (bar) 15,62 31,2 48,7 80,9 125 195 293 443 692 900 1252 2710 3698
19 (bar) 16,05 32 49,9 82,9 128 200 300 454 710 923 1284 2785 3799
20 (bar) 16,47 32,8 51,3 85,3 131 205 308 467 730 949 1320 2857 3898
(bar) 16,87 33,7 52,6 87,4 135 210 316 479 748 973 1350 2928
21
24 (bar) 18,04 36 56,2 93,4 144 225 338 512 800 1040 1443 3130
25 (bar) 18,41 36,7 57,4 95,3 147 229 345 522 1059 1473 3194
26 (bar) 18,78 37,4 58,5 97,2 150 234 352 1080 1502
27 (bar) 19,13 38,2 59,6 99 153 238 358 1100
28 (bar) 19,49 38,9 60,7 101 155 243 365
30 (bar) 20,17 40,2 62,9 104 161 251 375
32 (bar) 20,83 41,5 64,8 108 166 259 380
34 (bar) 21,47 42,8 66,9 111 171 268 400
40 (bar) 23,29 46,4 72,5 124,8 185,4 289,7 435

ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI (Semi-Nozzle-TÜV) 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI (Semi-Nozzle) - Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .901 Fig. ... .902 Fig. ... .911 Fig. ... .912
closed bonnet open bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet

32.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 ANSI150/150 SA216 WCB 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" -29°C to +427°C ASME B16.5
35.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 ANSI300/150 SA216 WCB 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" -29°C to +427°C ASME B16.5
52.901 / 911 ANSI150/150 SA351 CF8M 1" x 2" - 4" x 6" -59°C to +399°C ASME B16.5
55.901 / 911 ANSI300/150 SA351 CF8M 1" x 2" - 4" x 6" -59°C to +399°C ASME B16.5
Type-test approval
Fig. 901/902/911/912 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G
Construction / Application
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded; steam, gases, vapours and liquids
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 421 / AD2000-A2
Sizing
Calculation acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD-leaflet A2
Details required
Medium: Gas Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), temperature (°C), set pressure (bar), back gauge pressure (bar)
Medium: Liquid Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (bar), back gauge pressure (bar)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI - safety valve, Figure ..., Nominal diameter .../..., ANSI ..., Material ..., Set pressure ... bar
standard: without metal bellows 1" x 2" - 4" x 6" optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (gauge) (higher on request) on request

Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 32.901/902/911/912; 35.901/902/911/912 Fig. 52.901/911; 55.901/911
1 Body SA216 WCB SA351 CF8M
2 Seat SA479 Gr.316 Ti SA479 Gr.316 Ti
3 Studs SA193 B7 SA193 B8
4 x Spindle guide NPS ≤ 2": SA276 Gr.420; NPS > 2": SA395 / SA276 Gr.440 NPS ≤ 2": SA479 Gr.316 Ti; NPS > 2": SA351 CF8M
7 x Gasket GRAPHIT/ SA240 Gr.316L (CrNi laminated with graphite)
8 Hexagon nut SA194 2H SA194 8
11 Bonnet, closed SA395 SA351 CF8M
12 x Disc SA276 Gr.440 SA479 Gr.316 Ti
14 x Spindle SA276 Gr.420 SA479 Gr.316 Ti
17 Adjusting screw SA276 Gr.420 SA479 Gr.316 L
22 Plug screw (optional) SA193-B7 SA193-B8
27 x Sealing ring CuFA SA479 Gr.316 Ti
28 Cap, closed SA395 SA351 CF8M
29 Cap, open SA395 --
30 Cap, gastight SA395 SA351 CF8M
31 x Packing ring GRAPHIT
35 Lift fork SA395 SA351 CF8M
36 Lever, closed SA395 SA479 Gr.316 Ti
37 x Spring SA401 Gr.9254, SA29 Gr.6150 SA313 Gr.316
41 Lever, open SA395 --
42 Bonnet, open SA395 --
55 Stainless steel bellows unit (optional) SA240 / SA479 Gr.316 Ti SA240 / SA479 Gr.316 Ti
70 Balanced piston SA240 Gr.316 Ti SA479 Gr.316 Ti
└ Spare parts
Coefficient of discharge Kdr VdTÜV (Values for D/G variabel: 1" - 4" < 3,5 bar, 6" < 4,0 bar)
1 1/2"x2"
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
1 1/2"x2 1/2"
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G (bar) 0,74 0,70
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F (bar) 0,54 0,48 0,45
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined

by linear interpolation of the given temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to ANSI -29°C to 38°C 93°C 149°C 204°C 260°C 315°C 343°C 371°C 399°C 427°C
SA216WCB ANSI150 (bar) 19,6 17,9 15,8 13,8 11,7 9,6 8,6 7,6 6,6 5,5
SA216WCB ANSI300 (bar) 51,1 46,6 45,2 43,8 41,4 39,3 37,9 36,6 34,8 28,3
acc. to ANSI -59°C bis 38°C 93°C 149°C 204°C 260°C 315°C 343°C 371°C 399°C 427°C
SA351CF8M ANSI150 (bar) 19 16,5 14,8 13,6 11,7 9,7 8,7 7,6 6,5 --
SA351CF8M ANSI300 (bar) 49,6 43 38,6 35,5 33 31,2 30,5 30,0 29,4 --


Technical data / Spring ranges
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Center-to-face dimensions acc. to API 526 (dedicated to API-Orifice)

API-Orifice D, E F G H J L M P Q R
l (mm) 114,3 120,7 120,7 123,8 123,8 165,1 184,2 228,6 241,3 266,7
l1 (mm) 104,8 123,8 123,8 130,2 136,5 155,6 177,8 181 239,7 239,7
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 22,5 29 29 36 45 58,5 90 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 398 661 661 1018 1590 2688 6362 6362 8825 12272
H (mm) 280 330 330 390 435 545 690 690 845 890
H (with stainless steel bellows) (mm) 335 390 390 445 500 620 770 770 -- --
X (mm) 150 200 200 250 300 350 500 500 500
C (Width of support tongues) (mm) -- -- -- -- 204 242 332 362 405
(inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Drainhole with plug
Optional, not standard
Weights
Standard (kg) 12 18 18 23 30 47 80 82 140 170
Option: stainless steel bellows (kg) 13,5 20 20 25,5 34 54 90 92 -- --
Standard-flange dimensions Flanges acc. to ASME / ANSI B16.5

ANSI150 (mm) 108 127 127 127 153 191 229 280 280
ØD1
ANSI300 (mm) 124 156 156 156 165 210 254 318 318
ØD2 ANSI150 (mm) 153 153 178 191 191 229 280 343 407
ANSI150 (mm) 17,5 20,6 20,6 20,6 22,3 28,6 31,8 36,5 36,5
b1
ANSI300 (mm) 17,5 20,6 20,6 20,6 22,3 28,6 31,8 36,5 36,5
b2 ANSI150 (mm) 19,1 19,1 22,3 23,8 23,8 23,8 25,4 28,6 30,2
NPS 1" 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10"
ØK (mm) 79 98 120,5 140 152,5 190,5 241,5 298,5 362
ANSI150
n x Ød (mm) 4 x 16 4 x 16 4 x 19 4 x 19 4 x 19 8 x 19 8 x 22 8 x 22 12 x 25
ØK (mm) 89 114,5 127 -- 168 200 270 -- --
ANSI300
n x Ød (mm) 4 x 19 4 x 22 8 x 19 -- 8 x 22 8 x 22 12 x 22 -- --
1 1/2"x2"
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
1 1/2"x2 1/2"

(barg) 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5
(barg) > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,4 - 0,75 > 0,5 - 1
(barg) > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,75 - 1,1 > 1 - 1,5
(barg) > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,1 - 1,5 > 1,5 - 1,9
(barg) > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 > 1,9 - 2,3
(barg) > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 3 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,3 - 2,7
Full lift safety valve (barg) > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 > 2,7 - 3,3
Fig. 901902/911/912 (barg) > 5 - 9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 > 3,3 - 4,1
(barg) > 9 - 16 > 5 - 9 > 4 - 5,7 > 4,1 - 5,5
(barg) > 16 - 22 > 9 - 14 > 5,7 - 8,2 > 5,5 - 7,4
(barg) > 22 - 28 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 > 7,4 - 11
(barg) > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 > 11 - 16
(barg) > 34 - 40 > 17 - 24 > 16 - 21
(barg) > 24 - 27 > 21 - 26
Spring ranges: Stainless steel bellows (optional)

(barg) 2,5 - 3,3 2,5 - 3,2 2,6 - 3,6 2,8 - 3,4 2,5 - 3,7 2,5 - 3,5
(barg) > 3,3 - 4,6 > 3,3 - 4 > 3,6 - 4,5 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,7 - 4,6 > 3,5 - 4,2
(barg) > 4,6 - 5,4 > 4 - 5,5 > 4,5 - 5,6 > 4,5 - 8,4 > 4,6 - 5,9 > 4,2 - 4,9
(barg) > 5,4 - 7 > 5,5 - 6,4 > 5,6 - 7,5 > 8,4 - 10 > 5,9 - 8 > 4,9 - 5,6
(barg) > 7 - 9 > 6,4 - 7,9 > 7,5 - 10 > 10 - 11,5 > 8 - 10 > 5,6 - 7
Fig. 901/911
(barg) > 9 - 11,7 > 7,9 - 11,5 > 10 - 12,5 > 11,5 - 16 > 10 - 18 > 7 - 8
(barg) > 11,7 - 16 > 11,5 - 18,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 16 - 18,5 > 18 - 24 > 8 - 9,3
(barg) > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 25 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 23 > 24 - 26 > 9,3 - 11,5
(barg) > 22 - 30 > 11,5 - 13


NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Set pressure Saturated steam kg/h
0,2 (barg) 126 210 210 324 506 855 2024 2510 3490
0,4 (barg) 185 307 307 473 739 1250 2960 3630 5050
0,5 (barg) 207 344 344 529 827 1400 3310 4070 5660
0,6 (barg) 230 383 383 590 923 1560 3690 4470 6220
0,8 (barg) 272 453 453 698 1090 1840 4360 5240 7280
1 (barg) 317 526 526 811 1270 2140 5070 6030 8385
1,5 (barg) 425 707 707 1090 1700 2875 6800 8050 11200
2 (barg) 477 792 792 1220 1900 3220 7625 10125 14080
2,5 (barg) 572 950 950 1460 2285 3865 9145 11990 16660
3 (barg) 662 1100 1100 1695 2645 4475 10600 13880 19300
4 (barg) 837 1390 1390 2140 3350 5650 13400 17550 24400
5 (barg) 1000 1665 1665 2565 4000 6770 16000 21000 29250
6 (barg) 1165 1940 1940 2990 4665 7890 18650 24500 34050
7 (barg) 1330 2210 2210 3400 5320 9000 21300 27900 38800
8 (barg) 1495 2485 2485 3820 5980 10100 23900 31350 43600
9 (barg) 1660 2755 2755 4245 6630 11200 26500 34800 48400
10 (barg) 1820 3025 3025 4665 7290 12300 29150 38250 53200
11 (barg) 1985 3300 3300 5080 7940 13400 31750 41600 58000
12 (barg) 2150 3570 3570 5500 8590 14500 34350 45100 62700
13 (barg) 2310 3840 3840 5920 9250 15600 37000 48500 67500
14 (barg) 2475 4110 4110 6340 9900 16700 39600 52000 72300
15 (barg) 2640 4385 4385 6760 10550 17800 42200 55400 77000
16 (barg) 2800 4655 4655 7170 11200 18950 44800 58800 81800
17 (barg) 2965 4930 4930 7590 11850 20050 47400 62200 86600
18 (barg) 3130 5200 5200 8010 12500 21150 50100 65700 91400
(barg) 3295 5470 5470 8430 13150 22250 52700 69100 96200
19
20 (barg) 3460 5750 5750 8850 13800 23350 55300 72600 101000
21 (barg) 3620 6020 6020 9250 14500 24500 57900 76000 105800
22 (barg) 3790 6290 6290 9700 15150 25600 60600 79500 110900
24 (barg) 4120 6840 6840 10500 16450 27850 65900 86500 120600
25 (barg) 4280 7120 7120 10950 17100 28950 90200 125500
26 (barg) 4450 7390 7390 11350 17800 30050 93700 130300
27 (barü) 4620 7670 7670 11820 18460 31220 96950
28 (barg) 4780 7950 7950 12250 19100 32300
30 (barg) 5120 8500 8500 13100 20450 34550
32 (barg) 5450 9060 9060 13950 21800 36800
34 (barg) 5800 9650 9650 14850 23250 39100
40 (barg)

Capacity: Air

NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Set pressure Air in Nm3/h (0°C; 1,013 bara)
0,2 (barg) 148 246 246 380 594 1003 2375 2945 4100
0,4 (barg) 223 370 370 570 891 1505 3565 4380 6090
0,5 (barg) 252 419 419 646 1009 1705 4035 4970 6910
0,6 (barg) 284 472 472 728 1135 1920 4545 5520 7675
0,8 (barg) 341 567 567 873 1365 2305 5460 6555 9115
1 (barg) 398 661 661 1019 1590 2690 6370 7575 10530
1,5 (barg) 538 894 894 1378 2150 3640 8610 10195 14180
2 (barg) 607 1008 1008 1550 2425 4100 9700 12890 17920
2,5 (barg) 731 1215 1215 1870 2925 4945 11700 15330 21300
3 (barg) 850 1410 1410 2175 3400 5750 13600 17840 24800
4 (barg) 1080 1800 1800 2770 4330 7310 17300 22725 31600
5 (barg) 1300 2160 2160 3330 5210 8800 20840 27350 38000
6 (barg) 1520 2530 2530 3900 6090 10300 24370 31900 44400
7 (barg) 1745 2900 2900 4465 6970 11790 27900 36600 50900
8 (barg) 1965 3260 3260 5030 7860 13280 31430 41200 57300
9 (barg) 2185 3630 3630 5590 8740 14770 34960 45800 63800
10 (barg) 2400 3990 3990 6150 9610 16250 38500 50500 70200
11 (barg) 2625 4360 4360 6720 10500 17750 42000 55100 76600
12 (barg) 2845 4730 4730 7290 11380 19240 45500 59700 83100
13 (barg) 3070 5090 5090 7850 12270 20730 49000 64400 89500
14 (barg) 3290 5460 5460 8400 13150 22200 52600 69000 96000
15 (barg) 3500 5830 5830 8980 14030 23700 56100 73600 102400
16 (barg) 3725 6190 6190 9540 14900 25200 59600 78200 108800
17 (barg) 3950 6560 6560 10100 15800 26700 63100 82900 115300
18 (barg) 4170 6920 6920 10670 16650 28100 66700 87500 121700
(barg) 4390 7300 7300 11240 17550 29600 70200 92100 128100
19
20 (barg) 4610 7660 7660 11800 18400 31150 73700 96800 134600
21 (barg) 4830 8020 8020 12370 19300 32650 77300 101400 141000
22 (barg) 5050 8390 8390 12930 20200 34150 80800 106000 147500
24 (barg) 5490 9120 9120 14060 21970 37100 87900 115300 160400
25 (barg) 5710 9490 9490 14620 22850 38600 120000 166900
26 (barg) 5930 9850 9850 15190 23730 40100 124600 173300
27 (barü) 6160 10240 10240 15770 24630 41650 129350
28 (barg) 6370 10600 10600 16320 25500 43100
30 (barg) 6810 11320 11320 17450 27250 46100
32 (barg) 7250 12050 12050 18570 29000 49100
34 (barg) 7700 12790 12790 19700 30800 52050
40 (barg) 9030 14477 14477 23810 36100 61000

Capacity: Water

NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Set pressure Water m3/h
0,2 (barg) 5,13 8,53 8,53 13,1 20,5 30,8 73 94,9 132
0,5 (barg) 8,12 13,5 13,5 20,8 32,5 48,8 115 150 209
1 (barg) 11,5 19,1 19,1 29,4 45,9 69 163 212 295
2 (barg) 16,2 27 27 41,6 64,9 97,5 231 300 417
3 (barg) 19,9 33 33 50,9 79,5 119 283 368 511
4 (barg) 22,9 38,1 38,1 58,7 91,8 138 326 424 590
5 (barg) 25,7 42,6 42,6 65,5 102 154 365 474 660
6 (barg) 28,1 46,7 46,7 72 112 169 400 520 723
7 (barg) 30,4 50,4 50,4 77,7 121 182 432 562 781
8 (barg) 32,5 53,9 53,9 83,1 130 195 461 600 835
9 (barg) 34,4 57,2 57,2 88,1 138 207 490 637 885
10 (barg) 36,3 60,3 60,3 92,9 145 218 516 671 933
11 (barg) 38 63,2 63,2 97,4 152 229 540 703 977
12 (barg) 39,7 66 66 102 159 239 565 735 1022
13 (barg) 41,4 68,7 68,7 106 165 249 587 764 1062
14 (barg) 42,9 71,3 71,3 110 172 258 611 794 1104
16 (barg) 45,9 76,3 76,3 117 184 276 653 849 1181
(barg) 48,7 80,9 80,9 125 195 293 692 900 1252
18
19 (barg) 49,9 82,9 82,9 128 200 300 710 923 1284
20 (barg) 51,3 85,3 85,3 131 205 308 730 949 1320
21 (barg) 52,6 87,4 87,4 135 210 316 748 973 1350
24 (barg) 56,2 93,4 93,4 144 225 338 800 1040 1443
25 (barg) 57,4 95,3 95,3 147 229 345 1059 1473
26 (barg) 58,5 97,2 97,2 150 234 352 1080 1502
27 (barg) 59,6 99 99 153 238 358 1100
28 (barg) 60,7 101 101 155 243 365
30 (barg) 62,9 104 104 161 251 375
32 (barg) 64,8 108 108 166 259 390
34 (barg) 66,9 111 111 171 268 400
40 (barü) 72,5 124,8 124,8 185,4 289,7 435

ARI-SAFE 903
Technical data
ARI-SAFE - Heating-safety valve
(Construction DN 20-100) (Construction DN125-150)

EPDM-disc, soft seal insert; EPDM-bellows
Fig. ... .903

open lifting device,
closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
12.903 (max. 10 bar) PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
25.903 PN40/16 EN-JS1049 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2535/2533
35.903 PN40/16 1.0619+N DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded metal seat with EPDM insert, EPDM-bellows, closed spring bonnet with control hole, open lifting device,
stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
Acc. to DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 6, material selection observe TRD!
• Fig. 12.903 (EN-JL1040) max. 10 bar
• > 10 bar Fig. 25.903 (EN-JS1049) or Fig. 35.903 (1.0619+N)
Type-test approval
Spring loaded: Fig. 903 TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D/G/H
Sizing
acc. to TRD Part 6.2.5 (see capacity-tables Figure 903)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-spring loaded, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg

ARI-SAFE 903
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.903 Fig. 25.903 Fig. 35.903
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Seat X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
12 Disc X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / EPDM
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X14CrMoS17+QT, 1.4104+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030
37 x Compression spring FDSiCr / 51CrV4, 1.8159
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030
43 Bellows EPDM
└ Spare parts
DN1 / DN 2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250

(barü) 0,2 - 0,5 > 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5
(barü) > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,4 - 0,75 0,5 - 1
(barü) > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,75 - 1,1 1 - 1,5
(barü) > 1,5 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,11 - 1,5 1,5 - 1,9
(barü) > 2,5 - 4,5 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 1,9 - 2,3
(barü) > 4,5 - 8,5 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 3 > 1,9 - 2,5 2,3 - 2,7
Spring loaded
(barü) > 8,5 - 19 1) > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 2,7 - 3,3
Fig. 903
(barü) > 19 - 28 > 5 - 9 > 5 - 9 > 5 - 9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 3,3 - 4,1
(barü) > 28 - 35 > 9 - 16 1) > 9 - 16 1) > 9 - 14 1) > 5 - 9 > 4 - 5,7 4,1 - 5,5
(barü) > 35 - 40 > 16 - 22 > 16 - 22 > 14 - 19 > 9 - 14 1) > 5,7 - 8,2 5,5 - 7,4
(barü) > 22 - 28 > 22 - 28 > 19 - 25 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 1) 7,4 - 11 1)
(barü) > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 11 - 16
(barü) > 17 - 24 16 - 21
(barü) > 24 - 27 21 - 26
1) Fig. 12.903 max. 10 bar; > 10 bar 25.903 or 35.903

ARI-SAFE 903
Technical data / Capacity: Water
DN1 / DN 2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272
l (mm) 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225
l1 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285
H (mm) 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890
X (mm) 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500
C EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
(Width support EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
tongues) 1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408
Drainhole with plug (optional) (inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Weights
standard (kg) 8,5 9,5 13,5 20 26 39 53 82 125 165
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 220 250 285
ØD1 105 115 140 150 165 185 200
PN40 (mm) 235 270 300
ØD2 PN16 (mm) 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405
EN-JL1040 (mm) 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26
b1 EN-JS1049 (mm) 18 18 18 19 20 22 24 24 27 29
1.0619+N (mm) 20 20 20 21 22 24 26 28 31 34
EN-JL1040 (mm) 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32
b2 EN-JS1049 (mm) 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 31 33
1.0619+N (mm) 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 27 29
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2543 / 2545 / 28605 / 28607, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
DN 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355
PN16 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 -- --
PN40 DIN 2545
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 -- --
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1

Sizing safety valves for the volume flow of water expansion (DIN 4751 T2 - item 8.1 / DIN EN 12828 - item E.3)
DN1 (inlet) / DN2 (outlet)
Set pressure
20 / 32 25 / 40
1 (barg) (kg/h) 7300 11500
2 (barg) (kg/h) 10400 16000
3 (barg) (kg/h) 12700 20000
4 (barg) (kg/h) 14700 23000
5 (barg) (kg/h) 16400 25500
6 (barg) (kg/h) 18000 28000
Water 20°C (kg/h)
7 (barg) (kg/h) 19400 30500

8 (barg) (kg/h) 21000 32500
9 (barg) (kg/h) 22000 34500
10 (barg) (kg/h) 23000 36500
11 (barg) (kg/h) 24500 38000
12 (barg) (kg/h) 25500 40000
13 (barg) (kg/h) 26500 41500
14 (barg) (kg/h) 27500 42500
15 (barg) (kg/h) 28000 44000
16 (barg) (kg/h) 29500 46000
Sizing: 1 l/h =^ 1 kW

ARI-SAFE 903
Capacity: Saturated steam / Heating capacity
Capacity saturated steam incl. 10% overpressure

Calculated acc. to TRD 721 Part 6 and AD2000-A2
Set pressure
20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
(kg/h) 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385
1 barg
(kW) 124 193 321 495 774 1310 1980 3095 3680 5120
(kg/h) 272 425 707 1090 1700 2875 4355 6800 8050 11200
1,5 barg
(kW) 164 257 427 658 1030 1740 2630 4110 4870 6770
(kg/h) 305 477 792 1220 1900 3220 4880 7625 10125 14080
2 barg
(kW) 183 285 474 731 1140 1930 2920 4570 6060 8430
(kg/h) 366 572 950 1460 2285 3865 5855 9145 11990 16660
2,5 barg
(kW) 217 340 565 870 1360 2300 3480 5440 7120 9900
(kg/h) 424 662 1100 1695 2645 4475 6775 10600 13880 19300
3 barg
(kW) 250 391 649 1000 1560 2640 4000 6250 8190 11400
(kg/h) 482 754 1250 1930 3015 5100 7720 12050 15600 21700
3,5 barg
(kW) 283 442 735 1130 1770 2990 4530 7070 9150 12700
(kg/h) 535 837 1390 2140 3350 5650 8570 13400 17550 24400
4 barg
(kW) 312 488 810 1250 1950 3300 5000 7800 10200 14200
(kg/h) 588 920 1530 2355 3680 6215 9410 14710 19300 26850
4,5 barg
(kW) 341 533 885 1360 2130 3600 5460 8520 11100 15600
(kg/h) 640 1000 1665 2565 4000 6770 10260 16000 21000 29250
5 barg
(kW) 370 578 960 1480 2310 3900 5910 9240 12100 16900
(kg/h) 694 1085 1800 2775 4340 7330 11100 17350 22770 31660
5,5 barg
(kW) 398 622 1030 1590 2490 4200 6370 9950 13000 18200
(kg/h) 745 1165 1940 2990 4665 7890 11950 18650 24500 34050
Saturated steam (kg/h)
Heating capacity (kW)
6 barg
(kW) 426 666 1100 1700 2660 4500 6820 10600 14000 19400
(kg/h) 800 1250 2075 3200 4995 8440 12790 20000 26220 36450
6,5 barg
(kW) 454 709 1180 1810 2840 4790 7260 11300 14900 20700
(kg/h) 850 1330 2210 3400 5320 9000 13600 21300 27900 38800
7 barg
(kW) 481 752 1250 1930 3000 5080 7700 12000 15800 22000
(kg/h) 904 1415 2345 3615 5650 9550 14470 22600 29660 41250
7,5 barg
(kW) 509 795 1320 2030 3180 5370 8140 12700 16700 23200
(kg/h) 957 1495 2485 3820 5980 10100 15300 23900 31350 43600
8 barg
(kW) 536 837 1390 2140 3350 5660 8580 13400 17600 24500
(kg/h) 1060 1660 2755 4245 6630 11200 16950 26500 34800 48400
9 barg
(kW) 590 921 1530 2360 3685 6230 9435 14740 19340 26900
(kg/h) 1165 1820 3025 4665 7290 12300 18650 29150 38250 53200
10 barg
(kW) 643 1000 1670 2570 4010 6790 10300 16000 21100 29300
(kg/h) 1270 1985 3300 5080 7940 13400 20300 31750 41600 58000
11 barg
(kW) 695 1085 1800 2780 4340 7340 11100 17400 22800 31700
(kg/h) 1375 2150 3570 5500 8590 14500 22000 34350 45100 62700
12 barg
(kW) 745 1165 1940 2990 4670 7890 12000 18700 24500 34000
(kg/h) 1480 2310 3840 5920 9250 15600 23650 37000 48500 67500
13 barg
(kW) 798 1250 2070 3190 4990 8430 12800 20000 26200 36400
(kg/h) 1580 2475 4110 6340 9900 16700 25350 39600 52000 72300
14 barg
(kW) 850 1325 2200 3390 5300 8970 13600 21200 27900 38700
(kg/h) 1690 2640 4385 6760 10550 17800 27000 42200 55400 77000
15 barg
(kW) 900 1405 2330 3590 5620 9500 14400 22500 29500 41000
(kg/h) 1790 2800 4655 7170 11200 18950 28700 44800 58800 81800
16 barg
(kW) 950 1480 2460 3790 5930 10000 15200 23700 31100 43300
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G/H variable: DN20-100 < 3,5 bar / DN125-150 < 4 bar)
DN1 / DN2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
TÜV · SV · . . - 688 · D/G/H (bar) 0,74 0,70

ARI-SAFE 904
Technical data
ARI-SAFE - Low pressure steam - safety valve
(Construction DN 20-100) (Construction DN125-150)

Disc metal seat; EPDM-Bellows seal
Fig. ... .904

closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
12.904 PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded, EPDM-bellows, closed bonnet with control hole, open lifting device, stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
For low pressure steamgenerators up to 1 bar,
acc. to DIN 4750 and DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to TRD 721 Part 5
Type-test approval
Low pressure steam - safety valve: Fig. 904 TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D
Sizing
refer to "Capacity".
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-Low pressure steam - safety valve, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg

ARI-SAFE 904
Technical data / Capacity: Saturated steam
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.904
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040
12 Disc X39CrMo17-1+QT, 1.4122+QT
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040
37 x Spring FDSiCr
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
43 Bellows EPDM
└ Spare parts
DN1 / DN2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272
l (mm) 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225
l1 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285
H (mm) 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890
X (mm) 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500
C (Width support tongues) (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
Drainhole with plug (inch) G 1/4" G 3/8"
Weights
standard (kg) 8,5 9,5 13,5 20 26 39 53 82 125 165
Flanges
ØD1 PN16 (mm) 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285
ØD2 PN16 (mm) 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405
b1 EN-JL1040 (mm) 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26
b2 EN-JL1040 (mm) 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
DN 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355
PN16
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C* -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
Capacity Saturated steam (incl. 10% overpressure)

Set pressure
20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
0,2 barg (kg/h) 72 113 187 289 451 763 1155 1805 2241 3116
0,3 barg (kg/h) 92 144 239 368 575 972 1472 2300 2867 3986
0,4 barg (kg/h) 110 172 286 440 688 1163 1762 2753 3380 4700
0,5 barg (kg/h) 125 196 325 501 783 1325 2006 3135 3858 5365
0,6 barg (kg/h) 142 223 370 569 889 1503 2277 3557 4317 6004
0,7 barg (kg/h) 158 248 412 634 990 1675 2537 3964 4748 6603
0,8 barg (kg/h) 173 271 450 693 1082 1830 2772 4331 5201 7233
0,9 barg (kg/h) 179 292 485 746 1166 1971 2986 4666 5616 7809
1 barg (kg/h) 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385
Conversionrates: 1 kW = 860 kcal/h* = 0,86 Mcal/h* = 3,6 MJ/h * not lawful units
1 Mcal/h* = 1000 kcal/h* = 1,163 kW


ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-P - Standard safety valve D/G/F
Fig. ... .921 Fig. ... .922 Fig. ... .923 Fig. ... .924
closed bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet open bonnet
Flangeholes /
12.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN16 EN-JL1040 DN15 - 100 -10°C to +300°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533
35.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN40 1.0619+N DN15 - 100 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545
55.921 / 923 PN40 1.4408 DN15 - 100 -60°C to +400°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545
Construction
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, TRD 421, observe TRB 801 No. 45 at material selection!
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 921/922/923/924 TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G
Sizing
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-P - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ..., PN .. , Material ........, Set pressure .... barg
standard: without metal bellows optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.921/922/923/924 Fig. 35.921/922/923/924 Fig. 55.921/922
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4 - 70
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181 A4
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
27 x Sealing ring CuFA X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
29 Cap, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
31 x Packingrings Pure graphite
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
42 Bonnet, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
70 Balanced piston (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100

(barg) 0,3 - 0,5 0,3 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,6 0,2 - 0,55 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,6 0,2 - 0,5
(barg) > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,6 - 1,1 > 0,55 - 0,8 > 0,4 - 0,6 > 0,4 - 0,6 > 0,5 - 1,2 > 0,6 - 1,2 > 0,5 - 1,1
(barg) > 1 - 1,4 > 1 - 1,4 > 1,1 - 2 > 0,8 - 1,2 > 0,6 - 1,1 > 0,6 - 1,2 > 1,2 - 2 > 1,2 - 2,1 > 1,1 - 1,7
(barg) > 1,4 - 1,9 > 1,4 - 1,9 > 2 - 2,7 > 1,2 - 2 > 1,1 - 1,8 > 1,2 - 1,8 > 2 - 2,7 > 2,1 - 2,6 > 1,7 - 2,4
(barg) > 1,9 - 2,5 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,7 - 3,7 > 2 - 3,3 > 1,8 - 2,7 > 1,8 - 2,5 > 2,7 - 3,4 > 2,6 - 3,2 > 2,4 - 3,1
Fig. 921/922/923/924
(barg) > 2,5 - 3,5 > 2,5 - 3,5 > 3,7 - 5 > 3,3 - 5,2 > 2,7 - 4,3 > 2,5 - 3,2 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,2 - 4,2 > 3,1 - 4
(barg) > 3,5 - 5 > 3,5 - 4 > 5 - 8 > 5,2 - 8 > 4,3 - 6 > 3,2 - 4,5 > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4,2 - 5,5 > 4 - 5
(barg) > 5 - 7 > 4 - 5,5 > 8 - 10,5 > 8 - 11,5 > 6 - 9 > 4,5 - 8,5 > 5,5 - 6,8 > 5,5 - 6,5 > 5 - 8
(barg) > 7 - 10 > 5,5 - 7 > 10,5 - 15 > 11,5 - 16,5 > 9 - 12 > 8,5 - 13 > 6,8 - 8,5 > 6,5 - 9 > 8 - 11
(barg) > 10 - 16 > 7 - 10,5 > 15 - 23 > 16,5 - 22 > 12 - 17 > 13 - 17 > 8,5 - 14 > 9 - 12 > 11 - 17,5
(barg) > 16 - 25 > 10,5 - 17 > 23 - 35 > 22 - 30 > 17 - 30 > 17 - 23 > 14 - 23 > 12 - 16,5 > 17,5 - 27,5
(barg) > 25 - 33 > 17 - 25 > 35,1 - 40 > 30 - 40 > 30 - 40 > 23 - 34 > 23 - 34 > 16,5 - 20 > 27,5 - 40
(barg) > 33 - 40 > 25 - 37 > 34 - 40 > 34 - 40 > 20 - 33
(barg) > 37 - 40 > 33 - 40

(barg) 4 - 5 3 - 5,5 3 - 4,8 3 - 4,5 3 - 4,5 3 - 3,5 3 - 3,5 3 - 3,5 3 - 4,5
(barg) > 5 - 6 > 5,5 - 8 > 4,8 - 6 > 4,5 - 8 > 4,5 - 5,7 > 3,5 - 5 > 3,5 - 4,3 > 3,5 - 4,9 > 4,5 - 6,5
(barg) > 6 - 9 > 8 - 12 > 6 - 8 > 8 - 11 > 5,7 - 10 > 5 - 7 > 4,3 - 5,9 > 5,9 - 7 > 6,5 - 10
Fig. 921/923
(barg) > 9 - 14 > 12 - 21 > 8 - 12,5 > 11 - 14,5 > 10 - 16 > 7 - 10,5 > 6,9 - 7,5 > 7 - 9 > 10 - 18
(barg) > 14 - 26 > 21 - 27,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 14,5 - 21 > 16 - 22 > 10,5 - 15,5 > 7,5 - 8,8 > 9 - 11 > 18 - 35
(barg) > 26 - 30 > 27,5 - 40 > 16 - 20,5 > 21 - 40 > 22 - 31 > 15,5 - 20 > 8,8 - 14 > 11 - 14,7
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 20,5 - 30 > 31 - 40 > 20 - 40 > 14 - 21 > 14,7 - 18,8
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 21 - 30 > 18,8 - 35
(barg) > 30 - 40

A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available (acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 EN-JL1040 is not allowed.)
ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Technical data
DN 1 / DN 2 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 12 12 15 18 20 29 36 44 55
A0 (mm2) 113 113 177 254 314 661 1018 1520 2376
l (mm) 90 95 100 105 115 125 145 155 175
H (mm) 260 260 270 285 290 290 340 400 450
H (Bellows design) (mm) 285 285 300 325 330 345 400 455 515
X (mm) 130 130 130 150 150 150 200 250 300
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332
Y
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332
(Width support
1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332
tongues)
1.4408 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332
Weights
standard (kg) 5 5 5,5 8 9,5 11,5 15,5 20,5 33
optional: Bellows design (kg) 5,4 5,4 6 9 10,5 12,8 17,5 23 37
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220
ØD
PN40 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235
EN-JL1040 (mm) 14 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24
b 1.0619+N (mm) 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 22 24
1.4408 (mm) 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 22 24
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2545, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240
PN16
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250
PN40
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3 bar)
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G 0,37 0,34 0,37 0,34 0,37 0,34
TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F 0,26 0,23 0,26 0,23 0,26 0,23

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Set pressure Saturated steam (kg/h)
0,2 (barg) -- -- 22 33 44 85 142 195 305
0,3 (barg) 20 20 28 41 56 107 82 247 386
0,4 (barg) 23 23 34 48 65 126 209 290 450
0,5 (barg) 27 27 39 55 74 144 239 332 520
0,6 (barg) 30 30 43 62 82 162 267 372 580
0,8 (barg) 36 36 51 73 100 189 323 435 680
1 (barg) 41 41 59 84 114 218 370 500 785
2 (barg) 68 68 99 139 188 362 610 830 1300
3 (barg) 95 95 137 197 265 510 860 1180 1840
4 (barg) 119 119 171 246 330 640 1070 1470 2300
5 (barg) 142 142 205 295 396 765 1280 1760 2750
6 (barg) 166 166 239 343 460 890 1495 2050 3200
7 (barg) 189 189 272 391 525 1015 1700 2340 3650
8 (barg) 213 213 306 440 590 1140 1910 2630 4100
9 (barg) 236 236 339 490 655 1265 2120 2910 4550
10 (barg) 259 259 370 535 720 1390 2330 3200 5000
12 (barg) 306 306 440 630 850 1640 2750 3780 5900
14 (barg) 352 352 505 730 980 1890 3170 4350 6800
(barg) 400 400 570 825 1105 2140 3590 4920 7700
16
18 (barg) 445 445 640 920 1235 2390 4000 5500 8600
20 (barg) 490 490 705 1020 1365 2640 4430 6080 9500
22 (barg) 540 540 775 1110 1495 2890 4850 6660 10400
24 (barg) 585 585 840 1210 1630 3140 5270 7240 11300
25 (barg) 609 609 875 1260 1690 3270 5480 7530 11760
26 (barg) 630 630 910 1310 1760 3400 5700 7820 12200
28 (barg) 680 680 975 1405 1890 3650 6120 8400 13100
30 (barg) 730 730 1040 1505 2020 3900 6550 8990 14000
32 (barg) 775 775 1110 1600 2150 4160 6980 9580 15000
35 (barg)
36 (barg)
40 (barg)

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Capacity: Air

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Set pressure Air 0°C and 1,013 bara (Nm3/h)
0,2 (barg) -- -- 27 27 51 100 167 229 358
0,3 (barg) 24 24 34 49 67 128 217 294 460
0,4 (barg) 28 28 41 41 78 152 252 349 546
0,5 (barg) 32 32 47 47 90 176 292 405 632
0,6 (barg) 37 37 53 53 102 199 330 459 717
0,8 (barg) 45 45 63 63 125 237 404 545 852
1 (barg) 52 52 73 73 144 274 466 631 986
2 (barg) 86 86 123 123 240 461 777 1061 1657
3 (barg) 123 123 176 176 340 658 1103 1514 2365
4 (barg) 154 154 221 221 428 826 1385 1902 2970
5 (barg) 185 185 266 266 515 995 1665 2290 3580
6 (barg) 217 217 311 311 602 1165 1950 2680 4180
7 (barg) 248 248 356 356 689 1330 2230 3065 4790
8 (barg) 279 279 401 401 776 1500 2515 3450 5390
9 (barg) 311 311 446 446 863 1670 2800 3840 6000
10 (barg) 342 342 491 491 950 1835 3080 4225 6600
12 (barg) 405 405 581 581 1125 2170 3645 5000 7800
14 (barg) 468 468 671 671 1300 2510 4200 5780 9000
16 (barg) 530 530 761 761 1475 2845 4770 6550 10200
18 (barg) 593 593 851 851 1645 3180 5340 7320 11450
20 (barg) 656 656 941 941 1820 3520 5900 8100 12650
(barg) 718 718 1031 1031 1995 3855 6465 8870 13850
22
24 (barg) 781 781 1121 1121 2170 4190 7030 9650 15100
25 (barg) 812 812 1167 1167 2250 4360 7310 10040 15680
26 (barg) 844 844 1211 1211 2340 4530 7595 10400 16300
28 (barg) 907 907 1302 1302 2520 4860 8160 11200 17500
30 (barg) 969 969 1390 1390 2690 5200 8720 12000 18700
32 (barg) 1032 1032 1480 1480 2870 5540 9290 12750 19900
35 (barg) 1126 1126 1620 1620 3130 6040 10130 13900 21700
36 (barg) 1155 1155 1665 1665 3215 6220 10420 14300 22360
40 (barg) 1283 1283 1840 1840 3560 6880 11500 15850 24700

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Capacity: Water

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Set pressure Water 20°C (t/h)
0,2 (bar) -- -- 0,97 1,4 1,95 3,63 6,33 8,36 13,06
0,3 (bar) 0,84 0,84 1,16 1,67 2,33 4,30 7,46 9,80 15,22
0,5 (bar) 1,11 1,11 1,54 2,21 3,09 5,74 10,0 13,22 20,6
1 (bar) 1,57 1,57 2,17 3,13 4,37 8,12 14,15 18,69 29,2
2 (bar) 2,22 2,22 3,07 4,42 6,17 11,48 20,0 26,4 41,3
3 (bar) 2,72 2,72 3,76 5,42 7,56 14,07 24,5 32,4 50,6
4 (bar) 3,14 3,14 4,35 6,26 8,73 16,24 28,3 37,4 58,4
5 (bar) 3,51 3,51 4,86 7,0 9,76 18,16 31,6 41,8 65,3
6 (bar) 3,85 3,85 5,32 7,66 10,69 19,89 34,6 45,8 71,6
7 (bar) 4,16 4,16 5,75 8,28 11,55 21,5 37,4 49,5 77,3
8 (bar) 4,45 4,45 6,14 8,85 12,35 23,0 40,0 52,9 82,6
9 (bar) 4,72 4,72 6,52 9,39 13,1 24,4 42,4 56,1 87,6
10 (bar) 4,97 4,97 6,87 9,89 13,81 25,7 44,7 59,1 92,4
12 (bar) 5,44 5,44 7,53 10,84 15,12 28,1 49,0 64,8 100,2
14 (bar) 5,88 5,88 8,13 11,71 16,34 30,4 52,9 69,9 109,3
16 (bar) 6,29 6,29 8,69 12,51 17,46 32,5 56,6 74,8 116,8
18 (bar) 6,67 6,67 9,22 13,27 18,52 34,4 60,0 79,3 123,9
(bar) 7,03 7,03 9,72 14,0 19,53 36,3 63,3 83,6 130,6
20
22 (bar) 7,37 7,37 10,19 14,7 20,5 38,1 66,3 87,7 137,0
24 (bar) 7,7 7,7 10,64 15,33 21,4 39,8 69,3 91,6 143,1
25 (bar) 7,86 7,86 10,86 15,64 21,8 40,6 70,7 93,3 146,0
26 (bar) 8,0 8,0 11,06 15,92 22,2 41,3 72,0 95,1 148,6
28 (bar) 8,3 8,3 11,47 16,52 23,1 42,9 74,7 98,7 154,2
30 (bar) 8,6 8,6 11,88 17,1 23,9 44,4 77,3 102,2 159,7
35 (bar) 9,28 9,28 12,83 18,47 25,8 47,9 83,5 110,4 172,5
36 (bar) 9,4 9,4 13,0 18,7 26,1 48,7 84,7 111,9 174,9
40 (bar) 9,92 9,92 13,71 19,75 27,6 51,3 89,3 118,0 184,4

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TC - Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .941 Fig. ... .942 Fig. ... .943

closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap,
closed bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Thread

25.941 / 942 / 943 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN 15 - 25 -10°C to +350°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
55.941 / 943 PN40 1.4408 DN15 - 25 -60°C to +400°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Requirement
acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, TRD 421
Type-test approval
Fig. 941/942/943 TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G
Sizing
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TC - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar
standard: without metal bellows optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 25.941/942/943 Fig. 55.941/943
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Screwed seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
27 x Sealing ring CuFA X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
61 Coupling X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
70 Balanced piston (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25

(barg) 0,3 - 0,6 0,3 - 0,48 0,2 - 0,4
(barg) > 0,6 - 0,9 > 0,48 - 0,68 > 0,4 - 0,88
(barg) > 0,9 - 1,35 > 0,68 - 1,35 > 0,88 - 1,5
(barg) > 1,35 - 2,2 > 1,35 - 2,1 > 1,5 - 2,1
(barg) > 2,2 - 3,3 > 2,1 - 3 > 2,1 - 2,6
Full lift safety valve
Fig. 941/942/943
(barg) > 3,3 - 4,5 > 3 - 4 > 2,6 - 3,2

(barg) > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4 - 5,5 > 3,2 - 4,2
(barg) > 5,5 - 6,7 > 5,5 - 7,7 > 4,2 - 6,2
(barg) > 6,7 - 8,2 > 7,7 - 11,4 > 6,2 - 8
(barg) > 8,2 - 11 > 11,4 - 15 > 8 - 10
(barg) > 11 - 13 > 15 - 20 > 10 - 15,5
(barg) > 13 - 18,5 > 20 - 28 > 15,5 - 18
(barg) > 18,5 - 32,4 > 28 - 35 > 18 - 29,9
(barg) > 32,4 - 40 > 35 - 40 > 30 - 40

(barg) 5,7 - 6,5 4 - 5,7 4 - 5,4
(barg) > 6,5 - 8 > 5,7 - 7 > 5,4 - 6,4
(barg) > 8 - 9,3 > 7 - 9,9 > 6,4 - 7,4

Fig. 941/943
(barg) > 9,3 - 11 > 9,9 - 14 > 7,4 - 8,4

(barg) > 11 - 15 > 14 - 21 > 8,4 - 10,4
(barg) > 15 - 19 > 21 - 28,9 > 10,4 - 13,4
(barg) > 19 - 29 > 29,9 - 40 > 13,4 - 16,4
(barg) > 29 - 40 > 16,4 - 20,4
(barg) > 20,4 - 28

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Technical data
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1 1/4"
d0 (mm) 12 15 18
A0 (mm2) 113 177 254
GE (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 3/4" 1" 1 1/4"
b (mm) 15 16 18
l (mm) 50 50 50
l1 (mm) 53 55 58
H (mm) 260 260 260
H (Bellows design) (mm) 295 295 300
X (mm) 120 120 120
C (mm) 69 69 69
Weights
standard (kg) 3,5 3,5 3,8
optional: Bellows design (kg) 4,4 4,4 4,7
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3,5 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G 0,64 0,60 0,75
TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F 0,45 0,42 0,53

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Capacity: Saturated steam / Air / Water
Capacity saturated steam / air / water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
Inlet: Male (inch) G1/2" G3/4" G1" G1/2" G3/4" G1" G1/2" G3/4" G1"
Outlet: Female (inch) G3/4" G1" G1 1/4" G1 1/2" G3/4" G1" G1 1/4" G1 1/2" G3/4" G1" G1 1/4" G1 1/2"
do (mm) 12 15 18 12 15 18 12 15 18
Set pressure Saturated steam (kg/h) Air 0°C and 1,013 bara (Nm3/h) Water 20°C (t/h)
0,2 (barg) 75 75 88 88 3,22 3,22
0,3 (barg) 35 47 94 94 41 56 112 112 1,49 2,17 3,94 3,94
0,5 (barg) 46 65 124 124 57 79 151 151 1,92 2,80 5,10 5,10
1 (barg) 72 103 188 188 91 129 237 237 2,72 3,96 7,19 7,19
2 (barg) 120 172 320 320 153 219 405 405 3,85 5,60 10,17 10,17
3 (barg) 162 238 430 430 209 305 552 552 4,71 6,86 12,46 12,46
4 (barg) 206 300 545 545 266 390 702 702 5,44 7,92 14,39 14,39
5 (barg) 246 360 650 650 320 469 845 845 6,08 8,85 16,10 16,10
6 (barg) 285 420 755 755 375 549 988 988 6,66 9,70 17,62 17,62
7 (barg) 325 480 860 860 429 628 1130 1130 7,20 10,47 19,04 19,04
8 (barg) 370 540 970 970 483 708 1275 1275 7,69 11,20 20,30 20,30
9 (barg) 410 600 1075 1075 537 787 1415 1415 8,16 11,88 21,60 21,60
10 (barg) 450 655 1180 1180 592 867 1560 1560 8,60 12,52 22,70 22,70
11 (barg) 490 715 1290 1290 646 946 1705 1705 9,02 13,13 23,80 23,80
12 (barg) 530 775 1395 1395 700 1026 1845 1845 9,42 13,72 24,90 24,90
13 (barg) 570 835 1500 1500 754 1105 1990 1990 9,81 14,27 25,90 25,90
14 (barg) 610 890 1605 1605 809 1185 2130 2130 10,18 14,81 26,90 26,90
15 (barg) 650 950 1710 1710 863 1265 2275 2275 10,54 15,33 27,90 27,90
16 (barg) 690 1010 1820 1820 917 1345 2420 2420 10,88 15,84 28,80 28,80
17 (barg) 730 1070 1925 1925 971 1420 2560 2560 11,22 16,32 29,70 29,70
18 (barg) 770 1130 2030 2030 1025 1500 2705 2705 11,54 16,80 30,50 30,50
19 (barg) 810 1190 2135 2135 1080 1580 2850 2850 11,86 17,26 31,40 31,40
20 (barg) 850 1245 2245 2245 1135 1660 2990 2990 12,17 17,71 32,20 32,20
22 (barg) 930 1365 2455 2455 1240 1820 3275 3275 12,76 18,57 33,70 33,70
24 (barg) 1015 1485 2670 2670 1350 1980 3560 3560 13,33 19,40 35,20 35,20
26 (barg) 1095 1600 2885 2885 1460 2140 3850 3850 13,87 20,20 36,70 36,70
28 (barg) 1175 1725 3100 3100 1570 2300 4135 4135 14,40 20,90 38,10 38,10
30 (barg) 1260 1845 3320 3320 1675 2455 4420 4420 14,90 21,70 39,40 39,40
32 (barg) 1340 1965 3535 3535 1785 2615 4705 4705 15,39 22,40 40,70 40,70
34 (barg) 1895 2775 4990 4990 15,86 23,10 41,90 41,90
36 (barg) 2000 2940 5270 5270 16,28 23,8 43,1 43,1
40 (barg) 2220 3250 5850 5850 17,21 25,00 45,50 45,50

ARI-SAFE-TC 945 / 946
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TC - Spring loaded Fig. 945, Low pressure steam - safety valve Fig. 946
Fig. ... .945

EPDM-disc, soft seal insert; EPDM-bellows
Fig. ... .946

Disc metal seat, EPDM-Bellows seal
Fig. ... .945

closed bonnet
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter (inlet) Temperature range Thread
25.945 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 -10°C to +120°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
25.946 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 -10°C to +120°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Fig. 945 Fig. 946
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded disc with EPDM Standard safety valve, spring-/weight loaded, direct loaded with
insert, EPDM-bellows, closed spring bonnet with control hole, open EPDM-bellows, closed bonnet with control hole, open lifting device,
lifting device, stainless steel seat and spindle stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
For low pressure steamgenerators up to 1 bar,
acc. to DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
acc. to DIN 4750 and DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 6 acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 5
Type-test approval
Spring loaded: TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D/G/H Low pressure steam - safety valve: TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D
Sizing
Acc. to TRD 721 Part 6.2.5, refer to "Capacity". refer to "Capacity"
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TC - spring loaded, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., ARI-SAFE-TC - Low pressure steam - safety valve, Figure ...,
PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... barg DN ... / ..., PN .. / ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg

Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 25.945/946
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
2 Screwed seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
12 x Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
37 x Spring FDSiCr
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
└ Spare parts
DN (inlet) 15 20 25

(barg) 0,3 - 0,6 0,3 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4
(barg) > 0,6 - 0,9 > 0,5 - 0,7 > 0,4 - 0,9
(barg) > 0,9 - 1,35 > 0,7 - 1,35 > 0,9 - 1,5
Low pressure steam - safety valve
(barg) > 1,35 - 2,2 > 1,35 - 2,1 > 1,5 - 2,1
(barg) > 2,2 - 3,3 > 2,1 - 3 > 2,1 - 2,6
Spring loaded
Fig. 945
(barg) > 3,3 - 4,5 > 3 - 4 > 2,6 - 3,2

Fig. 946
(barg) > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4 - 5,5 > 3,2 - 4,2

(barg) > 5,5 - 6,7 > 5,5 - 7,7 > 4,2 - 6,2
(barg) > 6,7 - 8,2 > 7,7 - 11,5 > 6,2 - 8
(barg) > 8,2 - 11 > 11,5 - 15 > 8 - 10
(barg) > 11 - 13 > 15 - 16 > 10 - 15,5
(barg) > 13 - 16 > 15,5 - 16

Technical data / Capacity: Water
DN (inlet) 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1 1/4" 1" x 1 1/2"
d0 (mm) 12 15 18 18
A0 (mm2) 113 177 254 254
GE (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
GA (inch) 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2"
b (mm) 15 16 18 18
l (mm) 50 50 50 50
l1 (mm) 53 55 58 58
H (mm) 260 260 260 260
X (mm) 120 120 120 120
Weights
standard (kg) 3,5 3,5 3,8 3,8
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C* -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G/H variable: < 3,5 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 997 · D/G/H (bar) 0,64 0,60 0,75
Capacity water incl. 10% overpressure

Sizing safety valves for the volume flow of water expansion (DIN 4751 T2 - item 8.1 / DIN EN 12828 - item E.3)
DN (inlet)
Differential pressure
15 20 25
1 (barg) (kg/h) 2700 3900 7000
2 (barg) (kg/h) 3800 5600 10000
3 (barg) (kg/h) 4700 6800 12400
4 (barg) (kg/h) 5400 7900 14300
5 (barg) (kg/h) 6000 8800 16000
6 (barg) (kg/h) 6600 9700 17600
7 (barg) (kg/h) 7200 10400 19000
Water 20°C (kg/h)
8 (barg) (kg/h) 7600 11200 20300

9 (barg) (kg/h) 8100 11800 21600
10 (barg) (kg/h) 8600 12500 22700
11 (barg) (kg/h) 9000 13000 23800
12 (barg) (kg/h) 9400 13700 24900
13 (barg) (kg/h) 9800 14200 25900
14 (barg) (kg/h) 10000 14800 26900
15 (barg) (kg/h) 10500 15300 27900
16 (barg) (kg/h) 10800 15800 28800
Sizing: 1 l/h =^ 1 kW

Capacity: Saturated steam / Heating capacity
Fig. 945: Capacity saturated steam incl. 10% overpressure

Calculated acc. to TRD 721 Part 6 and AD2000-A2
DN (inlet)
Set pressure
15 20 25
(kg/h) 72 103 188
1 (barg)
(kW) 44 63 115
(kg/h) 97 136 254
1,5 (barg)
(kW) 58 82 154
(kg/h) 120 172 320
2 (barg)
(kW) 72 103 191
(kg/h) 142 205 376
2,5 (barg)
(kW) 85 122 224
(kg/h) 162 238 430
3 (barg)
(kW) 96 140 253
(kg/h) 185 272 489
3,5 (barg)
(kW) 109 159 287
(kg/h) 206 300 545
4 (barg)
(kW) 120 176 316
(kg/h) 226 331 596
4,5 (barg)
(kW) 131 192 346
(kg/h) 246 360 650
5 (barg)
(kW) 142 208 375
(kg/h) 267 391 703
5,5 (barg)
(kW) 153 224 403
(kg/h) 285 420 755

Heating capacity (kW)
6 (barg)
(kW) 164 240 432
(kg/h) 307 450 810
6,5 (barg)
(kW) 174 256 460
(kg/h) 325 480 860
7 (barg)
(kW) 185 271 488
(kg/h) 348 509 917
7,5 (barg)
(kW) 195 286 516
(kg/h) 370 540 970
8 (barg)
(kW) 206 302 543
(kg/h) 410 600 1075
9 (barg)
(kW) 227 332 598
(kg/h) 450 655 1180
10 (barg)
(kW) 247 362 651
(kg/h) 490 715 1290
11 (barg)
(kW) 267 391 705
(kg/h) 530 775 1395
12 (barg)
(kW) 287 421 757
(kg/h) 570 835 1500
13 (barg)
(kW) 307 449 809
(kg/h) 610 890 1605
14 (barg)
(kW) 326 478 860
(kg/h) 650 950 1710
15 (barg)
(kW) 346 506 911
(kg/h) 690 1010 1820
16 (barg)
(kW) 365 534 962
Fig. 946: Capacity saturated steam incl. 10% overpressure

DN (inlet)
Set pressure
15 20 25
0,2 (barg) (kg/h) -- -- 67
0,3 (barg) (kg/h) 32 43 86
0,4 (barg) (kg/h) 38 53 103

0,5 (barg) (kg/h) 44 62 117
0,6 (barg) (kg/h) 50 71 133
0,7 (barg) (kg/h) 56 78 146
0,8 (barg) (kg/h) 62 86 163
0,9 (barg) (kg/h) 67 95 175
1 (barg) (kg/h) 72 103 188
Conversionrates: 1 kW = 860 kcal/h* = 0,86 Mcal/h* = 3,6 MJ/h * not lawful units
1 Mcal/h* = 1000 kcal/h* = 1,163 kW

ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TCP - Standard safety valve D/G/F
Fig. ... .961 Fig. ... .962 Fig. ... .963 Fig. ... .961 / Fig. ... .962
closed lifting device open lifting device gastight cap optional with lever

-10°C to +300°C
67.961 / 962 / 963 PN100 1.4581/EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
(up to +400°C on request)
-60°C to +300°C
57.961 / 963 PN100 1.4581 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 961/962/963 TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TCP - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar

Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request)

ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Technical data
Parts
1 Body GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
4 Spindle guide X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
12 Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 x O-ring FPM
28 Cap, closed GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
29 Cap, open GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
Lever, closed
36 EN AC-4420 (Al)
(optional: Fig. ... .961 / Fig. ... .962)
37 x Spring FDSiCr X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
66 O-ring FPM
67 Lift button X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25

(barg) 0,2 - 0,25
(barg) > 0,25 - 0,5
(barg) > 0,5 - 1
(barg) > 1 - 1,4
(barg) > 1,4 - 2,95

Fig. 961/962/963
(barg) > 2,95 - 4,9

(barg) > 4,9 - 12
(barg) > 12 - 20
(barg) > 20 - 27
(barg) > 27 - 35
(barg) > 35 - 45
(barg) > 45 - 59
(barg) > 59 - 100


ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Technical data
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1"
d0 (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12
A0 (mm2) 113 113 113 113 113 113
GE (inch) 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
b (mm) 15 15 16 16 16 18
l (mm) 42 47 42 47 50 50
l1 (mm) 34 34 34 34 34 34
H (mm) 189 189 189 189 189 189
X (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Weights
standard (kg) 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
1.4581 100 (bar) 50 100 98 93,3 88,5 83,3 80,4 78 --
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · D/G 0,30
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · F 0,23

ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Capacity saturated steam / Air / Water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
(inch) G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1"
Connections (inch) G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4"
(inch) G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1"
do (mm) 12 12 12
0,2 (barg) 14 14 14 16 16 16 0,62 0,62 0,62
0,5 (barg) 24 24 24 29 29 29 0,98 0,98 0,98
1 (barg) 35 35 35 44 44 44 1,39 1,39 1,39
2 (barg) 56 56 56 71 71 71 1,97 1,97 1,97
3 (barg) 75 75 75 96 96 96 2,41 2,41 2,41
4 (barg) 96 96 96 125 125 125 2,78 2,78 2,78
5 (barg) 116 116 116 150 150 150 3,11 3,11 3,11
6 (barg) 135 135 135 176 176 176 3,41 3,41 3,41
7 (barg) 153 153 153 201 201 201 3,68 3,68 3,68
8 (barg) 172 172 172 227 227 227 3,93 3,93 3,93
9 (barg) 191 191 191 252 252 252 4,17 4,17 4,17
10 (barg) 210 210 210 277 277 277 4,40 4,40 4,40
11 (barg) 229 229 229 303 303 303 4,61 4,61 4,61
12 (barg) 248 248 248 328 328 328 4,82 4,82 4,82
13 (barg) 267 267 267 354 354 354 5,01 5,01 5,01
14 (barg) 286 286 286 379 379 379 5,20 5,20 5,20
15 (barg) 304 304 304 405 405 405 5,39 5,39 5,39
16 (barg) 323 323 323 430 430 430 5,56 5,56 5,56
17 (barg) 342 342 342 455 455 455 5,73 5,73 5,73
18 (barg) 361 361 361 481 481 481 5,90 5,90 5,90
19 (barg) 380 380 380 506 506 506 6,06 6,06 6,06
20 (barg) 399 399 399 532 532 532 6,22 6,22 6,22
25 (barg) 494 494 494 659 659 659 6,95 6,95 6,95
30 (barg) 590 590 590 786 786 786 7,62 7,62 7,62
(barg) 686 686 686 913 913 913 8,23 8,23 8,23
35
40 (barg) 784 784 784 1040 1040 1040 8,79 8,79 8,79
45 (barg) 883 883 883 1165 1165 1165 9,33 9,33 9,33
50 (barg) 983 983 983 1295 1295 1295 9,83 9,83 9,83
55 (barg) 1085 1085 1085 1420 1420 1420 10,31 10,31 10,31
60 (barg) 1185 1185 1185 1550 1550 1550 10,77 10,77 10,77
65 (barg) 1290 1290 1290 1675 1675 1675 11,21 11,21 11,21
70 (barg) 1400 1400 1400 1800 1800 1800 11,63 11,63 11,63
75 (barg) 1500 1500 1500 1930 1930 1930 12,04 12,04 12,04
80 (barg) 2055 2055 2055 12,44 12,44 12,44
85 (barg) 2185 2185 2185 12,82 12,82 12,82
90 (barg) 2310 2310 2310 13,19 13,19 13,19
95 (barg) 2438 2438 2438 13,5 13,5 13,5
100 (barg) 2565 2565 2565 13,76 13,76 13,76

ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TCS - Standard safety valve D/G/F
ALSO FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATION

(please indicate installation position horizontal/vertical up to max. 5 bar set pressure
with your order)
Fig. ... .951 Fig. ... .952 Fig. ... .953 Fig. ... .951 / Fig. ... .952
closed lifting device open lifting device gastight cap optional with lever

-10°C to +300°C
67.951 / 952 / 953 PN100 1.4581/EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
-60°C to +300°C
57.951 / 953 PN100 1.4581 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Requirement
acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 951/952/953 TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TCS - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar, Installation position ....

Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request)

ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Technical data
Parts
1 Body GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
12 Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 O-ring FPM
28 Cap, closed GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
29 Cap, open GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
Lever, closed
36 EN AC-4420 (Al)
(optional: Fig. ... .951 / Fig. ... .952)
37 x Spring FDSiCr X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
63 Guide bush X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
66 O-ring FPM
67 Lift button X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25

(barg) 0,5
(barg) > 0,5 - 1
(barg) > 1 - 1,4
(barg) > 1,4 - 2,95
(barg) > 2,95 - 4,9
Standard safety (barg) > 4,9 - 12
valve
Fig. 951/952/953 (barg) > 12 - 20
(barg) > 20 - 27
(barg) > 27 - 35
(barg) > 35 - 45
(barg) > 45 - 59
(barg) > 59 - 100


ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Technical data
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1"
d0 (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12
A0 (mm2) 113 113 113 113 113 113
GE (inch) 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
b (mm) 15 15 16 16 16 18
l (mm) 42 47 42 47 50 50
l1 (mm) 34 34 34 34 34 34
H (mm) 189 189 189 189 189 189
X (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Weights
standard (kg) 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
1.4581 100 (bar) 50 100 98 93,3 88,5 83,3 80,4 78 --
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · D/G 0,26
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · F 0,19

ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Capacity saturated steam / air / water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
(inch) G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1"
Connections (inch) G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4"
G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1"
do (mm) 12 12 12
0,5 (barg) 20 20 20 24 24 24 0,81 0,81 0,81
1 (barg) 30 30 30 37 37 37 1,15 1,15 1,15
application
← horizontal
2 (barg) 48 48 48 62 62 62 1,62 1,62 1,62

3 (barg) 68 68 68 86 86 86 1,99 1,99 1,99
4 (barg) 84 84 84 108 108 108 2,30 2,30 2,30
5 (barg) 100 100 100 130 130 130 2,57 2,57 2,57
6 (barg) 117 117 117 152 152 152 2,81 2,81 2,81
7 (barg) 133 133 133 174 174 174 3,04 3,04 3,04
8 (barg) 149 149 149 196 196 196 3,25 3,25 3,25
9 (barg) 166 166 166 218 218 218 3,45 3,45 3,45
10 (barg) 182 182 182 240 240 240 3,63 3,63 3,63
11 (barg) 198 198 198 262 262 262 3,81 3,81 3,81
12 (barg) 215 215 215 284 284 284 3,98 3,98 3,98
13 (barg) 231 231 231 306 306 306 4,14 4,14 4,14
14 (barg) 247 247 247 328 328 328 4,3 4,3 4,3
15 (barg) 264 264 264 351 351 351 4,45 4,45 4,45
16 (barg) 280 280 280 373 373 373 4,59 4,59 4,59
17 (barg) 297 297 297 395 395 395 4,74 4,74 4,74
18 (barg) 313 313 313 417 417 417 4,87 4,87 4,87
19 (barg) 329 329 329 439 439 439 5,01 5,01 5,01
20 (barg) 346 346 346 461 461 461 5,14 5,14 5,14
25 (barg) 428 428 428 571 571 571 5,74 5,74 5,74
30 (barg) 512 512 512 681 681 681 6,29 6,29 6,29
(barg) 595 595 595 791 791 791 6,80 6,80 6,80
35
40 (barg) 680 680 680 901 901 901 7,26 7,26 7,26
45 (barg) 765 765 765 1010 1010 1010 7,71 7,71 7,71
50 (barg) 852 852 852 1120 1120 1120 8,12 8,12 8,12
55 (barg) 940 940 940 1230 1230 1230 8,52 8,52 8,52
60 (barg) 1030 1030 1030 1340 1340 1340 8,90 8,90 8,90
65 (barg) 1120 1120 1120 1450 1450 1450 9,26 9,26 9,26
70 (barg) 1200 1200 1200 1560 1560 1560 9,61 9,61 9,61
75 (barg) 1300 1300 1300 1675 1675 1675 9,95 9,95 9,95
80 (barg) 1785 1785 1785 10,27 10,27 10,27
85 (barg) 1895 1895 1895 10,59 10,59 10,59
90 (barg) 2005 2005 2005 10,90 10,90 10,90
95 (barg) 2110 2110 2110 11,16 11,16 11,16
100 (barg) 2220 2220 2220 11,36 11,36 11,36

ARI-SAFE
Special design / Accessories
Soft sealing disc

Body design Pos. Description P min. Material Temperature range Abbreviation
0,5 bar X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / EPDM -35 °C to +150 °C E
EN-JL1040, 0,5 bar X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
EN-JS1049, 12 Disc
1.0619+N 0,5 bar X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar 1) X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / SHR -20 °C to +220 °C S
(lower values on request)

0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / EPDM -35 °C to +150 °C E
1.4408, 0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
12 Disc
1.4581 0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar 1) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / SHR -20 °C to +220 °C S
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / EPDM -35 °C to +150 °C E
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
SA216WCB 12 Disc
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / SHR -20 °C to +220 °C S
Fig. 950/960 with soft sealing disc max. 40 bar 1) Fig. 900 DN20 min. 2,0 bar
EPDM-Bellows seal (DN15 - 150)

Pos. Description Material Temperature range
43 EPDM-Bellows seal EPDM -10 °C to +120 °C
Balanced stainless steel-bellows with balanced piston

(Only for closed version DN15 - 100!)
Pos. Description Material
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571;
55 Bellows unit
SA240 / SA479 Gr.316 Ti (SAFE-SN ANSI)
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571;
70 Balanced piston
SA479 Gr.316 Ti (SAFE-SN ANSI)
Test: German "TA-Air TÜV-Test-No. 922-960324
Vent hole
Vent hole G1/8
G1/4
SAFE 900 SAFE-TC 940

ARI-SAFE
Special design / Accessories
Proximity switch Changeover valve
Rupture disc
Lock bushing Test gag (Sizing refer to page 40.)
Seat 1.4571 / Stellite No. 21

Disc 1.4571 / Stellite No. 6 DN15-150:
Seat SA479 Gr.316 Ti / Stellite No. 21 (SAFE-SN ANSI) Removable lifting aid
Disc SA479 Gr.316 Ti / Stellite No. 6 (SAFE-SN ANSI) chemical-version 1.4571;
Heating jacket and removable lifting aid SA479 Gr.316 Ti (SAFE-SN ANSI)
Body- DN1 x DN2 A B C Ø S H

Material (mmxmm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
1.0619+N 50 x 80 176 70 204 155
14 12
1.4408 65 x 100 212 90 242 175
EN-JL1040 80 x 125 245 130 280 205
EN-JS1049
18 16
1.0619+N 100 x 150 295 165 332 230
1.4408
EN-JL1040 125 x 200 318 183 362 20 260
22
1.0619+N 150 x 250 360 200 408 22 295
EN-JS1049 200 x 300 465 256 521 26 22 305
1.0619+N 250 x 350 544 300 600 26 24 337

Body- NPS A B C Ø S H
Material (inch) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
2" x 3" 176 70 204 143
14 12
3" x 4" 212 90 242 162
SA216WCB 4" x 6" 295 165 332 18 16 186
6" x 8" 318 183 362 22 20 248
6" x 10" 360 200 405 22 22 251

Support tongues, drilled

ARI-SAFE
Safety valve approvals
SAFE- TCS/
SAFE SAFE-SN SAFE-P SAFE-TC
TCP
Fig. 900 BR 900 Fig. 920 Fig. 940
Fig. 950 / 960
Fig. 951-953
Fig. 901-912 Fig. 903 Fig. 904 Fig. 901-912 Fig. 921-924 Fig. 941-943 Fig. 945 Fig. 946
Fig. 961-963
Pressure equipment directive
PED 2014/68/EU X X X X X X X X X
Module H1, B+D
BV Bureau Veritas
X -- -- X X X -- -- X
Frankreich / France
DNV Det Norske Veritas

X -- -- X X X X X X
Norwegen / Norway
GL
X -- -- X X X -- -- X
Germanischer Lloyd
LROS (LRS)
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Lloyds Register of Shipping
SELO (SQLO)
X X X X X X X X X
China / Chine
ASME Code
-- -- -- X -- -- -- -- --
Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-stamp)
Canada Registration
X -- -- X -- -- -- -- --
(UV-stamp)
EAC
X X X X X X X X X
Russland / Russia
RMROS (RS)
X X X X X X X X X
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Promatomnadzor
X X X X X X X X X
White russia (Rep. of Belarus)
Prombezpeka
X X X X X X X X X
Ukraine
Rostechnadzor (Gosgortechnadsor)
X X X X X X X X X
Russland / Russia
Single approvals
Arbejdstilsynet
X X X X X X X X X
Danish emploment protection
ABS
X X X X X X X X X
American Bureau of Shipping
AIB Vincotte
X X X X X X X X X
Belgien / Belgium
IBR
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Indien Boiler Regulations
ISPESL
X X X X X X X X X
Italien / Italy
RINA
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Italien / Italy
Stoomwezen
X X X X X X X X X
Niederlande / Netherlands
NK
X X X X X X X X X
Japan
UDT
X X X X X X X X X
Polen / Poland

ARI-myValve® / Approvals
Sizing
myValve® - Your Valve Sizing-Program.

myValve® is a powerful software tool that not only helps you size your system components; it also gives you instant access to all other data about the selected product, such
as order information, spare parts drawings, operating instructions, data sheets, etc., whenever you need it.
Contents: Module ARI-Safety valve SAFE-Calculation

- Sizing of valve-size with given capacity, temperature, set pressure and back pressure;
- Sizing acc. to SAFE DIN EN, AD2000, ASME VIII, API520.
Media: Integrated media-databank (more than 160 media) with conditions:

- Vapours / gases
- Steam (saturated and superheated)
- Liquids
Special features: - Project administration of the calculation and product data incl. spare part drawings concerning to project and tag number.
- Direct output or calculation and product data in PDF format.
- Product data could be taken for a direct order.
- SI- and ANSI-units with direct conversion to another databank.
- Settings with over pressure or absolute pressure.
- All ARI valves are integrated in a databank.
- Direct access relating to the product on data sheets, operating instructions, pressure-temperature-diagram, controller characteristics,
spare part drawings and CAD-symbols on the website.
- Operation in company networks possible (no complex installations on individually PC‘s necessary).
- Extensive catalogue extending over several product groups.
System requirements: Windows operating systems, Linux, etc.

ARI-SAFE
Rupture disc before safety valves - Checklist
To ARI-Armaturen to the att. of Mrs./Mr. ............................................................................ Fax No. +49 52 07 / 994 - ...................................................
If the type of bursting disc is not yet determined, we are offering our assistance for sizing.
Please send us the questionnaire containing the appropriate data.
Customer: ......................................................................... Telephone: ................................................................
......................................................................... Fax: ................................................................
Handled by: ......................................................................... E-mail: ................................................................
Date: ......................................................................... ................................................................
Necessary data
Medium:
..................................................................................
□ liquid □ gas
Temperature: ....................°C
Safety valve
Type / Figure: ....................................... Set pressure: .................................... bar(g)
Nominal diameter:
(Input / Output) DN .............. / ................ Flow diameter d0: .................................... mm
Nominal pressure:
(Input / Output) PN .............. / ................ Flow cross-section A0: .................................... mm2
Certified coefficient of
discharge Kdr (αw): ....................................
Rupture disc
Bursting pressure: ....................................... bar(g) Material: □ 1.4401
(Bursting pressure = Set pressure of the safety valve) □ Nickel
Tolerance: □ + 10% □ Inconel
□ Monel
□ .......%
□ Aluminium
Quantity: piece □ Teflon foil medium side
(incl. reserve) (minimum 3 pieces recommended)
□ other ................................
TÜV-approval: □ yes □ no
Halter (incl. 1/4"-vent)

Nominal pressure: PN ................................. Material: □ 1.4571
Quantity (Holder): .......................................................... piece □ other ................................

Indication device
(Pressure gauge / excess
flow valve) Quantity: .......................................................... piece
Burst disc alarm Quantity: .......................................................... piece
Bursting disc selection
Construction □ Reverse buckling bursting disc Manufacturer / Type: □ ................................

□ other ..................................................................
Nominal size selection of the bursting disc DN

• Acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-3 and API 520 „90%-determination“
Example: Remark:
Max. capacity SAFE 900, DN 50, 10 bar without bursting disc = 9610 Nm³/h
Max. capacity SAFE 900, DN 50, 10 bar with bursting disc = 0,9 x 9610 Nm³/h = 8649 Nm³/h
• Acc. to AD2000-A1 (5.4.2.2)
Ageom x α > 1,5 x A0 x αw

GERMANQUALITYVALVES
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock,
Tel. +49 52 07 / 994-0, Telefax +49 52 07 / 994-158 or 159 Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com

Operation and Installation Manual
Ball Valves

Impressum
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded , reproduced nor passed to third parties without the
written agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG . This restriction also applies to the corresponding
drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right or change parts of the valves and armatures at any time without
prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance or the properties is given.

Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 01/2012
2 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Ball valves 11
5.1 General 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 13
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve 13
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends 14
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part 15
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection 16
5.5 Maintenance 17
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland 18
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing 19
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection 19
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection 22
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the ball valves rapaidly
and correctly.
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the ball valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the ball valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation manual.
Yours
General advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the ball valves.
Please check
• directly after delivery the ball valves for any transport damages and defi-
ciencies.
• with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
2.3 Complaints

2.4 Warranty
For our ball valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract.
Symbols and their signification
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these papgraphs without fail!
Safety advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the armatures and
valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety
aspects in each case!
If, for example, a pneumatic actuator works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential
hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for
test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!

3.1 Personal advice
and eletrical installation of the armatures and valves must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directice after the mounting and instal-
ling of the armatures and valves.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the armature / valve (in a plant which is in operation)
inform the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in
order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good
time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machi-
nes / plant.
machines / plant.
As a result of the starting (pneumactic, electric or by hand) of the armatures and valves the flow
of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of
the starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
Safety advice
of the slide / valve / flap.
Check, whether the slide / valve / flap will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switch on armatures and valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrican or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potntial hazard!
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the armature / valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling or a armature or valve some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the armature/valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassmbly?
Observe that some valves / armatures are able to enclose the pressured medium e.g. the ball
in the ball valve. You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the armture/valve is
mounted.

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the armature/
valve is mounted
In case of defect in the armature/valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will
be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the armature/valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please
observe the safefy advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
3.2 Device safety
The armatures/valves
regulations.
precision .
Satisfy yourself that the armatures/vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The armatures/valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The armatures/valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the armature/valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
sealings and the bearings.
The operating of the armatures/valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Never remove a cap or a other component part if the armature/valve will be under pressure.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a nameplate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed

+49 (0)5731 - 7901-0 www.end.de
Art. No.:฀ AE311028
Serial:฀ 220885
฀ Pressure range (PS):฀ 16 bar
Pilot pressure:฀ - bar
Temperature range (TS): -20°C ... +180°C
Size (DN):฀฀ 50 / G2"
Testing pressure (PT):฀ 60 bar
Fluidgroup:฀ 1
Date of manufacturing: 14.02.2002
0062
Fig. 4.1 - Name-plate
Art.No. article number of the valve / armature

Serial order- or production- number
Pressure range (PS) max. admisable working pressure of the valve / armature [bar]
Pilot pressure recommend pilot pressure for correct function of the valve / armature [bar]
(only at pneumatic actuated valves / armatures)
Size (DN) connecting size of the valve / armature
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature
Fluidgroup allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature
Date of manufacturing month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature
10 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball Valves
5 Ball valves
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a ball valve you have to read the
Safety advices
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
Ball valves will be used to cut off medium flow.

It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the ball valve will be resi-
stant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal temperature range
should causes damages on the armature especially on the seals.
In some cases you have to install an equalization boring into the ball, that there will be no overpres-
sure between the body and the ball by changing temperatures.
5.3 Operation
The ball valve will be open or close totally by using a handle or an pneumatic or electric actuator
(option).
During the operation of the ball valve take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs
into the armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it is necessary you have
to install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly
The mechanical installation will be same at all variants of the ball valve. There will be differences
in the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the safety devices (e.g. caps or plugs). Take care that there will be no
parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the ball valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the armature. If necessary you have to install a Y- strainer in
front of the ball valve.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 11
Ball valves
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve. Don`t use the handle as a lever.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
Check the tightness of all connections.
sealing compound
harden
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.1 - ball valves, mounting threaded connection (Fig.: Art. TB111025)
12 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
Before welding you have to disassemble the center part of the ball valve to prevent the sealings
from damages.
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve
Clamp the valve between a vice carfully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of the
ends of the body.
Loosen the nuts crossvice and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully. To attach the center parts and the connection ends at a later mounting you
can sign the parts.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
atu Oeyn d.de
D -Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.2 - ball valves, mounting welded connection, disassembly of the center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 13
Ball Valves
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends
The center part of the ball valve must be substitute by a distance part as long as the center part
during the welding.
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands by welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts at a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate, inform the shift foreman/safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and pevention of accidents.
Fig. 5.3 -ball valves,mouting welded connections, welding of the connection ends(Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
14 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part
Before mounting the center part let the connection ends cool down.
Disassemble the distance part.
Insert the center part between the connection ends. Attach the center parts to the right connec-
tion ends.
Observe the correct seat of the sealings and that there will be no pollution in the seats of the seal-
ings and in the ball.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
Check the function of the ball valve.
G y
o. K man
& C er d.de
bH n · G en
Gm se st@
en hau po
tur yn e ·
r ma d Oe nd.d
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h cool down !
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - ball valves, mounting welded connections, mounting of the center part of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 15
Ball valves
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection
In the following discription we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the ball valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down.
Insert the ball valve and the flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the required and the
max. torque of the ball valve, the flanges, the flanges seals and the screws.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
D
atu Oeyn d.de
-Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
cool down !
3 ttp
h
N
F·OPE
AU SE
·CLO
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - ball valves, mounting flanged connection (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
16 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the valves you have to read the
Safety advice
to this point.
On normal accounts the ball valve is maintenance free.In periodical turns the controlling of the
function and the tightness should happen:
• check the tighness of the gland

• check the tightness of the ball seats
Depending on the version of the ball valve for decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be
readjust. See also chapter 5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Ball valves in a multiple part design could be disassemble to exchange the seals and/or the ball.
See also chapter: 5.5.2. „Exchange of the ball and the sealings“.
If you ascertain a demage of the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant! However before
doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 17
Ball valves
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland
For decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be readjust.
By keeping the nominal pressure you have to tighten up the screw of the gland until the tightness
of the the gland will be restored
After the readjusting the ball of the valve must be able to move slightly.
At ball valves with spring forced sealings or o-ring sealings at the stem the readjustment isn`t
necessary.
o.k. tightness
Fig. 5.6 - ball valves, readjusting of the gland (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
18 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing
For decreasing tightness the ball and/or the sealings of the ball valve could be exchange. The
availability of the spare parts kit you can see in the data sheet of your ball valve.
Corresponding to the wear of the parts exchange the sealings and the ball. By the replacement of
the ball you should also exchange the sealing.
In the following description we assume, that your ball valve will be actuated by hand. If your ball
valve will be actuated be a pneumatic or electric actuator, please also observe the opration and
installation manual of the actuator.
Cut off the media flow and relieve the media pressure.
Keep ready some fit tanks to catch up leaking liquids.
If it`s necessary remove the additional limt switches and gear boxes.
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection
At 3-part ball valve it will do when you remove the center part of the ball valve. Loosen the nuts
crosswise and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully.
. KG ny
Co rma e
H & · Ge end.d
mb en
n G aus post@
a ture eynh .de ·
rm d O nd
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O SE
AU
·CLO
ZU
Fig. 5.7 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of th center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 19
Ball valves
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Take the parts aside carefully. Place a mark on the body and the connection ends that you will be
able to join the correct parts by a subsequent mounting.
Remove the ball seals and the ball out of the body.
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
& er .de
. K ny
bH n · G end
Co ma
@
G
n G us st
re ha o
tu yn · p
e
ma Oe .de
Ar d d
D- Ba .en
m
EN 547 www
32 tp:/
ht
SE
LO
·C
N
ZU
PE
F·O
AU
Fig. 5.8 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
20 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Put the ball sealings and the ball into their seats at the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that
you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Move the center part of the body between the connection ends. If need be arange the center parts
to the correct connection ends.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.2.3. „Mounting of the center part“.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 21
Ball valves
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection
Remove the ball valve out of the pipes. Loosen the flange screws and pull the screws out of the
flange.
Take the ball valve from the pipes.
Dismantle the ball balve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to screw out the screw of the body, or
• you have to screw the screw joint out of the body.
Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Put the parts aside carefully. Place marks on the parts that you will be able to join the correct parts
by a subsequent mounting of the ball valve.
Remove the ball sealing and the ball out of the body.
. KG any
& Co Germ d.de
bH ·
Gm sen st@en
uren nhau · po
mat d Oey d.de
D-Ar en
EN 547 Bawww.
32 tp://
ht
N
PE
F·O E
AU OS
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.9 - Ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
22 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Ball valves
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences..
Remove the second ball sealing.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
& erm .de
. K ny
bH n · G nd
Co a
Gm e e
n us t@
G
re ha pos
atu eyn e ·
rm d O d.d
D-A Ba .en
EN 547 ww
32 p://w
htt
SE
LO
·C
EN
ZU
OP
F·
AU
Fig. 5.10 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 23
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Place the first ball seal into the seat in the body.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Place the second ball seal into the seat in the body.
Assemble the ball valve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to join the parts of the body together and to screw them up with the fit
screws; or
• you have to screw up the screw joint with the body.
If need be attach the different parts of the boby.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Insert the ball valve with new flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the max. torque of the
screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.3 „Mounting with flanged connection“.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
24 http://www.end.de 17.01.2012
Notes
17.01.2012 http://www.end.de 25
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(1)
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
Butterfly valves
fl NG DN32 ... DN100 VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VN 1¼" ... 2" Non-return valves
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VO DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VS DN32 ... DN200 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 EK 1¼" ... 3" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
Gate valves GD 1¼" ... 2" VU 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE DN32 ... DN80 IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" EB 1¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 PE 1¼“ ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZE 1¼" ... 4" RK DN32 ... DN400
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE DN32 ... DN100 TD 4"
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZF 1¼" ... 4" Strainer
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZG 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
Pressure reducer VD DN32 ... DN100 ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS DN32 ... DN200
SD ⅜" ... 2"
⅜ VH 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD DN32 ... DN80 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VK DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2"
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZP DN32 ... DN200

Germany
(7) Notied body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8)  numbers:
Certicate Quality Management System: INT110198DE
 of System approval PED:
Certicate 2011/70.10.1777/P
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 17. january 2012

END-Armaturen Gm78
Oberbecksener Str. usen · Germany
32547 Bad Oey nha
- 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731· pos t@end.de
http://www.end .de

(1)
(2)
fi by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
as defined
Gate valves BO-BO ½" ... 2" VK DN15 ... DN25 BH ⅜" ... 3"⅜
AA ½" ... 2" BT ½" ... 1" VL ¼" ... 1" CK3003 DN15 ... DN50
AB ¼" ... 1" BV ¼“ ... ¾“ VN ¼" ... 1" CK5000 DN40 ... DN250
AC ⅛" ... 2"⅛ CB ¼" ... 2½" VO DN25 CK5003 DN40 ... DN25
AD ½" ... 2" EK ¼" ... 1" VS DN15 ... DN25 CK5100 DN40 ... DN50
AE ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 GD ¼" ... 1" VT DN15 ... DN25 CK5200 DN40 ... DN50
AV ¼" ... 1" HF ¼" ... 1" ZA ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 CW5400 DN40 ... DN50
BE ⅜" ... 3"⅜ HO DN10 ... DN15 ZB ¼" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 DR DN50 ... DN300
BF ¼" ... 3" IB ¼" ... 2" ZD ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 EB ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
BS ½" ... 1¼" IK ¼" ... 1" ZE ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 MR ¼" ... 3"
CA5014 DN40 ... DN80 IL ¼" ... 1" ZF ¼" ... 1" RG DN15 ... DN25
CA5015 DN40 ... DN50 IW ¼" ... 1" ZG ¼" ... 1" TD ⅜" ... 3"⅜
CA5214 DN40 ... DN32 KA ½" ... 1" ZH ½" ... 1" TG ½" ... 2"
CD5010 DN15 ... DN25 KFE ⅜" ... ¾"⅜ ZK DN15 ... DN25 TR ⅜“ ... 4"⅜
CV3010 DN15 ... DN25 NK ⅜“ ... 4",⅜DN10 ... DN100 ZL ¼" ... 1" VB ¼“ ... 2“
CV5010 DN15 ... DN25 PB ⅛ ... 2" ⅛ ZM ¼" ... 1" ZR DN15 ... DN200
CV5020 DN15 ... DN25 PD ½" ... 1" ZP DN15 ... DN25 Sight glasses
IC ¼" ... 4" PE ¼“ ... 1“ ZU ¼" ... 1" SG ¼" ... 2", DN15 ... DN150
MV ½" SK ½" ... 3", DN10 ... DN80 Pipe fittingsfi Strainer
TC ¼" ... 4" TB ¼" ... 1" FG ⅛" ... 4"⅛ AS ¼“ ... 1“
Pressure reducer TE ½" ... 2" FS DN15 ... DN150 AS DN15 ... DN25
ID ⅜" ... ¾"⅜ TF DN20 ... DN25 GE Ø6 ... Ø20 BG ⅜" ... 2"⅜
MB ½" ... 2" TH ½" ... 1" GR Ø8 ... Ø28 CU DN15 ... DN250
MC ½" ... 2" TT ⅜" ... 1"⅜ GV Ø6 ... Ø20 EA ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
SD ⅜“ ... 1“,⅜DN20 ... DN25 TV ⅜" ... 1"⅜ TE Ø6 ... Ø25 IG ¼" ... 4"
Pressure relief valves VD ¼" ... 1" TV Ø6 ... Ø20 KU DN15 ... DN100
NG ⅜" ... 1",⅜DN15 ... DN25 VD DN10 ... DN25 WE Ø6 ... Ø38 STE DN25 ... DN150
Ball valves VE ¼" ... 1" WV Ø6 ... Ø20 Water-shock damper
AG ¼" ... 1" VF ⅛“ ... ½"⅛ Non-return valves TS ½"
BC ⅛“ ... ¾"⅛ VH ⅛“ ... 1"⅛ AH ¼" ... 1½"
BK DN15 ... DN25 VH3100 ½" ... 1" AR ½" ... 1"

Germany
tions of Article 3 Part 3 of the directive 97/23/EG. These products bear no CE mark, but are in line to the good engineering
practice designed and manufactured.

en GmbH & Co. KG
END-Armatur 78
Oberbecksener Str. usen · Germany
(7) On behalf 32547 Bad Oeynha - 7900-0 Bad Oeynhausen, 17. january 2012
Tele fon: +49 (0)5 731
- 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731· pos t@e nd.d e
http://www.end.de


watergates
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG

Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Type 0
121, 0330, 0331
(0124, 0125, 0332, 0333)
2/2- and 3/2-Way Solenoid Valve
2/2- und 3/2-Wege-Magnetventil
Électrovanne à 2/2 et 3/2 voies
Operating Instructions
Bedienungsanleitung
Manuel d‘utilisation
Bürkert Fluid Control Systems

Sales Center
Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
D-74653 Ingelfingen
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International address
www.burkert.com
Manuals and data sheets on the Internet: www.burkert.com
Bedienungsanleitungen und Datenblätter im Internet: www.buerkert.de
Instructions de service et fiches techniques sur Internet : www.buerkert.fr
© Bürkert Werke GmbH, 2014

Operating Instructions 1402/04_EU-ML_00893047 / Original DE
www.burkert.com
Type 0121 / 0330 / 0331
Table of Contents 1 The operating instructions
1 The operating instructions...................................................................................................2 The operating instructions contain important information.
▶▶ Read the instructions carefully and follow the safety instructions.
2 Authorized use...............................................................................................................................3
▶▶ Keep the instructions in a location where they are available to every
3 Basic safety instructions.......................................................................................................4 user.
The liability and warranty for the device are void if the operating
4 System description.....................................................................................................................5
instructions are not followed.
5 Technical data................................................................................................................................6
1.1 Symbols
6 Assembly............................................................................................................................................8
▶▶ Designates instructions for risk prevention.
7 Electrical connection.............................................................................................................10 →→Designates a procedure which you must carry out.
8 Disassembly..................................................................................................................................12
Danger!
9 Maintenance, troubleshooting........................................................................................12
Immediate danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
10 Transportation, storage, disposal.................................................................................13
Warning!
Possible danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
Caution!
Danger! Moderate or minor injuries.
2 english
Note! 2 Authorized use

Warns of damage to property. The device is designed to control, shut off and meter neutral
and aggressive media up to a viscosity of 37 mm²/s.
▶▶ Use according to the authorized data, operating conditions and
Important tips and recommendations. conditions of use specified in the contract documents and operat-
ing instructions.
Refers to information in these operating instructions or in other ▶▶ Provided the cable plug is connected and installed correctly, e.g.
documentation. Bürkert Type 2508, the device satisfies degree of protection IP65
in accordance with DIN EN 60529 / IEC 60529.
Only operate the device
1.2 Definitions of terms ▶▶ when in perfect condition and always ensure proper storage, trans-
portation, installation and operation.
In these instructions, the term "device" always refers to the Type 0121,
▶▶ Use the device only as intended.
0330, 0331, (0124, 0125, 0332, 0333).
2.1 Restrictions
If exporting the device, observe any existing restrictions.
english 3
3 Basic safety instructions Risk of injury due to malfunction of valves with alternating
These safety instructions do not make allowance for any contingencies voltage (AC).
and events which may arise during assembly, operation and maintenance. Sticking core causes coil to overheat, resulting in a malfunction.
▶▶ Monitor process to ensure function is in perfect working order.
Risk of short-circuit/escape of media through leaking screw
Risk of injury from high pressure in the system/device. joints.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the pressure ▶▶ Ensure seals are seated correctly.
and vent/drain lines. ▶▶ Carefully screw valve and pipelines together.
Risk of injury due to electrical shock.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power supply
and secure to prevent reactivation.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for
electrical equipment.
Risk of burns/risk of fire if used for a prolonged switch-on time
through hot device surface.
▶▶ Keep device away from highly flammable substances and media and
do not touch with bare hands.
4 english
Type 0121 / 0330 / 0331
General hazardous situations. 4 System description
To prevent injuries: 4.1 General description
▶▶ In a potentially explosive area, the device may be used only in accor-
dance with the specification on the type label. For the use, observe The pivoted armature valves are direct acting 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid
the supplementary instructions manual enclosed with the device with valves in a wide variety of circuit functions and models. Solenoid system
safety instructions for the explosion-risk area. and media chamber are separated from one another by a separating
▶▶ The enclosed UL instructions must be followed in the UL area. diaphragm system. The valves are fast acting and have a long service life.
▶▶ Do not carry out any external or internal modifications and do not
subject the device to mechanical loads (e.g. by placing objects on
Type 0121 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, socket valve body
it or standing on it).
▶▶ Secure the device against unintentional activation. Type 0330 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, socket valve body
▶▶ Only trained technicians may perform installation and maintenance Type 0331 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, flange valve body
work.
Type 0332 Bistable 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve
▶▶ The valves must be installed in accordance with the regulations with 2 coil windings, socket valve body
applicable in the country.
▶▶ After an interruption in the power supply, ensure that the process is Type 0333 Bistable 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve
restarted in a controlled manner. with 2 coil windings, flange valve body
▶▶ Observe the general rules of technology. Type 0124 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, socket valve body
Type 0125 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, flange valve body
english 5
5 Technical data 5.3 Operating conditions

The following values are indicated on the type label: Ambient temperature
• Voltage (tolerance ±10 %) / current type Type 0121 max. +50°C
Other types max. +55°C
• Coil power consumption (active power in W - at operating
temperature) Duty cycle
• Pressure range for body material
Brass or stainless steel long-term operation, duty cycle 100%
• Body material (MS=brass, VA=stainless steel, PV=PVC,
Plastic max. permissible duty cycle
TE=PTFE, PP=polypropylene, PD=PVDF)
see data sheet
• Sealing material (F=FKM, A=EPDM, B=NBR, C=FFKM)
Important information for functional reliability.
5.1 Conformity If switched off for a long period, 1-2 switching actions are rec-
The Types 0121, 0330, 0331, (0124, 0125, 0332, 0333) are compliant ommended prior to restart.
with the EC Directives according to the EC Declaration of Conformity. Service life
High switching frequency and high pressures reduce the service life.
5.2 Standards
Degree of protection IP65 in accordance with DIN EN 60529
The applied standards, which are used to demonstrate compliance with
/ IEC 60529 with correctly connected
the EC Directives, are listed in the EC type test certificate and/or the EC
and installed cable plug, e.g. Bürkert
Declaration of Conformity.
Type 2508
6 english
5.4 Mechanical data Circuit functions

Dimensions see data sheet 2 (A)
A 2/2-way valve,
Coil material epoxide (NC) 1 (P) closed in rest position
2 (A)
Connections G 1/4 B 2/2-way valve,
(NPT 1/4, G 1/8, G 3/8, Rc 1/4 on request) (NO) 1 (P) open in rest position
2(A)
5.5 Fluidic data C 3/2-way valve; closed in rest position,
(NC) output A unloaded
Media aggressive, neutral, gaseous and liquid media, 1(P) 3(R)
4(B)
which do not attack body and sealing materials. D 3/2-way valve, in rest position, output B
(see resistance table at www.buerkert.de). (NO) 1(P) 3(R) pressurized
Medium temperature for sealing material 2(A) 3/2-way mixing valve; in rest position,
FKM 0 °C – +90 °C E pressure connection P2 connected to
EPDM -30 °C – + 90 °C 1(P) 3(R)
output A, P1 closed
NBR 0 °C – + 80 °C
2(A) 4(B) 3/2-way distribution valve,
FFKM +5 °C – +90 °C
F in rest position, pressure connection P
1(P)
connected to output B
2(A)
T 3/2-way all purpose valve

1(P) 3(R)
english 7
Type 0121 / 0330 / 0331
5.6 Electrical data 6 Assembly
Connections DIN EN 175301-803 (DIN 43 650), shape A for DANGER!
cable plug Type 2508 or 2509
Risk of injury from high pressure in the system/device.
5.7 Type label ▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the pressure
Body material and vent/drain lines.
Sealing material
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power sup-
Orifice ply and secure to prevent reactivation.
Circuit function ▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for
Type
0330 C 2.0 FKM MS Warning!
Made in Germany
G1/4 0-6 bar
24V DC 8W Risk of injury from improper assembly.
CE ▶▶ The assembly may be carried out only by trained technicians and
00450000 W14UN
with the appropriate tools.
Identification number ▶▶ Secure system against unintentional activation.
Voltage, frequency, output ▶▶ Following assembly, ensure a controlled restart.
Port connection, nominal pressure
Fig. 1: Description of the type label (example)
8 english
6.1 Before installation Note!

Installation position: Caution risk of breakage.
The installation position is optional. Preferably: Actuator at the top. ▶▶ Do not use the coil as a lifting arm.
→→Prior to installation check pipelines for dirt and clean if necessary.
Dirt filter: To ensure that the solenoid valve func- →→Hold the device with a suitable tool (open-end wrench) on the
tions reliably, a dirt filter (≤ 500 µm) must be body; screw into the pipeline.
installed in front of the valve input. Attaching the device:
→→Via bore holes M4x8 (made from brass or stainless steel) or self-
tapping screws 3.9 DIN 7970 (made from plastic, max. screw-in
6.2 Installation depth 10 mm) on the bottom side of the body at drill pattern
→→Observe flow direction: 38x24.
Functioning of the device is only ensured if the circuit function is
maintained.
Devices in flange model
Attaching the device:
Devices in socket model
→→Via supplied screws on basic devices or manifold.
→→Use PTFE tape as sealing material. →→Tighten fastening screws on the coil to a maximum torque of 2 Nm.
→→Determine the maximum screw-in depth of the connecting threads
as this does not comply with any standard.
english 9
6.3 Manual control 7 Electrical connection

DANGER!
Note!
▶▶ When the manual control is locked, the valve cannot be actuated ▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power sup-
electrically. ply and secure to prevent reactivation.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for
Manual control
If the protective conductor is not connected, there is a risk of
electric shock.
Press 1 ▶▶ Always connect protective conductor and check electrical continuity
between coil and housing.
max. 1 Nm
Turn 2 Approved cable plug, e.g. Type

2508 or other suitable cable plug
Seal
in accordance with
Fig. 2: Manual control
DIN EN 175301-803 shape A
Fig. 3: Connecting the cable plug to the power supply
Note the voltage and current type as specified on the type label.
10 english
Type 0121 / 0330 / 0331
7.1 Standard model →→Check electrical continuity between coil and body (protective con-
→→Connect L1/+ and N/– to terminals 1 and 2, independent of the ductor function).
polarity. 4 2 3
Terminal 1
→→Connect protective conductor. (=) ∼
→→Attach seal and check for correct fit. (+) L1 Terminal 2
→→Tighten cable plug (Type 2508 or 2509 in accordance with DIN EN
175301-803 (DIN 43 650), shape A, for order numbers see data (–) N Terminal 3
sheet); while doing so, observe the maximum torque of 1 Nm.
Protective
→→Check electrical continuity between coil and body (protective con- 1
PE conductor
ductor function). Fig. 4: Electrical connection - pulse model (CF 02)
7.2 Pulse model (CF 02) Note!
In accordance with the terminals on the valves, the connection ▶▶ Prevent simultaneous pulsing on both coil windings.
terminals in the cable plug are marked with the numbers 1 to 3. ▶▶ Parallel to the terminals, no other consumers (relay, etc.) may be
connected.
→→Connect as shown in “Fig. 4”. Pulse on terminal 1 closes the valve;
▶▶ The respective coil connection that does not carry current must be
pulse on terminal 2 opens the valve.
galvanically isolated (open).
→→Attach seal and check for correct fit. ▶▶ In case two or more valves are connected in parallel, the use of two-
→→Tighten cable plug (Type 2508 or 2509 in accordance with DIN EN pole or multi-pole switches must ensure that this requirement is met.
175301-803 (DIN 43 650), shape A, for order numbers see data
sheet); while doing so, observe the maximum torque of 1 Nm.
english 11
8 Disassembly 9 Maintenance, troubleshooting

DANGER! 9.1 Safety instructions
DANGER!
Risk of injury from high pressure in the system/device.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the pressure Risk of injury from high pressure in the system.
and vent/drain lines.
▶▶ Turn off the pressure and vent the lines before loosening lines or
Risk of injury due to electrical shock. valves.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power Risk of injury due to electrical shock.
supply and secure to prevent reactivation.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations supply and secure to prevent reactivation.
for electrical equipment.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations
for electrical equipment.
Warning!
Warning!
Risk of injury from improper disassembly.
▶▶ Disassembly may be carried out only by trained technicians and Risk of injury from improper maintenance work.
with the appropriate tools. ▶▶ Maintenance may be carried out only by trained technicians and
Risk of injury from hazardous media. with the appropriate tools.
▶▶ Before loosening lines or valves, flush out hazardous media, ▶▶ Secure system against unintentional activation.
depressurize and drain the lines. ▶▶ Following maintenance, ensure a controlled restart.
12 english
9.2 Malfunctions 10 Transportation, storage,

If malfunctions occur, check whether: disposal
→→the device has been installed according to the instructions, Note!
→→the electrical and fluid connections are correct,
Transport damage.
→→the device is not damaged,
Inadequately protected devices may be damaged during
→→all screws have been tightened, transportation.
→→the voltage and pressure have been switched on, ▶▶ Protect the device against moisture and dirt in shock-resistant
→→the pipelines are clean. packaging during transportation.
Malfunction Possible cause ▶▶ Prevent the temperature from exceeding or dropping below the
permitted storage temperature.
Valve does not Short circuit or coil interrupted
Incorrect storage may damage the device.
switch Medium pressure outside the permitted
▶▶ Store the device in a dry and dust-free location.
pressure range
▶▶ Storage temperature -40 – +80°C.
Manual control locked
Damage to the environment caused by parts contaminated
Valve does not close Inner compartment of the valve is dirty
with media.
Manual control locked
▶▶ Dispose of the device and packaging in an environmentally friendly
9.2.1 Repairs manner.
Repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer. Operating data ▶▶ Observe applicable disposal and environmental regulations.
may change if spare parts are replaced by the user.
english 13
Type 5281 Sicherheit Safety Sécurité
Manual de instrucciones
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Proper Usage Utilisatio
für neutrale Medien
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung To ensure the proper function of the device and promote Af
2/2-way solenoid valve sowie die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten ge- long service lift, you must comply with the information in pe
for neutral media mäß Datenblatt Typ 5281, damit das Gerät einwandfrei these Operating Instructions and the application conditions and contenues
Èlectrovanne à 2/2 voies funktioniert und lange einsatzfähig bleibt. Bei Nichtbeachtung specifications provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation
dieser Hinweise sowie bei unzulässigen Eingriffen in das Gerät the device in a manner that is contrary to these Operating technique
pour fluides neutres entfällt jegliche Haftung unsererseits, ebenso erlischt die Garantie Instructions or the application conditions and specifications tions et d’i
r 24V
Válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos auf Geräte u. Zubehörteile! Das Gerät dient ausschließlich als 2/ provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons
2 V o para medios neutrales 2-Wege-Magnetventil für die lt. Datenblatt zulässigen Medien. your warranty. This device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les access
ge 1 lid with
Eine andere oder darüber hinausgehende Benutzung gilt als solenoid valve for the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2
o l t a y
nicht bestimmungsgemäß. Für hieraus resultierende Schäden sheet. Any other use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre
V R va pply onl
haftet Bürkert nicht. Das Risiko trägt allein der Anwender. not be responsible for any improper use of the device. considérée
U
dommages
/
UL er su
toute respo
o w ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
s2p
• Halten Sie sich bei Einsatzplanung und Betrieb des • Be sure to observe generally accepted safety rules •
clas
Gerätes an die einschlägigen allgemein anerkannten when planning, installing and using this device. For
sicherheitstechnischen Regeln. example, take suitable measures to prevent
• Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtig- unintentional operations of the device.
tes Betätigen oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen • Do not impair the operation of the device. •
auszuschließen. • Do not attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or
• Beachten Sie, daß in Systemen, die unter Druck valves in the system that are under pressure, and
Notice d'utilisation
stehen, Leitungen und Ventile nicht gelöst werden always be sure to switch off the voltage supply •
Betriebsanleitung
dürfen. Schalten Sie vor Eingriffen in das System in before working on the system.
jedem Fall die Spannung ab! • When attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure
• Achten Sie auf den einwandfreien Sitz der Dichtung the seal is properly seated.
beim Verschrauben der Spule mit der Geräte- • Jammed coils can cause coil overheating with AC!
steckdose. • For explosion-proof models, data from the conformity •
• Festsitzender Kern bewirkt bei Wechselspannung certificate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be
(AC) Spulenüberhitzung! complied with! •
• Bei Ausführungen mit Explosionsschutz sind zusätz-
lich die Angaben der Konformitätsbescheinigung PTB WARNING! •
Nr. 00ATEX 2129 X zu beachten. • Do not touch the coil during use as it becomes very
hot.
WARNUNG!
• Verletzungsgefahr! Bei Dauerbetrieb kann die Spule •
sehr heiß werden.
Fluid Control Systems
Sécurité Seguridad Sicherheit Sicherheit
Utilisation conforme aux prescriptions Utilización con arreglo a las disposiciones Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad
e the proper function of the device and promote Afin que l’appareil puisse fonctionner parfaitement et Se ruega observar las indicaciones contenidas en este Ma-
vice lift, you must comply with the information in pendant longtemps, veuillez observer les instructions nual de instrucciones así como las condiciones de uso y datos Spannungsfreie Montage / Voltage-free assembly Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection
nstructions and the application conditions and contenues dans cette notice d’utilisation ainsi que les conditions admisibles con arreglo a la hoja de servicio Tipo 5281, de modo que el Montage sans tension / Montaje libre de tensión Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
vided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation et les données admissibles mentionnées dans la fiche aparato funcione impecablemente y permanezca durante largo tiempo
anner that is contrary to these Operating technique du type 5281. En cas d’inobservation de ces instruc- apto para el empleo. La inobservancia de estas indicaciones así como
e application conditions and specifications tions et d’interventions non autorisées dans l’appareil, nous las inter-venciones inadmisibles en el aparato suponen la declinación
ype 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons toute responsabilité et la garantie couvrant l’appareil et por nuestra parte de toda clase de responsabilidad, además de la
his device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les accessoires s’éteint! L'appareil sert uniquement d’électro- extinción de la garan-tía de los aparatos y de las piezas de los accesorios.
the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2 voies pour les fluides admis selon la fiche technique. El aparato sirve ex-clusivamente como válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos
use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre utilisation ou une utilisation excédant ce contexte sera para los medios autorizados según la hoja de datos. Cualquier otra
ble for any improper use of the device. considérée comme non conforme aux prescriptions. Pour les utilización que vaya más ella no será conforme a las disposiciones.
dommages qui en résulteraient, le fabricant/fournisseur décline El fabricante / suministrador no es responsable de los daños que de ello
toute responsabilité. L’utilisateur seul en assume le risque. pudieran resultar. El riesgo corresponde únicamente al usuario. 0 bar, psi, kPa Du
Dir rchflu
ATTENTION! ATTENTION! ¡ATENCIÓN! Se ectio ß
re to observe generally accepted safety rules • Pour la planification de l’utilisation et l’exploitation de • Para la planificación y operación del aparato atenerse Se s d'é n flo
n
ntid cc
planning, installing and using this device. For l’appareil, veuillez vous en tenir aux règles applicables a las correspondientes reglas generales y re- o d ou
ep
as
ple, take suitable measures to prevent et généralement reconnues en matière de technique conocidas de la técnica de seguridad.
entional operations of the device. de sécurité. • Tomar las medidas apropiadas para excluir
ot impair the operation of the device. • Prenez les mesures nécessaires pour exclure tout accionamien-tos no intencionados o perjuicios Elektrischer Anschluß / Electrical connection
ot attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or actionnement involontaire ou des altérations inadmisibles; prestar atención a que en el caso de Raccordement électrique / Conexión eléctrica
s in the system that are under pressure, and inadmissibles. sistemas que se encuentren bajo presión no deben
s be sure to switch off the voltage supply • Notez qu’il n’est pas permis de desserrer des desconec-tarse conducciones y válvulas.
e working on the system. conduites ou des vannes se trouvant sous pression • Antes de proceder a intervenciones en el sistema
attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure dans des systèmes! Avant d’intervenir dans le desco-nectar siempre la tensión.
eal is properly seated. système, coupez l’alimentation électrique dans tous • Prestar atención al asiento impecable de la empaque-
med coils can cause coil overheating with AC! les cas! tadura al atornillar la válvula con la caja de enchufe
xplosion-proof models, data from the conformity • Veillez à ce que le joint repose parfaitement lorsque para aparatos eléctricos.
icate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be vous visserez la bobine avec le connecteur. • Con tensión alterna (AC), el macho de asiento duro
lied with! • Un noyau bloqué provoque en cas d’alimentation en provoca sobrecalentamiento de la bobina!
tension alternative (AC) une surchauffe de la bobine! • En las ejecuciones con protección debe tenerse
WARNING! • Dans les exécutions antidéflagrantes, les indications adicio-nalmente en cuenta los datos de la declaración
ot touch the coil during use as it becomes very de l'attestation de conformité PTB N° 00ATEX 2129 X de con-formidad PTB n° 00ATEX 2129 X.
doivent observées en plus.
AVERTISSEMENT! ¡AVISO!
• Risque de blessure! En cas de fonctionnement • ¡Peligro de lesiones! En estado de operación continua
permanent, la bobine peut devenir très chaude. la bobina puede ponerse muy caliente.
Sicherheit Technische Daten Technische Daten
Caractéristiques techniques / Datos técnicos

Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Technical Data
Umgebungstemperatur Température d' ambiante
Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection Temperature of Surroundings Temperatura de ambiente
Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
Boîtier/Caja
Gehäuse/Housing Laiton/Latón
Messing/brass Acier fin/Acero inoxidable
Edelstahl/Stainless steel
Dichtwerkstoff Temp.
Matériau d’étanchéité Temp.
Sealing material Medium
Material de estanqueidad Fluide/Medio
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
0 bar, psi, kPa Du FKM -10 .. +120 °C
FKM -10 .. +120 °C
Dir rchflu
Se ectio ßrich Nennweite/Nominal size Dimension nominale
Se s d'é n flow tung
n
ntid cc Anchura nominal
o d oule
ep Wirkungsweise
as ment
o Circuit function Fonctionnement
A Funcionamiento
A
Typ/ Type
Type/Tipo
MADE IN GERMANY
MADE IN GERMANY
5281 A 13,0 FKM MS 5281 A 13,0 FKM MS
Beispiel 0,2 -16 bar 0,2 -16 bar
24V 50-60Hz 8W Exemple 24V 50-60Hz 8W
Example
Ejemplo
450000Y W14UN
450000Y W14UN
Bestell-Nr. / Id. No. N° id. / N° de pedido

Spannung (±10 %) - Frequenz - Leistung Tension (±10%) - fréquence - puissance
Voltage (±10 %) - Frequency - Power Tensión (±10 %) - frecuencia - potencia
Druckbereich/Pressure range Plage de pression / Gama de presión
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten Sous resérve de modification techniques.

We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice Nos reservamos el derecho de llevar a cabo modificaciones tècnicas
sin previo aviso.
Niederlassungen / Branch Offices Montage Montage Montage
Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage

Contact addresses / Kontaktadressen
Germany / Deutschland / Allemange
Spulenmontage / Coil assembly / Einbaulage beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Ab
Bürkert Fluid Control System
Montage de la bobine / Montaje de bobina de montage quelconque / Sentido de montaje Se
Sales Centre
discrecional Eta
Chr.-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
Mutter Vorzugsrichtung Ato
D-74653 Ingelfingen Nut Preffered direction
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111 Ecrou Orientation préférentielle
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448 Tuerca Colector de lodo
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International
Contact addresses can be found on the internet at:
Die Kontaktadressen finden Sie im Internet unter: max. 5 Nm
Les adresses se trouvent sur internet sous :
www.burkert.com Bürkert / Company / Locations
Schmutzfänger
Dirt trap
O-Ring
Collecteur d’impuretés
Joint torique Ge
Anillo en O Sentido de paso
en
Schutzleiterfunktion / Protective conductor function /
Fonctionnement du conducteur de protection / Función del Sc
conductor de protector Alw
Nach Spulenmontage immer prü- con
fen! flow Ra
Always test function after assembly of d cas
tion ida
of coil! irec nque tec
/ D ta
Toujours vérifier après montage de ng t / Es Co
htu
la bobine! ric men de
¡Tras el montaje de bobina hfluß oule tier
rc c
pruébese siempre la function¡ Du s d’é
n
se
Widerstand Prüfspannung Prüfstrom Rohrleitungen reinigen
resistance test voltage test current Cleaning the piperuns
résistance tension d’essai courant d’essai Nettoyer les conduites
intensidad tensión de prueba corriente de prueba
Limpieza tuberías
max. 0,1 Ω 12 V 1A
Operating Instructions 0512/13_EU-ML_00803312 12/05/1'M
Montage Montage Störungen Ersatzteile
sembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Troubleshooting / Dérangements / Averías Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza
e beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Abdichtung Einschrauben der Rohrleitungen / Screwing in the pipe Spannung und Stromart prüfen!
age quelconque / Sentido de montaje Seal connections Check the voltage and type of current!
al Etanchéification Vissage les conduites / Averías las tuberías Vérifier la tension et le genre de courant! Spulensatz
tung Atornillado Comprobar tensión y clase de corriente!
rection Coil kit
préférentielle PTFE
lodo
Jeu de bobines
Juego de bobina
Druck prüfen! / Check the pressure! Verschleißteilsatz

Vérifier la pression! / Comprobar presión!
änger Set of Wearing Parts
Normeinschraubtiefe nicht überschreiten!
r d’impuretés Do not exceed standard screw-in depth! Jeu de pièces d'usure
e paso Gerätesteckdose / Instrument socket / Connecteur / Caja de Ne pas dépasser la profondeur filetée
enchufe para aparatos eléctricos normalisée!
Juego del piazas de cierre
¡No sobrepasar la profundidad de
Schutzleiter immer anschließen! roscado normalizada!
bar, psi, kPa
Always connect the protective Dichtung
conductor! Seal
flow Raccordez dans tous les Joint d'étanchéité
of d cas le conducteur de pro-
tion ida Sellado Rohrleitungen prüfen! / Check the piperun!
irec nque tection!
/ D ta Vérifier les conduites! / Comprobar tuberías! Dichtungssatz
ng t / Es Conectar en todo caso el conductor
htu
ric men de puesta a
hfluß oule tierra!
1 Nm
Set of Seals
rc c
Du s d’é
n
se
Jeu de joints
ngen reinigen
the piperuns Juego de estanqueidad
es conduites
tuberías Type 2508
Ersatzteile Ersatzteile Ersatzteile
Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts/Pièces de rechange/Pieza de repuesto
Spannung Leistung Id-Nr. D ich tw erksto ff Id -N r.

Nennw eite
Voltage Power Id. No. Sealing m aterial Id . N o.
No m in al diam eter
M atière de jo int N o cd e .
Tension Puissance No cde. D iam ètre nom inal
Spulensatz M aterial de No de
Tensión Potencia No de pedito A n ch ura no m in al
estan queidad p edito
[V] [W]
Coil kit N BR 645 561 A
Europa, 024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Europe 13 - 65 FK M 645 562 B
Jeu de bobines
024 / 56 8 645 556 D E P DM 645 563 C
Juego de bobina 110 / 56 8 645 557 E

NBR 624 012 J
230 / 56 8 645 558 P 13 FKM 624 013 K
N.A.F.T.A. EPDM 624 014 L

024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Verschleißteilsatz NBR 624 015 M
024 / 56 8 645 556 D 20 FKM 624 016 N
Set of Wearing Parts EPDM 624 017 P
120 / 60 8 643 802 B
NBR 624 018 Y
Jeu de pièces d'usure 240 / 60 8 643 803 C
25 FKM 624 019 Z
Juego del piazas de cierre A.P.A.C. 024 / DC 8 126 434 R EPDM 624 020 W
024 / 56 8 645 556 D NBR 624 021 K
32, 40 FKM 624 022 L

100 / 56 8 645 559 Q
EPDM 624 023 M
110 / 56 8 645 557 E NBR 624 024 N
Dichtungssatz
200 / 56 8 645 560 M 50 FKM 624 025 P
Set of Seals
EPDM 624 026 Q
230 / 56 8 645 558 P
Jeu de joints Lors de la commande de pièces de rechange, indiquez, en
Bitte geben Sie bei der Bestellung von Verschleißteilen zusätz- plus de leur numéro de commande, celui de commande de
Juego de estanqueidad lich zur Bestellnummer der Ersatzteile auch die Bestellnummer votre appareil complet.
Typ 5281
Ihres Komplettgerätes an. Con ocasión del pedido de las pieza de repuesto, rogamos
When ordering spare parts, please also quote the order number indicar además del número de pedido de la pieza de
of your complete appliance in addition to the order number of the requesto también el número de pedido de su aparato
replacement parts. completo.
- Product information -
Solenoid valve block for water distribution Project 10168
Multi-valve block with adjustment and display of the output pressure
TECHNICAL DATA
Materials Valves Type 5281, DN13
Valve block Brass (alternative: Cv-value valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
brass, nickel-plated) Operating voltage 24 V DC (alternative: 120 V AC)
Coil jacket PA Voltage tolerance 10 %
Armature guide tube Stainless steel Nominal power 8 W per valve
Seal material EPDM / (alternative Nominal operating Long-term operation;
FKM) mode duty cycle 100 %
Medium Water Electrical connection Plug tabs DIN 43650 A
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C with pre-wired device
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C sockets incl. 1.6 m of cable
Medium feed pressure max. 10 bar Degree of protection IP 65 with device socket
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar Special feature Manually actuated valves
Operating range 1 to 6 bar Filter sieve 0.25 mm stainless steel
Connections Block fixing with 2 screws M8x50
Input E G 3/4 internal thread through housing drill holes
Output A1 M22x1.5; external Installation position of any, preferably drives at top
Output A2 M14x1.5; external block
A
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
A differential pressure of 0.5 bar is required to open the full valve cross section.
The minimum pressure at the system input is 1 bar.
OF VALVE
A 2/2-way valve, pilot-operated,
normally closed
DIMENSIONS [MM]
DESCRIPTION
The valve block consists of a brass
block, two or three valves of Type
Front view 5281 with manual actuation, a pres-
sure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) and a pressure gauge.
Valve V 1 is used as a safety valve at
the inlet and - if present - directs the
medium to the pressure controller.
Otherwise, the valve position is
sealed by a cover plate. Ball valve,
tube and dirt trap form a module that
can be rotated through 180° when
necessary, enabling medium feed
from the opposite side.
The valve seats are integrated in the
block. The block operates so that the
same respective water flow is applied
to each valve output in parallel opera-
tion. The water volumes flowing
through the valves can be adjusted
Rear view
via the set-point of the pressure con-
troller. The pressure gauge indicates
the set pressure.
The block is fixed in place with 2 hex-
agonal socket head screws via the
drill holes in the valve block.
Legend
V1 optional cover plate or safety valve (solenoid valve Type 5281, DN13);
the double block with cover plate is presented in the graphic
V2, V3 dosing valves
VS lock screw for sieve
SW7 external hex. screw (SW7 - wrench size 7) for setting the pressure set-point value
Ordering table water distributor

Housing material Seal material Voltage Number of valves EEx Order no.
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 175 777 Fixing
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 yes 183 535 screws 2 x M8x50
Brass FKM 24 V DC 2 no 187 621
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 3 no 200 670
Brass, nickel-plated EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 230 044
Brass EPDM 120 V AC 2 no 235 122
FLUID CONTROL SYSTEM
PI-10168_EN_2014-06-11.docx/bi/11/06/2014 Technical changes reserved

TFU006
Pressure regulator for water
• Brass version with DIN DVGW and international

drinking water approvals
• Stainless steel version with DIN DVGW-Approval
• Plastic compact version
• Pressure gauge connection at pressure output
The water pressure regulator works according Technical data – Version I

to the principle of pressure reduction. It is pref-
Body material EN 12165 CW602N
erably for use in the provided water systems.
Seal material NBR
The pressure regulator consists of a housing,
Diaphragm NBR
a piston or diaphragm valve with an adjustable
Valve type Single seat valve, relieved
spring and spring cap.
The inlet pressure reaches the target value, Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
opens the piston or the diaphragm against Pressure gauge connection G 1/4 (without pressure gauge)
the spring force of the control valve and the Port connections 1/2" to 2" (threaded male)
built-up output pressure. The output pressure Medium temperature +60 °C
is the controlled variable. When exceeding the Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
nominal value the valve closes, when there is Outlet pressure 1–6 bar1)
a shortfall the valve opens and thus the output Default setting 3 bar1)
pressure is kept almost constant. Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
By changing the spring tension, the spring Set-
Noise class II <30
point can be continuously adjusted.
Mounting place if possible directly behind the counter
Installation horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Observe flow direction!
The pressure regulator is available in 3 versions:
Approvals
Version I:
Brass housing with DIN DVGW and
international drinking water approvals 1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
Version II:
Stainless steel case with DIN DVGW approval
Version III:
with plastic housing
Union connection G 1/8 "and G 1/4"
www.burkert.com p. 1/4
TFU006
Technical data – Version II

Body material Brass DZR
EN 12165 CW602N
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
Pressure gauge connection G 1/4 (without pressure gauge)
Port connections 1/2" to 1" (threaded male)
Medium temperature +40 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1–6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
Noise class II <30
Installation horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Approvals
Technical data – Version III

Body material Stainless steel 1.4305
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Material valve seat Stainless steel
Material strainer bowl Stainless steel
Pressure gauge connection both ways 1/4" (without pressure gauge)
Port connections 1/2" to 2" (threaded male)
Medium temperature +70 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1,5–6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Flow rate 1–2 m/s (optimum values)
Noise class II <30
Installation in horizontal direction, strainer bowl downwards
Approvals
Technical data – Version IV

(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
Body material Technopolymer
Threaded port Brass
Special roller diaphragm NBR
Medium water
Medium temperature max. +50 °C
Pressure gauge connection G 1/8 (without pressure gauge)
Port connections Threaded port G 1/8 or G 1/4
Inlet pressure max. 13 bar1)
Outlet pressure 0–4 bar1)
(continuously adjustable) 0–8 bar1)
0–12 bar1)
Setpoint adjustment only ascending pressure, screw can be locked
Installation As required, preferably controller handle upright.
Approvals None
1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
p. 2/4
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water

Version I AUBE
¯ (
Port con-
nections
Item no.
Ø Cover
D (inch)
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
A
&
1/2 140.00 76.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 1.27 788 439
3/4 160.00 90.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 2.27 788 440
1 180.00 95.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 3.60 788 441
$
1 1/4 200.00 110.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 5.80 788 442
%
1 1/2 220.00 120.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 9.10 788 443
"
2 250.00 130.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 14.00 788 444
!
The pressure regulator version I have a

pressure gauge G 1/4 for measuring the
output pressure.
Delivered without pressure gauge.
Version II
E
Port con-
Delivered without
nections
Item no.
A (inch)
[m3/h]
pressure gauge.
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Kvs
G
D
B
1/2 169.00 86.50 100.50 54.00 58.00 1.27 771 130
D
3/4 180.00 89.00 98.00 54.00 58.00 2.27 770 991
1 205.00 88.50 99.50 54.00 58.00 3.60 770 992
A
C
F
Spare parts Version I and II B
Item no.
Spare
parts
Cartridge for 1/2" 771 847

Cartridge for 3/4" 771 847
Cartridge for 1" 771 848
Cartridge for 1 1/4" 771 849
Cartridge for 1 1/2" 771 850
Cartridge for 2" 770 243
Tool for filter case 771 851
Filter for 771 852
Version II
Filter case for 771 853
Version II Cartridge Filter Filter case
p. 3/4
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water (continued)

Version III
Port con-
Item no.
R (inch)
nection
[m3/h]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
H
Kvs
H
H
A
B
1/2 140.00 80.00 89.00 58.00 2.40 770 977
3/4 160.00 90.00 89.00 58.00 3.10 771 854
R "
1 180.00 100.00 111.00 64.00 5.80 771 855
1 1/4 200.00 105.00 111.00 64.00 5.90 771 856
h
1 1/2 225.00 130.00 173.00 126.00 12.60 771 857
2 255.00 140.00 173.00 126.00 12.00 771 858
B
Spare parts Version III

Spare parts
Item no.
Valve insert 772 210

1/2" and 3/4"
1" and 1 1/4"
1 1/2" and 2"
Replacement strainer 772 213
1/2" and 3/4"
1" and 1 1/4"
1 1/2" and 2"
Tool for releasing 772 217
Version IV
(plastic body, with threaded ports G 1/8 and G 1/4)
X
operating
threaded
pressure
Item no.
[bar] 1)
port
LTA
G 1/8 0–4 783 256

0–8 783 257
0–12 783 258

G 1/4 0–4 783 259

0–8 783 260
0–12 783 261

The pressure regulator version III have a

1)
Pressure values [bar]: Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure pressure gauge G 1/8 for measuring the

output pressure.
To find your nearest Bürkert office, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alterations

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 1503/3_EU-en_00895122
p. 4/4
Hydraulic characteristics
1 Flow velocity diagram
The steps to take for selecting the correct size are as follows:
V (m/s)
5 · The total flow rate is calculated from the number and type
4 of appliances present by taking the sum of the individual
3 flow rates.
2
Example:
1
One living unit with 1 bathroom
1 bidet G = 6 l/min
1/2” 3/4” 1 shower G = 9 l/min
0,5
1 wash basin G = 6 l/min
0,4
1 wc with cistern G = 6 l/min
0,3
1 kitchen sink G = 12 l/min
0,2 1 washing machine G = 12 l/min
Gtot = 51 l/min
0,1
No appliances = 6
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
5
10
20
50
100
· The design flow rate is calculated from the table of

coefficients of simultaneity (using that for 10 appliances).
2 Pressure drop diagram
∆p (bar) ∆p (m w.g.) Example:
1,5 15
1,2 12 Gds = Gtot · % = 51 · 41 % = 21 l/min

1 10
0,9 9
0,8 8
0,7 7
0,6 6 It is recommended that flow velocity is kept within 1 to 2
0,5 5
metres per second when calculating the correct reducer
0,4 4
1/2” 3/4”
size. This will prevent noise in the pipes and rapid wear of
0,3 3 appliances.
0,2 2 · The correct diameter of the reducing valve is taken from

diagram 1 on the basis of the design flow rate taking into
account an ideal flow velocity of between 1 and 2 m/s
0,1 1 (blue band).
0,2
0,5
(l/min) (m3/h)
1
10
Flow rate
Example:
5
10
20
50
100
for Gds = 21 l/min select diameter 1/2”

Under the following conditions Inlet pressure = 6 bar
(see indications on diagram 1)
Outlet pressure = 4 bar
· The pressure drop is taken from diagram 2 again on the

Sizing the valve basis of where the design flow rate intersects the curve for
the relative diameter already selected (the downstream
The flow rates of commonly used appliances in domestic pressure falls by an amount equal to the pressure drop, with
plumbing systems are given below to assist in the selection respect to the set pressure at no flow condition).
of the correct valve diameter:
Table of typical flow rates Example:
Bath tub, kitchen sink, dishwashing machine 12 l/min for Gds = 21 l/min 1/2” ∆p = 0,8 bar
Shower 9 l/min (see indications on diagram 2)
Wash basin, bidet, washing machine, w.c. with cistern 6 l/min
Recommended flow rates

The coefficient of simultaneous use must be taken into
For an average flow velocity of 1,5 m/s, the recommended
consideration to avoid selecting a valve that is too large.
flow rates for each diameter are as follows:
Basically the fewer the people using the system the lower the
probability will be of two appliances being used at the same
time. Diameter 1/2” Ø 15 3/4” Ø 22
Flow rate m3/h 1,2 1,2 2,1 2,1
Table showing simultaneos-use factor as % Flow rate l/min 20 20 35 35
Number of Residential Community Number of Residential Community Number of Residential Community
appliances appliances appliances
5 54 64,5 35 23,2 30 80 16,5 22

10 41 49,5 40 21,5 28 90 16 21,5
15 35 43,5 45 20,5 27 100 15,5 20,5
20 29 37 50 19,5 26 150 14 18,5
25 27,5 34,5 60 18 24 200 13 17,5
30 24,5 32 70 17 23 300 12,5 16,5
Intended use
The user must comply with the information in these operating instruc- Safety instructions
tions to ensure that the device functions perfectly and safely and has  Do not operate the block without first releasing the manual con-
a long service life and must observe the operating conditions and trols of the valves, otherwise the coils may burn out!
permitted data according to the data sheet and rating plate. The gen-  Never exceed the maximum media input pressure; otherwise
eral rules of technology must be observed for application planning and there is a danger of bursting!
operation of the device. Unintentional actuation or unacceptable im-  Do not install the valve block in a twisted position, as this may
pairments must be prevented by taking suitable measures. result in mechanical stress and impairment of the block function!
 Observe the specified screw tightening torques when changing
Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may work spare parts.
on the block.  Caution risk of hot surfaces! The solenoid drives may become
very hot during prolonged operation.
Operating principle of the single valves
A 2/2-way solenoid valve,  The electrical connection is made with device sockets using pre-
pilot-controlled, assembled cables (cable length 1.60 m).
A closed when de-energized (NC)  Make the correct connections and carefully connect the ground
wires.
 Ensure that the flat seal is correctly fitted between the coil and
Structure device socket! The tightening torque for fastening screws of the
The valve block consists of a brass block, two or three valves of Type device socket is 1 Nm.
5281 with manual control, a pressure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) as well as a pressure gauge. Valve V1 is used – if fitted - Start-up/pressure setting
as a safety valve at the input and conveys the medium into the pres-  Before starting up the electrical system, release all manual con-
sure controller. Ball valve, hose and dirt trap form one module which trols on the valves.
can be rotated by 180° if required and therefore allows media connec-  Build up the media pressure. During the initial start-up the pres-
tion from the opposite side. sure gauge indicates 6 bar (factory setting).
The valve seats are integrated in the block. The block operates in  Set the required pressure using the set-point value screw A/F7
such a way that each valve output is supplied in parallel operation with on the pressure controller. The set pressure is indicated on the
the same water current. The volume of water flowing through the pressure gauge.
valves can be adjusted using the set-point value of the pressure con-  Apply the operating voltage and start the process.
troller. The pressure gauge indicates the set pressure.
If faults occur
Technical data  Check electrical connections, operating voltage, wire connec-
Also observe the specifications on the rating plate! tions, operating pressure and installation and rectify any errors.
Medium Water  If the valve still does not switch, please contact your Bürkert
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C Service representative.
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C
Operating voltage of valves 24 V DC
Nominal power of valves 8 W per valve Components / wire connections
Orifice of valves DN 13
Media input pressure max. 10 bar
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar
Kv value water valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
Housing and seal materials

Valve block Brass
Coil jacket Polyamide
Core guide pipe Stainless steel
Seal material EPDM / alternatively FKM
Line connections Input E: G 3/4; inside
Output A1: M22x1.5; outside
Output A2: M14x1.5; outside
Installation
 Check that the operating conditions comply with the performance
data of the block! E G 3/4; inside SW7 hexagon head A/F7
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de- A1 M22x1.5; outside for setting the
energized and depressurized! A2 M14x1.5; outside set-point pressure
 Before installing the block, clean the line connections and the V1 optional cover plate value
ends of the hose! or safety valve MS 2 mounting screws
(cover plate here) M8x50 with 6 mm
 The installation position is freely selectable.
Recommendation: Solenoid drives of the dosing valves face up. V2, V3 dosing valves Hexagon socket
VS lock screw
 Attach the block by screwing two hexagonal socket head screws
for sieve
M8x50 through the designated 9 mm holes.
 Connect the outputs. Ensure that the connection points are tight.
Caution! Bürkert Werke GmbH Bürkert Werke GmbH

To open the full valve cross-section, a differential pressure of 0.5 bar Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17 Christian-Bürkert-Str. 2
is required. The minimum pressure at the system input is D 74653 Ingelfingen D 01900 Großröhrsdorf
1 bar. Tel. +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-111 Tel. +49 (0)5952 / 36-300
Fax +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-448 Fax +49 (0)5952 / 36-551
info@de.buerkert.com info@de.buerkert.com
http://www.buerkert.com http://www.buerkert.com
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 1 of 3
Spare parts
Item Designation Order no.  Check the O-ring (22x2.5 mm) for damage. An undamaged O-
1 Pressure controller installation set 788 692 ring can be reused. A defective O-ring must be replaced (see
2 Ball valve G 3/4 inside/inside 781 755 spare parts).
3 Pressure gauge 787 035  Moisten the O-ring before installation and ensure that the O-ring
4 Filter sieve VA; 0.25 mm 788 812 is fitted properly during installation.
5.1 O-ring on filter lock screw – EPDM 9353 4827 Caution! Do not use any oil or grease!
5.2 O-ring on filter lock screw – FKM 902 478  Place the sieve unit - now offset by 180° - on the housing so that
6.1 O-ring on sieve unit – EPDM 786 525 the locking pin fits into the guide hole in the housing.
6.2 O-ring on sieve unit – FKM 790 667  Fix the sieve unit using the 2 fastening screws and washers.
7.1 Coil set 126 434  Tighten the fastening screws (see figure for “torques”).
7.2 Coil set – EEx 133 547  Reconnect the pressure and power.
8.1 Valve actuator – EPDM 145 458
8.2 Valve actuator – FKM 143 574 Sieve unit:
9.1 Wearing parts set – EPDM 624 014
9.2 Wearing parts set – FKM 624 019
10.1 Core, complete – EPDM 631 964
10.2 Core, complete – FKM 606 396
11 Device socket, assembled for V3 786 346
14 Both ends of hose fitted with union nut M30x2 786 122
Locking pin in first hole
Conversion and repair work (ex works)
Safety instructions second hole for locking pin (for 180° rotation)
 Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may
work on the block.
 Before starting work, order the required spare parts according to Changing the filter sieve (see figure of valve block 2)
the order table. If the filter sieve is very dirty, it should be cleaned or changed.
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de-
energized and depressurized! Valve block 2:
Rotating the sieve unit by 180° (conversion)

If required, the sieve unit can be rotated by 180° so that the input ball
valve is offset from the factory setting by exactly 180° (see diagram of
valve block 1).
 De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Loosen both fastening screws on the sieve unit (hexagon socket
5 mm).
 Remove the sieve unit from the locking pin (pin is tight, therefore
a little stiff).
 Remove the locking pin form the first guide hole in the sieve unit
(see figure of the “sieve unit”).
 Insert the locking pin into the second guide hole in the sieve unit.
Valve block 1:
Copper collar on the sieve O-ring Lock screw
 Have a new filter sieve ready.

 Loosen the lock screw on the filter unit (A/F 22).
 Remove the filter sieve.
 Assess whether the sieve should be cleaned or replaced.
 Re-insert the cleaned or new sieve in the correct position (cop-
per collar inwards).
 Screw the lock screw hand-tight to form a good seal. The O-ring
on the lock screw acts as the sealing element.
 Reconnect the pressure and power.
Fastening screws on the

sieve unit
(Hexagon socket 5 mm)
Locking pin O-ring
Changing the pressure gauge and ball valve Changing a pilot control diaphragm in the valve
The pressure gauge and the manual ball valve are screwed in with (see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
thread sealant (Loctite 542 or 577). The diaphragm is an important element for pilot control of the valve.
 Use the square head or hexagon head on the components to The diaphragm is subject to natural wear.
screw them out and in. Change the diaphragm as follows.
 Before screwing in the parts, place a little Loctite 542 or 577 on  Have a new diaphragm ready.
the thread and screw in the parts to form a good seal.  De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Mark the mounting position of the actuator with respect to the
housing.
Spare parts sets for the valve Type 5281  Loosen the fastening screws (tool Tx20) between actuator and
housing.
 Remove the valve actuator.
 Note the installation position and remove the diaphragm.
 If required, clean the valve housing.
Coil set  Insert the new diaphragm into the housing collar in the correct
SET1 position so that the middle plate of the diaphragm with the larger
diameter is visible.
 Place the valve actuator in the correct position.
 Attach the actuator and tighten the 4 screws crosswise (see
figure for “torques”).
Valve actuator
Screw tightening torques:
Core, complete
Wearing parts set

SET3
(parts list changed for
DN13
Changing a valve core

(see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
A complete core set consists of an iron core with a seal and a spring.
In particular, the valve seal is subject to natural wear. If a closed valve
is leaking, the core should be changed as follows.
 Have a new complete core ready.
 Loosen the fastening screw on the device socket and remove
the device socket.
 Loosen the fastening nut on the coil (A/F 14) and remove the
coil.
 Remove the plastic cover.
 Loosen the 4 fastening screws (tool Tx20). Note the local as-
signment of the screws which vary in length.
 Remove the core feed pipe upwards and use your other hand to
prevent the core from falling.
 If required, clean the inner parts of the valve.
 Insert the new core into the cleaned core feed pipe so that the
seat seal is visible.
 Place the core with the core feed pipe in the correct position on
the valve seat and hold the components with one hand.
 With the other hand, attach the core feed pipe using the fas-
tening screws. In doing so, ensure that the long and short fas-
tening screws are in the correct position.
 Tighten the fastening screws crosswise (see figure for “torques”).
 Attach the plastic cover so that one of the recesses is located
above the manual control.
 Place the coil in the correct position. Ensure that the coil locks
every 90° and can otherwise be placed in any position.
 Screw the fastening nut onto the coil (see figure for “torques”).
Rückschlagventile DEUTSCH
check valves
ENGLISH
Original Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Translation of the original installation and
maintenance manual
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
BW-RVA
©2005 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Vlotho
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder
weitere Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme
verarbeitet, vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. It is
not allowed to change or duplicate even parts of it without written permission.
Änderungen sind vorbehalten.

Errors excepted regarding print and technical changes.
Auflage: September 2014, Revision 1

Edition: September 2014, Revision 1
Anfragen richten Sie bitte schriftlich an:
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
- DE 2 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Sicherheitshinweise
Sicherheitshinweise für die Montage und Inbetriebnahme: Die Inbetriebnahme der Armatur darf erst
erfolgen, wenn die Bestimmungen der MRL 2006/42/EG für die Gesamtmaschine erfüllt sind.
Alle Montage-, Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten an den Armaturen dürfen nur von autorisiertem und
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Eigenmächtige Veränderungen sowie die Verwendung von nicht Originalersatzteilen schließen eine
Haftung für die daraus resultierenden Schäden aus.
Nationale Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung sowie ortsgebundene Sicherheitsvorschriften des

Betreibers werden durch diese Betriebsanleitung nicht ersetzt und sind in jedem Fall als vorrangig zu
betrachten.
Es darf keine Armatur betrieben werden, deren zugelassene Druck-/Temperaturgrenzen und

Medienbeständigkeit für die Betriebsbedingungen nicht ausreichen.
Wenn eine Armatur aus einer Rohrleitung ausgebaut werden muss, kann Medium aus der Leitung
oder aus der Armatur austreten. Bei gesundheitsschädlichen oder gefährlichen Medien muss die
Rohrleitung vollständig entleert sein, bevor die Armatur ausgebaut wird. Vorsicht bei Rückständen,
die nachfließen könnten.
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Alle Arbeiten dürfen nur an einer drucklos und stromlos geschalteten Armatur erfolgen.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Die Spannungsversorgung muss bauseits durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen!
Verletzungsgefahr! Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Armatur kann zu

Durch Rückstände des Betriebsmediums können Gefahren entstehen, gegebenenfalls

Sicherheitshandschuhe, Schutzbrille etc. tragen.
- DE 3-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Sicherheitshinweise..........................................................................................................................................3
Inhaltsverzeichnis .............................................................................................................................................4
Zu dieser Anleitung...........................................................................................................................................5
Ziel der Anleitung ............................................................................................................................................5
Aktuelle Dokumentation ..................................................................................................................................5
Gültigkeit der Anleitung...................................................................................................................................5
Abkürzungen und Symbole.............................................................................................................................5
Leistungsbeschreibung....................................................................................................................................6
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ................................................................................................................6
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ...................................................................................................................6
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen.....................................................................................................................6
Gerätebeschreibung .........................................................................................................................................7
Wartung .............................................................................................................................................................7
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ....................................................................................................................................8
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Rückschlagventils mit Gewindeanschluss ..........................................8
- DE 4 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten.
Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass
bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden
können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation
MIT erklärt die Konformität gemäß Konformitätserklärung. Die Konformitätserklärung kann bei
Bedarf angefordert werden.
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de abrufen.
Gültigkeit der Anleitung
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
- DE 5-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Rückschlagventile der Baureihe RVA (Artikel 114266) der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH
& Co. KG sind zum Einsatz im industriellen Bereich geeignet. Die Armaturen ermöglichen das
Absperren neutraler, gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien
müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr! Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Armatur kann zu

MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder
Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu
entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei untergebracht
werden. Lange Lagerzeiten können eine Erhöhung des Losbrechmomentes zu Folge haben. Erst
nach Betätigung der Armatur wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen
eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine
Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind
unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt.
Das Verpackungsmaterial und die Armatur sind nach den örtlichen gesetzlichen Bestimmungen
und Verordnungen sachgerecht zu entsorgen. Auf die Beachtung der abfallrechtlichen
Bestimmungen bei der Entsorgung der aus der Anlage entnommenen Stoffe wird hingewiesen.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült werden.
Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese
Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden.
Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden. Die Endlagen
(offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter
oder andere elektrische Geräte zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung
überprüfen!
- DE 6 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Gerätebeschreibung
Wartung
Diese Rückschlagventile sind wartungsfrei.
Wir empfehlen ihnen, bei einem defekten einteiligen Rückschlagventil die ganze Armatur
auszutauschen!
- DE 7-
DEUTSCH BW-RVA
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Rückschlagventils mit Gewindeanschluss
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen!
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Geeignetes Dichtmaterial an den Rohrleitungsenden

anbringen, bei PTFE-Band oder Hanfdichtungen die
Einschraubrichtung beachten.
Nur dem Einsatzzweck entsprechende Dichtmaterialien
verwenden.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet
ist!
Rückschlagventil in die Rohrleitung einschrauben, dabei auf die Durchflussrichtung des Mediums
achten!
Aushärtezeit des Dichtmaterials abwarten, erst dann die Rohrleitung mit Druck beaufschlagen.
- DE 8 -
BW-RVA DEUTSCH
Kontakt:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- DE 9-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for assembly and initiation: The initiation of the valve is unauthorized until it
complies with the conditions of the machinery directive 2006/42/EC.
Assembly, maintenance and repairing of the valves are allowed for authorised and qualified
professionals only.
Modifications of the valve and the use of non-authorized spare parts exclude the liability of resulting
damage.
National directives for the prevention of accidents as well as local safety instructions of the user are
paramount and are not replaced by this document.
It is not allowed to use the valves, if the operating conditions do not match the pressure-temperature-
diagram and the medium resistance.
If you demount a valve in a piping, medium may drop out. Therefore, if the medium is hazardous to
health, the piping must be emptied completely. Be careful with residues that may flow out later.
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Installation in unpressurized and non-energized state only!
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing
medium!
The power supply must be done on site by a qualified electrician!
Danger of injury! Do not put parts of your body or other things into the valves. This can cause
Residue of the operating medium may cause danger. If necessary wear safety shoes, gloves and
glasses.
- EN 10 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Content
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual............................................................... 10
Safety instructions .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Content ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
This manual ..................................................................................................................................................... 12
Intention of this manual................................................................................................................................. 12
Latest documentation ................................................................................................................................... 12
Validity of the manual ................................................................................................................................... 12
Shortcuts and symbols ................................................................................................................................. 12
Specification of service .................................................................................................................................. 13
Intended usage ............................................................................................................................................. 13
Storage, transport, disposal .......................................................................................................................... 13
Terms of general application ........................................................................................................................ 13
Device description .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 14
Activity description ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Installation of a check valve with threaded connection ................................................................................. 15
EN 11-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve.

This manual is for skilled employees. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
terminology and that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at MIT!
Latest documentation on the internet
MIT declares the conformity with a declaration of conformity. Please order it if required.
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited and
represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. at the time
of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
Validity of the manual
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG declares that it reserves its right to modify both
the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
- EN 12 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Intended usage
The check valves of the series RVA (article 114266) made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH & Co. KG are suitable for the producing industries. The armatures allow the distribution of
neutral gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds must be suitable for the
assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! Don´t put parts of your body or articles into the armature. This can cause
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. We
recommend removing the packing only briefly before beginning of assembly in order to protect
the devices against impurities.
During storage it is to be made certain that the devices are dry and dirt-free accommodated.
After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. After opening and closing the
valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform us
immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical parameters
and a visual product check should take place immediately after delivery. Subsequent complains
can not be accepted.
The packaging material and the valve need to be properly disposed of according to the local legal
requirements and regulations.
Please consider the waste legislation requirements for the disposal of substances withdrawn from
the system.
Goods faults or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest 7 days on receipt of
the product in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim expires!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the piping. Automated valves need a special attention in
time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop conditions.
Security positions should be simulated and tested straight. The final positions must be checked
(opened/closed) and be re-adjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to
the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment.
EN 13-
ENGLISH BW-RVA
Device description
Maintenance
These check valves are maintenance-free.
In case of a defective check valve we recommend the substitution of the valve.
- EN 14 -
BW-RVA ENGLISH
Activity description
Installation of a check valve with threaded connection
Installation in unpressurized and non-energized state only!
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Attach suitable sealing compounds to the pipe ends, if you use

PTFE tape or hemp seals follow the direction of thread.
Make sure the used sealing compound is suitable for the
application conditions.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suitable for the flowing
medium!
Screw pipe ends into the threaded ends of the check valve, pay attention to the flow direction of
the medium.
Do not give pressure on the piping before the sealing material is hardened.
EN 15-
BW-RVA
Contact:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- EN 16 -
Mounting and Operating Manual
Non-Return valves
Swing-Check valves

Impressum
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded, reproduced nor passed to third parties without the writ-
ten agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the non-return valves / swing check valves
at any time without prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change
without notice.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.

Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 80
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 11/02
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General Advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Guarantee 5
3 Safety Advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves 11

5.1 General 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassemble 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 12
5.4.2.1 Disassemble of the bonnet and the inner parts 13
5.4.2.2 Welding the body between pipes 13
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts 14
5.4.3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection 15
5.5 Maintenance 15
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the non-return valves /
swing-check valves rapidly and correctly.
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the non-return valves
/ swing-check valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the non-return valves / swing-check valves we shall be
pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
General Advice
2 General Advice
2.1 Validity
This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the non-return valves /
swing-check valves and their variants.
Please check directly after delivery the non-return valves /swing-check valves for any transport
damages and deficiencies and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of
parts.
2.3 Complaints

2.4 Warranty
For our non-return valves / swing-check valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with
the sales contract.
Symbols and their signification
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Safety Advice
3 Safety Advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the non-return valves
/ swing-check valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account par-
ticular safety aspects in each case!
If, for example, a non-return valve / swing-check valve works a slide in an operational chemical
plant, the potential hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only
being carried out for test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!

3.1 Personal advice
and electrical installation of the butterfly valves must be carried out by trained specialist person-
nel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directive after the mounting and
installing of the ball valves.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform
the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order,
for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time
by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
machines / plant.
As a result of the starting of the non-return valves / swing-check valves the flow of gases, steam,
liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the starting or the
test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the environment!
Safety Advice
of the non-return valve / swing-check valve.
Check, whether the armature will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate limit
stop!
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switches on ball valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit switches)
there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the non-return vales / swing check valves will be
under pressure.
Before disassembling the armature some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the non-return valves / swing-check valves to be disassembled be replaced by
another immediately?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly?
You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted.

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the armature is
mounted
In case of defect in the non-return vales / swing check valves make contact to the supplier. The
telephone number will be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the non-return vales / swing check valves, isolate the device from
the mains. Please observe the safety advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the non-return vales / swing check valves if itself, the pipes or a
mounted actuator will be damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales / swing check
valves and the tightness of the pipe connections.
3.2 Device safety
The non-return valves / swing-check valves

regulations.
precision .
Satisfy yourself that the non-return vales /swing check valves will only be used within their
admissible limiting value (see the technical data) .
The non-return vales / swing check valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their
construction!
The non-return vales / swing check valves must be used within the values specified in the techni-
cal data!
The operating of the non-return vales / swing check valves outside the nominal temperature
range could destroy the seals and the bearings.
The operating of the non-return vales / swing check valves outside the nominal pressure range
could destroy the inner parts and the body.
Do not mount, start or adjust the non-return vales / swing check valves if itself, the pipes or a
mounted actuator will be damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the non-return vales / swing check
valves and the tightness of the pipe connections.
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a nameplate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed.
END-Armaturen
END-ArmaturenGmbH GmbH & Co. KG KG
& Co.
D-32547
D-32547BadBadOeynhausen
Oeynhausen
+49
+49(0)5731
(0)5731- 7900-0 • www.end.de
- 7900-0 www.end.de
Art.Nr.:
Art.Nr.: ZA310028-ED620632
ZA310028-ED620632
Serial: 313857
Serie: ARMAU813857
Pressure range (PS): 16 bar
Betriebsdruck (PS): 16 bar
Pilot pressure:
Steuerdruck:
6-8
6...8 bar G/DN: 2”
bar
Temperature
Volt: rangeHz:(TS): -30°C ... +180°C
Fluidgruppe 1
Size (DN):
Temperatur (TS): -30...+180°C 50 / G2"
Testing pressure
Prüfdruck (PT): (PT):
60 bar 60 bar
Herstellungsdatum:
Fluidgroup: 25.11.2009 1 0062
Date of manufacturing: 11.2002
0062
Fig. 4.1 - name-plate
Art.No. article number of the valve / armature

Serial order- or production- number
Pressure range (PS) max. admissible working pressure of the valve / armature [bar]
Pilot pressure recommend pilot pressure for correct function of the valve / armature [bar]
(only at pneumatic actuated valves / armatures)
Size (DN) connecting size of the valve / armature
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature
Fluidgroup allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature
Date of manufacturing month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature
Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
5 Non-Return valves, Swing-Check valves
5.1 General
Before you mount /disassemble, adjust or commission a non-return valve or a swing-check valve
you must have read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now please read these important advices now and
turn back to this point.
Non-return valves and swing-check valves are used to prevent the back-flow of media.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the valves and the material
of the sealings will be resistant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the
nominal temperature range should causes damages on the valves especially on the seals.
5.3 Operation
Non-return valves and swing-check vales need no special operation .
5.4 Mounting / Disassemble
The mechanical mounting is identical in all variants. It differs only by the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction which is specified on the valve body. The installation of a swing-check
valves will have take place that the flap of the swing-check valve will close by the force of gravity
automatically.
Please observe that that the installation of the swing-check valve / non-return valve will have influ-
ence on the opening pressure.
Remove all transport safety devices (e.g. plugs or caps). Observe that there won`t be any parts of
the package or other pollution in the armature.
Before mounting swing-check valve / non-return valve clean up the pipes. Pollution will reduce the
safety and the duration of life of the armature.
o.k. o.k.
Fig. 5.1 - non-return valve, swing-check valve, installation (Fig.: Art. TR100025).
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp seals
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
sealing compound
harden!
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.2 - non-return valves, swing-check valves, mounting with threaded connection (Fig.: Art. BH120025)
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
Before welding the valve between the pipes you have to disassemble the bonnet of the non-return
valve first, to prevent the damage of the seals.
Non-Return valves, Swing-check valve
5.4.2.1 Disassemble of the bonnet and the inner parts
Clamp the valve between a vice carefully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of
the ends of the valve body.
Loosen the bonnet with a fit spanner.
Screw the bonnet out of the body. By doing this be very careful, because there will be a resilience
on the bonnet. Take the spring and the inner part out of the bonnet and put the parts aside.
resilience
Fig. 5.3 - non-return valves, swing check valve, disassembly of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.: Art. EB310064)
5.4.2.2 Welding the body between pipes
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands be welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts in a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate inform the shift foreman / safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and the prevention of accidents.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - non-return valves, swing-check valves, welding of the body (Fig.: body of Art. EB310064)
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts
Before mounting the bonnet and the inner parts let the body cool down.
Insert the inner parts and the spring into the body. Take care about the correct placement of the
inner parts and the spring.
Screw the bonnet into the body. Check the correct position of the sealing at the bonnet and take
care that there will be no pollution on the sealing or on the seat.
Tighten the bonnet with a fit spanner.
cool down
o.k.
Fig. 5.5 - non-return valve, swing-check valve, mounting of the bonnet and the inner parts (Fig.: Art. EB310064)
5.4.3 Mounting of the valve with flanged connection
In the following description we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down..
Push the valve between the flanges by using the appropriate seals. This process must happen
easily to avoid the damage of the seals.
Align the borings of the flanges and put some fit screws through the holes. Screw the fit nuts onto
the screws and tighten them up crosswise.
Fasten all screws crosswise and check the function of the valve. Observe the maximum torque of
the screws.
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.6 - non-return valves, swing-check valve, mounting with flanged connection (Fig.: Art. KU3000xx)
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down a non-return valve / swing-check valve you have to read the
Safety advice
to this page.
Non-return valves need on maintenance
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
Notice
Notice
6 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(1)
(2)
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"

Germany
(7) Noti¿ed body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8) Certi¿cate numbers: Quality Management System: INT110198DE

Certi¿cate of System approval PED: 2011/70.10.1777/P
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 07. July 2011

END-Armaturen Gm . 78
Oberbecksener Str en · Germany
32547 Bad Oeynhaus 1 - 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)573· post@end.de
http://www.end.de

(1)
(2)
Gate valves BT ½" ... 1" VN ¼" ... 1" CK3003 DN15 ... DN50
AA ½" ... 2" BV ¼“ ... ¾“ VO DN25 CK5000 DN40 ... DN250
AB ¼" ... 1" CB ¼" ... 2½" VS DN15 ... DN25 CK5003 DN40 ... DN25
AC ǩ" ... 2" CO-CO ½" ... 2" VT DN15 ... DN25 CK5100 DN40 ... DN50
AD ½" ... 2" HF ¼" ... 1" ZA ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 CK5200 DN40 ... DN50
AE ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 HO DN10 ... DN15 ZB ¼" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 CW5400 DN40 ... DN50
AV ¼" ... 1" IB ¼" ... 2" ZD ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 DR DN50 ... DN300
BE Ǫ" ... 3" IK ¼" ... 1" ZE ¼" ... 1", DN10 ... DN25 EB ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
BF ¼" ... 3" IL ¼" ... 1" ZF ¼" ... 1" MR ¼" ... 3"
BS ½" ... 1¼" IW ¼" ... 1" ZG ¼" ... 1" RG DN15 ... DN25
CA5014 DN40 ... DN80 KA ½" ... 1" ZH ½" ... 1" TD Ǫ" ... 3"
CA5015 DN40 ... DN50 KFE Ǫ" ... ¾" ZK DN15 ... DN25 TG ½" ... 2"
CA5214 DN40 ... DN32 NK Ǫ“ ... 4", DN10 ... DN100 ZL ¼" ... 1" TR Ǫ“ ... 4"
CD5010 DN15 ... DN25 PB ǩ ... 2" ZM ¼" ... 1" VB ¼“ ... 2“
CV3010 DN15 ... DN25 PD ½" ... 1" ZP DN15 ... DN25 ZR DN15 ... DN200
CV5010 DN15 ... DN25 SK ½" ... 3", DN10 ... DN80 ZU ¼" ... 1" Sight glasses
CV5020 DN15 ... DN25 TB ¼" ... 1" Pipe fittings SG ¼" ... 2", DN15 ... DN150
IC ¼" ... 4" TE ½" ... 2" FG ǩ" ... 4" Strainer
MV ½" TF DN20 ... DN25 FS DN15 ... DN150 AS ¼“ ... 1“
TC ¼" ... 4" TH ½" ... 1" GE Ø6 ... Ø20 AS DN15 ... DN25
Pressure reducer TT Ǫ" ... 1" GR Ø8 ... Ø28 BG Ǫ" ... 2"
ID Ǫ" ... ¾" TV Ǫ" ... 1" GV Ø6 ... Ø20 CU DN15 ... DN250
MB ½" ... 2" VD ¼" ... 1" TE Ø6 ... Ø25 EA ½" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25
MC ½" ... 2" VD DN10 ... DN25 TV Ø6 ... Ø20 IG ¼" ... 4"
Pressure relief valves VE ¼" ... 1" WE Ø6 ... Ø38 KU DN15 ... DN100
NG Ǫ" ... 1", DN15 ... DN25 VF ǩ“ ... ½" WV Ø6 ... Ø20 Water-shock damper
Ball valves VH ǩ“ ... 1" Non-return valves TS ½"
AG ¼" ... 1" VH3100 ½" ... 1" AH ¼" ... 1½"
BC ǩ“ ... ¾" VK DN15 ... DN25 AR ½" ... 1"
BK DN15 ... DN25 VL ¼" ... 1" BH Ǫ" ... 3"

Germany
tions of Article 3 Part 3 of the directive 97/23/EG. These products bear no CE mark, but are in line to the good engineering
practice designed and manufactured.

ren GmbH & Co. KG
END-Armatu . 78
Oberbecksener Str en · Germany
(7) On behalf 32547 Bad Oeynhaus 1 - 7900-0
Bad Oeynhausen, 04. July 2011
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)573· post@end.de
http://www.end.de


watergates
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Artikel:
BAUFORM DESIGN MR
1-teilige Körperkonstruktion Body consists of one part
Universal-
ANSCHLUSS CONNECTION
Innengewinde: 1/4" bis 4" nach ISO 228 Female thread 1/4" up to 4" acc. to ISO 228 Rückschlagventil
PN 16
EINBAULAGE MOUNTING POSITION
Beliebig, vorzugsweise für waagerechten Al desired, preferably for horizontal or vertical
oder senkrechten Einbau. Durchflußrichtung mounting. Please refer to flow direction.
beachten. Edelstahl
MEDIUMDRUCK PRESSURE RANGE

max. PN 16 max. PN 16 (232 psi)
ZULÄSSIGE MEDIEN MEDIA

Gase der Fluidgruppe 1*: bis DN25 gases of fluid group 1*: bis DN25
Gase der Fluidgruppe 2*: bis DN50 *
Flussigkeiten der Fluidgruppe 1*: bis DN100
gases of fluid group 2*: bis DN50
liquids of fluid group 1*: bis DN100
*
Flussigkeiten der Fluidgruppe 2*: bis DN100 liquids of fluid group 2*: bis DN100
*: Fluidgruppen gemäß DRL97/23/EG *: fluid group acc. to Directive 97/23/EC
* Bei gasförmigen Medien darf der Einsatz * At gaseous media the use of the valve
des Ventils nur nach Rücksprache should only take place on request.
erfolgen
ÖFFNUNGSDRUCK OPENING PRESSURE

siehe Tabelle see table overleave
TEMPERATUR TEMPERATURE RANGE

-20°C bis max. +150°C, -20°C up to max. +150°C, Type:
gilt für neutrale flüssige Medien for neutral and liquid media
MR
WERKSTOFFE MATERIAL
Gehäuse: • Edelstahl 1.4301 Body: • Stainless steel 1.4301 Universal
• Edelstahl 1.4401 • Stainless steel 1.4401 check valve
Feder: Edelstahl 1.4310 Spring: Stainless steel 1.4310
Ventilteller: • Edelstahl 1.4301 Valve disc: • Stainless steel 1.4301 PN 16
• Edelstahl 1.4401 • Stainless steel 1.4401
Dichtung: FKM Seals: FKM
Stainless Steel
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-MR-1/5 07.09.2011 - Änderungen: Hinweis Gase eingefügt
ZUSATZAUSSTATTUNG OPTIONS
Saugkorb Filter
change any data herein without prior notice!
Art. MR - Seite 1/5

Artikel- u. Bestellangaben: z.B. MR330025
= Universal-Rückschlagventil, Edelstahl, Dichtung FKM, G 1"
1.+ 2. Stelle 3.+ 4. Stelle 5. Stelle 6. Stelle 7.+ 8. Stelle 9.+ 12. Stelle
Produkt Werkstoffe Betätigung Zusatzausstattung Anschlußgröße Gehäusevariante
Gehäuse / Dichtung (optional)
1
MR = 33 = 0 = ohne 0 = ohne 21 = /4" /316 =
3
Universal- Edelstahl 1.4301 / 22 = /8" Edelstahl 1.4401
1
Rückschlagventil FKM 23 = /2"
3
24 = /4"
25 = 1"
26 = 11/4"
27 = 11/2"
28 = 2"
29 = 21/2"
30 = 3"
31 = 4"
Ordering example: e.G. MR330025

= Universal check valve, Stainless steel, FKM-sealing, G 1"
1.+ 2. Digit 3.+ 4. Digit 5. Digit 6. Digit 7.+ 8. Digit 9.+ 12. Digit
Product Material Operation Option Connection size Body version
Body / Seal (optional)
1
MR = 33 = 0 = without 0 = without 21 = /4" /316 =
Universal Stainless steel 22 = 3
/8" Stainless steel
check valve 1.4301 / FKM 23 = 1
/2" 1.4401
3
24 = /4"
25 = 1"
26 = 11/4"
27 = 11/2"
28 = 2"
29 = 21/2"
30 = 3"
31 = 4"
Abmessungen / Dimensions
(
'
"
1 3 1 3
G /4 /8 /2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4
øB 32 32 32 44 53 62 78 89 113 132 167
H 55 55 55 69 84 99 116 121 143 164 191
kg 0,125 0,115 0,095 0,129 0,191 0,281 0,388 0,704 1,425 2,085 3,415
Öffnungsdruck /
0,025 0,025 0,025 0,03 0,03 0,03 0,03 0,03 0,03 0,03 0,03
Action pressure [bar]
Art. MR - Seite 2/5

Stückliste / Parts list
4 1 4
1
5 5
2 2
6 6
3 3
1 7 1 7
1
/4" - 3/8" 1
/2"

1 Anschlußende Connection end Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
2 Gehäuse Body Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
3 Dichtungsteller Seal disc Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
4 Führungsring Guide ring PTFE PTFE
5 Zentrierscheibe Bush support Edelstahl 1.4401 Stainless steel 1.4401 (AISI 316)
6 Feder Spring Edelstahl 1.4310 Stainless steel 1.4310 (AISI 316)
7 Dichtung Seal FKM FKM
1 4
1
2 6
6
2
3 7
7
3
9
10
8
4
11
8
9
5
5 12
3
/4" - 2" 21/2" - 4"

2 Gehäuse Body Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
3 Führungsring Guide ring PTFE PTFE
4 Zentrierscheibe Guide bush Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
6 Feder Spring Edelstahl 1.4310 Stainless steel 1.4310 (AISI 316)
7 Dichtungsteller Seal disc Edelstahl 1.4401 Stainless steel 1.4401 (AISI 316)
8 Dichtungssitz Valve seat Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
9 Dichtung Seal FPM FPM
10 Dichtungshalter Seal einr retainer Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
11 Gehäuseträger Seal housing support Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
12 Gehäuseverschluß Outlet side guide Edelstahl 1.4301 Stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
Art. MR - Seite 3/5

Druckverlust (Wasser 15°C) / pressure losses (water at 15°C)
H H
(m) (m)
7 7
6 6
5 5
1/4" 3/8"
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
QQ[l/min]
( L/1') Q ( L/1')
Q [l/min]
(m)
H
7
6
5
1/2"
4
3
2
1
0
QQ[l/min]
( L/1')
H H
(m) (m)
8 8
7 7
1" 1"1/4 1"1/2
3/4"
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 Q 100 200 300 400 500 600 QQ
(1 / 1') ( 1 / 1')
[l/min] [l/min]
H H
(m) (m)
8 2"1/2
8 4"
2" 3"
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 QQ 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 Q
Q
(1 / 1') (1 / 1')
[l/min] [l/min]
Hinweis Advice
Bei den in dieser Dokumentation beschrieben Produkten, in der von uns The products descript in this documentation in the conditions of our
gelieferten Form, handelt es sich weder um Maschinen gemäß Artikel 2 delivery are no machinery according to annex 2 paragraph a respectively
Absatz a noch um unvollständige Maschinen gemäß Artikel 2 Absatz g no partly completed machinery according to annex 2 paragraph g of the
im Sinne der Richtlinie 2006/42/EG über Maschinen. directive 2006/42/EC on machinery.
Art. MR - Seite 4/5

Saugkorb / Filter
Saugkorb für Universalrückschlagventil MR Filter for non-return valve MR
WERKSTOFFE Material
Gewindeteil: Edelstahl 1.4301 Threaded part: Stainless steel 1.4301
Filter: Edelstahl 1.4301 Filter: Stainless steel 1.4301
Abmessungen / Dimensions
Art. MD3000 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 3 1 1 1
G /2 /4 1 1 /4 1 /2 2 2 /2 3 4
L 55 60 68 80 90 99 105 124 143
Art. MR - Seite 5/5

1 Content
Sensor Block
2062-8828-000 (HFO/0136)
2062-8828-010 (LO/0196)
- Operating Instructions -
We reserve the right to make technical changes

without notice.
The Declaration of Conformity for the specific device
can be requested from the manufacturer.
1 CONTENT
1 Content ................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2 Operating Instruction / Presentation Symbols .................................................................................................. 1
3 Intended Use ........................................................................................................................................................ 2
4 General Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................................ 2
5 Technical Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
6 Description of the System .................................................................................................................................. 5
6.1 Design and Function.................................................................................................................................... 5
6.2 Circuit Function of Valves ............................................................................................................................ 5
6.3 Fluidic Plan .................................................................................................................................................. 5
6.4 Pin Assignment............................................................................................................................................ 7
7 Mounting and electrical Connection .................................................................................................................. 8
8 Initialization .......................................................................................................................................................... 8
9 Operation / Function............................................................................................................................................ 8
9.1 Function ....................................................................................................................................................... 8
9.2 Sampling ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
10 Maintenance / Troubleshooting / Spare Parts ................................................................................................... 9
10.1 Mounting and Demounting at the System .................................................................................................... 9
10.2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 17
10.3 Spare Parts................................................................................................................................................ 18
10.4 Fastening Torques..................................................................................................................................... 19
11 Packaging / Transport / Storage ....................................................................................................................... 19
12 Shutdown / Disposal ......................................................................................................................................... 20
2 OPERATING INSTRUCTION / PRESENTATION SYMBOLS

WARNING!
The operating instructions contain important safety information!
Ignoring these instructions may result in hazardous situations.
The operating instructions must be read and understood.
Keep these instructions in a location which is accessible to every user and make these instructions available
to every new owner of the device.
A danger symbol indicates:

DANGER (death or serious injury are the result of non-compliance with the safety instructions) or
WARNING (Potentially dangerous situation with serious injuries or death may the result) or
CAUTION (Medium or light injuries may result from non-compliance with the safety instructions)
This symbol indicates:

property damages or
important additional information, tips and recommendations
 Marks a procedure/section you have to carry out.
(BA_Projekt10128_EN_130808.DOC) page 1/20

3 Intended Use
3 INTENDED USE
The device has been designed for the use as a sensor unit for the hood of the separators of the company GEA
Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH. It may only be used in conjunction with such a separator for the
measurement of pressure and conductivity of the media and to control the media streams.
When using the device consider the protection class IP 54, i.e. the device is protected against dust and splash water
from entering inside.
The device must not be exposed to conditions that are contrary to the technical specification.
 Feed no aggressive media into the media connectors of the system except the below mentioned!
 No exposure to unacceptable temperatures, even if not operated!
 Do not physically stress the housing (by placing objects on it or use as a step)!
 Do not close ventilation and leakage slots!
 Do not make any external changes to the device housings!
Do not paint/lacquer the housing parts and screws!
4 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

These safety instructions do not take any incidents and occurrences into account which may occur during assembly,
operation and maintenance of the devices. Also it does not regard for local safety regulations where the operating
party is responsible for its compliance, also regarding to the installation staff.
DANGER!
- because of high pressure!
Before loosening pneumatic lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent the lines
- because of wrong operating voltage!

All components of the sensor block must be operated with 24 V DC!
- Danger of explosion!
When working with oils flammable and explosive gases can be produced. Therefore any manipulation
of the technological course of the process is prohibited!
Consider significant terms and conditions of explosion protection!
WARNING!
- Risk of burning / fire hazard at continuous operation by hot surface of the unit!
Keep the device away of easily combustible material and fluids and do not touch with bare hands!
General Hazardous Situations. To prevent injuries, ensure that:

- the system cannot be activated unintentionally,
- Installation and maintenance work, as well as operator control actions may be carried out by
authorized, qualified technicians only and with the appropriate tools,
- After an interruption in the power supply or fluidic supply, ensure that the process is restarted in a
defined or controlled manner,
- The device may be installed and operated only when in perfect condition and in consideration of the
operating instructions,
- The general rules of technology apply to application planning and operation of the device.
The device was developed with due consideration given to accepted safety rules and is state-of-the-
art. Nevertheless, dangerous situations may occur.
The device may be operated only when in perfect condition and in consideration of the operating
instructions.
Ignoring this operating manual and its operating instructions as well as unauthorized tampering with the
device release us from any liability and also invalidate the warranty covering the devices and
accessories!

5 Technical Data
5 TECHNICAL DATA
Materials
Fluid block AlMgSi1, anodised achromaticly
Housing components Polyamide, glass fiber reinforced - PA6/6T-GF25 - black
Seals/gaskets
Flange to separator 3x O-ring 23x3 (FKM)
Flange solenoid valves 6x O-ring 6x1.5 (FKM)
Seat solenoid valves 2x Membrane F (FKM)
Water detector 1x O-ring 28x2 (FKM)
Pressure transmitter 2x O-ring 13.1x1.6 (FKM)
Shut-off valves 4x O-ring 10.82x1.78 (FKM)
Screws for Shut-off valves 2x O-ring 4x1.8 (FKM)
Testing flange 2x O-ring 11x2.5 (FKM)
Blank plug O-rings (NBR) fluid contacting
Housing seal O-rings (NBR) not fluid contacting and silicone caps
Cover for testing flanges Screws (brass) with washers (copper)
Media specification
Media All types of oils, especially heavy fuel and lubricating oil,
water and sea water,
gases and mixtures of these media
Media pressure 0 to 10 bar above atmospheric ambient pressure
Media temperature 0 to +100 °C
Inner temperature of housing 0 to +100 °C
Ambient temperature 0 to +80 °C
Electrical specification
Electrical connection Connecting the board cables to the terminal strip,
2x cable glands M16x1.5 for board cable
Operating voltage 24 V ±10 %; DC
Power consumption 8 W per solenoid valve
Duty cycle of solenoid valves Max. 25% power-on time at 100°C media temperature referred to a duration of
30 min, i.e. do not power-on longer than 7.5 min
Valves
Solenoid valves Type 331, 2/2-way-valve, seal material: FKM
Nominal diameter - valve DN3,0
Miscellaneous
Media connections Flange to fluid block (see flange pattern),
2x testing flanges, closed with brass screw M8 and copper washer
2x double nipples with M14x1.5, one of them closed
Protection class IP54 (attended to the installation position)
Installation position Ventilation- and leakage slots of the housing downward
Mounting of the fluid block 3x screws DIN912 - M8, compatible to hole pattern on the separator hood
Conformity
EG Declaration of Conformity CE sign, 2004/108/EG - EMC

5 Technical Data
2.3 deep
Figure 1: Main dimensions and flange pattern of the sensor block

6 Description of the System
6 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM

6.1 DESIGN AND FUNCTION
The sensor block consists of an anodised aluminium fluid block with integrated conduits and of glass fiber reinforced
polyamide housing components which protect the sensor and actuator components.
The sensor unit has:
2 Solenoid valves (SV),
1 Water detector (CS),
2 Pressure transmitters (PT),
2 Media inputs (I),
5 Media outputs (O).
The sensor block will be used to measure pressure and conductivity of the medium and to control the media streams.
6.2 CIRCUIT FUNCTION OF VALVES

Circuit function A
2/2-way solenoid valve, direct acting, normally closed,
Type 331
6.3 FLUIDIC PLAN

Connection ports at connection flange to the separator
Figure 2: Fluid plan

Figure 3: In-/Outputs and components of the sensor block
Inputs: Sensors:
I1: Input - circuit PT1: Pressure transmitter - circuit
I2: Input – outlet pure oil PT2: Pressure transmitter - outlet pure oil
Measuring range: 0 ... 16 bar
Outputs: Output signal: 4 ... 20 mA
O1: Output - circuit CS1: Water detector
O2: Output - outlet water Measuring range: depends on the adjusting,
O3: Output - testing flange - circuit see chapter 10.1.6
O4: Output - testing flange - outlet pure oil Operating voltage: 24 V DC
O5: Output - circuit closed Output signal: changeover switch
Actuators:
SV1: Solenoid valve - circuit
SV2: Solenoid valve - outlet water
Power consumption: 8 W
Max. pressure: 10 bar
Circuit function: 2/2-way solenoid valve
Both valves have a manual override. Through this, the valve can be opened manually by groping. One can
reach the manual override from the outside via the flexible protection caps on the bottom of the sensor
block.
NOTE!
The manual override of solenoid valves can be fixed, but this is not part of the intended
functionality. If a failure of a solenoid valve or its power supply occurs, using the manual override can
be an auxiliary measure - but the result is the loss of the protection class! For this purpose remove
the relevant protection cap. Now, press down the button of the manual override and rotate it clockwise
by 90°. By that the position of the manual override is fixed. A reverse rotation of the button loosens the
manual override.
BV1: Shut-off valve for testing flange – circuit

BV2: Shut-off valve for testing flange – outlet pure oil
The shut-off valves for testing flanges are only manually operable with a screwdriver. They have a stop
in both directions. Never operate the valves with violence! A torque of about 1.0 Nm signalises the stop.
However, should medium emit out of the closed testing flange, usually it is caused by a leak at the seal
between the valve and fluid block. In this case does not help to screw it more tight - the shut-off valve for
testing flange has to be replaced.

1: Housing cover
2: Upper housing
3: Fluid block
4: Openings for pressure equalization of the interior
and for leak detection (do not close!)
5: Testing flange – outlet pure oil
6: Testing flange – circuit
7: Protection caps of the manual override button of
the solenoid valves
8: Cable glands
9: Double nipple – outlet water
10: Double nipple - circuit, closed
11: 3 Mounting screws of the sensor block
12: 5 Mounting screws of the upper housing with
spring washer and large washer
13: 2 Mounting screws of the upper housing with
spring washer, normal washer and O-ring
14: Cap holder
15: Terminal strip
Figure 4: Designation of sensor block (except components)
6.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT
Figure 5: Pin assignment

7 Mounting and electrical Connection
7 MOUNTING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

DANGER!
Observe the General Safety Instructions in chapter 4!
All mentioned procedures are described in detail in chapter 10.1!
 Dismount the housing cover!

 Install/screw the sensor block at the hood of the separators:
(Mounting screws, washer and O-rings to seal the flange are enclosed)
- Put the O-rings in the 3 grooves of the sensor block flange,

- Add the Allen head screws with a washer, put them in the through borings of the fluid block,
- Screw the sensor block on the hood of the separator (fastening torque: 20 Nm)
 Connect the nipple of the water outlet
 Put the board cables through the cable glands at the side of the sensor block
 Carry out the cabling according to the pin assignment (see chapter 6.4)
 Make sure that the shut-off valves for testing flanges are closed:
turn the screws clockwise with a screwdriver until a torque of approx. 1.0 Nm is reached
 Put on the housing cover and tighten it with screws – consider the correct position of the cover seal!
8 INITIALIZATION
The functionality is reached if the sensor block is mounted on the hood of the separator and if the cabling is carried
out correctly.
9 OPERATION / FUNCTION
Dismount the housing cover to reach the components inside the sensor block.
The electrical connections of the components (except the manually operated shut-off valves for testing flanges) are
wired with the terminal strip. Usually the connections will be operated externally via the board cables which have
to be fed through the two cable glands into the interior of the sensor block and have to be wired with the terminal
strip. Exceptions are described in the following list of components:
9.1 FUNCTION
 Circuit:
A water detector (CS1) determines the conductivity of the separating media by means of capacitive
measurement. The integrated solenoid valves (SV) will be switched via an external controller basing on
respective signals of the conductance sensor:
- Solenoid valve (SV1) for return to the separator (circuit)  on output (O1),
- Solenoid valve (SV2) to outlet (water outlet)  on output (O2).
Both valves have a manual override. Through this, the valve can be opened manually by groping. One can reach
the manual override from the outside via the flexible protection caps on the bottom of the sensor block.
The pressure in the circuit is monitored by a pressure transmitter (PT1) in the sensor block.
 Pure oil outlet:
It is a separate port connected to the outlet for pure oil. Its pressure is monitored by a pressure transmitter (PT2)
in the sensor block.
9.2 SAMPLING
 Each testing flange allows the sampling from the circuit and from the pure oil outlet
 Shut-off valves for testing flanges are integrated for closing the testing flanges:
- in circuit (BV1) to output (O3) and
- in pure oil outlet (BV2) to output (O4).
The shut-off valves for testing flanges can be manually operated with a slotted screwdriver (1.2x6.5) after
removing the housing cover.

10 Maintenance / Troubleshooting / Spare Parts
10 MAINTENANCE / TROUBLESHOOTING / SPARE PARTS

10.1 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING AT THE SYSTEM
DANGER!
- because of high pressure!
Before loosening pneumatic lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent the lines
- Danger of explosion!
When working with oils flammable and explosive gases can be produced. Therefore any manipulation
of the technological course of the process is prohibited!
Consider significant terms and conditions of explosion protection!
WARNING!
- Risk of burning / fire hazard at continuous operation by hot surface of the unit!
Keep the device away of easily combustible material and fluids and do not touch with bare hands,
especially do not touch metallic parts!
Consider further safety instructions in chapter 4!
10.1.1 Housing Cover

Demounting:
 Unscrew the 4 neck collar screws at the corners of the housing cover (Allen key, wrench size 4)
 Remove the housing cover off the upper housing
 Save the O-ring 165x2.5 from the upper housing against loss!
Mounting:
 Mount it in reverse order, fastening torque of the screws: 2.0 Nm
DANGER!
Danger of bursting! Danger of short circuit!
The labyrinth-like tunnel under the seal at the bottom of the housing must not be closed!
It ensures pressure compensation and ventilation of the housing interior and dismisses any leak
medium to the outside in order to prevent the filling of the sensor block with medium in the event of
leakage, which could cause a short circuit or bursting.
NOTE!
Seal in the upper housing
Ensure that the O-ring 165x2.5 is inserted in the upper housing and is put properly in its groove!
(In the delivery status this O-ring is glued on the four corners, but this is not necessary.)
neck collar screws
O-ring 165x2.5
Ventilation of the housing
Figure 6: Housing cover - Mounting

10.1.2 Sensor Block and Hood of the Separator

Demounting:
 Demount the housing cover (see chapter 10.1.1)
 Unscrew the 3 fastening screws DIN 912 - M8x45 (sunken in the fluid block) (Allen key, wrench size 6),
while holding the sensor block well and remove carefully from the hood of the separator,
save Allen head screws against loss!
 Save the 3 O-rings 23x3.0 from the flange of the sensor block against loss!
Mounting:
 Mount it in reverse order!
 Put the 3 O-rings 23x3.0 into the flange of the sensor block
 Tighten the 3 fastening screws (Allen head) with fastening torque of 20 Nm
Flange surface
Fastening screws M8 to the hood of
the separator
O-rings 23x3.0
Figure 7: Sensor block - Mounting
10.1.3 Upper Housing

Demounting:
 Remove the cables from the solenoid valves, the pressure transmitters and the water detector (see Figure 3:
SV1, SV2, PT1, PT2 and CS1)
 Separate the PE-conductor to solenoid valve with protective conductor from the fluid block,
to do this unscrew the cylinder head screw DIN 912 - M4x12 with an Allen key (wrench size 3) from the fluid
block
(On this screw are -starting from the screw head- a lock washer, a washer, the cable eye, a washer and a
tooth lock washer.)
 Unscrew the 7 cylinder head screws DIN 912 - M3x10 with an Allen key (wrench size 2.5), which are used to
screw together the upper housing with the fluid block. (see Figure 4, positions 12 and 13)
5 screws (in the stiffened plates with ribs) have each a lock washer and a washer DIN 7349 (wide).
The remaining two screws have a lock washer, a washer according to DIN 7089 (typical) and below an
O-ring 2.5x1.5. The small parts are not saved against loss!
 Remove the upper housing from the fluid block
 Save the O-ring 140x2.5 between fluid block and upper housing against loss!
Mounting:
 Tighten the 7 cylinder head screws with an Allen key (wrench size 2.5) with a fastening torque of 1.0 Nm
 Connect/cable the components according to the pin assignment, see chapter 6.4,
fastening torque for protective conductor: 3.0 Nm

DANGER!
Grounding
For the mounting it is important to re-connect the protective earth (PE) conductor to the fluid block!
Only in this way, the grounding of the metallic touchable parts is guaranteed.
NOTE!
Seal in the upper housing
Ensure that the O-ring 140x2.5 is inserted in the upper housing and is put properly in its groove!
Connection for PE-conductor
Interstice with O-ring 140x2.5
Cable of the components
Figure 8: Upper housing - Mounting
10.1.4 Solenoid Valves

Demounting:
 Unscrew the connecting cable with a Phillips screwdriver and remove the cable plug
 Unscrew the solenoid valves from fluid block with a slotted screwdriver (1.2 x 6.5) – but unscrew only the two
unpainted screws
 Press from outside on the manual override button of the valve  then the valve can be removed from
the interior of the sensor block
 Save the 3 O-rings 6.5x1.5 at the flange of the valve against loss!
NOTE!
Cleaning the valve interior in case of blockage
In case of a blockage the valve can be opened by unscrewing also the two painted screws – but this
will void the warranty.
Extreme care when opening the valve!
Attention! Never pull the metal part of the pivoted armature out of the coil housing, but hold it
tight! Otherwise, the spring of the manual override loosens and the valve can not be mounted again!
But considering this restriction it is possible to clean the fluidic valve interior and to replace the
diaphragm of the valve.
Mounting:
 Put the 3 O-rings 6.5x1.5 into the flange of the valve

 Put the seal under the cable plug

 Tighten the screws: Solenoid valves - fastening torque: 1.6 Nm
Cable plug - fastening torque: 1.0 Nm
The button of the manual override has to be aligned to the direction of the protection caps in the housing
wall and has to be pressed while inserting.
Attention: unscrew ONLY

these unpainted screws
3 O-rings 6.5x1.5
Press the buttons

Figure 9: Solenoid valve - Mounting for (De-)Mounting
10.1.5 Pressure Transmitter

Demounting:
 Unscrew the gland nut of the connecting cable and remove the cable plug
 Unscrew the pressure transmitter with a deep socket wrench (wrench size 19) out of the fluid block
 Save the O-ring 13.1x1.6 on the pressure transmitter against loss!
Mounting:
 Put the O-ring 13.1x1.6 on the pressure transmitter
 Fastening torque of the pressure transmitter: 20 Nm
O-ring 13.1x1.6
Pressure transmitter
Figure 10: Pressure transmitter - Mounting

10.1.6 Water Detector

Demounting:
 Remove the cable plug of the connection cable
 Unscrew the water detector with a socket wrench (wrench size 32) out of the fluid block
 Save the O-ring 28.0x2.0 on the water detector against loss!
Mounting:
 Lubricate the O-ring 28.0x2.0 with grease (or if not available with machine oil) and put it on the water detector.
Screw the water detector into the fluid block, thereby the O-ring must not be squeezed!
 Fastening torque of the water detector: 20 Nm
NOTE!
2 types of water detectors: HFO and LO
The two types of water detectors („HFO“ and „LO“) are differently adjusted.
For selecting the spare parts it must be ensured that the respective sensor fits with the sensor block.
The description you can find on the type plate on the top of the sensor block and at one of the six
spanner flats of the water detector.
Model: HFO (500268); Part-No.: 0005-1464-070

used in sensor block model: HFO/0136; Part-No.: 2062-8828-000
Model: LO (500269); Part-No.: 0005-1464-080

used in sensor block model: LO/0196; Part-No.: 2062-8828-010
Water detector
Cable for
water detector
O-ring 28.0x2.0 - Always use a

new O-ring after the demounting!
Figure 11: Water detector - Mounting
10.1.7 Shut-off Valves for Testing Flanges

Demounting:
 Unscrew the shut-off valves for testing flanges with a socket wrench (wrench size 15) out of the fluid block
 Save the 2 O-rings 10.82x1.78 on the shut-off valves for testing flanges against loss!
Mounting:


 Lubricate the 2 O-rings 10.82x1.78 with grease (or if not available with machine oil) and put them on the shut-
off valves for testing flanges
 Fastening torque for the mounting (not for operating!) of the shut-off valves for testing flanges: 10 Nm
 Caulk the shut-off valves for testing flanges by a hit with a punch.
Therefore is a crescent-shaped space in the fluid block into which collar material of the shut-off valves can be
deformed.
2 O-rings 10.82x1.78
Shut-off valves
for testing
flanges
Figure 12: Shut-off valves for testing flanges - Mounting
10.1.8 Testing Flanges

Demounting:
 Unscrew the 2 brass hexagon screws DIN 933 M8x10 out of the testing flanges
 Take off the copper seal washer
 Remove the sensor block from the hood of the separator (see chapter 10.1.2)
 Unscrew the headless screws DIN 914 M5x8-A2 with a long Allen key (wrench size 2.5) from the side
with the flanges
NOTE!
Risk of damage to testing flange and fluid block!
First unscrew the headless screws after that the testing flanges because these headless screws
prevent the accidental loosening of the testing flanges.
If the test flange will be unscrewed with violence before removing the headless screws, it is inevitably
destroyed! In this case damages to the fluid block can also not be excluded!
 Unscrew the testing flanges with a flat spanner out of the fluid block
 Save the O-rings 11x2.5 in the testing flanges against loss!
Mounting:
 Lubricate the O-rings 11x2.5 with grease (or if not available with machine oil) and put it back in the grooves at
the testing flanges
 Fastening torque for testing flanges: 20 Nm
 Save the testing flanges with headless screws, fastening torque: 2.0 Nm

Testing flanges
Spanner flat Brass screw with
copper seal washer
O-ring 11x2.5
Headless screws -
unscrew before
demounting!
Figure 13: Testing flange - Mounting
10.1.9 Blank Plugs

Demounting:
 Remove the 3 blank plugs G1/8 and 2 blank plugs G1/4 (each with an O-ring) out of the fluid block:
- unscrew blank plugs G1/8 with Allen key (wrench size 3)
- unscrew blank plugs G1/4 with Allen key (wrench size 6)
Mounting:
 Screw
- blank plugs G1/8 with Allen key (wrench size 3)  fastening torque: 3.0 Nm
- blank plugs G1/4 with Allen key (wrench size 6)  fastening torque: 10.0 Nm
10.1.10 Double Nipples (with Plug)

Demounting:
In the fluid block are 2 double nipples G1/4 - M14x1.5, one of it is closed with a plug and a gland nut.
Each double nipple has a flat seal, the plug has an O-ring.
These flat seals are not particularly saved against loss but not available separately!
 Loosen the gland nut of the plug with a wrench (wrench size 17)
 Unscrew the double nipple with a wrench (wrench size 19)
 Save the seals against loss!
Mounting:
 Put in the correct seal
 Screw the double nipple with a wrench (wrench size 19)  fastening torque: 20.0 Nm
Screw the gland nut of the plug with a wrench (wrench size 17)  fastening torque: 6.0 Nm
10.1.11 Terminal Strip and Cabling

Demounting:
 Disconnect the cables of solenoid valves, pressure transmitters and water detector (see chapter 10.1.3 and
Figure 8)

 Disconnect the PE-conductor to the solenoid valve with protective conductor from the fluid block.
Unscrew the cylinder screw DIN 912 - M4x12 with an Allen key (wrench size 3) out of the fluid block
(On this screw are -starting from the screw head- a lock washer, a washer, the cable eye, a washer and a
tooth lock washer.)
 Screw off the terminal strip from the upper housing:
- loosen the 2 fillister head screws with a screwdriver (Torx TX15) – it is not necessary to hold up the square
nut
- each fillister head screw is sealed with an O-ring 4.0x1.0.
 Save all small pieces against loss!
 Take off the terminal strip from the upper housing
The disassembling of the terminal strip is not part of this document. The pin assignment (chapter 6.4) contains the
additional information and is used to document the original state.
Mounting:
 Screw the 2 fillister head screws with a screwdriver (Torx TX15), fastening torque: 3.0 Nm
and save supplemental with a nut lock
 Cabling of the components as described in the pin assignment, see chapter 6.4,
fastening torque for the PE-conductor: 3.0 Nm
DANGER!
Grounding
For the mounting it is important to re-connect the protective earth (PE) conductor to the fluid block!
Only in this way, the grounding of the metallic touchable parts is guaranteed.
Fillister head screw
O-ring 4.0x1.0
Square nut (lock)

Marking of the broken clips
of the cross-connection
(No. 4, 5 and 8)
Figure 14: Terminal strip - Mounting
10.1.12 Protective Caps for the Manual Override of the Solenoid Valves
Demounting:
 Demount the terminal strip – all the components can stay cabled
 Now loosen the accessible 4 plastic self-cutting screws on the cap holders with a screwdriver (Torx TX08)

 Pull the cap holders out of its guidance

 Remove the protective caps out of the openings of the housing
Mounting:
 Mount it in reverse order
 Screw the 4 plastic self-cutting screws on the cap holders with a screwdriver (Torx TX08),
fastening torque: 0.3 Nm
Plastic self-cutting screws
Pull the cap holders in the

direction of the arrows
(forward)
Figure 15: Cap holders - Mounting
10.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
Failure of Sensors or Actuator Components
If a failure of sensor components occurs, please check the cabling/wiring for loose connections! This concerns the
on-board electronics as well as the contacts on the terminal strip and the respective component. Check also if all
cables are wired as the described in the pin assignment plan (see chapter 6.4)! The use of a Multimeter helps
checking the signals. If it is ensured that the electrical connections are made correctly, it could be also possible that
the conditions in the medium (pressure and water-oil-ratio) are not the expected conditions, although this is
assumed.
Pollution / Blockage of the Fluidic Channels
If that was not the cause for the failure, it could be that a channel or the sensor have become inoperable by
pollution. So it has to be cleaned. Therefore take the plant out of operation, demount the respective component and
check its operability again. If it is still unoperable mount a spare part. But if pollution was the cause for
unoperability it is advisable to clean up the entire block.
Leackage
If medium drains off at one point of the sensor block, find out the location of the leakage first. Restore the tightness of
the block by replacing the respective seal/O-ring (of the set of seals) or the whole component.
Mechanical Destruction of the Housing
A set of housing parts can be ordered if the housing was mechanically damaged because of an act of violence. The
plastic parts of the housing must be replaced to ensure the compliance with the protection class.

10.3 SPARE PARTS

Main list of spare part sets:
Spare part GEA - Part-No. Localisation
Shut-off valve 2062-8828-910 See following Figure 16
Water detecor HFO/0136 0005-1464-070 See following Figure 16
Water detecor LO/0196 0005-1464-080
Cable for water detector 0005-1464-090 See pevious Figure 11
Solenoid valve Type 331 DN3 0018-8133-600 See following Figure 16
Pressure transmitter incl. plug and cable 0005-1529-300 See following Figure 16
Set of housing parts 2062-8828-920 See following Figure 17
Set of seals 2062-8828-930 See following table
Spare parts for components:
2x shut-off valve (2062-8828-910)
1x water detector
(0005-1464-070 or
0005-1464-080)
2x pressure transmitter
(0005-1529-300)
2x solenoid valve (0018-8133-600)
Figure 16: Spare parts for components
Set of housing parts (2062-8828-920):
1: 1x Upper housing with threaded bushings

2: 1x Housing cover, pre-mounted with 4x neck collar screws and
washers
3: 2x Protective cap, pre-mounted with cap holders and plastic self-
cutting screws
4: 5x Screw M3x10 with lock washer and a wide washer for the
mounting, enclosed in a bag
5: 2x Screws M3x10 with lock washer and small washer,
O-ring 2.5x1.5 for the mounting, enclosed in a bag
6: 1x O-ring 165x2.5 pre-mounted as seal for housing cover
7: 1x O-ring 140x2.5 as seal for upper housing, enclosed in a bag
Figure 17: Set of housing parts

11 Packaging / Transport / Storage
Set of seals (2062-8828-930):

Spare part Amount Use Localisation
O-ring 2.5x1.5 2x Fixing the upper housing Figure 4, Position 13
O-ring 165x2.5 1x Seal for the housing cover Figure 6
O-ring 140x2.5 1x Seal for the upper housing Figure 8
O-ring 23x3 (FKM) 3x Flanges to the separator Figure 7
O-ring 6x1.5 (FKM) 6x Solenoid valves Figure 9
O-ring 13.1x1.6 (FKM) 2x Pressure transmitters Figure 10
O-ring 28x2 (FKM) 3x Water detector, only 1x at the sensor Figure 11
block, 2x additional
O-ring 10.82x1.78 (FKM) 4x Shut-off valves for testing flanges, Figure 12
except pilot lot
Membrane F (FKM) 2x Solenoid valve, seat, see Note in chapter 10.1.4
for temporary repairs
10.4 FASTENING TORQUES

Component Size Fastening torque
Fastening screws of housing cover M5 2.0 Nm
Fastening screws of upper housing M3 1.0 Nm
Fastening screws of sensor block M8 20 Nm
Solenoid valves M4 1.6 Nm
Cable plugs M3 1.0 Nm
Pressure transmitter SW 19 20 Nm
Water detector SW 32 20 Nm
Shut-off valve for testing flange SW 15 10 Nm (and caulk)
Blank plug G1/8 G1/8 3.0 Nm
Blank plug G1/4 G1/4 10 Nm
Double nipple G1/4 20 Nm
Gland nut of the plug at the double nipple M14x1.5 6.0 Nm
Testing flange G1/2 20 Nm
Headless screws at the testing flange M5 2.0 Nm
Brass screw in the testing flange M8 3.0 Nm
Fastening screw of the PE-conductor M4 3.0 Nm
Fastening screws of the terminal strip M4 3.0 Nm
Screws of the cap holders (self-cutting) 0.3 Nm
Cable glands M16x1.5 4.0 Nm
11 PACKAGING / TRANSPORT / STORAGE

NOTE!
Transport damages and Storage damages!
Inadequately protected equipment may be damaged during transport and storage.
Store the device protected of moisture and dirt and transport it in a shock-resistant packaging.
Avoid effects of heat and cold which could result in temperatures above or below the permitted storage
temperature (0 to +80 °C).

12 Shutdown / Disposal
12 SHUTDOWN / DISPOSAL
NOTE!
Damage to the environment caused by device components contaminated with media.
Observe the relevant disposal and environmental protection regulations!

Westfalia Separator
Straight through control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446
Series 440, 445 Series 441, 446
Contents
1.0 General information on operating 7.0 Care and maintenance................................... 6
instructions ..................................................... 2 7.1 Replacement of stem sealings ............................... 6
2.0 Notes on possible dangers............................ 2 7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design ..................................... 6
2.1 Significance of symbols ..........................................2 7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design ............................... 7
7.1.3 Bellows seal design ........................................... 8
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information .................2
7.2 Tightening torques.................................................. 8
3.0 Storage and transport ................................... 2 7.2.1 Tightening torques for hexagon nuts ............... 8
4.0 Description...................................................... 3 8.0 Troubleshooting ............................................. 8
4.1 Scope of applications ..............................................3
9.0 Troubleshooting table .................................. 9
4.2 Operating principles ................................................3
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ...... 10
4.3 Technical data .........................................................3
4.4 Marking ...................................................................3
5.0 Installation....................................................... 4
5.1 General notes on installation...................................4
5.2 Requirements at the place of installation ................5
5.3 Installation instructions concerning actuators .........5
6.0 Putting the valve into operation.................... 6
Rev. 0040301002 2608 englisch

Str. thr. control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

and repair.
ATTENTION !

to property.

ATTENTION !
- At -20°C to +65°C.
Page 2 Rev. 0040301002 2608

4.0 Description
Valves are used for „controlling the flow of liquids, gases and vapours in chemical and other
processing plants and for plant engineering“.
ATTENTION !
state the higher requirements when ordering.
to TRD 110.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.

The control valves are especially suitable for actuation by electrical actuators.
The flow through control valves is always against the closing direction.
4.3 Technical data
for
- Pressure-temperature-ratings, etc. refer to data sheet.
4.4 Marking
Nominal diameter Manufacturer
Type-Number CE-marking
Flow Nominal pressure
characteristic Notified body
Kvs-value
Plug Customer-specific
design information
Serial-No. Stem sealing
Material of Year of manufacture clear speech
internal parts (1. and 2. position)
Fig. 1
Rev. 0040301002 2608 Page 3

5.0 Installation
The following items should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation.
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
Refer to data sheet for weights.
- Keep the thread and shaft of the stem free from paint.
- Centre gaskets between the flanges.
- Strainers or filters should be installed before the valves.
Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and

Page 4 Rev. 0040301002 2608

5.2 Requirements at the place of installation
The place of installation should be easily accessible and provide ample space for
maintenance and removing the actuator. Stop valves should be installed before and after
the control valve to enable maintenance working without draining the piping system. The
valve should preferably installed vertically with the actuator at the top. Inclined or horizontal
installation without supports is permissible only with light actuators.
For this installation position, the two distance columns (or joke) have to be above each
other in the vertical plane.
Fig. 2: Pipeline vertically Fig. 3: Pipeline horizontally

Permissible actuator weights for valves with unsupported horizontal stems:
20 kg for DN 15 - 32
25 kg for DN 40 - 65
35 kg for DN 80-100
40 kg for DN125-150
The pipes must be lagged to protect the actuators from excessive heat. Sufficient space
must be left for the maintenance of the stem packing.
To ensure that the control valves function correctly, the pipe run should be straight for at
least 2 x n.d. upstream and 6 x n.d. downstream of the valve.
5.3 Installation instructions concerning actuators

Normally, control valves are supplied complete with actuator fitted.
It is not permitted to mantle / dismantle actuators with valves operating and service
conditions (temperature and pressure). The actuators must be assemble as describe in the
operating instructions during conversion and maintenance.
During assembly work, the plug is not be turned on its seating at closing pressure.
ATTENTION !
Care must be taken with the bellow type valves when actuators are mounted or
removed. (Hold the valve-stem against turning with an open-end wrench!)
When retrofitting actuators, the maximum permissible force for valve actuation must be
taken into account:
Series 440 / 445 Series 441 / 446
12kN for DN 15- 50 18kN for DN 15-100
29kN for DN 65-100 37kN for DN 125-150
40kN for DN125-150
Rev. 0040301002 2608 Page 5


ATTENTION !
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50 °C) or low (< 0 °C) media
Maintenance and maintenance intervals have to be defined by the operator according to
the service conditions.
7.1 Replacement of stem sealings

7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design
PTFE V-ring unit (pos. 12) consisting of:
1 backing ring
4 sealing rings
1 cover ring
Owing to the installed compression spring (pos. 15), this
stem packing is self-adjusting. If the stem starts leaking,
the ring pack is worn out and must be replaced.
Replacement of PTFE V-ring units:
ATTENTION !
Refer to item 10.0 before dismantling the
valve.
- Remove actuator.
(Refer to operating instructions for actuator!)
- When replacing PTFE V-ring unit (pos. 12), make sure
that the parts are installed in the correct order and
positions (refer to Fig. 4).
- Gasket (pos. 17) must be replaced.
If the stem is damaged, the valve must be replaced since
a new ring pack will soon start leaking again if the stem is
damaged. Fig. 4:
Page 6 Rev. 0040301002 2608

7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design
- The stuffing box packing (pos. 23) requires maintenance.
- If leaks develop, immediately tighten the screw joint (pos. 25) gradually until the packing
(pos. 23) stops leaking.
- The service life of stuffing box packings (pos. 23) can be increased by checking regularly
leakage.
- If leaks can no longer be stopped by tightening the screw joint (pos. 25), a new packing
ring (pos. 23) must be inserted into the gland.
Replacement of stuffing box packings:
ATTENTION !
Refer to item 10.0 before dismantling the valve.
- Remove actuator. (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!)
- Insert new packing ring as shown in Fig. 5 - Fig. 6.
Fig. 5: Stuffing box packing
If a split packing ring is used, cut with a chamfer

as shown in Fig. 6.
Fig. 6: Split packing ring

If the stem is damaged, the valve must be replaced since a new ring pack will soon start
leaking again if the stem is damaged.
Rev. 0040301002 2608 Page 7

7.1.3 Bellows seal design
If the stem leaks, the bellows seal is defective. The leak can initially be stopped by
tightening the screw joint.
Afterwards the valve must be replaced.
7.2 Tightening torques

7.2.1 Tightening torques for hexagon nuts
M 10 = 15 - 30 Nm
M 12 = 35 - 50 Nm
M 16 = 80 - 120 Nm
! Refer to operating instructions for actuator concerned for

installing actuators !
8.0 Troubleshooting
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
- It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
-

Page 8 Rev. 0040301002 2608


ATTENTION !
- read item 10.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read item 6.0 before restarting the plant !

No flow Valve closed. Open valve (using actuator).
Flange covers not removed. Remove flange covers.
Little flow Valve not sufficiently open. Open valve (using actuator).
Dirt sieve clogged. Clean / replace sieve.
Piping system clogged. Check piping system.
Kvs value of valve unsuitable. Fit valve with higher Kvs value.
Valve stem moves in jerks. Stuffing box sealing too tight Slacken screw joint slightly. Valve
(for valves with graphite packings). must nor start leaking!
Valve stem or plug cannot be Valve plug seized in seating or guide Replace valve
moved. owing to deposits or dirt in medium.
Valve stem leaking. PTFE V-ring unit damaged or worn. Replace ring pack (pos. 12);
refer to item 7.1.1
Stuffing box gland too slack in valves Tighten screw joint (pos. 25);
with stuffing box packings. refer to item 7.1.2.
Bellows defective in valves with bellow Replace valve
seal.
Leakage too high when Sealing surfaces of plug eroded or Replace valve
valve is closed. worn.
Sealing edge of seating damages or Replace valve
worn.
Rev. 0040301002 2608 Page 9


ATTENTION !
media.
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Customer Support Center
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Phone +49 40 58 96 500

Fax +48 40 73 80 585
Mail to: info@gea-westfalia.de
Page 10 Rev. 0040301002 2608

Westfalia Separator
Operating and Installation Instructions
Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 1,6kN
Contents
1.0 General information on operating instructions... 2 5.4 Electrical connection.......................................... 10
2.0 Notes on possible dangers ................................... 2 5.4.1 Connection ......................................................11
2.1 Significance of symbols ....................................... 2 5.5 Settings ............................................................. 12
5.5.1 Torque and travel switches.............................. 12
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information .............. 3
6.0 Putting the actuator into operation ................... 12
3.0 Storage and transport............................................ 3
7.0 Care and maintenance ........................................ 13
4.0 Description ............................................................. 4
4.1 Field of application ............................................... 4 8.0 Troubleshooting................................................... 13
4.2 Method of functioning........................................... 4 9.0 Troubleshooting table ........................................ 14
4.3 Technical data ...................................................... 5 10.0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator ................... 15
4.4 Dimensions .......................................................... 5
5.0 Installation ............................................................. 6
5.1 General installation data ...................................... 6
5.2 Manual operation ................................................. 8
5.3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves..... 9
5.3.1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm
(yoke version) ..................................................... 9
Rev. 0040501002 2608 englisch

Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO Westfalia Separator
and repair.
ATTENTION !
ATTENTION !
... Warning of dangerous voltage.
Exposed to injury!
Don’t touch the turning handwheel when the motor is running.
Exposed to injury!
Don’t put your hand into the up or downwards moving
appliance.
Danger when not observing the operating and installation

instructions!
Before installing, operating, maintenance or dismantling read
and observe the instructions.
Danger though voltage!

Before dismantling the hood, switch of the electrical source
and secure against turning on again.
Page 2 0040501002 2608

to property.

ATTENTION !
- Valve mountings such as drives, handwheels, hoods must not be used to take
external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
Non-compliance may lead to death, injury or damage to property due to
persons falling or parts being dropped.
See “4.3 Technical data” for weights.
- At -20° to +70°C dry, free from dirt.

- Do not unpack thrust drive or setting equipment assembly prior to installation.
- Protect against external force (impact, vibration etc.).
- Do not soil or damage type identification plate and wiring diagram on the controller.
0040501002 2608 Page 3

4.0 Description
4.1 Field of application
ARI-PREMIO linear thrust actuators are employed to actuate control or shut-off valves
requiring a nominal linear stroke distance of up to 80 mm and thrust from 2.2 kN to 15 kN.
The thrust actuators are set to the thrust forces specified in the technical data. If supplied
with the valve, the lift of the thrust actuator will be set to the stroke distance of the valve.
Selection of the proper actuator version in alignment with the corresponding fitting as well
as use of the thrust actuator in accordance with the specified technical data is the
responsibility of the systems engineer.
See data sheet for areas of application, application limits and potential.
Any use of the thrust actuator beyond the specified technical data or improper use of the
actuator is deemed to be not for the intended purpose.
The ambient conditions have to be conform to the actual electromagnetic compatibility
directives. Additional the compatibility to this directives has to be maintained in case of
expansion or other changing of the ambient conditions.
4.2 Method of functioning

The thrust actuator, fitted with a yoke, is mounted to the valve.
Transfer of force is effected via a coupling safeguarded against torsion.
The torsion safeguarding feature also serves as a lift indicator.
The lift settings can be read off on a lift dial attached to the yoke.
The electrical components are accommodated separately from the gearbox underneath a
sealed hood, thus being protected against operating and environmental effects.
Following removal of the hood, easy access is provided to the switchgear and indicating
feature.
The rotary motion of the motor is transmitted to the spindle nut by means of spur gear.
The drive spindle, which is safeguarded against torsion, screws its way into the spindle nut
and thus performs a pull or push motion depending on the sense of rotation.
In the final positions of the valve, the spindle nut is pressed against a set of springs so as to
produce closing force.
The motor is switched off by means of two load-dependent switches. The load-dependent
switches will also switch off the motor if foreign bodies have lodged themselves between
the valve seat and cone.
The load-dependent switches serve to protect the valve and thrust actuator against
damage.
Page 4 0040501002 2608

4.3 Technical data
Type ARI-PREMIO GEA Westfalia Separator 1,6 kN
Thrust force kN 1,6
Stroke distance max. mm 30
Duty classification acc. to EN 60034-1/
S3 80% 1200 c/h
A11
Control speed mm/sec. 0,25
Motor voltage 230V - 50Hz / 60Hz *
Power consumption VA 11,7
2 Stück, permanently wired switching capacity 10A,
Torque switch
250V~
Enclosure EN 60529 IP 65
Max. permissible ambient temperature -20 °C ... +70 °C
Handwheel Yes (rotating during operation)
Any. Exception: motor must not be suspended
Mounting position
downwards
Gear lubricant für Getriebe Klüber Isoflex Topas NB152
Weight kg 5,4
* Control speed and power consumption are 20% higher at frequency of 60 Hz
4.4 Dimensions
Clearance required for

removal of hood
ARI-PREMIO 1,6 kN
Stroke distance max. 30 mm
Fig. 1
0040501002 2608 Page 5

5.0 Installation
ATTENTION !
- Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified
electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a
qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical safety requirements
and regulations.
- Valve mountings such as drives, handwheels, hoods must not be used to take
external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
Non-compliance may lead to death, injury or damage to property due to
persons falling or parts being dropped.
- Actuator components which rotate or move during operation are coloured red.
Crushing and injury hazard!
5.1 General installation data

- In addition to general installation guidelines, the following points are required to be
observed:
- Planners / construction firms and operators are responsible for positioning and installing
the products.
ATTENTION !
- A voltage is induced in the thrust actuator motor. This induction voltage may be
higher than the operating voltage.
- For this reason relays and electronic load relays for thrust actuator control
require a protective circuit. The contacts of unprotected relays may stick after a
while.
- This may result in reversed directions of rotation or defective switch-off
Recommended safety circuit for relays and electronic load relays:

Connect a varistor or RC module parallel to each relay point.
Varistor S10K385 to S10K460
RC module 100 Ohm / 100nF
Where relay points and electronic load relays are particularly sensitive a coil should be
connected in series additionally to each relay point.
Recommended coil:
Toroidal coil 2mH / 2A
- Contactors of 16A and upwards do not need a safety circuit.
- Check thrust actuator for damage prior to fitting.
Damaged parts must be replaced by original spares.
- Existing operating instructions for valve.
- Complete valve with crossarm.
- Valve cone approximately in mid lift position - on no account supported inside a seat!
- Electrical installation in accordance with current regional regulations.
- Conductor cross-section selected to correspond to the given drive power and existing line
length.
Page 6 0040501002 2608

- Mains fuse rating max. 6A.
- Circuit breakers in the plant to cut off the mains supply to the actuator.
- Conformity of technical data on thrust actuator with field conditions.
- Mains voltage in accordance with data specified on rating plate of thrust actuator.
- Thrust actuator complete with yoke and coupling parts intended for mounting to the
corresponding valve.
- Ease of access to installation site.
- Adequate clearance space above the thrust actuator for removing the hood
(refer to point 4.4 Dimensions).
- Install where there is protection against high-energy heat radiation.
- The ambient temperature must be between -20°C and +70°C.

If installed outdoors, the thrust actuator must be provided with an additional cover to protect
against
- rain,
- direct insulation,
- dust.
In case of widely fluctuating ambient temperatures, high atmospheric humidity and
temperatures below the freezing point, your are recommended to install a heating resistor
to minimise condensation buildup in the actuator.
- Thrust actuator mountable in any position except in downward suspended position.
If installed with a horizontal connecting rod, the thrust actuator must be mounted so both
yoke legs are on top of one another in the vertical plane (see Fig. 2 ).
Correct Incorrect
Fig. 2
0040501002 2608 Page 7

5.2 Manual operation
ATTENTION !
- The manual operating device always rotates during motor-driven operation
(running indicator). Never activate manual operation while the motor is running.
Injury hazard!
- In the manual operating mode pay careful attention in the final positions that the
handwheel is only turned to the point where the torque switch trips (audible
click) as otherwise damage will be caused to the thrust actuator! Since the
handwheel always follows during motor-driven operation (running indication),
never operate by hand while the motor is running - potential injury hazards!
With the motor in the stationary state, the thrust actuator can be run in the retracted and
extended state with the manual operating device firmly meshed with the gear.
Proceed as follows:
- Turn manual operation device (pos. 50.130) by wrench or similar tool ...
... in clockwise direction --> extending spindle.
... in counter-clockwise direction --> retracting spindle.
retracting spindle extending spindle
Fig. 3
Page 8 0040501002 2608 (Rev.2)

5.3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves
5.3.1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm (yoke version)
turn
Hexagon nut Hexagon nut

Valve spindle Valve spindle
Fig. 4
To mount the thrust actuator to a valve having a nominal lift of up to 30mm, proceed
as follows:
- Screw coupling (pos. 50.27) out of torsion safety feature (pos. 50.32) of thrust
actuator (not illustrated).
- Position valve cone approximately in mid lift position.
Fig. A: - Turn flat hexagon nut if not present on valve spindle.
Fig. A-B: - Slip coupling (pos. 50.27) over valve spindle.
- Screw threaded bush (pos. 50.87) matching the valve onto the valve spindle in
accordance with setting dimension (Y) and lock with hexagon nut.
ATTENTION !
Setting dimension (Y) and fitting-projection (X) are measured with
inserted valve spindle. This means for
- 2-way valves at closed valve,
- 3-way valves with mixing plug at closed way B,
- 3-way valves with diverting plug at closed way A
After measuring put the valve plug back in the mid lift position!
- Setting dimension (Y) for fitting-projection (X) 60 and 83mm = 102mm.
Fig. C: - Place thrust actuator (pos. 50) on valve.
- Mount thrust actuator (pos. 50) on fitting with two T-head bolts (pos. 50.19), two
washers (pos. 50.20), two spring washers (pos. 50.21), two hexagon nuts
(pos. 50.22).
Fig. D/E: - Turn the hexagon nut (pos. 50.130) by a screw wrench and use it to move out
the thrust actuator until the driving spindle (pos. 50.30) comes to rest on the
threaded bush (pos. 50.87).
0040501002 2608 (Rev.2) Page 9

Fig. F: - Screw the coupling (pos. 50.27) firmly into the torsion safety feature
(pos. 50.32) and secure in place using grub screw M6 (pos. 50.35).
- Run valve to lowest position.
- Clip lift dial (pos. 50.23) onto yoke in such a way that top edge of torsion safety
feature is in alignment with tip of arrow mark on lift dial.
- Run valve to both final positions and check to ensure that these are safely
reached
- Carry out electrical connection (see point 5.4).
Wire connections of the different valve types

3-way valve 3-way valve
Straight through valve with mixing plug with diverting plug
closed A-AB open AB-B open
open B-AB open AB-A open
Fig. 5
Page 10 0040501002 2608

5.4.1 Connection
ATTENTION !
- Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified
electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a
qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical requirement and
regulations.
- When connecting the thrust actuator the supply line must be disconnected from
the mains (not live) during connection work. It must be impossible to switch the
power on unintentionally while the mains are disconnected in this way. Failure
to comply may result in death, serious injury or substantial damage to property.
To connect the thrust actuator up to the electrical power supply, proceed as follows:
- Run the thrust actuator a few mm out of the lower final position applying the manual
operating device.
- Loosen hexagon screw in hood, carefully remove hood in upward direction.
- Remove blind plug fom the cable connection.
- Insert the connection line through this cable inlet until sufficient conductor length is
available up to the corresponding terminals; then tighten the cable connection until the
connecting cable is clamped in place inside it.
- Strip connecting cable approx. 1-1.5 cm above cable inlet.
- Strip the individual conductors approx. 5mm away from the end and fit with conductor end
sleeves.
- Connect protective conductor of connecting cable up to protective conductor terminal of
thrust actuator.
- Connect neutral N/MP conductor of connecting cable up to terminal 1/N of thrust-actuator
terminal strip.
- Connect pulse line for move-out connecting rod up to terminal 11 of thrust-actuator
terminal strip.
- Connect pulse line for move-in connecting rod up to terminal 14 of thrust-actuator terminal
strip.
- Place hood on carefully from above and mount firmly onto thrust actuator with hexagon
screw and rubber gasket.
- Connect supply line to mains and run thrust actuator to each of the final positions so as to
check whether the final-position travel switches effect switching off, also checking to see
whether the direction of movement on the thrust actuator corresponds to the desired
direction.
- If the directions of movement are contrary to those desired, the pulse lines governing the
move-in and move-out connecting rod will need to be exchanged.
0040501002 2608 Page 11

5.5 Settings
ATTENTION !
- The thrust actuator may only be operated for a short time without the hood for
unavoidable setting operations to the potentiometers, travel switches and the
electrical options. While these operations are in progress, the thrust actuator
has hazardous, live, uninsulated parts exposed as well as moving and rotating
parts.
- Improper execution of the setting operations or lack of care may cause death,
grievous bodily injury or substantial property damage.
- Operation of the thrust actuator without the hood for any purpose other than
that described above is strictly prohibited.
- Operation of the actutor without hood is forbidden!
The internal parts of the actuator are under voltage. The parts are rotating and
moving. Failure to comply may result in death, serious injury or substantial
damage to property.
5.5.1 Torque and travel switches

The thrust actuators are equipped with a load-dependent travel switch for the extending
direction (S1) and a load-dependent travel switch for the retracting direction.
The load-dependent travel switches (S1, S2) are permanent wired and switches off the
motor as soon as the factory-set thrust force is attained.
ATTENTION !
- The settings of the load-dependent travel switches must on no account
whatsoever be changed!
6.0 Putting the actuator into operation

ATTENTION !
- Actuator components which rotate or move during operation are coloured red.
Crushing or injury hazard!
- all works has been completed!
- Regional safety instructions must be observed as a matter of policy.
- hood of thrust actuator assembled.
When placing into service proceed as follows:
- Using the handwheel, run the thrust actuator to approximately mid lift position.
- Apply brief pulses to the thrust actuator for each direction of movement and check
whether the directions of movement correspond to those desired. If this is not the case,
the pulse lines governing the retracting and extending action must be exchanged on the
thrust actuator.
- Run thrust actuator to the final position in each direction of movement and check whether
it switches off automatically and whether all externally moving parts are able to move
freely.
- If failing to function properly, check all installation and setting work previously carried out,
correcting if necessary, and afterwards place into service once again.
Page 12 0040501002 2608
The thrust actuator requires very little maintenance. Accordingly maintenance in specified
intervals is not necessary.
Depending on the conditions governing use, the maintenance and maintenance-intervals
have to be defined by the operator.
The thrust actuator must not be cleaned with high-pressure equipment or aggressive
solvents or detergents injurious to health or highly inflammable.
During and after cleaning, an inspection should be carried out of the sealing points on the
thrust actuator.
If there is any sign of lubricant escaping or dirt having accumulated, the sealing elements
must be repaired.
8.0 Troubleshooting
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
- It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
-

0040501002 2608 Page 13

ATTENTION !
Fault Possible Causes Remedy

Thrust actuator fails to move Power failure Ascertain and eliminate cause
Fuse has blown Replace fuse
Thrust actuator not properly Rectify connection on thrust
connected actuator in accordance with wiring
diagram
Short circuit due to: Ascertain exact cause,
- moisture - Dry the thrust actuator and
eliminate leakage
- wrong connection - Rectify connection on thrust
actuator in accordance with
wiring diagram
- motor has burned out - Check whether the mains voltage
agrees with the voltage specified
on the rating plate. Have motor
changed.
Connector contacts not plugged in/ Insert connector firmly in jack strip
not properly plugged into jack strip thus affected
Thrust actuator alternates Motor operating capacitor Have motor operating capacitor
between clockwise and defective replaced
counter-clockwise rotation
Thrust actuator fails to run to Load-dependent travel switches Remove thrust actuator and send
final positions and also out of to factory for repair
produces chatter
/ defective
Voltage drop due to excessively Lay connecting cables in
long connecting cables or accordance with requisite output
inadequate conductor cross-
section
Mains fluctuations beyond Arrange for "clean" mains system
permissible tolerance travels within requisite tolerances
System pressure too high Reduce system pressure
Periodic failure on thrust Loose connection on feedline Tighten connections on terminal
actuator strips
Page 14 0040501002 2608

10.0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator
ATTENTION !
- The supply line for connecting up the thrust actuator must be in the dead state
i.e. disconnected while dismantlement work is being carried out. After being
disconnected, the mains power must be prevented from being switched back
on again accidentally.
- The system must be run down (depressurised state) as the valve cone is not
held without the thrust actuator and would thus be conducted by the system
pressure.
- Valve plug approximately in mid lift position - on no account supported inside a
seat!
To dismantle the thrust actuator proceed as follows:
- Loosen hexagon nut on the hood, carefully remove hood.
- Disconnect all cables led into thrust actuator from outside and remove from thrust
actuator.
- Place hood on carefully from above and fix in place with hexagon nut.
- Loosen grub screw inside torsion safety feature; screw coupling out of torsion safety
feature.
- Loosen clamping bolts connecting the thrust actuator to the fitting.
- Remove thrust actuator from valve.
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Customer Support Center
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Phone +49 40 58 96 500

Fax +48 40 73 80 585
Mail to: info@gea-westfalia.de
0040501002 2608 Page 15

Page 16 0040501002 2608

Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauges
Stainless Steel Case, Crimped-on Ring, Accuracy Class 1.6 Nom. Size 63 (2½") Model RgG
Glycerine Filled
Application
For fluid and gaseous media (non-corrosive to brass and bronze),
which are not highly viscous and do not tend to polymerize
Nominal Case Size

63 (2½")
Accuracy Class (EN 837-1)

1.6 ( i.e. accuracy error max. + 1.6% of full scale value)
Pressure Ranges (EN 837-1)

0 ... 1 to 0 ... 600 bar 1)
also vacuum and compound ranges
Pressure Limitations
Steady pressure: 75% of full scale value
Cyclic pressure: 65% of full scale value
Temporary: full scale value
How to Order:
For ordering gauges from stock1) simply state the ordering number
Temperature Limitations as follows:
Ambient temperature: -20 / +60 °C (-4 / +140 °F) Bottom connection Center back
Pressure ranges
Medium temperature: max. +60 °C (+140 °F) connection
bar Ordering number (stock):
Further information about advantages, applications, specifications, temperature
limitations and pressure ranges of Bourdon tube pressure gauges, accuracy classes -1-0 L-631002 L-631102
1.0 and 1.6 according to EN, can be found in our model overview 1000
-1/+3 L-631005
0-4 L-631013 L-631113
Standard Configuration 0-6 L-631014 L-631114
Process Connection 0-10 L-631015 L-631115
G ¼ B (¼" BSP) bottom connection brass
0-16 L-631016 L-631116
Bourdon Tube 0-25 L-631017 L-631117
• up to 40 bar = bronze, C-form, soft soldered
0-40 L-631018 L-631118
• 60 bar and up = bronze, helical, silver brazed
0-60 L-631019 L-631119
Movement 0-100 L-631020 L-631120
Brass / German silver
0-160 L-631021 L-631121
Dial 0-250 L-631022 L-631122
Aluminum alloy, black figures, white background 0-400 L-631023 L-631123
Pointer 0-600 L-631024 L-631124

Aluminum alloy black Pressure gauges with center back connection (L-6311..) can be
ordered optionally with front flange (Fr) or U-clamp (BFr).
Case and Ring
Stainless steel, ring crimped-on Ordering Examples: 35 x L-631022
20 x L-631102, Fr
Filling Liquid To avoid mistakes it will be helpful to give a short description of the
Glycerine instrument (model, nom. size, case configuration, pressure range),
especially for special versions resp. instruments not available from
Window stock:
Polycarbonate
Model, nom. size, ordering
no. for wetted partes: RgG 63–1
Code letters for
Optional Special Configurations ase configuration: rm, rmFr, rmBFr
• ¼" 1
Other process connections (G / B resp. / BSP ,
NPT), minimum order quantity 10 pieces
8
1
8
1
/8 " NPT, (see reverse side) without code letter = bottom connection
Pressure range: according to EN 837-1,
• Front flange for versions with center back connection e.g. -1-0, 0-6 or 0-160 bar
Options: see left, e.g. ¼" NPT connection
• U-clamp for versions with center back connection (Minimum ordering quantity!)
1)
Examples for Ordering Information:
Pressure ranges -1/0 and 0/4 to 0/600 bar are available from stock (without
obligation). For all the other pressure ranges a minimum order quantity of 10 •50 x RgG 63–1, 0-2.5 bar 1)
pieces and the actual delivery time has to be considered. •50 x RgG 63–1 rmFr, 0-160 bar, ¼" NPT 1)
Subsidiary Company and Sales East Germany and Eastern Europe
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH 1112

Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel - Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Phone: (0 28 03) 91 30–0 • Fax: (0 28 03) 10 35
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com
Phone: (0 37 74) 58–0 • Fax: (0 37 74) 58–545
manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
3/06
Case Configurations, Code Letters, Dimensional Data and Weight
Bottom connection, Center back connection,

without code letter to add code letters: rm
Center back connection, Center back connection,

front flange, U-clamp for panel mounting,
code letters: rmFr code letters: rmBFr
Dimensional Data ( mmm / inches ) and Weight ( kg / lb )

Weight
Nom. Size a b c c1 c2 d1 d2 d3 d4 D G g h ±1 M s s1 SW
(approx.)
63 10 32 5 2 13 75 88 3.6 74 67 G¼B 58 54 85 3 6.5 17 .25

2½" .39 1.26 .2 .08 .51 2.95 3.46 .14 2.91 2.64 ¼" BSP 2.28 2.13 3.35 .12 .26 .67 .55
The information in this leaflet is given in good faith, but we reserve the right to make changes without notice.
1112 -03/06 P. 2 of 2 • ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, Tel. +49(0)2803/9130–0, mail@armaturenbau.com • MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, Tel. +49(0)3774/58–0, mail@manotherm.com
Operating Instruction Pressure Gauges
Selection Criteria, Set-up Options, Installation and Operating Instructions
Contents
Page Page
1. Important Note, Scope 1 7. Operation 7
2. Measuring Units, Construction of 8. Maintenance and Repair 8
Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals 1 9. Electrical Accessories 8
3. Selection Criteria 3 10. Storage 8
4. Accessories 5 11. Installation in potentially explosive areas 8
5. Set-up Options 6 11.1 General Information 8
6. Installation 6 11.2 Marking for explosive area 8
1. Important Note, Scope

1.1 Important Note
Please inspect the transport packaging and the delivered goods immediately upon their receipt to determine their
integrity and completeness. In case of returns, please use the original packaging.
1.2 Scope
The information provided in this operating instruction, relating to the selection, application, set-up options, instal-
lation and operation, applies to pressure gauges with elastic element.
2. Elastic Elements, Construction of Pressure Gauges and Chemical Seals
2.1 Elastic Elements
Bourdon Tube Types:
C-Type Bourdon Tube Helical Bourdon Tube
Diaphragm Type: Capsule Type:

horizontal vertical
Sales and Export South, West, North Subsidiary Company, Sales and Export East
ARMATURENBAU GmbH MANOTHERMBeierfeldGmbH B1
Manometerstraße 5 • D - 46487 Wesel-Ginderich Am Gewerbepark 9 • D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld
Tel.: +49 (0) 28 03/ 91 30–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 28 03/ 10 35 Tel.: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–0 • Fax: +49 (0) 37 74/ 58–545 02/14
armaturenbau.com • mail@armaturenbau.com manotherm.com • mail@manotherm.com
2.2 Construction of Pressure Gauges

Pressure Gauge with C-type Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge with Horizontal Diaphragm
Hairspring
of the movement
Pinion Bourdon tube Dial

Pinion
Tip of the
Dial bourdon tube Toothed
Zero dead stop quadrant
Pointer
Link
Upper
Link screw measuring Connecting
flange rod
Pointer Toothed quadrant
Overrange
protector Upper movement plate
Stem
Process connection
(socket)
(here) radial bottom
Diaphragm,
connection Lower horizontal
measuring
Process connection,
flange
radial bottom con-
nection
Pressure Gauge with Diaphragm Capsule Pressure Gauge with Vertical Diaphragm
Capsule Connecting rod
Diaphragm,
Pointer vertical Dial
Process Pointer
connection
Movement (here) bottom
connection Movement
Process Dial
connection
(here) centre
back connection
Pressure Gauge in line with Safety Requirements according to EN 837-1, S3 (formerly DIN 16 006 Part 1 and Part 2)
Full blow-out back Case with solid

front Window made of
multilayer safety
glass
Bayonet ring
B1 - 02/14 EN - p. 2 of 8 ARMATURENBAU GmbH, D-46487 Wesel-Ginderich, tel.: +49 (0) 2803/9130-0, e-mail: mail@armaturenbau.com MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH, D-08344 Grünhain-Beierfeld, tel: +49 (0) 3774/58-0, e-mail: mail@manotherm.com, 01/14 DE
2.3 Types of Chemical Seals
Diaphragm Capsule In-line
3. Selection Criteria Bourdon tube pressure gauges are applied for pressure
The user has to ensure that the proper pressure gauge ranges from 0.6 bar to 4,000 bar, generally in the accu-
is selected regarding indication range and type (e.g. racy classes 0.6 to 2.5.
resistance of the materials against medium, atmosphere The influence of temperature changes on the indication
and temperature, overrange protection etc.). The regu- mainly depends on the temperature coefficient (TEC=
lations applying to the particular application as well as change in stiffness caused by change in temperature)
EN 837-2 have to be regarded. of the modulus of elasticity of the bourdon tube.
Depending on the material, the accuracy error caused
3.1 Principles of Measurement by differing temperatures lies between 0.3 % and
The pressure gauges described in this operating instruc- 0.4 % per 10 K.
tion contain measuring elements that deform elastically Diaphragm Pressure Gauges
when subjected to pressure.This motion is transferred to The diaphragms are corrugated and circular shaped.
a movement. Due to their robustness and easy handling, The pressure acts on one side of the diaphragm. The
these instruments (pressure gauges) are widely used in deflection of the diaphragm is a measure for the pres-
pressure measurement. sure. Diaphragms have a relatively high restoring force.
The measuring elements are generally made of copper Therefore, the influence of additional accessories is lower
alloys or alloyed steel. compared to bourdon tube gauges. Due to the annular
Pressure Gauges with Bourdon Tube fixing arrangement of the diaphragm it is less sensitive
Bourdon tubes are circular bent tubes with an oval cros- to vibrations. Diaphragms can be protected against high
section. The pressure that is to be measured acts on the overload, by supporting the measuring unit. They can be
interior of the tube so that the tube's oval cross section protected against corrosive media by applying coatings or
approaches a circular form. The hoop stress produced foils. Diaphragm gauges can be applied to an advantage
by this deformation causes the arced Bourdon tube with highly viscous and crystallising media, as extended
to open. The end of the bourdon tube that is not fixed connection bores, open connection flanges or purge
performs a motion, which is a measure for the pressure. holes allow for cleaning options.
For pressure ranges up to 40 bar, circular bent bourdon
tubes with a torsion angle of 270° are generally used. There are gauges with horizontal diaphragm and
For higher pressure ranges, helical bourdon tubes with with vertical diaphragm, i.e. where the diaphragm
several torsions are applied. is placed in parallel to the dial. For pressure ranges
Bourdon tubes have a relatively low restoring force. < 0.6 bar, diaphragms with a diameter of 160 mm are
generally used, whereas for higher pressure ranges
Therefore, when using additional accessories such diaphragms with a diameter of 100 mm are used. Due
as indicating pointers, limit switch contact assemblies to the annular fixing arrangement of the diaphragm, the
or potentiometric transducers, their influence on the deviation in indication caused by temperature changes is
indication has to be taken into account. significantly greater compared to bourdon tube gauges.
Diaphragm pressure gauges are applied for pressure
Pressure gauges with a bourdon tube can only be pro- ranges from 10 mbar to 25 bar in the accuracy classes
tected against overload to a limited extent, by supporting of 1.6 and 2.5, exceptionally also in 4.0.
the elastic element at a specific pressure limit.
Operating Instructions Pressure Gauges
Capsule Pressure Gauges
A diaphragm capsule consists of two corrugated, cir- In both cases, the susceptibility to contamination is
cular shaped diaphragms or a diaphragm and a base disadvantageous. Attenuators at the movement only
plate that are assembled pressure tight at the edge. decelerate the pointer fluctuation. Fluid filled cases
The pressure is introduced at the centre of one of the dampen the fluctuation of the measuring element and
diaphragms and acts on the inside of the capsule. The reduce the wear of the moving parts.
hereby produced lifting movement is a measur for the
pressure. Temperature
Capsule pressure gauges are not suited for liquid media. If the temperature of the medium at the measuring point
They can be applied for pressure ranges from 2.5 mbar deviates from the operating temperature specified for the
to 600 mbar in accuracy classes from 0.6 to 1.6. pressure gauge (see section 7., as well as EN 837-1,
The deviation in indication caused by changes in tem- -2, -3), a measuring line with sufficient length, a siphon
perature can lie between 0.3 % and 0.4 % per 10 K, or a chemical seal with capillary line must be connected
depending on the material. upstream to the pressure gauge.
The influence on the indication owing to deviating instru-
3.2 Pressure Ranges ment temperatures from +20 °C must be considered.
The operating pressure should lie in the middle third of
the pressure range of the gauge. The maximum pressure Highly Viscous, Crystallising and Solid-Containing
load should not exceed 75 % of the full scale value at Media
steady load or 65 % of the full scale value at dynamic For measurements of highly viscous, crystallising or
load, cf. EN 837-2. solid-containing media, the use of diaphragm or bourdon
tube pressure gauges with attached chemical seal (see
3.3 Accuracy Limits section 4.4) is recommended.
The error limits for pressure gauges are defined in
EN 837-1 (bourdon tube gauges) and EN 837-3 (capsule Corrosive Media
and diaphragm gauges – formerly DIN 16 005). If corrosive media can be kept away from the measuring
Pressure gauges of the classes 0.1 to 0.6 and higher element by separating agents, then standard pressure
are preferably used in laboratories and workshops for gauges may be used. Otherwise, the selection of suitable
accurate measurements. material is mandatory, whereby the user must provide
Pressure gauges of the classes 1.0 and 1.6 are mainly the manufacturer with every information on the materials
used for measurements on machines and production that are compatible with the medium under the specific
facilities. measuring conditions, cf. EN 837-2, 4.3.
Pressure gauges of the classes 2.5 and 4.0 are used for Due to the restricted choice of materials for the elastic
monitoring tasks without special accuracy requirements. elements, diaphragm pressure gauges with a protective
lining possibly have to be used, or chemical seals made
3.4 Conditions of Usage of media resistant materials need to be connected
When selecting pressure gauges the selection criteria upstream to a bourdon tube pressure gauge.
and installation recommendations in accordance with
EN 837-2 (formerly DIN 16 005 Part 1 and Part 2) as well Safety
as the instructions provided here, especially in sections A higher risk exists, for example, with gases and fluids
3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 5. must be considered. under high pressure. In case of leakage or bursting of
The use of pressure gauges which do not meet the pressure-retaining components, employees standing
actual operating conditions, can cause great conse- in front of the window of the instrument, should not be
quential damages. endangered by medium emerging to the front. Safety
pressure gauges with a blow-out device at the rear, for
3.4.1 Pressure Media Properties example a blow-out back, provide for protection (see fig.
Pressure History on page 2, at the bottom).
Rapid pressure changes or pressure strokes should not With hazardous media, for example
act abruptly on the measuring element. – oxygen
Pressure strokes must not exceed the pressure limits – acetylene
specified for the pressure gauges. If necessary, overload – combustible substances
protection (see section 4) must be connected upstream. – toxic substances
Pressure changes of >10% of the full scale value per as well as refrigerating units, compressors etc., the
second impair the readings of the measured values. applicable regulations must be considered.
Moreover, this will severely reduce the service life of
the pressure gauges. In such cases, attenuators must In accordance with EN 837-1, 9.7 fluid filled pressure
be provided. gauges must be equipped with blow-out devices (version
With snubbers (restrictor screw or adjustable snubber) S1, or S2 resp. S3 according to EN 837-1).
the inlet cross section can be significantly reduced,
thus delaying the change in pressure in the measuring
element. The installation of an integrated restrictor screw
(reduction of the cross section of the measuring element)
is also possible.
3.4.2 Ambient Conditions

Vibrations Siphons
If an exposure of the pressure gauge to vibrations can To protect the shut-off fittings and pressure gauges
not be avoided by way of suitable installations, gauges against heating through hot media (e.g. steam), suf-
equipped with dampened movement or with fluid filling ficiently long measuring lines or siphons should be
must be used.
installed.
Ambient Temperature
Chemical Seals
The error limit given on the dial applies to a reference
With aggressive, hot, highly viscous or crystallising
temperature of +20 °C. Deviating temperatures have an
media, chemical seals can be mounted to bourdon tube
influence on the indication. The extent of the influence
gauges as separating element in order to prevent the
depends on the measuring principle (see section 3.1).
At outdoor installations, the ambient conditions must ingress of such media into the measuring element. The
be taken into account through selection or protection, pressure is transmitted to the measuring element by a
in order to prevent, for example, the pressure gauge neutral fluid that is selected depending on measuring
from freezing over at temperatures below 0 °C. In fluid range, temperature, viscosity and other influences,
filled instruments the viscosity of the fluid increases as whereby the compatibility of this fluid with the medium
the temperature drops causing a considerable delay of has to be considered.
indication. The ambient temperature must also be taken
into account regarding the maximum allowed operating Chemical seals are available in different configurations,
temperature for the pressure gauge. see figure in section 2.3, whereas the diaphragm seal
is the most commonly used model.
Corrosive Atmosphere
In corrosive atmospheres, correspondingly suitable With in-line and flange type diaphragm seals the pres-
casings and components made of corrosion resistant sure gauge must be mounted at works to the chemical
materials must be provided. seal, in accordance to the given installation position.
Special surface finishings help protect the pressure
gauge cases on the outside. Pressure gauge and chemical seal should not be
disconnected.
4. Accessories
Shut-off Fittings for Pressure Gauges Possible errors occuring due to mounting of a chemical
It is recommended to install a shut-off device between seal to a pressure gauge have to be considered.
the measuring point and the pressure gauge, which
allows for an exchange of the pressure gauge and check Overrange Protection Devices
of zero point during continued operation of the system. If, for operational reasons the indication pressure range
Depending on the application, either cocks or valves are has to lie below the maximum operating pressure, the
used. Cocks have three positions: pressure gauge can be protected against damages by
– Venting: The supply line is shut-off and connecting overrange protection devices.
the gauge is connected to the At a pressure stroke the overrange protector shuts down
atmosphere. The zero point can immediately, at slow rising pressure gradually. The clo-
be checked. sing pressure that needs to be set, therefore depends
– Operation: The supply line is open, the gauge on the progress in time.
is pressurised.
– Blow-out: The supply line is open, the medi- Highly viscous and contaminated media, however, can
um escapes into the atmosphere. impair the function of the overrange protector or render
The gauge is not working. it ineffective.
With valves (e.g. according to DIN 16 270 and DIN 16 271),
a venting screw is usually provided between valve seat Capsule and diaphragm pressure gauges can also be
and pressure gauge. produced overrange protected (3-fold, 5-fold or 10-fold
Venting to the atmosphere should be thus arranged that overrange protected).
employees are not endangered by escaping medium.
Environmental pollution should be avoided.
With certain applications (e.g. steam boilers), the shut-
off fittings must have a test port, to allow for checking
of the pressure gauge without having to remove it from
the system.
Pressure Gauge Holder

If the measuring line is not sufficiently stable to support
the pressure gauge free from vibrations, a suitable holder
is to be provided.
Table 1 State of medium fluid gaseous
fluid partly fully gaseous partly fully
State of the filling in the measuring degassing degassing condensed condensed
line (humid)
condensate boiling "liquid gases" dry moist air water vapour

Examples fluids air flue gas
1 2 3 4 5 6
a) Pressure gauge above

the measurement port
7 8 9 10 11
b) Pressure gauge below

the measurement port
The arrangements 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 and 11 are to be preferred.
5. Set-up Options The pressure gauge should be installed in such a way

General Remarks that the temperature does not drop below or exceed the
Proven measuring arrangements and proposals for permissible operating temperature (see also sections
components are detailed in VDE/VDI 3512 sheet 3. 3.4.1 and 7). In the process, the influence of convection
Table 1 shows an overview of possible arrangements. and thermal radiation should be considered. When the
measuring element of a pressure gauge is filled with
Pressure Measuring Port water or a water mixture, the instrument must be pro-
The pressure measuring port should be installed where tected against frost.
the flow is unimpaired and permanent measuring condi- Generally, the pressure gauge is mounted with a vertical
tions exist. It is recommended to provide for a sufficiently dial. In all other cases, the symbol on the dial indicating
large bore for the pressure measurement and to lock the the position according to EN 837 (formerly DIN 16 257)
measuring port with a shut-off device. applies.
Measuring Line A difference in height between the pressure measuring

The measuring line is the connection between pres- port and the pressure gauge causes a shift at the start
sure measuring port and pressure gauge. The inside of measurement, when the medium in the measuring
diameter of the measuring line should be sufficiently line does not have the same density as the ambient air.
large in order to avoid blockage. The measuring line This shift at the start of measurement Dp results from
should have a steady slope (recommended is a slope the difference in density (rM - rL) and the difference in
of 1:15). With gaseous media, a drain should be provi- height Dh: 10-5 · ( rM - rL ) g · Dh
ded at the lowest point, with high-viscosity fluids a vent
should be provided at the highest point. With gases or Dp = Shift at start of measurement (bar)
rM = Density of the medium kg/m3
fluids containing solids, separators should be provided rL = Density of the air (1.205 at 20 °C) kg/m3
that can be demounted from the system and emptied
during operation, due to shut-off valves. The measuring Dh = Difference in height m
line should be implemented and installed in such a way g = Gravitational acceleration m/s2
that it withstands loads caused by expansion, vibration (approx. gravitational acceleration = 9.81 m/s2)
or thermal effects. The indication is decreased by Dp when the pressure
gauge is positioned higher than the pressure measuring
Shut-off Valves at the Pressure Gauge port, and increased by Dp when it is positioned lower.
Shut-off valves at the pressure gauge serve the purpose
of checking the zero setting or exchanging the pressure 6. Installation
gauge during operation (cf. section 4). Pressure gauges should only be installed by trained
engineering personnel.
Pressure Gauge For measurement arrangement see section 5.
The pressure gauge has to be mounted free of vibrations
and so that the dial is easily readable. When reading During installation or removal, pressure gauges should
the dial, parallax errors should be avoided. It has to be never be held at the case but at the wrench flat of the
ensured that any blow-out devices in the pressure gauge socket. It must be ensured that the matching process
are not blocked (cf. EN 837-1, 9.7). connection is selected (nominal width, if required sui-
table sealing face, etc.).
For instruments with thread connection, an installation 7. Operation
with clamping sleeve or union nut is recommended, in Shut-off devices should be opened slowly in order to
order to allow for proper readability. avoid sudden pressure peaks when putting into ope-
Instruments with flange connections are fitted to the ration.
counter flange and secured with suitable screws. Ensure
that the screws are firmly tightened. Application Range
The connections must be tight. Therefore, sealings The application range for steady loads is indicated on
made of suitable medium-resistant material should be the dial of many pressure gauges by a pressure limit
used for the connection. indication mark (see EN 837-1, EN 837-3).
For the sealing of pressure measurement connections At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nomi-
with cylindrical thread spigots, flat sealing rings accor- nal case sizes 100, 160 or 250 are loadable to the full
ding to EN 837-1 or profile packings, resp. lense-type scale value. At dynamic load only the 0.9-fold as peak
sealing rings for corresponding high pressure connec- load of that pressure is permissible, for pressure ranges
tions have to be applied at the sealing surface. Tapered of 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar only 2/3 max. of the full
threads (e.g. NPT-threads) are sealed additionally with scale pressure value. Bourdon tube pressure gauges
sealants such as for example PTFE-tape (cf. EN 837-2). are overrange protected up to 1.3 of the full scale value
(instruments with the ranges 0/2500 bar and 0/4000 bar
can only be loaded to their full scale value!).
cylindrical thread tapered thread At steady load bourdon tube pressure gauges of nominal
case sizes 40, 50, 60, 63, 80 and 72x72 are loadable up
to 3/4 of the full scale value, at dynamic load up to 2/3
wrench flats maximum of the full scale value and only temporarily to
the full scale value.
sealing in the
sealing surface thread Diaphragm pressure gauges with vertical diaphragm are
loadable to the full scale value at steady load, at dynamic
load to the 0.9-fold of the full scale value.
For pressure gauges with pressure ranges of < 6 bar and Diaphragm pressure gauges with horizontal diaphragm
with a pressure relief vent Ø of 13 mm at the top of the are overrange protected to the 5-fold of the full scale
case, it is recommended to cut off the fitting at the filling value (custom-made instruments also higher), but never
plug in order to allow for internal pressure compensation higher than 40 bar.
through venting of the gauge.
Capsule pressure gauges are loadable to the full scale
If the pressure gauge is positioned below the pressure value at steady load, at dynamic load maximum to the
relief vent, the measuring line should be rinsed thorough- 0.9-fold of the full scale value. Just as bourdon tube
ly before putting into operation. pressure gauges they are 1.3-fold overrange protected
(custom-made instruments also higher).
During pressure tests on pipes or vessels, the pressure
gauge must not be exposed to higher loads than indi- Zero Point Check
cated by the pressure limit indication mark on the In order to check the zero point of the pressure gauge
dial; resp. the pressure limit at steady load, specified during operation, the required shut-off device has to be
for the pressure gauge, should not be exceeded (see closed (see section 4.) and pressure is relieved. The
section 7.). pointer must rest within the zero range indicated by I.
If the pointer comes to rest outside this range, a perma-
With diaphragm gauges the clamping bolts for the upper nent deformation of the measruing unit can be assumed,
and lower flange must not be unloosened. which has to be checked thoroughly in order to avoid
The connections between pressure gauge and chemical accidents caused by measuring errors. Therefore, the
seal and possibly between chemical seal and capillary pressure gauge should be replaced and, if necessary,
line are not to be released. returned to the manufacturer for checking and repair.
Before removing the pressure gauge, the measuring Pressure Range Check
unit must be depressurised. Possibly the pressure must If the pressure range indication has to checked during
be relieved on the measuring line. Residues of the operation, the pressure gauge is separated from the
medium in demounted pressure gauges can endanger process via the required shut-off device with test port
personnel, facilities and the environment. Therefore, (see section 4.), and a test pressure is applied to the
precautionary measures must be taken. gauge. The error limits according to EN 837-1 resp.
EN 837-3 apply.
(Electrical accessories: see section 9).
Temperature-Resistance
The permissible operating temperatures of the pressure
gauge must not be exceeded.
The temperature resistance resp. the permissible If specified, suitable switch amplifiers or multifunctional
operating temperature generally lies between -40 °C to relais must be used (e.g. for instruments with inductive
+60 °C maximum (cf. EN 837-1 and EN 837-3 ), whereas contacts). The valid operating instructions must be
unfilled gauges with brazed bourdon tubes withstand considered.
measuring temperatures of up to +100 °C or with shiel-
ded arc welded bourdon tubes in stainless steel cases 10. Storage
up to +200 °C. During storage, the pressure gauges should remain
Special versions that are labelled accordingly (tA / tR) in their original packaging and be stored protected
can be suitable for higher temperatures. against damages caused through external influences.
Note: These are only pieces of information on tempera- After possible temporary removal of a pressure gauge
ture resistance of the materials resp. the soldered joints (e.g. for a test), it should be replaced in the original
or welded seams. The information on indication errors packging for further storage.
due to deviation from the reference temperature has to
be considered! In general, during storage the minimum temperature
Further details ca be found in our model overview 1000 should not fall below -40 °C and the maximum tem-
for bourdon tube pressure gauges. perature should not exceed +60 °C (cf. EN 837-1 and
EN 837-3).
© 2014 ARMATURENBAU GmbH and MANOTHERM Beierfeld GmbH · Technical changes, replacement of materials and printing errors excepted!
Cleaning Temperature
When rinsing the measuring line, the permissible ope- 11. Installation in Potentially Explosive Areas
rating temperature of the pressure gauge (see above) 11.1 General Information
must not be exceeded. If necessary, the gauge has to Pressure Gauges are mechanical pressure measuring
be shut-off or removed. instruments and when operated as intended, do not
The maximum cleaning temperature tR of pressure show sources of ignition. Versions made of stainless
gauges with chemical seals must not be exceeded. steel and with laminated safety glass are suitable for
application in areas of category 2 and 3 according to the
8. Maintenance and Repair
ATEX-Directive 94/9/EC. For applications in category 1
In general, pressure gauges are maintenance-free. (e.g. installation to Zone 0), only pressure gauges with
integrated, type-approved flame arresters, our model
They should only be repaired by the manufacturer. Adapt-FS, are suitable. This protection system prevents
Before returning an instrument for repair, all wetted a flame penetration at deflagration of explosive vapor-air
parts must be cleaned thoroughly, especially regarding resp. gas-air mixtures of explosion groups IIA, IIB and
hazardous media (see also section 6.). The repair IIC in an upstreamed volume of max. 0.2 l. The flame
order should include a description of the medium resp. arrester "Adapt-FS" is certified with
a declaration of contamination. IIG IIC PTB 12 ATEX 4001 X
9. Electrical Accessories on condition that the operating pressure does not ex-
Installation and electrical connections should only be ceed 1.1 bar abs. and the operating temperature does
performed by trained engineering personnel. not exceed 60 °C.
Instruments with electric accessories are marked with
a nameplate that indicates the electrical connection of To avoid heating of the measuring elements of bourdon
the instrument. tube pressure gauges, dynamic load is not allowed with
Consideration of load limits is obligatory. Exceeding of gaseous media!
load limits can cause damage.
The national and international safety regulations (e.g. 11.2 Marking for Explosive Area
VDE 0100) must be considered during installation, Pressure gauges without limit switch contacts for
starting up and operation of the instruments. application in potentially explosive areas, are marked
as follows:
It must be ensured that the cable diameters match the Example: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
nominal widths of the sealing inserts. Screw fittings must Type RCh 100 – 3
be tightened firmly. Only then compliance with certified Manufacturer ARMATURENBAU
protection standards can be ensured. In versions with Manometerstraße 5 • D-46487 Wesel
angular plugs, plug connectors or terminal boxes, the
centrally arranged fixing screws must be tightened Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
hand-tight.
Type RCh 100 – 3
For the connection of pressure transmitters DMU, only
shielded cables are to be used in order to conserve the II 2Gc
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). The shield of the
II 2Dc
cable must be connected with the case resp. with the
ground terminal of the angular plug.
Temperature range -25…+75 °C
The CE-mark according to EMC-guidelines on instru- (content binding, partition free)
ments with magnetic contact only applies, when the
frequency of operation does not exceed 5 switching Please contact the manufacturer in case of uncertain-
cycles per minute. ties.
NAE 8256
ENGINE PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
Swiss based Trafag is a leading international supplier of high quality
sensors and monitoring instruments for measurement of pressure
and temperature. The engine and shipbuilding pressure transmitter
NAE 8256 features the extremely robust and stable thin-film-on-steel
sensor element. The NAE 8256 is the smallest pressure transmitter of
its kind with ship approvals. The wide temperature range from -40°C
up to +125°C and triple overpressure safety makes it the first choice
in rough environments such as marine applications.
04/2017
Applications Features
N Shipbuilding N Measuring accuracy 0.3 %, 0.5 %
N Engine manufacturing N Completely welded steel sensor system without additional
Hydraulics
Data sheet H72305g

N seals
N Smallest design
N High resistance to over pressure
N Excellent long-term stability
Subject to change
Technical Data
Measuring principle Thin film on steel Media temperature –40°C ... +125°C
Measuring range 0 ... 10 to 0 ... 600 bar Ambient temperature –40°C ... +125°C
0 ... 150 to 0 ... 7500 psi
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Approval / conformity ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, KRS, NKK, RINA,
RMRS
Accuracy @ 25°C typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.5 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.3 % FS typ.
Trafag Sensors & Controls Industriestrasse 11 Tel. +41 44 922 32 32 www.trafag.com

Switzerland 8608 Bubikon Fax +41 44 922 32 33 trafag@trafag.com
NAE 8256
Ordering information/type code
8256 . XX XX XX XX XX XX
Measuring Pressure Over Burst
Pressure
Over Burst
measurement measurement
range 1) pressure pressure pressure pressure
range range
[bar] [bar] [psi] [psi]
[bar] [psi]
0 ... 10 30 200 78 0 ... 150 450 2500 G8
0 ... 16 48 200 79 0 ... 200 600 2500 GA
0 ... 25 75 300 80 0 ... 250 750 2500 G9
0 ... 40 120 300 81 0 ... 300 900 4000 HA
0 ... 60 180 400 82 0 ... 400 1200 4000 H0
0 ... 100 300 500 83 0 ... 500 1200 4000 H1
0 ... 160 480 750 85 0 ... 1000 3000 5000 H2
0 ... 250 750 1000 74 0 ... 1500 4500 7000 H3
0 ... 400 1000 2000 84 0 ... 2000 6000 10000 H5
0 ... 600 1500 2500 86 0 ... 3000 9000 14500 G4
0 ... 5000 12500 21750 H4
0 ... 7500 18750 29000 H6
Sensor Relative pressure, accuracy: 0.5 % 25

Relative pressure, accuracy: 0.3 % 23
Pressure G1/4" male, seal: DIN 3869 (accessories 61/63/83) 17

connection 1/4" NPT male 30
M10x1 male 32
Electrical Male electrical plug, industrial standard, contact distance 9.4 mm, Mat. PA 01
connection Male electrical plug M12x1, 4-pole, Mat. PA 32
Male electrical plug M12x1, 5-pole, Mat. PA 35
Output Signal output Load resistance I (supply) U (supply)

4 ... 20 mA g See graphic 24 (9 ... 32) VDC 19
Accessories Female electrical plug M12x1, 5-pole 2) 33

Female electrical connector industrial standard 3) 34
Pressure peak damping element ø 0.4 mm 44
Seal FPM, -18°C ... +125°C 4) 61
Seal EPDM, -40°C ... +125°C 4) 63
Seal NBR, -25°C ... +100°C 4) 83
Special electrical connection: Pin 2 +, Pin 3 ground, Pin 4 -
90
(only for male electrical plug 01, industrial standard)
Special electrical connection: Pin 1 +, Pin 2 -, Pin 4 ground
E1
(only for output signal 19 and male electrical plug 32, M12x1, 4-pole)
1)
Customized pressure ranges upon request
2)
For electrical connections 32 and 35
3)
For electrical connection 01
4)
Only with pressure connection 17 (G1/4" m)
Standard products (extra short lead time)

Product No. Type Code Pressure range Over pressure Supply Accuracy @ 25°C
[bar] max. [VDC] typ.
[bar] [%]
NAE10.0A 8256 78 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 10 30 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE16.0A 8256 79 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 16 48 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE25.0A 8256 80 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 25 75 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE40.0A 8256 81 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 40 120 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE100.0A 8256 83 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 100 300 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE250.0A 8256 74 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 250 750 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE400.0A 8256 84 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 400 1000 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE600.0A 8256 86 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 600 1500 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
H72305g page 2/5

NAE 8256
Specifications
Accuracy TEB typ. @ -25 ... +85°C 0.5 %: ± 1.75 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 1.0 % FS typ.
Accuracy @ 25°C typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.5 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.3 % FS typ.
NLH @ 25°C (BSL) typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.2 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.2 % FS typ.
TC zero point and span typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.03 % FS/K typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.01 % FS/K typ.
Long term stability 1 year typ. ± 0.1 % FS typ.
Electrical Data Output / supply voltage 4 ... 20 mA: 24 (9...32) VDC
Rise time Typ. 1 ms / 10 ... 90 % nominal pressure
Switch-on-delay 100 ms
Inverse-polarity protection, short-circuit strenght 4 ... 20 mA: to Usupply = 32 V
@ 25°C during 5 min.
Environmental conditions Media temperature –40°C ... +125°C
Ambient temperature –40°C ... +125°C
1)
Protection IP65, IP67
Humidity Max. 95% relative
Vibration 15 g RMS (20...2000 Hz)
25 g sin (80...2000 Hz), 1 oct./min, (1x @ 25°C)
Shock 50 g / 11 ms
EMC Protection Emission EN/IEC 61000-6-3
Immunity EN/IEC 61000-6-2
Mechanical Data Sensor (wetted parts) 1.4542 (AISI630)
Pressure connection (wetted parts) 1.4542 (AISI630)
Housing 1.4301 (AISI304)
Sealing FPM/NBR/EPDM
Male electrical plug See ordering information
Weight ~ 50 g
Mounting torque 25 Nm
1)
See electrical connection
Measuring accuracy 0.5 % Measuring accuracy 0.3 %

7
6
5
4 4
3 3
Accuracy (%)
Accuracy (%)
2 2
1 1
0 0
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
-4 -4
-5
-6 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
-7 Temp. (°C)
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 max. typ. TEB (-25...+85)
Temp. (°C)
max. typ. TEB (-25...+85)
H72305g page 3/5

NAE 8256
Dimensions
27.5 7 28 10.2
3 2
4
Ø 18.8
3
M12x1
Ø 18.8
9.4
2 1
4
1
8256.XX.XXXX.01.XX.XX 8256.XX.XXXX.32.XX.XX
28 10.2
5 3 2
4 M12x1
1 Ø 18.8
8256.XX.XXXX.35.XX.XX
21 26 20.1
DIN EN ISO 6149-2

12 17 9.5
M10x1
1/4“ NPT
G1/4"
Seal
SW19
SW19
SW19
Ø 21
Ø 21
DIN 3869
Ø21
8256.XX.XX17.XX.XX.XX 8256.XX.XX30.XX.XX.XX 8256.XX.XX32.XX.XX.XX
54 ... 60 max. 5 mm 26
~Ø20
M3
27
8256.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.33 8256.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.34
H72305g page 4/5

NAE 8256
Protection / electrical connection
IP65*) IP67*)
Industrial standard M12x1
Contact distance 9.4 mm 4-pole 5-pole
01 32 35
3 3 2
2 5
3
2 1
4 4 4
1 1
90 E1
Output signal
2 2 1 1 4
1 4 3 2 1
4 3 4 4 5
8256.xx.xxxx.xx.19
*) Provided female connector is mounted according to instructions
4...20mA: min./max resistor vs. supply voltage @ Pmax = 100%

1200
1000 ........ Rmax

Rmin 100°C
Customer Load Resistor (Ohm)
Rmin 125°C
800
600
400
200
...
0 ....
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Customer Supply Voltage (V)
Additional information
Documents Data sheet www.trafag.com/H72305
Instructions www.trafag.com/H73303
Flyer www.trafag.com/H70684
H72305g page 5/5

1440013 /11 IM-S02-13
ST Issue 11
FT14
Ball Float Steam Trap ½" (DN15) to 1" (DN25)
Installation and Maintenance Instructions
1. General
safety information
2. General
product information
3. Installation
4. Commissioning
5. Operation
6. Maintenance
7. Spare parts
Printed in the
IM-S02-13 STUK
Issue 11 © Copyright 2005
1
1. General safety information
Safe operation of the unit can only be guaranteed if it is properly installed, commissioned
and maintained by a qualified person (see Section 11 of the attached Supplementary
Safety Information) in compliance with the operating instructions. General installation
and safety instructions for pipeline and plant construction, as well as the proper use of
tools and safety equipment must also be complied with.
Warning
The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical
injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.
Isolation
Consider whether closing isolating valves will put any other part of the system or
personnel at risk. Dangers might include; isolation of vents and protective devices or
alarms. Ensure isolation valves are turned off in a gradual way to avoid system shocks.
Pressure
Before attempting any maintenance consider what is or may have been in the pipeline.
Ensure that any pressure is isolated and safely vented to atmospheric pressure before
attempting to maintain the product, this is easily achieved by fitting Spirax Sarco
depressurisation valves type DV (see separate literature for details). Do not assume
that the system is depressurised even when a pressure gauge indicates zero.
Temperature
Allow time for temperature to normalise after isolation to avoid the danger of burns and
consider whether protective clothing (including safety glasses) is required.
Disposal
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this
product providing due care is taken.
2 IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11
2. General product information
2.1 General description
The FT14 is an SG iron ball float steam trap with integral automatic air venting facility.
It is available with screwed or flanged horizontal connections with flow from right to left (R-L)
or left to right (L-R). The screwed version is also available with vertical connections (FT14V)
with flow downwards.
If required the flanged version can be modified on site to the vertical orientation.
2.2 Optional extras

An optional steam lock release (SLR) valve (designated 'C' on the nomenclature)
FT14C can be fitted to the trap to prevent steam locking of the system, this feature is
available in addition to the air vent.
FT14X Optional integral strainer screen.
Standards
The product fully complies with the requirements of the European Pressure Equipment
Directive 97 /23 /EC.
Certification
This product is available with material certification to EN 10204 2.2.
Note: All certification /inspection requirements must be stated at the time of order placement.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
FT14 (R-L) screwed FT14C (R-L) screwed
Main valve assembly size 1"
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
FT14 (R-L) flanged FT14C (R-L) flanged
IM-S02-13 ST Issue 11 3
2.3 Sizes and pipe connections
½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP or NPT.
DN15, DN20 and DN25 standard flange PN16, ANSI 150, JIS 10 and KS 10.
2.4 Pressure /temperature limits (ISO 6552)

Pressure psi g
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
250 482
Temperature °C
Temperature °F
200 400
150 300
100 Steam
200
saturation
50 curve 100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region.
Body design conditions PN16

PMA Maximum allowable pressure @ 120°C (248°F) 16 bar g (232 psi g)
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 250°C (482°F)
Minimum allowable temperature 0°C (32°F)
Maximum operating pressure
PMO 14 bar g (203 psi g)
for saturated steam service
TMO Maximum operating temperature @ 12 bar g (174 psi g) 250°C (482°F)
Minimum operating temperature 0°C (32°F)
Maximum FT14-4.5 4.5 bar (65.25 psi g)
DPMX differential FT14-10 10 bar (145 psi g)
pressure FT14-14 14 bar (203 psi g)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 24 bar g (348 psi g)
3. Installation
Note: Before actioning any installation observe the 'Safety information' in Section 1.
Refering to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions, name-plate and Technical Information
Sheet, check that the product is suitable for the intended installation.
3.1 Check materials, pressure and temperature and their maximum values. If the maximum
operating limit of the product is lower than that of the system in which it is being fitted,
ensure that a safety device is included in the system to prevent overpressurisation.
3.2 Determine the correct installation situation and the direction of fluid flow.
3.3 Remove protective covers from all connections and the protective film from all name-plates
before installation on steam or other high temperature applications.
Installation note:
- If the trap is to discharge to atmosphere ensure it is to a safe place, the discharging fluid
may be at a temperature of 100°C (212°F).
- The trap must be fitted with the float arm in a horizontal plane so that it rises and falls
vertically, therefore the arrow on the name-plate must point downwards.
- Unless specified, traps will be supplied with horizontal connections and with
right to left flow (R-L). Traps can be supplied with vertical connections with flow
from top to bottom or horizontal connections with flow from right to left (R-L) or left to
right (L-R).
- The connection orientation can be changed on site by undoing the four cover bolts
and moving the cover to the preferred orientation. A new gasket must always be fitted.
- Minimum withdrawal distance to remove cover is 105 mm (4.13").
Installation of the Steam Lock Release Unit (SLR)

3.4 The SLR valve is fitted to all float traps where a suffix 'C' is hard stamped on the nameplate
e.g. FT14-10C. 'C' = Combined steam lock release and thermostatic air vent (TV).
3.5 Check if the application requires the SLR valve for correct operation. The SLR should
only be used to prevent 'steam locking' and therefore is designed to pass only a
small amount of steam.
3.6 The SLR unit will be dispatched, pre-set to a partial bleed condition. The unit should
be screwed clockwise to close and anticlockwise to open. When required the
SLR should be used as a controlled continuous bleed, it is not recommended that
the SLR be left in the fully open condition as this may lead to premature trap failure and
more frequent maintenance schedules.
Warning
The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may cause physical injury
if not handled and disposed of carefully.
Please consult Spirax Sarco should further information be required.
4. Commissioning
After installation or maintenance ensure that the system is fully functioning. Carry out tests on
any alarms or protective devices.
5. Operation
The float trap is a continuous discharge trap, removing condensate the instant it forms. On
start-up, the thermostatic air vent allows air to bypass the main valve preventing the system air
binding. Hot condensate will close the air vent tightly, but as soon as it enters the main chamber
of the trap, the float rises and the lever mechanism attached to it opens the main valve - keeping
the system drained of condensate at all times. When steam arrives, the float drops and closes
the main valve. Float traps are renown for their high start-up load handling capability, clean
tight shut-off and resistance to waterhammer and vibration.
6. Maintenance
Note: Before actioning any maintenance program observe
the 'Safety information' in Section 1.
Warning
The cover gasket contains a thin stainless steel support ring which may
cause physical injury if not handled and disposed of carefully.
6.1 General information:

Before undertaking any maintenance on the trap it must be isolated from both the supply line and
return line and any pressure allowed to safely normalise to atmosphere. The trap should then be
allowed to cool. When reassembling, ensure that all joint faces are clean.
6.2 How to fit the main valve assembly:

- Undo the cover bolts (2) and lift off the body (1).
- Remove the complete float assembly by undoing the two screws (7).
- Remove the main valve seat (5) and replace with a new one supplied with new gasket.
Note: A valve spring (item 16) is fitted to the 1" traps only.
- Fit a complete new float assembly by tightening the assembly set screws (7) to the
recommended torque (see Table 1).
- Refit the body (1) using a new gasket (3).
6.3 How to fit the air vent assembly:

- Remove the spring clip, element and spacer plate (9).
- Unscrew the seat.
- Fit a new gasket, seat and frame.
- Assemble the spacer plate, fit element and clips.
- Align the complete air vent horizontally so that the frame clears the cover.
6.4 How to fit the Steam Lock Release (SLR) assembly:
- Unscrew the complete SLR assembly (12) and (14).
- Remove the SLR gasket (13).
- Replace the SLR assembly and washer with new ones.
- Reset the SLR to the desired bleed rate.
Table 1 Recommended tightening torques
or
Item Nm (lbf ft)
mm
2 17 A /F M10 x 30 47 - 50 (35 - 37)

5 17 A /F 50 - 55 (37 - 40)
7 Pozidrive M4 x 6 2.5 - 3.0 (1.8 - 2.2)
9 17 A /F 50 - 55 (37 - 40)
12 + 14 19 A /F 50 - 55 (37 - 40)
Steam lock release Air vent

assembly assembly
12 + 14 13 1 6 9 3
Frame
Seat
16
2 6 5 11 10 7 1" only 8 3
Main valve
assembly
Fig. 6
7. Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not
supplied as spares.
Available spares
Main valve assembly with float 3, 5, 6, 7 (2 off), 8, 10, 11, 16 (1" only)
Air vent assembly 3, 6, 9
Steam lock release unit and air vent assembly (FT14C only) 3, 6, 9, 12 + 14, 13
Cover gasket (packet of 3) 3
Maintenance kit 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16 (1" only)
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares'
and state the size and type of trap.
Example: 1 - Air vent assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN20 FT14-10 (R - L) ball float steam trap.
Steam lock release Air vent

assembly assembly
12 + 14 13 6 9 3
16
6 5 11 10 7 1" only 8 3
Main valve assembly
Fig. 7
Inductive sensor NJ5-11-N-G
Dimensions
M14x1
Ø 11
14
31
3
19
0102
Model Number
NJ5-11-N-G
Features
• Comfort series
• 5 mm not embeddable
Technical Data
• Usable up to SIL2 acc. to IEC 61508
General specifications
Switching element function NAMUR, NC
Connection Rated operating distance sn 5 mm
Installation not embeddable
Output polarity NAMUR
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 4.05 mm
BN Reduction factor rAl 0.4
L+
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
Reduction factor r304 0.85
BU Nominal ratings
L- Nominal voltage Uo 8V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 3000 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
Current consumption
Measuring plate not detected ≥ 3 mA
Measuring plate detected ≤ 1 mA
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303
Sensing face PVDF
Protection degree IP68
General information
Use in the hazardous area see instruction manuals
Category 2G; 1D
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:2000
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approvals and certificates
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
Date of issue: 2012-02-09 112726_eng.xml
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose

Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47
Subject to modifications without notice Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0001
fa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
fa-info@pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
fa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
1
ATEX 2G
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 2G for use in hazardous areas with gas, vapour and mist
Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-11:2007
Ignition protection "Intrinsic safety"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2048 X

Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual. The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to
be observed. The special conditions must be adhered to!
Directive 94/9/EG and hence also EC-Type Examination Certificates apply in gene-
ral only to the use of electrical apparatus under atmospheric conditions.
The use in ambient temperatures of > 60 °C was tested with regard to hot surfaces
by the mentioned certification authority.
If the equipment is not used under atmospheric conditions, a reduction of the per-
missible minimum ignition energies may have to be taken into consideration.
Highest permissible ambient temperature The temperature ranges, according to temperature class, are given in the EC-Type
Examination Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed. The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appro-
priate related apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Protection from mechanical danger When used in the temperature range below -20 °C the sensor should be protected
from knocks by the provision of an additional housing.
Electrostatic charging Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

2 Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
ATEX 1D
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 1D for use in hazardous areas with combustible dust

Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity IEC 61241-11:2002: draft; prEN61241-0:2002
type of protection intrinsic safety "iD"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 1D Ex iaD 20 T 108 °C (226.4 °F)

The Ex-relevant identification may also be printed on the accompanying adhesive
label.
EC-Type Examination Certificate ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X
Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual.
The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to be observed.
The special conditions must be adhered to!
Maximum housing surface temperature The maximum surface temperature of the housing is given in the EC-Type Exami-
nation Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed.
The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appropriate related
apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
The associated apparatus must satisfy at least the requirements of category ia IIB
or iaD. Because of the possibility of the danger of ignition, which can arise due to
faults and/or transient currents in the equipotential bonding system, galvanic isola-
tion in the power supply and signal circuits is preferable. Associated apparatus wit-
hout electrical isolation must only be used if the appropriate requirements of IEC
60079-14 are met.
The intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected against influences due to lightning.
When used in the isolating wall between Zone 20 and Zone 21 or Zone 21 und
Zone 22 the sensor must not be exposed to any mechanical danger and must be
sealed in such a way, that the protective function of the isolating wall is not
impaired. The applicable directives and standards must be observed.
If the Ex-relevant identification is exclusively printed on the included adhesive label,
this must be applied in the direct vicinity of the sensor! The surface to which the
label is to applied must be clean and free from grease! The applied adhesive label
must be durable adlegible to protect it against the possibility of chemical corrosion!
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Electrostatic charging The connection cables are to be laid in accordance with EN 50281-1-2 and must not
normally be subjected to chaffing during use.
Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
3
Betriebsanleitung (Original) / Translation / Traduction)
Betriebsanleitung.................................................. Seite 1 - 16
Operating manual ................................................page 17 - 32
Notice d'utilisation................................................page 33 - 48
Widerstandsthermometer
Typ W083
Messbereich von -40 °C bis +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
Bewahren Sie diese Betriebsanleitung zum Nachschlagen auf.

Geben Sie diese Betriebsanleitung bei der Veräußerung des Gerätes mit.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Widerstandsthermometer
Inhaltsverzeichnis Seite
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung ................................................................................. 3
1 Gerätebeschreibung.................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ........................................................................ 5
2 Sicherheitshinweise .................................................................................................. 6
3 Aufbau und Funktion .................................................................................................7
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers ......................................................................8
4.1 Einbauhinweise .......................................................................................................8
4.2 Montage ..................................................................................................................8
5 Elektrischer Anschluss ............................................................................................ 10
5.1 Anschlussvarianten ............................................................................................... 11
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X) .................... 11
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme ......................................................................... 12
7 Demontage und Entsorgung ................................................................................... 13
8 Schutzrohre............................................................................................................. 13
9 Werkstofftabelle ...................................................................................................... 14
10 Technische Daten ................................................................................................... 14
11 Abmessungen ......................................................................................................... 15
12 Herstellererklärung.................................................................................................. 16
Urheberschutzvermerk:
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Betriebsanleitung, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts
sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz.
Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patent-, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vor-
behalten.
-2- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung

• Die Betriebsanleitung richtet sich an Facharbeiter und angelernte Arbeitskräfte.
• Lesen Sie vor jedem Arbeitsschritt die dazugehörigen Hinweise sorgfältig durch und
halten Sie die vorgegebene Reihenfolge ein.
• Lesen Sie den Abschnitt „Sicherheitshinweise“ besonders aufmerksam durch.
• Die Abbildungen in der Betriebsanleitung sind beispielhaft und gelten für alle Typen
von Widerstandsthermometern.
• Abschnitte oder Beschreibungen die nicht alle Typen von Widerstandsthermometern
betreffen, sind entsprechend gekennzeichnet.
Sollten Sie Probleme oder Fragen haben, wenden Sie sich an Ihren Lieferanten oder direkt
an:
Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

Struthweg 7-9 • D - 34260 Kaufungen
℡ 05605-803 0 • 05605-803 54
info@sika.net • www.sika.net
Verwendete Gefahrenzeichen und Symbole:

VORSICHT! Hohe Temperatur!
Dieses Zeichen kennzeichnet Gefahren durch hohe Temperaturen, die zu gesundheitlichen
Schäden führen oder erheblichen Sachschaden verursachen können.
WARNUNG! / VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr!
Diese Zeichen kennzeichnet Gefahren, die Personenschäden verursachen, die zu gesundheit-
lichen Schäden führen oder erheblichen Sachschaden verursachen können.
VORSICHT! Materialschaden!
Dieses Zeichen weist auf Handlungen hin, die mögliche Sach- und Umweltschäden ver-
ursachen können.
HINWEIS!
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG BEACHTEN! Diese Zeichen gibt Ihnen wichtige Hin-
weise, Tipps oder Informationen.
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Gerät darf nicht zusammen mit
Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
Beachten und befolgen Sie die damit ge- Überprüfen Sie die angegebenen Punkte
kennzeichneten Informationen. oder Hinweise.
ª Befolgen Sie die angegebenen An- J Verweis auf einen anderen Abschnitt,
weisungen bzw. Handlungsschritte. Dokument oder Quelle.
Halten Sie die Reihenfolge ein. • Gliederungspunkt.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten -3-

Gerätebeschreibung Widerstandsthermometer
1 Gerätebeschreibung
Das Widerstandsthermometer hat zwei, redundant aufgebaute Pt100 Temperatursensoren.
Es dient der Fernüberwachung von flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder
Behältern, sowie Maschinen oder Anlagen.
Die beiden Sensoren des Widerstandsthermometer befinden sich an der gleichen Messstelle.
Baugruppen:
Die wichtigsten Baugruppen des Widerstandsthermometer sind der Anschlusskopf und das
Tauchrohr.
Anschlusskopf:
Der Anschlusskopf dient dem Anschluss des
elektrischen Temperatursensors für die Fernüber-
wachung. In ihm befindet sich der Messeinsatz.
Tauchrohr:
Das Tauchrohr dient dem Prozessanschluss der An-
lage oder Maschine. Es wird im Bereich der Mess-
stelle eingebaut.
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen ist der
Einbau von Schutzrohren erforderlich.
Messstelle:
Die Temperaturmessung erfolgt im unteren Teil des Tauchrohres. Dort befinden sich die
temperaturempfindlichen Bereiche des Messeinsatzes (J § 3 "Aufbau und Funktion").
Ausführungen:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in den Ausführungen W083 und W083…X lieferbar. Die
Ausführung W083…X kann im Ex-Bereich eingesetzt werden.
Typenschild:
Auf dem Typenschild finden Sie die wichtigsten Daten und das Anschlussbild des gelieferten
Widerstandsthermometers.
W083:
W083…X:
Lieferumfang:
• 1x Widerstandsthermometer.
• 1x Betriebsanleitung.
• ggf. Verpackung oder Transportschutz.
Zubehör:
• Schutzrohre nach DIN 43772:2000.
-4- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Gerätebeschreibung
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung

Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur zur Temperaturanzeige bzw. -überwachung von
flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder Behältern, Maschinen oder Anlagen
verwenden werden.
WARNUNG! Kein Sicherheitsbauteil!

Die Widerstandsthermometer W083 und W083…X sind keine Sicherheitsbauteile im
Sinne der Richtlinie 2006-42-EG (Maschinenrichtlinie).
ª Verwenden Sie dies Widerstandsthermometer niemals als Sicherheitsbauteil.
Die Betriebssicherheit des gelieferten Gerätes ist nur bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung
gewährleistet. Die angegebenen Grenzwerte (J § 10 "Abmessungen") dürfen keinesfalls
überschritten werden.
VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr oder Materialschaden!

Das Widerstandsthermometer kann im Betrieb sehr heiß werden und darf keinen
mechanischen Belastungen ausgesetzt werden.
ª Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einbau, ob die benetzten Werkstoffe des Gerätes für das ver-
wendete Medium geeignet sind (J § 9 "Werkstofftabelle").
Ausführung W083…X:
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist für den Einsatz in Bereichen mit explosions-
fähiger Atmosphäre vorgesehen.
ª Beachten Sie die weiterführenden Informationen in § 12 "Herstellererklärung".
ª Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Maßnahmen:
Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums:
ª Die Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums muss mindestens 10 K
oberhalb des Temperaturbereichs liegen. Beim W083…X also ≥ 210 °C.
Wackelkontakt an elektrischen Anschlüssen:
ª Anschluss des Gerätes an einen bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis.

Sicherheitshinweise Widerstandsthermometer
2 Sicherheitshinweise
Bevor Sie das Widerstandsthermometer installieren, lesen Sie diese Betriebsanleitung
sorgfältig durch. Werden die darin enthaltenen Anweisungen, insbesondere die Sicher-
heitshinweise nicht beachtet, können Gefahren für Mensch, Umwelt, Gerät und Anlage
die Folge sein.
Die Widerstandsthermometer entsprechen dem aktuellen Stand der Technik. Dies betrifft die
Genauigkeit, die Funktionsweise und den sicheren Betrieb der Geräte.
Um eine sichere Bedienung zu gewährleisten, ist sachkundiges und sicherheitsbewusstes
Verhalten der Bediener erforderlich.
SiKA gewährt persönlich oder durch entsprechende Literatur Hilfestellung für die Anwendung
der Produkte. Der Kunde prüft die Einsetzbarkeit des Produktes auf der Basis unserer
technischen Informationen. In kunden- und anwendungsspezifischen Tests überprüft der
Kunde die Eignung des Produktes für seinen Verwendungszweck. Mit dieser Prüfung gehen
Gefahr und Risiko auf unseren Kunden über; unsere Gewährleistung erlischt.
Qualifiziertes Personal:
Das Personal, das mit der Inbetriebnahme und Bedienung des Widerstandsthermometers
beauftragt wird, muss eine entsprechende Qualifikation aufweisen. Dies kann durch
Schulung oder entsprechende Unterweisung geschehen.
Dem Personal muss der Inhalt der vorliegenden Betriebsanleitung bekannt und jederzeit
zugänglich sein.
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise:
Bei allen Arbeiten sind die bestehenden nationalen Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung und
Sicherheit am Arbeitsplatz einzuhalten. Vorhandene interne Vorschriften des Betreibers
sind zu beachten, auch wenn diese nicht in dieser Anleitung genannt werden.
Schutzart nach DIN EN 60529:
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Umgebungsbedingungen am Einsatzort die Anforderungen
der angegebenen Schutzart (J § 10 "Technische Daten") nicht überschreiten.
Setzen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer keinen mechanischen Beanspruchungen aus.
Verwenden Sie es niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer nur in einwandfreiem Zustand. Be-
schädigte oder fehlerhafte Geräte müssen sofort überprüft und ggf. ersetzt werden.
Verwenden Sie bei Montage, Anschluss und Demontage des Widerstandsthermometers
nur passende Werkzeuge.
Typenschilder oder sonstige Hinweise auf dem Gerät dürfen weder entfernt noch un-
kenntlich gemacht werden, da sonst jegliche Garantie und Herstellerverantwortung er-
lischt.
Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise:
Warnhinweise, die sich speziell auf einzelne Funktionsabläufe oder Tätigkeiten beziehen,
finden Sie vor den entsprechenden Stellen in dieser Betriebsanleitung.
-6- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Aufbau und Funktion
Sicherheitshinweise für Ausführung W083…X:

Beim Einsatz des Widerstandsthermometers in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen müssen
zusätzlich noch die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise beachtet werden.
Alle Arbeiten, die den Ex-Bereich betreffen, dürfen nur von einer entsprechend quali-
fizierten Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung oder
Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2).
Überprüfen Sie in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen (3 Monate) das Widerstandsthermometer
auf Korrosion / Korrosionsspuren (J § 6 "Wartung Ausführung W083…X").
3 Aufbau und Funktion

Aufbau:
c
Anschlusskopf und Tauchrohr:
d
Kopfgehäuse.
Deckel mit Dichtung, Schrauben und Zahn-
e
scheiben.
Kabelverschraubung mit Dichtung und Druckring.
f
g
Kontermutter.
Tauchrohr mit Gewindeanschluss.
h
Messeinsatz:
i
Klemmsockel
j
Fühlerleitungen und Sensorrohr.
2x Pt100 Temperaturfühler.
Funktion des Messeinsatzes:

Der Messeinsatz arbeitet nach dem Prinzip der Widerstandsänderung. Die Temperatur an
der Messstelle wird durch den Temperaturfühler in einen entsprechenden Widerstandswert
umgewandelt.
Die beiden Pt100 Temperaturfühler befinden sich unten im Sensorrohr. Ein Kabel im Inneren
des Sensorrohres verbindet die Temperaturfühler mit dem Klemmsockel im Kopfgehäuse.
Die elektrischen Signale der Temperaturfühler liegen direkt am Klemmsockel an.

Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers Widerstandsthermometer
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers
4.1 Einbauhinweise
POSITION DER MESSSTELLE!

Für eine präzise Temperaturmessung ist die richtige Positionierung der Messstelle des
Widerstandsthermometer am Einbauort erforderlich.
Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Einbauhinweise:
Die Messstelle muss sich in der Mitte der Rohr- Achten Sie bei Isolierungen auf ein aus-
leitung befinden. reichend langes Tauchrohr.
Zu kurze oder zu lange Tauchrohre führen zu
einer falschen Temperaturanzeige.
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung
oder einen metallischen Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
4.2 Montage
VORSICHT! Hohe Temperatur!

Die Oberfläche des Widerstandsthermometers kann beim Betrieb sehr heiß werden!
ª Berühren Sie niemals das heiße Widerstandsthermometer.
VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr und Materialschaden!

Bei ungeeigneten Dichtwerkstoffen kann heißes Medium austreten! Es besteht die Gefahr von
Personenschäden, sowie von Schäden an der Anlage und Verunreinigung der Umwelt.
ª Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Dichtstoffe.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einbau, ob

die Anlage ausgeschaltet ist und sich in einem sicheren und stromlosen Zustand befindet.
die Anlage drucklos und abgekühlt ist.
ein Einschraubstutzen am Einbauort der Anlage oder Maschine vorhanden ist.
ein geeigneter Dichtstoff verwendet wird.
-8- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers
GEEIGNETE WERKZEUGE:
Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Werkzeuge der passenden Größe.
Einbau:
ª 1. Abdichten ª 2. Einsetzen
ª 3. Tauchrohr festziehen ª 4. Kontermutter lösen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm
ª 5. Ausrichten ª 6. Kontermutter anziehen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm

Elektrischer Anschluss Widerstandsthermometer
5 Elektrischer Anschluss
Im Anschlusskopf des Widerstandsthermometers wird der Messeinsatz elektrisch angeschlossen.
Dabei wird die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel des Messeinsatzes verbunden.
VORSICHT! Elektrischer Strom!

Der elektrische Anschluss des Widerstandsthermometer darf nur von einer Elektrofach-
kraft vorgenommen werden.
ª Schalten Sie die Anlage spannungsfrei, bevor Sie die das Widerstandsthermometer
anschließen.
ª 1. Lösen Sie die Schrauben des Deckels. ª 4. Führen Sie die Anschlussleitung durch
ª 2. Nehmen Sie den Deckel mit Schrauben, die Überwurfmutter und den Klemmein-
Zahnscheiben und Dichtung vom Kopf- satz in das Kopfgehäuse.
gehäuse ab. ª 5. Stülpen Sie die Abschirmung der Leitung
ª 3. Lösen Sie die Überwurfmutter der über den Klemmeinsatz.
Kabelverschraubung. ª 6. Stecken Sie den Klemmeinsatz in den
Gewindestutzen. Sichern Sie den
Klemmeinsatz mit der Überwurfmutter.
Beachten Sie das Anschlussbild auf dem Typenschild des Widerstandsthermometer.
ª 7. Schließen Sie die Anschlussleitung ent- ª 9. Setzten Sie den Deckel mit Dichtung auf
sprechend dem Anschlussbild an das Kopfgehäuse.
(J § 5.1 "Anschlussvarianten"). Achten Sie auf den richtigen Sitz der
ª 8. Ziehen Sie die Kabelverschraubung fest. Dichtung des Deckels.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Anschluss- ª 10. Drehen Sie die Schrauben fest.
leitungen zugfrei sind!
- 10 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Elektrischer Anschluss
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2").
5.1 Anschlussvarianten
Der Temperaturfühler des Messeinsatzes ist mit dem Klemmsockel verbunden. Der An-
schluss erfolgt am Klemmsockel.
FARBMARKIERUNG:
Die Klemmen des Sockels sind farblich markiert. Ist keine Farbe an der Klemme vor-
handen, so entspricht dies "weiß" im Anschlussbild.
ª Verbinden Sie die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel entsprechend dem Anschluss-
bild ihres Widerstandsthermometers.
Pt 100:
2-Leiter
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X)

Nach Durchführung des elektrischen Anschlusses muss der Oberflächenwiderstand des
Widerstandsthermometers durch eine entsprechend qualifizierte Elektrofachkraft überprüft
werden.
Dazu wird mit Hilfe eines Multimeters der elektrische Wider-
stand zwischen den markierten Bauteilen gemessen. Der
Oberflächenwiderstand zwischen den Messpunkten liegt
idealerweise bei 1 Ω.
Nach DIN EN 13463-1: 2009 darf der Oberflächen-

widerstand bei 23 ±2 °C und einer relativen Luftfeuchte
von 50 ±5 % einen Wert von 109 Ω nicht überschreiten.
ª Überprüfen Sie den elektrischen Widerstand zwischen
den folgenden Messpunkten:
c Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Rohrleitung
d Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Kabelverschraubung
e Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Deckelschraube
Wird der Normwert überschritten, muss der Einbau des W083…X auf Kontaktprobleme hin
überprüft werden. Eine Inbetriebnahme darf nicht erfolgen!
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten - 11 -

Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme Widerstandsthermometer
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme

Wartung:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist wartungsfrei. Die einzelnen Baugruppen sind teilweise voll-
ständig vergossen und enthalten keinerlei Bauteile, welche vom Anwender repariert oder
ausgetauscht werden können.
Bei einem Defekt muss das Gerät ausgetauscht oder zur Reparatur an den Hersteller
zurückgeschickt werden.
Wartung Ausführung W083…X:

Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen (3 Monate) durch visuelle
Kontrolle auf Korrosion (Aluminiumoxidation) zu überprüfen.
ª Entfernen Sie vorhandene Oxidationsbildung an den Messpunkten mit geeigneten
Reinigungsmitteln (z. B. Alureiniger).
ª Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand des Widerstandsthermometers (J § 5.2).
Ist der Oberflächenwiderstand kleiner als der Normwert, darf das Widerstandsthermometer
bis zum nächsten Wartungsintervall betrieben werden.
Anderenfalls muss der Einbau des Widerstandsthermometer auf Kontaktprobleme hin über-
prüft werden.
Wird der Normwert weiterhin überschritten, muss das Widerstandsthermometer ausgetauscht
werden.
Reinigung:
ª Reinigen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit einem trockenen oder feuchten anti-
statischem Tuch.
ª Verwenden Sie beim Reinigen keine scharfen Gegenstände oder aggressive
Reinigungsmittel.
Probleme:
Welche Probleme Sie wie beheben können, ist in der nachfolgenden Tabelle ausgeführt.
Problem mögliche Ursache Abhilfe

Messeinsatz:
kein Ausgangssignal Anschluss ohne Kontakt. Überprüfen Sie den elektrischen
Anschluss.
Messeinsatz defekt. Gerät zur Reparatur einschicken.
Temperaturabweichung Falscher Einbau. Einbausituation überprüfen.
Messeinsatz
Normwert Überschritten Kontaktprobleme zwischen den Einbau auf Kontaktprobleme hin
(Prüfung Oberflächenwiderstand) Bauteilen. überprüfen.
Können Sie ein Problem nicht beheben, senden Sie bitte das Gerät mit einer kurzen Fehlerbeschreibung,
den Umgebungsbedingungen und der Einsatzdauer bis zum Eintreten der Störung zur Reparatur ein.
- 12 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Demontage und Entsorgung
7 Demontage und Entsorgung

VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr!
Entfernen Sie niemals das Widerstandsthermometer aus einer im Betrieb befindlichen Anlage.
ª Sorgen Sie dafür, dass die Anlage fachgerecht ausgeschaltet wird.
Vor der Demontage:

Überprüfen Sie vor der Demontage, ob
die Anlage ausgeschaltet ist und sich in einem sicheren und stromlosen Zustand befindet.
die Anlage drucklos und abgekühlt ist.
Demontage:
ª Entfernen Sie die elektrischen Anschlüsse.
ª Bauen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit passenden Werkzeugen aus.
Entsorgung:
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Widerstandsthermometer besteht aus unterschiedlichen Werkstoffen. Es darf nicht
zusammen mit Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
ª Führen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer der

lokalen Wiederverwertung zu
oder
ª schicken Sie das Widerstandsthermometer an

Ihren Lieferanten bzw. SiKA zurück.
8 Schutzrohre
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen muss ein zusätzliches Schutzrohr, nach
DIN 43772:2000, verwendet werden.
• hohen Druck und / oder hoher Temperatur in der Anwendung.

Besondere Belastungen entstehen durch
• hohe Durchflussgeschwindigkeiten des Mediums.

• korrosive und / oder abrasive Eigenschaften des Mediums.
Bei der Verwendung von Schutzrohren können Widerstandsthermometer während des Be-
triebes ein- und ausgebaut werden. Die Anlage kann dabei unter Druck bleiben und die
Leitungen müssen nicht geleert werden.

Werkstofftabelle Widerstandsthermometer
9 Werkstofftabelle
Bauteil W083 Bauteil
benetzt
Kopfgehäuse Aluminium Druckguss
Deckel Aluminium Druckguss
Dichtung NBR
Deckelschrauben (Zahnscheiben)
Kontermutter Messing 2.0401
Tauchrohr mit
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
Gewindeanschluss
Kabelverschraubung:
- Überwurfmutter Messing vernickelt
- Klemmeinsatz Polyamid
- O-Ring CR / NBR
- Gewindestutzen Messing vernickelt
10 Technische Daten
Bitte beachten Sie die Angaben auf dem Typenschild.
Kenndaten W083
Messbereich -40…200 °C
Genauigkeit Klasse B
Ansprechzeit 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (vorläufig)
t90 in Wasser
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nennwiderstand 100 Ω
bei 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- zulässiger Messstrom 1 mA
Ausführung W083…X
Maximaler Strom Ii = 20 mA
Maximale Spannung Ui = 30 VDC
Prozessgrößen
Elektrischer Anschluss Anschlusskopf Form J, drehbar
mit Kabelverschraubung M16 x 1,5
Tauchrohr:
- Durchmesser 8 x 1 mm
- Länge 50 mm
- Material / Nenndruck Edelstahl 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Verträglichkeit mit Tauchrohrmaterial muss gegeben sein,
siehe auch 8."Schutzrohre"
Mediumstemperatur siehe Messbereich
Umgebungstemperatur 0…70 °C
Prozessanschluss *1) G½A
Vibrationsbeständigkeit Kennlinie 2, 4g
Zulassungen ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
- 14 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Abmessungen
11 Abmessungen

Herstellererklärung Widerstandsthermometer
12 Herstellererklärung
- 16 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Operating manual (Translation)
Betriebsanleitung ................................................. Seite 1 - 16
Operating manual ................................................page 17 - 32
Notice d'utilisation................................................page 33 - 48
Resistance thermometer
Type W083
Measuring range from -40 °C to +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
Please keep this operating manual for future reference.

If the device is resold, please provide the operating manual along with it.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Resistance thermometer
Table of contents page

0 About this operating manual.................................................................................... 19
1 Device description................................................................................................... 20
1.1 Intended use ......................................................................................................... 21
2 Safety instructions................................................................................................... 22
3 Construction and function ....................................................................................... 23
4 Installation of Resistance thermometer.................................................................... 24
4.1 Installation instructions.......................................................................................... 24
4.2 Assembly .............................................................................................................. 24
5 Electrical connection ............................................................................................... 26
5.1 Connection types .................................................................................................. 27
5.2 Checking the surface resistance (W083…X version) ............................................ 27
6 Maintenance, cleaning and problems...................................................................... 28
7 Disassembly and disposal....................................................................................... 29
8 Protective tube ........................................................................................................ 29
9 Materials table.........................................................................................................30
10 Technical data......................................................................................................... 30
11 Dimension ...............................................................................................................31
12 Manufacturer declaration......................................................................................... 32
Copyright notice:
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this operating manual as well as the communication of
its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
- 18 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer About this operating manual
0 About this operating manual

• The operating manual is aimed at specialists and semi-skilled personnel.
• Before each step, read through the relevant advice carefully and keep to the specified
order.
• Thoroughly read and understand the information in the section “Safety instructions ”.
• The figures in the operating manual are examples and apply to all types of Resistance
thermometers.
• Sections or descriptions that do not apply to all types of Resistance thermometers are
marked accordingly.
If you have any problems or questions, please contact your supplier or contact us directly
at:
Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

Struthweg 7-9 • D - 34260 Kaufungen
℡ 05605-803 0 • 05605-803 54
info@sika.net • www.sika.net
Hazard signs and other symbols used:

CAUTION! High temperature!
This sign indicates dangers resulting from high temperature that can lead to health defects or
considerable damage to property.
WARNING! / CAUTION! Risk of injury!
This sign indicates dangers that cause personal injuries that can lead to health defects or
cause considerable damage to property.
CAUTION! Material damage!
This sign indicates actions which could lead to possible damage to material or environmental
damage.
NOTICE!
ADHERE TO OPERATING MANUAL! This symbol indicates important notices,
tips or information.
NO DOMESTIC WASTE!
The device must not be disposed of
together with domestic waste.
Pay attention to and comply with information Check the specified points or notices.
that is marked with this symbol. J Reference to another section, document or
ª Follow the specified instructions and steps. source.
Adhere to the given order. • Item.
Technical changes reserved - 19 -

Device description Resistance thermometer
1 Device description
The Resistance thermometer has two redundant Pt100 temperature sensors. It is used for
the remote monitoring of liquid and gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
Both sensors of the Resistance thermometer located at the same measuring point.
Assemblies:
The most important assemblies of the Resistance thermometer are the connection head and
the immersion tube.
Connection head:
The connection head allows the connection of an
electrical temperature sensor for remote monitoring.
The measuring insert is to be found within it.
Immersion tube:
The immersion tube is used to create the process
connection to the installation or machine. It is installed
in proximity to the measuring point.
Use in particularly high-stress situations requires the
fitting of protective tubes.
Measuring point:
The temperature measurement is carried out in the lower part of the immersion tube. There are
the temperature-sensitive parts of the measuring insert (J § 3 "Construction and function").
Versions:
The Resistance thermometer is available in the W083 and W083…X versions. The W083…X
version can be used in explosion hazard areas.
Type plate:
The type plate contains the most important data and the connection diagram of the
Resistance thermometer supplied.
W083:
W083…X:
Scope of delivery:
• 1x Resistance thermometer.
• 1x Operating manual.
• Packaging or transport protection (if applicable).
Accessories:
• Protective tubes certified according to DIN 43772:2000.
- 20 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Device description
1.1 Intended use

The Resistance thermometer may only be used to display or monitor the temperatures of liq-
uid or gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
WARNING! NO SAFETY COMPONENT!

The Resistance thermometer W083 and W083…X are not safety components in
accordance with Directive 2006-42-EC (Machine Directive).
ª Never use the Resistance thermometer as a safety component.
The operational safety of the device supplied is only guaranteed by intended use. The
specified limits (J § 10 "Technical data ") may under no circumstances be exceeded.
CAUTION! Risk of injury or material damage!

The Resistance thermometer must not be subjected to mechanical stress and can be-
come very hot when in operation.
ª Never use the Resistance thermometer as a carrying handle or tread.
Before installing the device, check that the wetted device's materials are suitable for the
medium intended for use (J § 9 "Materials table ").
Version W083…X:
The Resistance thermometer W083…X is intended to be used in areas with potentially ex-
plosive atmospheres.
ª Observe the additional information in § 12 "Manufacturer declaration ".
ª Observe the following requirements:
Ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored:
ª The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K
higher than the temperature range. With the W083…X, this means ≥ 210°C.
Intermittent electrical connection:
ª Connect the device to a certified intrinsically safe circuit.

Safety instructions Resistance thermometer
2 Safety instructions
Before you install the Resistance thermometer, read through this operating manual
carefully. If the instructions contained within it are not followed, in particular the safety
guidelines, this could result in danger for people, the environment, and the device and
the system it is connected to.
The Resistance thermometer correspond to the state-of-the-art technology. This concerns
the accuracy, the operating mode and the safe operation of the device.
In order to guarantee that the device operates safely, the operator must act competently and
be conscious of safety issues.
SiKA provides support for the use of its products either personally or via relevant literature.
The customer verifies that our product is fit for purpose based on our technical information.
The customer needs to carry out his/her own specific tests to ensure this device is suitable
for the intended application. With this verification all hazards and risks are transferred to our
customers; our warranty is not valid.
Qualified personnel:
The personnel who are charged for the installation, operation and maintenance of the
Resistance thermometer must hold a relevant qualification. This can be based on training
or relevant tuition.
The personnel must be aware of this operating manual and have access to it at all times.
The electrical connection should only be carried out by a fully qualified electrician.
General safety instructions:

In all work, the existing national regulations for accident prevention and safety in the
workplace must be complied with. Any internal regulations of the operator must also be
complied with, even if these are not mentioned in this manual.
Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
Ensure that the ambient conditions at the site of use does not exceed the requirements
for the stated protection rating (J § 10 "Technical data ").
Do not subject the Resistance thermometer to any mechanical strain. Never use it as a
carrying handle or a tread.
Only use the Resistance thermometer if it is in perfect condition. Damaged or faulty
devices must be checked without delay and, if necessary, replaced.
When fitting, connecting and removing the Resistance thermometer use only suitable
appropriate tools.
Do not remove or obliterate nameplates or other markings on the device, as otherwise
the warranty is rendered null and void.
Special safety instructions:

Warnings that are specifically relevant to individual operating procedures or activities can be
found at the beginning of the relevant sections of this operating manual.
- 22 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Construction and function
Safety instructions for version W083…X:

The following safety instructions must also be observed when Resistance thermometers are
used in explosion hazard areas.
All work involving an explosion hazard area must be performed by a suitably qualified
electrician.
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Integrate the Resistance thermometer in the potential equalisation system by installing it
on a metallic pipe or tank.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2).
Check the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (every 3 months) for corrosion or
signs of corrosion (J § 6 "W083…X maintenance").
3 Construction and function

Construction:
c
Connection head and immersion tube:
d
Head housing.
Cover with gasket, screws and tooth lock
e
washers.
Cable fitting with gasket and compression ring.
f
g
Counter nut.
Immersion tube with threaded connector.
h
Measuring insert:
i
Terminal socket
j
Sensor wire and sensor tube.
2x Pt100 Temperature sensor.
Function of the measuring insert:

The measuring insert works according to the principle of changes in resistance. The tempera-
ture recorded at the measuring point is converted by the temperature sensor into a corre-
sponding resistance value.
The both temperature sensor are located at the bottom of the sensor tube. The sensors are
connected to the terminal socket in the head housing via a cable inside the sensor tube.
The electrical signals from the temperature sensors are directly applied to the terminal
socket.

Installation of Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer
4 Installation of Resistance thermometer
4.1 Installation instructions
MEASURING POINT LOCATION!

For accurate temperature measurement, the right measuring point location for the
Widerstandsthermometer should be selected at the installation site.
Please observe the following installation instructions:
The measuring point must be located in the If the pipe is lagged ensure that a long
centre of the pipe. enough immersion tube is used.
If the immersion tube is too short or too long it
will be impossible to gauge the temperature
accurately.
Version W083…X:
Integrate the Resistance thermometer W083…X in the potential equalisation system by in-
stalling it on a metallic pipe or a metallic tank.
4.2 Assembly
CAUTION! High temperature!

The surface of the Resistance thermometer can become very hot when the device is op-
erational!
ª Never touch the hot Resistance thermometer.
CAUTION! Risk of injury and material damage!

The use of unsuitable sealants can lead to the escape of hot medium. There is a risk of
injury as well as of damage to the plant and environmental pollution.
ª Be sure only to use suitable sealants.
Before installing, check that

the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has coolde down.
a screw-in fitting is available at the measuring location on the plant or the machine.
a suitable sealant is used.
- 24 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Installation of Resistance thermometer
SUITABLE TOOLS:
Use only suitable tools of the correct size.
Installation:
ª 1. Sealing ª 2. Insert
ª 3. Fully tighten immersion tube ª 4. Loosen counter nut
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm
ª 5. Align ª 6. Fully tighten counter nut
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm

Electrical connection Resistance thermometer
5 Electrical connection
The measuring insert is connected inside the connection head of the Resistance thermometer.
The connecting cable is connected with the terminal socket of the measuring insert.
CAUTION! Electric current!

The electrical connection of the Resistance thermometer should only be carried out by a
fully qualified electrician.
ª De-energize the electrical system before connecting the Resistance thermometer.
ª 1. Loosen the cover screws. ª 4. Guide the connecting cable into the
ª 2. Remove the cover complete with head housing through the union nut and
screws, tooth lock washers and gasket the terminal insert.
from the head housing. ª 5. Pull the cable shield over the seal ring.
ª 3. Loosen the union nut of the cable ª 6. Insert the seal ring into the threaded
connector. connector. Secure the sealing ring with
the union nut.
Follow the connection diagram on the Resistance thermometer type plate.
ª 7. Connect the cable according to the in- ª 9. Place the cover with gasket on the head
structions on the connection diagram housing.
(J § 5.1 "Connection types "). Ensure that the cover gasket is correctly
ª 8. Fully tighten the cable connection. positioned.
Ensure that the connecting cables are ª 10. Fully tighten the screws.
not under strain!
- 26 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Electrical connection
W083…X version:
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2").
5.1 Connection types

The temperature sensor of the measuring insert is connected to the terminal socket.
Connection takes place at the terminal socket.
COLOUR CODING:
The terminal sockets are colour coded. If a particular terminal clamp is not colour coded,
this is labelled “white” on the connection diagram.
ª Connect the connecting cable to the terminal socket in accordance with the connection
diagram on your Resistance thermometer.
Pt 100:
2-wire
5.2 Checking the surface resistance (W083…X version)

After the electrical connection is made, the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer
must be checked by a suitably qualified electrician.
To do this, use a multimeter to measure the resistance be-
tween the marked components. The surface resistance be-
tween the test points should ideally be 1 Ω.
According to EN 13463-1:2009, the surface resistance

may not exceed 109 Ω at 23 ±2 °C with 50 ±5% relative
humidity.
ª Check the resistance between the following test points:
c Immersion tube hex flats and pipe
d Immersion tube hex flats and cable gland
e Immersion tube hex flats and cover screw
If the value specified by the standard is exceeded, the in-
stallation of the W083…X must be checked for contact
problems. Do not put the device into service!

Maintenance, cleaning and problems Resistance thermometer
6 Maintenance, cleaning and problems

Maintenance:
The Resistance thermometer is maintenance-free. The individual components are in some
cases fully potted; they thus contain no sub-assemblies which can be repaired or replaced by
the user.
In case of a defect, the device must be replaced or returned to the manufacturer for repair.
W083…X maintenance:
Visually inspect the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (3 months) for corrosion
(aluminium oxidation).
ª Use a suitable cleaning product (e.g. aluminium cleaner) to remove any oxidation build-
up at the measuring points.
ª Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer (J § 5.2).
If the surface resistance is lower than the standard value, the Resistance thermometer may
continue to be used until the next maintenance event.
Otherwise the installation of the Resistance thermometer must be checked for contact prob-
lems.
If the standard value is still exceeded, the Resistance thermometer must be replaced.
Cleaning:
ª Clean the Resistance thermometer using a dry or damp antistatic cloth.
ª Never use sharp objects or aggressive cleaning agents to clean the device.
Problems:
The following table details what problems you can solve yourself and how to solve them.
Problem Possible cause Remedy

Measuring insert:
no output signal Open-circuit connection. Check electrical connection.
Faulty measuring insert . Submit device for repair .
Temperature deviations Improper installation . Check installation situation.
Measuring insert
Standard value exceeded Contact problems between com- Check installation for contact prob-
(Surface resistance test) ponents. lems.
If you are unable to remedy a particular problem, please send the device for repair with a brief
description of the fault, the environmental conditions and the length of time the device was operational
before the problem occurred.
- 28 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Disassembly and disposal
7 Disassembly and disposal

CAUTION! Risk of injury!
Never remove the Resistance thermometer from a plant in operation.
ª Make sure that the plant is shut down professionally.
Before disassembly:
Prior to disassembly, ensure that
the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has cooled down.
Disassembly:
ª Remove the electrical connectors.
ª Remove the Resistance thermometer using suitable tools.
Disposal:
NO HOUSEHOLD WASTE!
The Resistance thermometer consists of various different materials. It must not be
disposed of with household waste.
ª Take the Resistance thermometer to your local

recycling plant
or
ª send the Resistance thermometer back to your

supplier or to SiKA.
8 Protective tube
If the device is to be used for high-stress applications, then an additional protective tube certi-
fied according to DIN 43772:2000 is required.
• high pressure and / or temperature in the application.

High-stress situations arise due to the following
• high medium flow speeds.

• corrosive and / or abrasive medium properties.
If protective tubes are used, it is possible to install and remove Resistance thermometers dur-
ing machine operation. The plant can thus remain pressurised, and it is unnecessary to
empty the pipes.

Materials table Resistance thermometer
9 Materials table
Component W083 Component-
wetted
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Gasket NBR
Cover screw
(Tooth lock washers)
Conter nut Messing 2.0401
Immersion tube with
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
threaded connector
Cable gland:
- Union nut Messing vernickelt
- Terminal insert Polyamid
- O-ring CR / NBR
- Threaded connection Messing vernickelt
10 Technical data
Please observe the informations specified on the type plate.
Characteristics W083
Measuring range -40…200 °C
Accuracy Class B
Response time 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (temporarily)
t90 in water
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nominal resistance 100 Ω
at 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- permissible measuring current 1 mA
Version W083…X
Maximum current Ii = 20 mA
Maximum voltage Ui = 30 VDC
Process variables
Electrical connection Type J connection head, rotatable
with cable gland M16 x 1,5
Immersion tube:
- Diameter 8 x 1 mm
- Length 50 mm
- Material / Nominal pressure Stainless steel 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Must be cleared for compability with immersion tube material,
see also 8."Protective tube "
Medium temperature see measuring range
Ambient temperature 0…70 °C
Process connection *1) G½A
Resistance to vibration Characteristic curve 2, 4g
Approvals ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
- 30 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Dimension
11 Dimension

Manufacturer declaration Resistance thermometer
12 Manufacturer declaration
- 32 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Manufacturer Declaration
We hereby declare that the resistance thermometer type
W083P220502J02WX
manufactured by
SIKA Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

has undergone ignition hazard evaluation in accordance with EN 13463-1: 2009 and does not have
any inherent potential sources of ignition when used as intended. It is therefore not subject to Directive
94/9/EC.
The resistance thermometer constitutes a simple electrical device for connection to a certified
intrinsically safe electrical circuit as described in EN 60079-11: 2007. The effective internal
inductances and capacitances are negligibly small.
The resistance thermometer is intended to be used in areas where a potentially explosive atmosphere
is present. The resistance thermometer may be used in Zone 1. The ignition energy of the potentially
explosive atmosphere may be less than 60 µJ (Explosion Group IIC).
The following additional requirements must be observed:
The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K above the temperature
measuring range. This yields an ignition temperature of 210 °C (200 °C + 10K), corresponding to
Temperature Class T2.
It must be ensured that all metallic parts of the resistance thermometer are connected to the potential
equalisation system. This can for example be done by installing the device on a metallic piping
system. This must be ensured before the device is put into service.
Attachment in Zone 0:
To prevent potential ignition sources from becoming effective in the event of foreseeable or rare
disturbances, a protective tube compliant with DIN 43772: 2000 must be used as a protective
measure. If this protective tube is used, the device may be attached to equipment in Zone 0 explosion
hazard areas.
Maximum currency Ii = 20mA;
Maximum voltage Ui = 30VDC
Installation and commissioning must be performed by suitably qualified staff.
Kaufungen, the 31. August 2012
i.V.
Dipl.- Ing. K. Ulloth
(CE- Koordinator und Produktsicherheitsbeauftragter)
(Manager CE- Coordination and Safety Supervisor)
Herstellererklärung Widerstandsthermometers W083P220502J02WX_engl-ID15.doc

Table of lubricating oils
Separator with flat belt drive
No. 2058-3002-101
Edition 0117
2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT

tions for improving the documentation. Remarks and sug-
gestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
1 Technical data
1.1 Separators with flat belt drive .................................................................... 4

1.1.1 Separators of category CLP 100 or ISO VG 46 / 68 / 100 ........................ 4
1.1.2 Separatos of category CLP 46 or ISO VG 46 / 68..................................... 5
1.2 Types of lube oil suggested by a number of firms ..................................... 6
1.2.1 Lube oils of category CLP 100 or ISO VG 68 ........................................... 6
1.2.2 Lube oils of category CLP 46 .................................................................... 7
1.2.3 Synthetic oils .............................................................................................. 8
1.3 Notes on the lube oil table ......................................................................... 9

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
1.1 Separators with flat belt drive
1.1.1 Separators of category CLP 100 or ISO VG 46 / 68 / 100
Separator Lubricating oil

Type Oil filling Designation* Kinematic viscosity
at 40 °C (104 °F)
Litre mm²/s (cSt) Part number
…SE 5
…TC 5 1
…SD 1
…SD 2
…TC 1 1.3
…TC 2
…TC 3
…DA 10
…KE 10
…KE 10 Mineral oil
…SC 10 CLP 100 90 - 110 0015-0003-080
…SC 15 (2.5 litres)
…SD 6 2.5
…SD 8
…SD 18
…SE 10 or or or
…TC 10
…TC 20
…SC 18
…DA 20
…DC 20 ISO VG 46 41 - 51 Synthetic oil
2.25 ISO VG 68 61 – 75 0015-0020-010
…SC 20
…SE 20 ISO VG 100 90 - 110 (1 litre)
…SE 30
…DA 40
…DC 40
…SC 25
…SC 40
…SD 20
3.7
…SD 25
…SD 35
…SE 40
…SE 50
…TC 40
* Designation according to DIN 51502

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17

at 40 °C (104 °F)
SD 50
...DA 80
Mineral oil
...DC 55
...SC 60 CLP 100 90 - 110 0015-0003-080
...SC 80 (2.5 litres)
...SD 50
…SD 60 5
...SD 70
...SE 60 ISO VG 46 41 - 51 Synthetic oil
...SE 70 ISO VG 68 61 – 75 0015-0020-010
...SE 80 ISO VG 100 90 - 110 (1 litre)
…TC 80
1.1.2 Separatos of category CLP 46 or ISO VG 46 / 68

at 40 °C (104 °F)
...SD 85 Mineral oil
...SC 110 CLP 46 41 - 51 0015-0001-080
...SD 110 (2.5 litres)
...SE 110
...SE 120 15
ISO VG 46 41 - 51 Synthetic oil
0015-0020-010
ISO VG 68 61 - 75 (1 litre)

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
1.2 Types of lube oil suggested by a number of firms
1.2.1 Lube oils of category CLP 100 or ISO VG 68
Viscosity at 40 °C (104 °F)

Manufacturer Designation
mm²/s (cSt)
Blasia 100 100
Degol BG 100 100
Use Castrol products for previous lubrication oils
Alpha EP 100
Alpha SP 100
CDX 30
Hyspin AWH 100 100

MHP 153
Optigear BM 100
Optigear EP 100
Meropa 100 95
Meropa XL 100 100
Preslia 100 100

Disola M 3015
110
Epona Z 100
Gulf Harmony 100 100
Hidraol HD 100 100
Mobilgear 600 XP 100 100

Gadinia Oil 30 104
Omala S2 G 100 100

Melina S30 104
Hydraway HMA 100 98
Loadway EP 100 95
Renolin CLP 100
Renolin CLP 100 Plus

100
Renolin CLP MR 30
Renolin B 100 HVI

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
1.2.2 Lube oils of category CLP 46

mm²/s (cSt)
Alpha EP 46
Alpha SP 46 46
Optigear BM 46
Klüberoil GEM 1-46 N 46
DTE 25
46
Shell Tellus S2 V 46 46
Alcor DD 46
46
RENOLIN CLP 46 Plus

46
RENOLIN ZAF B 46 HT
Rando HD 46 46

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
1.2.3 Synthetic oils

mm²/s (cSt)
Aircol SR 46 (VDL HC 46) 46
Aircol SR 68 (VDL HC 68)
Alphasyn HTX 68
(CLP HC 46) 68
Optigear Synthetic PD 68
(CLP HC 68)
Klübersynth GEM 4-46 N
46
(CLP HC 46)
68
(CLP HC 68)
100
(CLP HC 100)
Klüberbio EG 2-68
68
(CLPE 68, Bio)
Klüberbio EG 2-100
100
(CLPE 100, Bio)
SHC 625 46
SHC 626 68
SHC 627 100
SWEPCO 706 AWEP 46
Omala S4 GX 68 68
RENOLIN UNISYN OL 46
46
(VDL 46)
RENOLIN UNISYN OL 68
(VDL 68)
68
RENOLIN UNISYN
CLP 68
RENOLIN UNISYN
100
CLP 100
Cetus PAO 46 46
Cetus PAO 68 68
Cetus PAO 100 100

2058-3002-101 / 27.01.17
1.3 Notes on the lube oil table

Notes on the lube oil table apply for separators from
GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
For smooth operation of separators, it is essential to make the correct selection of
a suitable lubricating oil, as a good oil which meets the very stringent requirements
reduces wear to a minimum and thus increases the service life and operational re-
liability of the separator.
We recommend using the oils listed under "GEA Westfalia Separator Group" to lu-
bricate our separators, as these are under permanent quality control. We do not
perform such checks on the oils suggested by "selected companies".
GEA Westfalia Separator Group is unable to accept any warranty on performance.
Be sure to select only high grade solvent refined products.
The types of oil listed here meet the DIN requirements. Under unfavourable operat-
ing conditions, e.g. high temperatures, the performance of the oils may not be ade-
quate, meaning that higher-performance oils, e.g. synthetic oils, will have to be
used. You should therefore contact GEA Westfalia Separator Group if necessary.
We specify the viscosity ranges listed in the lube oil table for the individual types of
separator and oil.
o o
Separator operating temperature is generally above 80 C (176 F). Many oils age
very fast at such temperatures, making a premature change necessary.
It should also be noted that lube oils with a viscosity below those quoted in the lu-
bricating oil table should never be used. The lower bearing capacity of the lubricat-
ing film means that oils with too low a viscosity lead to mixed friction and increased
wear. On the other hand, it is permitted to exceed the specified viscosity range
slightly.
Please note that the viscosity classes SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Auto-
motive Engineers) cover large viscosity ranges. However, the lower limits quoted in
the table for the reduced viscosity ranges for the individual separator models
should not be undershot under any circumstances.

We live our values.
GEA Germany
Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Manual Geral de Instalação, Operação e

Manutenção de Motores Elétricos
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Manual of Electric Motors
Manual General de Instalación, Operación
y Mantenimiento de Motores Eléctricos
Installations-, Betriebs- und
Wartungsanleitung für Elektrische Motoren
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 167
57 Motores Elétricos
www.weg.net
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
g Smoke Extraction Motors;
g Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
g Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

g NBR 17094-1: máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: trifásicos
g NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: monofásicos
g IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance
g NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators
g CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators
g UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - General Requirements
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
Table of Contents
1. Terminology......................................................................................................... 61
2. Initial Recommendations................................................................................ 62
2.1. Warning Symbol.......................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. Receiving Inspection................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. Nameplates................................................................................................................................... 63
3. Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 66
4. Handling and Transport................................................................................ 67

4.1. Lifting............................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt....................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts...................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical motors . ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position................................................ 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position............................................... 70
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position..... 71
5. Storage.................................................................................................................. 73
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. Storage........................................................................................................................................... 73
5.3 Bearings.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings............................................................................................................ 74
ENGLISH
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. Installation.......................................................................................................... 78
6.1. Foundations.................................................................................................................................. 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. Balancing....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. Couplings....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. Leveling.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. Alignment....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors.............................. 85
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system...................................................................... 85
6.9. Electrical connection............................................................................................................ 85
Manual of Electric Motors 59

www.weg.net
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices....................................................... 88

6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)................................................................. 89
6.12. Connection of the space heaters..................................................................................... 91
6.13. Starting Methods..................................................................................................................... 92
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter........................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter.................................................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire....................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils................................................................................................ 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation.................................................................................................................. 94
6.14.3. Switching frequency.............................................................................................................. 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation................................................................................................ 94
7. Commissioning..................................................................................................... 95
7.1. Initial Start-up ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. Operating conditions .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration .................................................................................................................... 98
8. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 99
8.1. General Inspection.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. Lubrication................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 102
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting................................................................................................... 102
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases.............................. 102
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 103
ENGLISH
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings................................................................................................. 103

8.2.4. Sleeve bearings..................................................................................................................... 103
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly.................................................................................... 104
8.3.1. Terminal box........................................................................................................................... 105
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation............................................................................ 105
8.5. Spare parts................................................................................................................................. 106
9. Environmental Information........................................................................ 107

9.1. Packaging..................................................................................................................................... 107
9.2. Product........................................................................................................................................ 107
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions.................................................... 108
11. Warranty Term................................................................................................ 109
12. Ec declaration of conformity.................................................................110

www.weg.net
1. Terminology
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

g Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
g Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. Initial Recommendations
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50006742 / 50021973 brake motor manual
available on the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. Warning Symbol
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. Receiving Inspection

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
g Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely.
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. Nameplates
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate.

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. Safety Instructions
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. Handling and Transport

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc.
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
4.1. Lifting
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt.
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

For horizontal motors fitted with only one eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-inclination during the lifting
process should not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
30° Max.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt.
www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g For motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader bar for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts.
g For HGF motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in relation to the
vertical axis.
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 - Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF motors
g For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader bar is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 - Use of a spreader bar for lifting.

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader bar is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 - Lifting of vertical mounted motors.
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF motors.
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, using the top mounted eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
Figure 4.9 - Removing the motor from the packaging.

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 - Installation of the second pair of eyebolts.
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 - End result: motor placed in vertical position.
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF motors in the vertical position

HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. The HGF motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an HGF motor in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 - Lifting HGF motor with two hoists.

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13.
Figure 4.13 - Placing HGF motor in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end.
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 - HGF motor in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 - Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 - Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully.
Figure 4.18 - Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 - Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. Storage
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. Exposed machined Surfaces

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. Storage
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 - Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging Type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging.
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2).
Figure 5.1 - Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 - Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4).
Figure 5.3 - Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 - Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 - Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 Bearings
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to Item 8.2
before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be
replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according to
Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors that are transported in horizontal position is removed to prevent oils
leaks during the transport. These motors must be stored in vertical position after receiving and the bearing
must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 - Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml) Bearing Size Amount of Oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period of over six months, the bearings must be relubricated according to the Item
8.2 before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE
We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000V 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 - Correction Factor for the Insulation Resistance corrected to 40 °C

ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values
indicated in Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor
should be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair
(This service is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying
process, see section 8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. Installation
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
a. Rolling bearings: oxidized bearings must be replaced. If no oxidation is detected, lubricate the bearings as
described in Item 8.2. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must be replaced
before starting the motor.
b. Sleeve bearing: if sleeve bearing motors are stored longer than the recommended oil change interval, the
oil must be changed before machine starting. Don’t forget to remove the dehumidifiers when you drain the
oil from the motor and to fill it again with new oil before starting the machine. For more details, see item
8.2.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry.
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10.
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance
between the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the
air inlet. Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
ENGLISH
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection
system (see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position.

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. Check the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load.
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids
or solids that may drop onto the motors.
c. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end up must be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water
penetration inside the motor.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
6.1. Foundations
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) T
he features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
ENGLISH
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

g Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
g Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally
used where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier
to assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation
type is the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive
pulley is placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other
rail must be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

ENGLISH
g shoulders and/or recesses;

g anchor bolts with loose plates;
g bolts cast in the concrete;
g leveling screws;
g positioning screws;
g steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 - Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with
suitable rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 - Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors.
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 - Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. Balancing
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report
6.4. Couplings
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings.
Whenever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
g
machine operation.
The maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot
g
be exceeded.
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial Clearance
Figure 6.9 - Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 - Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. Leveling
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine, level
only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. Alignment
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 - Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
84 Manual of Electric Motors Figure 6.11 - Alignment with dial gauge.

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. Connection of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
ENGLISH
Drain
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. Connection of the cooling water system

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. Electrical connection

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.

1 2 3
1
1
1 22
2 33 3
1 2 3
Type of 111 222 333
Configuration Quantity of Leads Connection
L1 1
L1 L2
L1
L2 2 diagram
L2 L3L33
L3 LL
L
connection L1
L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
L3
L
L
L
L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L3
L3 3 L1
L
L1 L2 L3
3 - 66 44 55
66 44 55 6 66 44
6 4L1 55 L2 6 L3 4 55 6 4L
6
6 4 4 5 5 6 4
6 4 5
4 5 6
6 4 4
666
11 422 5334 4 5 6 611 4422 5533 666
11 4422
4
116 224 335 1 16 224 335 116 224
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1
1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2
1
1L1
L1 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1L1
L1
1 L2 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1
1L1
L1 222
L2
L2
6 Δ-Y
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2
L2 2 L333 L1
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L333
L3
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2 L2 2
L16 L2
L1 L2 4 L3 L3 5 L1 L1 L2 6 L2 L3 4 L3 5 L16 L2
L1 L2 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 55 66 4 5 6 44 55
4 5 6 L144 4 L2 55 5L3 66 6 4 5
4L1 L2
4
7
4 5 L36
5
8
5 6
9
6 4
7
4 5
8
5 6
9 4L1 L2
4
7
5
5
8
44777 5588 8 6699 9 44777 5588 8 666 99
9 4
44777 558 58
8
1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825
771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822 9933 771 1 8822
YY - Y L1
L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L333
39 L1
3 L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L3
33
39
3 L1L1
L1
1 L2
1117 L2 L2
L2
2
2228
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2
L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 L1 1 L2 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2
L17 L28 L39 L17 L28 L39 L17 L28
9 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 5 66 4 5 6 44 5
L1 44 L25 5 L3 6 L144 4 L25 5 L36 6 L1 4 L25 5
47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6 47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6
4
47 5
7 58
8
ΔΔ - Δ 447 7 58 5 8 69 6 9 4 477 58 5 8 69 6 9 44477 58 5 5 8
Single Speed 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
9336 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
93
36 777
1
71
14 88 2
8225
L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28
L1L1
L1
1 1 L2
L2
L22 2 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2 L2
L2
22 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L2
2 2
L1 1
L1 1 L2 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 22
L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5
11 12 10 L1 11 L2 12L39 10 L1
11 7 12 L210 L39 11 12 10 11 12 10 L1 11 L2
11 12
11
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 12
11 12 10
12 10
10 1111
11 12 12810
12 10 11
10 11 12
11 12 10 10 11 12
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 11
11 1
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 5
11
11 2
5 12 6
12
126 10 34
10
104 5
11
11 1
5 12 6
12
12 6 10 2 4
10
4 311
10 55 12
11
11 66 10
12
12 44
10
10
11
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 55 2 1
11
11 6
1
1
115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11
115 5 126 6 4
10 4 11115 5 126 6 4
104 115 5 12 6
12 6 10 4
104 115
115 6
12 6 4
104 11115 5 12
16
5
88 6
5811669999124444
77 L1 5
8L2
8 6
9
5811669912449 L3 4
77 L15
8 8 6
9
581166991244 9L2 4
77 L3 5
88 6
9 9
581166991244 4
77 5
88 6
99
581166991244 4
77 L1 5
8L2
8
5811669 69
ΔΔ - YY - Δ - Y 558 7710 558 47 710 558 47710 558 47710 558 710 558
2
82
8
88225
63
993
93
936 1
71
714 882
2
8
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
71
14 8
882
2
8 2
5
2
63
993
9
9 3
36 1
7
714
1 882
2
8
82
25
63
9
9
993 3
6
3 1
7
71
14
2
888
225 969
82 336 747
93 1
71
714 888
225 969
82 3
9
L2
L22
2 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L3 3
3 L1771
L1 1 L2L2 22 L3
L3 3
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L2 2
2 L3
L33
3
771
L1
L11 L2
L22 L3
2 93
L3 3 L1
3 71
L117 L2 L2
2
22 L3 L3933
L2
2
L2 8
211L3 L3
3312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 312L19 L1
1 1 7
110 L2 L2
2 8
211L3 L3
3 9
312L1 L1
1 1
1107 L2
2
L2 8
211L3L3
3
312L19 L1
1 1
110 L2 L2
2 211 8 L3 333
L3
L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 2 L3L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1 L2
L252L3 L3
L363L1 L1
L141 L2 L2
L252L3 L3
L3
L2
L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 9 L1
8 PART-WINDING 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 L17 L2
9WYE-DELTA 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7
PART-WINDIN L2 8 L
PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
12 PART-WINDING
2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDING 2 3 1 2 3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
1
WYE-DELTA 2 3 1 2 PART-WINDIN
3 1
PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
2
L2STARTPART-WINDING
PART-WINDING
L3 L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2START L3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 PART-WINDING
PARTIDAPART-WINDING
L3 L1 OPERA
L2 L3
PART-WINDING
START
START RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTARUN RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA PART-WINDIN OPER
OPER
START
START PART-WINDING RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTA RUN
RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA OPERA
OPERA
12START
12
START 1010 11 1111 1212RUNRUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
START
12 10
START 1010 11 11
11 12 12
12 RUN
RUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
PARTIDA
12
PARTIDA 1010 1111 OPERA
OPERA 12
12 11
Δ - PWS 1212
START 1010 11 1212 RUN 10
10 11 12
START
12 10 11 12 RUN1010 11 PARTIDA
1212 1010 1111 OPERA 12
12 1 1
12
77 10
12 10
START88 11
10 11
99
11 12
77 10
12 10
RUN88 11
10 11
99
11 12
12 START
66 10 10
1044 11 11
55 12
11 12
66 10
12 10
RUN
44 11
10 11
55
11 12
12 10
7PARTIDA
88
10 11
99
11 OPER12
77 10
12 18
1
12
127 10 PART-WINDING
8 11 9 12
127 7 10 88 119 9 12
12 66 104 4 11
55
WYE-DELTA 12
6 6 10
44 11
55 12
127
7 1010 PART-WINDIN
8 1111 9 12
127 7 18 8
8
Part-winding start 7
6
712 84
6
76
8
4
8 10 95 9
5
9511 776 6
7 12884
6 4
8410995 5
9 11 667
5 6
7712 448 4
8 10559
8 5
911 667
9 6
7 12448
7 4
8810559 5
911
9
7
6
712 84
6
8
4
8 10 95
4
9
5
9511 776 6
7612884 4
8 4
776
6
1 884
4
2
4 995
5
3 76
6
1 844
2 95
5
3 671 482 59
3 67
1 48
2 59
3 777
6
6
1
6 884
4
PARTIDA
2 995
5
3 OPER766
1 844
2
61 START 2 53 17 44RUN 28 55 39 7 START
16 88 8 24 99 935 77 7 16 88 8
RUN
24 99 935 17 44 28 53 53 17 42 42
66117 444 2 28 553 39 6661 1 42 2 53 3 77711 82 2 933 71 1 822 933 61
661 42 2 5339 66161
422
L1112
1 L2
6 2L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
311
5 L1 1
1126 L2 L2 2
210 L3
4 3L33
3115 L1 1
1127 22 L22210 L3
8 33 3
311
9 1L1 L11
112 2
L2
210 L33
311 L1112
1 L2
6 2L22
210 L3
4 3L3311
5 L1 11126 L L2 21
L1
11
L1
L1 L2 L3
2 L3
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L2 L3 L3
3 L1
11
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 17 22
L1 L2
L2 8 33 L3
L3 9 L1
11
L1 L2 L3
2 L3 L1
3 L1
1L1
1 22 L
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L393 L1
82 L3 L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93
L1
L161 L2
L1 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L3 53 L1
L1
L161 L2 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L353 L1
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93 L1 L171 L2 L2
L2 8
L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664 L3L35 L1 L1 L2 L244L3 L3 55 L1 L166 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664
L1 L2 L34 4 5
L1 6 6
L2 L3 7
L1 L2 8 4 9 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 L6
4 5 5 6 44 L35 5 6 6L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L34 4 5 L1 6
5 6
1 2 3444 11 555 21 666 32 3 1 4424 11 3555 2 666 31 2 3 1 2 3444 11 522 6332
5 5 1 6 6
14 22 25 33 36 14 22 25 33 36 1 225 33
YY - Y L1 L2 L31 1 L1
2 L2
3 L3 L1 L2 11 L3 2 L1
3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L31 14 L1 2 L3
111 222 333 111 222 333 111 222 333
ENGLISH
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L11 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
1 ROTAÇROTAÇ
ROTA
L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 HIGH44 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4L1
411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633 4L14
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 55522 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH 1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1
4 L25 L3L2 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOWLOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3
L33
L11 2SPEED 3 HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
2 3 MENOR ROTA 2
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L3
66 HIGH
HIGH L144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L144 ROTAÇ L2
ROTA 55 L6
Double Speed LOW
LOW44 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
4LOW
4 5 SPEED
5 6
6 HIGH 4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
5 6
5 66
Dahlander 441 L2
L1 552 6 L3633 4 411 L2
L1 552 6L3 633 441 L2
L1 552 6 63
1 1
14 225 336 2 114 225 3362 11
14 22 25 L3
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 ROTA 2 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 1
11 22 33 2
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L22 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1 41 L2 L25 L L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1 LOW
LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA
ROTA L3L3
LOW
L11 L2 2SPEED L33 HIGH L1 1 L2 SPEED
2 L3 3 MENOR L1 ROTA 2
LOW
LOW
LOW SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH
SPEED
SPEED
SPEED MENORROTAÇ
MENOR ROTAL
L2
MENOR
7 88 ROTAÇ 99
77 8LOW 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 7 8
MENOR
7 8 ROTA 9
7 7 88 9 9 SPEED 77 8 8 99 SPEED
77 88 99 77
11 882L18 9
93 L
3
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 822 2 99 L29 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 1 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 11
447 22
11MENOR
4 5
2
58 3ROTA
5 36
3
3669
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 25 52 6 63
41
4 552 66 5 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 5
55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 8 L3 L39
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
L1
L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3 6
L25L3 L3
L3 L1 7
L14 L2
L1 L2
L1 L25 L3
L2 L3
8 L3
L3
L36
9 L1
L1
ONLY
7
L14 L2 L2
L25L3
L2FOR
L3
L3
L3 6
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR L3 6
L3
L1 1 L2L2 L3 L1 L2 ONLY
L1 L2 FOR
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
MENOR
L2
MENOR 2L3 L3 3
LOW
LOWL1
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L3 3 HIGH
HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
L1 L2
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED
4 SPEED L3 6
HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
L2
SPEED
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING
STARTING
ONLY L2FOR
FOR
5 L36
FOR
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR 5 L36
LOW
LOW
5 HIGH4SPEED 5 6 ONLY 4 FOR
STARTING
STARTING ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 2
2 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 2 L3
Double Speed L1 L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
L2ROTA
ROTA
L3
L3
L3
Double Winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 1 ROTA
L2
L2 ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROT
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single Speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double Speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double Winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.7
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.13) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.
Clearance distance
Clearance distance
ENGLISH
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Figure 6.13 - Clearance distance representation

Table 6.3 - Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage.
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.

www.weg.net
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Unused cable inlet holes in the terminal box must be properly closed to ensure the degree of protection
indicated on the motor nameplate.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-
glands and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase motor,
check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.10. Connection of the thermal protection devices

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic
thermal protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as
specified on the accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product
warranty and cause serious material damages.
ENGLISH
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100)
according to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.14 and Figure 6.15 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.14 - Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
Figure 6.15 - Thermistor connection

www.weg.net
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections
Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.
6.11. Resistance Temperature Detectors (Pt-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.16 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017
-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
ENGLISH
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204

-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net
Figure 6.16 - Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. Connection of the space heaters

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 - Dual voltage space heater connection.
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. Starting Methods

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads.
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Series/Parallel
Part Winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-Starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part Winding
Autotransformer
Soft-Starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage Starting parallel switch Starting soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. Motors driven by Frequency Inverter
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

g That the motor must be operated at constant output;
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
g Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
g max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
g mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter 1
Inverter MTBP 3
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 2 Rise Time 3 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom ≤ 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 < Vnom ≤ 575 V ≤ 1800 V ≤ 6500 V/µs
≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 4 ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
575 < Vnom ≤ 690 V 5 ≤ 2200 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of motors with round enameled wires designed for 690 < Vnom ≤ 1100 V, please contact WEG.
2. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
3. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
4. When not stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
5. When stated in the Purchase Order that the motor will be driven by frequency inverter.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/µs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing.
If motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 - Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355
NEMA 445/7, 447/9, L447/9, 504/5, 5006/7/8, 5009/10/11, 586/7, g Insulated bearing/end shield
5807/8/9, 5810/11/12 and 588/9 g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger g Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2.5 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 - Maximum motor speed (in rpm).

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 3600
6315 3600
6316 3200
6319 3000
6220 3600
225-630 364/5-9610
6320 2200
6322 1900
6324 1800
6328 1800
6330 1800
Note:
to select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical Guidelines
for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. Commissioning
7.1. Initial Start-up
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
g
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements.

g If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly.
If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
g
in Table 6.10.
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4.
g Check the motor rotation direction.
Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
g
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
g
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9.
Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
g
forced cooling system, etc.).

Check bearing operating conditions. If signs of oxidation are detected, replace the bearings. If no sign of
g
oxidation is detected, relubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. If the motors are stored for more than
two years, the bearings must be replaced before starting the motor.
g When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:

g correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 6.8);
g that the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
that if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
g
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics.
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
L
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
560 8806/10 185 7.28

630 9606/10 200 7.87
g nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2.
e
g ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g Start the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions.
g Ensure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again.
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1.
g Start the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate.
g Continue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels.
g Record the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
two successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
g
the second start immediately after the motor stops.

one start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
g
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions
www.weg.net
7.2. Operating conditions

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20 °C to +40 °C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature.
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second).
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 14 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 10 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 20 12 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 22 18 12
315 to 355 445/7 to 588/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
variation in voltage and frequency:

g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency.
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed
temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water

IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
ENGLISH
the failure of the oil pumping system.
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration Grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1-T he values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3-T he values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc.

www.weg.net
8. Maintenance
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. General Inspection
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g V
isually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required.
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4.
g C
lean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient.
g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor.
g Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required.
ENGLISH
g D
rain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6).
g C
heck the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3.
g C
heck if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.7.
g C
heck the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required.
g C
heck the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time.
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. Lubrication
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3 and Table 8.4 consider an absolute
temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA 324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC
225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor mounted in horizontal position and
greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC

Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 18100 15700 22000 20000
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 13700 11500 17000 14000
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 11900 9800 15000 12000
4
ENGLISH
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000

6 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
8 19700 17300 24000 20000
364/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon

2 14000 3500 4000
404/5 request request request
444/5 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
225 445/7
6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
250 447/9
280 L447/9 8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5
*Upon *Upon *Upon
355 5008 2 9600 2400 3000
request request request
5010/11
586/7 4 6319 45 9000 7000 11000 8000
588/9 6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

LUBRICATION INTERVALS (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50Hz 60Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting

ENGLISH
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Motors with grease fittings must be stopped to be lubricated. Proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Lift grease inlet protection;

g
Remove the grease outlet plug;

g
Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
g
1 (one) minute at rated speed;

Switch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
g
Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
g

To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Pump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;

g
Lower again the grease inlet protection.

g
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases

The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil thus being compatible with greases
that contain:
Lithium based thickener, lithium-based complex thickener, polyurea thickener and refined mineral oil;
g
The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
g
In general terms, greases with the same type of soap are compatible to each other. However, depending on the
proportion of the mixture there may be incompatibility. In such a case, it is not recommended to mix different
types of greases without contacting the supplier or WEG beforehand.
www.weg.net
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
g s
witch-off the motor;
g r
emove threaded oil drain plug;
g o
pen the valve and drain the oil;
g c
lose the drain vale again;
g r
einstall the threaded oil drain plug;
g fi
ll-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
g c
heck oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
glass;
g r
einstall oil inlet plug;
g c
heck for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.5 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.5 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - High axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e ISO VG150
4-8 29320 26
ENGLISH
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 SHC 629 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown
in Figure 6.12.
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.6. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
g N
DE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
g D
rain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.1);
g C
lose the oil drain hole;
g R
emove the oil inlet plug;
g F
ill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
g C
heck the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
g I
nstall the oil inlet plug;
g C
heck for oil leaks. Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.1 - Sleeve bearing Manual of Electric Motors 103

www.weg.net
Table 8.6 - Oil properties for sleeve bearings.
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) Specification
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T ISO VG32
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin
2 9-80 2.8 8000 antifoam and
DTA 10
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T additives
450 7006/10
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
9-90
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
2.8 ISO VG46
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
9-100 mineral oil with
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T
4-8 8000 Renolin DTA 15 antifoam and
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and
11-110 antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
4.7 additives
450 7006/10
11-125
500 8006/10
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. Motor assembly and disassembly
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
ENGLISH
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected
from the power supply and is completely stopped.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc.
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
g E
nsure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
inside the terminal box.
g I
f the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt.
g I
f motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
specified in Table 8.7.
g E
nsure that the cables do not contact sharp edges.
g E
nsure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country.
g E
nsure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection.
g E
nsure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.7.
Table 8.7 - Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 4 to 7 7 to 12 16 to 30 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 230 to 360
(without seal)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - -
(without seal)
(with seal with metallic - - - 13 to 20 25 to 37 40 to 55 50 to 65 -
stop/cord)
Combined slotted screw
(with flat seal 'and/or - 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - -
ENGLISH
mettallic stop/cord)
- - - 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 35 to 50 -
(with flat seal)
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 1,5 to 4 3 to 6,5 6 to 9 10 to 18 15,5 to 30 30 to 50 -
Grounding terminals - 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 30 to 50 55 to 85 120 to 180 -
8.4. Drying the stator winding insulation

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. Spare parts

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position without
placing other components onto them.
ENGLISH
Figure 8.2 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. Environmental Information
9.1. Packaging
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. Product
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. Troubleshooting chart x solutions

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted.
power supply cables.
Blown fuses. Replace blown fuses.
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection.
connection diagram.
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor.
freely.
Load toque is too high during start-up. Do not start the motor on load.
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed. Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine. and the alignment.
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base.
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal / excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design
ENGLISH
Damaged bearings Replace the bearings

Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease / oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease / oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease / oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease / oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

www.weg.net
11. Warranty Term

WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A, Motor Unit, offers warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for
their products for a period of 18 months from the invoice issue date by factory or distributor / dealer, limited to
24 months from date of manufacture. Motors of the HGF Line are covered for a period of 12 months from the
invoice issue date by the factory or distributor / dealer, limited to 18 months from the date of manufacture.
The paragraph above contains the legal warranty periods. If a warranty period is defined in a different way in
the commercial, technical proposal of a particular sale, that will override the time limits set out above.
The periods above are independent of installation date and provided that the following requirements are met:
proper transportation, handling and storage; correct installation in specified environmental conditions free of
aggressive agents; operation within the capacity limits and observation of the Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual; execution of regular preventive maintenance; execution of repairs and/or changes only by
personnel with WEG‘s written authorization; in the occurrence of an anomaly, the product must be available to
the supplier for the minimum period necessary to identify the cause of the anomaly and to repair it properly; the
buyer must immediately notify WEG of any defects occurred and they must be later confirmed as
manufacturing defects by WEG. The warranty does not include assembly and disassembly services at the
buyer’s premises, costs of product transportation, as well as travel, lodging and meals expenses for the
technical assistance staff when requested by the customer. The warranty service will be provided exclusively at
a WEG authorized Technical Assistance or at the plant.
Components, parts and materials whose useful life is usually less than 12 (twelve) months are not covered by
the warranty.
Under no circumstance will warranty services extend the warranty period of the equipment. However, new
warranty equivalent to the original one will be due only to the components repaired or replaced by WEG.
The present warranty is limited to the product supplied. WEG will not be liable for damages to people, third
parties, other equipment and facilities, loss of profits or other incidental or consequential damages.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
12. Ec declaration of conformity
WEG Equipamentos Elétricos S/A

Av. Prefeito Waldemar Grubba, 3000
89256-900 - Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil,
and its authorised representative established in the European Community,

WEGeuro - Industria Electrica SA
Rua Eng Frederico Ulrich, Apartado 6074
4476-908 - Maia - Porto - Portugal
hereby declare that the products:
WEG induction motors and components for using in these motors:
Three-phase
IEC frames 63 to 630
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 9610
……………
Single-phase
IEC frames 63 to 132
Nema frames 42, 48, 56 and 143 to 215
……………
when installed, maintained and used in applications for which they were designed, and in compliance with the relevant
installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions, comply with the requirements of the following European Directives
ENGLISH
and standards where applicable:
Directives:
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Regulation (EC) No 640/2009
Directive 2009/125/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (induction motors are considered inherently benign in terms of electromagnetic compatibility)
Standards:
EN 60034-1/2-1/5/6/7/8/9/11/12/14/30 and 60204-1
From 29/12/2009 on low voltage electric motors are no longer considered under the scope of the current Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC.
CE marking in: 1996
Milton Oscar Castella

Engineering Director
Jaraguá do Sul, May 31st, 2011

WEG Worldwide Operations
ARGENTINA COLOMBIA MEXICO SINGAPORE
WEG EQUIPAMIENTOS WEG COLOMBIA WEG MEXICO WEG SINGAPORE
ELECTRICOS Bogotá Huehuetoca Singapore
San Francisco - Cordoba Phone: +57 1 416 0166 Phone: +52 55 5321 4231 Phone: +65 68589081
Phone: +54 3564 421 484 info-co@weg.net info-mx@weg.net info-sg@weg.net
info-ar@weg.net www.weg.net/co www.weg.net/mx www.weg.net/sg
www.weg.net/ar
FRANCE VOLTRAN - WEG Group SCANDINAVIA
WEG PINTURAS - Pulverlux WEG FRANCE Tizayuca - Hidalgo WEG SCANDINAVIA
Buenos Aires Saint Quentin Fallavier - Lyon Phone: +52 77 5350 9354 Kungsbacka - Sweden
Phone: +54 11 4299 8000 Phone: +33 4 74 99 11 35 www.voltran.com.mx Phone: +46 300 73 400
tintas@weg.net info-fr@weg.net info-se@weg.net
www.weg.net/fr NETHERLANDS www.weg.net/se
AUSTRALIA WEG NETHERLANDS
WEG AUSTRALIA GERMANY Oldenzaal - Overijssel UK
Victoria WEG GERMANY Phone: +31 541 571 080 WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS U.K.
Phone: +61 3 9765 4600 Kerpen - North Rhine Westphalia info-nl@weg.net Worcestershire - England
info-au@weg.net Phone: +49 2237 9291 0 www.weg.net/nl Phone: +44 1527 513 800
www.weg.net/au info-de@weg.net info-uk@weg.net
www.weg.net/de PERU www.weg.net/uk
AUSTRIA WEG PERU
WATT DRIVE - WEG Group GHANA Lima UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Markt Piesting - Viena ZEST ELECTRIC GHANA Phone: +51 1 472 3204 WEG MIDDLE EAST
Phone: +43 2633 404 0 WEG Group info-pe@weg.net Dubai
watt@wattdrive.com Accra www.weg.net/pe Phone: +971 4 813 0800
www.wattdrive.com Phone: +233 30 27 664 90 info-ae@weg.net
info@zestghana.com.gh PORTUGAL www.weg.net/ae
BELGIUM www.zestghana.com.gh WEG EURO
WEG BENELUX Maia - Porto USA
Nivelles - Belgium INDIA Phone: +351 22 9477705 WEG ELECTRIC
Phone: +32 67 88 84 20 WEG Electric India info-pt@weg.net Duluth - Georgia
info-be@weg.net Bangalore - Karnataka www.weg.net/pt Phone: +1 678 249 2000
www.weg.net/be Phone: +91 80 4128 2007 info-us@weg.net
info-in@weg.net RUSSIA and CIS www.weg.net/us
BRAZIL www.weg.net/in WEG ELECTRIC CIS
WEG EQUIPAMENTOS ELÉTRICOS Saint Petersburg ELECTRIC MACHINERY
Jaraguá do Sul - Santa Catarina WEG INDUSTRIES INDIA Phone: +7 812 363 2172 WEG Group
Phone: +55 47 3276-4002 Hosur - Tamil Nadu info-ru@weg.net Minneapolis - Minnesota
info-br@weg.net Phone: +91 4344 301 501 www.weg.net/ru Phone: +1 612 378 8000
www.weg.net/br info-in@weg.net www.electricmachinery.com
www.weg.net/in SOUTH AFRICA
CHILE ZEST ELECTRIC MOTORS VENEZUELA
WEG CHILE ITALY WEG Group WEG INDUSTRIAS VENEZUELA
Santiago WEG ITALIA Johannesburg Valencia - Carabobo
Phone: +56 2 784 8900 Cinisello Balsamo - Milano Phone: +27 11 723 6000 Phone: +58 241 821 0582
info-cl@weg.net Phone: +39 02 6129 3535 info@zest.co.za info-ve@weg.net
www.weg.net/cl info-it@weg.net www.zest.co.za www.weg.net/ve
www.weg.net/it
CHINA SPAIN
WEG NANTONG JAPAN WEG IBERIA
Nantong - Jiangsu WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS Madrid
Phone: +86 0513 8598 9333 JAPAN Phone: +34 91 655 30 08
info-cn@weg.net Yokohama City - Kanagawa info-es@weg.net
www.weg.net/cn Phone: +81 45 550 3030 www.weg.net/es
info-jp@weg.net
www.weg.net/jp
The values shown are subject to change without prior notice.
For those countries where there is not a WEG own operation, find our local distributor at www.weg.net.
Cod: 50033244 | Rev: 05 | Date (m/y): 04/2013
Grupo WEG - Motors Business Unit

Jaraguá do Sul - SC - Brazil
Phone: +55 47 3276 4000
motores@weg.net
www.weg.net
ELECTRO ADDA SPA
COSTRUZIONI ELETTROMECCANICHE
ISTRUZIONI D’USO E
MANUTENZIONE
DEI MOTORI ASINCRONI
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MOTORS
BETRIEBS-UND
WARTUNGSANLEITUNG
FÜR ASYNCHRONMOTOREN
MODES D’EMPLOI
ET ENTRETIEN
POUR MOTEURS ASYNCHRONES
INSTRUCCIONES PARA
EMPLEO Y MANUTENCIÓN DE
LOS MOTORES ASÍNCRONOS
MACCHINE ELETTRICHE ROTANTI • ELECTRIC ROTARY
MACHINES • ROTIERENDE ELEKTRISCHE DREH-
MASCHINEN • MACHINES ÉLECTRIQUES TOURNANTES
• MAQUINAS ELÉCTRICAS ROTATORIAS
Motori asincroni trifasi con rotore a gabbia. Costruzione chiusa.
1 Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 56 ÷ 560. Potenze 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.

Asynchronous three-phase motors with squirrel cage rotor. Enclosed
construction. External ventilation. Sizes 56 to 560. Power 0,06 to 1000
kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit Käfigläufer. Geschlossene
Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 56 bis 560. Leistung 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec rotor à cage. Construction fermée.
Ventilation extérieure. Hauter d’axe 56 ÷ 560. Puissances 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos con rotor en jaula. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 56 ÷ 560. Potencias 0,06 ÷ 1000 kW.
ca
2 Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente alternata. Grandezze 63
÷ 200. Potenze 0,15 ÷ 37 kW.
Asynchronous three-phase brake motors. Enclosed construction.
External ventilation. With alternate current electromagnetic brake. Size
63 to 200. Power 0,15 to 37 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit angebauter Bremse. Geschlossene Ausführung.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Drehstrom-Federdruck-Scheibenbremse.
Baugrössen 63 bis 200. Leistung 0,15 bis 37 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant alternatif. Hauter d’axe 63 ÷ 200. Puissances 0,15 ÷ 37
kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos autofrenantes. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación exterior.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente alterna.Tamaños 63 ÷ 200. Potencias 0,15 ÷ 37
kW.
cc Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
2 esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua. Grandezze 63

÷ 160. Potenze 0,15 ÷ 15 kW.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake. Sizes 63
to 160. Power 0,15 to 15 kW.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse.
Baugrössen 63 bis 160. Leistung 0,15 bis 15 kW.
2 Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu. Hauteur d’axe 63 ÷ 160. Puissances
0,15 ÷ 15 kW.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua.Tamaños 63 ÷ 160. Potencias 0,15 ÷ 15
kW.
cch
2 Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa.
Ventilazione esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua
ad alta coppia. Grandezze 63 ÷ 112 – Potenze 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake with
high torque. Sizes 63 to 112 – Power 0.,5 to 5,5 kW.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse mit
höherem Bremsmoment. Baugrössen 63 bis 112 - Leistung 0,15 bis 5,5 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasées avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu avec couple élevé. Hauteur d’axe 63 ÷ 112 -
Puissances 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua con alta torsion. Tamaños 63 ÷ 112 -
Potencias 0,15 ÷ 5,5 kW.
ccl Motori asincroni trifasi autofrenanti. Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione
2 esterna. Con freno elettromagnetico in corrente continua ad alta coppia

e bassa rumorosità. Grandezze 63 ÷ 180 - Potenze 0,18 ÷ 25 kW.
External ventilation. With direct current electromagnetic brake with high
torque and low noise execution. Sizes 63 to 180 - Power 0,18 to 25 kW.
Oberflächenkühlung. Mit elektromagnetischer Gleichstrom-Einflächen-Scheibenbremse mit
höherem Bremsmoment und geräuscharmer Ausführung. Baugrössen 63 bis 180 - Leistung
0,18 bis 25 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec frein. Construction fermée. Ventilation extérieure.
Frein électromagnétique en courant continu avec couple élevé et bruit réduit. Hauteur d’axe
63 ÷ 180 - Puissances 0,18 ÷ 25 kW.
Con freno electromagnético en corriente continua con alta torsión y ruido reducido.
Tamaños 63 ÷ 180 - Potencias 0,18 ÷ 25 kW.
Motori asincroni monofasi con rotore a gabbia. Costruzione chiusa.

Ventilazione esterna. Grandezze 56 ÷ 112. Potenze 0,06 ÷ 4 kW.
3 Asynchronous single-phase motors with squirrel cage rotor.

Enclosed construction. External ventilation. Sizes 56 to 112 - Power
0,06 to 4 kW.
Einphasen-Wechselstrommotoren mit Käfigläufer. Geschlossene
Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Baugrössen 56 bis 112 - Leistung 0,06 bis 4 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones monophasés avec rotor à cage. Construction fermée. Ventilation
extérieure. Hauteur d’axe 56 ÷ 112 - Puissances 0,06 ÷ 4 kW.
Motores asíncronos monofásicos con rotor en jaula. Construcción cerrada. Ventilación
exterior. Tamaños 56 ÷ 112 - Potencias 0,06 ÷ 4 kW.
Motori asincroni trifasi con rotore a gabbia antideflagranti.
Costruzione chiusa. Ventilazione esterna. Serie PE-EEx d.
4 Grandezze 71 ÷ 200 - Potenze 0,37 ÷ 37 kW.

Explosion-proof asynchronous three-phase motors with squirrel
cage rotor. Enclosed construction. External ventilation. Series PE-
EEx d. Sizes 71 to 200 - Power 0,37 to 37 kW.
Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren mit Käfigläufer - Explosionsgeschützt, druckfeste
Kapselung. Geschlossene Ausführung. Oberflächenkühlung. Typenreihe PE-EEx d.
Baugrössen 71 bis 200 - Leistung 0,37 bis 37 kW.
Moteurs asynchrones triphasés avec rotor à cage antidéflagrants. Construction
fermée. Ventilation extérieure. Série PE-EEx d. Hauteur d’axe 71 ÷ 200 - Puissances 0,37 ÷
37 kW.
Motores asíncronos trifásicos con rotor en jaula antideflagrantes. Construcción
cerrada. Ventilación exterior. Serie PE-EEx d. Tamaños 71 ÷ 200 - Potencias 0,37 ÷ 37 kW.
Motori asincroni trifasi con r

Westfalia OSE HFO DO

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Westfalia OSE HFO DO

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

EDITION / AUSGABE - 11.04.2018

CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Santierul Naval Constanta

MODEL / MODELL: 2 x OSE 20-0136-067/18 for HFO-DO

engineering for a better world www.gea.com

Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

9 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY

9.2 3/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

9.3 SHUT OFF FLAP

9.4 SPRING SAFETY VALVE

9.5 BALL VALVE

9.6 SOLENOID VALVE

9.7 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

9.8 NON-RETURN VALVE

9.9 SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.

9.10 CONTROL VALVE

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

10.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

10.3 STEAM TRAP

10.4 PROXIMITY SENSOR

10.5 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

12.2 GEAR PUMP UNIT, COMPL.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Designation: Safety precautions

engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

For your safety

• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

• Follow the instructions in the manual.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

Be sure to adhere to the plant

Disconnect power prior to start-

Before carrying out work on the

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Frequency converter operation!

Warning of extreme surface

The surfaces of the plant components

Danger due to electrical current!

Before working on electrical com-

• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Potential equalisation (protec-

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.2 Performing work on a plant

The plant works reliably, provided that

Special attention must be given to:

1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

The operator of the plant

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

1.2.2 Spare part requirements